PUB.

(ENROUTE)

SAILING DIRECTIONS

★

★

2010

171

EAST AFRICA

AND THE 

SOUTH INDIAN OCEAN

Prepared and published by the

NATIONAL GEOSPATIAL-INTELLIGENCE AGENCY

Bethesda, Maryland

© COPYRIGHT 2010 BY THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT

NO COPYRIGHT CLAIMED UNDER TITLE 17 U.S.C.

TENTH EDITION
Pub. 171 III

Preface

0.0 Pub. 171, Sailing Directions (Enroute) East Africa and the

South Indian Ocean, Tenth Edition, 2010, is issued for use in

conjunction with Pub. 160, Sailing Directions (Planning

Guide) South Atlantic Ocean and Indian Ocean. The companion volumes are Pubs. 172, 173, 174, and 175.

0.0 Digital Nautical Chart 18 provides electronic chart coverage

for the area covered by this publication. 

0.0 This publication has been corrected to 27 March 2010, including Notice to Mariners No. 13 of 2010. Subsequent Publication Data Updates (PDUs) have corrected this publication to

22 January 2011, including Notice to Mariners 4 of 2011.

Explanatory Remarks

0.0 Sailing Directions are published by the National GeospatialIntelligence Agency (NGA), under the authority of Department

of Defense Directive 5105.40, dated 12 December 1988, and

pursuant to the authority contained in U. S. Code Title 10,

Sections 2791 and 2792 and Title 44, Section 1336. Sailing

Directions, covering the harbors, coasts, and waters of the

world, provide information that cannot be shown graphically

on nautical charts and is not readily available elsewhere.

0.0 Sailing Directions (Enroute) include detailed coastal and

port approach information which supplements the largest scale

chart produced by the National Geospatial-Intelligence

Agency. This publication is divided into geographic areas

called “Sectors.”

0.0 Bearings.—Bearings are true, and are expressed in degrees

from 000° (north) to 360°, measured clockwise. General

bearings are expressed by initial letters of points of the compass (e.g. N, NNE, NE, etc.). Adjective and adverb endings

have been discarded. Wherever precise bearings are intended

degrees are used.

0.0 Coastal Features.—It is assumed that the majority of ships

have radar. Available coastal descriptions and views, useful for

radar and visual piloting are included in geographic sequence

in each Sector.

0.0 Corrective Information.—Users should refer corrections,

additions, and comments to NGA’s Maritime Operations Desk,

as follows: 

0.0 1. Toll free: 1-800-362-6289

0.0 2. Commercial: 301-227-3147

0.0 3. DSN: 287-3147

0.0 4. DNC web site: http://www.nga.mil/portal/site/dnc

0.0 5. Maritime Divi0.0 sion web site: http://www.nga.mil/portal/site/mari

0.0 time

0.0 6. E-mail: navsafety@nga.mil

0.0 7. Mailing address: Maritime Division

0.0 National Geospatial-Intelligence

0.0 Agency

Mail Stop D-44

0.0 4600 Sangamore Road

0.0 Bethesda MD 20816-5003

0.0 New editions of Sailing Directions are corrected through the

date of the publication shown above. Important information to

amend material in the publication is available as a Publication

Digital Update (PDU) from the NGA Maritime Division website.

0.0NGA Maritime Division Website

http://www.nga.mil/portal/site/maritime

0.0

0.0 Courses.—Courses are true, and are expressed in the same

manner as bearings. The directives “steer” and “make good” a

course mean, without exception, to proceed from a point of

origin along a track having the identical meridianal angle as the

designated course. Vessels following the directives must allow

for every influence tending to cause deviation from such track,

and navigate so that the designated course is continuously

being made good.

0.0 Currents.—Current directions are the true directions toward

which currents set.

0.0 Dangers.—As a rule outer dangers are fully described, but

inner dangers which are well-charted are, for the most part,

omitted. Numerous offshore dangers, grouped together, are

mentioned only in general terms. Dangers adjacent to a coastal

passage or fairway are described.

0.0 Distances.—Distances are expressed in nautical miles of 1

minute of latitude. Distances of less than 1 mile are expressed

in meters, or tenths of miles.

0.0 Geographic Names.—Geographic names are generally

those used by the nation having sovereignty. Names in parentheses following another name are alternate names that may

appear on some charts. In general, alternate names are quoted

only in the principal description of the place. Diacritical marks,

such as accents, cedillas, and circumflexes, which are related to

specific letters in certain foreign languages, are not used in the

interest of typographical simplicity. Geographic names or their

spellings do not necessarily reflect recognition of the political

status of an area by the United States Government.

0.0 Heights.—Heights are referred to the plane of reference

used for that purpose on the charts and are expressed in meters.

0.0 Index-Gazetteer.—Navigational features and place-names

are listed alphabetically in the back of the book. The approximate position, along with the Sector and paragraph numbers

(e.g. 1.1), facilitate location in the text.

0.0 Internet Links.—This publication provides internet links to

web sites concerned with maritime navigational safety, including but not limited to, Federal government sites, foreign Hydrographic Offices, and foreign public/private port facilities.

NGA makes no claims, promises, or guarantees concerning the

accuracy, completeness, or adequacy of the contents of the web

sites and expressly disclaims any liability for errors and omissions of these web sites.

0.0 Light and Fog Signals.—Lights and fog signals are not described, and light sectors are not usually defined. The Light

Lists should be consulted for complete information.

0.0 Ports.—Directions for entering ports are depicted where

appropriate by means of chartlets, sketches, and photos, which

facilitate positive identification of landmarks and navigational

aids. These chartlets and sketches are not always to scale, however, and should be used only as a general informational guide

in conjunction with the best scale chart. Specific port facilities

are omitted from the standard format. They are tabulated in

Pub. 150, World Port Index.

0.0 Radio Navigational Aids.—Radio navigational aids are not

described in detail. Publication No. 117 Radio Navigational

Aids and NOAA Publication, Selected Worldwide Marine

Broadcasts, should be consulted.
IV Pub. 171

0.0 Soundings.—Soundings are referred to the datum of the

charts and are expressed in meters.

0.0 Special Warnings.—A Special Warning may be in force for

the geographic area covered by this publication. Special

Warnings are printed in the weekly Notice to Mariners upon

promulgation and are reprinted annually in Notice to Mariners

No. 1. A listing of Special Warnings currently in force is

printed in each weekly Notice to Mariners, Section III, Broadcast Warnings, along with the notice number of promulgation.

Special Warnings are also available on the Maritime Division

website.

0.0 Wind Directions.—Wind directions are the true directions

from which winds blow.

Reference List

0.0 The principal sources examined in the preparation of this

publication were:

0.0 British Hydrographic Department Sailing Directions.

0.0 French Sailing Directions.

0.0 South African Sailing Directions.

0.0 Various port handbooks.

0.0 Reports from United States Naval and merchant vessels and

various shipping companies.

0.0 Other U.S. Government publications, reports, and documents.

0.0 Charts, light lists, tide and current tables, and other documents in possession of the Agency.

0.0 Internet Web site:

0.0 Lighthouses of South Africa Home Page

0.0 http://www.lighthouses.co.za
Pub. 171 V

Contents

Preface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . III

Chartlet—Sector Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VII

Conversion Tables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VIII

Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XI

Sector 1

South Africa—The Cape of Good Hope to Cape Recife . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Sector 2

South Africa and Mozambique—Cape Recife to Ponta da Barra . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Sector 3

Mozambique—Baia de Inhambane to Cabo Delgado . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Sector 4

Tanzania—Cabo Delgado to Ras Kanzi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Sector 5

Tanzania—Ras Kanzi to Pangani Bay, including Zanzibar Island . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Sector 6

Kenya and Somalia—Pangani Bay to Qooriga Kismaayo, including Pemba . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Sector 7

Somalia—Qooriga Kismaayo to Raas Xaafuun . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Sector 8

West Indian Ocean—The Seychelles Islands to the Chagos Archipelago . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Sector 9

Islands and Banks North and East of Madagascar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Sector 10

Madagascar—East Coast—Tanjon’i Bobaomby to Tanjon’i Vohimena . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Sector 11

Madagascar—Northwest Coast—Tanjon’i Bobaomby to Cap Sainte-Andre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

Sector 12

Madagascar—West Coast—Cap Saint-Andre to Tanjon’i Vohimena . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

Sector 13

South Indian Ocean—The Prince Edward Islands, Iles Crozet, Iles Kerguelen, Ile Saint-Paul, and Ile Amsterdam . . . . . . . . . . 181

Glossaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

Index—Gazetteer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Pub. 171 VII

0.0SECTOR LIMITS — PUB. 171
VIII Pub. 171

Conversion Tables

 Feet to Meters

Feet 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

 0 0.00 0.30 0.61 0.91 1.22 1.52 1.83 2.13 2.44 2.74

 10 3.05 3.35 3.66 3.96 4.27 4.57 4.88 5.18 5.49 5.79

 20 6.10 6.40 6.71 7.01 7.32 7.62 7.92 8.23 8.53 8.84

 30 9.14 9.45 9.75 10.06 10.36 10.67 10.97 11.28 11.58 11.89

 40 12.19 12.50 12.80 13.11 13.41 13.72 14.02 14.33 14.63 14.93

 50 15.24 15.54 15.85 16.15 16.46 16.76 17.07 17.37 17.68 17.98

 60 18.29 18.59 18.90 19.20 19.51 19.81 20.12 20.42 20.73 21.03

 70 21.34 21.64 21.95 22.25 22.55 22.86 23.16 23.47 23.77 24.08

 80 24.38 24.69 24.99 25.30 25.60 25.91 26.21 26.52 26.82 27.13

 90 27.43 27.74 28.04 28.35 28.65 28.96 29.26 29.57 29.87 30.17

 Fathoms to Meters

Fathoms 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

 0 0.00 1.83 3.66 5.49 7.32 9.14 10.97 12.80 14.63 16.46

 10 18.29 20.12 21.95 23.77 25.60 27.43 29.26 31.09 32.92 34.75

 20 36.58 38.40 40.23 42.06 43.89 45.72 47.55 49.38 51.21 53.03

 30 54.86 56.69 58.52 60.35 62.18 64.01 65.84 67.67 69.49 71.32

 40 73.15 74.98 76.81 78.64 80.47 82.30 84.12 85.95 87.78 89.61

 50 91.44 93.27 95.10 96.93 98.75 100.58 102.41 104.24 106.07 107.90

 60 109.73 111.56 113.39 115.21 117.04 118.87 120.70 122.53 124.36 126.19

 70 128.02 129.85 131.67 133.50 135.33 137.16 138.99 140.82 142.65 144.47

 80 146.30 148.13 149.96 151.79 153.62 155.45 157.28 159.11 160.93 162.76

 90 164.59 166.42 168.25 170.08 171.91 173.74 175.56 177.39 179.22 181.05

 Meters to Feet

Meters 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

 0 0.00 3.28 6.56 9.84 13.12 16.40 19.68 22.97 26.25 29.53

 10 32.81 36.09 39.37 42.65 45.93 49.21 52.49 55.77 59.06 62.34

 20 65.62 68.90 72.18 75.46 78.74 82.02 85.30 88.58 91.86 95.14

 30 98.42 101.71 104.99 108.27 111.55 114.83 118.11 121.39 124.67 127.95

 40 131.23 134.51 137.80 141.08 144.36 147.64 150.92 154.20 157.48 160.76

 50 164.04 167.32 170.60 173.88 177.16 180.45 183.73 187.01 190.29 193.57

 60 196.85 200.13 203.41 206.69 209.97 213.25 216.54 219.82 223.10 226.38

 70 229.66 232.94 236.22 239.50 242.78 246.06 249.34 252.62 255.90 259.19

 80 262.47 265.75 269.03 272.31 275.59 278.87 282.15 285.43 288.71 291.99

 90 295.28 298.56 301.84 305.12 308.40 311.68 314.96 318.24 321.52 324.80

 Meters to Fathoms

Meters 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

 0 0.00 0.55 1.09 1.64 2.19 2.73 3.28 3.83 4.37 4.92

 10 5.47 6.01 6.56 7.11 7.66 8.20 8.75 9.30 9.84 10.39

 20 10.94 11.48 12.03 12.58 13.12 13.67 14.22 14.76 15.31 15.86

 30 16.40 16.95 17.50 18.04 18.59 19.14 19.68 20.23 20.78 21.33

 40 21.87 22.42 22.97 23.51 24.06 24.61 25.15 25.70 26.25 26.79

 50 27.34 27.89 28.43 28.98 29.53 30.07 30.62 31.17 31.71 32.26

 60 32.81 33.36 33.90 34.45 35.00 35.54 36.09 36.64 37.18 37.73

 70 38.28 38.82 39.37 39.92 40.46 41.01 41.56 42.10 42.65 43.20

 80 43.74 44.29 44.84 45.38 45.93 46.48 47.03 47.57 48.12 48.67

 90 49.21 49.76 50.31 50.85 51.40 51.95 52.49 53.04 53.59 54.13
Pub. 171 XI

Abbreviations

The following abbreviations may be used in the text:

Units

°C degree(s) Centigrade km kilometer(s)

cm centimeter(s) m meter(s)

cu.m. cubic meter(s) mb millibars

dwt deadweight tons MHz megahertz

FEU forty-foot equivalent units mm millimeter(s)

grt gross registered tons nrt net registered tons

kHz kilohertz TEU twenty-foot equivalent units

Directions

N north S south

NNE northnortheast SSW southsouthwest

NE northeast SW southwest

ENE eastnortheast WSW westsouthwest

E east W west

ESE eastsoutheast WNW westnorthwest

SE southeast NW northwest

SSE southsoutheast NNW northnorthwest

Vessel types

LASH Lighter Aboard Ship ro-ro Roll-on Roll-off

LNG Liquified Natural Gas ULCC Ultra Large Crude Carrier

LPG Liquified Petroleum Gas VLCC Very Large Crude Carrier

OBO Ore/Bulk/Oil

Time

ETA estimated time of arrival GMT Greenwich Mean Time

ETD estimated time of departure UTC Coordinated Universal Time

Water level

MSL mean sea level LWS low water springs

HW high water MHWN mean high water neaps

LW low water MHWS mean high water springs

MHW mean high water MLWN mean low water neaps

MLW mean low water MLWS mean low water springs

HWN high water neaps HAT highest astronomical tide

HWS high water springs LAT lowest astronomical tide

LWN low water neaps

Communications

D/F direction finder MF medium frequency

R/T radiotelephone HF high frequency

GMDSS Global Maritime Distress and Safety System VHF very high frequency

LF low frequency UHF ultra high frequency

Navigation

LANBY Large Automatic Navigation Buoy SPM Single Point Mooring

NAVSAT Navigation Satellite TSS Traffic Separation Scheme

ODAS Ocean Data Acquisition System VTC Vessel Traffic Center

SBM Single Buoy Mooring VTS Vessel Traffic Service

Miscellaneous

COLREGS Collision Regulations

IALA International Association of Lighthouse

Authorities

No./Nos.

PA

Number/Numbers

Position approximate

IHO International Hydrographic Office PD Position doubtful

IMO International Maritime Organization Pub. Publication

loa length overall St./Ste. Saint/Sainte
Pub. 171

1. South Africa—The Cape of Good Hope to Cape Recife

1.0Additional chart coverage may be found in NGA/DLIS Catalog of Maps, Charts, and Related Products (Unlimited Distribution).

SECTOR 1 — CHART INFORMATION
3

Pub. 171

SECTOR 1 

SOUTH AFRICA—THE CAPE OF GOOD HOPE TO CAPE RECIFE

1.0 Plan.—This sector describes the S coast of Africa from the 

Cape of Good Hope ESE to Cape Agulhas, a distance of about 

82 miles. From Cape Agulhas, the coast is described ENE to 

Cape Recife, a further 293 miles.

General Remarks 

1.1 Tides—Currents.—Throughout the year, the westflowing Equatorial Current in this area lying well S of the 

Equator, (unlike the corresponding flows in the Atlantic and 

Pacific), passes Cap d’Ambre, the N extremity of Madagascar, 

and meets the African coast in the region of Cabo Delgado. 

Here some of the water turns N, the rest flows down the coast 

in a S or SW direction, and is known as the Mozambique Current as far S as the Baia de Lourenco Marques. From there onwards, it is known as the Agulhas Current, which is somewhat 

reinforced by the South Equatorial Current flowing past Cap 

Sainte-Marie at the S end of Madagascar. The S side of the 

general circulation is formed by the Southern Ocean Current, 

which sets in NE and E directions.

1.1 Between 20°E and 32°E some of the Agulhas Current recurves SE and so passes into the N part of the Southern Ocean 

Current just mentioned. The bulk of the Agulhas Current, however, continues to follow the South African coastline and, passing over the Agulhas Bank, enters the Southern Atlantic 

Ocean, where it contributes to the flow of the Benguela Current 

of that ocean.

1.1 The Equatorial Current divides when it reaches the coast of 

Africa. The exact point at which this occurs varies from 10° to 

11°S, during the boreal (northern) to 9° to 10°S, during the 

austral (southern) summer. It is now necessary to study the current pattern to the N of this division.

1.1 As far as 2°S, the N flow is steady during the whole year. It 

is known as the East African Coast current. Thereafter a striking reversal takes place. From April to October, the flow N 

(following the coastline and becoming NE) is maintained as far 

N as Ras Asir (12°N) but in the months December to February, 

owing to monsoonal influence, this direction is completely reversed and the flow between Ras Hafun and a point about 2°S 

becomes roughly SW. The name Somali Current is used by 

oceanographers for that part of the coastal current that undergoes a seasonal reversal. When the Somali Current is S it turns 

E at 2°S and passes into the Northwest Equatorial Countercurrent. During the northern summer, the Northeast Somali Current curves away from the African coast near Ras Hafun and 

becomes virtually indistinguishable from the Equatorial Countercurrent. It should be noted that the reversal of the Somali 

Current tends to occur a month or so ahead of the change of direction of the monsoon wind.

Mozambique Current.—The island of Madagascar screens 

the channel from the direct W flow of the Equatorial Current, 

across the ocean. Currents in the channel are affected by the 

varying force of those flowing round either end of Madagascar 

as well as by many local conditions. The Mozambique Current, 

flows SW on the W side of the channel, forming the only well 

defined current in the channel. It extends also into Baia de Sofala, near the shore of which a NE countercurrent is however 

sometimes found. The great strength, variety, and general uncertainty of the current in all parts of the Mozambique Channel 

render it necessary for a vessel’s position to be constantly verified by observations.

1.1 The Mozambique Current is a fairly strong and constant current throughout the year, but attains its greatest strength and 

constancy from about October to February, the North Monsoon 

season, particularly between Cabo Delgado and Mozambique. 

No exact estimate can be formed of the width of this current. 

Off the more unbroken parts of the coastline, such as that N of 

Mozambique and also N of Cabo das Correntes(24°06'S., 

35°30'E.), it is probably 60 to 100 miles wide. The current 

flows across the mouth of the large Baia de Sofala, but also extends in width to fill a large part of this bight, probably to the 

180m curve.

1.1 Rates from 1 to 2 knots are frequent in the region of the 

Mozambique Current, at all times of year, and rates between 2 

and 3 knots are not uncommon. Rates exceeding 3 knots may 

also be experienced, except in May to July, when the current is 

weakest. Rates of 4 knots, from 90 to 107 miles per day, have 

occasionally been recorded during the period 1910 to 1934, in 

the months of September to December inclusive. On the other 

hand, the greatest rate recorded, during this time period, in the 

months of May to July, was 64 miles per day.

1.1 The predominant directions of set within the Mozambique 

Current are from S to SW inclusive, but sets in W, WSW, and 

SSE directions are also relatively frequent. Sets in all other directions, including those between N and NE, in direct opposition to the normal flow of current, may be experienced at 

times, either in the usual region of the Mozambique Current, or 

immediately to seaward of it. These variable and reverse sets 

may attain or exceed the rate of 1 knot.

1.1 Near the coast of Baia de Sofala, beginning almost as far S 

as Cabo das Correntes and extending N beyond Rio dos Bons 

Sinais(18°03'S., 36°59'E.), there is often a countercurrent setting NE and extending a considerable distance offshore, especially off Sofala, during the strength of the South Monsoon. 

There is little exact information about the frequency and rate of 

this countercurrent, which is probably weak and intermittent; 

however, a rate of 35 miles a day has been recorded in May. 

The prevailing wind appears to have a marked effect on the set 

of current within a few miles of the coast. Currents setting 

more or less directly on shore have been recorded in the neighborhood of Beira and elsewhere in the bight; these may attain 

or exceed the rate of 1 knot at times.

1.1 Observations of current off the W coast of Madagascar are 

scanty. Generally speaking, the extreme variability of direction 

of currents here was confirmed. Part of the Equatorial Current, 

flowing past Cap Sainte-Marie, turns N along the SW coast of 

Madagascar, but gradually weakens, and there is no evidence 

of a general N current up the W coast of the island. The current 
4 Sector 1. South Africa—The Cape of Good Hope to Cape Recife 

Pub. 171

is usually of no great strength; its direction appears to follow 

that of the wind, being sometimes N and sometimes S. Southerly currents up to a rate of 1.5 knots have been experienced. 

Off the W coast of the peninsula, of which Cap d’Ambre is the 

northern extremity, the combined current and tidal currents 

normally set N at rates up to 2.5 knots. This passes into the 

main part of the Equatorial Current setting W past Cap d’Ambre.

1.1 The Equatorial Current sets westward at an average rate of 

1.5 knots between Saint Lazarus Bank (12°12'S., 41°24'E.)

and Iles Comores. A little NW of this group, in December, it 

has been found setting nearly due W at a rate from 2 to 3 knots. 

Iles Comores lie on the southern boundary of the Equatorial 

Current, which flows past Ile Grande Comore (Comoro). The 

boundary being about 12°S, this W current is found N of Ile 

Anjouan (12°10'S., 44°29'E.). In the vicinity of Ile Mayotte 

(Mayotta), the current is variable. Between Ile Mayotte and Ile 

Anjouan, the current generally sets SW, but at times SE with 

considerable strength. About the S end of Ile Mayotte an E current is common. Currents in some E directions appear to predominate throughout most of the year S of Ile Comores to 

14°S, particularly SE of Ile Mayotte, between 45°E and the 

NW coast of Madagascar. This E current turns NE as it approaches this coast, and finally passes into, or forms a seaward 

extension of, the N current off the W coast of the Cap d’Ambre 

Peninsula, referred to above.

1.1 South, from 14°S until past the narrow part of the Mozambique Channel, no dependence can be placed on the direction 

or rate of the current: it may run 3 knots one way and at times 

as much another.

1.1 In the remaining part of the Mozambique Channel, S of 18°S 

and E of the Mozambique Current, the currents experienced are 

variable and may set in any direction, the majority at rates up to 

one knot, but occasionally attaining or exceeding 2 knots. Currents, with a N component predominate, however, in certain 

parts of the channel. A N set is thus often experienced immediately E of the Mozambique Current. In the S part of the channel the sea temperature may indicate the presence of this 

countercurrent. If below 20° it may be concluded that the vessel is certainly E of the S Mozambique Current.

1.1 In the middle of the channel, between 20° to 22°S, 38° to 

42°E, the predominant current is from N to NE throughout the 

year, the wind being generally S. Between May and August, 

the period of the greatest strength of the South Monsoon, a current apparently sets NW from the S extremity of Madagascar 

past Ile Europa (22°20'S., 40°26'E.), as far W as 40° E, and 

then turns N, but it should not be depended on. Near this island, in November, the current has been found setting NW at a 

rate from 2 to 2.5 knots, causing strong tide rips, but neither the 

rate nor direction of these currents may be the same for two 

consecutive days.

1.1 Agulhas Current—Delagoa Bay to 28°E.—This part of the 

Agulhas Current is stronger and more constant than that W of 

28°E. The directions of currents mainly experienced are, in order of frequency, SW, SSW and S, but occasional currents are 

met from any point of the compass. The axis of the strongest 

current is on or near the 180m curve.

1.1 The current is strongest during February to April, when 

about 16 per cent of all currents observed exceed the rate of 3 

knots. The corresponding proportions for the remainder of the 

year are, May to October, 9 per cent, November to January, 13 

per cent. The strongest currents observed are from 4 to 5 knots; 

most of these are recorded between 31.5°S and 33.5°S, at all 

times of the year, but least frequently in May to July. This short 

section of the current is therefore the strongest part of the 

whole course of the Agulhas Current.

1.1 As with all other great coastal currents of the world, it is not 

possible to define a seaward limit, since the preponderance of 

sets in or near the main direction of the current decreases gradually seaward. The following remarks give information regarding the strength of the current at various distances from the 

coast.

1.1 Observations indicated that the main body of the Agulhas 

Current was outside the edge of the 180m curve and that outside this edge, a 4 knot current was experienced. Inside the 

edge of the 180m curve, the current decreased gradually on approaching the coast. The strength of the current varied considerably with the wind.

1.1 Observations of the Agulhas Current, between Durban and 

34°S, in the months of February to April, resulted in the plotting of mid-positions of 71 observations of current made during the period 1910 to 1930.

1.1 Five drifts of 100 miles per day or more were all observed 

between 31°S and 33°S, within 12 to 16 miles from the coast; 

the two greatest were at the rate of 120 miles per day. Four out 

of six drifts of between 90 and 100 miles per day were either 

on the edge of the 180m curve or a few miles outside it; one 

was experienced about 32 miles from the coast. A drift of 96 

miles per day was observed about 3 miles from the coast, north 

of the entrance to the Saint John’s River, while two of 80 miles 

per day and one of 58 miles per day, were recorded still nearer 

the coast.The majority of weaker drifts, less than 2 knots, observed within 30 miles of the coast, were within the edge of the 

180m curve.

Inshore Countercurrents.—Between the main current and 

the coast, countercurrent flowing in a NE direction and following the trend of the coast, are experienced at times, especially 

at the entrance to the Great Fish River, East London, Cape 

Morgan to M’bashe Point(Bashee Point) (32°15'S., 28°55'E.), 

Port Saint John’s, Durban and the Aliwal Shoal, Port Durnford 

Point to O’Neill Peak, Zavora to Ponta da Barra, Ponta da Barra Falsa to Cabo Sao Sebastiao, and Mozambique. In general, 

these countercurrents are probably weak, though in places they 

have been observed to reach 1 or 1.5 knots, and they are influenced by the wind prevailing at the time. A strong countercurrent generally forecasts a strong SW wind.

1.1 Agulhas Current.—In the vicinity of 24°E, the Agulhas 

Current spreads out and weakens, the main part of it continues 

over the Agulhas Bank past Cape Agulhas and, entering the 

South Atlantic Ocean, passes into the Benguela Current of that 

ocean. The warm water of the Agulhas Current usually fills 

False Bay, but during long NW gales it is occasionally driven 

out and replaced by cooler water from the Atlantic Ocean setting E. Agulhas Current water seldom reaches Table Bay, the 

water of which is normally much cooler than that in False Bay.

1.1 Another part of the Agulhas Current sets SW, following the 

SE edge of the Agulhas Bank and this recurves, turning S and 

SE into the N part of the E Southern Ocean Current, about 

38°S. A similar recurvature takes place from the seaward edge 

of the Agulhas Current further N. The region of recurvature, 
Sector 1. South Africa—The Cape of Good Hope to Cape Recife 5

Pub. 171

therefore extends from 32°S to the SE side of the Agulhas 

Bank. This recurvature is not very constant, being subject to 

considerable variation. It is weakest in May to July when the 

flow of the Agulhas Current is weakest.

1.1 Not all the water flowing down the SE side of the Agulhas 

Bank recurves; some of it passes over the S part of the bank or 

round its S edge.

1.1 The current set is very vari.able in this region; while the predominant directions are between WNW and SSW, currents in 

any other direction may be met. The majority of currents does 

not exceed the rate of 2 knots, but occasional currents, in the 

predominant directions are stronger and may reach or exceed 3 

knots throughout the year. A current of 4 knots was observed in 

July, 1914, in position 36°04'S, 22°55'E. .

Near the coast, between Cape Hangklip and Cape Agulhas, 

the current occasionally sets in an ESE direction, or dangerously towards the land, with sometimes, a rate exceeding 1 knot. 

In this locality, many vessels have been lost through not allowing for this possible set.

1.1 Between Cape Agulhas and the entrance to the Kowie River, 

about 27°E, an inshore current setting E about the same rate is 

also frequently experienced in fine weather, and, except off the 

mouths of the rivers, it follows the trend of the coast, extending 

probably from 1 to 6 miles offshore. Off the coast, between the 

entrance to the Kowie River, and East London, from observations made during the period April to July, 1938, the countercurrent was found to be generally weak, and extended only a 

short distance from this part of the coast. Proceeding from East 

London to Cape Agulhas during strong W winds, no current 

was experienced at about 7 miles from the coast.

1.1 All reports agree that E of Cape Agulhas, there is often an indraft, which seems to be strongest between January and April, 

both months inclusive, and a large proportion of the wrecks 

which have occurred between Cape Agulhas and Cape Infanta 

have been attributed to it.

1.1 Although the S edge of the Agulhas Current has a tendency 

to set from the land, the N or inner edge has a tendency to set 

towards it. This is especially apparent W of Algoa Bay, where 

during and after SE, W, or NW gales, the current is at times deflected from its normal course and turned directly towards the 

land. This deflection forms a very dangerous element in the 

navigation of the S coast of Africa.

Southern Ocean Current.—The current which flows S of 

the Cape of Good Hope, from the South Atlantic Ocean across 

the South Indian Ocean, forms part of the Southern Ocean Current, which sets generally E round the globe. It is produced by 

the predominating W winds of the Roaring Forties, and its S 

limit lies on the average about 66°S, in the longitudes of the 

South Indian Ocean.

1.1 The Southern Ocean Current, in the longitudes of the South 

Indian Ocean, is not a well-defined or constant current. It is a 

region of variable current with some predominance of sets having an E component. The variability is greater E of 80°E than 

in the W half of the ocean. The most constant E flow is found 

between 38°S and 42°S, 20°E to 60°E, in August to April, and 

between 40°S and 42°S and the same longitudes in May to July. In this region a moderate proportion of currents, with rates 

of 1 and 2 knots will be met. Rates exceeding 2 knots are, however, rare. Elsewhere the proportion of currents exceeding 1 

knot is smaller, and rates exceeding 2 knots have not been recorded.

1.1 The mean resultant set, the direction of the drift of water in 

the long run, is E, between 20°E and 40°E, NE between 40°E 

and 80°E, and between E and SE when E of 80°E. The predominant flow of current will, therefore, tend towards these directions.

1.1 The current has no defined N boundary; the predominance of 

E sets decreases with decreasing latitude in the central longitudes of the ocean until it merges into the region of variable 

current S of the Equatorial Current. Some predominance of E 

set is found as far N as 28°S or 30°S in the central longitudes 

of the ocean.

Equatorial Current.—A large part of the Equatorial Current flows W past Cap d’Ambre towards the African coast. 

West of 65°E or 70°E, the current strengthens considerably, 

during May to October the period of the Southwest Monsoon. 

Between 8°S and the latitude of Cap d’Ambre, 44°E to 52°E, 

more than half the currents experienced during this season have 

rates exceeding 1 knot, and rates exceeding 2 knots are not uncommon. Occasional currents with rates exceeding 3 knots also 

occur. The predominating directions are NW to SSW, inclusive. The Equatorial Current, W of about 60°E, widens, so that 

its N limit is in about 4°S. It thus passes over the Seychelles 

Bank from June to September, inclusive. West of 52°E, and 

therefore, immediately W of the region where water recurves 

NE from the Equatorial Current into the countercurrent, W and 

NW sets are found as far N as 2°S, or even to the Equator, as 

the Equatorial Current flows, into the East African Coast Current.

1.1 During the Northeast Monsoon period, November to January, the current past Cap d’Ambre strengthens slightly, as compared with that in the open ocean, and occasional sets 

exceeding 2 knots are experienced. The N limit of the current 

N of Cap d’Ambre is in about 6°S. In February to April there is 

no such strengthening, and the width of the current N of Cap 

d’Ambre (11°57'S., 49°16'E.) is further reduced, the N limit 

being about 8° S. North of this the NE sets of the recurvature 

into the countercurrent are found.

1.1 In the region of general W flow from S of Cap Sainte-Marie 

towards the African coast a high degree of variability of current 

is to be expected with, at times, almost or quite as many E sets 

as W ones. A considerable proportion of currents exceeds the 

rate of 1 knot, irrespective of direction. No offshoot exceeding 

2 knots has been recorded from this N flow into Mozambique 

Channel.

Somali Current.—The periods in which this current set in 

alternate directions does not entirely correspond to the periods 

of the two monsoons. The N flow covers the whole of the 

Southwest Monsoon period but begins before the Southwest 

Monsoon wind is established in this region about the beginning 

of May. March is the transition month for the change of current 

direction. In this month the current runs N from 5°N; in April 

the whole of the current runs N. These periods are averages and 

may be subject to some variation from year to year, as the time 

of the change of the monsoons is not always the same.

1.1 The strong NE current, which prevails along the African 

coast during the Southwest Monsoon, is stronger near the coast 

and decreases rapidly at a distance of over 50 miles offshore.

1.1 Eastward of a line joining positions; equator to 48°E, and 

6°N to 54°E, or about 200 miles from the coast, the current is 
6 Sector 1. South Africa—The Cape of Good Hope to Cape Recife 

Pub. 171

almost negligible, and may sometimes be going SW.

1.1 April to October the current sets N following the trend of the 

coast, from Cabo Delgado to Ras Asir, and water branches E 

from the seaward side of this current N of the equator. The 

main body of the Somali Current turns E away from the coast 

in 7° to 10°N, and subsequently SE, into the general East Monsoon drift of the North Indian Ocean; the more S part enters the 

Equatorial cCuntercurrent. The part continuing past Ras Asir 

and water branching from this and passing E of Suqutra, enters 

the Arabian Sea.

1.1 The Somali Current during these months is strong and relatively constant, but directions other than those between N and 

E occur at times. Between Cabo Delgado and Mombasa

(4°04'S., 39°41'E.), a considerable proportion of the currents 

experienced on the shipping tracks exceed the rate of 2 knots, 

with occasional ones exceeding 3 knots, chiefly in May to July. 

The current runs past the islands and channels of Mafia, Zanzibar, and Pemba at a rate of 2 to 4 knots.

1.1 Between Mombasa and 6°N, the sets are mainly between N 

and NE. A large proportion of the currents exceed the rate of 3 

knots in May to July, and occasional ones may attain or exceed 

4.5 knots. The strongest current that has been reported in this 

region is one of 5.5 knots in May, 1915, between Uarsciech and 

Ras Assuad (4°33'N., 48°01'E.). In August to October, while 

many currents are met with rates of from 2 to 3 knots, the number exceeding 3 knots is considerably smaller than in May to 

July. Some sets in other directions occur in April to October, 

chiefly between W and S.

1.1 Between 6°N and Ras Asir stronger currents are observed in 

August to October than in May to July, in which period the rate 

of 3 knots is seldom exceeded.

1.1 The Somali Current, as it branches E into the ocean S of Suqutra, is very strong in July to September, during the height of 

the Southwest Monsoon. In these months the area of strongest 

current is between 7.5° and 10.5°N and 51.5° and 54.5°E.

1.1 Many currents with rates between 4 and 5.5 knots have been 

reported, with occasional observations of 6 knots and over, the 

maximum being one of exactly 7 knots. The rates of 6 knots 

and over are greater than those known in any other oceanic region. When the current is setting strongly ESE or SE it is 

athwart the wind and there is often a very heavy confused sea 

over a considerable area in this locality. In making the coast of 

Africa from E care should be taken to avoid the strength of the 

current by keeping well to the S.

1.1 In addition to these very strong currents which set between 

NE and SE, currents in all other directions may be experienced 

in April to October, but these do not usually exceed 1 knot. In 

August to October, however, currents setting between N and 

WNW may attain rates of 2.5 to 3 knots.

1.1 The remarks made above about the difficulty of assigning a 

definite width to the Agulhas Current apply also to the Somali 

Current, especially N of the Equator, where it branches E. In 

August, 1964, the U.S. vessel Argo found it to be approximately 60 miles wide at 2°S and also at 2°N. In 4°N the British Research ship Discovery experienced a 6 knot current 15 miles 

offshore. Farther off the current decreased to less than 1 knot at 

140 miles from the coast but speeds over 3.5 knots have been 

reported at 130 miles out.

1.1 A survey during August and September, 1964, reported the 

existence of a big current swirl to the S of Suqutra and also another centered near position 6°N, 52°E. It is not certain, however, that these are permanent features. Also found that the 

greatest rate of flow of the Somali Current in summer, as much 

as 7 knots, is probably at the point where it first begins to curve 

away from the coast at 8°N.

November is a transition month for current direction and the 

currents are more variable. The predominant directions are S or 

onshore.

1.1 From December to February, the Somali Current flows S 

from about 10°N during these months. North of 10°N, past Ras 

Hafun to Ras Asir, the current is N throughout the year. The 

only change on this stretch of coast is that during the Southwest Monsoon period the predominant direction is NE, i.e. 

away from the coast, while during the Northeast Monsoon period it is NW, towards the coast. During the Southwest Monsoon, however, the current close inshore off Ras Asir 

(11°50'N., 51°17'E.) rounds that cape to the W.

1.1 South of 10°N, the current sets S following the trend of the 

coast, the most frequent directions being from WSW to SSW. 

The maximum rates of current, between 6°N and 2°S, may 

reach or exceed 3 knots, with occasional ones at 3.5 to 4 knots. 

The strongest and most constant section of the current is between 6°N and 2°N, where about one current in eight may be 

expected to exceed 2 knots. Even in this part of the current, a 

number of sets in other directions are met, mainly NW and SE.

1.1 The meeting of the N and S sets takes place between the island of Lamu and Isolotto Famauali in from 1.5°S to 2.5°S, the 

opposing sets producing an offset from the coast. The exact 

place of meeting probably varies with the monsoon, extending 

a little S when this is particularly strong. Off Malindi

(3°15'S.), the S current may be found running within the 180m 

bank, while the N current is flowing outside this edge.

1.1 The N current flowing along the coast from the region of Cabo Delgado to the meeting point with the S current sets between NNE and WNW, N being the most frequent direction. A 

small proportion of current exceeds the rate of 2 knots and a 

few may exceed 3 knots, northward of 4°S. Occasional currents set in other directions, chiefly between W and S.

1.1 South of about 2°N, water branches from the seaward side of 

the S current to pass into the eastgoing Equatorial Countercurrent. At the S extremity of the S current, where it meets the N 

current, the water is similarly diverted so that SE sets may be 

found seaward of the N coastalcurrent; between about 2°S and 

4°S.

1.1 March is a transition month for current direction and the currents are more variable. The predominant direction is still 

southerly S of 5°N, but N of this it is N.

Abnormal Waves.—Under certain weather conditions, abnormal waves, of exceptional height, occasionally occur off the 

SE coast of South Africa causing severe damage to ships unfortunate enough to encounter them. In 1968, the S.S. World Glory, 

of over 28,000 grt, encountered such a wave and was broken in 

two, subsequently sinking with loss of life.

1.1 These abnormal waves, which may attain a height of 19.8m 

or more, instead of having the normal sinusoidal wave form 

have a very steep fronted leading edge preceded by a very deep 

trough, the wave moving NE at an appreciable speed. These 

waves are known to occur between the latitudes of Great Fish 

Point and Durnford Point, mainly just to seaward of the continental shelf, where the Agulhas Current runs at its strongest. A 
Sector 1. South Africa—The Cape of Good Hope to Cape Recife 7

Pub. 171

ship has, however, reported sustaining damage from such a 

wave 30 miles to seaward of the continental shelf. No encounters with abnormal waves have been reported inside the 180m 

curve. When heavy seas have been experienced outside the 

180m curve, much calmer seas have been experienced closer 

inshore in depths of 92m.

1.1 Abnormal waves are apparently caused by a combination of 

sea and swell waves moving in a NE direction against the 

Agulhas Current, combined with the passage of a cold front. 

Swell waves generated from storms in high latitudes are almost 

always present off the SE coast of South Africa, generally 

moving in a NE direction. These are sometimes augmented by 

other swell waves from a depression in the vicinity of Marion 

Island (46°52'S., 37°45'E.), and by sea waves generated from a 

local depression also moving in a general NE direction. Thus 

there may be three and sometimes more wave trains each with 

widely differing wave lengths all moving in the same general 

direction. Occasionally the crests of these different wave trains 

will coincide causing a wave of exceptional height to build up 

and last for a short time. The extent of this exceptional height 

will be only for a distance of a few hundred meters, both along 

the direction the waves are travelling and along the crest of the 

wave. In the open sea this wave will be sinusoidal in form and a 

well found ship, properly handled, should ride safely over it. 

However, when the cold front of a depression moves along the 

SE coast of South Africa it is preceded by a strong NE wind. If 

this blows for a sufficient length of time, it will increase the 

speed of the Agulhas Current to as much as 5 knots. On the 

passage of the front the wind changes direction abruptly and 

within 4 hours may be blowing strongly from a SW direction. 

Under these conditions, sea waves will rapidly build up, moving in a NE direction against the much stronger than usual 

Agulhas Current. If this occurs when there is already a heavy 

swell running in a NE direction, the occasional wave of exceptional height, which will build up just to seaward of the edge of 

the continental shelf, will no longer be sinusoidal but extremely steep fronted and preceded by a very deep trough. On encountering this trough, a ship steaming in a SW direction will 

find the bow still dropping into the trough with increasing momentum when encountering the steep fronted face of the oncoming wave. The wave will eventually breaking over the fore 

part of the ship with devastating force. Because of the shape of 

the wave a ship steaming on a NE course is much less likely to 

sustain serious damage.

1.1 The weather conditions giving rise to the abnormal waves 

are likely to occur most frequently in the winter months, but 

will obviously occur at any time of the year if the conditions 

are right. 

1.1 Ships proceeding S off the SE coast of South Africa in conditions of heavy swell from a SW direction, and with strong 

NE winds blowing with a falling barometer, should keep well 

clear of the seaward edge of the continental shelf if a cold front 

bringing strong SW winds is forecast.

1.1 Laden tankers sailing on voyages only between ports in 

South Africa are exempted from the above rule but are expected to maintain a minimum distance of 10 miles from all salient 

points, subject to weather and sea conditions.

Cape Point to Simons Bay

1.2 The Cape Peninsula extends for a distance of about 28 

miles in a S direction from Table Bay to the Cape of Good 

Hope. From the W the peninsula presents a high and rugged 

appearance from Table Bay as far S as Paulsberg, located 4 

miles N of Cape Point (34°21'S., 18°30'E.), which is marked 

by a light. Between these latter two places the land is high and 

even, with the exception of two peaks rising near the S extremity which, from a considerable distance, have the appearance of 

an island, in the form of a saddle.

For a full description of the coast in the area of the Cape of 

Good Hope, Cape Point, and Cape Maclear, see Pub. 123, Sailing Directions (Enroute) Southwest Coast of Africa.

1.2 Directions.—In clear weather, a vessel approaching the

Cape of Good Hope (34°21'S., 18°29'E.) from the NW, by 

day, should keep well to seaward of the shoal water off SW 

Reefs. After passing these shoals course should be altered so as 

to pass not less than 0.5 mile S of Bellows Rock, and then steer 

between Rocky Bank and Anvil Rock until clear of the latter. 

At night, a vessel should keep in soundings of more than 50m 

while in the red sector of Cape Point Light.

1.2 Laden tankers should not approach the coast within a distance of 25 miles.

1.2 Vessels approaching the Cape of Good Hope, especially in 

thick weather or in any doubt of their positions, should never 

omit the precaution of obtaining soundings in good time.

1.2 In clear weather a vessel approaching from W, by night, 

should sight Cape Point Light at a distance of 23 miles, provided it is not obscured by land, on a bearing of 106° or more, in 

which case Slangkop Light should be seen at a distance of not 

less than 17 miles.

1.2 In thick weather by day or night, should the land or lights not 

be seen, a vessel should not approach the coast but should keep 

SW in depths of more than 100m until such times as the position has been accurately determined.

1.2 Vessels bound E along the coast, having passed the coast at a 

prudent distance, should take careful bearings at the Cape 

Point Light (Cape of Good Hope Light) as long as it is in sight, 

and make every allowance for a possible E onshore set in shaping the course to pass Danger Point and Quoin Point. Danger 

Point should not be approached at night, with a depth less than 

60m, and the mariner should bear in mind that Cape Agulhas 

Light should be kept bearing 095°.

1.2 On approaching the land by day or night, the vessel should 

enter Valsbaai as described above.

1.2 Vessels approaching from the E, when Cape Point Light 

(Cape of Good Hope Light) is in sight vessels standing in toward the land should be guided by frequent bearings of it and 

of Danger Point Light, to avoid the rocks off the latter. When 

W of Danger Point, Cape Point Light (Cape of Good Hope 

Light) should not be brought more W than 285°, which bearing 

clears all danger off Kapp Hangklip. As Kapp Hangklip and 

the narrow neck of land connecting it with the shore are very 

low, great caution is necessary when passing it in hazy weather. 

1.2 In standing toward any part of this coast, the mariner should 

not lose sight of Cape Agulhas Light.
8 Sector 1. South Africa—The Cape of Good Hope to Cape Recife 

Pub. 171

1.2 Caution.—An extensive bank lies within the 30m contour 

off the Cape of Good Hope and stretches from positions located about 2 miles W and SW of Cape Maclear (34°21'S., 

18°28'E.) to positions about 2 miles S and 1 mile SE of Cape 

Point. Except during the calmest weather, seas break over the 

whole area and also break heavily over the various rocks and 

shoals within it. Vessels should give this bank a wide berth.

1.2 Southwest Reefs lie on the above bank about 1 mile SW of 

Cape Maclear. Anvil Rock, with a depth of 3.9m, lies about 1.2 

miles SE of Cape Point Light and does not break unless there is 

a heavy swell.

1.2 Bellows Rock (34°23'S., 18°29'E.), which dries 1m, lies 2 

miles SSW of Cape Point Light and the sea always breaks over 

it. The position of this rock can easily be seen in fine weather 

and vessels may pass 0.5 mile S of it. However, on moonless 

nights, during bad weather or with poor visibility, vessels are 

advised to keep well clear of this danger.

Rocky Bank (34°25'S., 18°36'E.), with a least depth of 22m, 

is an extensive shoal area lying centered about 6 miles SE of 

Cape Point Light.

1.2 Between 1 November and 30 June intensive crayfishing 

takes place in the area up to 4 miles offshore between Slangkoppunt (34°09'S., 18°19'E.) and Cape Point, and occasionally 

over Rocky Bank. Trap buoys are brightly colored and the fishing area is marked by dan buoys with flashing white lights. 

Mariners are advised to keep at least 5 miles offshore and well 

clear of Rocky Bank.

1.3 False Bay (Valsbaai) (34°21'S., 18°39'E.) is a large 

bay entered between Cape Point and Kaap Hangklip; it extends 

N about the same distance. There are several dangers in the bay 

but it provides good anchorage except where the bottom is 

rocky or steep-to. The W and E shores of the bay are generally 

rocky with a few sandy bays. The N shore is a fine sandy crescent about 17 miles in extent, which is broken by some off-lying rocks and cliffs.

1.3 Tides—Currents.—The direction and rate of circulation of 

the surface water in the bay is somewhat unpredictable being 

largely wind induced. Currents, which are nearly all of a circulatory nature, seldom exceed 0.5 knot tidal currents, though 

weak, would appear to affect the general circulation; the ebb 

flow is S and that on the flood N.

1.3 Under certain meteorological conditions abnormal waves are 

generated in False Bay which, breaking on certain steep-to and 

rocky stretches of the coast, can cause damage or loss of life.

1.3 Commercial vessels are no longer allowed to anchor in False 

Bay, except in special circumstances.

1.3 Foreign vessels may not enter False Bay unless in an emergency without prior permission of the Ministry of Transport, 

Cape Town.

1.3 Caution.—Net fishing operations may take place in False 

Bay, from Smitswinkelbaii (34°16'S., 18°29'E.) to the beach 

fronting the village of Macassar (34°05'S., 18°45'E.). The 

nets, which may extend up to 600m from shore, are rarely 

marked. Vessels should navigate with caution in these areas.

1.3 A fishing zone, inshore of which the use of purse seine nets 

is prohibited, is situated in False Bay between a line joining 

Cape Point Light and Kaap Hungklip Light. The prohibition 

extends from 1st May to 14th February.

1.4 Buffels Bay (34°19'S., 18°28'E.), 2.7 miles NNW of 

Cape Point, is a small bight which can be recognized by a 

white sand patch. There are depths of 7.3 to 9.1m near the 

shore. Anchorage is prohibited within a cable area, extending 

about 2 miles ENE from the shore of Buffels Bay. 

From Buffels Bay the coast trends in a general NNW direction to Simons Bay, a distance of about 8 miles. The intervening coast is steep-to; the 30m curve lies from 0.1 mile offshore 

close N of Buffels Bay, to 1.5 miles offshore, at the S entrance 

to Simons Bay.

1.4 Batasa Rock (34°17'S., 18°29'E.) is 1.2m high. A disused 

ammunition dumping ground is situated about 1 mile NNE of 

the rock.

Courtesy of Simon Baillie-Cooper

Cape Point Light
Sector 1. South Africa—The Cape of Good Hope to Cape Recife 9

Pub. 171

1.4 Whittle Rock (34°15'S., 18°34'E.) lies well out in the bay, 

4.5 miles ENE of Batsata Rock. It has a depth of 3.6m and 

breaks occasionally.

1.4 Millers Point (34°14'S., 18°29'E.) is the most prominent 

point on the coast between Cape Point and Simon's Town. It 

slopes gradually from the foot of the Swartkopberge to a series 

of large boulders, 8 to 9m high, interspersed with sheltered 

sandy inlets.

1.4 Oatland Point, situated 1.5 miles NNW of Millers Point, is 

the site of a range beacon, which with a beacon 0.9 mile distant 

bearing 294.5° are the N transit beacons for clearing Whittle 

Rock. These beacons are difficult to distinguish in adverse 

light conditions. The S pair of beacons marking Whittle Rock 

are situated at Buffels Bay; in range they bear 231.75°.

1.4 The rear beacon was destroyed by fire (2000) and may not be 

replaced.

1.4 Swartkop, 678m high, is the highest summit of the prominent Swartkopberge range; it lies 0.7 mile SW of Oatland 

Point. Since it is separated from the main range by a narrow 

gap it has a distinctive sharp appearance when bearing WNW. 

Simonsberg, 0.9 mile NW of Swartkop, rises to a height of 

547m. It is even more widely separated from the main range 

than Swartkop.

1.5 Roman Rocks (34°11'S., 18°27'E.), a group of above 

water, drying, and submerged rocks, lie 1.5 miles N of Oatland 

Point. They are marked by a light; a racon transmits from the 

light. An obstruction, with a depth of 1.7m and marked close N 

by a buoy, lies about 0.4 mile NW of the light marking Roman 

Rocks.

1.5 Noah’s Ark (34°12'S., 18°27'E.), a flat-topped rock 6m 

high, 0.7 mile SSW of Roman Rocks, provides a prominent 

mark when approaching Simons Bay from the SE.

1.5 A degaussing range is established close S of Noah’s Ark. 

Anchoring, and fishing, or making fast to buoys marking the 

range is prohibited. 

Simons Bay (Simonsbaai) (34°11'S., 18°26'E.)

World Port Index No. 46780

1.6 Simons Bay is situated on the W side of False Bay 

and consists of three basins. Simons Town, formed on the 

shores of the bay, derives its name from the bay.

1.6 Winds—Weather.—The prevailing winds are SE from November to March and NW from April to October. The SE 

winds may blow continuously for 5 to 8 days, but more frequently die down toward evening, remain light or moderate 

during the night, and increase again during the morning. A 

steeply rising barometer is usually the precursor of strong SE 

winds. Shortly after such a wind has started, the hills above 

Muizenberg become capped with white cloud, and should the 

Hottentots Holland Range, on the E side of False Bay become 

similarly capped, a violent blow may be expected. When Simonsberg has a misty cloud at its summit, rain may be expected in 

a short while. During the season of SE winds, they frequently 

blow strongly from SSE. On these occasions a heavy surf 

builds up on those beaches that are not in the immediate lee of 

the breakwaters and the town.

1.6 During the season of NW winds, frequent gales, accompanied 

by rain, may be expected. A falling barometer usually foretells 

such NW gales, which may be experienced at anytime of the 

year, and though often violent, seldom last longer than 3 days. 

As the depression passes to the S of the peninsula the wind normally backs to the SW, the temperature falls and violent local 

squalls may sweep down into the bay from the hills making it 

uncomfortable for ships at anchor. A hot dry N wind, known as 

the Berg Wind, occurs frequently in the winter and spring, but 

may be experienced at any time of the year.

1.6 Scend is rarely experienced in any of the basins, but hauling 

off buoys are available at some berths should they be needed.

1.6 Depths—Limitations.—The South African Naval Dockyard 

comprises the East Dockyard, consisting of the Outer Basin, the 

East Dockyard Basin, and the Inner Basin. These three basins 

are protected by breakwaters. The West Dockyard, 0.5 mile farther W, is a smaller open dockyard.

1.6 The Outer Basin has an entrance 90m wide marked by lights. 

There are seven lettered berths in this basin, with alongside 

depths of 13.1 to 16.4m.

1.6 The East Dockyard Basin is entered from the SE corner of 

the Outer Basin through an entrance 88m wide. There are 11 

lettered berths, with charted depths of 2.4 to 14.6m alongside.

1.6 The Inner Basin, which is entered from the S part of the Outer Basin, has an entrance 30m wide. The seven lettered berths 

have charted depths of 6.7m alongside.

1.6 Selborne Dry Dock is situated at the SW corner of the Inner 

Basin. The length at floor head is 232m, the breadth at the entrance at the coping is 29m, and the depth below chart datum at 

the blocks at the entrance is 9.3m 

1.6 The West Dockyard comprises a number of storehouses, offices, and official residences. Within the yard, a boat landing 

ramp and a boat camber have been dredged to 1.2m.

1.6 Aspect.—From a distance, Else Peak, 2 miles N of the East 

Dockyard, and Muizenberg, which rises to a height of 507m 

about 3.2 miles NNE of Else Peak, are notable. The crane at 

the head of the drydock; Martello Tower, 91m E of the crane; 

two large yellow buildings, about 0.3 mile S of the basin; and a 

white house, which is situated about 1 mile NNW of East 

Dockyard Basin are conspicuous.

1.6 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for merchant and foreign 

naval vessels. The Naval Harbormaster acts as pilot and boards 

vessels about 0.9 mile N of Roman Rocks Light. Pilots will not 

take vessels in at night.

1.6 Signals.—A red flag is displayed at a flagstaff on the roof of 

the Naval Harbormaster’s Office at the N end of West Wall 

when the port is closed. A green flag is displayed when it is 

open.

1.6 Anchorage.—Simons Bay is accessible all the year round, 

and affords excellent shelter for vessels in heavy SE gales, vessels ride safely, and although the bay is exposed to E and NE 

winds, these never blow with any strength. Northwesterly 

winds often blow very hard in the winter and have, on occasions, caused vessels at anchor in the bay to drag. 

1.6 Merchant vessels may only anchor in False Bay, with the 

permission of the Naval Officer in Command, Simonstown, in 

berths allotted to them by the Naval Harbor Master. In general 

these berths will be situated about 3.5 miles SE of Roman 

Rocks, clear of all firing danger areas, where the holding 

ground is good. The anchorage area for small craft is off West 

Dockyard, between Town Pier and the boat camber. There are 
10 Sector 1. South Africa—The Cape of Good Hope to Cape Recife 

Pub. 171

several mooring buoys WNW of the outer basin of East Dockyard.

1.6 Vessels carrying explosives or other dangerous cargo are required to anchor as directed by the Naval Harbormaster.

1.6 A submarine cable extends 0.5 mile ENE from near the N elbow of East Breakwater. Anchoring is prohibited NE of the 

Northern Spur and East Breakwater as indicated on the chart. 

Anchoring is also prohibited 1.3 miles N of Roman Rocks 

Light.

1.6 Directions.—By day, after clearing Anvil Rock or Rocky 

Bank as previously directed, a vessel should steer a course to 

pass midway between Whittle Rock and the western shore, and 

when Else Peak and Roman Rocks are in line bearing 326.25°, 

course should be altered to preserve this transit. Provided Roman Rocks Light does not bear less than 313° or more than 

332°, the passage is clear. When the lighthouse is about 1 mile 

off, course should be altered to pass midway between it and 

Noah’s Ark.

1.6 Phoenix Shoal Buoy, 0.3 mile NW of Noah’s Ark, can be 

rounded at a convenient distance and the allotted anchorage 

steered for.

1.6 By night, when E of Anvil Rock, and having passed from the 

red into the white sector of Cape Point Light, a vessel should 

preserve a N course until Roman Rocks Light bears 326°, 

when it may be steered for until East Breakwater Light bears 

270°, when course may be altered as necessary to the allotted 

anchorage.

1.6 In thick weather, by day or night, it is advisable to steer for 

the middle of False Bay, keeping well to the E of Whittle Rock. 

If so fitted, a vessel should use electronic fixing aids, and the 

echo sounder should be run continuously. When approaching 

soundings of 35m the vessel, if unfamiliar with the locality, 

should anchor and wait for the weather to clear. 

False Bay—North Side 

1.7 In the N part of the bay there are three dangers which 

should be noted. Seal Island (34°08'S., 18°35'E.) is a low rocky 

islet, situated about 6.5 miles ENE of Roman Rocks Light, and 

is surrounded by submerged rocks, which usually break. The 

remains of a metal tower stand near the middle of the island.

1.7 A detached shoal, with a depth of 15.5m, lies 0.5 mile WNW 

of the island, and a 16.5m patch lies 0.4 mile SSE.

1.7 York Shoal (34°09'S., 18°36'E.), a rocky patch with a least 

depth of 1.8m lies 1.2 miles SSE of Seal Island; it usually 

breaks.

1.7 East Shoal, lying about 3.2 miles ESE of Seal Island, has 

general depths of 6.3 to 20m but in one place there is a rock, 

awash, which always breaks.

1.7 In the E part of False Bay there is an isolated patch, with a 

depth of 11.3m, which breaks in heavy gales.

1.7 Vishoekbaai (34°08'S., 18°26'E.), or Fish Hoek Bay, an indentation in the coast close N of Else Peak, provides a reasonable anchorage, in 10m, sandy bottom. It is usually calm 

except during strong E or SE winds.

1.7 Kalk Bay (34°08'S., 18°27'E.), a small harbor protected by 

breakwaters, has berths with alongside depths of 2.7 to 4.5m. 

1.7 In certain weather conditions, abnormal waves may occur, 

without warning, on the shoals seaward of the breakwater.

1.7 The head of False Bay is a low sandy beach, with a continuous line of surf fronting it, so that it affords no landing and 

should in all circumstances be avoided.

Swartklip (34°04'S., 18°41'E.), a bluff headland at the head 

of the bay, is the E terminus of eroded sandstone cliffs which 

extend 2 miles W. These cliffs assume a darkish hue under certain light conditions. Lower cliffs continue 1 mile E of Swartklip.

1.7 The village of Macassar stands about 3 miles E of Swartklip. 

A dangerous wreck lies about 2 miles SSW of the village; vessels should keep clear of the area.

1.7 Passage is prohibited, extending 0.7 mile from shore, in a 

position about 1 mile SE of Macassar. Blinkklip, a rock which 

breaks, lies within the prohibited area about 3 miles SE of the 

town.

1.7 Strand (34°07'S., 18°49'E.) has a beach frontage of 2 miles; 

the NW part is sandy and the SE part is fringed with rocky 

ledges which extend to Gordon's Bay. Within the 5m curve 

line, S of Strand, the bottom is rocky and foul.

1.7 A conspicuous radio tower, stands on a summit 7 miles E of 

Strand and rises to an elevation of 1,182m. The Dome, a peak 

rising to a height of 1,137m, is the highest elevation in a mountain range about 5 miles NNE of Strand.

1.7 Gordon’s Bay is entered between Strand and a rounded headland 4 miles S. The bay is not recommended as an anchorage 

as it affords little shelter from the SE gales, which sweep into it 

from the Hottentots Hollandberge escarpment to the SE. There 

is a small harbor for fishing vessels, on the S side of Gordon’s 

Bay. 

False Bay—East Side 

1.8 The coastline from Gordon’s Bay trends in a S direction to Kaap Hangklip. A mountain range rising to a height of 

1,268m backs the coast to a point 1.3 miles of Kaap Hangklip.

1.8 The tall red brick building on the NW side of the escarpment, on the S side of Gordon’s Bay, when brilliantly lit at 

night, provides a conspicuous mark.

1.8 Kogel Bay is not a good anchorage as the bottom is rocky in 

many places. It does, however, afford shelter from S and E 

winds.

1.8 Pringle Bay (34°20'S., 18°50'E.) is open to W winds but affords good shelter from SE gales. The anchorage is in a depth 

of about 20m in the center of the bay, well clear of the rocky 

and kelp-fringed S shore.

1.8 Kaap Hangklip (34°23'S., 18°50'E.) is only about 3m high, 

but 1.3 miles N of it is Hangklip Berg, 453m high, wedgeshaped, and sometimes known as False Cape; from the S it appears as an island, and from some directions its W face appears 

to overhang. 

1.8 A conspicuous sandy patch extends halfway up its SE side. 

As a heavy sea always breaks on the cape and for some distance outside the off-lying dangers, vessels should give it a 

berth of at least 1.8 miles when passing.

Kaap Hangklip to Cape Agulhas

1.9 Between Kaap Hanglip and Cape Agulhas, about 62 

miles SE of Kaap Hangklip, are three bays. The 30m curve line 

lies up to 5 miles offshore in this area and the 100m curve line 

lies 20 miles offshore SSW of Cape Agulhas Light. The only 
Sector 1. South Africa—The Cape of Good Hope to Cape Recife 11

Pub. 171

charted offshore danger lying between the 50 to 100m curve 

lines is Twelve Mile Bank, with a least depth of 29m situated 

12 miles SSW of Cape Agulhas.

1.9 Tides—Currents.—Mariners are urged to take every precaution against possible inshore sets between Kaap Hangklipp 

and Cape Agulhas. The time to be more than ordinarily careful 

is not so much when a strong wind is blowing towards to shore, 

but when the weather is fair and all is apparently plain sailing, 

when the mariner may be lulled into a false sense of security.

1.9 Between Cape Point and Quoin Point, inshore sets may be 

experienced during all seasons, but rarely during the months of 

September to November. Between Quoin Point and Cape Agulhas, however, they are most frequent from September to February, and rarely occur during the rest of the year. 

1.10 Between Kaap Hangklip and Danger Point are Sandown Bay and Walker Bay, two large sandy bays. At the head 

of these bays there are sand dunes with low lying valleys behind them; there are a number of rocky points, fronted by reefs, 

in this area.

1.10 Masbaai, formed between Kaap Hangklip and Holbaaipunt 

(34°23'S., 18°51'E.), about 1 mile E, is a small rocky and foul 

bay, which has not been closely examined.

1.10 Silver Sands Bay is contained between Holbaaipunt and 

Stony Point. The bay is rocky at its sides but is otherwise clear 

of outlying rocks. A heavy surf sets into the bay and it is quite 

unsuitable for anchorage.

1.10 Betty’s Bay, a slight indentation, is formed between Stony 

Point and a point 2 miles ENE.

1.10 Sandown Bay extends from the E point of Betty’s Bay to 

Mudge Point (34°25'S., 19°08'E.). This bay has a sandy beach 

along its whole length; it is clear of obstructions and provides 

fair anchorage, in depths of 15 to 30m, during periods of very 

light SE winds and calm weather. A number of small fishing 

vessels and ski boats operate in Sandown Bay and a careful 

lookout must be maintained to avoid running them down.

1.10 The Palmiet River flows into the NW corner of Sandown Bay; 

it is a rapid stream in winter, but its entrance is always blocked 

by sand. Landing from a boat can be made at HW, in fine weather, in a small sandy cove 0.8 mile E of the river’s mouth.

1.10 Palmietberge, a coastal range of mountains, rises to a summit 

of 682m, 2 miles NNE of the mouth of the Palmiet River. 

1.10 Mudge Point is a low rocky projection some 2 miles wide, 

which has a number of submerged, kelp covered reefs lying off 

it. The point is backed by conspicuous sand dunes up to 70m 

high, and behind them a coastal range of mountains ends in a 

rounded bluff 480m high, approximately 2 miles NE.

1.10 Walker Bay (34°30'S., 19°17'E.) is entered between Mudge 

Point and Danger Point.

1.11 Hermanus (34°25'S., 19°14'E.), a growing seaside resort in the NW side of Walker Bay, has several conspicuous 

buildings, extending for about 1 mile along the coast. Two 

breakwaters, the S one marked by a light, form a small harbor.

1.11 Hydra Bay, situated in Walker Bay, about 2 miles NNE of 

Danger Point, may be easily distinguished by a sand patch 

which marks the face of a hillock behind it.

1.11 A reef, with a least depth of 0.6m, extends NW for 0.4 mile 

offshore in the N part of Hydra Bay. A rock, with a depth of 

5.5m, lies 0.3 mile W of the above reef and a 6.4m patch lies 

0.4 mile N of the reef.

1.11 Anchorage.—The best anchorage in Walker Bay is abreast 

Hydra Bay, 0.8 mile offshore and 2 miles N of the light on 

Danger Point, in depths of 22 to 26m. This position is sheltered 

from SE winds and the swell is less heavy than closer to the 

head of Walker Bay.

1.11 It should be noted that, when approaching the anchorage at 

Hydra Bay from the S, Danger Point should not be approached 

nearer than 2 or 3 miles in the day and at least 5 miles at night.

1.12 Danger Point (34°38'S., 19°18'E.) is formed by a 

tongue of low sand hills, covered with sparse vegetation, which 

extends for a distance of some 4.5 miles WSW from a peak 

known as Duifonteinberg. This bluff mountain, 356m high, is 

conspicuous from all directions when viewed from seaward.

1.12 Several detached rocks lie off this point. The most dangerous 

is Birkenhead Rock (34°39'S., 19°17'E.), with a charted depth 

of 3m situated 1.3 miles SW of the light. The rock is steep-to, 

and in a moderate swell, the sea breaks continuously and violently over it, but in calm weather it may only break intermittently. 

1.12 From Danger Point to Quoin Point the coast is brush-covered 

and generally low-lying, but is backed at distances of 2 to 4 miles 

by moderately high rugged hills. Sandy beaches, backed by sand 

Courtesy of Simon Baillie-Cooper

Kaap Hangklip Light
12 Sector 1. South Africa—The Cape of Good Hope to Cape Recife 

Pub. 171

dunes, alternate with rocky stretches. A long heavy swell normally 

sets in to the coast making it inaccessible, though landing is practicable in a few places.

1.12 Sandy Point (34°39'S., 19°27'E.) is a group of islets and 

rocks, the latter below water and awash, extending 3.5 miles 

SW of the point. Dyer Island, the largest of the islets, lies 2.5 

miles SW of Sandy Point. Geyser Island lies close S of Dyer 

Island; both islands are low and rocky. These islands and rocks 

form a natural breakwater where vessels may find shelter in S 

and SE gales. There is reasonably good holding ground in 21m 

sand, with some rocky patches, with the extremities of Dyer Island bearing about 128° and 156°, distant 1 mile.

1.12 Two shoals, which break heavily when there is any swell, lie 

close together about 1.5 miles offshore 6 miles ESE of Dyer Island. The W shoal dries and the E one has a least depth of 

6.8m.

1.13 Quoin Point (34°47'S., 19°38'E.) is a mass of square 

hummocky land, fronted by sunken rocks and heavy breakers, 

extending more than 1 mile from the shore. When seen from 

the S, it may be recognized by two sand hills near its extremity. 

The point is marked by a light.

1.13 Between Quoin Point and Cape Agulhas, the coast is low 

and sandy as far as Sandberg (34°48'S., 19°58'E.), which rises 

to a height of 155m, 1 mile inland about 3 miles NW of Cape 

Agulhas, except for the coast S of the tableland Zoetanysberg, 

where it is steep and rocky.

1.13 A radio mast, marked by lights, stands at an elevation of 

753m, 19 miles NNW of Cape Agulhas.

1.13 This entire coastline is exposed to the full force of the ocean 

swell and landing is impracticable.

1.13 Six Mile Bank (34°55'S., 19°54'E.), a tongue of the coastal 

bank with depths of 22 to 27m along its S edge, extends up to 

6.5 miles SSW and 12 miles WSW from Cape Agulhas.

1.13 Cape Agulhas (34°50'S., 20°01'E.), the S extremity of Africa, 

is distinguished from other points in the locality by the features 

of the land about it and is marked by a light. From a distance seaward E or W, the N and S elevations or ridges resemble two oblong hummocks, while at a distance from the S they appear as 

one. A shoal, with a depth of 4.7m, lies 1 mile S of Cape Agulhas Light.

1.13 Caution.—Cape Agulhas should be given a wide berth. Several wrecks are believed to be inshore and fishing vessels are 

often met in the vicinity.

Cape Agulhas to Mosselbaai

1.14 Between Cape Agulhas and Mosselbaai, 115 miles 

ENE, the coastal plain is backed by mountain ranges. In clear 

weather the peaks of Langeberg range, which lie 25 to 30 miles 

inland, provide useful marks. This range forming part of the 

coastal escarpment extends for about 75 miles, between the 

meridian of Struis Point (20°15'E.) and that of Ystervark Point 

(21°45'E.). The E part of this range and the W part of the Outeniqua Mountains form a distinctive background to the foothills, 

lying about 10 miles inland from Ystervark Point.

1.14 Agulhas Bank lies centered in position 35°53'S, 20°57'E. 

One remarkable fact as to the Agulhas Bank is seen in its quieting effect on the heavy seas, which roll up to it. A vessel may 

be laboring heavily in a turbulent and irregular sea while in 

deep water outside the bank, but directly soundings from 110 

to 128m are obtained the sea becomes comparatively tranquil.

1.14 Alphard Banks (35°02'S., 20°51'E.), lying from 43 to 47 

miles ESE of Cape Agulhas, has a least charted depth of 15m. 

In a heavy swell the sea breaks on the 15m patch at the W end 

of the banks. Laden tankers and other deep draft vessels should 

keep well clear of the banks, and shipping in general would be 

well advised to do so because of the overfalls and rips which 

occur there.

1.14 Owing to the proximity of the main traffic routes and to the 

lack of aids to navigation, mariners should avoid the area within 6 miles of the shallowest part of Alphard Banks.

1.14 Mariners are warned of the existence of an Oil Development 

Area E of Alphard Banks to a position approximately 40 miles 

S of Mosselbaai. 

1.14 Sable Oil Field (35°12'S., 21°19'E.) consists of a storage 

tanker connected to four wells. Oribi Oil Field and Oryx Oil 

Field are situated 10 miles E of Sable Oil Field. A submarine 

pipeline links the Oryx Oil Field, where there is a floating production platform and tanker mooring buoy; a storage tanker is 

secured to the buoy for the greater part of the year. 

1.14 The oil fields lie within areas in which anchoring and fishing 

are prohibited. Lights are exhibited and fog signals sounded 

from the platform, storage tanker and buoy.

1.14 Northumberland Point (34°48'S., 20°04'E.) is low and 

sandy. A dangerous reef, with rocks awash, extends 1.3 miles E 

of the point; a rock with less than 2m lies close off the E extremity of the reef.

1.14 Caution.—A dangerous wreck lies close S of the above rock.

1.14 A shoal, with a least charted depth of 12.8m, and dangerous 

to deep draft vessels even in moderate swell, lies 3.5 miles ESE 

of Northumberland Point; less water has been reported. In bad 

Courtesy of Simon Baillie-Cooper

Danger Point Light
Sector 1. South Africa—The Cape of Good Hope to Cape Recife 13

Pub. 171

weather, the sea breaks heavily over this shoal.

1.14 Deep draft vessels are advised to pass at least 2.5 miles S of 

the above-mentioned shoal. 

1.14 Two dangerous wrecks lie 1.7 miles E of Northumberland 

Point. 

1.15 Struisbaai (Struis Bay), between Northumberland 

Point (34°48'S., 20°04'E.) and Struispunt affords shelter with 

winds between W and NW, but is wholly unsafe with onshore 

winds, and should not be approached in any wind from WSW, 

round by S, to E. With such winds the sea breaks in 12.8m or 

14.6m In 1975, lesser depths than charted were reported in this 

area.

1.15 Anchorage.—There is anchorage in the bay, in 9m, sand, 

approximately 1 mile NNE of Northumberland Point. Here the 

bottom is clear, while closer in it is foul. Large vessels anchor 

farther out, in about 13m. 

1.15 Struispunt (Struyspunt) (Struis Point) (34°41'S., 20°14'E.)

is a low, sandy promontory, fringed with rocks, extending for 1 

mile from bare sandhills, 63m high. A little further inland 

bush-covered dunes attain heights of 73m. 

1.15 A stone beacon, 10m in height, stands near the extremity of 

the point; it has been reported that the beacon was falling in 

disrepair. 

1.15 A radio mast, marked by red obstruction lights, stands on 

Struis Point, 1 mile NE of Cape Aghulas Light. 

1.15 Foul ground, consisting of several detached patches of reef 

which nearly always break, extends for 2 miles SE of Struispunt.

1.15 Outer Blinder Rock, the outermost patch, has a depth of 

5.5m. Bulldog Reef, 0.3 mile NW of Outer Blinder Rock, has 

several rocky heads, with depths less than 2m.

1.15 Caution.—Owing to the similarity of the features of Struisbaai and of Marcus Bay, to the E, it may sometimes be difficult 

to determine whether a vessel is to the E or W of Struispunt. In 

hazy or foggy weather the high land within Cape Agulhas may 

not be visible, although the sand hills of Struisbaai and the 

breakers off Northumberland Point may be distinctly seen. In 

such circumstances, care is necessary in approaching the land, 

but it should be possible to identify Struispunt by its beacon.

1.15 When in the vicinity of Struispunt, it is advisable to keep in 

depths of more than 50m. 

1.16 Marcus Bay (34°40'S., 20°15'E.) is entered between 

Struispunt and Hooppunt, about 5 miles NE. The bay has rocky 

patches in it, but in N and NW winds, it affords shelter similar 

to that of Struisbaai. 

1.16 Hooppunt (34°37'S., 20°19'E.), a slight bulge in the sandy 

coastline, about midway between Struispunt and Marthapunt, 

may be identified by two bare high and pointed sand hills lying 

close behind it. Between these two points the bottom is generally foul and there is no recognized anchorage. Within 2 miles 

of the coast confused and breaking seas occur during bad 

weather and no vessel should enter the area without local 

Courtesy of Simon Baillie-Cooper

Cape Agulhas Light
14 Sector 1. South Africa—The Cape of Good Hope to Cape Recife 

Pub. 171

knowledge.

1.16 Atlas Reef (34°37'S., 20°21'E.), with a charted depth of 

5.5m, lies about 1.8 miles E of Hooppunt.

1.16 Cape Infanta (34°28'S., 20°52'E.) is a narrow comparatively-low promontory fringed by rocks, extends some 0.5 mile 

SE. A small bay, with sandy beaches at their heads, is situated 

on either side of the cape. A light stands on a point 1.3 miles 

WSW of Cape Infanta. A radiobeacon transmits from a position close to the light. 

1.16 Saint Sebastian Bay is entered between Cape Infanta and 

Cape Barracouta. The W part of the bay affords shelter from all 

winds, except those from the E and S.

1.16 Saint Sebastian Point (34°26'S., 20°52'E.) is a bold headland, 66m high. It is fringed with rocks, extending 0.1 mile offshore, with depths of 15m at a distance of 0.3 mile from the 

point.

1.16 The recommended anchorage is about 0.8 mile N of Saint 

Sebastian Point, in depths of 14 to 15m, sand.

1.16 Cape Barracouta (34°26'S., 21°18'E.) is a rounded point, 

which may be identified by a prominent reddish-colored sand 

patch extending between 1 and 2 miles NW of it. From E the 

cape appears as a low tongue of land extending S; it is not 

prominent from S or W. 

1.16 Cape Barracouta should be passed by a distance of at least 3 

miles, keeping in depths of 50m or more. 

1.16 Caution should be exercised, as a depth of 31m was reported 

in position 34°43.8'S, 20°39.1'E.

1.17 Oribi Oil Field (35°14'S., 21°30'E.), consisting of a 

floating production platform and a mooring buoy, is best seen 

on the chart.

1.17 Between Cape Barracouta and Leven Point, a prominent 

bluff 3.5 miles ENE, and then to Morris Point, 3.5 miles farther 

ENE, the coast is rocky and indented with several small bays. 

A high reddish-colored sand patch, prominent from SE, extends for 2 miles along the coast between Leven Point and 

Morris Point.

1.17 Stillbaai (34°23'S., 21°26'E.) is entered between Morris 

Point, a low sandy point fringed with rocks, and a group of 

rocks 2 miles NE. A reef of rocks, awash and below water, extends 0.7 mile SSE from Morris Point. During the prevailing 

SW winds of winter there is good anchorage for small craft under the lee of Morris Point and the reef. During the summer, 

when the SE wind prevails, the anchorage is not safe.

1.17 Ystervarkpunt (34°24'S., 21°44'E.), marked by a light, is 

situated 14.5 miles E of Morris Point. The point is somewhat 

lower than the coastline to the W of it and is fringed with reefs 

on which the sea breaks heavily. A rounded hill 210m high, rises 1 mile NNW of Ystervarkpunt, and Aasvoelberg rises to a 

height of 492m 11 miles NNW.

1.17 Kanon Point (Cape Vacca) (34°20'S., 21°55'E.) lies 10 

miles ENE of Ystervarkpunt. Care must be taken in rounding 

this low cape at night, as it is only just within the range of Cape 

St. Blaize Light, which is not visible when bearing greater than 

052° or about 0.5 mile outside Kanon Point. If the light is not 

seen, keep in depths of 40m or more. An ODAS buoy lies 6.5 

miles SE of Kanon Point. This buoy has no navigational significance.

1.17 Oil Production Platform FA, marked by a light and a racon, 

stands 40.5 miles SSE of Kanon Point. Two other lighted platforms stand 9 and 10 miles NW of Platform FA. Submarine gas 

pipelines connect all three platforms. 

1.17 Caution.—A submarine gas pipeline runs NNW from 

Kanon Point to a point on the coast midway betweenVlees 

Point and Pinnacle Point. 

1.18 Veelisbaai (34°19'S., 21°56'E.) is entered between 

Kanon Point and Vlees Point. The bay affords temporary shelter during NW gales. Vlees Point may be recognized by a flesh 

colored patch of sand.

1.18 Visbaai is entered between Vlees Point and Pinnacle Point. 

The bay may be used by vessels seeking shelter from NW 

gales, the best anchorage being in the W part, in 12.8 or 14.6m, 

with Flesh Point bearing about 157°, distant 1.2 miles and the 

same distance offshore. 

1.18 It is advisable for vessels to put to sea as soon as the gale 

subsides, for then a heavy SW swell sets in and causes a dangerous breaking sea.

1.18 Cape St. Blaize (34°11'S., 22°10'E.) is a bluff about 76m 

high. Just below the bluff is a conspicuous whitewashed rock. 

West of Cape St. Blaize, vessels should be careful not to shut in 

the light nor should they stand into a depth less than 46m. 

Blinder Rock, with a depth of 3.7m, lies about 0.5 mile ESE of 

Cape St. Blaize.

Mosselbaai (34°11'S., 22°09'E.)

World Port Index No. 46800

1.19 Mosselbaai is entered between Cape St. Blaize and 

the mouth of Groot-Brakrivier. The port consists of a town and 

a small artificial harbor formed by breakwaters.

1.19 Winds—Weather.—Mosselbaai affords excellent shelter to 

vessels during the winter months, May to October, when heavy 

NW gales are of frequent occurrence. If the winds veer to W 

and WSW, it sometimes happens that a heavy SW swell sets into the bay. As ground swells develop quickly, vessels should 

not anchor in less than 14.6m.

1.19 During the summer season, October to May, moderate SW 

winds are common, but it is the season when SE gales may be 

expected. When they occur, the bay is exposed to the full effect 

of the open sea.

1.19 Depths—Limitations.—The harbor is protected on the E by 

a breakwater and a mole which extends for 0.3 mile NNW 

from the shore and on the W by a mole extending approximately 0.1 mile NE from the shore. 

1.19 The harbor entrance has been dredged to a depth of 8m over 

a width of 100m. The outer part of the harbor has been dredged 

to 7.5m and the inner part to 6m. Quay No. 1 has been dredged 

to 1.7m, Quay No. 2 has been dredged to 2.7m, and Quay No. 

3 has been dredged to 5.5m. Vincent Jetty, with depths of 4m to 

6m, projects from the head of the harbor. Quay No. 4, the main 

commercial quay, is on the SE side of the wide mole and has an 

alongside depth of 7.5m, with the exception of the mole head. 

Quay No. 5, with depths of 5m alongside, lies close W of the 

head of Vincent Jetty.

1.19 In the open bay, at the oil terminal, tankers up to 30,000 dwt 

with a maximum length of204m, can be accommodated. There 

are no restrictions at the anchorage.

1.19 The offshore oil terminal is situated NE of Seal Island. The 
Sector 1. South Africa—The Cape of Good Hope to Cape Recife 15

Pub. 171

seaward end of a submarine pipeline, connected to the shore, is 

marked by a buoy, moored about 0.6 mile NE of Seal Island. A 

prohibited area, with a radius of 500m, is centered on the buoy. 

1.19 The depths at the berth are from 15 to 18m, sandy bottom. 

There are five mooring buoys at the terminal. Berthing is normally only carried out by day. Normal seamanlike precautions 

must be taken at all times as the berth is an open roadstead and 

strong winds may spring up with little warning.

1.19 A lighted SPM, connected to the shore by a submarine oil 

pipeline, lies about 1.2 miles ENE of Seal Island.

1.19 Aspect.—A stadium stands 0.5 mile Wof Cape St. Blaize 

Light. A church spire on a hill stands 0.7 mile WNW of the stadium. A radio mast stands close WNW of Cape St. Blaize 

Light; a school building stands a little farther WSW of the radio mast. Conspicuous tanks backed by a chimney stand 0.7 

mile WNW of Seal Island.

1.19 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for tankers berthing at the 

offshore oil terminal and for all merchant ships entering Mosselbaai Harbor. A 1 hour notice must be given to the Port Captain by VHF. Port Control can be contacted 7 days a week on 

VHF channel 16 only from 0600 to 2300. The working channel 

is VHF channel 12. The pilot embarks about 2 miles N of Cape 

St. Blaize.

1.19 It is important that tankers bound for the oil terminal give the 

Harbor Master at least 3 day’s notice of their ETA at the terminal. They should, when within range, establish radio contact 

through Cape St. Blaize Light on VHF channel 16.

1.19 Regulations.—Port regulations are furnished to vessels on 

arrival. The general regulations for the harbors of the Republic 

of South Africa are in force.

1.19 Anchorages.—Vessels may anchor in Mosselbaai, with Seal 

Island bearing 276°, distant 1.5 miles, in depths of 20 to 22m, 

mud and sand.

1.19 Anchoring is prohibited in the vicinity of the offshore terminal, as indicated on the chart.

1.19 Caution.—A dumping ground is situated S of Seal Island; 

its limits may be seen on the chart.

Mosselbaai to Knysna Harbor

1.20 The Outeniqua Mountains lie parallel to the coast, 

about 10 miles inland between Mosselbaai and Knysna. The 

most prominent of these peaks, providing good marks in clear 

weather, are:

1. Engelsberg (33°52'S., 22°08'E.), rising to a height of 

1,522m about 19 miles N of Cape St. Blaize.

2. Jonkersberg, a peak 1,449m high, lying 1 mile S of 

Skurweberg (33°53'S., 22°14'E.), 1,466m high.

3. Cradocksberg (33°54'S., 22°28'E.), 1,580m high, 

and Melville Peak, 1,299m high, 4.5 miles ESE of Cradocksberg.

1.20 From the mouth of Groot-Brakrivier (34°03'S., 22°15'E.), a 

sandy beach extends 4 miles E. Rocky ledges front the coast 

for the first mile, then the beach appears to be free of rocks, but 

is normally surf bound.

1.20 Herold’s Bay is a slight indentation in the high cliffs, 7.5 

Courtesy of Simon Baillie-Cooper

Cape St. Blaize Light
16 Sector 1. South Africa—The Cape of Good Hope to Cape Recife 

Pub. 171

miles E of Groot-Brakrivier.

1.20 Between Herold’s Bay (34°03'S., 22°28'E.) and Victoria 

Bay, the coast is rugged, with steep cliffs up to 75m high and 

intersected with narrow ravines.

1.20 Victoria Bay (34°00'S., 22°33'E.) is rockbound, except for a 

small sandy beach at its head, where landing can be effected in 

calm weather; only small boats should attempt to enter the bay.

1.20 Gerickepunt (34°02'S., 22°46'E.) is a prominent bluff, 

162m high, at the E end of a ridge of high sandstone cliffs, 

which have a reddish color. These high cliffs extend about 0.6 

mile E of the point and terminate abruptly.

1.20 Caution.—A submerged rock, with a depth of 0.9m, lies 3.5 

miles ESE of Gerickepunt; another submerged rock, with a 

depth of 5.2m, lies 0.6 mile farther SE. Rocks, which always 

break, lie 1.8 miles W of Walker Point. The sea breaks up to 1 

mile offshore in some areas of this coast, but not always to the 

seaward limit of the foul area.

1.20 Between Gerickepunt and Walker Point, it is advisable to 

keep at least 2.5 miles offshore and in depths of more than 

40m. 

1.21 Walker Point (34°06'S., 22°59'E.), the W entrance 

point to Buffalo Bay (Buffels Bay), is a low rocky point 0.8 

mile long. A chain of above and below water rocks extends 0.3 

mile from the extremity of the point, where there is a solitary 

outcrop 1.5m high.

1.21 The land to the N of Walker Point consists of scrub-covered 

hillocks backed by bare grassy hills rising to heights over 

275m. 

1.21 Dalgleish Bank (34°11'S., 22°58'E.) is of coral formation 

and has a least charted depth of 26m. Deep-draft vessels should 

pass well S of this steep-to bank.

1.21 Buffalo Bay is entered between Walker Point and Castle 

Rock, a boulder, 10m high close to shore, 2.3 miles NE. The 

buildings of a hotel and a nearby sand patch situated on the 

high ground immediately above Castle Rock, are prominent.

1.21 During NW winds small craft may obtain sheltered anchorage in Buffalo Bay, 0.6 mile NNE of Walker Point, in 9 to 14m, 

clay. If the wind backs to S of W it is advisable to put to sea 

immediately as a heavy swell and breaking sea usually set in.

1.21 Between Castle Rock and the entrance to Knysna Harbor, the 

coast consists of high rocky cliffs, fronted by rocky ledges and 

backed by a range of bush-covered hills, rising to a height of 

200m or more.

1.22 Knysna Harbor (34°05'S., 23°03'E.) is entered between the steep and rocky headlands of Western Head and 

Eastern Head. The port consists of a town and a small natural 

harbor.

1.22 Tides—Currents.—The time of HW in Knysna Harbor is 3 

hours and 30 minutes; spring tides rise 1.9m.

1.22 The incoming current sets strongly from the SE toward Needles Point, then runs directly through the narrows, but the outgoing current, from abreast Green Point, sets directly toward 

Fountain Point, and the rocks between that point and Inner 

Obelisk Point, and then follows the channel, but bearing to the 

E unless there is a strong W current outside, in which case, it 

sets directly seaward.

1.22 With a heavy sea on the bar, near HW and LW, the force of 

the break drives large quantities of water toward Emu Rock, 

this setting strongly out again close to the W shore, outside the 

inner bar. It is therefore advisable, before taking the bar with a 

breaking sea, that the incoming current should have made at 

least 2 hours, at which time the current and the break act together, and the drawback is not felt.

1.22 Depths—Limitations.—The outer bar at the entrance has a 

depth of 5.5m and the inner bar has 4.1m, the depth between 

them being 8.2m. Within the bar the river deepens to 15.5m, 

the general depths being from 4.5 to 9.1m abreast Steinbok Island, but the width of the anchoring space is only about 0.2 

mile, being reduced by a sand bank off the W side of that island. Off Knysna, the depths are from 3 to 7.9m and vessels 

that can cross the bar can proceed to this anchorage.

1.22 Aspect.—The locality may be identified by Spitzkop Mountain, 937m high, and the five passes E of it, which rise about 10 

miles NNE of the entrance, and by Krantz Hoek, 279m high, 9 

miles E of the entrance and less than 1 mile inland, fronted by a 

bluff, 169m high, rising steeply from the sea.

1.22 There is a large timber factory, with two conspicuous chimneys, on Paarden Island. A radio mast stands 1 mile NW of the 

harbor entrance.

1.22 Pilotage.—There is no pilot service for Knysna Harbor.

1.22 Caution.—The entrance is between Needles Point on the W 

and the dangers lying between the Mewstone and Outer Obelisk Point on the E.

1.22 Black Rocks, on which the sea always breaks, form a cluster 

extending about 0.1 mile from the W entrance point, and 0.4 

mile E of these is the Mewstone, a little more than 0.1 mile off 

the E entrance point. Southeast Rocks form a cluster about 0.4 

mile SE of the Mewstone.

1.22 Emu Rock, with a depth of 1.2m, and on which the sea does 

not always break, lies nearly midway between the inner and 

outer bars in a position about 0.2 mile SW of Inner Obelisk 

Point.

Knysna Harbor to Cape Recife

1.23 From the entrance to Knysna Harbor to the Noetzie 

River, the coast consists of rugged red cliffs, from 60 to 75m 

high, with patches of shingle beach and off-lying rocks extending as much as 0.5 mile from the cliffs in places. Between the 

Noetzie River and Cape Seal, the coast continues as steep sided 

cliffs rising to over 120m. Off these cliffs several detached boulders rise from the sea; some are covered with vegetation and 

some are bare, and some rise as high as the cliffs themselves.

1.23 The deep gorge of the Kranzhoek River, which enters the sea 

5 miles E of the Noetzie River, is easily identified. The land between the two rivers is heavily wooded, rising from the cliffs to 

elevations of more than 250m.

Cape Seal (34°06'S., 23°25'E.) is the extremity of a heavily 

wooded narrow peninsula with rugged cliffs on each side; it 

projects 2 miles ESE from the coast. A break in the cliffs near 

the mainland gives the peninsula the appearance of an island 

from certain directions.

1.23 Whale Rock, a patch of below water rocks with a least depth 

of 1.2m lies between 0.3 and 0.5 mile E of Cape Seal. The sea 

nearly always breaks, but on occasions it is deceptively calm.

1.24 Plettenbergbaai (34°05'S., 23°25'E.) is entered between Cape Seal and Komkromma Point. There is no regular 
Sector 1. South Africa—The Cape of Good Hope to Cape Recife 17

Pub. 171

tidal current in the bay.

1.24 Vessels may obtain shelter in the bay, when the sea is too 

high for Mosselbaai, but, like other bays on this coast, it is exposed to the full force of SE gales, which blow violently and 

frequently, from September to March. A vessel should always 

be prepared to leave this anchorage on any indication of one of 

these gales.

1.24 Anchorage.—The usual anchorage for vessels loading timber is about 0.5 mile SE of the ledge of rocks off the Pisang 

River. There is good anchorage, in about 46m, with Cape Seal 

Light bearing 210°, 4 miles distant.

1.24 Directions.—There are no dangers in entering or leaving the 

bay, except for Whale Rock, which should be given a berth of 1 

mile. There would be considerable risk in attempting the channel between it and Cape Seal. The S end of the long sandy 

beach S of the Pisang River, open NE of the peninsula, bearing 

about 280°, leads N of the rock.

1.24 Between Komkromma Point and Cape St. Francis, the coast 

is dangerous and has been the scene of several wrecks, as the 

proximity of the mountain chain to the coast, and the prevailing 

winds occasionally cause dense fogs, and there is an occasional 

and sometimes unpredictable current, which sets onto the 

shore.

1.24 Aspect.—Along this coast from Kromkromma Point to Cape 

St. Francis there are several peaks which are well-defined and 

easily identified. These peaks rise from the mountain ranges, 

which parallel the coast and lie from 4 to 7 miles inland; they 

are named from W to E in paragraph 1.25 below.

1.25 Thumb Peak (33°51'S., 23°37'E.), so called from its 

shape, is 1,407m high and rises about 18.5 miles NNE of Cape 

Seal. Formosa Peak, 4 miles ESE of Thumb Peak, is 1,674m 

high.

1.25 Grenadierskop (33°55'S., 23°43'E.) rises to a height of 

988m about midway between Formosa Peak and the coast; it is 

another peak, with a descriptive name.

1.25 Witelsbos (33°58'S., 24°06'E.) is a pyramidal peak, 1,254m 

high; it presents a flat top when seen from SE or SW.

1.25 Blouberg appears saddle shaped when seen from the S; from 

other directions it appears to be flat topped. It rises to a height 

of 923m. 

1.25 Kruisfontein (33°57'S., 24°41'E.), a double peak, 788m 

high, lying 17 miles NNW of Cape St. Francis, and Klipfonteinberg, lying 5 miles NNE of Kruisfontein, are the most 

prominent peaks to the N of Cape St. Francis.

1.25 Tsitsikama Point (34°10'S., 24°30'E.) is a low shelving illdefined point, backed by sandhills; rocks and breakers extend 

at least 0.8 mile offshore. Because of the nature of the point 

and the currents which occasionally set onto it, numerous vessels have been wrecked in the vicinity. Deep draft vessels 

should avoid a 26m coral patch lying about 5.2 miles SW of the 

point.

1.25 Seal Point (34°13'S., 24°50'E.) is low and rocky with both 

awash and below water rocks close to the extremity of the 

point. A reef, which nearly always breaks, lies 0.4 mile SE of 

the point and foul rocky ground extends 0.8 mile farther SE.

1.26 Cape St. Francis (34°12'S., 24°52'E.), 2 miles NE of 

Seal Point, is a narrow rocky promontory, which can be identified by two bush covered dunes, with a bare sand ridge between them. A ledge of boulders up to 4m high, lies at the 

extremity of the cape and merges into a reef, with rocks awash 

and below water. This reef extends 0.3 mile SE and is usually 

clearly marked by breakers.

1.26 Directions.—Vessels traveling E should pass at least 2 miles 

S of Seal Point in depths of 100m. If traveling W, it is advisable 

to keep farther offshore in order to take advantage of the current. If rounding Cape St. Francis to enter Krombaai, pass 2 

miles off the cape in depths of 30 to 50m.

1.27 From Cape St. Francis, the coast trends in a general 

ENE direction to Cape Recife. The sandy shores of St. Francis 

Bay and the rock bound coast W of Cape Recife are backed by 

sand hills, which for the most part are bush-covered. The 

mountain ranges, inland, provide a prominent backdrop.

1.27 Directions.—Vessels making a transit between these two 

capes should, by day, keep from 2 to 3 miles offshore; an indraft often sets towards the coast between Chelsea Point 

(34°03'S., 25°38'E.) and Cape Recife, 4 miles ENE. It is advisable to pass at least 3 miles S of these points.

1.27 At night or in poor visibility keep in depths of more than 

80m to Classen Point when a depth of more than 100m should 

be maintained until E of Cape Recife.

1.27 A lighted buoy marks an underwater instrument site 1.2 

miles N of Cape St. Francis.

1.27 St. Francis Bay, an extensive bay which recedes NW about 

10 miles, is entered between Cape St. Francis and Classen 

Point. There are no known off-lying dangers in this bay, which 

includes Krombaai and Jeffreys Bay along its W shore and Kabeljousbaai at its NW head.

1.27 Sphinx Peak (33°48'S., 25°05'E.) and Brak River Hill, a 

double peak 10 miles SE of Sphinx Peak, are conspicuous. A 

conspicuous radio tower stands close E of Brak River Hill’s E 

peak. 

Courtesy of Simon Baillie-Cooper

Cape Recife Light
18 Sector 1. South Africa—The Cape of Good Hope to Cape Recife 

Pub. 171

1.28 Krombaai (Kromme Bay) (34°10'S., 24°52'E.) is entered between Cape St. Francis and Seekoeipunt. A conspicuous water tower, stands on the coast about 1 mile SW of 

Seekoeipunt. The bay affords good anchorage, in 16 to 18m, 

sandy bottom, with Cape St. Francis bearing 180°, distant 

about 2 miles, and about the same distance off the mouth of the 

Krom River. The shelter is good in W gales, but the bay is not 

safe with E winds; SW winds are the worst for swells.

1.28 A below water reef extends 0.2 mile E from the head of the 

bay; the bottom is generally rocky in the N part, between this 

reef and the Krom River. Shallow water extends, 0.7 mile offshore close S of the mouth of the river.

Seekoeipunt (34°05'S., 24°55'E.) lies at the seaward end of a 

range of dark, bush-covered sand dunes. A reef, awash in places extends 0.5 mile SE from the point and foul ground, which 

breaks except in the calmest weather, extends 1.5 miles farther 

SE. Vessels should pass Seekoeipunt at a distance of 3 miles by 

day, and at night should keep in depths of 30m or more.

1.28 Classen Point (34°02'S., 25°26'E.), the E entrance point to 

St. Francis Bay, may be identified by a few huts backed by 

bush covered sand dunes. A ledge of rocks extends 0.2 mile SE 

of the point.

1.28 Between Classen Point and Cape Recife, the bottom is foul 

and rocky in depths less than 20m.

1.28 Lovemore Hill, 210m high, rises 1.7 miles NNW of Classen 

Point; a large prominent building stands on the summit. A conspicuous radio tower stands 4 miles NNE of Lovemore Hill.

1.28 Chelsea Point, 4 miles E of Shoenmakerskop, is low-lying. 

Drying rocky ledges extend 0.2 mile seaward, and the sea 

breaks heavily over an extensive below-water reef situated between 0.5 to 0.7 mile ESE of the point.

1.28 Botha Kop (34°00'S., 25°31'E.) is a sparsely-wooded hill, 

282m high; when seen from the E, it has an appearance of a 

bluff.

1.29 Cape Recife (34°02'S., 25°42'E.) is low, but Recife 

Hillock, 0.8 mile WNW, rises to a height of 44m, and is often 

seen before the lighthouse; from a distance the hillock may appear as the termination of the coastline. Cape Recife Light, 

28m high, is a major light exhibited at the extremity of Cape 

Recife.

1.29 A conspicuous building situated 2 miles NW of Cape Recife 

Light is likely to be the first object sighted when approaching 

the cape from the S by day.

1.29 Thunderbolt Reef, a patch of rocks with depths less than 2m, 

lies 0.8 mile SSW of the light. The sea generally breaks on this 

reef, which extends up to 0.6 mile SE of Cape Recife.

1.29 Caution.—Vessels should not attempt to approach Cape Recife or Thunderbolt Reef within a distance of 2 miles because 

of the strong set toward them.
19

Pub. 171

2. 

South Africa and Mozambique—Cape Recife to Ponta da Barra

2.0Additional chart coverage may be found in NGA/DLIS Catalog of Maps, Charts, and Related Products (Unlimited Distribution).

SECTOR 2 — CHART INFORMATION
21

Pub. 171

SECTOR 2 

SOUTH AFRICA AND MOZAMBIQUE—CAPE RECIFE TO PONTA DA BARRA

2.0 Plan.—This sector describes the SE coast of Africa from 

Cape Recife to Ponta Da Barra, a distance of about 823 miles 

NE.

General Remarks 

2.1 From off the vicinity of Cape Padrone (33°46'S., 

26°28'E.), the most conspicuous features are Nanquas Kop 

(Nankooskop), which is 300m in height, and the high sand hills 

to the W, toward Woody Cape. Nanquas Kop, when seen from 

the S, appears flat-topped, but, proceeding E, it assumes a conical form, and is the most conspicuous feature on this part of the 

coast. It is recommended that vessels give this coast a berth of 4 

to 5 miles.

2.1 The coast between the port of East London (33°02'S., 

27°55'E.) and the Mbashe River (Bashee River) is a succession 

of rocky points, with sandy beaches between them. In general 

the coast is rugged and backed by high hills, but in places consists of perpendicular cliffs.

2.1 The coast between the Mbashe River and Port St. Johns is 

backed for the first 35 miles by a coastal ridge, 152 to 213m 

high, about 1 to 1.5 miles inland.

2.1 From Port St. Johns the coast continues being high as far as 

Waterfall Bluff (31°26'S., 29°48'E.), but NE the land slopes 

gently from a ridge, about 335 to 366m high, about 2 to 3 miles 

inland.

Cape Recife to Port Elizabeth 

2.2 From Cape Recife (34°02'S., 25°42'E.) to Cape Padrone, the coast recedes and forms a large bay. In general, the 

coast is formed by sand beaches, backed by sand dunes which 

rise to heights of 175m.

2.2 Algoa Bay is entered between Cape Recife and Woody Cape 

(33°46'S., 26°20'E.). The bay is open to the full force of SE 

gales, which are frequent between October and March. At the 

height of these gales, a heavy breaking sea rolls into the anchorage off Port Elizabeth, but vessels with plenty of chain out 

should ride easily.

2.2 Tides—Currents.—To the S of the Bird Islands, the current 

is constantly SW and strong; a set towards the islands may be 

experienced. Within Algoa Bay there is frequently a countercurrent, particularly after SE gales, and the result may cause 

onshore sets. Within Algoa Bay tidal currents are negligible.

2.2 Caution.—Projectiles and mustard gas containers were 

dumped about 14 miles S of Cape Recife. These have spread 

over a considerable area between Cape St. Francis (34°12'S., 

24°52'E.) and the Bird Islands (33°51'S., 25°17'E.) out to 

depths of 400m.

2.2 Riy Bank (34°00'S., 25°53'E.), lying about 9 miles ENE of 

Cape Recife, is rocky and foul; it has a least depth of 11.6m. 

All ships, other than fishing vessels, should keep well clear of 

this bank, which is normally marked by overfalls and broken 

water.

2.2 Unexploded ordnance has been reported to exist in a depth of 

117m, about 24 miles ESE of Cape Recife.

Port Elizabeth (33°58'S., 25°37'E.)

World Port Index No. 46820

2.3 Port Elizabeth is located in the SW part of Algoa Bay, 

about 5 miles NW of Cape Recife. The port comprises an outer 

anchorage and a harbor enclosed by the S breakwater and the 

Charl Malan Quay.

The limits of the port are bound on the S by a line drawn for 

1 mile E, from Cape Recife, on the N by a line drawn for 1 mile 

E of extreme point of the N bank of the Zwartkops River, and 

on the E by line joining the extremities of the above lines. The 

W boundary is along the foreshore between HW and LW 

marks from Cape Recife and the point on the N bank of the 

Zwartkops River including that part of the river that lies on the 

seaward side of the railway bridge crossing the river.

2.3 Winds—Weather.—East and SE gales, the only dangerous 

winds in Algoa Bay, occur in the months from October to 

April, the worst weather usually happening at the beginning 

and close of the season. In the winter months the wind seldom 

blows from these quarters, except in the rare case, when what 

is known locally as a Black Southeast comes on; the appearance of the sky and sea give sufficient warning of the rain and 

thick weather, which follows. The Black Southeast is sometimes violent but does not last long.

2.3 The approach of summer gales are, to a certain extent, foretold by the irregular oscillation of the barometer which falls before the wind increases. A damp cold air prevails, and there is a 

constant hazy appearance about the horizon, the upper parts of 

the sky remain clear. Should the barometer be at 1030 mb, and 

cirrus clouds appear, a SE gale will set in before 24 hours have 

elapsed. Or if the hills N of Port Elizabeth are obscured by 

haze, a gale from the same quarter may be expected. Gales 

from this quarter rarely occur during the month of April.

2.3 With the gale at its height, a heavy and dangerous breaking 

sea rolls in, but vessels with plenty of chain generally ride easily; and, from the strong E set which prevails near the shore 

during these gales, it is probable that a powerful undertow assists to relieve the strain.

2.3 A seiche has been observed at Port Elizabeth.

2.3 Tides—Current.—A strong current is often experienced after passing Cape Recife. Allowance should be made for it in 

passing Roman Rock, about 1.5 miles NNW of Cape Recife 

Light, and no attempt should be made to pass between the rock 

and the mainland.

2.3 Depths—Limitations.—The approach channel will be kept 

dredged to a depth of 14.5m from its seaward end, which is 

about 2 miles NE of the S breakwater light. The entrance between S breakwater and Charl Malan Quay is 0.2 mile wide 

with a dredged depth of 14m, in 1976.

2.3 The maximum length of passenger, dry cargo, and container 
22 Sector 2. South Africa and Mozambique—Cape Recife to Ponta da Barra 

Pub. 171

vessels are subject to the Port Captain’s prior approval; the 

maximum draft for these vessels is 11.6m. Tankers are limited 

to a length of 203m and a maximum draft of 9.3m. Ore carriers 

are limited to a length of251m and a maximum draft of 11.6m. 

There are facilities for container and ro-ro vessels.

2.3 Aspect.—The red roof of the golf club house, 2 miles NW of 

Cape Recife Light, is conspicuous when viewed from the E. 

The large green-painted Holiday Inn, with its distinctive sign, 

is located about 1 mile NNW of the club house.

2.3 A white octagonal tower, 26m high, stands on a hill 1.2 miles 

WSW from the head of the S breakwater. A conspicuous hospital is situated 2.2 miles WNW of the tower; a prison stands 2.3 

miles NNE of the hospital. A conspicuous chimney stands 2.9 

miles NW of the S breakwater head; another chimney stands 

0.6 mile farther N.

2.3 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory, except for vessels exempted by law, and is available during daylight hours.

2.3 Inbound vessels should send their ETA and draft 72 hours 

and 12 hours in advance.

2.3 Vessels should confirm the ETA with Port Control when 

within VHF range and when 16 miles E of the breakwater (for 

vessels approaching from the E) or 3.5 miles S of Cape Recife 

(for vessels approaching from the W).

2.3 The pilot boards in position 33°55.6'S, 25°40.9'E, about 2.5 

miles NE of South Breakwater Head

2.3 Regulations.—The Traffic Separation Scheme (TSS). Vessels approaching from the W, except those vessels using the Inshore Traffic Zone, should make for a position 4.5 miles E of 

Cape Recife Light and then follow the TSS shown on the chart 

leading to the anchorages, the Precautionary Area, and the pilot 

boarding point.

2.3 Vessels approaching from the E, except those vessels using 

the Inshore Traffic Zone, should join the TSS from a position 

10 miles NE of Cape Recife Light.

2.3 All VTS regulations that pertain to South African ports are 

found in Pub. 160, Sailing Directions (Planning Guide) South 

Atlantic Ocean and Indian Ocean.

2.3 Anchorage.—Designated anchorages for differing classes of 

vessels, best seen on the chart, are as follows.

1. Anchorage No. 1—Small craft.

2. Anchorage No. 2—Non-hazardous cargo vessels.

3. Anchorage No. 3—Hazardous cargo.

Port Elizabeth to Cape Padrone

2.4 The Zwartkops River, about 5.5 miles N of Port Elizabeth, has less than 1m over its bar at LW and the surf is frequently heavy. The river is navigable by small vessels for 8 or 9 

miles from its mouth.

2.4 Fair anchorage can be taken about 0.3 mile NW of St. Croix 

Island (33°47'S., 25°46'E.), in 18m, sand, with the W peak of 

that island bearing 140°. In this position the heavy sea caused 

by E and SE gales is considerably broken, but the extent of 

sheltered anchorage is confined to a very small space by the 

shape of the island.

2.5 Port Ngqura (33°48'S., 25°42'E.), which opened in 

2009, is a deep-water port situated approximately 9 miles NNE 

of Port Elizabeth at the mouth of the Coega River.

2.5 Depths—Limitations.—The approach channel is dredged 

to a depth of 18m. The E side of the port within the harbor 

comprises one berth and the turning basin, with depths of 18m. 

The W side comprises four berths, with depths of 16m alongside. Expansion of this terminal to allow for the handling of 

two 305m long vessels at the same time should be completed 

by July, 2011. 

2.5 Aspect.—A breakwater protects the harbor basin from the E 

and SE. Salt pans are situated on the NW side of the harbor 

within the river.

2.5 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory; the pilot boards in position 33°52.9'S, 25°42.8'E.

2.5 Anchorage.—See Port Elizabeth. 

2.6 The Bird Islands afford indifferent anchorage on the 

N side, where the holding ground is poor and uneven. With SE 

winds, a vessel can anchor, in 18m or 20m, with the lighthouse 

seen between Stag Island and Seal Island bearing 146°. This a 

good spot for shelter, but should the wind shift and become 

strong from the W, a vessel should anchor more to the E, with 

Black Rocks in range with Stag Island, about 254°, or a little 

open on either side of it, in from 14 to 18m, but the holding 

ground is bad.

Bird Island (33°50'S., 26°17'E.), the largest of the group, is 

marked by a light on its SE side. 

2.6 Anchorage is also available about 0.3 mile ENE of Bird Island, in about 6 to 9m.

Port Elizabeth

Berth Depth 

alongside

Charl Malan Quay

Berth 100 11.0m

Berth 101 11.0m

Berth 102 12.2m

Berth 103 12.2m

No. 2 Quay

Berth 8 11.0m

Berth 9 11.0m

No. 3 Quay

Berth 10 10.0m

Berth 11 10.0m

Berth 12 5.5 to 7.0m

Ore Berth

Berth 13 12.2m

Berth 14 12.2m

Oil Tanker Berth

Berth 15 9.9m

Fisheries Jetty 6.5m

Tug Jetty 7.0m
Sector 2. South Africa and Mozambique—Cape Recife to Ponta da Barra 23

Pub. 171

2.6 Directions.—If eastbound from Algoa Bay, in favorable 

weather, Bird Island Passage is recommended, as it avoids the 

SW current always running outside. The channel is 3 miles 

wide and clear of danger, the depths being from 14.6 to 31m.

2.6 Vessels using the passage at night are recommended to keep 

nearer the mainland than to the group, as the land is higher and 

more readily discerned and the constant roar of the surf more 

distinctly heard than the breakers on the rocky reefs of the 

group. With care, the lead will indicate not too near approach 

to the main shore, and vessels should generally keep in soundings of more than 18m, except off Woody Cape where patches 

of not less than 15.5m may be encountered as much as 1.5 

miles from the cape. A berth of 3 miles should be given to 

Cape Padrone, off which foul ground extends for about 1.5 

miles.

2.6 A vessel passing outside the group should not approach 

within 3 miles of the light, as no advantage is gained by it, and 

the current, though not generally strong, is uncertain and irregular, both in strength and direction, in the vicinity of the group.

2.6 Caution.—In thick weather, a vessel should not approach 

the Bird Islands in depths of less than 110m.

2.6 Cape Padrone (33°46'S., 26°28'E.) is the E extremity of a 

sandstone cliff, about 1 mile in length and from 10 to 15m 

high. Foul ground, which breaks heavily in bad weather, extends 1.5 miles S of the cape.

2.6 It is advisable for vessels to pass at least 3 miles SE of Cape 

Padrone, keeping in depths of 75m or more at night or in poor 

visibility.

Cape Padrone to Port Alfred 

2.7 From Cape Padrone, the coast trends in a general ENE 

direction to Port Alfred. The coast is indented by several coves 

and several rivers enter the sea. Coastal sand dunes, covered 

with scrub, lie behind the beach, but they are small in extent 

and not very high.

2.7 In this coastal area, the 15m curve lies from 0.4 mile to 2 

miles offshore and the 30m curve lies up to 3.5 miles offshore.

2.7 A number of unlit research buoys are established along this 

part of the coast.

2.7 Bokneskop (33°42'S., 26°34'E.), 199m high, is flat-topped 

and wooded; it rises 6.5 miles NE of Cape Padrone. Though 

less prominent than Nanquas Kop, 3 miles WSW, it nevertheless provides a useful mark for identifying the locality.

2.7 Kwaai Hoek (False Islet) (33°43'S., 26°38'E.) is a dark 

grass-covered headland, 28m high, situated 8.5 miles ENE of 

Cape Padrone. There are drying rocks located close S and E of 

the point. A cross, 5m high, stands on the point; a water tower 

stands on the coast about 2 miles WSW of the cross.

2.7 Kenton-on-Sea (33°41'S., 26°40'E.) is a resort situated on 

the high bush-covered land between the Boesmans River and 

the Kariega River. The resort is not prominent, but at night the 

lights of the hotel are usually visible from 5 to 6 miles offshore.

2.7 Glendower Peak (33°37'S., 26°49'E.), surmounted by a beacon, rises to a height of 193m. This prominent landmark is visible up to 20 miles offshore.

2.8 Port Alfred (33°36'S., 26°54'E.) is situated at the 

mouth of the Kowie River, which flows out between training 

walls; a light is exhibited at the head of the S wall. A bridge 

spans the river, about 0.5 mile within the entrance and is prominent.

2.8 Fountain Rocks, a group of drying and below-water rocks, 

lie between 0.7 and 2.1 miles E of the training wall light. 

Breakers stretch from the rocks to the shore, about 0.2 and 0.6 

mile distant, if there is any swell running.

2.8 Jansen’s Rock (33°36'S., 26°56'E.) lies, awash, 0.3 mile E 

of Fountain Rocks, but its position may not be apparent at HW 

as the sea does not always break over it.

2.8 Anchorage is available with the light at Port Alfred, bearing 

305°, about 1.5 miles distance, in a depth of 30m, sand. The 

holding ground is poor and ships at anchor should be prepared 

to put to sea immediately on the approach of bad weather.

Port Alfred to East London

2.9 Between Port Alfred and Keiskama Point, 34 miles 

NE, the coastal ridge is faced with sand and rises to heights of 

100 to 120m in places. A hill, 149m in height, located 5 miles 

ENE of Port Alfred, is prominent from SW and E. The hill’s 

summit is wooded.

2.9 The hills at Bathurst, 7 miles WNW of Port Alfred, and the 

range of mountains in the vicinity of Grahamstown, 25 miles 

NW of Port Alfred, are conspicuous.

2.9 Rietpunt (33°34'S., 27°01'E.), a low sandy point, is located 

5.7 miles ENE of Port Alfred. A reef of below water rocks, 

which usually break heavily, extends 0.8 mile SE of the point 

and there are depths of 10 to 12m, 1.5 miles offshore. Due to 

the possibility of onshore sets, Rietpunt should be given a berth 

of at least 4 miles.

2.9 Great Fish Point (33°31'S., 27°07'E.), marked by a light, is 

low, sandy, and fringed with rocks.

2.9 The Great Fish River enters the sea 3 miles NE of Great Fish 

Point; Rocky Point is the E entrance point of the river.

2.9 The waters of the Great Fish River are reddish in color and 

after a rain the sea may be discolored as far as Kowie Point, 16 

miles SW.

2.9 Maitland Hill (33°26'S., 27°09'E.), 176m high, is the highest of two grassy hills; it is visible from most directions and is a 

good mark for identifying the locality.

2.9 A dangerous rock, with a depth of 2.7m, lies just over 1 mile 

ENE of Rocky Point; in fine weather the sea seldom breaks 

over this rock.

2.9 Stalwart Point is sandy, with bush-covered sand dunes behind it. It may be identified by Maitland Hill and by a conspicuous dark hill, 112m high, lying 1 mile NW. Shoal rocky 

ground extends up to 0.8 mile seaward of the point, which 

should be given a wide berth.

2.9 A brush-covered hill, 78m high, rises 3.5 miles ENE of Stalwart Point and Skiet Kop, a prominent round-topped grassy 

hill, 165m high, stands 6.3 miles NE of the same point.

2.10 Madagascar Reef (33°23'S., 27°21'E.) lies 0.5 mile 

offshore, 7.7 miles ENE of Stalwart Point; the sea always 

breaks over this reef which dries to 1m. 

2.10 Keiskama Point (33°18'S., 27°29'E.) is low, sandy, and 

fringed with rocks. Near its extremity, is a prominent bush covered sand dune, 28m high, which resembles an islet when 
24 Sector 2. South Africa and Mozambique—Cape Recife to Ponta da Barra 

Pub. 171

viewed from the SW. A sand spit, with depths of less than 10m, 

extends 0.6 mile SE of the point; with a moderate swell the sea 

breaks heavily over this spit.

Between Keiskama Point and East London the coast consists 

of sandy beach fringed, intermittently, with rocky ledges; several large rock outcrops also occur. The coastal ridges are usually bush covered except within 5 miles W of Hood Point, 

where considerable areas have been cleared. Within the coast, 

the terrain is predominantly high, open grassland, intersected 

by the ravines of several rivers.

2.10 The 15m curve lies up to 0.8 mile off this section of the 

coast; the 30m curve lies up to 1.5 miles offshore. There are no 

charted dangers seaward of the 15m curve. A depth of 7.3m is 

charted in a position 0.5 mile SE of Keiskama Point.

2.10 The Keiskama River (33°17'S., 27°29'E.), the most prominent one on this coast, flows into the sea, 1 mile NE of Keiskama Point. Other good marks for identifying the area are Patos 

Kop, rising 9.5 miles NW of Keiskama Point; Hamburg North, 

a conspicuous hill, 166m high, 3.25 miles WNW of the same 

point; and Mount Vale (33°10'S., 27°26'E.), a prominent dark 

bluff, 283m high, situated 8 miles NNW of the mouth of the 

Keiskama River.

2.10 Cove Rock (33°05'S., 27°50'E.) is a conspicuous wedgeshaped rock, 26m high, with a deep notch in the middle. It 

forms the extremity of a sandy spit extending from Bisserton, a 

conspicuous bushy sand hill, 86m high. From a distance, Cove 

Rock resembles an islet and makes a good mark for vessels 

proceeding along the coast. 

2.10 Hood Point (33°03'S., 27°54'E.) has a conspicuous tower 

standing about 1.7 miles W of it; a radar tower, 51m high, 

stands at an elevation of 293m, about 5 miles WNW of the conspicuous tower.

East London (33°02'S., 27°55'E.)

World Port Index No. 46830

2.11 East London, the city, is situated on both banks of the 

Buffalo River; it is the principal city of the Border District of 

Cape Province.

2.11 The Port of East London comprises an outer anchorage and 

the harbor within the breakwaters at the mouth of the Buffalo 

River. The limits of the port are best seen on the chart.

2.11 Winds—Weather.—The prevailing wind direction is NE, 

the next in order of frequency is from the SW; WNW winds are 

also frequent. Winds from the N do not blow more than 2 hours 

in 3 days and winds from SE and adjacent directions are even 

less frequent. The prevailing winds blow up and down the 

Courtesy of Simon Baillie-Cooper

Great Fish Light

Courtesy of Simon Baillie-Cooper

Hood Point Light
Sector 2. South Africa and Mozambique—Cape Recife to Ponta da Barra 25

Pub. 171

coast, but neither onshore or offshore.

2.11 The annual variation is not very great, but both the NE and 

SW winds tend to turn more to the N during the colder months, 

April to August, and then to the S, between October and 

March. In July, the most frequent directions are from NNE and 

NW.

2.11 The average velocity of the wind is about 17 knots but velocities exceeding 70 knots have been known to occur in each 

month during the second half of the year. 

2.11 The weather near East London presents a marked difference 

to that on any other part of the coast. When the mercury commences to rise, on the wind shifting to the W, the crisis is accompanied by lightning, thunder, and heavy rain. If the wind 

shifts suddenly SW in a squall, with a rapidly increasing barometric pressure, a fresh gale may be expected, with fine weather, which will continue until the mercury rises to about 

1030mb.

2.11 If the barometer remains low and steady, a strong gale from 

WNW may be expected, probably lasting several days; but if 

the wind shifts slowly to the SW, the barometer rising slowly, 

with drizzling rain, a strong gale and high sea may be looked 

for.

2.11 In such a case, the wind begins to blow hard from the W, and 

veers slowly SW until the mercury stands at about 1016mb. 

The sky becomes leaden, thick drizzling rain sets in, and the 

mercury oscillates between 1016 to 1020mb, with the temperature being considerably below the average.

2.11 In June, July, and August these much dreaded SW winds often follow unsettled weather, preceded by moderate to fresh E 

breezes and a falling barometer. They blow with considerable 

violence and have caused many disasters to shipping in East 

London Roads.

2.11 The prevailing winds present severe pilotage problems to 

ships of great length with high freeboard.From October to 

April, E winds are the most prevalent, and SE gales may be expected.

2.11 Rollers, seldom setting in during the summer months, are 

frequent during the winter, and generally break in a depth of 

about 5.5m, in stormy weather in 9.1m, and sometimes even in 

12.8m or 14.6m.

2.11 Tides—Currents.—The incoming tidal current sets across 

the bar and into the river at a velocity of 0.75 knot. The outgoing current, has a velocity of about 1 knot, except during freshets, when it may be stronger. The currents turn at about the 

time of HW and LW, setting inward on the rising tide.

2.11 At the anchorage off East London, the current generally sets 

SW from 1 to 2.5 knots, but in calm weather or during strong 

SW winds the surface water is retarded and occasionally sets E 

at about 0.5 knot or even more.

2.11 Inshore, near the edge of the breakers, an eddy current frequently sets E. This current varies in strength, but seldom attains a velocity of 0.5 knot. In the offing, about 15 miles from 

the coast, the regular Agulhas Current sets steadily SW at velocities from 2 to 4 knots.

2.11 Depths—Limitations.—Passenger and dry cargo vessels 

are limited to a length of 239m, while tankers are limited to a 

length of 204m. Each class may not have a draft exceeding 

9.9m.

2.11 Container vessel berth at West Quay; ro-ro vessels berth at 

West Quay and Quays 5 and 6. The depths alongside the quays 

range from 6 to 10.7m.

2.11 The fairway between the breakwaters is maintained at a 

depth of 10.7m by dredging. It has been reported that depths of 

6.1m may exist up to 0.1 mile E of the S breakwater light.

2.11 Aspect.—Among the conspicuous marks in the approach to 

East London is the tower 3 miles W of the head of the breakwater; a grain elevator 0.6 mile WSW of the same position; a radio 

mast standing 1.2 miles WSW and a silo 0.2 mile N of the radio 

mast; and a radio tower. A building, the most prominent of several hotels on the seafront, stands 0.7 mile NNW of the head of the 

S breakwater.

2.11 The aluminum buildings, 4.5 miles NNW of the head of the 

S breakwater, shine brilliantly in the sun in the forenoon.

2.11 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for merchant vessels entering, leaving or shifting berths. A 1-hour advance notice to be 

given to the Port Captain via VHF channel 16; the working frequency is VHF channel 12. All vessels should also report by 

VHF to port control when passing reporting stations, which are 

16 miles SW and 16 miles NE of the port.

2.11 The pilot embarks 2.3 miles ENE of the harbor entrance. Except in emergency, vessels can enter the port only during daylight hours. Tankers are handled during daylight hours only.

2.11 Signals.—All traffic and weather information is communicated by VHF.

2.11 Anchorage.—The recommended anchorage, clear of the 

harbor entrance, is in a depth of about 30m, fine sand bottom, 

0.8 mile E of the S breakwater light. In fine settled weather, 

ships might anchor closer to the light on the same bearing, but 

never closer than 0.5 mile or in less water than 25m, and then 

only if remaining at anchor for a short while. 

2.11 There is anchorage for small ships, in a position 1 mile NE 

of the breakwater light and 0.3 mile clear of the range line, in a 

depth of 15m; this anchorage should only be used in fine 

weather.

2.11 The anchorage is considerably exposed and vessels generally 

lie broadside to the sea to limit the great extent of roll and 

strain. Vessels making a short stay may anchor, but any vessels 

running the risk of lying at the anchorage in bad weather 

should never be in depths less than 21m.

2.11 Directions.—Vessels from SW, having identified Cove Rock 

and Bisserton, should not approach the coast nearer than 2 

miles or in depths less than 65m until close to port. When 

Hood Point Light, the grain elevator, and the head of S breakwater have been passed abeam, course should be altered to 

steer for the pilot boarding position.

2.11 Vessels from the NE, having identified the conspicuous 

Black Beacon some 15 miles NE of the port, should keep at 

least 2.5 miles offshore until Kwelegapunt, 8 miles NE of Nahoon Point, is abeam 2.5 miles distant, when course for the pilot station may be steered for. Vessels awaiting the pilot should 

heave to, or anchor NE of the pilot station.

East London to Mbashe Point

2.12 Between East London and Mbashe Point, the coast is 

a succession of rocky points, with sandy beaches between 

them. The sea breaks heavily on these beaches and few of them 

are suitable for landing, even in fine weather. 

2.12 To distinguish the monotonous coast when viewing East 

London from the NE, a black wooden pyramidal beacon, 
26 Sector 2. South Africa and Mozambique—Cape Recife to Ponta da Barra 

Pub. 171

15.9m high, stands on a 96m hill in a position nearly 0.5 mile 

NW of Reef Point (32°51'S., 28°07'E.). 

2.12 Cape Morgan (32°42'S., 28°22'E.), marked by a light, appears from seaward as a flat-topped hill, covered with bushes. 

Vessels should give Cape Morgan a berth of at least 2 miles 

when transiting the coast. 

2.12 Shelter from NW and W winds may be obtained at from 0.5 

to 0.8 mile NE of Cape Morgan and the same distance offshore.

2.12 The Great Kei River empties about 2 miles NE of Cape Morgan. The village of Keimouth, close to the W entrance, is conspicuous. Local knowledge is essential when entering the Great 

Kei River.

2.12 Sandy Point rises rapidly to Bowkers Bluff, which has four 

distinct hills.

2.12 Bowkers Bay, NE of Sandy Point, is a bight into which a river flows. There is good anchorage, with shelter from W winds, 

in 19m, sand, 1 mile off the river; the bay being, under favorable circumstances, appeared to afford the best anchorage on 

this part of the coast. A drying rocky outcrop, lies 0.5 mile S of 

the river’s mouth.

2.12 The Mbashe River flows into the sea in position 32°15'S, 

28°54'E. Good anchorage can be obtained, in 20m, sand, ESE 

of the river entrance. 

2.12 Rollers set in after a strong W or SW breeze, occasionally 

breaking in 10.9m or 12.8m, but generally breaking off the 

mouth of the river, in 6.4m or 7.3m.

2.12 Mbashe Point (32°15'S., 28°55'E.) has a light structure 

standing on the point which appears conspicuous against the 

dark background. A radiobeacon transmits from the light structure.

Mbashe Point to Port St. Johns

2.13 Between Mbashe Point and Cape Hermes (31°38'S., 

29°33'E.), the Agulhas current is SW, but is generally much 

weaker close inshore than 2 to 3 miles to seaward. In the vicinity of Port St. John’s, however, the strength of the current is felt 

closer inshore than off any other part of this coast.

2.13 Along this section of the coast the 15m curve lies up to 0.6 

mile offshore, and the 30m curve lies up to 1.5 miles offshore. 

All charted dangers lie inside the 15m curve.

2.13 Rocks, which nearly always break, lie up to 0.8 mile off the 

mouth of the Nkanya River 4.8 miles NE of Mbashe Point.

2.13 Hole in the Wall (32°02'S., 29°07'E.) is formed by two remarkable and prominent rocks which lie at the entrance of the 

Mpako River, about 10.5 miles NE of the Nkanya River. The 

SW rock is 44m high, with a flat top, and has a natural archway 

cut through its base. The NE rock is larger, 64m high, and has a 

deep wedge-shaped cleft in its summit.

2.13 Whale Rock Point (31°56'S., 29°13'E.), 8.5 miles NE of 

Hole in the Wall, is low and has a sandy beach fringed with a 

reef. Whale Rock lies on the N part of a below water reef, 

which extends 0.4 mile SE of the point.

2.13 Rame Head (31°48'S., 29°21'E.) is a bold precipitous headland which rises to a height of 123m, 0.6 mile W of its extremity. The headland stands out prominently both N and S.

2.13 Ecingweni, a conspicuous hill, 235m high, rises 4.5 miles 

WSW of Rame Head. Mpotshotshe, 284m high, is a conspicuous dome shaped hill 3.5 miles NNW of Rame Head. It shows 

up well from the S, but is obscured from the N.

2.14 Brazen Head (31°43'S., 29°23'E.), 5 miles NE of 

Rame Head, is one of the most conspicuous features on this 

part of the coast. The cliffs rise vertically from the sea for as 

much as 150m, in places, then rise steeply to an elevation of 

200m, then slope gradually to Ndluzula Hill, 242m high, surmounted by a clump of trees, 0.5 mile inland.

2.14 Green Peaks (31°41'S., 29°28'E.) are two remarkable peaks 

0.5 mile apart lying 5 miles NE of Brazen Head. The SW peak 

is 168m high and covered with grass. The NE peak, 199m high, 

is thickly covered with bushes on its SE side and has a bare top, 

which looks like a grassy knoll when viewed from NE. Both 

peaks are prominent when viewed from the NE.

2.14 Sugarloaf Rock, a conical rock, 8m high, is connected to the 

coast, 0.5 mile E of Green Peaks, by a causeway of sand and 

rocks. It is prominent when viewed from SW or NE, close inshore, but merges with the background from a distance.

2.14 Cape Hermes (31°38'S., 29°33'E.) is formed by a round, 

grass-covered hill, 148m in height. A conspicuous white house 

with a red roof adjoins the light structure on the cape.

2.15 Port St. Johns (31°38'S., 29°33'E.) lies between Cape 

Hermes and Bluff Point. The SW part of this indentation is 

known as Gordon Bay and it is into this bay that the Umzimvubu River flows.

2.15 Close inshore, during the incoming tidal current, which runs 

regularly, a strong current has been found, setting S along the 

sandy shore inside the breakers, and along the rocky shore in 

the direction of Cape Hermes.

2.15 At the entrance of the river, there is a table mountain, 366m 

high, which appears to have been cleft to its base, leaving a 

wedge-shaped gap in the center, through, which the river flows.

2.15 Anchorage.—Gordon Bay affords fair anchorage, but is exposed to winds from NE through S to WSW. Anchorage can be 

found, in 18m, sand, good holding ground, about 0.8 mile E of 

Cape Hermes Light. Caution is necessary, as the depths are liable to constant change. More sheltered anchorage can be found 

closer in, with Cape Hermes Light, bearing 255°, distant 0.5 

mile.

Port St. Johns to North Sand Bluff

2.16 The general trend of the coastline from Port St. Johns 

to South Sand Bluff is NE. There are coves at the mouths of the 

many rivers, which empty into the sea in this area. The shore is 

fronted by bluffs, with few sandy beaches, backed by prominent coastal hills.

2.16 The 30m line lies up to 1.3 miles offshore; there are no charted dangers seaward of this line.

2.16 Care must be taken to avoid being set into the bight SW of 

Waterfall Bluff. When in this vicinity, at night, it is advisable to 

sound continuously and keep in depths of 75m or more.

2.16 Waterfall Bluff (31°26'S., 29°48'E.) lies about 17 miles NE 

of Port St. James. There are two principal waterfalls over the 

bluff; the W drops sheer into the sea but is not as conspicuous 

as the E, which is larger and drops in terraces. In the dry season, not much water flows over either falls.

2.16 The Mzintlava River, about midway between Port St. John 

and Waterfall Bluff, flows between steep banks, which are 
Sector 2. South Africa and Mozambique—Cape Recife to Ponta da Barra 27

Pub. 171

thickly wooded and rise close on the N side to a height of 

235m. Manthlonetchwa Hill (31°31'S., 29°40'E.) is a conspicuous bare hill, with two flat summits, which rises to a height of 

256m, on the S side of the river, 1 mile inland.

2.16 To the N of Waterfall Bluff, the general aspect of the land 

within the coast changes completely. The mountain ranges can 

still be seen, but close within the coast the land rises gradually 

to a ridge 335 to 365m high, lying 2 or 3 miles inland.

2.17 Lambasi Bay (31°23'S., 29°54'E.), 5.8 miles NE of 

Waterfall Bluff, is a small indentation in the coast formed at the 

mouth of the Tezana River, which enters the sea through a deep 

bush covered ravine. On the N side of the bay the houses of 

Port Grosvenor are noticeable from seaward.

2.17 Grosvenor Hill, 3 miles NNW of Lambasi Bay, is 337m 

high. The hill, which is higher than the adjacent coast, is conspicuous.

2.17 South Sand Bluff (31°19'S., 29°29'E.) is a very conspicuous 

mark. From S, it appears as a dome-shaped hill topped with 

bushes. A white sand patch, which cannot be seen when bearing less than 270°, covers its lower slopes. From N, it appears 

as a densely-wooded pyramid. The bluff is marked by a light.

Quoin Hill (31°15'S., 30°02'E.), 5.5 miles NE of South Sand 

Bluff, is 59m high, and covered with bush. The hill appears 

dark in comparison with the adjacent coast, which makes it 

conspicuous. 

2.17 Red Hill, 4 miles NNE of Quoin Hill, rises to a height of 

87m, it is a conspicuous rounded hill, about 0.3 mile inland.

2.17 The Mtamvuna River (31°05'S., 30°11'E.) enters the sea 9 

miles NE of Red Hill. The mouth of the river is spanned by a 

conspicuous bridge.

2.17 North Sand Bluff (31°03'S., 30°14'E.), about 2 miles NE of 

the mouth of the Mtamvuna River, is an isolated conical hill 

covered, with dark bushes. This conspicuous hill is 69m high 

and is especially visible from the NE; it is marked by a light.

North Sand Bluff to Green Point

2.18 Between North Sand Bluff and Margate, the coast 

consists of rocky ledges and shallow sandy bays. Several rivers 

flow into the sea along the entire coast. Northeast of Margate 

there are a number of villages and holiday resorts which may 

be identified.

2.18 Inkulu (30°59'S., 30°11'E.), 418m and 421m high, are conspicuous double peaks rising about 4.5 miles NNW of North 

Sand Bluff.

2.18 Evungo, 7 miles WNW of Margate, is a whale-shaped mountain, 550m high, with its NE end apparently terminating in a 

bold cliff. It is conspicuous from S, but becomes difficult to 

identify from N of E.

2.18 Protea Banks (30°50'S., 30°29'E.), lying offshore about 7 

miles NE of Margate, have a least depth of 26m. An isolated 

patch, with a depth of 14.6m, lies close WSW of the bank, 

about 2.5 miles offshore.

2.18 Margate (30°52'S., 30°22'E.) is a seaside resort with a conspicuous hotel. A radio mast, 412m high, stands 4 miles NW of 

town.

2.18 St. Michael’s on Sea, a resort, is situated 3 miles NE of Margate. Beach Terminus, 2.5 miles NE of St. Michael’s on Sea, is 

a resort situated on the S side of the mouth of the Izotsha River, 

which is the largest of the rivers on this stretch of coast.

2.18 Port Shepstone (30°44'S., 30°28'E.) is located on the S, and 

North Shepstone on the N bank of the Umzimkulu River; they 

are easily recognized as they are the only large villages in the 

vicinity. Port Shepstone Light is not very conspicuous. A convent, a large red building, located about 0.4 mile W of the 

lighthouse, is conspicuous from N and E, but is shut in as a 

vessel proceeds S. A radio tower stands about 0.5 mile W of 

the S entrance point of the river.

2.19 Between Port Shepstone and Green Point, 34 miles 

NE, several rivers flow into the sea, but all their mouths have 

completely been closed by sand. The coast presents few conspicuous natural features, although the various villages may be 

readily identified.

2.19 The Umzumbe River (30°37'S., 30°33'E.) flows into the sea 

about 8.8 miles NNE of Port Shepstone; a village by the same 

name stands on the S bank. A conspicuous red brick convent 

stands on a hill about 0.5 mile S of the village.

2.19 A radio tower, showing red obstruction lights, stands about 

2.5 miles NNE of the convent. About 4.5 miles NNE of the 

convent there is a red hill 106m high, in the form of a ridge; 

about 1.5 miles further NNE there is another red hill, which is 

dome shaped, that rises to a height of 102m.

2.19 The Mtwalume River (30°29'S., 30°38'E.) flows into the 

sea, between steep banks 8.5 miles NE of the Umzumbe River. 

This is the most noticeable river on this part of the coast, but it 

is obscured when close inshore. A conspicuous hotel, which is 

long and low, stands on the S entrance of the river.

2.19 At Sezela (30°24'S., 30°41'E.), 5 miles NE of the Mtwalume 

River, there are three conspicuous chimneys of a sugar mill. 

From May to December, the glare from the mill can be seen at 

night and forms a useful mark. Umdoni House, standing about 

1.5 miles NE of the sugar mill, is the only white house with a 

Courtesy of Simon Baillie-Cooper

Port Shepstone Light
28 Sector 2. South Africa and Mozambique—Cape Recife to Ponta da Barra 

Pub. 171

red gabled roof in the vicinity and is a conspicuous landmark. 

A disused whaling station, located about 4 miles NE of Umdoni House, is obscured when viewed from S, but is conspicuous 

when viewed from elsewhere.

2.19 Scottburgh (30°17'S., 30°45'E.) is a small village. Vessels 

should be careful not to confuse the glare of the sugar mill at 

Sezela with this village at night. A beacon stands at an 

elevation of 48m on a hill near the shore at Scottburgh. A radio 

tower stands about 1 mile WSW of the beacon. A water tower 

stands near the coast 1 mile N of Scottburg.

2.19 Green Point (30°15'S., 30°47'E.) has a dark wooded hill, 

rising to an elevation of 110m, 0.6 mile inland from its extremity. Although the lighthouse on Green Point can be seen from a 

great distance in clear weather, burning of sugarcane and grass 

takes place at times and may cause a haze over the lighthouse 

and adjacent coast. A beacon, stands about 0.3 mile ESE of the 

lighthouse; the lighthouse and beacon, in range 285°, indicate 

the position of Aliwal Shoal.

2.19 Aliwal Shoal (30°15'S., 30°50'E.) is the extremity of a shoal 

area, known as The Ridge, which extends ESE then NE from 

Scottburgh. The least depth of Aliwal Shoal, 2.7m, lies 2.8 

miles, ESE of the light on Green Point; it lies in the red sector 

of that light. The sea breaks on the shoal. A wreck, with a 

depth of 2m over the remains, lies close N of the 2.7m depth.

2.19 Currents.—Currents in the Aliwal Shoal area are generally 

uncertain, but a weak current, setting WSW across the shoal, 

may be encountered. Occasionally the counter current of the 

Agulhas Current may be experienced, particularly between the 

shoal and the coast.

2.19 Vessels enroute in this area by day should be able to transit 

the passage inside Aliwal Shoal, provided that the strength and 

direction of the current are accurately determined.

2.19 At night, vessels are recommended to pass outside the shoal, 

keeping in depths of 50m or more.

Green Point to Durban

2.20 Between Green Point and Durban, numerous rivers 

flow into the sea, but with the exception of the Umkomaas River, all have their mouths closed by sand.

2.20 The Umkomaas River (30°12'S., 30°48'E.) is open at its 

mouth but, due to its constant surf, it cannot be entered. The 

river is spanned by a prominent road and rail bridge.

2.20 Two hotels in the holiday resort, on the S bank of the Umkomaas River, are conspicuous.

2.20 Anchoring is prohibited, within an area 1 mile wide, extending 2 miles ESE, from the mouth of the Umkomaas River.

2.20 Illovo Spit (30°09'S., 30°52'E.), a bank with depths from 

12.8 to 17.3m, extends 2 miles offshore, about 2.8 miles SSE 

of the mouth of the Illovo River. A conspicuous water tower 

stands close SW of the mouth of the Lovu River.

2.20 A conspicuous hotel stands on a hill, 101m high, 3 miles 

NNE of the Lovu River water tower. A conspicuous Y-shaped 

water tower stands on a hill about 0.6 mile SW of the Lovu 

Courtesy of Simon Baillie-Cooper

Green Point Light
Sector 2. South Africa and Mozambique—Cape Recife to Ponta da Barra 29

Pub. 171

River water tower.

2.20 Caution.—A dangerous wreck, containing cylinders of 

chlorine gas, which is extremely hazardous and has a highly 

toxic effect, lies sunk about 3 miles 111° from the above hotel.

2.21 False Bluff (30°01'S., 30°56'E.) resembles Cape Natal. A hill, about 1 mile NE of False Bluff on the S side of Isipingo Beach, has a broad sand patch running from its foot to 

near its summit. As this is the only sand visible N of Port Shepstone, it is a very conspicuous landmark.

2.21 The Durban Offshore Oil Berth (30°00.5'S, 30°58.5'E) is a 

CALM facility situated about 1.5 miles from shore E of Isipingo Beach. Tankers up to 210,000 dwt can be accommodated at 

the SBM, which is moored in a depth of 45m. VLCCs must 

have a 10 ton boom. Pilotage is mandatory. A mooring master 

boards about 3 miles E of the SBM. Vessels should send their 

ETA 48 hours and 24 hours in advance, as well as any subsequent changes of 2 hours or greater. If the ETA falls on a Saturday, Sunday, or Monday, the notice should be given before 

1300 on the previous Friday.

2.21 Vessels are prohibited from entering within 1 mile of the 

SBM. Floating hoses, which are marked by quick flashing 

lights, extend up to 305m from the SBM.

2.21 A prohibited anchorage area lies approximately 2.5 miles to 

the NE of the above-mentioned terminals. This area can best be 

seen on the chart.

2.21 An explosives dumping area is centered in a position about 7 

miles SSE of Cape Natal. Another explosives dumping area is 

centered 33 miles offshore about 39 miles SSE of Cape Natal; 

the water in this area is about 2,744m deep.

2.21 Cape Natal (29°52'S., 31°04'E.) is a high wooded tongue of 

land terminating in a conspicuous bluff, 59m high. It is easily 

identified as the coast to the N recedes and is low for several 

miles. A signal station is located on the bluff 0.3 mile SW of 

the extremity of Cape Natal. The signal tower is painted white 

and has been reported as very conspicuous from seaward.

2.21 Caution.—A sewer outfall pipe extends 1.8 miles SE from 

Cape Natal from a position on shore SE of the signal tower. 

Anchoring is prohibited within 0.3 mile of the pipeline.

2.21 A lighted buoy (special wave recorder) is moored 1.5 miles 

SE of the Signal Tower within the prohibited anchorage area 

and another is 1 mile N of the South Breakwater Light.

2.21 A spoil ground, rectangular in shape, 2 miles in extent and 

with a least charted depth of 55m, lies 3 miles E of Cape Natal.

Durban (29°52'S., 31°02'E.)

World Port Index No. 46850

2.22 The Port of Durban, the principal port of the Republic 

of South Africa, is entered close NW of Cape Natal.

2.22 The harbor comprises an exposed outer anchorage and a 

landlocked sheltered harbor with extensive quayage and facilities for ocean-going vessels. The port is entered between 

breakwaters. The seaward limits of the port are best seen on 

chart.

Winds—Weather

2.22 The prevailing wind direction at Durban Harbor, for the 

greater part of the year, is from NE and S, however, in June and 

July, NE winds are more frequent. Winds from the NE quadrant alternate at intervals seldom exceeding a few days, with 

winds from the SW quadrant.

2.22 During summer, gales are usually of short duration, rarely 

exceeding 24 hours, but during winter and spring, NE and SW 

gales may continue for days.

2.22 During May to July, inclusive, the finest months, a light 

breeze comes in from seaward by day, and a land breeze blows 

at night. But strong gales from the E and W occur in these 

months. 

2.22 From August to October, inclusive, the boisterous months, 

when the range of the barometer is great, gales alternate between E and W.

2.22 Gales from E to SE, 50 to 100 miles offshore, are deflected 

to ENE to NE upon reaching shore. The resulting swell catches 

vessels in Durban Road and causes them to ride uneasily.

Tides—Currents

2.22 In the outer anchorage, the tidal current flows N during the 

rising tide and S during the falling tide.

2.22 Off the heads of the breakwaters an eddy,flowing S during 

the rising tide and N during the falling tide, is often experienced; the position of the dividing line between the two opposing currents varies and may be met close to the breakwaters. 

Great care is therefore necessary when approaching the harbor 

entrance. 

2.22 In the entrance channel, the incoming tidal current has a 

maximum rate of 2.5 knots at springs and 0.5 knot at neaps; the 

outgoing current attains 3.5 knots at springs and 1.5 knots at 

neaps.

2.22 Within the harbor there is a strong set across the NE corner 

of Salisbury Island at springs, the direction of the set being 

about 270° on the flood tide and 090° on the ebb. Although this 

set does not extend for more than about 90m down the line of 

the main wharf of Salisbury Island, it does cause difficulty for 

ships proceeding alongside the NE berth.

2.22 At T Jetty, due to eddies, there is a slight set on to both the E 

side and the W side during the flood and ebb.

2.22 Caution is necessary to allow for the strong current, generally setting SW at velocities of 2 to 3 knots, beyond a distance of 

3 miles from the shore.

Depths—Limitations

2.22 The channel entrance, between the S breakwater and North 

Pier, has been dredged to a depth of 12.8m, and has a width of 

155m, narrowing to about 125m. This narrow part of the channel, though seldom impassable, is occasionally dangerous. It is 

well-marked on the SE side by two caissons, each exhibiting a 

light, and on the NW side by two lighted buoys separated by 

another caisson exhibiting a light. The depths alongside the 

various piers range from 6 to 12.8m. The normal limits for vessels entering the harbor are a draft of 12.2m and a length of 

244m. Ships drawing up to 11.5m can enter at all states of the 

tide. Vessels exceeding the normal limits will be permitted to 

enter port only in exceptional circumstances.

2.22 Ships in excess of 200m in length and 26m in beam may not 

enter at night. Ships whose beam exceeds 35m are brought into 
30 Sector 2. South Africa and Mozambique—Cape Recife to Ponta da Barra 

Pub. 171

port only when weather conditions are suitable.

2.22 The tanker terminal has five berths 183 to 244m in length 

and will accommodate vessels with a draft up to 11.5m.

2.22 The five deep sea common-user container berths will accommodate a maximum draft of 12.2m. Two of these container 

berths have ro-ro facilities.

2.22 Note.—Oil tankers and ships carrying explosives or dangerous cargo are restricted to daytime movements.

Aspect

2.22 The Bluff, at the NE end of a ridge, is heavily-wooded and 

steep and has heights up to 90m; it forms the SE side of Durban Harbor. Among the conspicuous landmarks are the signal 

tower about 0.7 mile SSW from the head of S breakwater; the 

water tower about 1.8 miles farther SSW; two radio towers 

standing close NW of the water tower; five silos, the tallest being 59m in height, situated at Island View No. 3 Berth; a water 

tower at Cooper, 5.3 miles SSW of the head of S breakwater; a 

water tower 1.4 miles NNE of Cooper; and the dome of the college 4 miles W of the breakwater head.

2.22 Another conspicuous object is the Anglo-American Building, a 26-story glass and steel office structure with a light located on a tall mast mounted on the roof. It is one of the tallest 

buildings in the city. 

Pilotage

2.22 Pilotage is compulsory for vessels entering, leaving, or shifting berths within the harbor or in the approaches.

2.22 The pilot boards in position about 2 miles NNE of the harbor 

entrance.

2.22 The pilot boats are equipped with VHF; they have black 

hulls and white superstructure, with the words PILOTS—

LOODS in black.

2.22 Durban Port Control has established a Vessel Traffic Service. 

The VTS system is mandatory for any vessel over 15m long 

and all passenger vessels. Durban Port Control VTS monitors 

VHF channels 9 and 16.

2.22 VTS zones are established at the harbor entrance and at 6 

mile and 12 mile radii from Fairway Lighted Buoy (29°50' S., 

31°06' E.). When arriving, vessels are to contact the VTS 15 

minutes before entering the 12-mile reporting zone, at the 12-

mile reporting zone, at the 6-mile reporting zone, and at the 

harbor entrance. Departing vessels are to contact the VTS 15 

minutes before leaving berth, then at each reporting zone listed 

above.

2.22 The VTS regulations that pertain to South African ports can 

be found in Pub. 160, Sailing Directions (Planning Guide) 

South Atlantic Ocean and Indian Ocean.

Regulations

2.22 Oil tankers and ships carrying explosives or dangerous goods 

are restricted to daytime movements.

2.22 Other ships in excess of 200m in length and 26m in beam 

may not enter at night.

2.22 All ships whose beam exceeds 35m are brought into port 

only when weather conditions are suitable.

Signals

2.22 Traffic signals.—The signal tower on The Bluff exhibits the 

following traffic signals by day and night:

2.22 Storm signals.—A red light is exhibited from the top of the 

Port Office when a gale is forecast and is maintained until the 

weather moderates.

Anchorage

2.22 The best berth in the anchorage area is in 22m, good holding 

ground, with S breakwater light bearing 197°, and Anchorage 

Beacon 254°, but there is no shelter during S and E winds, and 

a heavy swell always sets in along the coast. In a position farther S, the outgoing tidal currents swing vessels broadside on 

to the swell, causing them to roll heavily. 

2.22 A vessel arriving in the road during bad weather should radio 

for instructions before anchoring. Helicopter services are available.

2.22 Anchoring is prohibited within 1 mile of the harbor entrance 

and also within an area, marked on the chart, on either side of 

the leading line out to a distance of 3 miles from the entrance. 

Also, anchoring is prohibited on either side of the sewer pipe 

which leads in a 128° direction 0.8 mile S of the S breakwater 

light extending 2 miles.

Directions

2.22 Vessels approaching Durban from SW and having passed 

Aliwal Shoal may steer for the signal station on The Bluff 

bearing 020° until the light at Cooper bears 270°. At this time a 

course of 035° should be steered keeping at least 1 mile offshore. When the signal station on The Bluff bears 270°, the 

course may be shaped for the anchorage. Vessels approaching 

the anchorage from the N should avoid the foul ground lying 

3.2 miles NNE of Cape Natal.

Durban to Richards Bay

2.23 Between Durban and the Tugela River there are no 

off-lying dangers. Anchoring off this part of the coast is not 

recommended, but in an emergency the best holding ground 

will be in depths of 45m; the bottom is chiefly sand or mud, but 

there are some patches of rocky ground, a few miles SE of the 

river’s mouth.

2.23 Between the Tugela River and Richards Bay reefs and shoals 

extend 2.5 miles offshore in places. Vessels should keep at least 

3 miles offshore and in depths of more than 38m in the vicinity 

Day Night Meaning

Flag I One green light Vessel entering harbor.

Flag H One red light Vessel leaving harbor.

Flag P Flashing red light 

Port closed. When the bar 

is dangerous to cross or 

impassable, the signal is 

passed by VHF and by 

flashing red light.
Sector 2. South Africa and Mozambique—Cape Recife to Ponta da Barra 31

Pub. 171

of Glenton Reef; Durnford Point should be given a berth of 7 

miles.

2.23 Inshore currents between Durban and the Tugela River are 

weak. In depths of less than 90m they are generally influenced 

by the wind; in greater depths it is more regular and is SW at 

rates from 0.5 to 1 knot.

2.23 Off Durnford Point, in depths greater than 200m, the current 

is SW at rates from 1 to 2 knots. In depths of less than 200m, a 

NE counter current with rates from 0.5 to 1 knot will generally 

be experienced in fine weather. This NE current is influenced 

by the wind and with fresh NE winds it rapidly changes direction and flows SW at a rate depending on the strength of the 

wind; surveys of this coast have shown the maximum rate of 

this current when SW was found to be 0.8 knot. Currents setting N and NW with rates from 0.5 to 1 knot were occasionally 

observed up to 20 miles offshore SE of Durnford Point. This 

onshore current is a serious danger in the vicinity of this point.

2.23 Observations made during the months of May, June, and July 

provided the following information concerning currents off the 

coast between Durnford Point and Cape St. Lucia:

2.23 Between Durnford Point and Cunge the current was found to 

be generally SW, with rates from 0.5 to 1 knot at 2 to 3 miles 

offshore and 2 knots at 11 miles off Durnford Point. At 2 to 3 

miles offshore, after a few hours of W winds, the current became NE at a rate of 0.5 to 1 knot and on one occasion attained 

a rate of 1.5 knots; this NE current quickly disappeared with a 

change of wind, and it was rare that no current was experienced.

2.23 Between Cunge (28°40'S., 32°15'E.) and Cape St. Lucia, the 

current was always SW to WSW; close to the 200m depth contour the rate was about 3.5 knots, but at 1 to 2 miles offshore the 

rate was reduced to between 1 and 2 knots. The rate was increased by NE winds and reduced by SW winds.

2.23 With a smooth sea, a line of ripples was frequently observed 

close to the edge of the continental shelf, in depths of 200m the 

current over the shelf running with considerably reduced strength.

2.23 Caution.—In 1961, an abnormal variation was reported to 

exist between Durnford Point and Cape Vidal, particularly in 

St. Lucia Bay.

2.23 During strong S winds heavy seas may be encountered near 

the edge of the continental shelf, in depths of 200m, between 

the Tugela River and Durnford Point.

2.24 The Umgeni River (Mgeni River) (29°49'S., 

31°02'E.) flows into the sea 3.5 miles NNW from Durban 

South Breakwater Light. The river is spanned by a conspicuous 

bridge.

2.24 Aspect.—A radio mast stands 2.8 miles N of the mouth of 

the Umgeni River; a water tower stands 0.4 mile NE of mast. 

Another conspicuous water tower stands 0.9 mile NNE of the 

first water tower.

2.24 A measured distance of 1,852m is situated close N of the 

mouth of the Umgeni River. The S limit is marked by two beacons, 0.1 mile apart, at the river entrance, the N limit is marked 

by a beacon on the shore and a white pillar on a building 0.6 

mile inland. The marks in line bear 295°, and the running 

course is 025°-205°.

2.24 Umhlanga Rocks Light (29°44'S., 31°05'E.) is located 5.5 

miles NNE of the mouth of the Umgeni River; the light structure is not easy to identify as it is backed by a conspicuous 

white hotel. Two dish antenna are situated approximately 1.5 

miles NNW of the light.

2.24 A wreck, with a least depth of 11m, is situated 1 mile SSE of 

Umblanga Rock Light.

2.25 Tugela Bluff (29°14'S., 31°30'E.) is 111m high, black 

in appearance, and covered with trees. The Tugela River enters 

the sea close NE of Tugela Bluff and Red Hill, 87m high, rises 

on the N bank of the river. Red Hill is scarred with red and has 

a peculiar knob on its summit.

2.25 Glenton Reef (29°00'S., 31°44'E.) stretches along the coast 

for a distance of about 5 miles, and is up to 1.5 miles offshore 

in places; the depths are generally under 4m and vessels should 

not approach the shore in depths less than 25m in this area. 

Tenedos Shoal extends 1.3 miles SSW from the coast in a position 5.6 miles ENE of the N end of Glenton Reef. The 15m 

curve lies 5.3 miles offshore 7.3 miles ESE of Tenedos Shoal.

2.25 Vedette Hill (28°57'S., 31°44'E.), 96m high, has a group of 

buildings in a clump of trees on its summit; it forms a conspicuous landmark.

2.26 Port Durnford (28°55'S., 31°49'E.) is the name now 

applied to a small settlement in the plains behind the coastal 

range some 2.5 miles W of Mainhluyami Hill and about 5 

miles NE of Vedette Hill.

2.26 Mainhluyami Hill is one of the most prominent landmarks 

on this coast. The hill appears flat-topped when viewed from 

the E. A dark bush covered summit, surmounted by a round 

tree, lies close W of the hill. Durnford, marked by a light and a 

racon, is situated at the mouth of a river, which is usually 

blocked by sand, 2.3 miles ENE of Mainhluyami Hill.

2.26 Anchorage.—Anchorage may be obtained, in depths of 10 

to 12m, coral and sand, with the entrance to the river bearing 

about 338° and Durnford Point bearing 063°.

2.26 Durnford Point, is a rounded point although not prominent 

Ccourtesy of Simon Baillie-Cooper

Umhlanga Rocks Light
32 Sector 2. South Africa and Mozambique—Cape Recife to Ponta da Barra 

Pub. 171

but may be identified by the conspicuous Pudding Hill 

(28°53'S., 32°00'E.) close W of it. Pudding Hill, the most 

prominent mark in this area, is 79m high, and is thickly wooded. The point and the coast for 2.5 miles each side are fringed, 

with reefs and depths from 4.5 to 9m, extending 2.5 miles offshore in places; these reefs break in bad weather.

2.26 Caution.—A dangerous submerged wreck, with a depth of 

8.2m and marked by lighted buoys, lies about 7 miles ESE of 

the light.

Richards Bay (28°48'S., 32°05'E.)

World Port Index No. 46855

2.27 Richards Bay is a man-made harbor, with a deep draft 

terminal for bulk commodities.

2.27 Winds—Weather.—The predominant wind direction 

through the year is NNE and NE (combined occurrence of 41 

per cent), fairly often attaining a velocity of about 19 knots. 

The strongest winds, however, are usually SW (annual average 

occurrence of 11 per cent), which in winter can exceed 35 

knots (winter average occurrence of 2 per cent).

2.27 Weather in this area is generally moderate throughout the 

year, with most of the year’s rainfall occurring in spring and 

early summer. However, on occasion, port movements can be 

hindered by strong to gale force winds described above.

2.27 Visibility is almost invariably excellent. Fog is extremely 

rare in this vicinity; poor visibility, when it occurs, is due to 

heavy rainfall and squalls. Occasionally, hazy conditions may 

be caused by dusty offshore breezes.

2.27 Tides—Currents.—Spring tides rise 1.8m and neap tides 

rise 1.2m.

2.27 Depths—Limitations.—The harbor is approached by a 

dredged channel 700m wide at the seaward end, narrowing to 

300m wide at the inner end, where it widens into the harbor itself. The entrance channel has a dredged depth of 24m at the seaward end, gently shelving to 19m where it meets the harbor.

2.27 Berth 209 is the chemical tanker berth. Vessels up to 63,000 

dwt, with a maximum length of 225m and a maximum draft of 

12.5m, can be accommodated.

2.27 Berth 301 to Berth 304 have depths of 19m alongside; the 

maximum draft that can use these berths is 17.5m.

2.27 Berth 701 has a dredged depth of 14.5m alongside. Berth 

702 to Berth 705 have a dredged depth of 19m alongside. Berth 

706 to Berth 708 have a dredged depth of 14.7m alongside.

2.27 The maximum draft permitted in the harbor is 17.5m. A vessel of 284,300 dwt, with a length of 343m, has been accommodated. Entry and departure of vessels is at discretion of port 

captain.There are accommodations for container and ro-ro vessels. Entry into the harbor may be delayed by strong winds, 

strong cross currents in the approach channel, or by heavy rain 

affecting visibility.

2.27 Aspect.—Ntogande Hill (28°43'S., 32°11'E.), 114m high, is 

prominent when viewed from the E and NE. A hill, 120m high, 

0.8 miles SSE of Ntogande Hill, is more prominent than Ntogande when viewed from the S. The Port Control Office, close 

N of the root of the N breakwater, is conspicuous. A bluff 56m 

high and lying 0.6 mile NE of the Port Control Office, is prominent.

2.27 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory and is available 24 hours.

2.27 The pilot meets the vessels in a position bearing 135°, distant 

3 miles from the harbor entrance; vessels should not approach 

closer until contact has been made with Port Control or the pilot boat. A helicopter pilotage service, available 24 hours, is in 

operation at Richards Bay. Helicopter rendezvous areas for 

light draft and deep draft vessels will be advised by Port Control.

2.27 Signals.—Traffic signals are shown from a bank of lights 

shown from the Port Control Office, as follows:

2.27 When the entrance to the harbor is considered dangerous, 

this information will be passed by VHF in addition to showing 

the signal for “Port closed.”

2.27 Regulations.—The “Regulations for the Harbors of the Republic of South Africa” are in force within the Port of Richards 

Bay.

2.27 The VTS regulations that pertain to South African ports are 

found in Pub. 160, Sailing Directions (Planning Guide) South 

Atlantic Ocean and Indian Ocean.

2.27 The VTS will advise vessels of other traffic, berthing arrangements, helicopter and launch services, and pilot arrangements.

2.27 Passing vessels are to keep clear of the port limits. Deep 

draft vessels sailing from Richards Bay are restricted in their 

ability to maneuver for 4 miles from the breakwaters.

2.27 Vessels calling on Richards Bay should report their ETA 

through Durban Coast Radio Station 48 hours and 24 hours in 

advance and report through radio reporting points which are 

charted 20 miles ENE and SSW, respectively, of Richards Bay. 

The latter reports are made to Vessel Traffic Control when 

passing through these positions. If the ETA falls on Saturday, 

Sunday, or Monday, notice must be given before 1200 on the 

previous Friday.

2.27 Anchorage.—Anchorage may be obtained about 3 to 5 

miles SE of the S breakwater. The bottom is sand; in strong 

SW and NE winds, caution should be exercised.

2.27 A prohibited anchorage area extends ESE from the head of the 

N breakwater for a distance of about 4 miles; a pipeline extends 

seaward in an ESE direction, within the restricted area, from a 

position on shore 0.4 mile NNE of the head of the breakwater.

Richards Bay to Levin Point

2.28 The coast between Richards Bay and Cape St. Lucia, 

24 miles NE, is a sandy beach lined with breakers. Landing on 

this stretch of coast is practically impossible.

2.28 Cone Point (28°38'S., 32°18'E.) lies 15 miles NNE of Richards Bay. The coast between these two points should be given a 

wide berth, especially in fine weather, when the sea is not 

breaking over the dangers.

2.28 Nhlabane Rock (28°41'S., 32°16'E.), with a depth of 5.5m, 

lies about 1 mile offshore, 3 miles SSW of Cone Point. It is the 

only charted danger seaward of the 15m curve on this section 

Signal Meaning

Fixed green lights Vessel entering harbor

Fixed red lights Vessel leaving harbor

Flashing red lights Port closed
Sector 2. South Africa and Mozambique—Cape Recife to Ponta da Barra 33

Pub. 171

of the coast.

2.28 Neill Peak is a conspicuous thickly wooded hill, rising to a 

height of 107m, about 3 miles SW of Cone Point. A bare sand 

hill, 108m high, lying 2.3 miles NNE of Cone Point, appears 

steep and conspicuous from the E.

2.28 A water tank at an elevation of 167m stands 6.5 miles NE of 

Cone Point.

2.29 Cape St. Lucia (28°31'S., 32°24'E.) is low and sandy; 

it is marked by a light, whose tower is not easy to identify from 

a distance. A hill, 164m high, rises close within the cape; there 

is a reddish sand patch on the seaward slope of the hill. Close N 

of the cape there are some ledges of light, brown rocks and the 

cape when seen from the E appears as a group of islands.

From Cape St. Lucia, the coastal ridge consists of hills, 

which are covered with forest and rise to elevations of 180m 

before terminating in a bluff 6.5 miles N of Cape St. Lucia 

Light. For 2 miles NNE of St. Lucia Bay the coast is backed by 

grassy bush topped hills, from 30 to 45m high, then a ridge of 

forest covered hills, from 60 to 75m high, extend 4.5 miles farther N where the hills become more open and grassy.

2.29 Between Cape Vidal and Leven Point the coastal range is 

thickly wooded for the first 7 miles and presents a series of 

summits. North of these summits, the coastal range is from 90 

to 120m high and is faced with sand, which in places, extends 

halfway up its seaward slope.

2.29 St. Lucia Bay (28°23'S., 32°26'E.) is the slight bight formed 

at the entrance of St. Lucia Lake 8 miles N of Cape St. Lucia.

2.29 Anchorage.—Anchorage may be obtained, in 18m, about 

1.3 miles SE of the entrance to St. Lucia Bay. South of this position the bottom is foul, and farther N the S swell is heavier. 

The bay, exposed to winds from SSW through E to NE, has a 

sandy bottom, with good holding ground, the depths gradually 

decreasing to the shore.

2.29 Caution.—In 1961, an abnormal magnetic variation was reported in St. Lucia Bay.

2.30 Mount Tabor (28°15'S., 32°30'E.), 133m high, rises 

8.5 miles NNE of St. Lucia Bay. A conspicuous lookout tower, 

96m high, stands 1 mile SSW of Mount Tabor.

2.30 Cape Vidal (28°08'S., 32°24'E.) is conspicuous from all directions; the land close within rises to Bangazi, a peak 149m 

high. A long triangular patch of sand, visible when bearing less 

than 270°, extends to the summit of Bangazi; when seen from 

the S, three reddish patches appear on it.

2.30 The sea usually breaks on the below water rocks, which extend about 0.2 mile offshore, about 1 mile S of Cape Vidal. A 

light stands on the shore W of these rocks.

2.30 Mahlonza, situated on the coastal range 2.5 miles N of Cape 

Vidal, rises to a height of 171m. This hill and King Oscar Hill, 

161m high, 2 miles farther N, are prominent.

2.30 Leven Point (27°55'S., 32°36'E.), 12 miles N of Cape Vidal, 

may be recognized by St. Marys Hill, close N of which are two 

broad sandy strips extending from the base to the summit of a 

high neck of land. These strips are visible when bearing less 

than 270° and serve to identify Leven Point from N. From S, 

Leven Point appears flat and sandy.

Levin Point to Maputo

2.31 Between Leven Point and Red Sand Cliff the coast is 

backed by wooded hills faced with sand. Gipsy Hill (27°48'S., 

32°36'E.), 125m high, situated 8 miles N of Leven Point is the 

only distinctive feature on this stretch of coast.

2.31 Red Sand Cliff (27°43'S., 32°37'E.) forms the seaward face 

of Ochre Hill, which has an elevation of 115m; the sea in the 

vicinity is sometimes discolored by red soil eroded from the 

base of the cliff.

2.31 Between Leven Point and Red Sand Cliff, there is a narrow 

ridge of rock and coral, connected to the coast about 2 miles N 

of Leven Point, extending 1.3 miles NNE to about 0.6 mile offshore. This ridge is steep-to and has depths from 3.6 to 5.5m. 

Another shoal with a least depth of 5.5m, lies parallel, with the 

coast, 0.8 mile offshore, about 6 miles NNE of Leven Point. 

The sea seldom breaks over these steep-to reefs and it is advisable to keep in depths of more than 55m when off this stretch 

of coast.

2.31 Between Red Sand Cliff and Sordwana Road, there are three 

distinctive summits. From S to N they are Nkonyane (27°38'S., 

32°39'E.), 121m high; Mbumba, 134m high; and Ntabende, 

137m high. They lie 48 miles NNE, 6.8 miles NNE and 9 miles 

NNE, respectively, of Ochre Hill.

2.31 Ntabende is a conical hill, with a flat top; there are prominent sand intrusions on either side of it.

2.31 From Ntabende, the coastal hills become lower and terminate in a prominent dark bluff, 37m high, covered with trees 

and bushes, close within Jesser Point.

2.32 Jesser Point (27°33'S., 32°41'E.) is low and fringed 

with rocks extending 0.4 mile N; the sea breaks heavily on the 

rocks. A light stands close SSW of Jesser Point.

2.32 Sordwana Road (27°33'S., 32°43'E.), open to winds from 

seaward between NE and SW, lies 2 miles N of Ntabende and 

is no better than other open anchorages on this coast. The holding ground is not good, being partly rock, and nearer the shore 

it is worse. There is considerable swell and strong onshore 

winds render the anchorage untenable.

2.32 The point on the S side of the bay has a dark bluff, 46m in 

height, within it is covered with scrub and is conspicuous from 

seaward.

2.32 Temporary anchorage, about 0.5 mile offshore, in 12m, may 

be found in the bay NNE of a projecting point which affords 

slight shelter, with the point bearing 203°, distant about 0.5 

mile.

2.33 Sordwana Point (27°26'S., 32°43'E.) is sandy and is 

backed by a heavily-wooded bluff. Dumile Hill, which is conspicuous from all directions, is dome shaped and rises to a 

height of 134m, 0.9 mile N of Sordwana Point. A beacon 

stands on the shore about 0.6 mile SSW of the point.

2.33 A below-water reef, which usually breaks, lies 0.2 mile offshore abreast Dumile Hill. A similar reef, also 0.2 mile offshore, lies 1.5 miles farther NNE.
34 Sector 2. South Africa and Mozambique—Cape Recife to Ponta da Barra 

Pub. 171

2.33 Island Rock (27°17'S., 32°47'E.), which is a black outcrop, 

drying about 1m, lies close offshore 3.5 miles NNE of Hully 

Point. Normally the sea breaks heavily over the outcrop and the 

spray, which can be seen from a distance, will indicate its position.

2.33 Black Rock Point (27°08'S., 32°50'E.) is a conspicuous 

grassy projection 18m high, about 9 miles NNE of Island 

Rock; it extends 0.15 off the beach. From a distance, the point 

sometimes has the appearance of a vessel close inshore.

2.33 Black Rocks are some remarkable rocks 3.7m high situated 

on the beach 3.5 miles NNE of Black Rock Point.

2.33 The Kosi River discharges 11 miles NNE of Black Rocks. 

Anchorage, which is no better than other anchorages on this 

exposed coast, may be taken up off the Kosi River, in 11.9 to 

18.3m, but the entrance should not bear N of 250°, the bottom 

having many rocky patches when S of that line.

2.33 Between the Kosi River and Ponta do Ouro, 3 miles NNE, 

the coast consists of a sandy beach backed by bush topped hills 

faced with sand, rising to 100m in height.

2.34 Ponta do Ouro (26°51'S., 32°54'E.) is a dark low 

cliff. Monte do Ouro, close within the point, rises to an elevation of 120m. A light is exhibited at this point.

From Ponta do Ouro, the coast trends in a NNE direction to 

Cabo da Inhaca. Cabo da Inhaca is the S entrance point to Baia 

de Maputo. From Ponta do Ouro to a position 7 miles SSW of 

Cabo da Inhaca, the coastal hills are from 60 to 120m high, and 

close to the N part of this area they are thickly wooded.

2.34 Pico Florenco (26°45'S., 32°54'E.), 118m high, is one of 

three prominent peaks situated 6 miles N of Ponta do Ouro; a 

tripod beacon, stands on this peak.

2.34 Ponta Dobela, marked by a prominent white beacon, is situated near the coast 13.5 miles N of Pico Florenco.

2.34 Baixo de Sao Joao (26°21'S., 32°58'E.), a rocky shoal with, 

a depth of 9.1m, lies 1.8 miles offshore 10 miles NNE of Ponta 

Dobela.

2.34 Rocha Ulue (26°16'S., 32°57'E.) is a conspicuous mark resembling the hull of a capsized vessel. It is 52m in length and 

about 15m high.

2.34 Dundas Hill rises 75m, and has two diagonal crossing sandy 

roads on its seaward slope. These roads form a conspicuous 

landmark for vessels approaching from the S.

2.35 Cabo de Santa Maria (26°05'S., 32°58'E.) is the N 

extremity of the Peninsula de Santa Maria. A round-topped 

peak, 87m high, is situated 0.5 mile S of the cape. Baixo de 

Santa Maria, a rocky shoal with a least depth of 14.6m, lies 2.5 

miles ESE of Cabo de Santa Maria.

2.35 Ilha da Inhaca (26°00'S., 32°58'E.) lies close N of the Peninsula de Santa Maria on the SE side of the entrance to Baia de 

Maputo. Ponta Torres, the S extremity of Ilha da Inhaca, is separated from the peninsula by an inlet 0.3 mile wide; the channel lies on the S side. The sea frequently breaks on the bar 

across the inlet, where there are dangerous rocks. Monte Botelho, 87m high, rises near the coast 2.8 miles NNE of Ponta 

Torres. Monte Inhaca, 2.3 miles NNE of Monte Botelho, is 

dome-shaped and wooded; it is surmounted by a beacon.

2.35 Cabo da Inhaca (25°58'S., 33°00'E.), the NE extremity of 

Ilha da Inhaca, is a sandy point, rising to a square-topped sandy 

hummock, which shows up against the darker land behind it. A 

light is situated on a sand hill about 0.4 mile SW of Cabo da Inhaca; it has been reported (1991) that haze during the day obscures the light structure. A signal station is located near the 

light.

2.35 Baixo Danae (25°54'S., 33°03'E.) lies about 5 miles NE of 

Cabo da Inhaca. The sea breaks heavily on the shoal in all 

types of weather. A current of 1.5 to 2.5 knots sets onto the 

shoal from SE at all stages of the tide, and especially after 

strong SW or SE winds.

Maputo (Lourenco Marques) (25°58'S., 32°35'E.)

World Port Index No. 46870

2.36 Maputo is located at the head of Baia de Maputo (Baia de Lourenco Marques), the port consists of a city and a medium-sized natural harbor. Baia de Maputo is entered between 

Cabo de Inhaca and Ponta da Macaneta (25°52'S., 32°45'E.).

2.36 Winds—Weather.—Because of the position of the port, land 

and sea breezes are quite marked. Land breezes are most noticeable between April and August and are least noticeable in November and December. The breeze usually commences about 

midnight and dies away between 0900 and 1000. West winds are 

rare after midday except when the “hot wind” is blowing from 

NNW, and it is only when N or S winds blow very strongly that 

it does not veer to the W quadrant during the night.

2.36 The “hot wind” is a hot, dry wind from NNW which blows 

down from the high plateau of central Africa. It usually lasts 

only a few hours, giving place to a short calm of 20 minutes 

duration, when the S wind breaks out with violence, sometimes 

reaching gale force, bringing dust storms which are less frequent here than in other localities of South Africa. 

2.36 From October to March, the hottest and dampest months, 

these winds, alternating with the cold S wind, make the climate 

unpleasant. There is, however, some relief in the sea breeze and 

in the rarity of calm. Moderate winds are most frequent, with 

light breezes at night. 

2.36 The average wind for the year is force 4 on the Beaufort 

Scale with the highest wind average from September to November and the least from February to April. The wind reaches 

its daily peak about 1700 and the least at 0200. 

2.36 The weather is pleasant from June to October when there are 

bright sunny days and the temperature in the shade seldom rises about 27°C, except with a “hot wind,” or falls below 16°C 

but the other half of the year contrasts most unfavorably with 

this period. 

2.36 Gales from SW of 36 hours duration are not infrequent, the 

wind then drawing to the S, and the weather becoming fine at 

SE, after which the wind draws gradually to NE, continuing 

fine for a few days. Bad weather always comes on with winds 

between W and S, improving as the wind draws to E. A gale 

from S of hurricane force was experienced in the middle of October. 

2.36 From April to October, the sea breezes blow with less force, 

calms are more frequent, and rain only falls on from 2 to 6 days 

in a month, where as in the opposite season it may fall on about 

11 days in the same period.

2.36 Tides—Currents.—Seaward of the line of shoals fronting the 

bay the N current or that of the incoming tidal current, with a 

maximum spring velocity of 2 knots, sets obliquely across Canal 

do Sul, with a strong indraft; caution must be observed in transit. 
Sector 2. South Africa and Mozambique—Cape Recife to Ponta da Barra 35

Pub. 171

The outgoing tidal current sets in the opposite direction.

2.36 Within the line of shoals the SW current, or incoming tidal 

current, sets over Xefina Grande Bank, and enters Rio Espirito 

Santo with maximum rate of from 1 to 3 knots at neaps and 

springs, respectively, the other current setting in the opposite 

direction at the same rate. 

2.36 Depths—Limitations.—The approaches to Maputo are 

greatly encumbered by shoals. Though there are several channels between these shoals, only Canal do Sul and Canal do 

Norte are marked. 

2.36 A depth of 9.7m was reported in Canal do Sul and should not 

be used by deep draft vessels, as depths in the channel are liable 

to change. Local knowledge is recommended. Canal do Norte 

has a least depth in 1993 of 8.8m. Recent dredging of the river 

channel to a depth of 9.4m has been reported. The main wharf 

has alongside depths of 9 to 10.1m and will accommodate 12 

vessels. A depth of 3.3m is charted at the SE end of the wharf 

and a depth of 4.9m is charted close off the NW end. Container 

and ro-ro facilities are available.

2.36 The ore-loading facility at Matola, farther upstream, is a 

wharf with a dolphin at each end; the maximum permissible 

length is 250m, with a maximum draft of 10.5m on neaps and 

11.3m at springs. A tanker berth at Matola will accommodate 

vessels with a maximum draft of 9m and a length of 180m.

2.36 It should be noted that the depth over the bar will govern the 

draft of vessels permitted to enter the harbor.

2.36 Aspect.—The following objects positioned from Ponta Vermelha (25°59'S., 32°36'E.) are prominent:

1. A church, 1 mile NNE.

2. The Cathedral, 1.5 miles NW.

3. The Harbor Office, 1.3 miles WNW.

2.36 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory and available 24 hours. The 

vessel’s ETA and draft should be reported up to 48 hours in advance.

2.36 Anchorage.—Anchorage may be taken in the approach to 

Canal do Sul, in depths of 14 to 17m, with Cabo da Inhaca 

Light bearing 159°, distant about 3 miles. Anchorage is available, in 12m, with Macoma Light (25°41'S., 32°46'E.) bearing 

313°, 4 miles distant.

2.36 Good anchorage can be had in the port, in 10 to 13m, with 

the light structure at the entrance of the camber near the offices 

of the port captain bearing 170°, distant 0.4 mile. Portinho da 

Inhaca is an anchorage lying off Black Bluff, the NW extremity of Ilha da Inhaca. 

2.36 Good shelter is afforded, from 10 to 20m, from all winds except those from SW, which raise a sea at the anchorage. The 

shoals in the vicinity are of a shifting nature, and local knowledge is required when taking a berth at the anchorage.

2.36 Machangulo Bay is the SE part of Baia de Maputo. There is 

anchorage, in about 7m, in a narrow space at the head of the 

bay.

2.36 The explosives anchorage is up the river near the entrance of 

the Rio Matola.

2.36 A quarantine anchorage lies 0.5 mile S of Ponta Vermelha. 

2.36 Unless directed by the pilot, anchorage is prohibited in the 

river to the NW of a line extending 210° from the light on the S 

side of the entrance of the camber to the opposite shore.

2.36 Directions.—The light structure on Black Bluff, marked by 

Quartel Light in range with Ponta dos Elefantes (Gibao Point), 

the W extremity of Ilha dos Portugueses, bearing 157°, leads E 

of Baixo Fawn, Xefina Grande Bank, and Barra do Incomati.

2.36 Mariner are advised to take special caution when passing 

Buoy No. 10 in Canal da Xefina, where vessels have tended to 

yaw up to 14°. Lights and buoys in Maputo Bay have been reported extinguished and many buoys are not in their charted 

position or are missing. Other navigational aids have been reported unreliable.

2.36 Caution.—A magnetic anomaly in Baia de Maputo causes 

the variation to change rapidly, giving deflections from -2° to 

+3° from the normal.

Maputo to Ponta da Barra

2.37 Between Monte Cutfield (25°34'S., 32°51'E.), which 

is marked by a light reported (1991) to be obscured by trees, 

and Ponta Pajini the coast consists of sandhills and ridges 

backed by grassy hills, with trees and bushes on them.

2.37 Several shoals with depths of 6.7 to 10.4m fringe the coast 

and lie as much as 7 miles off the coast from Mabjetxine to the 

sand dune; heavy tide rips, possibly caused by the uneven 

depths, have been observed.

2.37 Baixo da Lagoa (25°25'S., 33°12'E.), a narrow ridge of rock 

and sand with a least charted depth of 4.6m, lies 4 miles offshore ESE of the conspicuous sand dune.

2.37 Ponta Padjini (25°20'S., 33°14'E.) is a dark rocky bluff 75m 

high. From close inshore it has an irregular and broken appearance; there are several other similar small cliffs in the vicinity. 

A conspicuous sand dune lies 0.5 mile N of Ponta Padjini.

Between Ponta Padjini and Rio Limpopo the coastal hills are 

moderately bare; for the first 10 miles they are a light color, but 

then they become darker and higher.

2.38 Ponta Chiluela (25°17'S., 33°19'E.) is rocky and 

projects from the base of the sandhills, close to the HW mark, 

to form a small cliff 4m high. Three detached rocky shoals, 

with depths of 10.4, 5.5 and 9.4m, lie 2.7 miles offshore between the above two points.

2.38 Rio Limpopo (25°13'S., 33°31'E.) flows into the sea and the 

entrance is well defined. About 1 mile inland there is a conspicuous red-topped hill. Discharge from the river may extend 

3 or 4 miles seaward from the river’s entrance, and will be noted by the color.

2.38 Between Rio Limpopo and Boa Paz (24°58'S., 34°10'E.)

depths of 35m are found at a fairly constant distance of 3 to 4 

miles from the coast, except off Boa Paz Light, where these 

depths are found within 2 miles of the coast from about 5 

miles.

2.38 Baixos de Inhampura, with depths less than 11m, extend parallel with the coast for 10 miles from a position 4.5 miles E of 

the mouth of Rio Limpopo. The shallowest part of the shoal, 

with a depth of 1.5m, lies 9.5 miles ENE of the mouth of the 

river.

2.38 Inland, 4 miles ENE of Rio Limpopo, a conspicuous sand 

dune considerably higher than the surrounding country, rises to 

a height of 89m. Kaixaventuane, a summit 112m high, lies 12 

miles farther ENE.

2.38 A light is exhibited at Boa Paz (24°58'S., 34°10'E.) from a 

tower, 8m high. The coast at Boa Paz is about 66m high.

2.39 Baixos da Boa Paz (24°57'S., 34°27'E.) are formed 
36 Sector 2. South Africa and Mozambique—Cape Recife to Ponta da Barra 

Pub. 171

by a bank of stones, with depths less than 5.5m, which extends 

along the coast from the vicinity of Boa Paz for a distance of 

15 miles. A 2.7m patch, which breaks, lies 8 miles ENE of Boa 

Paz, about 0.25 offshore. A 1.7m patch lies 0.8 mile offshore 3 

miles farther ENE. This patch is dangerous as the sea does not 

break on it.

2.39 Detached patches, with depths of 16m and 17m lie, respectively, 2.3 miles SE and 4.5 miles E of the 1.7m patch.

2.39 Quissico Light (24°45'S., 34°48'E.) is exhibited from a tower, 6m in height, and is situated on a dune 51m high, about 37 

miles ENE of Boa Paz. A shoal, with a depth of 8.9m, lies 4 

miles S of Quissico Light.

2.39 A hill, 173m high, stands 2.2 miles inland, 11.7 miles NE of 

Quissico Light.

2.39 Ponta Zavora (24°31'S., 35°12'E.), 25 miles NE of Quissico 

Light, has no conspicuous features, but 1.7 miles to the N there 

is a remarkable sand cliff nearly 0.5 mile in length. Ponta 

Zavora is marked by a light and a racon; there is a signal station 

at the light.

2.40 Cabo Das Correntes lies 30 miles NNE of Ponta 

Zavora and Ponta da Barra lies about 19 miles farther N. The 

hills lie 2 to 4 miles inland and rise to heights of over 180m. 

Heavy breakers have been seen along this coast up to 3 miles 

distant offshore.

2.40 Rocky patches fringe the coast for 8.5 miles NE of Ponta 

Zavora. A rocky patch with 8.2m lies 3 miles NE of the point, 

1.2 miles offshore; another rocky patch, with 3.8m, lies 1 mile 

offshore 2.7 miles farther NE.

2.40 Cabo das Correntes (24°06'S., 35°30'E.) is a rounded sandy 

point, which may be identified by a few detached black rocks 

fringing it; an islet 5m high is situated 2.8miles SSW of the 

cape and is connected to the coast by a rock reef.

2.40 Between Cabo das Correntes and Cabo Inhambane 

(23°52'S., 35°33'E.) the coast consists of sandhills, when seen 

from a distance have the appearance of chalky cliffs, they are 

visible for quite a distance.

2.40 Cabo Inhambane is a small rocky point backed by a grassy, 

conical hill, 61m high.

2.40 Ponta Tofo, a small rocky point fringed by a reef extending 

0.3 offshore, lies 1 mile NNW of Cabo Inhambane.

2.40 Ponta da Barra (23°47'S., 35°32'E.), 3.7 miles NNW of 

Ponta Tofo, is low and is fringed by a reef extending nearly 0.5 

mile NE. Within, the point rises to an elevation of 59m, 1 mile 

SW; this hill has a clump of trees on it which make it easily 

identified from the N. Ponta da Barra is marked by a light, with 

a signal station situated near it.
37

Pub. 171

3. 

Mozambique—Baia de Inhambane to Cabo Delgado

3.0Additional chart coverage may be found in NGA/DLIS Catalog of Maps, Charts, and Related Products (Unlimited Distribution).

SECTOR 3 — CHART INFORMATION
39

Pub. 171

SECTOR 3 

MOZAMBIQUE—BAIA DE INHAMBANE TO CABO DELGADO

3.0 Plan.—This sector describes the SE coast of Africa, on the

W side of Mozambique Channel, from Baia de Inhambane

NNE to Cabo Delgado.

General Remarks 

3.1 Between Ponta Algoa (23°39'S., 35°26'E.) and Ponta da

Barra Falsa the coast has no conspicuous features, but 10 miles to

the S of the latter point the Sylvia Ridge, of bare sand, is 114m

high; this ridge is of a reddish color.

3.1 The coast between Ilha Santa Carolina (21°37'S., 35°20'E.)

and Ponta Macovane is little known.

3.1 Between the Rio Sofala (20°10'S., 34°45'E.) and the Rio

Buzi, the land is low and there are no landmarks.

3.1 Between Ponta Macuti (19°51'S., 34°54'E.) and the Rio Sofala

(20°10'S., 34°45'E.) and the Rio Sambazo, the coast rises slightly

and is bounded by a range of low sand hills. At about mid distance

the sandhills are somewhat noticeable, as here there are a number

of sharp pointed hills about 61m high, resembling pyramids, and

rendered more conspicuous through being without vegetation, as

the surrounding country is thick jungle. From the Rio Sambazo to

the W entrance to the Rio Zambezi, the land is lower.

3.1 Between the Rio Chinde (18°34'S., 36°29'E.) and the Rio

dos Bons Sinais, the coast is so low that it is seldom seen from

the deck of a vessel from a distance of 7 miles.

3.1 Between the Rio Bazar (18°25'S., 36°38'E.) and the Rio

Linde, the coast becomes somewhat higher; near the latter are

some clumps of trees, while a short distance to the SW of the

Rio Linde are some sandy cliffs which are conspicuous with

the morning sun.

3.1 Caution.—Vines Bank (Bank Vines) (18°51'S, 43°00'E.),

reported in 1871, dries 0.6m over a diameter of about 13m;

depths of 3m to 6.7m exist up to 0.1 mile from this bank. 

3.1 A bank, with a depth of 44m, is charted in position 18°18'S,

41°41'E, at the S end of Davie Ridge; discolored water and

overfalls have been reported in the vicinity, but the existance of

the the bank is doubtful. 

Baia de Inhambane to Beira

3.2 Baia de Inhambane (23°44'S., 35°30'E.), entered between Ponta da Barra and Ponta Algoa, is almost completely

obstructed by banks and breaking reefs which dry in places.

3.2 Porto Inhambane is approached by a channel, which leads

close to the W shore of Baia de Inhambane. There are two bars

in the channel and both are subject to constant change.

3.2 The outer bar lies across the channel 3 miles ESE of Ponta

Algoa.

3.2 The inner bar, where the navigable channel is very narrow,

lies about midway between the outer bar and Inhambane. This

bar is formed by a number of shoal patches, with depths less

than 3m, lying about 1 mile SE and 2 miles SSE of Ponta da

Linga-Linga.

3.3 Inhambane (23°52'S., 35°23'E.) (World Port Index

No. 46880), at the head of Baia de Inhambane on the E side of

the Rio Inhambane, lies 9.7 miles WSW of Ponta da Barra. The

port consists of a town and a very small natural harbor

3.3 Winds—Weather.—There is always a heavy swell on the outer

bar and with winds between N and SE of more than force 3, vessels should cross on the flood tide as near as possible to HW.

3.3 Tides—Currents.—Spring tides rise 3.4m and neap tides

rise 2.1m. The tidal currents run with a velocity of from 2 to 4

knots on the bar, and from 1.5 to 2 knots at the anchorage abreast

the town. At ebb tide, the current sets toward the pier.

3.3 Depths—Limitations.—The outer bar, the outer edge of

which lies 3.5 miles ESE of Ponta Algoa, is a shifting one,

moving considerably N or S as influenced by the wind or other

causes. The Rio Inhambane, although forming a good harbor

for vessels of moderate draft and having a fairly wide entrance,

is scarcely navigable for a vessel beyond the town, about 14

miles from the bar.

3.3 Inhambane Pier is T-shaped and projects into the river. Vessels are to berth at the 115m long head of the pier, where there

are depths of at least 6.1m alongside. 

3.3 Aspect.—Ponta Chicuque (23°47'S., 35°21'E.) is a conspicuous sandy cliff.

3.3 Pilotage.—There is no official pilot, but someone with local

knowledge can be made available to assist a vessel entering

provided at least 6 hours notice of the time of arrival at the fairway buoy is given to the Port Captain. Local knowledge is essential for entering Inhambane.

3.3 Directions.—Local visibility conditions make it advisable

that entry should be made on the morning tide.

3.3 Caution.—Because of its shifting nature, vessels should not

attempt to cross the outer bar without a pilot, unless in possession of the latest local knowledge. 

3.3 There is always a heavy swell on the bar, and during strong

SE winds, the sea often breaks over it, while the ebb tide is running. In such circumstances vessels, with a draft in excess of

3m should await the flood tide before attempting to enter.

3.4 Between Ponta Algoa (23°39'S., 35°26'E.) and Ponta

da Barra Falsa the coast is backed by hills 130 to 190m high.

The only remarkable feature on this part of the coast is a prominent ridge of bare, reddish colored sand, with a fringe of green

brush at its base, which lies close to the sea about 10 miles S of

Ponta da Barra Falsa.

3.4 Baixo Silva (23°06'S., 35°34'E.) is a narrow strip of coral,

with depths of 5 to 8.2m. The shoal lies 3 miles off and parallels the shoal for about 3 miles.

3.4 Ponta da Barra Falsa (22°55'S., 35°37'E.) is a low point

rising to two small conical sandhills, about 29m high. A considerable amount of sand around the high land over the cape

makes it conspicuous from the N. Good shelter may be obtained under the cape during S winds. A light is exhibited on the

summit within Ponta da Barra Falsa.
40 Sector 3. Mozambique—Baia de Inhambane to Cabo Delgado 

Pub. 171

3.4 Shivala Cliffs (22°45'S., 35°30'E.) are remarkable red cliffs

reaching an elevation of 37m. The cliffs extend N for about 3.5

miles and are prominent, especially during the forenoon.

3.4 Maxecane (22°31'S., 35°31'E.), a hill 135m high, stands

close inland 12 miles N of Shivala Cliffs. The coastal hills in

the vicinity are about 100m high and are red; the cliffs on the

seaward slope are a darker red.

3.4 A remarkable sand spit, partially covered with scraggy trees

and bushes, extends 8 miles N from a position 14 miles N of

Maxecane.

3.4 Sao Sebastiao Light is exhibited from a position near the S

extremity of the above sand spit.

3.5 Cabo Sao Sebastiao (22°05'S., 35°28'E.) is a steep

bluff, 69m high, which from the S shows a small white sand

patch on its upper part, while from the N the face of the cliff

shows a considerable amount of red sand from base to summit.

3.5 Baixo Zambia (22°46'S., 35°35'E.), a coral bank with a least

depth of 5.5m, lies 3.7 miles offshore 9.5 miles N of Ponta da

Barra Falsa.

3.5 Baixo Africa, with a least depth of 4.8m, lies close within the

20m curve 3.5 miles E of Maxecane.

3.5 A rocky shoal, with a depth of 5.1m, lies 1 mile offshore 2

miles SSE of Sao Sebastiao Light.

3.5 Ilhas dos Bazarutos are a group of islands and sandy islets lying up to 14 miles offshore between Cabo Sao Sebastiao and

Ponta Inhassoro (21°35'S., 35°15'E.), 33 miles NNW.

3.5 Drying banks almost completely fill the S part of the area,

which has not been fully examined, and extend some miles E

of the islands.

3.5 The low coast of the mainland is about 12 miles within the

line of breakers at the edge of the drying banks and is indistinct

from seaward.

3.5 The currents run strongly about Ilhas do Bazarutos, especially on the falling tide.

3.6 Ilha Magaruque (21°58'S., 35°26'E.) is 53m high; it

may be recognized by some red cliffs in the S part.

3.6 Ilha do Bazaruto lies with Ponta Dundo (21°48'S., 35°27'E.),

its S extremity, about 18 miles N of Cabo Sao Sebastiao. The S

extremity of the island rises to a prominent bare hill about 90m

high, then it is low for a distance of 4 miles N where it again

rises to a bare ridge about 90m high, which extends N for 12

miles before it slopes down to Ponta Dom Carlos.

3.6 A light is shown from the N part of Ilha do Bazaruto just S of

Ponta Dom Carlos (21°31'S., 35°29'E.).

3.6 Caution.—Vessels approaching Beira from S should pass

about 10 miles off Ponta Dom Carlos Light before setting

course for the lighted sea buoy.

3.7 Baia Do Bazaruto (21°44'S., 35°21'E.) is entered between Ponta Dom Carlos and Ponta Inhassoro (21°35'S.,

35°15'E.), on the mainland about 11 miles WSW. Numerous

drying banks encumber on considerable part of the bay.

3.7 Ilha Santa Carolina (21°37'S., 35°20'E.), marked on its N

end by a light, is situated in the SW part of Baia do Bazaruto; it

is low, but well wooded and has a sandhill on its NE side.

3.7 Anchorage.—Anchorages are available in the bay and are

approached between the W edge of the bank, which extends

SW from Ponta Dom Carlos and a shoal bank about 3 miles

WSW, the depths in the entrance being from 18.3 to 22m, decreasing to 12.8m and 14.6m at the anchorage about 3.5 miles

SW of Ponta Dom Carlos, and to 5.5m and 9.1m at the anchorage lying about 0.3 mile NE of Ilha Santa Carolina.

3.7 A pilot may be obtained to take a vessel to the anchorage off

Ilha Santa Carolina, and, as the channel is not buoyed, vessels

without local knowledge should not attempt to proceed to the

anchorage without one.

3.7 Anchorage may also be obtained, in more than 18m, about

4.5 miles W of Ponta Dom Carlos.

3.7 A vessel found anchorage, sheltered from S winds, on the

NE side of Ponta Dom Carlos Spit.

3.8 Between Ponta Dom Carlos and Beira, the 200m

curve diverges from 3 miles off Ponta Dom Carlos to more

than 70 miles offshore at Beira. Within the 200m curve, the

bottom is irregular. Numerous isolated shoal patches, with

depths of less than 20m, may be encountered up to 45 miles

offshore, and depths of less than 9m may be encountered about

25 miles offshore.

3.8 The area between the latitudes of Ponta Dom Carlos and

Ponta Macovane (21°10'S., 35°07'E.) should be navigated with

great caution on account of the numerous detached shoals

which lie within depths of less than 50m. The outermost of

these dangers is an 8m patch situated 16 miles NNE of Bazaruto Light, in depths of 30m.

3.8 Porto de Bartolomeu Dias (21°10'S., 35°07'E.) is entered

between Ponta Macovane and Ponta Mafomene, about 5 miles

NNW.

3.8 Tides—Currents.—On the ebb tide, a strong SE current

sets across the outer range line.

3.8 Depths—Limitations.—The channel is encumbered by a

bar, with depths of from 4.3 to 5.5m, about 1 mile NW of Ponta

Macovane, and narrows to its least width, of 0.2 mile between

5m curve, about 1 mile SSE of the bar.

3.8 Local knowledge is required.

3.8 Ponta Machanga (20°56'S., 35°07'E.) is the N extremity of

Inhanduge, an island in the delta of the Rio Save. The Rio Save

flows into the sea from several shallow mouths, which extend

over an area of about 7 miles. Inhanduge is the outermost of the

islands in this delta.

3.8 The depth in the river entrance was reported to be less than

1.2m; the charted spar buoy off the N entrance to Rio Save is

no longer in place.

3.8 Ponta Ingomaimo (20°42'S., 35°E.) is low and sandy. This

point is marked by a light and, since it has no mangroves, it

varies from other points in the area. This part of the coast is

fronted by shallow ridges, extending nearly 30 miles E. As the

land is just visible from the outer edge, care and attention to the

soundings must be taken when approaching this locality.

3.9 Porto de Chiloane (20°37'S., 34°53'E.) is entered

through North Channel close N of Ilha Chiloane. North Breakwater, a sand bank with a least depth of 1.2m, lying about 4.5

miles NE of Ponta Chingune, is a continuation of the extensive

bank which fringes the coast N of Ilha Chiloane.

3.9 Tides—Currents.—The HW at full and change at Ilha

Chiloane is 4 hours 49 minutes; spring tides rise 5.6m and neap

tides rise 3.9m. The tidal currents attain a velocity at times

from 3 to 4 knots; they set strongly across North Breakwater
Sector 3. Mozambique—Baia de Inhambane to Cabo Delgado 41

Pub. 171

and North Channel.

3.9 Depths—Limitations.—North Channel has a least depth of

2.4m on its bar.

3.9 Aspect.—As Ilha Chiloane is low and in many places is only

a mangrove swamp intersected by creeks. It has no features,

which can be identified from SE. The SE extremity of the island appears as a low bluff when seen from NE.

3.9 Pilotage.—It is not advisable to enter either North Channel

or South Channel without a pilot. Vessels usually embark a pilot at Inhambane.

3.9 Local knowledge is required.

3.9 Ilha Buene (20°27'S., 34°41'E.) contains an anchorage,

known as Port Buene, that is about 3 miles in length by 2 miles

in width, with depths from 5 to 8.8m; it is frequently used by

small vessels sheltering from bad weather.

3.9 Caution.—Vessels should not approach the coast, within a

distance of 8 miles between Baia de Sofala (20°11'S.,

34°43'E.) and the Rio Buzi, about 20 miles N. Within 50 miles

of Beira the bottom is irregular and numerous shoals lie in the

tracks of shipping approaching the port from both S and E.

Caution is necessary when navigating in the whole of this area.

3.10 Banco de Sofala (20°25'S., 35°27'E.), extending 70

miles E of Baia de Sofala, is an extensive bank which has

depths less than 75m; its E edge has not been completely examined.

3.10 About 32 miles ENE of Ponta Chingune (20°37'S., 34°53'E.)

are isolated shoal depths of 11m; off Ponta Macuti, in the approach to Beira, there are many shoals, with depths less than

10m. A magnetic anomaly has been reported in the vicinity of

position 20°00'S, 35°30'E.

Beira (19°50'S., 34°50'E.)

World Port Index No. 46890

3.11 Beira, the second most important port in Mozambique, is located on the E bank of the Rio Pungoe; the port consists of a town and a medium sized natural harbor.

3.11 Winds—Weather.—Winds are mainly S or SE in the early

morning, but become E or SE in the afternoon throughout the

year. Between September and April, strong S winds sometimes

cause heavy seas on Banco de Sofala and in the entrance channels. The wet season (October to April or May) is the most uncomfortable, the worst months being April and May, but in the

four following months the weather becomes more pleasant.

3.11 Tides—Currents.—The mean HW interval at Beira is 4

hours 34 minutes; spring tides rise 6.4m and neap tides rise 4m.

3.11 The rise of the river, closely resembling that of the Rio Zambezi, begins in December or January, attaining its maximum

height about March, when beginning to fall; it reaches its minimum about the end of August, remaining so until October or November.

3.11 The tidal currents are very strong, especially in the wet season, with a high river, when the outgoing tidal current may attain a velocity up to 6 knots at springs and from 2 to 3 knots at

neaps. In the dry season when the river is low, the velocity of

the outgoing tidal current at springs is 4 knots, and at neaps is

from 1.5 to 2 knots. The incoming tidal current has a velocity

from 1 to 3 knots. The greatest velocities occur near HW.

3.11 During springs, the outgoing tidal currents run from 7 to 8

hours and the incoming tidal current from 4 to 5 hours, with

hardly any period of slack water.

3.11 Allowance should be made for the effect of the tidal currents

when entering or leaving, as they set obliquely across the channels in places; neglect of this precaution often leads to vessels

grounding, but as the bottom is soft, they usually get off without damage.

3.11 Navigation is considered somewhat difficult because of the

shallow water and strong currents. The area adjacent to Pungoe

Wharf is subject to countercurrents, depending on the strength

and direction of the current in the Rio Pungoe.

3.11 Depths—Limitations.—Depths are subject to change. In

1990, the approach channel and Canal do Macuti were reported

to be dredged to a depth of 9m. A depth of 4.2m was reported

to exist about 0.2 mile E of the Lighted Buoy No. 1, in the center of the approach fairway.

3.11 Vessels with a draft up to 4.9m may enter at any stage of the

tide. The maximum acceptable fresh water draft is 10m. Vessels with a draft greater than 7m or with a length greater than

140m are not permitted to berth at night. 

3.11 Port facilities are described in the accompanying table:

3.11 Vessels are cautioned that when using Berth No. 11, particular attention should be paid to their moorings as there is a

strong current which flows into the stream, from under the jetBeira—Pier Limitations

Berth Length Depth Remarks

1 176m 7.0m Fishing vessels 

only.

2 161m 11.5m Containers and 

general cargo.

3 161m 11.5m Containers and 

general cargo.

4 161m 11.5m Containers and 

general cargo.

5 161m 11.5m Containers and 

general cargo.

6 164m 8.2m Containers and 

general cargo.

7 164m 8.0m Containers and 

general cargo.

8 192m 8.0m Coal terminal.

9 167m 9.5m Containers.

10 167m 9.5m Containers.

11 188m 9.4m

Oil terminal. 

Tankers up to 

25,000 dwt.

12 260m 13.5m

Oil terminal. 

Tankers up to 

50,000 dwt.
42 Sector 3. Mozambique—Baia de Inhambane to Cabo Delgado 

Pub. 171

ty, during the ebb. Bow lines are secured to two mooring buoys

laid NW of the berth and larger vessels can overgang the berth

by up to 60m. Several vessels are reported to have broken off

this berth.

3.11 Aspect.—The land about the mouth of the Rio Pungoe, being very low, cannot be seen if approaching from the S, until

about 11 miles from it, and near the buoys in the approach.

North of the river, a series of low sand hills covered with scrub

extend along the shore.

3.11 Ponta Macuti Light, about 1 mile ENE of the point, is conspicuous, as is the Grand Hotel, about 3.3 miles W of the light

structure and the floodlit cathedral, 46m high, about 0.5 mile

farther N.

3.11 Ponta Macique, on the E side of the entrance of the Rio Buzi

(19°53'S., 34°46'E.), has conspicuous mangroves, about 12.2m

high on it. 

3.11 Buoys may be moved as necessary to conform to the channels.

3.11 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for all vessels with the

exception of National fishing vessels and coastal vessels with

special permission. The pilot boards 1 mile W of Lighted Buoy

P. The pilot normally require a minimum clearance of 0.9m under the keel in the channel

3.11 Regulations.—Vessels must send their ETA 48 hours before

arrival at the outer channel entrance Approach Lighted Buoy A

to the Beira Traffic Control Tower. Vessels whose last port of

call was Mozambique or Durban must telex or fax this message

to the Beira Traffic Control on departure from that port. Vessels

must also send their ETA at Approach Lighted Buoy A to the

Beira Port Control Tower on VHF channel 12 or 16, 1 hour before arrival at the outer roads of the sea channel. It is compulsory for vessels to announce their arrival on VHF channel 12,

on passing the Approach Lighted Buoy A.

3.11 Anchorage.—Vessels awaiting entry to Beira should anchor,

clear of the Entrance Channel, between Approach Lighted

Buoy A and Lighted Buoy P and as near to the latter as draft

permits. 

3.11 Vessels drawing more than 9.1m should have due regard for

the outlying shoals on Banco de Sofala and make for a position

about 33 miles ESE of Ponta Macuti Light. Then, according to

the chart, with a good fix, vessels should steer 292° for Ponta

Macuti Light. A least depth of 9.7m is charted near this track in

position 20°00'S, 35°15'E. Caution is advised during periods of

heavy swell. Approach should be made after half flood tide. Instructions should be obtained from the pilot boat before proceeding to the Waiting Anchorage in the vicinity of Approach

Lighted Buoy A.

3.11 Caution.—Depths throughout the entrance channel are liable to change and buoys may be moved accordingly. Depths of

up to 1.8m less than charted have been reported (1994) in the

entrance.

Beira to Porto de Quelimane

3.12 From Beria, the coast trends in a NE direction to the

delta of the Rio Zambezi.

3.12 From Savane (19°39'S., 35°08'E.), the coast is backed by a

line of low sandhills.

3.12 From the Rio Mauendeni to the Rio Luaua, the coast is lower

and numerous small rivers enter the sea.

3.12 Kirk Point (18°58'S., 35°57'E.), a low point, is the W entrance point of the Rio Luaua and Ord Point, the E entrance

point 2 miles NE, is thickly wooded and has a range of hummocks near its E bank.

3.12 The Rio Luaua does not join the delta of the Rio Zambezi,

although it flows within 3 miles of it.

3.12 The Rio Zambezi, after a course of more than 1,200 miles,

enters the sea through an extensive delta, about 37 miles wide,

between the mouths of the Rio Milambe (18°55'S., 36°04'E.)

and the Rio Chinde (18°34'S., 36°29'E.). Several rivers flow

through the extensive delta; the Rio Chinde, although one of

the narrowest and most tortuous, is the deepest and the one

now used.

3.12 Depths—Limitations.—The various bars should never be

attempted without the assistance of a pilot or previously examining them. The fluctuations in the depth of the river are considerable, therefore, there is no permanence in either the direction or depths of the navigable passages.

3.12 Aspect.—The land separating the various entrances is low,

the tops of the trees nowhere exceeding from 15 to 24m in

height, and the similarity of the appearance of different mouths

renders it somewhat difficult to distinguish any particular one.

The Rio Cuama, the widest entrance, lying between Ponta

Leste (18°53'S., 36°17'E.) and Ponta Cause, about 1.5 miles

ENE, two comparatively high and densely wooded points, is

perhaps the most easily distinguished on account of its width,

the other entrances being mostly narrow.

3.12 The large body of water running out of the various mouths

during the rainy season, combined with the continuous heavy

ocean swell, so alters the positions of the several bars, causing

islands to form and to be washed away, that the entrances are

never alike for two seasons.

3.12 Barra Inhamissengo (18°54'S., 36°08'E.) lies across the

mouth of the Rio Mucelo, about 3.5 miles ENE of the Rio Milambe; at springs the outgoing tidal currents run across the bar

at rates from 4 to 4.5 knots.

3.12 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken off Barra Inhamissengo, in 8m, sand, but in fine weather vessels should lie farther out. The current generally sets W, causing vessels at

anchor to lie broadside to the usual SE wind; in this condition

considerable roll will be experienced.

3.12 The Rio Pambane enters the sea about 6.5 miles N of Ilha

Timbue Light (18°49'S., 36°21'E.). Anchorage can be taken, in

7m, mud about 3 miles E of the river mouth. 

3.13 Vila do Chinde (Porto do Chinde)(18°32'S.,

36°30'E.) (World Port Index No. 46900) is the port for the Rio

Zambezi, and is located at the mouth of the Rio Chinde. The

port consists of a town and a small natural harbor. The spring

tides rise 3.8m and the neaps rise 2.6m. Spring currents run at

rates from 2.5 to 3.5 knots, respectively, on the incoming and

outgoing flow. During neaps there is no perceptible incoming

current.

3.13 The entrance is fronted by numerous sand banks which extend seaward about 2.5 miles, and the inner part of which dry

from 2.4 to 3m. The sea breaks heavily on these banks. There

is a bar across the entrance, lying near the outer edge of the

drying banks, and, as changes in the position of, and depths in

the channel across the bay are frequent, vessels should not attempt to enter without a pilot.
Sector 3. Mozambique—Baia de Inhambane to Cabo Delgado 43

Pub. 171

3.13 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory, and pilots must be obtained from Beira or Porto de Quelimane. Local pilots for the

river are both numerous and skillful, and vessels should await

the pilot near the fairway buoy.

3.13 Vessels may anchor outside the fairway buoy, in 7 to 9m,

about 4 miles ESE of Ponta Liberal, but the anchorage is not

recommended because of its being open to the prevailing S

winds. Good anchorage may be obtained in the river a little

more than 1 mile NW of Ponta Liberal, in from 4.6 to 7.3m,

good holding ground; vessels should moor. Strong E winds

render anchorage close within Ponta Liberal untenable for

small vessels, but at such times they can obtain anchorage farther W. Vessels are allotted anchorage berths by the Captain of

the Port. A mooring buoy, allocated to the Captain of the Port,

lies in the inner part of the port on the N side of the harbor; anchorage is prohibited in the vicinity of this buoy.

3.14 Between Ponta Liberal (18°34'S., 36°28'E.) and the

Rio Bazar, the coast is low and seldom visible at a distant of 7

miles offshore, but between the Rio Bazar and Ponta Deia, 15

miles farther NE, it is slightly higher and more visible.

3.14 The Rio Linde (18°12'S., 36°50'E.) is entered between Ponta Deia and Ponta Sampinguira. A white triangular beacon

stands on Ponta Sampinguira. Anchorage can be taken, in 7m,

SE of Ponta Deia. 

3.14 Between the Rio Linde and Ponta Olinda (18°03'S.,

36°58'E.), the coast is low and covered with vegetation; there

are several sand hills and reddish patches. A low, but prominent, bluff is situated 2.5 miles NE of Ponta Sampinguira.

3.14 Vilhena Light (18°06'S., 36°55'E.) is exhibited 3.7 miles

SSW of Ponta Olinda, the S entrance point to the Rio dos Bons

Sinais.

3.14 Caution.—Between Vila do Chinde and the Rio dos Bons

Sinais shallow water may be expected off the entrances of the

rivers, and, as the soundings are few, it is not advisable to close

the coast too much when navigating it.

3.15 The Rio dos Bons Sinais is entered between Ponta

Olinda (18°03'S., 36°58'E.) and Ponta Tangalane. The land

near Ponta Olinda is somewhat higher than the low, sandy, jungle covered land on both sides of the entrance.

3.15 The bar across the entrance extends from the vicinity of Vilhena Light to a bank extending SSE from Ponta Tangalane. In

1975, there was a depth of 3.3m on the bar at LW springs.

However, the bar and banks are subject constant change, especially the bar after SW gales, and no reliance should be placed

on the charted depths.

3.15 The sea is generally smooth on the bar at HW but is said to

be impassable if the sea is running in the offing. At times, particularly at the ebb, solitary waves of great height break on the

bar; boats should use great caution in crossing.

3.15 Vessels drawing up to 5m may cross the bar at HW springs,

and up to 3.5m at HW neaps.

3.15 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for all vessels entering

the Rio dos Bons Sinais. Pilots are available 24 hours and ,with

prior arrangement, will meet vessels at the landfall buoy, about

3.5 miles SE of Vihena Light.

Porto de Quelimane (17°53'S., 36°53'E.)

World Port Index No. 46910

3.16 Porto de Quelimane is located on the N edge of the

Zambezi Delta, about 18 miles up the the Rio dos Bons Sinais.

The port consists of a town and a very small natural harbor.

3.16 Winds—Weather.—The prevailing wind off the river is

from SE to S during the greater part of the year, being sometimes to the W of S between January and March. In October,

winds from SSE to ESE have been found to blow throughout

the night, lulling in the morning, but this is unusual, as a land

wind generally springs up at night. Off the town in July, the sea

breeze from SSE sets in about noon, with a force of from 1 to

3, but during the night it is usually calm, with the land breeze

in the morning.

3.16 The worst weather conditions occur in January and February

at the height of the rainy season followed by the months when

the rains have ceased and the sun is actively drying up the decaying vegetation; November is the hottest month. Early morning mists can be relatively cold with a temperature of 17°C

being registered in July.

3.16 Tides—Currents.—Outside the bar and along the coast the

current generally sets to the SW, at velocities of from 1 to 2

knots, causing vessels at anchor off the bar to lie broadside to

the swell and to roll considerably.

3.16 The incoming tidal current, after running over the bar when

nearing Ponta Tangalane, sets directly onto the banks on the W

side, rendering great caution necessary. In the river, the currents attain a velocity of 3 knots.

3.16 Depths—Limitations.—The permissible draft for entry are

subject to Port Authority and to the depth over the bar. The port

accommodates vessels up to 150m and a draft of 5m.

3.16 A concrete wharf with a depth of 6m alongside, is situated in

the NW part of the port area.

3.16 Aspect.—The land on both sides of the entrance is low,

sandy, and covered with trees or jungle growth. The entrance is

conspicuous bearing about 328° and, when abreast of it, the

river, being wide and having a straight course for some distance, no land will be seen from the deck between the entrance

points, although Ilha dos Cavallos Marinhos, 4 miles within the

entrance may be seen. 

3.16 Two radio masts, about 61m high, stand on the NE side of

the town and are visible when the light is favorable. The barracks situated in the SE part of town are prominent. The church

is a stone building painted yellow and has two spires.

3.16 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory and is available during

daylight hours only. Pilots board close E of Buoy P.

3.16 Regulations.—Vessels may enter and depart the port only at

HW during the port working hours of 0700 to 2300.

3.16 The vessel’s ETA should be sent 7 days prior to arrival, stating the deepest arrival draft and vessel’s last port of call. Further ETAs should be sent 72 hours, 48 hours, 24 hours, and 12

hours in advance, giving the date, time of arrival, and any draft

changes.
44 Sector 3. Mozambique—Baia de Inhambane to Cabo Delgado 

Pub. 171

3.16 Anchorage.—Good temporary anchorage can be obtained

outside the entrance, in 9m, with Vilhena Light bearing 286°,

distant about 5 miles, but if intending to remain for any time, it

would be better to anchor farther NE in about the same depth,

as here there is said to be less sea and current.

3.16 Anchorage, in 9 to 11m, is obtainable N of the E entrance of

Canal Militao. There is also anchorage off the town of Quelimane, in 3 to 6m. Vessels can also anchor in almost any part of

the river and are designated by the pilot.

3.16 Caution.—The positions of the range beacons and buoys are

subject to alterations to meet the frequent changes in the channel. It has been reported (1996) that the entrance channel and

the approaches to the wharf have silted up.

Porto de Quelimane to Porto Belo

3.17 Between Ponta Tangalane (18°01'S., 36°59'E.) and

Ponta Matirre, the coast is low, sandy, and backed by jungle.

Several rivers flow into the sea along this stretch of coast.

There are dangers along the coast but in general the offshore

depths increase regularly and gradually.

3.17 Caution.—Pantaloon Shoals (17°43'S., 38°02'E.) lie about

22.5 miles offshore and extend 8.5 miles in a NE and SW direction. The SW shoal has a least charted depth of 7.8m while

the NE shoal has a depth of 8.3m. Acorn Patch has a depth of

7.7m.

3.17 David Shoals (17°30'S., 38°27'E.) consists of three patches

which have a least depth of 9.8m. Lacerda Shoal, with a depth

of 8.2m, lies about 4.5 miles NE of David Shoals.

Porto Belo (17°42'S., 37°11'E.)

World Port Index No. 46920

3.18 Porto Belo is situated 4 miles within the entrance of

the Rio Macuse on the N bank. The Rio Macuse is entered between Ponta Namerruma and Ponta da Barra, a slight bluff 2

miles farther NE.

3.18 Tides—Currents.—The incoming current sets W on the rising tide and the outgoing current sets E on the falling tide. Caution is necessary to guard against these currents when crossing

the bar.

3.18 Depths—Limitations.—The bar is subject to frequent

changes. Within the bar, the depths increase; at the anchorage

abreast a wharf near Porto Belo, there are depths of 11.6m. A

depth of 9.4m can be carried as far as Maquival, about 16 miles

within the entrance.

3.18 The maximum draft allowed over the bar is 5m at springs

and 3.5m at neaps.

3.18 Aspect.—The navigational marks are moved as necessary to

meet changes in the channel.

3.18 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory. Pilots must be requested

through the Port Authority at Quelimane 24 hours before arrival.

3.18 Vessels should not attempt to enter without a pilot.

3.18 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be obtained in the river

abreast a wharf near Porto Belo.

3.18 Caution.—The navigational marks are moved as necessary

to meet the frequent changes in the channel.

Porto Belo to Porto de Pebane

3.19 From Ponta da Barra the coast trends in an ENE direction to Ponta Matirre (17°17'S., 38°11'E.). The 10m curve lies

up to 6.5 miles off this part of the coast.

3.19 The Rio Mazemba (17°19'S., 38°03'E.) is the most important of the rivers along this stretch of coast, excluding the Rio

Moniga. The river flows out through a narrow channel. Within

the bar there are depths from 6 to 9m for about 4 miles.

Porto de Pebane (17°16'S., 38°09'E.)

World Port Index No. 46925

3.20 The estuary of the Rio Moniga, known as Porto de Pebane, enters the sea 5 miles ENE of the Rio Mazemba. Ilha

Quisungo separates the entrances of the Rio Mazemba and the

Rio Tejungo.

3.20 Depths—Limitations.—The entrance is fronted by extensive banks, and shallow water extends a considerable distance;

3.5 miles off, the depths on the range line are about 9.1m. The

bar lies between banks extending seaward from the entrance

points, about 2.5 miles; the depths over the bar change frequently. In 1974, the least depth in the entrance was 1.7m.

3.20 Within the bar, the depths increase from 4.9 to 6.1m and in

the river there are depths from 10 to 17m.

3.20 Extra caution should be exercised when crossing the bar

3.20 Aspect.—The S coast of Ilha Quisungo is irregular and

somewhat higher than the coast on either side. This feature, together with the bold appearance of Ponta Matirre, renders the

entrance to Porto de Pebane easy to distinguish from that of the

Rio Mazemba.

3.20 A military station on the W bank of the Rio Moniga, above

the entrance of the Rio Tejungo, may be easily identified.

3.20 Range beacons stand on the W bank of the river about 3

miles within the river in range 327°. In 1992, the landfall buoy

was moored 2 miles SSE of Ponta Maverani; the channel

across the bar is marked by buoys. Aids to navigation are

moved as necessary.

3.20 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory. Pilots must be requested

through the Port Captain at Quelimane at least 1 day before arrival.

3.20 Anchorage.—There is anchorage off the town, in 12m, sand

and shells.

3.20 Caution.—Vessels should not attempt to cross the bar or enter without local knowledge. 

3.20 Aids to navigation are moved as necessary.

Porto de Pebane to Ponta Calderia

3.21 Ponta Matirre (17°17'S., 38°11'E.), marked by a

light, is a conspicuous bluff composed of yellow cliffs. A signal station is located on the point.

3.21 The Rio Melai is entered about 6 miles ENE of Ponta Matirre. Cabo Tocorro, the NE entrance point, is a conspicuous

bluff, formed of red earth cliffs.

3.21 Ponta Matirre and Cabo Tocorro are the most conspicuous

points on this section of the coast.
Sector 3. Mozambique—Baia de Inhambane to Cabo Delgado 45

Pub. 171

3.21 Between Cabo Tocorro and Ponta M’sulo, 26 miles ENE,

there is a well-wooded stretch of coast.

3.21 The Rio Namane (17°08'S., 38°31'E.), which enters the sea

19 miles ENE of the mouth of the Rio Melai, is the mouth of

the delta of the Rio Malela. In 1958 there was a depth of 1.2m

on the bar across its entrance.

3.21 The tidal current attain rates from 4 to 5 knots in the entrance

during springs. The sea over the bar is reported to be smoother

during the period of the incoming tidal current, but no vessel

should attempt to cross the bar without local knowledge.

3.22 The Rio Moebaze (17°05'S., 38°41'E.) (World Port

Index No. 46926) is entered between Ponta M’sulo and Ponta

Almandia, about 1 mile ESE. The tidal currents in the entrance

are at times violent and run in various directions, especially at

spring tides with strong W winds. The depths across the bar are

subject to frequent changes; in 1958 the depth was 1.5m. Because of the shifting bar all aids to navigation are moved whenever necessary. Pilotage is compulsory; the latest information

should be obtained from the Port Captains Office at Quelimane. Vessels should not attempt to cross the bar without local

knowledge. Anchorage may be obtained abreast the old village

of Moebaze, in 5 to 8m.

3.22 Ilhas Primeiras is a group of islets lying in a position 13

miles SSE of Ponta M’sulo and extending NE, roughly parallel

to the coast, for a distance of 25 miles.

3.22 Ilha Fogo (Ilha do Fogo) (17°14'S., 38°53'E.) is 3m high,

with a few trees on its N end, the other parts being covered

with shrub. Anchorage may be obtained, in 9 to 10m, 0.5 mile

from the beach on the W side, or a vessel may anchor, in 18m,

about 0.3 to 0.4 mile from the beach, with the center of the island bearing 156° to 178°. 

3.22 Ilha Coroa lies NE of Ilha Fogo. A stranded wreck lies on Ilha Coroa and a depth of 10.9m is located 1 mile N of the N extremity of the island.

3.22 Ilha Casuarina is covered with casuarina trees, about 24m

high, and can be recognized at a considerable distance.

3.22 Ilha Epidendron has a few casuarina trees on its N part, but

the S part is covered with short shrub; it may be seen from a

distance of about 15 miles. Anchorage can be obtained, in 7 to

20m, about 0.3 mile off the NW side of the island. A stranded

wreck lies on Ilha Epidendron.

3.22 Casuarina Road, between the island of the same name and

the mainland, is the best anchorage along this coast. Anchorage, protected from SE winds, may be obtained, in 20m, about

1 mile from the W side of Ilha Casuarina, or in 6m, about 0.5

mile offshore with the center of the island bearing 135°. If entering from the N, Ilha Casuarina should be kept on a bearing

of 220° and open W of Ilha de Epidendron in order to pass NW

of Baixo Barrco and the reef E of it; then course should be altered to approximately 232° on Ilha Fogo for the anchorage.

3.22 Baixo Barraco, a dangerous reef, lies 3 miles NE of Ilha Epidendron.

3.23 From Ponta Almandia (17°05'S., 38°42'E.), the E entrance point to the Rio Moebaze, the coast trends ENE to Ponta

Macalonga. For a distance of 6.5 miles E of Ponta Almandia,

the coast is well wooded, then its aspect gradually changes to

sandy hummocks covered with thick clumps of bushes. Farther

E, the coast consists of low, bare, sandhills with a few scattered

trees.

3.23 Two rivers flow into the sea along this coast, but the mouth

of each river is closed by a bar, which nearly dries.

3.23 A distinct red cliff is located 13 miles E of Ponta Almandia.

3.23 Ponta Macalonga (17°01'S., 39°04'E.) is a low sandy point.

It is fronted by a bank, with irregular depths that range from

5.5 to 9m. The bank extends 4 miles S of the point.

Mount M’tupe (16°34'S., 39°10'E.), about 27 miles N of

Ponta Macalonga and the only mountain seen on this part of

the coast, is a conspicuous cone of considerable height. A conspicuous clump of casuarina trees stands about 7 miles N of

Ponta Macalonga. The Rio Naburi enters the sea 5.5 miles NE

of Ponta Macalonga and the Rio Lingonha enters the sea 2.5

miles farther NNE. These two rivers have no particular importance.

3.24 Porto de Moma (16°46'S., 39°14'E.) (World Port Index No. 46927) is entered between Ilha Mutirrane (16°47'S.,

39°15'E.) and Ponta Nicota, the N entrance point. Banks extend nearly 2 miles E of each entrance point. In 1983, there was

a depth of 1m in the channel over the bar joining the above

banks. 

3.24 Tidal currents run strongly in the entrance channel and are

reported to be irregular.

3.24 Pilotage is compulsory. The maritime delegate at Porto de

Angoche is the pilot. Anchorage may be obtained abreast the

village of Nacalaua, 2.5 miles within the entrance, in 7 to 9m.

3.24 Ponta Calderia (16°39'S., 39°30'E.) is somewhat higher

than the adjoining coast; it is marked by a light. 

Off-lying Islets and Dangers

3.25 Ilhas de Angoche are a chain of islets and shoals

which lie at distances that vary from 3.5 to 8 miles offshore,

near the outer edge of a bank fronting the coast between Porto

de Moma and Porto de Angoche, 50 miles NE. 

3.25 Ilha Moma (16°49'S., 39°31'E.) is the farthest SW of the

group. Except on its NW side, the islet is surrounded by reefs

which extend up to 1 mile off its E side. 

3.25 There are two isolated rocky patches situated 6 and 7.5 miles

SW of Ilha de Moma; they have depths of 5.4m and 6m, respectively. Other isolated patches lie NW of Ilha Moma; their

positions are best seen on the chart.

3.25 Ilha Caldeira (16°39'S., 39°43'E.) lies about 12 miles E of

Ponta Caldeira. Reefs extend E from the islet for a distant of 1

mile. Moderately good anchorage may be taken 1 mile NW of

the islet, in a depth of about 14m, coral, sand, and mud.

3.25 Ilha Nejovo, a low sandy islet covered with trees, lies about

6.7 miles NE of Ilha Caldeira. An extensive reef lies off the SE

side island. There is anchorage about 0.2 mile off the NW side

of the islet, in depths of 11 to 14m; it is protected from S and

SE winds.

3.25 Ilha Puga-Puga lies 3.2 miles offshore about 5 miles NE of

Baixo Miguel; at HW it only shows as a small sandy cay about

1.8 to 2.4m above the sea. Except on its NW side, the islet is surrounded by reefs which extend as much as 1.5 miles SE.

3.25 Ilhade Mafamebe (16°21'S., 40°02'E.) is low and sandy, but

a group of trees on it may be seen from a distance of 12 to 15

miles; it is also marked by a light. 

3.25 Anchorage.—Anchorage may be taken SE of the above
46 Sector 3. Mozambique—Baia de Inhambane to Cabo Delgado 

Pub. 171

shoal, in 11m, with Ilha de Mafamede Light bearing 180°, distant 1 mile, or with the light bearing 150°, distant 0.4 mile, in a

similar depth. 

3.25 Caution.—Between Ilha Moma and Ilha Calderia, 15 miles

NE, the depths are quite irregular.

3.25 Baixo Miguel (16°31'S., 39°53'E.) is a dangerous drying

reef which should be given a wide berth.

3.25 A shoal, with a least depth of 5.8m, lies 2 miles NW of the

light situated on Ilha de Mafamede.

Ponta Masiuane to Porto de Mocambique

3.26 Ponta Masiuane (16°24'S., 39°54'E.) is a low projecting white sandy point, on which are a number of small sand

hillocks, conspicuous from a considerable distance.

3.26 The Rio Quilua, W of Ponta Masiuene, is much frequented

by coasting vessels, which find good sheltered anchorage off

Menuca, a village within the mouth. The entrance channel, between two sand banks which are well-defined at low water,

when there is no difficulty in entering. The least depth in the

channel over the bar was 0.9m (1960).

3.27 Porto de Angoche (16°14'S., 39°54'E.) (World Port

Index No. 46928), consisting of a town and a small natural harbor, is entered between the E extremity of Ilha do Buzio

(16°16'S., 39°56'E.) and Ponta Namacoto, a slight projection

on the coast, nearly 4 miles NE. The tidal currents attain a

maximum velocity of 4 knots in the anchorage. There are numerous banks and shoals in the approach. The entrance channel is about 11 miles long; the depth over bar was 2m in 1974.

The port will accommodate vessels, with a draft of 5m but vessels of this size can enter and leave only at HW.

3.27 About 1 mile outside the bar there are some comparatively

shallow spots for which a look out should be kept. These shoals

are usually marked by breakers and can be avoided.

3.27 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for merchant vessels entering and, if requested, will embark off Ilha de Mafamede. Anchorage can be obtained opposite the town, in a depth of 7.5m, sand

and mud.

3.27 Caution.—Caution is required if it should be considered necessary to sound the bar, as it is sometimes dangerous to do so.

3.28 Between Ilha Angoche (16°20'S., 39°51'E.), at the

entrance to Porto de Angoche, and the Rio Sangage the coast

consists of sand hills, which attain heights of from 91 to 122m

near the river. Several of these hills are marked by patches of

red sand. The land in the vicinity of the Rio Sangage is conspicuous, as the sand hills, partly covered with vegetation, and

the N point of the river, which is low and sandy, form a striking

contrast to two rocky points 4 or 5 miles S of the river.

3.28 Ponta Congolone (16°05'S., 40°06'E.), a rocky point NE of

Ponta Namacoto, may be identified by a conspicuous yellow

sand dune situated on it. Close within the point the land rises to

a height of 311m. This point is visible at 15 to 20 miles offshore and, except for the hill on which Sangage Light stands, is

the only land visible.

3.28 Caution.—Baixo de Santo Antonio (16°12'S., 40°08'E.), a

steep-to dangerous reef which dries in places, lies in the approach to Porto de Angoche.

3.28 Baixo Namuali lies near the S end of a sand spit which extends 5 miles SSE from Ponta Congolone. There is a least

charted depth of 2.7m on the shoal and the spit has a least

charted depth of 5.8m.

3.28 Baixo Nantapa (16°04'S., 40°12'E.), a rocky patch with a

depth of 7.6m, lies 6 miles E of Ponta Congolone; Baixo Sangage, with a depth of 9.8m, lies 5 miles farther ENE.

3.29 The Rio Sangage (15°58'S., 40°08'E.) is entered between Ponta Djuma and Ponta Selela, about 1.2 miles N.

3.29 Depths—Limitations.—Both entrance points are fronted by

drying banks which extend as far as 2.5 miles E, and are connected by a bar, the position of which, and depths on, are probably subject to considerable change. In 1960, there was a least

depth of 1.8m in the channel over the bar, which passed close

to the bank fronting Ponta Selela, and then close to the S bank

for about 3 miles within the entrance. Within the bar there are

depths of from 3 to 7.9m in the narrow channel, which trends

in a S direction to the settlement.

3.29 Aspect.—Namduma Hills rise from 610 to 914m, about 17

miles NNW of the entrance of the Rio Sangage, and should be

conspicuous features from seaward.

3.29 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be obtained off the settlement,

about 3 miles within the entrance on the S shore, in 5 to 7m.

3.29 Caution.—Local knowledge is essential for crossing the bar.

3.30 Between the Rio Sangage and the Rio Murrioze, the

low coast is partly covered with trees and is fringed by a sandy

beach.

3.30 The Rio Murrioze (15°51'S., 40°14'E.) has a narrow entrance; it may be identified by a small bluff on the S bank of the

river and by the village of Quinga which is situated near the N

entrance point.

3.30 Baixo Mussibarinde (15°56'S., 40°18'E.), with a least depth

of 6.4m, and Baxio Quinga with a least depth of 7.9m, lie 5.5

miles and 9 miles, respectively, SE of the mouth of the the Rio

Murrioze. The sandy beach continues for a distance of 10 miles

NE from the Rio Murrioze and is then fringed with rocks as far

as Ponta Namalungo, 7.5 miles NE.

3.30 Ponta Namalungo (15°38'S., 40°25'E.) is a wooded sandy

bluff marked by a light. The adjacent coast is low and sandy,

with a growth of casuarina trees; the distant land behind the

point appears high. 

3.30 Baixo Mecade (15°50'S., 40°23'E.), with a least depth of

2.3m, lies 5 miles offshore 9 miles ENE of Quinga. A shoal area, with depths under 10m, lies 3 miles NNW of Baixo Mecade. Baixo Namaete, a reef area, with a least charted depth of

4.9m, lies 7 miles NNE of Mecade.

3.31 From Ponta Namalungo to Ponta Bajone the coast is

fronted by a mangrove swamp; a chain of islands, islets, and

sand banks lies along the edge of this swamp.

3.31 Within 4 miles of the chain of islets, the offshore depths are irregular and the bottom is rocky; there are several dangerous

shoals. The sea generally breaks heavily on some of these shoals.

3.31 Baixo Mucalanga (15°35'S., 40°32'E.), with a least depth of

1.8m, and Baixo Chataputa, with a least depth of 0.6m, are two

rocky patches near the edge of a 10m bank, which extends 2

miles off the chain of islets 8 miles NE of Ponta Namalungo;

the sea generally breaks on the shoals.
Sector 3. Mozambique—Baia de Inhambane to Cabo Delgado 47

Pub. 171

3.31 Baixo Infusse (15°32'S., 40°37'E.), a rocky shoal with a

least depth of 4.6m, lies 4 miles offshore. Baixo do Brugi consists of several shoal patches, which have a least depth of 2.7m.

An isolated pinnacle rock, with a depth of 3.8m, lies near the

10m curve 2 miles NNE of the shoalest part of Baixo do Brugi.

3.31 Baixo Namezaco (15°22'S., 40°39'E.), a sandy patch which

dries, breaks heavily; it lies at the seaward end of a spit, about

2 miles offshore. Baixos Quanzi consists of several detached

shoal patches, with a least depth of 4m. The sea generally

breaks on these shoals.

3.31 Ponta Bajone (15°15'S., 40°41'E.) is the E extremity of a

low sandy island covered with trees which lies at the NE end of

the coastal mangrove swamp.

3.32 Porto de Mocambo (15°08'S., 40°33'E.) is entered

between Ponta Quissiruaonde and Ponta Fugo.

3.32 Aspect.—Muchelia, a hill with three peaks rising about 1.5

miles NW of Ponta Fugo, is the most conspicuous landmark.

3.32 Anchorage.—Anchorage may be obtained about 0.3 mile

off the N shore, in from 11 to 15m, with Ponta Fugo bearing

120°, distant about 1.5 miles, or about 0.5 mile off the S shore,

in 18m, with the drying extremity of Ponta Calajulo bearing

031°, distant about 2 miles, but anchorage may be obtained in

any part of the harbor which is clear of dangers.

3.32 Directions.—Vessels should approach the entrance steering

for Muchelia, bearing 270°, and when a prominent white building at Lunga bears about 243°, it should be steered for on that

bearing, passing about 0.2 mile off Ponta Fugo, which is steepto, whence course may be shaped for the selected anchorage.

Care must be taken to avoid Quipua which lies 1.7 miles WNW

of Ponta Fugo.

Porto de Mocambique (15°02'S., 40°44'E.)

World Port Index No. 46930

3.33 Porto de Mocambique is entered between Ponta Sancul (15°05'S., 40°43'E.) and Ponta da Cabaceira, a low wooded

bluff. Ilha de Mocambique is the site of the town of Mocambique, which nearly covers the entire island. Although parts of

the harbor are encumbered with banks and shoals, there is shelter within the island for a large number of vessels.

3.33 Winds—Weather.—The prevailing winds on the coast

about Mocambique are N from October to April and S during

the rest of the year. Land and sea breezes prevail, the former

blowing directly out of the harbor at daylight and the latter

coming in about 1000 or 1100 from SE to S, shifting toward E

in the afternoon.

3.33 Cyclones are rarely actually experienced within the harbor,

but they once occurred in three consecutive years during the

month of January. Cyclones frequently pass through Mozambique Channel within a few miles of the harbor.

3.33 The rainy season is from November to March, inclusive.

3.33 Tides—Currents.—A current setting SW along the coast is

usually experienced off Porto de Mocambique; it reaches a velocity of 4 knots during the strength of the Northeast Monsoon.

The outer limits of the current are from 50 to 80 miles offshore.

3.33 The mean drift of the Mozambique Current between latitudes 10°S and 20°S is weakest in June and July when they are

8 and 7 miles per day, respectively. At this time, within the port

area, the current may be inappreciable, but close inshore a

countercurrent may be experienced.

3.33 The incoming tidal current sets W on the rising tide and the

outgoing tidal current sets E on the falling tide; both incoming

and outgoing tidal currents are very strong at springs.

3.33 Depths—Limitations.—The charted depth on the range line

through North Channel is 9.1m, located about 0.8 mile NE of

the NE extremity of Ilha de Goa. There are depths up to 33m

within the harbor. Only vessels with a draft less than 9.1m can

cross the bar at LW.

3.33 Aspect.—For about 10 miles on either side of the harbor the

land is low, but Cabo Conducia, about 6 miles N of Ilha de

Mocambique, may be identified by its cliffs, 61m high, with

reddish colored patches, which stand out clearly from the surrounding dark green vegetation. A conspicuous house is located about 1.2 miles SSW of Cabo Conducia.

3.33 Fortaleza de Sao Sebastiao, at the NE extremity of Ilha de

Mocambique; the white spire of Sao Paulo Church, about 0.4

mile SW; and the lighthouse on Ilha de Goa, about 3 miles SE

of Ilha de Mocambique, are conspicuous. 

3.33 In clear weather, the harbor may be identified by Monte Pao

(14°50'S., 40°25'E.) and Monte Mesa (14°45'S., 40°39'E.),

both about 296m high, rising about 23 miles NW and 18 miles

N, respectively, of Ilha de Mocambique. The former, which is

not often visible from seaward, resembles a small roundtopped hill surmounting a larger one; the latter has a long, flat

summit, which rises from a longer flat topped ridge, but, at

some distance from it, only its upper part is visible, and it appears as a flat island. A bridge extends from the mainland ESE

to the SW end of Ilha de Mocambique.

3.33 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for merchant vessels;

they embark at the seaward end of North Channel. A pilot is

available at all times. The vessel’s ETA should be given to the

pilot station as soon as possible.

3.33 Anchorage.—Vessels waiting to embark a pilot or by reason

of draft unable to cross the bar may anchor 1.5 miles NE of Ilha de Goa, in depths of 1 to 18m, sand and coral.

3.33 There is anchorage, in 12 to 14m, with Fortaleza Sao Sebastiao bearing between 282° and 305°, 0.6 to 0.8 mile distant.

This anchorage has not been closely examined and several

deep holes exist; care is necessary when anchoring.

3.33 Inside the entrance are three principal anchorages, as follows:

1. Vessels of 5.5m draft can anchor, in 6 to 8m, between

Ilha de Mocambique and Banco Leven. 

2. Deep draft vessels can anchor, in 22 to 24m, between

Banco Leven and Harpshell Sands.

3. There are depths of 9.7 to 12.8m NE of Lumbo Pier,

where vessels anchor when discharging for the railroad.

3.33 Caution.—Because of the danger of fouling telegraph cables, vessels should not anchor in the channel NE of Ilha de

Mocambique or within a radius of 0.6 mile of the N end of Fortaleza Sao Sebastiao.

Porto de Mocambique to Porto de Nacala

3.34 Baia da Conducia is entered between Cabo da Cabaceira (15°00'S., 40°46'E.) and Ponta Quifinga.

3.34 Depths—Limitations.—The depths in the entrance are irregular, but near the middle of the bay there are depths of from
48 Sector 3. Mozambique—Baia de Inhambane to Cabo Delgado 

Pub. 171

11 to 22m, the approach being through a channel, about 0.3

mile wide, with depths of from 20.1 to 33m. Westward the

depths decrease; there is a least depth of 5.8m near the entrance

of the Rio Sanhute, at the head of the bay.

3.34 Aspect.—Between Cabo da Cabaceira and the conspicuous

cliffs of Cabo Conducia, about 4 miles NNW, the coast is low,

sandy, and covered with trees. Ponta Quifinga is the S extremity of Ilha Quitangonha, a narrow coral island about 6.1m high,

with steep and overhanging extremities, which is covered with

grass and shrubs and ringed with mangroves on its W side.

3.34 Anchorage.—Anchorage may be obtained, in depths of 11

to 16m, mud, with Ponta Quifinga in range with the N end of

Ilha Sombreiro bearing 072°, from 2.5 to 4.5 miles distant from

the islet. Cabo da Cabaceira in range with Cabo Conducia,

bearing about 150°, gives a mark for the outer anchorage, and a

mark for the inner anchorage is given by the N extremity of Ilha dos Sete Paus in range with Cabo Conducia bearing about

125°.

3.34 Vessels of moderate draft may obtain anchorage in the Rio

Sanhute, in depths of 6 to 14m, in a narrow area about 1 mile

above the entrance; there is a bar across the entrance with a

least depth of 3.7m.

3.34 Directions.—Vessels approaching from the S pass at least

0.5 mile off Ilha dos Sete Paus and steer for a position with the

N extremity of that island bearing 218° 0.8 mile distant. From

here make good a course of 320° for a position 1.5 miles S of

Ilha Sombriero; a course of 286° will then lead to the anchorage.

3.34 From N, keep 2 miles off Ilha Quitangonha (14°52'S.,

40°49'E.), then make good a course of 255° for the position 1.5

miles S of Ilha Sombriero, then proceed as above.

3.35 Between Ilha Quintangonha and Porto de Quissimajulo, several coves are available to small coastal vessels.

3.35 Between Ponta Napenja (14°50'S., 40°50'E.), which

projects from the coast, and Ilha Ancuazi, 18 miles N, the coast

is backed by hills lying about 2 miles inland.

3.35 Along the coast, for a distance of 3 miles N of Ponta Napenja, it is fringed with a series of rocks, with holes in them resembling arches.

3.35 Ponta Onlugune (14°41'S., 40°50'E.) is marked by a light.

Enseada de Janga is situated between 2 and 5 miles N of Ponta

Onlugune; in the N part of the bay there are depths of more

than 365m within 0.5 mile of the coast.

3.35 Between Ponta Cumpadji (14°31'S., 40°50'E.) and Cabo

Melamo, the coast is about 90m high; it is fronted by a drying

reef of rocks and coral, which extends up to 1 mile offshore.

3.35 Baia de Fernao Veloso is entered between Cabo Melamo

(14°25'S., 40°48'E.) and Ilha Gomen. Porto de Nacala and Porto Belmore lie, respectively, in the SW and NW parts of the

bay.

3.35 Ponta Gegi has a projecting rock, with a few casuarina trees

on either side of it, rendering it conspicuous. An old military

station, consisting of a house with a red roof, stands on the

summit of a low hill, about 0.5 mile SE of Ponta Naarenque,

and is visible from the entrance of the bay. A conspicuous

white house stands about 1.7 miles W of Ponta Naarenque.

3.35 On the N side of the bay, the ruins of an old fort may be seen

on Ilha Gomen. Between Ilha Gomen and Ponta Utuco, the E

entrance point of Porto Belmore there is a moderately-flat

topped hill, about 91m high, which rises steeply from the surrounding level land, and when seen from about 15 miles N, resembles a vessel under sail, but, on a closer approach or when

seen on a different bearing, it loses that appearance.

3.35 At the head of the bay, about 10 miles NW of Ponta Sacamulo, the W entrance point of Porto de Nacala, are some conspicuous saddle-shaped hills and a sugarloaf peak.

3.35 Anchorage may be obtained, in 11 to 16m, on a bank which

extends about 0.8 mile offshore, from 2 to 4 miles W of Ponta

Gegi, but caution is necessary when anchoring on the bank, as

the depths increase very rapidly off its edge.

Porto de Nacala (14°32'S., 40°40'E.)

World Port Index No. 46935

3.36 Porto de Nacala is a fine natural harbor entered from

the SW corner of Baia de Fernao Veloso. It is situated on the

SE side of the harbor, where there are quays for ocean-going

vessels.

3.36 Tides—Currents.—The maximum tidal range is 3.7m at

springs. Currents run strongly in the entrance of Porto de Nacala and also at the anchorage near the military post of Fernao

Veloso; but it does not run at Baie Bengo at the S part of the

port area. It was reported (1994) that the maximum current inside the harbor is 1 knot.

3.36 Depths—Limitations.—In the narrows SSW of Ponta

Naarenque, the entrance is about 0.3 mile wide between the 11m

curves; there is good anchorage for any size vessel. The North

Quay has alongside depths of 7 to 9m. The container terminal

has alongside depths of 12 to 14m.

3.36 The tankers anchorage will accommodate a vessel up to

130,000 dwt, with a maximum draft of 18m.

3.36 Aspect.—A conspicuous water tank is located about 0.5

mile SE of Ponta Maiaia; a large chimney stands about 1.7

miles N of the tank.

3.36 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory. Pilots embark about 2

miles N of the light situated on Ponta Naarenque; in periods of

strong winds, the pilot boards inside the bay, in the area between Punta Naarenque and Punta Sacamulo. It was reported

(198) that vessels were permitted to proceed to the inner anchorage without a pilot. Good holding, in a depth of 24m, was

reported 0.5 mile E of Ponta Namuaxi Light. Pilotage is compulsory for all types of vessels when berthing or shifting berth

in the port.

3.36 Anchorage.—Good anchorage may be obtained anywhere,

sand and mud bottom, within Porto de Nacala, but the anchorages recommended are in Baia Bengo, about 0.3 mile SSW of

Ponta Maiaia, or, in 6 to 7m, 0.5 mile ESE of Ponta Miuguri.

Small vessels may obtain anchorage, in depths from 5 to 7m,

about 0.2 mile SE of the town of Nacala-Velha. Anchorage

may also be obtained in a bight close S of Ponta Naarenque,

abreast the landing place for the military post, in about 22m.

3.36 Directions.—Approach should be made in the intensified

sector of Nacala Light. When the light on Ponta Sacamulo

bears S, the vessel should head for it on that bearing until the

lights S of Ponta Naaarenque come in range 155°, when course

should be altered to this alignment. As soon as Ponta Sacamulo

is abeam, alter course to 197°; with the light off Ponta Namuaxi directly ahead to pass about 0.4 mile W of the light
Sector 3. Mozambique—Baia de Inhambane to Cabo Delgado 49

Pub. 171

structure on Ponta Zuani, then steer S to the quay or the anchorage.

Porto de Nacala to Pema

3.37 Porto Belmore (14°21'S., 40°38'E.) is entered in the

NW part of Baia de Fernao Veloso, between Ponta Utuco

(14°23'S., 40°41'E.) and a projection about 1.5 miles W. It affords excellent shelter during the cyclone season.

3.37 Tides—Currents.—The tidal currents are strong in the entrance of Porto Belmore and, during the rainy season, the water

is much discolored and the edge of the reefs are then difficult

to distinguish.

3.37 Aspect.—Range beacons, in line bearing 333°, lead through

the entrance and up the fairway of the port. The front beacon is

a pyramid, 6.1m high, standing near the edge of a mangrove

swamp at the head of the harbor. The rear beacon is a white

rectangle, 7.9m high, standing on a hill about 1.3 miles NNW

of the front beacon.

3.37 Anchorage.—Anchorage, in 18m, may be obtained off

Nhiendgi, on the E side of the harbor, about 0.7 mile NW of

Ponta Utuco, or, in about 12m, off the W side of the harbor,

about 2.5 miles within the entrance.

3.38 Between Ilha Gomen (14°19'S., 40°44'E.) and Ponta

Cogune, 7.5 miles N, the coast is covered with a line of trees all

of apparently the same height. Along this area there are several

small headlands with occasional patches of sand and reddish

colored earth. From Ponta Cogune to Ponta Nangata, 2 miles

NW, the coast consists of perpendicular cliffs 25m high; the

cliff tops appear to be level.

3.38 Monte Dedo (14°21'S., 40°33'E.), about 10 miles W, and

Monte Roges (14°14'S., 40°26'E.), about 18 miles WNW, respectively, of Ilha Gomen, are the most distinctive landmarks

in this vicinity. Monte Roges maintains much the same appearance from any direction.

3.38 Baixo do Pinda (14°13'S., 40°47'E.) is a coral reef fronting

the coast between Ilha Gomen and Ponta Nangata; it extends

about 5 miles from shore. Pinda Light is exhibited about 0.5

mile W of Ponta Cogume.

3.38 Baia de Memba is entered between Ponta Nangata (14°11'S.,

40°41'E.) and Ponta Lulo. Porto do Bocage and Porto de Duarte

Pedroso are located in the SW part of the bay. The village of

Memba is located at the head of the bay.

3.38 Anchorage.—Anchorage may be obtained, about 0.6 mile

offshore, E of the village of Memba, in depths of 37 to 55m,

but great caution is necessary in anchoring as the depths increase very rapidly seaward of this position.

3.38 Porto do Bocage is entered between Ponta Opopuro, about

4.5 miles WSW of Ponta Nangata, and Ponta Sahaja, about 1.5

miles W. The shape of both entrance points is conspicuous, as

they resemble the clipper bow of a vessel. 

3.38 Anchorage may be obtained, in about 18m, about 2 miles

within the entrance of Porto do Bocage, between a detached

coral reef and the edge of a rocky bank fringing the W side of

the harbor.

3.38 Caution.—Vessels without local knowledge are advised to

enter Porto do Bocage at low water.

3.39 Porto de Duarte Pedroso (14°13'S., 40°33'E.), at the

SW corner of Baia de Memba, is entered between Ponta Naueia, about 1.2 miles WSW of Ponta Mecontene, and Ponta Oxelo, about 0.7 mile farther WSW.

3.39 Sheltered anchorage may be obtained by small vessels in either inlets, in depths of 7 to 16m, mud, good holding ground.

Vessels are recommended to wait for LW before entering.

Between Ponta Lulo (14°09'S., 40°36'E.) and Ponta Serissathe, the aspect of the land is more striking than on other parts

of the coast, being low near the sea and increasing to mostly

level land about 61m high a short distance within. The Sorisa

Range, several craggy peaks having the appearance of the ruins

of some great city, rise abruptly from the level land to heights

of 610 to 914m, with the peaks assuming every variety of form

of sugarloaf, cone, and round or square-topped pillars, and in

some cases seeming to overhang their bases. Monte Pilar

(13°44'S., 40°19'E.), the highest and most conspicuous of

them, is a cone with a pyramidal point, always appearing the

same from all bearings.

3.39 North of Baia do Lurio, the land is of moderate height and

continues so from Ponta Uifundo to Ponta Maunhane.

3.39 Ponta Mancome (14°07'S., 40°37'E.) is the S entrance point

to Angra do Semedo, whose shores are fronted by drying rocky

banks; Ilheu Tebo, 2.5 miles NNE of Ponta Mancome, is the N

entrance point of the bay. The point just N of Ilheu Tebo is a

steep projection of reddish-colored rock, 33m high; its prominence is enhanced by the trees on its summit.

3.40 Porto Simuco is entered between Ponta Miasi

(14°00'S., 40°37'E.) and Ponta Quissiquitxi, about 1 mile N. Ilheu Quissindja lies in the S part of the harbor, about 1.2 miles

W of Ponta Miasi. 

3.40 Aspect.—Ponta Miasi is known for a military station on rising ground, while Ponta Quissiquitxi is a rock, appearing as a

vessel’s stern, which stands out conspicuously from the low

Pinda Light
50 Sector 3. Mozambique—Baia de Inhambane to Cabo Delgado 

Pub. 171

land.

3.40 Anchorage.—Anchorage, in depths of 10 to 17m, may be obtained in an extensive area in the middle of the harbor.

3.40 Monte Sofia, a hill 43m high, rising close within the coast,

about 6 miles N of Ponta Quissiquitxi, has some red patches on

its N side which make it moderately conspicuous.

Baia Alemeida is entered between Ponta Maria Luiza

(13°43'S., 40°34'E.) and Ponta Serissa. About 2 miles NW of

Ponta Maria Luiza is the mouth of the the Rio Missangage.

South of the river there is a conspicuous bluff; N of it stands

the military station of Chaonde.

3.40 Anchorage.—Anchorage may be obtained in the S part of

Baia Alemeida, in about 14m, sand, about 1 mile offshore, with

Chaonde Light bearing about 206°.

3.40 Anchorage, sheltered at low water from N and NE winds,

may be obtained in the N part of the bay, in 12m, about 1 mile

from the NW shore, but it is exposed to S winds.

3.41 Ponta Metacaua (13°33'S., 40°36'E.) is the N extremity of a low peninsula separating Baia Alemeida from Baia

do Lurio.

3.41 Baia do Lurio is entered between Ponta Metacaua and Ponta

Uifundo, about 10 miles N. During the South Monsoon, sheltered anchorage may be obtained in the S part of the bay, but it

is exposed to N winds. Restinga Mancabale projects about 1.5

miles N from Ponta Metacaua.

3.41 Close within Ponta Metacaua, there is a conspicuous clump

of trees, which, when seen against the higher land in the background, resembles an island. About 5 miles NW of Ponta

Metacaua is the entrance of the Rio Lurio; the discharge at

times discolors the sea for some miles offshore. On slightly rising ground on the N bank of the river are some whitewashed

houses which are conspicuous from seaward.

3.41 Anchorage.—Anchorage may be obtained, in about 12.8m,

SE of the mouth of the Rio Lurio, about 1.3 miles offshore and

about 1 mile from the W edge of the N port of Restinga Mancabale.

3.41 Caution.—Vessels from S should approach Baia do Lurio,

with the military station on the S bank of the Rio Lurio bearing

less than 270°, in order to avoid the N extremity of Restinga

Mancabale.

3.42 Between Ponta Uifundo (13°23'S., 40°36'E.) and

Ponta Maunhane, the coast is fairly high and is fringed with a

sandy beach fronted by a coral reef. North of Ponta Mesaolane,

situated 15 miles N of Ponta Uifundo, the reef dries and extends 1.5 miles offshore in places. It is advisable to keep in

depths greater than 20m along this stretch of coast.

3.42 Ponta Maunhane (12°58'S., 40°35'E.) is a bluff point

marked by a light; a stranded wreck lies E of the light. 

Pema (12°58'S., 40°30'E.)

World Port Index No. 46940

3.43 Pema is located on the NE side of the S part of Baia

de Pema. The bay is entered between Ponta Romero

(12°57'S., 40°30'E.) and Ponta Said-Ali, 1.2 miles NNE. Baia

de Pema forms one of the finest harbors on this coast, with sufficient water in most parts for deep-draft vessels and shelter

from all winds. Vessels entering the harbor should pass to the S

and W of Baixo Indujo; Monte Mutucua bearing more than

256° will clear the S extremity of the reef.

3.43 Winds—Weather.—The land breeze generally blows out of

the bay until 0700 or 0800. The prevailing winds from May

through September are the Southeast Trade Winds. The winds

are strongest during June and July, but never reach gale force.

From January through April (the rainy season), the prevailing

winds are from the NW, and are usually light.

3.43 During the North Monsoon, from the middle of October to

the middle of March, the weather is hot, damp, and somewhat

oppressive, but the temperature is seldom over 36°C, and generally ranges between 28° to 33°C. Rain falls intermittently

throughout the monsoon, the average rainfall on the coast for

the season is about 800mm. In the opposite monsoon, from

April to September, the weather is cool and pleasant and practically no rain falls.

3.43 Tides—Currents.—Because of the depth of water in the entrance of the bay and in the port, the effect of the tides on shipping is negligible

3.43 Depths—Limitations.—Ocean-going vessels can be accommodated at a quay which has an alongside depth (1994) of

6.3m

3.43 Aspect.—When approaching from seaward, Iocola, a conspicuous conical mountain, 694m high, about 30 miles SW of

Ponta Maunhane, in range, with the entrance, bearing 234°,

forms a useful mark. A concrete water tower, standing about 1

mile SW of Ponta Romero, is conspicuous when approaching

from NE, but is not visible S of Ponta Maunhane. A red brick

church with a tower, standing about 1.2 miles SSW of Ponta

Romero, is conspicuous when viewed from W of that point.

3.43 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for all vessels entering

Pema. No pilots are stationed at Pema. Pilots should be ordered

72 hours in advance from Porto de Nacala. Pilots board arriving vessels at Porto de Nacala; southbound depating vessels

disembark the pilot at Porto de Nacala. The pilot remains in

Pema until the vessel departs.

3.43 Vessels from the N should order their pilot from Porto de

Nacala. 

3.43 Anchorage.—Sheltered anchorage may be obtained in the S

part of Pema, in about 26m, about 0.2 mile S of the wharf, but

the approach within 230m of the wharf must be kept clear for

vessels berthing. Anchorage may also be obtained in the N part

of the bay, in 16 to 29m, taking care to avoid Pantaloon Shoal.

Vessels should not approach Baxio Pinguim (Penguin Shoal)

closer than 0.2 mile.

3.43 Caution.—The isolated dangers in the harbor are well-charted and may best be seen on the chart.

The Arquipelago de Quirimba

3.44 The Arquipelago de Quirimba (Arquipelago das

Querimbas), a chain of islands and reefs, fronts the coast for

about 110 miles from Porto da Arimba to about 4 miles S of

Cabo Delgado. The islands are generally low, well-wooded, often undulating, and easily seen from seaward. The coast of the

mainland abreast the islands is generally low, and can rarely be

distinguished when passing outside the outer reefs, and, as the

seaward edges of the latter are steep-to, caution is necessary,

even by day, when navigating in the vicinity.
Sector 3. Mozambique—Baia de Inhambane to Cabo Delgado 51

Pub. 171

3.44 Vessels on passage along this coast will gain nothing by using the passages between the islands N of Cabo Pequene

(11°51'S., 40°31'E.), but should that be necessary, the most favorable time to make the passages is at LW, with the sun astern

of the vessel; constant sounding is necessary.

3.44 Tides—Currents.—Within the outer islands, the tidal currents are weak and are greatly influenced by the winds. The W

tidal current, or that of the rising tide, is usually the stronger,

and enters the archipelago by the various openings between the

reefs. The normal S current will be experienced about 10 miles

outside the outer reefs, until about 20 miles S of Cabo Delgado.

Pema to Porto do Ibo

3.45 Ponta do Diabo (12°45'S., 40°38'E.) is situated 13

miles NNE of Ponta Said-Ali; a light stands on Ponta do Diabo.

3.45 Ilha Quipaco (12°41'S., 40°37'E.) lies on the S end of a reef

about 4 miles NNW of Ponta do Diabo. There are some bare

hills, with sand patches on them, on the island.

3.45 Baia do Quipaco is entered between the S end of Ilha Quipaco and a point 1 mile SSW. It is advisable to enter the bay at

LW, passing close S of the island, and anchoring almost immediately after passing the island.

3.45 Ilha Quisiva (12°36'S., 40°37'E.) is a low island situated 5

miles N of Ilha Quipaco; the ruins of a settlement are located

on its W side.

3.45 Porto da Arimba is entered between Ponta Nangamba

(12°38'S., 40°36'E.) and Ilha Quisiva, about 1.7 miles N,

through a narrow channel, with depths of 3.7m. There is a narrow channel between Ilha Quisiva and Ilha Mefunvo, about 2

miles NNW, with a depth of 5.5m in it. Small vessels may obtain anchorage, in 5m, in a narrow area between the W edge of

the reef surrounding Ilha Quisiva and Ilha Mefunvo and the E

edge of the bank which fringes the W shore. Vessels are advised to enter Porto da Arimba at LW.

3.45 Ilha Mefunvo (12°33'S., 40°36'E.), the highest of all the islands in the vicinity, is covered with thick green scrub. It lies at

the extremity of a drying bank which forms the N side of Porto

da Arimba.

3.45 Massundji-Macula (12°27'S., 40°39'E.) is a group of

above-water rocks

3.45 Ilha Quilaluia lies about 2 miles N of Ilha Mefunvo. Temporary anchorage may be obtained, in 24m, coral, about 1 mile

SE of the S extremity of Ilha Quilaluia, and about 0.3 mile

from the edge of a reef.

Porto do Ibo (12°20'S., 40°37'E.)

World Port Index No. 46950

3.46 Porto do Ibo is located between Ilha do Ibo and Ilha

Matemo on the E and the mainland on the W. The port consists

of a town and a very small natural harbor.

3.46 Wind—Weather.—The unhealthy season is from the middle

of January to the middle of March; during this period there is a

considerable rainfall accompanied by thunder and lightning.

3.46 Tides—Currents.—The tidal currents run strong in Canal

do Sul. In the channel, the incoming tidal current sets toward

Baxio de Sao Goncalo and the outgoing tidal current sets toward Mujaca Shoal.

3.46 Aspect.—Ilha do Ibo is low and flat, but the lighthouse on Ilha Mujaca shows up well against the dark green vegetation.

The coconut palms in the town of Ibo, about 2 miles W of Ilha

Mujaca, are conspicuous, as is the white Forte de Sao Joao at

the NW end of the town, which presents a long front when seen

from NE. Porto do Ibo Light is shown on the W end of Ilha do

Ibo, about 0.5 mile S of Forte de Sao Joao. 

3.46 The land within the coast between Ponta Quissanga and Ponta Quirimisi is moderately high and backed by a range of hills

which are visible at a distance of 20 miles. The S end of the

range terminates in a bluff, with a conical hill close S of it.

3.46 Pilotage.—There are no pilots available. Local knowledge is

recommended. Vessels without local knowledge should enter

during daylight only.

3.46 Signals.—Ibo Light is exhibited on Ilha Mujaca. There is a

signal station at the ligh, which is connected by telephone to

the town of Ibo.

3.46 Anchorage.—Fair anchorage, although exposed to E winds,

may be obtained, in 11 to 24m, about 5 miles WNW of Ilha

Mujaca. Anchorage may be obtained off the NW side of Ilha

Matemo, in depths of 9 to 11m, about 0.5 mile SW of Ponta

Ucaia (12°12'S., 40°34'E.).

3.46 Directions.—No difficulty should be experienced in entering Porto do Ibo if the buoys are in position, but if not, vessels

are advised to enter the harbor at or near LW.

3.46 Caution.—Baixo de Sao Goncalo, when covered, is marked

by breakers or by discolored water.

Porto do Ibo to Cabo Delgado

3.47 Ilha das Rolas (12°09'S., 40°34'E.) affords sheltered

anchorage, in depths of 8 to 13m, at a distance of between 1

mile and 2 miles SSW of the SW extremity of Ilha das Rolas.

3.47 Caution.—Vessels can approach the anchorage with the S

extremity of Ilha das Rolas bearing W and then alter to 240° on

a distant peak to pass between that island and Ilha Matemo.

Caution is required, however, to avoid the detached shoals off

the reef bordering the N side of the latter island.

3.47 Between Ponta Quirimisi (12°12'S., 40°31'E.) and Ponta

Pangane, the coast is higher than that between Ponta Quirimisi

and Ponta Quissanga. The coast between Ponta Pangane and

Cabo Delgado is seldom seen outside the islands.

3.47 Saint-Lazarus Bank (12°08'S., 41°22'E.) has is a least

depth of 6.4m at its N end.

3.47 Baixo Zala (12°06'S., 40°35'E.), a reef which dries, lies 3

miles NNE of Ilha das Rolas, at the SW end of a rocky bank

which is in a depths of 5.5m or less. 

3.47 Ilha Macaloe (11°59'S., 40°35'E.) is surrounded by an extensive drying reef.

3.47 Baia de Medjumbe is entered between Ilha Dejumbe and

Baixo Vadiaz, 5 miles N.

3.47 Passagem de Medjumbe, which leads between the reefs extending N from Ilha Dejumbe (11°47'S., 40°38'E.) and S from

Baixo Vadiaz into Baia de Medjumbe, is clear of dangers over

a width of 4 miles. 

3.47 When approaching from seaward, the mainland is in distinct

but the high trees on Ilha Dejumbe may be clearly seen; the

sides of the pass are marked by heavy surf on the edges of the
52 Sector 3. Mozambique—Baia de Inhambane to Cabo Delgado 

Pub. 171

reefs.

3.48 Ilha Quissanga (11°49'S., 40°34'E.) lies about 2

miles W of Ilha Dejumbe. Good anchorage may be taken at

least 0.5 mile W of Ilha Quissanga, in 14.6m, sand and shells,

with the islet and the tall trees on Ilha Dejumbe in line bearing

079°. This anchorage may be safely approached either by the

channel between Cabo Pequene and Ilha Quissanga, or by Passagem de Medjumbe, but in the latter case, care must be taken

to avoid Rocha Gray, about 2.5 miles NNW of Ilha Dejumbe

Light.

3.48 Anchorage may also be obtained, in depths of 9 to 27m, sand

and coral, anywhere in the area within Passagem de Medjumbe.

3.48 Passagem de Nameguo (11°33'S., 40°37'E.) lies between

Baixo Varuni and Baixo Nameguo. Good anchorage, in depths

of 9 to 22m, sand and coral, may be obtained within Passagem

de Nameguo; the best berths depend on the monsoon, due to

the prevailing strong winds being NE and SE. A good berth, in

depths of 12 to 16m, is off the W side of Baixo Nameguo; anchorage in similar depths may also be obtained E of the SE extremity of Baixo Magive Cobua.

3.48 Passagem de Tambuzi (11°26'S., 40°39'E.) is divided into

two parts by Baixo Bower, which may be avoided by not bringing the S extremity of Ilha Mionge (11°25'S., 40°31'E.) between the bearings of 261° and 275°. There is good anchorage

about 1.5 miles W of Ilha Tambuzi, in 16m, sand and coral,

with the summit of Ilha Mionge bearing 234°.

3.48 Pedra Messassari is a very dark and almost square rock,

about 0.9m high and conspicuous, which lies about 3 miles NE

of Ilha Mionge.

3.49 Baia de Mocimboa da Praia is entered through Passagem de Mionge (11°23'S., 40°31'E.), which leads between the

reefs extending N from Ilha Mionge and those extending S

from Ilha Mechanga, 1 mile N.

3.49 The outer approaches to Baia de Mocimboa da Praia are

formed between Cabo Ulu (11°24'S., 40°28'E.) and Cabo Mesangi. Passagem de Tambuzi is the principal approach, but Passagem de Nameguo is also available for vessels from S. 

3.49 Passagem de Suna and Passagem de Niuni are available to

vessels coming from N. Vessels navigating Passagem de Suna

should enter on a mid-channel course. Sand Cay and Ilha

Makunga lie on the NE edge of a reef close off the E side of Ilha Metundo (11°10'S., 40°41'E.); a rock on the reef between

them is 7m high and very conspicuous.

3.50 Porto de Mocimboa da Praia (11°20'S., 40°20'E.) is

located at the mouth of the Rio Muzama at the head of Baia de

Mocimboa da Praia. The port consists of a town and a capacious and sheltered harbor.

3.50 The best approach for vessels when entering the harbor is

through Passagen de Tambuzi. 

3.50 Approaches can be made through Passagem de Suna and Passagem de Niumi, but it is not advised without local knowledge

due to numerous shallow patches.

3.50 Tides—Currents.—Within the harbor, the W tidal current

on the rising tide is scarcely appreciable, but the E tidal current

on the falling tide attains a velocity of from 2 to 3 knots.

3.50 Anchorage.—Anchorage may be taken either before entering Passagem de Mionge or inside the passage, in depths of 18

to 22m, mud.

3.50 Deep draft vessels should anchor about 3 miles E of Ponta

Vermelha, the N entrance point of Mto Mocimboa, a creek at

the head of the harbor.

3.50 In Baia de Mocimboa da Praia, there is an anchorage area in

which there is a least depth of 7.3m.

3.50 A 1.5m shoal lies in the anchorage, about 5.5 miles NW of a

beacon that marks a rock off the W side of Ilha Mechanga; a

5.5m patch has been reported to lie close to it.

3.50 Caution.—Navigational aids are reported (1995) to be unreliable; they may be missing, unlit, or out of position.

3.51 Cabo Messangi (11°12'S., 40°31'E.), the N entrance

point of Baia de Mocimboa da Praia, is a well-marked point,

14.3m high. It may be recognized by a clump of casuarina

trees, 29m high, the most conspicuous object on this part of the

coast. Anchorage can be taken, in 14m, about 4 miles E of Cabo Messangi.

3.51 Between Cabo Messangi and Cabo Nondo, 10.5 miles NNE,

the coast is low and wooded, with an occasional small village

surrounded by coconut palms. A sand bank fronts the coast and

landing is impracticable except at HW.

3.51 Cabo Nondo (11°02'S., 40°34'E.) may be easily recognized

from the S by a group of casuarina trees, about 24m high.

3.51 Passagem de Metundo is entered between Ilha Metundo and

Ilha Vamizi. A light is shown from a conspicuous white circular tower on the E end of Ilha Vamizi.

3.51 Ilha Vamizi, about 7 miles long in an E-W direction, is 28m

high at its E end, wooded, and slightly lower at its W end,

which lies 2 miles E of Cabo Nondo. Ilha Vamizi is surrounded

by a reef, which extends for about 1 mile from its S side.

3.51 The outer part of Passagem de Metundo has depths over

183m, but the depths decrease very rapidly, and there are numerous reefs and shoals on the S side of the entrance and a

short distance within the entrance.

3.51 Baixo Pinguim (11°05'S., 40°39'E.) lies 6.2 miles SE of Cabo Nondo. The channel between Baixo Pinguim and Ilha Vamizi has depths from 10 to 23m; it may be used by larger vessels

seeking anchorage in Passagem de Metundo. Other channels

may be used by small craft with local knowledge.

3.52 Baia de Maiapa (10°57'S., 40°34'E.) is entered between Cabo Nondo and Cabo Afungi. The shores of the bay are

bordered by extensive sand flats, which with Baixo MepangaPanga (10°59'S., 40°37'E.), Ilha Queramimbi, and its surrounding reef, together with numerous deep holes of 37m to 55m, limit the anchorage to a comparatively small area, suitable for small

vessels with local knowledge.

3.52 Baia de Maiapa is approached through Passagem de Vamizi

between Ilha Vamizi and Ilha Rongui. Within the bay, tidal currents set SW on the rising tide and NE on the falling tide at

rates of 1 to 2 knots at springs.

3.52 Anchorage.—Anchorage, in a depth of 16.5m, sand and coral, may be obtained about 1 mile N of Baixo Mepanga-Panga;

the SW side of the bank is marked by a beacon.

3.52 Ilha Rongui (10°52'S., 40°40'E.) and Ilha Tekomadji lie, respectively, 2.2 miles ESE and 2.7 miles NE of Cabo Afungi.

When approaching these islands from seaward, the only distinguishing features are clumps of trees, 29m high, on the NE part
Sector 3. Mozambique—Baia de Inhambane to Cabo Delgado 53

Pub. 171

of Ilha Rongui; when within 6 miles, trees may be seen on the

E shore of Ilha Tekomadji.

3.53 Baia de Tungue is entered between Cabo Afungi

(10°49'S., 40°37'E.) and Cabo Delgado.

3.53 Winds—Weather.—Northeast winds from December to

March became lighter as the season progressed and were varied, occasionally, by heavy squalls of wind and rain from NW,

accompanied by vivid lightning and heavy thunder.

3.53 The change of monsoon takes place in April; heavy squalls

then frequently occur from S and SW, but by the beginning of

May, the steady South Monsoon has set in, the wind generally

freshening in the afternoon to a strong breeze, and from this

month the force gradually lessens and the wind veers to the E.

3.53 By October, very light E winds prevail, with the change to

the Northeast Monsoon taking place gradually in the early part

of November and accompanied by a few light showers.

3.53 Between the islands and the mainland, sea and land breezes

prevail; the former, which occur during May and June, blow

very fresh.

3.53 Tides—Currents.—In Baia de Tungue, the tidal current of

the rising tide sets SSW, and that of the falling tide sets N by E,

at velocities of from 1 to 2 knots.

3.53 Aspect.—The head of the bay is backed by a wooded ridge,

which forms the highest ground in the vicinity. The land within

the S shore of the bay is low and flat, but adjoining the N shore

it rises to elevations of between 24 and 61m.

3.53 Anchorage.—Good anchorage can be found, in about 18m,

with an even bottom, with the flagstaff at Palma bearing 260°,

distant 3.5 miles. Small vessels can anchor, in 7m, about 1.2

miles W of the westernmost point of Ilha Tekomadji.

3.54 Cabo Delgado (10°41'S., 40°38'E.) is described in

paragraph 4.2.
55

Pub. 171

4. 

Tanzania—Cabo Delgado to Ras Kanzi

4.0Additional chart coverage may be found in NGA/DLIS Catalog of Maps, Charts, and Related Products (Unlimited Distribution).

SECTOR 4 — CHART INFORMATION
57

Pub. 171

SECTOR 4 

TANZANIA—CABO DELGADO TO RAS KANZI

4.0 Plan.—This sector describes the SE coast of Africa from

Cabo Delgado N to Ras Kanzi (7°01'S., 39°33'E.), a distance of

about 230 miles.

General Remarks 

4.1 From Cabo Delgado, the coast trends in a general

NNW direction to Ras Kanzi. The coast is low without any outstanding landmarks or points of significance. Many rivers flow

into the sea along this coast and it is indented by numerous

coves and bays. Mafia Island lies about 10 miles offshore,

about 40 miles SSE of Ras Kanzi.

4.1 The coasts of the island are generally low and devoid of conspicuous features; however, the E coast is cliffy. 

Cabo Delgado to Mtwara

4.2 Cabo Delgado (10°41'S., 40°38'E.) is marked by a

light that consists of a white hexagonal concrete tower and

dwelling, 36m high. The peninsula is low, but close N of the

cape there is a hill with an elevation of 26m. A drying reef

fringes the cape, extending over 1 mile SE; it is steep-to and is

usually marked by surf. About 2 miles S of Cabo Delgado lies

an isolated rock, 0.9m high. 

4.2 Between Cabo Delgado and Cabo Suafo, the coast is low,

thickly wooded, and fronted by reefs. The sea generally breaks

heavily on these reefs, rendering them visible from some distance seaward.

4.2 Cabo Massungo (10°36'S., 40°36'E.) is low but it may be

recognized by the number of detached rocks off it.

4.2 Baia de Quionga is entered between Cabo Massungo and Cabo Samadudo. The HW interval at full and change in Baia de

Quionga is 4 hours 10 minutes; spring tides rise 3.6m. The S

shore of the bay is fringed with a coastal bank extending nearly

0.8 mile offshore. Outside this bank, the depths are irregular

and increase rapidly in places, leaving little room for anchorage.

4.2 Cabo Suafo (10°29'S., 40°32'E.) is low and thickly wooded,

with a small conical hillock, 24m high, 0.3 mile inland. This

hillock is conspicuous when near the land.

4.2 Between Baia de Quionga and Cabo Suafo, the tidal currents

run strongly along the edge of the steep-to coastal bank, making a wide berth necessary.

4.3 Ruvuma Bay (10°25'S., 40°27'E.) is entered between

Cabo Suafo and Ras Matunda (10°21'S., 40°27'E.). The bay is

open to the ocean swell and heavy breaking rollers at all times.

4.3 Tides—Currents.—The HW interval at full and change in

Ruvuma Bay is 4 hours 10 minutes; spring tides rise 3.6m.

4.3 Aspect.—About 2 miles N of the entrance of the Rio Ruvuma, close to the shore, there is a conspicuous square clump of

trees, and 1.3 miles farther N is a group of three tall trees,

which from seaward form one of the most conspicuous features

in Ruvuma Bay.

4.3 Anchorage.—There is good anchorage in the S part of Ruvuma Bay, in 18m, mud. Less swell is experienced here than in

other parts of the bay. Good anchorage may also be obtained

on the N side of the bay, in 18m, mud. 

4.4 Between Ras Matunda and Ras Masamgamku, the

coast is fronted by a reef which extends 5 miles offshore in

places. The reef is broken at the entrance to Mnazi Bay. The

reef is steep-to; the 200m curve lies 0.3 mile off in places.

4.4 Mana Hawanja Island (10°17'S., 40°22'E.), 25m high, lies

on the coral reef 5.3 miles NW of Ras Matunda. Mongo Island,

24m high, lies on the reef 1.3 miles farther NW.

4.4 Mnazi Bay (10°20'S., 40°21'E.) is entered between Ras Ruvura (10°18'S., 40°24'E.) and Ras Masangamkuu.

4.4 Tides—Currents.—The HW interval at full and change in

Mnazi Bay is 4 hours; spring tides rise 3.3m.

4.4 The tidal current in Msimbati Channel runs at velocities of

from 4 to 5 knots at springs, with heavy overfalls off the point

of reef extending SE from Mana Hawanja Island. There is very

little tidal current within the bay. Outside, the current following

the direction of the coast, running NW and SE and attaining

velocities of from 2 to 3 knots at springs, are strongest near the

reefs, the SE current being that of the rising tide.

4.4 Aspect.—Mongo Island is thickly wooded and has a number

of tall trees near its NW end which show up well from the N.

4.4 Mariners are advised to be on constant alert for shoal areas,

and to obtain local knowledge. Because of the imperfect nature

of the survey, great care must be exercised when in this vicinity. The channel is marked by buoys.

4.5 Mikindani Bay (10°13'S., 40°09'E.) is entered between Ras Masangamkuu (10°12'S., 40°14'E.) and Cape Paman. The bay forms the approach to Mtwara Bay, Misete

Creek, and Mikindani Harbor.

4.5 Cape Paman (10°11'S., 40°08'E.), the W entrance point of

the bay, is fringed by Hull Rocks, a dense cluster covered with

brushwood, which are easily identified.

4.5 The shores of the bay are fringed with drying coral reefs, extending as much as 1.3 miles offshore in places and broken

only by the channels leading into the various harbors.

4.5 Pilotage is compulsory S of a line drawn in a 270° direction

from Ras Masangamkuu to the W shore of Mikindani Bay. The

pilot embarks about 1 mile NNW of Mwamba Shangani and is

available from 0600 to 1800.

4.5 The pilot is based at Dar es Salaam; requests should be made

to the Harbormaster at Dar es Salaam stating the vessel’s ETA,

giving as much time as possible. Vessels from N may be requested to embark a pilot at Dar es Salaam.

4.5 There is no safe anchorage in Mikindani Bay.

4.5 Vessels arriving off Mikindani Bay during darkness and

waiting to enter are advised to keep a good offing as the currents are strong and set onshore.

4.5 Mwamba Shangani (10°13'S., 40°12'E.), with a least charted depth of 4m, lies 1.3 miles offshore in a position 3 miles
58 Sector 4. Tanzania—Cabo Delgado to Ras Kanzi 

Pub. 171

WSW from the light on Ras Mangamkuu. This shoal lies on

the approach range to Mtwara Bay. Lulu Shal lies close E of

the approach range 0.3 mile SE of Mwamba Shangani.

4.5 Misete Creek (10°16'S., 40°09'E.) is approached between

Mwamba Shangani and Mwamba Dadi, two coral reefs which

dry in places. The creek affords shelter to small craft in depths

from 3.7 to 5.5m, sand and pebbles, in a basin at its head.

Mtwara (10°16'S., 40°12'E.)

World Port Index No. 46975

4.6 Mtwara is located on the W shore of Mtwara Bay on

the SE side of Mikindani Bay. The port consists of a town and a

natural, spacious, well sheltered harbor.

4.6 Mtwara Bay is entered between Ras Lichamelelo and

Msemo Spit, a low sandspit 0.4 mile SSE; a beacon stands on

the SW extremity of the spit.

4.6 Tides—Currents.—The tidal currents in the entrance channel E of Ras Lichamelelo follow the channel, attaining a velocity of 1.25 knots at springs.

4.6 The tidal currents run sharply round Msemo Spit and allowance should be made when rounding the spit. If entering with

the flood current, keep to the E side of the channel and round

the spit close to; if the ebb current is running, keep close to the

town of Mtwara to allow for turning into the harbor.

4.6 Depths—Limitations.—There is a least depth of 20m charted in the entrance channel; there is a least width of 160m W of

Msemo Spit. Vessels up to 175m long and with a draft of 9.7m

may moor alongside the deep water quay. It has been reported

a narrow channel dredged to 8.5m leads to the NW end of the

deep water quay.

4.6 Aspect.—Both sides of Mikindani Bay are low and thickly

wooded, while at the head, over Mikindani Harbor, the hills

rise from 91 to 188m above the sea level; about 2 miles SW of

Ras Msangamkuu is a conspicuous high tree.

4.6 Mikindani Bay may be readily identified from seaward by

Milima Mjoho, a conspicuous conical hill, 188m high, and

wooded, about 10 miles SW of the middle of the entrance. Also, if within 7 miles of the entrance, by Hull Rocks, 16.4m and

18.9m high, close E of Cape Paman, which forms a mass of

conglomerate coral covered with brushwood.

4.6 A large church is located about 0.6 mile S of the signal station on Ras Lichamelelo. It has a conspicuous white cross,

which is sometimes illuminated at night.

4.6 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory.

4.6 Signals.—There is a signal station situated on Ras Lichamelelo; it may be contacted on VHF channels 12 and 16.

4.6 Anchorage.—The harbor provides good anchorage, in 12 to

33m, with a general holding ground of mud. Swinging space is

considerably restricted by shoals. Good shelter is afforded

from all winds and tidal currents except near Msemo Spit,

about 0.4 mile S of Ras Lichamelelo.

4.6 Directions.—Vessels entering Mtwara Harbor should pass

SW of Mwamba Shangani, which is marked NW by a red and

white checkered buoy. Approach with the lights in range 154°

and 189°, respectively. When nearly abeam of Ras Lichamelelo course should be altered as necessary for rounding Msemo

Spit, a low sand spit about 0.8 mile SE of Ras Lichamelelo.

The harbor is clearly defined by the color of the water.

4.7 Mikindani (10°16'S., 40°08'E.) (World Port Index

No. 46970) is located at the SW corner of Mikindani Bay and

is entered between Mwamba Dadi and the edge of the reef

fringing the W shore of Mikindani Bay. The port consists of

the village and a small natural harbor. There is a least charted

depth of 9.1m in the entrance channel, which is about 90m

wide in places. The tidal currents in the harbor are hardly perceptible. At the head of the harbor is Bismarck Hill, 106m

high; about halfway up the hill there is a white house with a

tower visible from a considerable distance seaward. The low

white customs house, flanked by two small towers, stands at

the SW corner of the harbor.

4.7 Pilotage is compulsory. The harbor affords sheltered anchorage, in 12m, mud, but as a port, Mikindani has been abandoned

in favor of Mtwara.

4.7 Caution.—Vessels should approach the entrance of Mikindani Harbor from a position about 1 mile E of Ras Managumba, nearly 1.3 miles N of Pemba Point (10°15'S., 40°08'E.). No

exact marks for passing between the reefs can be given, but

care is necessary because of the heavy swell which sets into the

channel.

Mtwara to Ras Shuka

4.8 From Cape Paman (10°11'S., 40°08'E.) to Ras Mkya,

the coast is low and fringed by a reef extending 1.3 miles offshore in places. From Ras Myka to Ras Shuka, the low coast

continues to be fringed by a reef; there is an opening in the reef

NW of Ras Mkya. About 4.3 miles NW of Ras Myka, an islet

covered with dark trees lies close to the coast; it is conspicuous.

4.8 Mto Sudi is a narrow creek entered between Ras Mkya

(10°07'S., 39°59'E.) and Ras Wambi. Both entrance points are

fringed with reefs which contract the width of the channel to

less than 0.2 mile in places.

4.8 Tides—Currents.—Outside the entrance of Mto Sudi, the

incoming tidal current or that of the rising tide, sets N, and the

outgoing tidal current, or that of the falling tide, sets SE. During the South Monsoon, the N tidal current is the stronger.

4.8 Depths—Limitations.—There are depths of from 9.1 to

27m for about 3 miles within the entrance.

4.8 Nymphe Shoal, with a least depth of 4.5m, lies in the fairway

of the approach to the entrance channel, about 1.3 miles NE of

Madjovi Rocks; the latter lies about 0.4 mile ENE of Ras

Wambi.

4.8 Fungu Chosan and Fungu Gomani, the coral reefs fringing

Ras Mkya and Ras Wambi, respectively, extend over 1 mile

seaward of the entrance; a bank, on which the depths are less

than 5.5m and on which there are several drying coral patches,

extends as much as 0.3 mile seaward of the edges of these

reefs.

4.8 A sand spit, the inner part of which dries, extends about 0.3

mile W of Ras Swa-swa, a projection on the E shore about 1.8

miles SW of Ras Mkya.

4.8 A bank, on which there are detached drying patches from 0.2

to 0.3 mile offshore, fringes the W shore S of Ras Swa-swa.

4.8 Aspect.—From NE, the entrance may be readily identified

by a gap in the hills, and also by Madjovi Rocks, the highest of

which is 4.6m high. A conspicuous tomb stands at the SW end

of Mkya Village, nearly 0.8 mile W of Ras Mkya. The larger
Sector 4. Tanzania—Cabo Delgado to Ras Kanzi 59

Pub. 171

village of Mwania is located about 0.2 mile SW of Mkya Village. A beacon stands on the W shore at Dodongi Village,

about 0.3 mile SSW of Ras Wambi.

4.8 A small buoy, surmounted by a flag, is moored off the N

edge of the bank extending W from Ras Swa-swa.

4.8 Anchorage.—Temporary anchorage may be obtained SW of

Nymphe Shoal, in 16.5m, sand and coral, with the highest

Madjovi Rock bearing 215°, distant about 1 mile.

4.8 A convenient anchorage is in mid-channel, in 16.5m, abreast

Mwania Village, with the beacon at Dodongi Village bearing

332°, distant 2.5 miles. There is also anchorage between Ras

Swa-swa and Sudi Village, in depths of 11 to 14m, mud.

4.8 Directions.—When approaching Mto Sudi, do not close the

coast within 2.5 miles until the white custom house at the W

extremity of the beach at Sudi is well open, and bringing it in

range with a gap in the distant hills, bearing 201°, which leads

W of Nymphe Shoal.

4.8 When Madjovi High Rock bears 224°, edge to the E until the

old Custom House is open about its own width of the sand spit

of Ras Swa-swa, which will lead in mid-channel to the anchorage off Mwania.

4.8 If bound to the anchorage above Ras Swa-swa until nearly

abreast the mouth of Mto Bukaro, about 0.4 mile NW of Ras

Swa-swa, course may gradually be altered S, and then round

the spit extending about 0.3 mile W of Ras Swa-swa. With a

good lookout, the reefs on both sides of the channel can be

made out clearly, and when the sun is behind, a vessel can enter

at slack water.

Ras Shuka to Ras Mbemkuru

4.9 Ras Shuka (9°59'S., 39°49'E.), a low point, is marked

by a light; the coastal reef extends about 0.8 mile NE from the

point and the 180m curve lies 1.3 miles off the shore.

4.9 Lindi Bay is entered between Ras Shuka and Ras Mbanura

(9°55'S., 39°47'E.), a low cliffy point, about 3.8 miles NW. The

Lindi River flows into the SW corner of the bay and the town

of Lindi stands on its W entrance point, about 6 miles SW of

Ras Mbanura. Vessels that can cross the bar may obtain sheltered anchorage in a narrow area in the river abreast the town.

4.10 Lindi (10°00'S., 39°43'E.) (World Port Index No.

46980) is located at the mouth of the Lindi River, which is entered between Ras Rungi and Ras Nando, 1.8 miles SW. The

port consists of a town and a small natural harbor.

4.10 Tides—Currents.—Mean spring tides rise 3m. The currents

at the anchorage during spring tides run at 3.5 knots; at other

times a rate of 2 to 3 knots may be expected. During the rainy

season, the current is strong; a vessel seldom swings to a contrary tide.

4.10 Depths—Limitations.—There is a charted depth of 4.2m on

the outer range line in a position about 0.5 mile W of Ras Rungi. Within the bar there are depths from 12.8 to 18.3m.

4.10 Coasters up to 52m long, with a maximum draft of 3.8m, can

berth at the jetty face at all stages of the tide, but there are no

facilities for ocean-going vessels. 

4.10 Aspect.—The hills over the W shore, rising to a height of

297m, are well-wooded and cultivated in patches.

4.10 Mlima Mdemba is 289m high and about 7 miles W of Ras

Mbanura. Mlima Atu and Mlima Nuni rise 213m and 223m, respectively, about 5 miles SSW of the entrance.

4.10 Anchorage.—Temporary anchorage may be obtained outside the bar, in about 9m, mud, with Ras Rungi bearing about

190°, distant 0.6 mile, but the best anchorage as regards holding ground, shelter and convenience, for vessels of moderate

size, is abreast the town, in about 16m, sand and mud, about

0.5 mile SE of Ras Nando, the W entrance point of the Lindi

River.

4.10 Vessels should use this anchorage with caution, as the

swinging space, although greater than at the anchorage abreast

the town, is restricted and vessels may swing across the river

under the influence of wind and tide. It is reported that working

cargo in the outer anchorage is not recommended, as the prevailing wind sets up a heavy swell.

4.10 Directions.—Vessels with a draft in excess of 5m should not

attempt to cross the bar before taking soundings. To leave the

inner harbor, vessels must stem the tide as there is no room to

turn under power.

4.11 Between Ras Kibungwe (9°52'S., 39°48'E.), a point

15m high located 4 miles NNE of Ras Mbanura, and Ras Mzinga, about 7.5 miles NNW, the only notable feature on the

coast is Ras Kera, a bold point fringed with mangroves. Mto

Mbanga, about 3 miles N of Lindi, flows into the sea from a

large gap in the hills.

4.11 Mchinga Bay (9°43'S., 39°46'E.) is entered between Ras

Mzinga and Ras Rocumbi.

4.11 Aspect.—The bay may be recognized by the gap caused by

Mto Namgaru at its head and by the mangrove islets on the

fringing reefs extending from the entrance points.

4.11 Caution.—Vessels should approach Mchinga Bay with the

entrance to Mto Namgaru bearing between 250° and 260° and

should sound constantly. When the depths suddenly decrease

from about 92m to 18.3m, vessels should anchor as convenient.

4.12 From Ras Rocumbi (9°42'S., 39°45'E.) to Ras

Mawedithe, the coast is fringed with reefs which are steep-to.

There are reef-fringed indentations on this section of the coast

and numerous small islets on the reef fringing the coast.

4.12 The chimney of a sisal factory, which stands 11 miles NNW

of Ras Rocumbi, on the seaward slope of a hill 2 miles inland,

is conspicuous.

4.12 Msungu Bay (9°29'S., 39°40'E.) does not afford much shelter. Fair anchorage may be obtained in the S part of the bay,

with Ras Mbemkuru bearing 331° and the middle of Jiwe la

Mzungu bearing 211°, in a depth of 16m, sand and coral. The

Mbwemburu River discharges into the bay and during the rainy

season the discolored water may be seen 1 mile to seaward.

Ras Mbemkuru to Ras Ngumbe Sukani

4.13 From Ras Mbemkuru (9°27'S., 39°39'E.) to Ras

Ngumbe Sukani, the coast is indented by Kiswere Haven and

Roango Bay. The coast is fringed by a steep-to reef which extends up to 0.2 mile offshore; there are numerous islands on the

reef. The coast is low and backed by low hills, nearly all of an

equal height.

4.13 Kiswere Haven (9°25'S., 39°38'E.) is approached between

Ras Mbemkuru and Ras Fugio, about 4.7 miles N. The harbor

is entered between Ras Bobare, about 3.2 miles NW of Ras
60 Sector 4. Tanzania—Cabo Delgado to Ras Kanzi 

Pub. 171

Mbemkuru, and Ras Berikiti, about 0.7 mile N.

4.13 Aspect.—At a short distance outside the entrance, the hills

backing the harbor appear to be moderately high, with a tableland N, rising from an elevation of 61m to one of 91m, and, on

a closer approach, Pandawi Cliff, a square cliff 21m high, rising W of the entrance at the head of the harbor, is conspicuous.

4.13 The most distinctive features in the approach to Kiswere

Harbor are Mlima Mamba, a conical wooded hill, 128m high,

rising about 1.2 miles within the head of the harbor, and Mlima

Ruhaha, 126m high, about 2 miles N of Mlima Mamba.

4.13 Anchorage.—When Mlima Ruhaha is seen between the entrance points of Mto Nanga, in the NW corner of the harbor, or,

when a conspicuous sand patch on the N shore bears 002°, a

vessel may anchor, in 7m, stiff mud, good holding ground; this

is probably the best anchorage in either monsoon.

4.13 Directions.—When approaching Kiswere Harbor, if toward

LW, the sea will probably be observed breaking on the bank inside and on the coral reef off Ras Berikiti, which, when recognized, may be rounded as close as convenient.

4.13 Coming from the S, steer into the bay, with Pandawi Cliff

bearing 264°, until abreast of Ras Berikiti; alter course to 247°

until Mlima Ruhaha is seen between the entrance points of Mto

Nanga, or, until the remarkable sand patch on the N shore bears

002°, when a vessel may anchor, in 7m, stiff mud, and good

holding ground, this being probably the best anchorage in either monsoon. Deep-draft vessels must anchor farther out, in

about 21m, where they are more exposed.

4.13 Ras Mombi (9°16'S., 39°39'E.) is the S entrance point of

Roango Bay, a wide indentation in the coast which is not distinguishable as a bay from a distance of more than 3 miles; it

affords no anchorage.

4.13 Ras Ngumbe Sukani (9°10'S., 39°38'E.) is the highest point

in the vicinity. Two islets, each 6.1m high, are situated on the

coastal reef about 0.2 mile N of the point; they help identify it.

When approached during the morning, a white patch will be

seen on the upper part of the point.

Ras Ngumbe Sukani to Kilwa Kivinje

4.14 Between Ras Ngumbe Sukani and Ras Matuso

(8°55'S., 39°33'E.), the coast is fronted by Songa Mnara Island

and Kilwa Kisiwani Island. Sangarungu Haven and Kilwa Kisiwani Harbor lie between these islands and the mainland.

4.14 The current off this part of the coast is continuously N, frequently setting toward the coast. It is strongest and most regular during the South Monsoon, when at times it attains a rate of

4 knots.

4.14 Songa Mnara Island (9°04'S., 39°35'E.) may be known by a

conspicuous break in one of the projecting cliffs at its S end,

which, when seen from the S, appears like an island. The sea,

when there is much swell, breaks through this cleft with great

violence, throwing the spray to a considerable height and giving the appearance of white smoke rising from the land.

4.14 Sangarungu Haven (9°01'S., 39°34'E.) is entered between

Ras Sangarungu and Ras Mchangamra; the S part is named

Port Nisus and the N part is named Port Pactolus. The harbor

has strong tidal currents, and the swell reaches far in, so that a

vessel would have to go some distance in for a secure berth.

The water in Sangarungu Haven is very thick and muddy; consequently, dangers cannot be seen. 

4.15 Kilwa Kisiwani Harbor is entered between Ras Kipanoki (8°57'S., 39°32'E.), the NE extremity of Kilwa Kisiwani Island, and Ras Matuso about 2 miles NE.

4.15 Tides—Currents.—Currents are strong and at the inner anchorage there is often an eddy, but as the bottom is tenacious

mud a vessel can lie with a short scope of chain and the anchor

will be kept clear.

4.15 Directions.—At LW no other guide but the eye is necessary

for entering the harbor, but at HW only the outer parts break,

and Balozi Spit does not show even by a ripple, but the beacon

on its N extremity marks its position. Avoid entering with the

strength of the incoming tidal current and with the sun ahead,

and with the outgoing tidal current running, the rush of water

sometimes raises a sea between the outer points of the reefs,

which at springs, is dangerous for boats, and makes it difficult

to realize that there are over 55m of water, where the overfalls

take place. 

4.15 To enter from N, run along about 0.5 mile distant from the

SE edge of Mwamba Rukyira, using the trees on Balozi Spit

Beacon, and the Arab Castle for bearings until on the range

bearing 285°, which will lead in the middle of the fairway between the reefs and N of Balozi Spit Beacon.

4.15 When Balozi Split Beacon is passed, steer SW, using the Arab Castle, either beacon of the range, and Balozi Spit Beacon

as bearings until clear of Ras Rongozi, when the course for the

anchorage can be set. While steering the above courses, the set

of the tidal current should be watched.

4.15 From the S, Ras Matuso should be approached bearing about

296° and the above directions followed. No reliance should be

placed on positions obtained by bearings of points, formed by

mangrove bushes, as the growth of these may have considerable altered the points

4.15 Aspect.—Mpara Hill (8°51'S., 39°26'E.), 140m high, rises

8.2 miles NW of Ras Matuso and should be seen from 20 miles

N or S in clear weather; it is the only hill in the immediate area

but it has been reported that it could not be identified.

4.15 The two islets with trees situated on the E side of Mwamba

Rukyira make a useful mark in the approach. Ras Matuso is

fairly conspicuous, either from N or S, and the reef off it will

be seen for 3 miles either dry or breaking.

4.15 Mso Bay, about 2 miles W of Ras Matuso, has a sandy shore

terminating abruptly S in low rocky cliffs, showing in one part

a yellow face.

4.15 The ancient Arab Castle, standing among the ruins at the

NW part of Kilwa Kisiwani Island, is a tall conspicuous fortress and may be seen from seaward in the morning sun.

4.15 A square water tower, painted white, is located close N of the

rear range beacon on Ras Rongozi.

4.15 Pilotage.—Pilotage is available but not compulsory.

4.15 Anchorage.—There is temporary outer anchorage during

the Northeast Monsoon, about 0.6 mile S of Ras Matuso and

about 0.2 mile from the S edge of Mwamba Rukyira, in about

18.3m, sand, abreast of the large mangrove bush on that reef;

the farther E the better, to be out of the rush of the tidal currents.

4.15 The anchorage N of Kilwa Kisiwani Village, in depths of 16

to 28m, is open to the sea breeze, but completely protected by

the projecting points of reef from the heavy swell that almost

invariably beats on the outer shore. A good berth, in 22m, is

with Castle Islet, about 0.2 mile N of Arab Castle, bearing
Sector 4. Tanzania—Cabo Delgado to Ras Kanzi 61

Pub. 171

241°; the castle bearing 202°; and Ras Kipakoni bearing 090°.

4.15 Good anchorage, in depths of 28 to 37m, mud, can be found

off the pier near Kilwa Masoko, which is located on the N side

of the estuary opposite Kilwa Kisiwani Village. A four to one

scope of chain is recommended as ample, as the current does

not run strongly in this deepwater reach of the estuary.

4.15 Port Beaver has ample width and for a distance of 5 or 6

miles affords sheltered anchorage for vessels of deep draft.

4.16 Between Ras Matuso and Ras Tikwiri (8°49'S.,

39°29'E.) the coast is flat and the land is covered with dense

jungle.

4.16 Between Ras Tikwiri and Ras Miramba, a low mangrove

covered point, the coast is bordered by a thin belt of mangroves

and is fronted by a drying bank of sand and mud.

4.16 Singino Hill (8°48'S., 39°23'E.), 142m high, rises 4.7 miles

SW of Ras Miramba. Nunguruku, 146m high, is situated 2.2

miles NW of Singino Hill. Farther W, the country is generally

flat without any distinctive features.

4.16 Mwanankaya (8°43'S., 39°31'E.), a reef which forms the S

entrance to Kilwa Main Pass, lies with its S end 5 miles ENE of

Ras Miramba. The main part of the reef dries about 1m and on

its SW part there is a sandbank which dries 4m. Amana, a reef

marked by a beacon, is situated 1.7 miles W of Mwanankaya;

its W end dries about 2m.

4.16 Luala Reef (8°37'S., 39°31'E.) is situated on the N side of

Kilwa Main Pass. A sandbank on the NW side of the reef dries

2m; the reef is marked on its SW side by a beacon.

4.16 Jewe is a reef situated 2 miles W of Luala Reef. A long narrow strip of sand, marked on its W end by a beacon, is situated

on the reef; the sand strip dries 3m.

4.16 Kilwa Main Pass (8°40'S., 39°32'E.) is a deep channel

through a break in the reefs which leads to the anchorage off

Kilwa Kivinje. When approaching the pass Mpara Hill and

Singino Hill should be seen from some distance, but no land

will be seen S of Mpara Hill except in clear weather when the

hills of Mchinga range may be seen. To the N of the pass, Fanjove Island and Songo Songo Island should be seen at a considerable distance.

4.16 Directions.—Steer to pass 5 miles S of Fanjove Island

(8°34'S., 39°34'E.), and when the breakers on the reef extending S of that island come into view the eye will be the best

guide, but the bank extending WSW of the S extremity of the

reef should be given a berth of at least 0.2 mile.

4.17 Kilwa Kivinje (8°44'S., 39°23'E.) (World Port Index

No. 47000), consisting of a town surrounded by coconut palms,

is situated on the shores of a small bay 1 mile W of Ras

Miramba. The station house, a white stone building with a high

red roof resembling a tower, and a large white house on the

beach in front of the town are prominent.

4.17 When approaching the anchorage off Kilwa Kivinje keep in

depths of 9m or more. A good berth, in 8m, may be obtained

by steering for the station house on a bearing of 198° until

Nunguruku bears about 224°. The tidal currents at the anchorage are negligible.

Kilwa Kivinje to Mafia Island

4.18 Between Ras Miramba and Ras Pombwe (8°17'S.,

39°19'E.) the coast is fronted by a mass of islands and reefs

which extend as much as 18 miles offshore in places. The outer

islands and reefs are more or less continuous between Kilwa

Main Pass and South Mafia Channel, but within the outer reefs

there is an inner channel.

4.18 Northbound vessels will gain nothing by using this inner

channel, as the current outside the outer reefs is favorable to

them. For southbound vessels of moderate draft and low power,

the inner channel may be of considerable advantage hence the

description of the islands and dangers will be described contrary to the rest of the publication.

4.18 The coast of the delta is low, and of uniform outline when

seen from seaward. Within the swampy mangrove belt there is

a broad flat plain covered with long grass and a few trees. The

coast of the delta is broken by several large river mouths.

4.18 Ras Samanga Fungu (8°25'S., 39°19'E.) is a point of high

mangroves conspicuous when seen from the N and when near

the coast.

4.18 Simaya Island (8°18'S., 39°26'E.), 6.7 miles ESE of Ras

Pombwe, lies on a drying reef on the W side of the inner channel at its N end. The island is sandy and covered with high

trees, which are visible at a considerable distance.

4.18 Membeuso, a reef with a sand bank which uncovers 2.4m, is

situated on the W side of the channel 4 miles SSW of Simaya

Island, it is marked on its SE side by a beacon. Banda, a reef

which dries 2.4m, lies on the E side of the channel 2.2 miles SE

of Membeuso.

4.19 Chocha (8°24'S., 39°23'E.), a reef on the W side of

the channel 2.7 miles SSW of Membeuso, is marked on its E

side with a beacon. A shoal spit generally indicated by the

green cover of water, extends about 0.2 mile SE of the beacon.

A detached reef, which dries, lies 1.2 miles SW of the beacon.

4.19 Machangi (8°25'S., 39°27'E.) is a group of reefs lying on the

E side of the channel, 1.2 miles E of Chocha Beacon.

4.19 Songo Songo Island (8°31'S., 39°30'E.) lies 5 miles SSE of

Machangi on the E side of the inner channel. Poiasi, which uncovers 3.4m and Pwajuu Reef which uncovers 2.4m lie in the

fairway 3.2 miles W and 3.2 miles SW, respectively, from Songo Songo Island.

4.19 Val Rock, with 2m or less lies on the E side of the inner

channel 2 miles SW of Songo Songo Island; the sea does not

break over the rock and it should be given a wide berth. An isolated 9.1m patch lies 0.7 mile SSW of the rock.

4.19 An isolated reef lies on the E side of the inner channel 1 mile

N of Jewe Reef; it may best be seen on the chart.

4.19 Directions.—The inner channel is best navigated when the

sun is in a favorable position for seeing the reefs; these directions are written for S bound vessels.

4.19 From a position 1.2 miles E of Simaya Island steer 193° to

pass between Membeuso and Banda, and then between Chocha

and Machangi; this leg of the track passes close W of the 10m

curve.

4.19 After passing between Chocha and Machangi, vessels may

pass either E or W of Poiasi and Pwajuu, and if proceeding to

Kilwa Kivinje they should pass W of Jewe. Vessels proceeding

to sea via Kilwa Main Pass, should, when S of Pwajuu, steer to

pass E of Jewe taking care to avoid a 9.1m isolated shoal situated nearly 2 miles N of the NE extremity of Jewe.

4.19 Pumbavu Islet (8°30'S., 39°29'E.), which is sandy and has a
62 Sector 4. Tanzania—Cabo Delgado to Ras Kanzi 

Pub. 171

few trees on it, is situated on the NW extremity of the reef surrounding Songo Songo Island; it is connected to the island by a

ridge of sand which dries 2m.

4.19 Anchorage.—Anchorage may be obtained, in a depth of

11m, at a distance of 0.3 to 0.5 mile W of Pumbavu Islet.

4.19 Small craft may obtain more sheltered anchorage in a pocket

between Songo Songo Island and the reefs extending S of

Pumbavu Islet, in a depth of 7m. The anchorage is approached

over a sand bank, with a least depth of 3.7m, close S of the islet.

4.19 During the South Monsoon, vessels of moderate draft may

obtain sheltered anchorage of the NE side of Songo Songo island with the N extremity of the island bearing 285° and the S

extremity bearing 202°; the charted depth is 9.1m.

4.19 Okuza Island (8°16'S., 39°36'E.) is a small sandy island

covered with casaurina. The trees on the island are about 27m

high and may be seen from a considerable distance.

4.19 There is anchorage W of the reef surrounding Okuza, in

depths of 13 to 22m. In the Northeast Monsoon, a berth well to

the SW should be taken to avoid the swell but care should be

taken to avoid the 5.5m patch which lies about 2.7 miles SW of

Okuza Island.

4.20 Between Ras Pombwe (8°17'S., 39°19'E.) and the N

entrance point to Kikunya Mouth the coast is a maze of low

and swampy mangrove-covered islands, intersected by creeks,

comprising the delta of the Rufiji River. Some of these creeks

do not communicate with the principal rivers of the delta, but

during the rainy season in the interior, December to February,

the whole of the delta is frequently inundated.

4.20 The coast of the delta projects E of the general coastline and

is about 50 miles in length; it is low and of uniform outline

when seen from seaward and in nearly all places it is fringed by

mangroves. The N part of the delta is fronted by Mafia Island

and the numerous islets and reefs which lie in the intervening

channel.

4.20 Ras Twana (7°48'S., 39°27'E.), the NE extremity of the delta, is low, mangrove covered and fronted by a drying bank of

mud and sand which extends 3.2 miles E; the outer edge of this

bank is moderately steep-to and is generally only visible when

the sea is breaking over it.

4.20 Simba Uranga Mouth (7°46'S., 39°22'E.) is used by coastal

vessels engaged in the timber trade. There is no defineable bar

at the entrance but a bank with depths less than 5m extends 6 or

7 miles offshore. Depths on the bank decrease as the entrance

is approached and several mudbanks which nearly dry lie between 2 and 4 miles NE of the E entrance point. It has been reported that a least depth of 2.4m has been carried over the bank

but the depths probably vary from year to year.

4.20 Sunigara arm, which forms the principal approach to the

Rufiji River, is entered close within the E entrance point to

Simba Uranga Mouth; it has depths of 4.5 to 9m as far as Salale, about 4 miles within the entrance.

4.20 Kikunya Mouth (7°42'S., 39°20'E.), the farthest N of the

mouths forming the delta of the Rufiji River, is entered between Ras Simba Uranga, 3 miles NNW of Simba Uranga

Mouth, and a point 3 miles NNW.

4.20 A buoy is moored 6.7 miles NNE of Ras Simba Uranga.

There is no bar and by approaching with the center of the entrance bearing 223°, ahead, a least depth of 1.8m will be obtained. Kikunya Mouth is only connected to the Rufiji River by

branches leading to Simba Uranga arm.

Mafia Island 

4.21 Mafia Island (7°50'S., 39°48'E.), a large coral island

separated from the N part of the Rifiji River delta by Mafia

Channel, lies with its SW extremity 11.2 miles SE of Ras Twana. The coasts of the island are fringed with reefs and are generally low with no remarkable features.

4.21 Winds—Weather.—The seasons at Mafia Island are similar

to those at Zanzibar and, like them, very changeable, but the

wind in the Mafia Channel is steadier during the day than in

Zanzibar Channel. The rainfall is greater in the vicinity of Ras

Kisimani (7°57'S., 39°35'E.) than in other parts of Mafia Island.

4.22 Mafia Island—South side.—Ras Kisimani (7°57'S.,

39°35'E.), the W extremity of the island, is low and sandy and

has a clump of coconut palms, in the shape of a fan, near its extremity. Red cliffs about 2.7 miles SE of Ras Kisimani are

prominent.

4.22 Okuto, extending 3 miles offshore from the vicinity of the

red cliffs, is the largest projection of an extensive reef which

fronts the coast and which dries. Mange, a detached reef which

uncovers 3.7m lies 1.5 miles farther offshore; its N end is

marked by a beacon.

4.22 An extensive detached reef, 12.5 miles long, which dries 2m

in places, lies close off the SE side of Mafia Island. Jibondo Island and Juani Island are situated on this reef. A small islet 6m

high lies 1.2 miles WSW of Jibondo Island.

4.22 Tutia (8°07'S., 39°39'E.), a detached reef lying 5 miles SW

of Jibondo Island, dries 3.7m in its N part. The sea always

breaks heavily on the S edge of this reef; it is the farthest danger S of Mafia Island.

Anchorage.—A good anchorage may be taken W of Ras

Kisimani, in depths of 16 to 22m. Good anchorage, sheltered

from all swell, may be taken about 4.5 miles WSW of Jibondo

Island, in 10m, sand and mud, with the S islet of Jibondo Island

bearing 088° and the NW end of Tutia bearing 183°.

4.22 Vessels approaching the above anchorage from the E should

give Tutia a good berth, until well clear to the W.

4.22 Caution.—A dangerous rock is charted about 0.7 mile SE of

the above anchorage.

4.23 Chole Bay (7°56'S., 39°47'E.) is situated at the SE

corner of Mafia Island; the bay has not been completely examined, but there are depths from 7 to 14m in the deeper parts.

4.23 There are two entrances to the bay. The SW entrance is approached from Jibondo Anchorage, the channel passing NW of

Jibondo Island, Juani Island, and Chole Island. Vessels drawing up to 3m are able to enter at HW, and boats may use the

channel at all times except at LW springs.

4.23 Kinasi Pass, the E entrance, lies between the edges of the

reefs extending from Juani Island and Jina Island (Miewi Island), 1.2 miles N. There are depths of 11 to 20m in this entrance, but the tidal currents run through at rates up to 5 knots

and it would be unsafe for any vessel to attempt to enter unless

the channel were well marked. During the period of the outgo-
Sector 4. Tanzania—Cabo Delgado to Ras Kanzi 63

Pub. 171

ing tidal current, the sea breaks right across the entrance and

would swamp a small boat. Within the bay, the tidal current is

S at rates up to 2 knots on the rising tide, and N at about 1.2

knots on the falling tide. 

4.23 Chole, the principal village and trading place of Mafia, is situated on Chole Island. 

4.24 Mafia Island—East side.—Between Kinasi Pass and

Ras Mkumbi, the coast consists of cliffs from 3 to 5m high and

is fringed with a narrow steep-to reef.

4.24 Ras Mkumbi (7°38'S., 39°54'E.), the N extremity of Mafia

Island, is formed by a coral cliff 4.6m high; the point is backed

by land rising to about 24m high which is covered with small

bushes and trees. A light stands on Ras Mkumbi.

4.24 A 3.7m patch lies 1.2 miles NE of the light; the point should

be given a berth at least 2 miles.

4.24 Irregular depths extend about 5 miles NW of Ras Mkumbi,

and vessels should navigate with caution in this area. A least

depth of 16.5m is charted in this area but disturbed water, as

though caused by shoals, is created by the current can be seen

in places where the depths are more than 35m.

4.24 The sea nearly always breaks on the fringing reef, which extends 0.7 mile N of Ras Mkumbi.

4.25 Mafia Island—Northwest side.—The NW coast of

Mafia Island forms the SE side of Mafia Channel. The dangers,

which lie adjacent to the track are described with the channel.

4.25 Tirene Bay is formed between Ras Kisimani and Ras Mbisi

(7°49'S., 39°43'E.). The village of Kilindoni, containing the

Government station for Mafia Island, is situated 5 miles NE of

Ras Kisimani.

4.25 Tirene Reef, 6 miles NE of Ras Kisimani, lies, awash, on the

S part of a coral bank with a least known depth of 1.8m which

extends 0.8 mile N of the reef.

4.25 Tides—Currents.—The current of the rising tide sets somewhat strongly from the NW extremity of Salim Bank into

Tirene Bay. At the anchorage it has been observed that the current sets to the N at a velocity of 0.5 knot at 3 hours after, and

to the S at a similar velocity at the same time before HW.

4.25 Aspect.—Ngombeni Shamba, a clump of mango trees, 53m

high shows more conspicuously than other lower clumps.

4.25 Palm Hill is covered with coconut palms, forming a conical

summit 52m high, whose shape is more marked at a distance,

when it is more easily identified.

4.25 The Residency at Kilindoni, located near the coast, about 1

mile SW of Palm Hill, is conspicuous. There is a flagstaff W of

the Residency.

4.25 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be obtained off Tirene, in

10m, sheltered by the outer banks, with Ras Mbisi bearing

040° and the Residency at Kilindoni bearing about 140°.

4.25 Caution.—Salim Bank (7°52'S., 39°38'E.), an extensive

shoal of sand and coral, with a least depth of 1.8m, lies with its

NW extremity 6.5 miles N of Ras Kisimani.

Mafia Channel 

4.26 Mafia Channel, between the mainland on the W and

Mafia Island on the E, is easily navigated by day. It may be of

considerable advantage to low powered vessels of moderate

draft proceeding to the S against the South Monsoon, but vessels bound to the N gain nothing by using it as the current is favorable outside Mafia Island.

4.26 Tides—Currents.—South of Ras Kisimani, the current of

the rising tide sets NW and the current of the falling tide sets

SE, but to the N of Ras Kisimani, the currents are nearly reversed, the former being a S current and the latter N, although

the tidal currents are frequently overpowered by the permanent

N current, especially during neaps.

4.26 The alteration in the direction of the tidal currents depends

considerably on the wind, as if that should be strong from SE,

unless at spring tides, it is almost certain that a strong N current

will be experienced in Mafia Channel, at any time of tide.

4.26 Between Mange and Sefo Reefs the currents generally follow the direction of the channel, but a NE set may be experienced, on passing Al Hadjiri, with a falling tide.

4.27 South Mafia Channel (8°11'S., 39°39'E.) is the passage between Okuza Island (8°16'S., 39°36'E.) and Tutia; it

joins Kisimani Channel about 8 miles SSW of Ras Kisimani.

4.27 Kisimani Channel (8°02'S., 39°34'E.) leads from a position

8 miles S of Ras Kisimani to a position 6 miles NNW of that

point.

4.27 Mange (8°03'S., 39°36'E.), marked by a beacon, is situated

on the E side of the channel and Fungu Marima, a reef which

dries 1.2m in places, lies 4 miles W of Mange.

4.27 Fungu Kauri (8°00'S., 39°33'E.), a reef which dries 2m in

places, lies on the W side of the channel. In 1940, a reef was

reported about 0.8 mile E of Fungu Kauri.

4.27 The E side of the channel, between Ras Kisimani and a position about 2 miles S, is formed by a bank with a least known

depth of 0.9 which extends 1.5 miles offshore in places; its W

edge is marked by a buoy.

4.28 Belami (7°57'S., 39°33'E.) is a reef on the W side of

the channel 1.7 miles SW of Ras Kisimani; its N part, which is

awash, is marked by a beacon.

4.28 Bwejuu Island, which lies on an extensive reef 2.5 miles W

of Ras Kisimani, is covered with casuarina that have a height

of about 27m. The N edge of the reef surrounding the island

terminates in a spit 4.2 miles N; the least known depth on the

reef to the N is 3.7m.

4.28 Maduvi (7°55'S., 39°33'E.), on the W side of the channel, is

a small sand bank, which dries 4m. A narrow spit, with a least

known depth of 3.7m extends 4 miles N of Maduvi; this spit

parallels the spit extending N from Bwejuu Island. Al Hadjiri,

marked by a beacon, is a reef lying on the E side of the channel

3.5 miles NNW of Ras Kisimani. A sand bank, which dries

1.8m, lies on the reef, and when covered is generally indicated

by discolored water; a shoal, with a depth of 5.5m extends 0.5

mile SW of the sand bank toward the channel.

4.28 Sefo (7°50'S., 39°34'E.) is a reef lying at the N end of Kisimani Channel. A sand bank, which dries 3.7m and is usually

visible, lies on the reef and its W end is marked by a beacon.

4.28 Msala Channel (7°50'S., 39°32'E.) lies W of Bwejuu Island

and its surrounding shoals. The channel is not buoyed and is

encumbered by numerous reefs, especially in its S part, between Ras Dima (8°00'S., 39°26'E.) and Fungu Marima, where

its is almost filled with shoals.

4.29 Mafia Channel.—From the junction of Msala Chan-
64 Sector 4. Tanzania—Cabo Delgado to Ras Kanzi 

Pub. 171

nel and Kisimani Channel W of Sefo, Mafia Channel leads to a

position W of Niororo Island (7°37'S., 39°41'E.).

4.29 Wumi (7°45'S., 39°36'E.), a reef, on the W side of the track

5.7 miles NNE of Sefo, dries 0.6m. As there is no sand on this

reef it is not easily distinguished at high water. A shoal, with a

depth of 3.7m, lies 1 mile WSW of Wumi. A reef, awash, lies

3.2 miles ESE of Wumi.

4.29 Shungumbili Island (7°42'S., 39°41'E.), with some high

trees on it, is situated on the E side of the track 5.5 miles NE of

Wumi. The island lies on the S end of a drying reef and is surrounded by a bank with depths less than 3.7m. A rocky bank

extends 2.7 miles SSW of Shungumbili Island and terminates

in a 3.7m patch.

4.29 Fili (7°40'S., 39°37'E.), a small isolated reef which dries

0.3m, lies on the W side of the track 3 miles WNW of Shungumbili Island; the reef is not easily seen at HW.

4.29 Niororo Island is covered with bushes; a tree which stands

on the island is conspicuous and when it is viewed from the N

at a distance it resembles a plume of smoke. The island lies on

the W edge of an extensive reef, that has a sandbank on its NW

extremity which dries 1.5m. This part of the reef deflects the

tidal current NW causing tide rips which often make the reef

appear to extend farther NW than is actually so. Anchorage, in

16.5m, sand, can be obtained off the NW end of the island.

4.29 North Mafia Channel extends about 16 miles N of Niororo

Island.

4.29 Dira (7°34'S., 39°35'E.) is a reef situated on the W side of

the channel. A sand bank, which dries 3m, lies on the W side of

the reef. Dira can generally be seen and the sea always breaks

on it.

4.29 Gordon Reef (7°34'S., 39°42'E.), on the E side of the channel, is a below-water reef with depths of less than 2m. An isolated patch, with a charted depth of 7.3m, lies 1.7 miles N of

Gordon Reef, and Vulture Bank, with a least charted depth of

3.7m lies 2.7 miles NE of the reef.

4.29 Fawn Bank (7°30'S., 39°41'E.) consists of several patches,

with depths of 9 to 18m, lying across the channel.

Mafia Island to Ras Kanzi

4.30 Between Ras Simba Uranga (7°38'S., 39°20'E.) and

Ras Pembamnasi, the coast is chiefly sandy with no marked

projections.

4.30 Between Ras Buyuni (7°08'S., 39°33'E.) and Ras Kanzi, the

coast is low for the first 3 miles, but then rises to cliffs, about

24m high, at Puna Point, about 1 mile farther N.

4.30 Kanoge (7°42'S., 39°10'E.) rises to 213m at the S end of the

Mtoti Hills, a flat-topped range, about 6 miles inland and parallel with the coast.

4.30 Binga, an isolated flat-topped hill, 162m high, rises 16 miles

WSW of Ras Pembamnasi; it is the most prominent feature on

the N part of the coast.

4.30 Kisiju (7°25'S., 39°20'E.), situated within the mouth of a river, is the most important of the numerous villages along this

thickly-populated stretch of coast.

4.30 Koma Island (7°32'S., 39°24'E.) is the farthest S of several

small islands lying off the coast between Kikuuyu Mouth and

Ras Pembamnasi. There are trees on the island and its N and E

sides are fringed with mangroves. Pemba-Juu Island stands on

the N part of the reef extending 1.7 miles NNE of Koma Island.

4.30 Good anchorage in either monsoon may be taken, in 10 to

12m, mud, with Pemba-Juu Island bearing 094°, distant about

0.7 mile.

4.30 Kwale Reefs consists of a number of reefs lying from 5 to 15

miles offshore. Due to the muddiness of the water, most of

these reefs are only visible at LW. Field Patch (7°21'S.,

39°38'E.) lies on the NE edge of these reefs.

4.31 Sukuti Reef (7°15'S., 39°29'E.), the farthest N of Kwale

Reefs, is an extensive group of reefs lying about 5 miles S of Ras

Pembamnasi. The sea always breaks heavily on the outer edges of

these reefs. Good anchorage in either monsoon for small vessels

may be taken W of these reefs, in depths of 5.5 to 7.3m.

4.31 Buyuni Bay is entered between Ras Pembamnasi (7°09'S.,

39°32'E.) and Ras Buyuni, about 4.2 miles NE. A drying reef

extends 1 mile S of Ras Buyuni, and a 3.7m spit projects 2

miles S of the reef. Some red cliffs, a little S of the village oy

Buyuni, show up well with the sun in the E.

4.31 From Ras Buyuni (7°08'S., 39°33'E.), coast is low and

swampy for the first 3 miles, but rises to cliffs, 25m high, about

1 mile farther N.

4.31 Ras Kanzi (7°01'S., 39°33'E.) is described in paragraph 5.1.
65

Pub. 171

5. 

Tanzania—Ras Kanzi to Pangani Bay, including Zanzibar Island

5.0Additional chart coverage may be found in NGA/DLIS Catalog of Maps, Charts, and Related Products (Unlimited Distribution).

SECTOR 5 — CHART INFORMATION
67

Pub. 171

SECTOR 5 

TANZANIA—RAS KANZI TO PANGANI BAY, INCLUDING ZANZIBAR ISLAND

5.0 Plan.—This sector describes the SE coast of Africa from

Ras Kanzi to Pangani Bay, including the island of Zanzibar and

off-lying dangers.

Ras Kanzi to Dar es Salaam

5.1 Ras Kanzi (7°01'S., 39°33'E.) may be distinguished

by the number of palmyra palms near it, which are not seen

elsewhere on this coast, and by Puna Hill, which rises about 4.5

miles SW. The hill is especially conspicuous when seen from

the S. The point is marked by a light.

5.1 Ras Kimbiji (6°59'S., 39°33'E.), is a low projection 2 miles

N of Ras Kanzi; the coast near the point is the highest land in

the vicinity. A rounded hill, 46m high, is remarkable due to its

isolation; it helps to identify Ras Kimbiji.

5.1 Between Ras Kimbiji and Ras Dege, 8 miles NNW, the coast

consists of white sandy beaches varied by reddish cliffs, about

20m high, 3 miles N of Ras Kimbiji, and other red cliffs 3

miles farther N. This part of the coast is fronted by reefs which

extend 0.7 mile offshore.

5.1 Funga Miza (6°55'S., 39°32'E.), awash, is located 3.5 miles

NNW of Ras Kimbiji, 1.5 miles offshore. The reef lies on the S

end of a narrow coral bank, which has depths from 5.5 to 7.3m,

a rock, in the N part of the reef has less than 2m.

5.1 Temporary anchorage, in 26m, can be obtained about 1 mile

offshore anywhere along this shore when the monsoon is light,

except in the vicinity of Fungu Miza. Care must be taken to approach the anchorage slowly as the depths decrease suddenly

from 64 to 28m, and from that again to much shallower water.

5.2 Latham Island (Fungu Kizimkazi) (6°54'S.,

39°56'E.) is a low,dangerous coral island lying in the approach

to Zanzibar Channel. The surface of the island shines white in

the sun, but it is difficult to see with a bad light or at night.

5.2 Tides—Currents.—The current over the bank is variable,

but in the deep water on each side of it the current is constantly

N, with varying strength. At a distant 5 miles W of Latham Island the current becomes much weaker. The current off this

part of the coast depends greatly on the direction and strength

of the wind, and in the Southwest Monsoon it sets strongly NW

past Mbwakuni, but nearer the shore it is not so strong. In the

Northeast Monsoon, if the wind is fresh, the N set is only experienced with a rising tide, but at this season the current is very

variable.

5.2 The current of the rising tide sets to the N in the S part of

Zanzibar Channel, and in a contrary direction at the N end, thus

meeting at HW at a point near the center, the position of which

depends much upon the direction and strength of the wind; the

other tidal current sets in the reverse way from the central point

of meeting, toward the N and S ends of the island. During the

Northeast Monsoon, the tidal currents are weak.

5.2 The direction of the tidal currents at the anchorage of Zanzibar is extremely variable, as they meet near there. In the Southwest Monsoon, off Ras Shangani, the tidal current runs chiefly

N at all times of tide, but a vessel anchored under the lee of the

point lies in the eddy, and may swing in any direction.

5.2 Anchorage.—The greater part of the bank on which the island lies has depths of 9.1 to 18.3m, over sand, interspersed

with large lumps of coral. The water is so clear that the bottom

has been plainly seen by moonlight when in a depth of 18.3m.

5.2 Anchorage may be taken up to the N or S of the island, depending on the monsoon. The cross swell on the bank renders

the anchorage uneasy.

5.3 Ras Dege (6°52'S., 39°28'E.) is formed of cliffs 3m

high, which quickly rises to a height of 9m close W; it is

backed by some rounded hills.

5.3 Between Ras Dege and Ras Rongoni the coast is fronted by

islands and reefs, which skirt the coast.

5.3 Mwamba Kikwero, a reef lying 3 miles NW of Ras Dege, is

steep-to and dries 0.3m in places.

5.3 Outer Sinda (6°49'S., 39°24'E.), an island, 15m high, lies 5

miles NW of Ras Dege. Inner Sinda, 12m high, lies 0.5 mile

SW of Outer Sinda. There is white sand at the N and S extremities of the island. A chain of small islets lie on the E edge of

the drying reef, which surrounds these two islands.

5.3 Millard Bank (6°48'S., 39°24'E,.) with a least charted depth

of 5.5m near its N extremity, and its S part about 0.5 mile N of

Outer Sinba; the bank can not be distinguished until close to.

5.3 Outer Makatumbe (6°47'S., 39°20'E.) is an island, 12m

high, lying 3.5 miles WNW of Outer Sinba; a light stands in

the NW part of the island. Hammond Rock, 2m high, lies 0.5

mile NW of the light near the extremity of the reef, which encircles Outer Makatumbe and Inner Makatumbe.

5.3 Inner Makatumbe, 15m high, lies on the reef 0.5 mile SW of

Outer Makatumbe; a quarantine station is situated close within

the SW extremity of the island.

5.4 Mbwamaji Harbor (6°51'S., 39°22'E.) (World Port

Index No. 47005) lies between the reef which surrounds Inner

Sinda and Outer Sinda and the coast between Ras Koronjo

(6°51'S., 39°23'E.) and Ras Mjimwema; this harbor lies within

the harbor limits of Dar es Salaam.

5.4 Tides—Currents.—The tidal currents at the anchorage are

strong, and toward HW, especially in the Northeast Monsoon;

the current runs rapidly E, and causes a vessel to swing to the

swell in a most unpleasant manner.

5.4 Anchorage.—The best anchorage during the Southwest

Monsoon is, in 18m, sand and mud, with the SW sandy point

of Inner Sinda Island bearing 141°, and the N extremity of Outer Sinda Island bearing 054°.

5.4 The best anchorage in the Northeast Monsoon, in 10m, sand,

is with the SW extremity of Inner Sinda Island bearing 015°,

distant about 0.2 mile.

5.4 Mjimwena Oil Terminal, consisting of a mooring buoy, is

situated 1.5 miles NE of Ras Mjimwema; a submarine pipeline

lies between the point and the buoy. The oil terminal is within

the jurisdiction of the port of Dar es Salaam; it can accommo-
68 Sector 5. Tanzania—Ras Kanzi to Pangani Bay, including Zanzibar Island 

Pub. 171

date tankers up to 100,000 dwt and a draft of 16.8m. Berthing

is carried out in daylight only, but vessels may leave the mooring at any time.

5.4 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory. The ETA messages

should be sent within 6 hours of clearing the loading port and

72 hours and 36 hours in advance of arrival at the pilot station.

When within 20 miles off the Dar es Salaam signal station, call

the station on VHF channel 12 or 16. The pilot, who also acts

as mooring master, embarks 2 miles N of the oil terminal.

5.4 It is generally advisable to remain underway if awaiting the

pilot, however, it has been reported that in good weather tankers may obtain temporary anchorage, in a depth of 18m, with

Outer Makatumbe Light bearing 250°, distant about 1.3 miles. 

5.5 Dar es Salaam Bay (6°47'N., 39°18'E.), the outer anchorage for the port of Dar es Salaam, is entered between Outer Makatumbe and Ras Kankadya (6°44'S., 39°17'E.), 5 miles

NW.

The E side of the bay is formed by an extensive bank with

depths of less than 5m, which fronts the coast between Ras

Mjimwema and Ras Rongoni, a rocky point with red cliffs, on

which stands a green obelisk, 2 miles WNW.

5.5 The W side of the bay consists of low cliffs and sandy beaches terminating in Ras Kankadya, a rocky peninsula forming the

W entrance point of the bay; from the NE the peninsula appears as an island.

5.5 The red cliffs of Ras Chokir and Ras Upanga lie at the head

of the bay 1 and 2 miles NW, respectively, of Ras Rongoni.

5.5 Tides—Currents.—In the approaches to Dar es Salaam

Bay, the general direction of the tidal current is NW on the rising tide and SE on the falling tide; among the off-lying islands

and reefs these directions are often reversed.

5.5 Depths—Limitations.—Daphne Reefs, consisting of three

groups of reefs with depths from 3.2 to 5.5m, lie on the NW

side of the entrance to Dar es Salaam; the outermost group lies

2.5 miles SE of Ras Kankadya. A dangerous wreck lies on the

reefs between the middle and innermost groups. The outermost

group is marked by a lighted buoy, moored near its SE end. 

5.5 Dar es Salaam harbor is approached through a dredged channel, with a depth of 10.2m, rfom a position 0.9 mile N of Ras

Rongoni. The channel is marked by lighted buoys. The channel

entrance width has also been increased to 140m, now allowing

access to vessels up to 234m long, with an underkeel clearance

of 0.7m at all times. 

5.5 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory S of a line drawn 270°

from Outer Makatumbe Light for all vessels over 200 grt. The

pilot boat meets vessels about 1.5 miles NW of Outer Makatumbe Light on request. Vessels should send their ETA 72

hours and 36 hours in advance.

5.5 Anchorage.—The following designated anchorages are located in Dar es Salaam Bay: 

1. Anchorage Nos. 1 to 6—Large vessels, in depths of

20 to 27m.

2. Anchorage No. 7—Tankers, in depths of 20 to 27m

3. Anchorage Nos. 8 though 13—Small vessels, in

depths of 8 to 13m.

5.5 These anchorages are sheltered during the Southwest Monsoon, but during the Northeast Monsoon a considerable swell

sets in with strong winds. Anchorage with good holding

ground may be obtained within an area bound on the NW by

the alignment of Kidandoni Range Lights, on the E by the

alignment of Ras Rongoni Range Lights, and on the S by a line

drawn 282° from Outer Makatumbe Light. Ships should not

anchor on the range lines or S of a line drawn 270° from Outer

Makatumbe Light. 

5.5 Directions.—Vessels approaching Dar es Salaam Bay from

the SE should steer for Ras Kankadya on a bearing of 287°,

which will lead about 1.5 miles N of Millard Bank. When the

lights on Ras Kidandoni come in range 247°, steer on that

heading to pass S of Daphne Reefs.

5.5 When Daphne Outer Buoy bears 008°, steer for the range

lights on Ras Rongoni on a heading of 188°, then proceed to

the entrance channel of Dar es Salaam harbor. 

5.5 If the vessel is anchoring in the bay, course may be shaped

for the anchorage when Outer Makatumbe Light bears 118°.

5.5 Vessels approaching from the N steer with Outer Makatumbe

Light bearing not less than 180° and then alter course when

Ras Kidandoni Range Lights come in line bearing 247° and

proceed as previously directed.

5.5 Caution.—Kankadya Patch (6°44'S., 39°19'E.), with a

least depth of 9m, lies in the N approach to Dar es Salaam Bay.

5.5 Several acts of piracy have been reported to taken place

against vessels at anchor off Dar es Salaam. 

Dar es Salaam (6°49'S., 39°18'E.)

World Port Index No. 47010

5.6 Dar es Salaam is approached from Dar es Salaam Bay

and is entered between East Ferry Point and West Ferry Point,

0.2 mile W; both of these point are low and sandy. The harbor

is landlocked and sheltered and consists of a city and a medium-sized natural harbor.

Dar es Salaam
Sector 5. Tanzania—Ras Kanzi to Pangani Bay, including Zanzibar Island 69

Pub. 171

5.6 Winds—Weather.—During the Southwest Monsoon, Dar es

Salaam Bay is well-protected but during the Northeast Monsoon, a considerable swell sets in.

5.6 The weather is humid and there is little diurnal variation of

temperature.

5.6 Tides—Currents.—In the approach to Dar es Salaam Bay,

the flood current sets in a general NW direction, and the ebb

sets SE, but among the islands and reefs lying off the coast in

this vicinity, these currents in some cases set in the reverse directions.

5.6 The monsoonal currents, however, acting in conjunction

with or in opposition to the tidal currents, cause the direction of

the resultant currents to be variable and uncertain, which affects navigation.

5.6 During springs, the current is strong in the channel, especially toward or after LW, as it is then confined to the channel itself, the strongest current being generally about 2 hours after

LW. The ebb current sets straight across the shallow water toward Inner Makatumbe Island, and, when North Reef is submerged, caution is also necessary, as at such times the current

sets across the reef.

5.6 High water slack occurs at about the time of HW, but the

time varies considerably with astronomical and meteorological

conditions. During the rainy season, the duration of the flood

current is reduced and the duration of the ebb current is correspondingly increased. At neaps during the rainy season the

flood current may be hardly perceptible at the surface. Local

authorities should be consulted regarding the time of slack water on any particular day.

5.6 In a vessel that can cross the bar the best time to enter the

harbor is at LW, when the reefs on either side can generally be

seen, but a vessel of deeper draft should enter at HW, and in no

case should entering be attempted during the full strength of

the incoming nor leaving with a similar condition of outgoing

current.

5.6 At spring tides vessels should stem the tide. It is not advisable to

use the channel during the full strength of the tide, that is, between

2 and 4 hours on either side of HW or LW.

5.6 At neap tides it is safe for a vessel to enter or leave the harbor at any time, irrespective of the direction of the tide.

5.6 Care should be exercised when the ebb current is running,

especially by an outbound vessel, to keep the range beacons in

line as the ebb current sets across the E bank.

5.6 Depths—Limitations.—There is a depth of 6.6m in the entrance channel. The entrance channel is entered about 0.7 miles

N of Ras Rongoni. There are some sharp bends in the channel,

which has a least width of 90m between East Ferry Point and

West Ferry Point.

5.6 The harbor may be entered by twin screw vessels up to 183m

in length and a draft of 10.1m at MHWS and a draft of 9.1m at

MHWN. Single screw vessels with a length not exceeding

175m may enter; larger vessels may enter with the permission

of port management. The general cargo terminal is 0.8 mile

long, with a depth of 9.1m alongside. The container terminal is

0.3 mile long, with a depth of 10.1m alongside.

5.6 Vessels with a draft of 12.2m can be accommodated alongside; vessels with a draft of 9.1m may anchor in the harbor. Roro vessels can be moored stern-to between Berth 6 and Berth 7.

5.6 Dredging in the harbor, reported in 1997, limits vessel movements to daylight hours only.

5.6 Aspect.—The shore of Dar es Salaam is broken and indented and presents to the eye a low outline, nearly uniform in

height, but much diversified by alternating sand beaches and

cliffs. About 12 miles inland a chain of mountains, rising to a

height of from 366 to 457m, extends SW and terminates

abruptly. When seen from the NE, the Kankadya Peninsula appears as an island; a sandy patch about 0.7 mile within its extremity is conspicuous with the sun in the E.

Ras Chokir (6°49'S., 39°10'E.)is about 1 mile SE of Ras

Upanga; its cliffs are red and about 9.1m high. On the former

point there is a large two story hospital, which can be seen

from a long distance. Other conspicuous objects are the Government House, nearly midway between the red cliffs and West

Ferry Point and a flare situated about 1.5 miles SSW of Ras

Rongoni. A conspicuous black flagstaff stands close E of Ras

Makabe.

5.6 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for vessels over 200 nrt.

Pilots board about 2.2 miles NNW of Ras Rongoni.

5.6 Signals.—A conspicuous signal station, with a tower and a

red roof, stands on East Ferry Point.

5.6 The following signals are displayed from the signal station:

1. A black flag at the mast head by day or three red

lights, vertically disposed, by night—Entry prohibited.

2. A black ball by day or three lights, white, red, white,

vertically disposed, by night—Departure prohibited.

5.6 The following distant signals are displayed:

1. A black square on a white background—Entry prohibited.

2. A white ball on a black background—Departure prohibited.

5.6 Anchorage.—The inner harbor will accommodate up to

nine vessels of moderate size at mooring buoys and anchorages. Vessels are required to moor with two anchors.

5.6 Directions.—Vessels approaching Dar es Salaam Bay from

the S will first sight the Sinda Islands, the outer island should

be given a berth of 2.5 miles to clear Millard Bank by keeping

Gunja Peak in range with Ras Kankakya, bearing 287°, and

steering on this range until the range lights on the W shore of

the bay bear 247°. The latter range should then be followed,

passing between the reef extending N from Hammond Rock

and Daphne Reefs, until the lighted range bearing 193° is

picked up and so on into the harbor using the ranges shown on

Dar es Salaam Harbor
70 Sector 5. Tanzania—Ras Kanzi to Pangani Bay, including Zanzibar Island 

Pub. 171

the chart.

5.6 When approaching the bay from the N, Mbudya Patches and

Kankadya Patch must be avoided, and the entrance approached

with Makatumbe Light bearing not less than 180°.

5.6 If intending to anchor in the bay, the selected anchorage can

be steered for after Outer Makatumbe Light has been brought

to bear 118°.

Zanzibar Channel 

5.7 Zanzibar Channel separates Zanzibar Island from the

mainland; its S entrance lies between Ras Dege (6°52'S.,

39°29'E.) and Ras Kizimkazi, the S extremity of Zanzibar Island; its N entrance lies between Ras Kikogwe, the S entrance

point of Pangani Bay, about 90 miles NNW of Ras Dege, and

Ras Nungwi, the N extremity of Zanzibar Island, about 24

miles SE of Ras Kikogwe.

5.7 Caution.—On the mainland side, the reefs are sometimes

not easily distinguished because of the discolored water caused

by the alluvium of the rivers, but on the island side the water is

generally clear, so that the reefs can be plainly seen. The positions of the sand heads on the coral reefs usually change with

the monsoons. Submarine cables are laid across Zanzibar

Channel between Dar es Salaam and Zanzibar Island and the

mainland N.

Zanzibar Island

5.8 Zanzibar Island (6°07'S., 39°21'E.) is the largest and

most important of the many coral-lined islands lying off the E

coast of Africa. The island is undulating with ranges of hills

generally running N and S with plains between them. 

5.8 The coast in most places consists of low, steep cliffs. The island is surrounded by a coral reef which is, in general, steep-to

except in the inlets. The reef dries about 0.5m and is flat, except its outer edge is somewhat higher than its average level.

The off-lying reefs are similar.

5.8 Winds—Weather.—The Southwest Monsoon, known as the

Masika season, sets in about March, bringing the heaviest of

the rains, and is strong for two months or more, rain being always prevalent, but by July or August the wind settles down to

a steady breeze and the rain clears off, and this continues until

October, when the SW wind gets fitful and uncertain, and rain

and squalls may again be expected.

5.8 By the end of November the Northeast Monsoon sets in,

sometimes quietly, sometimes with a burst, and after an interval of a fortnight, blows steadily until February when it begins

to die away, but these seasons are so uncertain and subject to

such variation that any description can be only an approximation.

5.8 Near the land, the monsoon does not blow steadily in one direction. During the Southwest Monsoon, and especially in Zanzibar Channel, it is usual in the morning for the wind to be

from W to SW, freshening up to 1000. After that it falls higher

for a time, but, hauling around to the S, freshens up again about

1300, finishing in the evening at SE; when this takes place the

weather is usually fine. If the wind does not commence at W in

the morning and yet veers to the S, there is more chance of rain

but squalls and occasionally rainy days may be expected all the

year round.

5.8 After the Northeast Monsoon is well-established, the wind in

the morning is generally NNE, veering to ENE about 1400.

5.8 Cyclones are unrecorded prior to 1872, but in April of that

year one swept over the island from the NE, destroying everything in its path, but leaving the S end untouched.

5.8 At Leven Bank, in the Southwest Monsoon, the current always runs to the NNW from 1.5 to 3 knots, during the Northeast Monsoon it decreases to about half that rate.

5.8 As a rule the current of the rising tide sets to the S and the

other current in a contrary direction, but both currents are much

influenced by the wind. In the Southwest Monsoon, at neaps,

there is a continuous N current and during this season the

greatest irregularity in the tides prevail. The currents are strongest off Ras Mwanda.

5.8 The tidal wave coming from the E makes the times of HW at

full and change nearly identical for all this coast, only varying

a little on either side of 4 hours 00 minutes. In Zanzibar Channel, the great difference between neap and spring ranges, the

latter being generally 4.0 or 4.2m and the former about 2.7m,

makes a considerable difference in the appearance of the reefs

and shores both of the mainland and island, especially in the

case of the large area of coral banks in the vicinity of Zanzibar

town, and this should be constantly remembered, and any passages new to the navigator should be taken, if possible, at LW.

The HW interval at full and change at the S end of Zanzibar

Channel is 3 hours 55 minutes; spring rise 8.2m and neaps rise

1.8m.

Zanzibar Island—East Coast

5.9 From Ras Kizimkazi (6°28'S., 39°30'E.), the SW extremity of Zanzibar, the coast trends in a general NE direction

to Ras Makunduchi. A light is situated on the coast about 3

miles SSW of Ras Makunduchi.

5.9 Kizimkazi Patch (6°28'S., 39°33'E.), with a least charted

depth of 10.9m, lies about 1.5 miles offshore, 2 miles SSE of

the light.

5.9 Ras Michamvi (6°07'S., 39°30'E.) lies 16 miles NNW of

Ras Makunduchi; the point should not be rounded too closely.

5.9 Chwaka Bay is entered between Ras Michamvi and Ras

Uroa. The tidal currents set strongly and regularly in and out of

the bay. 

5.9 Mnemba Island (5°49'S., 39°23'E.) is small and sandy, with

tall casuarina trees which may be seen at a distant of 10 miles.

The islet is surrounded by a reef, which extends 3.3 miles N

and 2.3 miles E

Zanzibar Island—Southwest Coast

5.10 Ras Kizimkazi appears as a long low wooded hill and

is so rounded that the appearance of the land alters with every

change of the vessel’s position. In a position 2 miles NW of

Ras Kizimkazi, there is a small sandy bay with some tall coconut trees which show up well from certain directions.

5.10 A steep-to drying reef fringes the coast adjacent to Ras Kizimkazi; it breaks heavily.

5.10 Between Ras Kizimkazi and Ras Mkita (6°19'S., 39°18'E,.)

the E side of Zanzibar Channel is fronted by numerous islands

and dangers.

5.10 Bedford Break (6°31'S., 39°25'E.) has a least charted depth
Sector 5. Tanzania—Ras Kanzi to Pangani Bay, including Zanzibar Island 71

Pub. 171

of 9.1m; it is the farthest S of Pungume Patches. A least depth

of 5.5m lies on the patches about 7.7 miles W of Ras Kizimkazi. The bottom is plainly visible when nearing Pungume Patches, but their vicinity should be avoided by deep draft vessels.

5.10 Pungume (6°26'S., 39°20'E.), a wooded islet about 12m

high, is situated on the S part of a drying reef about 10 miles

WNW of Ras Kizimkazi. A light is situated on the SW extremity of Pungume.

5.11 Kwale (6°23'S., 39°17'E.), a wooded island 9.1m high,

stands on a drying reef 3 miles NNW of Pungume. A sand cay

0.3m high, is situated on the drying reef about 0.7 mile N of

Kwale.

5.11 Kipwa Gini, a small coral head, lies in the position 6°22'S,

39°16'E and is not easily seen.

5.11 Menai Bay is entered between Ras Masoni (6°25'S.,

39°25'E.) and Pungume Island. The chain of islets and reefs

extending S to Pungume Island shelter the outer part of Menai

Bay; good holding ground, in depths of 22 to 28m, may be

found anywhere in this part, but in the strength of the Southwest Monsoon sheltered anchorage can only be obtained N of

Pungume Island or between Niamembe and Miwi Islets to the

ENE. A small vessel may proceed still higher up the bay, and

anchor off the small islet of Sume, in about 10m, but at this location the bay begins to shoal, and the navigation becomes intricate, so that the eye and chart must be the guide.

5.11 There is convenient night anchorage for small vessels, especially during the Northeast Monsoon, on Pungume Patches.

5.11 A submarine power cable passes close NW of Kwale. Vessels should avoid anchoring in the vicinity.

5.12 Ras Mkita (6°19'S., 39°18'E.) is the SE extremity of

a flat peninsula about 12m high.

5.12 Ras Fumba (6°19'S., 39°17'E.), 0.8 mile WNW of Ras Mkita, is a low rocky point. Nguruwe Island, 18.3m high to the

tops of the trees, lies on a drying bank 0.2 mile S of Ras Fumba.

5.12 The coast from Ras Fumba to Ras Buyu, 5.7 miles NW, consists of cliffs alternating with white sandy bays. From Ras

Buyu to Ras Chukwani, about 1 mile farther N, the cliffs are

the highest and most extensive on this coast.

5.12 The coast between Ras Chukwani and Ras Mbweni (6°12'S.,

39°12'E.) 2 miles NNW is low, but near the latter point are

some red cliffs, owing to their brighter color, are more remarkable than those SE of Ras Chukwani.

5.12 Mwamba Ukombe (6°19'S., 39°14'E.) extends NW for

about 4.5 miles from a position about 3 miles WSW of Ras

Mkita. This reef dries only in places at LW springs. 

5.12 Tele Islet, 7.3m high, with some off-lying rocks, lies on the reef

3.5 miles WNW of Ras Fumba. Ukombe Islet, 3m high, lies on the

NW part of Mwamba Ukombe, 1 mile NNW of Tele Islet.

5.12 Chumbe Island (6°17'S., 39°10'E.), marked by a light, is a

small wooded island on the NW part of Mwamba Chumbe, an

extensive reef which dries in patches.

Zanzibar Island—Southern Pass

5.13 Southern Pass.—Southern Pass is entered between

Chumbe Island (6°17'S., 39°10'E.) and Pwakuu, an extensive

reef 4.5 miles WNW; a sandbank on the W part of the reef

dries 3m.

5.13 Nyange, another extensive reef, lies with its SE part 2.7

miles NW of Chumbe Island; a sandbank, which dries 2.4m

lies on the N part of the reef.

5.13 Ariadne Bank (6°20'S., 39°10'E.), a small bank with a least

depth of 2.4m, lies in the S approach to Southern Pass, about

3.5 miles S of Chumbe Island.

5.13 Boribu (6°20'S., 39°05'E.), a reef which dries 2.4m, lies 5.2

miles W of Ariadne Bank. Outer Boribu, with a least depth of

9.1m, lies 1.7 miles WNW of Boribu, it can be seen under favorable conditions.

5.13 Tambare (6°17'S., 39°04'E.), a coral reef, is comparatively

steep-to. A sand bank on the NW end of the reef dries 2.1m.

Outer Tambare, with a least depth of 2.1m, lies 1.5 miles W of

the NW end of Tambare; it can always be seen.

5.14 Inner part.—Mtwana (6°14'S., 39°11'E.), 2 miles

SW of Ras Mbweni, consists of three shoals with a least depth

of 1.8m; it is marked on its NW side by a lighted buoy.

5.14 Kisiki, a reef which dries 0.9m, lies 1.5 miles W of Ras Mbweni. Southern Pass is about 0.4 mile wide between the two

above shoal areas; it is referred to as "the narrows.”

5.14 Within “the narrows” the E side of Southern Pass is formed

by the coast between Ras Mbweni and Ras Shangani 2.5 miles

NNW. Some white cliff,s from 18 to 24m high, extend over 1

mile N of Ras Mbweni.

5.14 A chain of reefs and shoals extends NW from Kisiki to Zanzibar Harbor and forms the W side of Southern Pass.

5.14 A sand spit, with a depth of 1.5m, extends 0.6 mile N from

Kisiki.

5.14 Pange (6°11'S., 30°09'E.) lies within the Zanzibar harbor

limits, 1.5 miles NW of Kisiki. A large sand bank, which dries

1.8m, is located on this reef. Shoal ground, with a least depth

of 2.7m near the outer extremity, extends 0.5 mile N of Pange.

5.14 Fungu Chawamba (6°10'S., 39°09'E.), a reef which dries

0.9m, lies about 2 miles WSW of Ras Shangani; it is steep-to

and can generally be identified. Several detached coral patches

lie within 1.2 miles of the reef.

5.15 North approach—Yambwa Ngome (6°00'S.,

39°07'E.) are two flat reefs located 3.5 miles offshore, 10 miles

NNW of Ras Shangani; they may be easily identified by the

discolored water over them.

5.15 Fawatu, an extensive reef which dries, is located on the W

side of the approach 1.5 miles S of Yambwa Ngome. The reef

is easily distinguished but must be approached with caution.

5.15 Jiddawi Shoal (6°04'S., 39°11'E.), a coral pinnacle with a

depth of 8.5m, lies in the approach to English Pass.

5.15 Seagull Shoal (6°05'S., 39°11'E.), a small shoal with a least

depth of 2.7m, lies in the fairway of English Pass 1.7 miles

SSE of Jiddawi Shoal; it is marked on its SE side by a lighted

buoy.

5.15 Chapani (6°08'S., 39°11'E.), Kibandiko, and Changa are

three islands that lie on an extensive reef which extend about 3

miles WNW from a position 2.2 miles NNE of Ras Shangani;

the E end of the reef is marked by a lighted buoy. These islands

lie within Zanzibar harbor limits.

5.15 English Pass (6°08'S., 39°12'E.), the pass generally used by

vessels approaching Zanzibar from N, lies between the coast

and the shoal extending E of Chapani. It has a least depth of
72 Sector 5. Tanzania—Ras Kanzi to Pangani Bay, including Zanzibar Island 

Pub. 171

11.3m and a least width of 0.2 mile between the 10m curve.

5.15 Range lights, in line bearing 168°, lead from the N to “the

narrows” ESE of Chapani, and lights, astern, bearing 042° lead

farther into the harbor area.

Zanzibar (6°10'S., 39°11'E.)

World Port Index No. 47050

5.16 The harbor at Zanzibar is an open roadstead located

off Ras Shangani (6°10'S., 39°11'E.), on the W side of the island. The harbor limits are indicated on the chart.

5.16 Tides—Currents.—MHWN tides rise 2.7m and MHWS

tides rise 3.9m. Tidal currents in South Pass run NNW and are

stronger on the flood than on the ebb. In English Pass, tidal currents run N and are stronger on the ebb than on the rising tide.

Vessels may enter or leave at any state of the tide.

5.16 Depths—Limitations.—In the designated anchorage N of

Ras Shangani, there is a least charted depth of 11m. The maximum vessel length permitted in the anchorage is 335m, with a

maximum beam of 33.5m and a maximum draft of 9.8m.

5.16 West Wharf, the main wharf, extends S from the S entrance

point of the dhow harbor. The wharf, which can accommodate

vessels up to 10,000 dwt, has depths alongside of 8.9m, decreasing to 5.4m at its S end. The wharf is exposed to prevailing onshore winds.

5.16 North Wharf, perpendicular to West Wharf, is located at the

entrance to the dhow harbor. The wharf has a maintained depth

of 5.4m along its whole length.

5.16 Aspect.—The white buildings of the town are visible for a

considerable distance. The following objects, with their position relative to Ras Shangani, are conspicuous:

1. The former British Residency, a white building with a

red roof and with a tower and a flagstaff at its S end—0.3

mile SE.

2. A radio mast, 64m high—0.5 mile ESE.

3. A clock tower on the government building—0.2 mile

NE.

4. A chimney, 29m high—0.7 mile NE.

5. Livingstone House—1 mile ENE.

5.16 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory and 24 hours advance notice should be given. Pilots may be contacted by VHF 24 hours.

Pilots embark southbound vessels off Seagull Shoal and northbound vessels off Mtwana (6°14'S., 39°11'E.). Vessels awaiting

pilots anchor in the vicinity of boarding places. The suggested

entry time is between 0600 and 1800.

5.16 Anchorage.—Good anchorage can be obtained, in 12 to

22m, either N or S of Ras Shangani, in any position with the

exception of the prohibited anchorage area. Naval vessels anchor or moor in any position reserved for them by the port officer. Mooring buoys, some belonging to the government and

others to lines of vessels calling at the port, are moored in various positions close N of the town.

5.16 Directions.—The principal approaches to the port of Zanzibar are through Southern Pass and through English Pass.

Zanzibar Island—Northwest Coast

5.17 Bet el Ras (6°07'S., 39°07'E.), on the E side of English Channel, is a low rocky point; the ruins of a large white

castellated palace are situated on the point.

5.17 Between Bet el Ras and Ras Uso wa Membe the 10m curve

is only about 0.3 mile off the coast, so that vessels can keep

near it and thus avoid the off-lying dangers.

5.17 Between Ras Uso wa Membe (5°54'S., 39°12'E.) and Ras

Nungwi, the N extremity of Zanzibar 12 miles NNE, the coast

is fronted by an extensive drying reef. Tumbatu Island is located on this reef and Mkokotoni Harbor lies within the reef.

5.17 Pale Hill (5°54'S., 39°15'E.) is conspicuous and lies at the

NW end of a ridge with a steep W face extending S; the ridge

rises gradually on its E side. The tops of the coconut palms and

other trees on Pale Hill rise to a height of 87m. Donge Hills,

119m high and covered with coconut palms, reach their summit 2.5 miles S of Pale Hill and are the highest part of the N

end of Zanzibar.

5.17 Tumbatu Island (5°49'S., 39°13'E.), with its S extremity 2.2

Zanzibar Harbor

Zanzibar—North Wharf
Sector 5. Tanzania—Ras Kanzi to Pangani Bay, including Zanzibar Island 73

Pub. 171

miles NNE of Ras Uso wa Membe, is low and flat, rising

slightly to the SW. The tops of the trees are from 18 to 30m

high, and the coast, except for a portion of the E side, is formed

of low and often overhanging cliffs from 3 to 18m high.

5.18 Ras Bwechano (5°51'S., 39°13'E.), the W extremity

of Tumbatu Island, is located about 1 mile NNW of Ras Kiyomoni, the S extremity of the island.

5.18 Ras Kinunduni, 4.5 miles NNE of Ras Bwechano, is the N

extremity of Tumbatu Island. Shoal water with a depth of 2.1m

at its extremity, extends 1.5 miles NNE from Ras Kinunduni.

5.18 Mwana Wa Mwana (5°46'S., 39°13'E.), a coral islet covered with dense scrub, lies on the reef extending N from Ras

Kinunduni; a light is situated on the NW extremity of the islet. 

5.18 Glenday Patches (5°55'S., 39°10'E.), comprised of numerous pinnacles of rock and sand, lie with the NW patch 2 miles

WSW of Ras Uso wa Membe. A lighted buoy marks the NW

extremity of Glenday Patches.

5.18 Shearwater Patches consists of numerous pinnacles, on a

bank 10 miles in length, lying 4 miles offshore between Ras

Uso wa Membe and Mwama wa Mwama.

5.18 Langdon Rocks (5°53'S., 39°07'E.), two rocks, with a depth

of 0.9m, lie 0.7 mile apart at the S extremity of Shearwater

Patches, 5 miles W of Ras Uso wa Membe.

5.18 Wright Rock, with a depth of 0.9m, lies 5 miles SW of the

light on Mwama wa Mwama. An isolated patch, with a depth

of 4.3m, lies 1.2 miles NE of Wright Rock. A dangerous wreck

lies between Wright Rock and the 4.3m patch.

5.18 Dalrymple Shoal (5°47'S., 39°06'E.), with a depth of 4.9m,

lies about 6.5 miles WSW of Mwama wa Mwama, at the N end

of a detached bank extending N from Shearwater Patches.

5.18 Nankivell Rock (5°43'S., 39°14'E.), with a depth of 5.5m,

lies 2.5 miles NNE of the light on Mwama wa Mwama.

5.18 Ras Nungwi (5°43'S., 39°18'E.), the N extremity of Zanzibar, is a low sandy point covered with dense scrub; the land rises gradually inland. Coconut palms grow in profusion on the

point.

5.18 Leven Bank (5°38'S., 39°18'E.) lies with its shallowest part

about 5.2 miles N of the light on Ras Nungwi. It affords good

temporary anchorage, in a least depth of 21m, when the winds

are light. 

5.19 Mkokotoni Harbor (5°50'S., 39°16'E.) can be entered from N or S. The S entrance lies between Ras Uso wa

Membe and Tumbatu Island; the N entrance lies between the

reef fringing the coast S of Ras Nungwi and that extending

from Mwana wa Mwana.

5.19 Tides—Currents.—In Mkokotoni Harbor, the general direction of the tidal current of the rising tide is S, and that of the

falling tide, N, but both tidal currents are much influenced by

the winds, and during the Southwest Monsoon, there is, at neaps, a continuous N current. The tidal currents are strongest off

Ras Mwanda (5°53'S., 39°13'E.).

5.19 Anchorage.—In the Southwest Monsoon, there is good anchorage W of Ras Nungwi, in the N approach to Mkokotoni

Harbor, in 18m, over sand, with the light on the point bearing

068°, distant nearly 3 miles.

5.19 An anchorage for a small vessel in the harbor, in 8m, mud, is

off Mkokotoni Village, with the S tangent of Tumbatu Island

bearing 283° and the E tangent of Popo Island bearing 008°.

5.19 For a large vesse,l a better berth is farther N, in 14.6m, mud,

with the S extremity of Tumbatu Island bearing 238° and the

NE tangent of Popo Island bearing 340°; here the tidal current

is not so strong.

5.19 Directions.—To enter Mkokotoni from the S channel, if the

buoys are in position, it is only necessary to pass between those

marking the bar, otherwise the eye and the chart are the guides,

as there are no ranges. After passing the bar bring the conspicuous Pale Hill, which is located about 2 miles ESE of Ras

Mwanda to bear 104° and steer for it, passing the sandbank on

Mmawali Sand at a distance of 0.4 mile. When Popo Island begins to open off Tumbatu, the center reef will be on the port

beam, in which case round it by eye, giving the visible part a

good berth, as it deepens very gradually; if the buoys are in position pass between them. After passing the red barrel buoy alter course to the ENE until Kigunguli Hill bears 043°, this

course then leads to the anchorage. Care must be taken to avoid

the reef that extends about 1 mile SSW of Makutani Islet.

5.19 The water is thick, concealing any shoal with more than

3.6m on it, and as the current is strong, care must be taken.

There is no swell and the bottom is generally soft.

5.19 To enter Mkokotoni Harbor from the N, from about 1.5 miles

off Ras Nungwi, steer for the lighthouse on Mwana Wa Mwana

on a bearing of 228° until Pale Hill, well open E of Popo Island, bears 182°. From this position, which is about 1 mile E of

Nankivell Rock, alter course for Pale Hill on that bearing and

maintain it until Kigunguli Hill bears 115°. A good lookout

should be maintained for the reef which extends from the coast

S of Ras Nungwi, and which can generally be seen. Course

should then be altered to 165°, keeping a sharp lookout for the

reef and spit extending NNE of Popo, which is not easily seen

and is marked by a buoy.

5.19 When Pale Hill, in line with the district officer’s house situated on the S shore of the harbor, bears about 183°, steer for it

on that range which is said to lead through the narrow channel

abreast the N end of Popo Island. 

5.19 When the E extremities of Popo open off each other, alter

course to pass about 0.3 mile from it and when the center of

Popo is abeam, all dangers have been passed and anchorage

can be chosen as desired. There is considerable swell at times

N of Popo, but it does not fetch home through the narrows to

the harbor.

5.19 As the tides in this harbor on the ebb and the flood do not always follow the channel, caution should be observed when entering or leaving Mkokotoni Harbor.

Dar es Salaam to Ras Nunge

5.20 From Ras Kankadya (6°44'S., 39°17'E.) to Ras Mbegani, 25 miles NW, the coast is chiefly sandy, indented by

creeks, and is backed by mangrove swamps or dense bush.

5.20 Numerous islands and dangers front this stretch of coast and

lie up to 6 miles offshore.

5.20 Bongoyo Island (6°42'S., 39°16'E.), located 1.2 miles N of Ras

Kankadya, presents a uniform appearance of stunted trees on cliffs

12m high. A sandy bay on its NE side appears white and distinctive in the morning. Pangavini Island (6°40'S., 39°14'E.), is a small

rocky islet located on a coral reef 1.5 miles NW of Bongoyo Island; the reef surrounding the islet dries 0.5m.

5.20 Mbudya Island, about 1 mile NE of Pangavini Island, is 18m
74 Sector 5. Tanzania—Ras Kanzi to Pangani Bay, including Zanzibar Island 

Pub. 171

high, lies on the NW part of an extensive drying reef; the W

side of the reef is moderately steep-to, but the E side has numerous off-lying patches and is dangerous to approach.

Mbudya Spit, with a least charted depth of 5.5m extends about

2 miles SE of the island.

5.20 Mbudya Patches, a number of small patches with depths of

5.5 to 9.1m, lie between 3 miles E and 3 miles NE of Mbudya

Island; these patches should be avoided.

5.20 Fungu Mkadya, with a least depth of 0.5m, lies about 1 mile

NW of Mbudya Island. A spit, with a dangerous rock on it extends 0.8 mile NW from the reef.

5.20 Fungu Yasin (6°36'S., 39°14'E.) is an extensive drying coral

reef, with a sandy islet on its NW extremity, located 1.5 miles

NNW of Fungu Mkadya. A ridge, with a least known depth of

5.5m, extends ESE to Mbudya Patches.

5.20 Msasani Bay is entered between Ras Kankadya (6°44'S.,

39°16'E.) and the SE extremity of Bongoyo Island, about 1.2

miles N. The bay affords good anchorage during either monsoon and is safe and easy of access from the SE.

5.20 Anchorage.—In the Northeast Monsoon, the best anchorage

is, in 14m, sand, W of the middle of Bongoyo Island, with its

NW extremity bearing 348°, distant about 0.8 mile.

5.20 During the Southwest Monsoon, an anchorage more to the

N, about 0.5 mile off the NW extremity of Bongoyo Island,

should be taken, or if preferred, in the S part of the bay, in

about 10m, with Ras Kankadya bearing 086°.

5.21 Kunduchi Harbor (6°40'S., 39°14'E.), the anchorage

SW of Mbudya Island, affords shelter during the Northeast

Monsoon for a vessel requiring temporary anchorage, although

that within Msasani Bay is preferable.

5.21 Anchorage.—Anchorage may be obtained during the Southwest Monsoon to the N of a 5.5m patch, in about 18m, with the

N extremity of Mbudya Island bearing 085° and the middle of

Pangavini Island 178°. Anchorage may also be taken up in a

similar depth with the W end of Mbudya Island bearing 020°

and the N end of Pangavini Island bearing 219°.

5.21 There is good anchorage SW of Fungu Yasin during either

monsoon, in 29m, opposite the middle of the reef, with the beacon bearing about 031°, distant 0.5 mile. The safest approach to

the anchorage is around the N end of the reef.

5.22 Mbweni Village (6°35'S., 39°08'E.) is rendered conspicuous by some white tombs and large mango trees.

5.22 Ukatani Reef (6°35'S., 39°11'E.), 2 miles W of the beacon

situated on Fungu Yasin, has a depth less than 2m.

5.22 Kitapumbe Reefs are two drying reefs about 1 mile apart located 3.2 miles NW of Ukatani Reef.

5.22 Mshingwi (6°27'S., 39°01'E.), a small coral reef, which

dries 3.3m, lies 6.5 miles NW of Kitapumbe Reefs. There are

depths of 16m close around the reef, and the sea always breaks

when the reef is covered.

5.22 Ras Lwale (6°27'S., 38°59'E.) is the W extremity of a spit, 4

miles in length, which parallels the coast. The spit is comprised

of sand and coral and is covered with brush.

5.22 Ras Mbegani is a low mangrove point located 1 mile W of

Ras Lwale.

5.22 Bagamoyo Roadstead (6°25'S., 38°55'E.) is entered between Ras Mbegani and Ras Nunge. The roadstead is shallow

for some distance from shore, but affords anchorage, in 7m to

9m.

5.22 Aspect.—The most conspicuous object at Bagamoyo is a

long white building, with a red roof and a tower at each end,

situated in the S part of the town, about 2.5 miles S of Ras

Nunge. A mission, surrounded by trees, is situated about 1 mile

NW of the white building and makes a good mark from seaward.

5.22 Anchorage.—Vessels of moderate draft should anchor, in

9m. There is a heavy swell in the anchorage during both monsoons.

Ras Nunge to Pangani Bay

5.23 Ras Nunge (6°24'S., 38°54'E.) is a mangrove-covered

point projecting well out from the coast.

5.23 From Ras Nunge to Ras Machuisi the coast trends in a NNW.

Ras Utondwe, a low sandy spit may be identified from N by its

light-colored sand.

5.23 Wami enters the sea 3.7 miles NNW of Ras Utondwe,

through a mangrove swamp. Between this river and Ras Machuisi the coast is low and swampy; mangroves fringe the

mouths of the numerous rivers and creeks, which enter the sea

along this stretch of coast.

5.23 Mbwakuni (6°22'S., 38°59'E.) is a drying reef lying 5.5

miles NE of Bagamoyo on the direct route from Zanzibar Harbor; the reef is steep-to.

5.23 Fungu Miko (6°15'S., 38°58'E.) are two reefs lying between

5.7 and 6.7 miles NNW of Mbwakuni. The sea generally

breaks on these reefs, which dry about 2m.

5.23 Winde Patches are two flat coral reefs, which usually break,

lying about 2.2 miles NW of Fungu Miko. The S reef, marked

by a buoy, dries 2m; the N reef dries 1m.

5.23 Wami Patches (6°06'S., 38°56'E.), consisting of eight separate coral patches, lie 6 miles N of Winde Patches; some of the

patches are awash and all are steep-to. These patches are dangerous, as the outflow from Wami and other rivers make the

water so thick that at high tide they cannot be distinguished.

5.23 The S extremity of Udoe Hill (6°10'S., 38°35'E.), bearing

264°, leads 1 mile S of Wami Patches. 

5.24 Ras Machuisi (5°57'S., 38°59'E.) is only a slight projection but it may be identified by a dense grove of trees standing on it. A reef, awash at LWS, lies near the edge of the coastal bank between 1 and 2 miles ENE of Ras Machuisi.

5.24 Pangani lies about 32 miles NNE of Ras Machuisi. The intervening coast is sandy to a position about 3 miles SSW of

Pangani where it becomes rocky with low cliffs.

5.24 Genda Genda (5°34'S., 38°39'E.) is a prominent isolated

mountain, 701m high, which is easily identified by its two

sharp peaks.

5.24 Mwamba Buiuni (5°53'S., 38°52'E.), close within the 10m

curve, dries 2.4m; it lies 5 miles NE of Ras Machuisi. Buiuni

Mdogo, 1.75 NE of Mwamba Buiuni, is an isolated reef, with a

rock, awash, at its W end; it is steep-to.

5.24 Mkwaja Patches (5°49'S., 38°55'E.), four small steep-to

coral reefs marked on the SE side by a buoy, lie 10 miles NE of

Ras Machuisi. The sea rarely breaks on these patches and they

are difficult to see. Mwamba Alek, with a least charted depth of

1.8m, lies 2 miles NE of Mkwaja Patches.
Sector 5. Tanzania—Ras Kanzi to Pangani Bay, including Zanzibar Island 75

Pub. 171

5.24 Kipumbwe Reefs lie with their S extremity about 14 miles S

of Pangani Bay. There is a deep navigable channel between the

outer and inner Kipumbwe Reefs, and farther N between the

reefs and the shore, it has smooth water, even in a strong monsoon. It is useful to coasting vessels when the reefs can be

plainly seen.

5.24 Fungu Datcha (5°33'S., 39°04'E.), a coral reef which always breaks heavily when it is not awash, lies 6.5 miles SSE of

Pangani Bay. A patch, with a least charted depth of 1.8m, lies

0.4 mile SW of Fungu Datcha.

5.24 Maziwi Island (5°30'S., 39°04'E.) is small, sandy, and covered with conspicuous casuarina trees.

5.24 There is fair anchorage W of Maziwi Island during either

monsoon, with more protection than in Pangani Bay. The water

is deep, but care must be taken not to anchor too close, as the

reef is very steep. In the Southwest Monsoon, a good berth is in

28m, sand, with the N edge of the reef bearing 055°, and Maziwi Island 090°. In the Northeast Monsoon, a better berth is farther S, in 31m, sand, with Maziwi Island bearing 058°.

5.25 Mwamba Mawe (5°26'S., 39°05'E.), a coral reef

which dries 1m, is located nearly 4 miles N of Maziwi in the

approach to Pangani Bay. The reef is moderately steep-to and

the sea generally breaks on it at half tide; when not breaking its

position is generally indicated by the green color of the water

over it. 

5.25 A shoal, with a depth of 3.7m, lies 0.5 mile N of Mwamba

Mawe; it seldom breaks.

5.25 Pangani (5°26'S., 38°59'E.) is located at the mouth of the

Pangani River, which flows into the head of Pangani Bay. The

port consists of a town and a very small, shallow, natural harbor.

5.25 The largest vessel that has entered the harbor was 76m long,

with a beam of 12.2m, and a draft of 3m. As a rule, a vessel

with a length of more than 70m and a draft of more than 3.9m

should not enter the river.
77

Pub. 171

6. 

Kenya and Somalia—Pangani Bay to Qooriga Kismaayo, including Pemba

6.0Additional chart coverage may be found in NGA/DLIS Catalog of Maps, Charts, and Related Products (Unlimited Distribution).

SECTOR 6 — CHART INFORMATION
79

Pub. 171

SECTOR 6 

KENYA AND SOMALIA—PANGANI BAY TO QOORIGA KISMAAYO, INCLUDING PEMBA

6.0 Plan.—This sector describes Pemba Channel, Pemba, and

the SE coast of Africa from Pangani Bay N to Qooriga Kimaayo, a distance of about 368 miles.

Pemba Channel 

6.1 Pemba Channel (5°06'S., 39°21'E.) lies between

Pemba and the reefs and islets that front the mainland shore of

Africa. The channel has a least width of 18 miles between Ras

Kigomasha (4°53'S., 39°41'E.) and the mainland NW; the

channel is deep throughout.

6.1 Tides—Currents.—The N coastal current divides and follows the E and W shores of Pemba Island with a velocity that

varies from about 1 knot in the Northeast Monsoon to 3 knots

in the Southwest Monsoon. Heavy tide rips occur where the

current divides, especially when the ebb current runs out of

Upembe Passage. Tide rips and occasionally overfalls occur off

Matumbe Makupa (off the SW side of the island) and for a distance of 2 miles N. The tidal currents run strongly in practically all the gaps that form entrances to the harbors.

6.1 There is a constant N current in Pemba Channel. In mid

channel its direction is that of the axis of the channel and its velocity varies from 2 to 4 knots in the Southwest Monsoon to 0

to 3 knots in the Northeast Monsoon. Near Pemba Island there

is less current than in mid-channel, and the current, when at its

greatest strength, frequently causes ripples that resemble

breakers. The prevailing current is influenced by the tidal current, but it is only near the NW coast of Pemba Island that it is

overcome and reversed by the S flood current. Off Uvinje Island, near the middle of the W coast of Pemba Island, the tidal

currents meet and cause a confused sea that is sometimes dangerous to boats.

6.1 The current is very slightly felt inside the reefs and along the

shore, but is sufficiently strong to accelerate the E tidal current

through the Wasin Channel to velocities between 1.5 and 2.5

knots at springs, while the opposite tidal current, which is that

of the rising tide, either neutralizes or slightly overcomes it.

6.1 Strong tide rips are encountered off the outlying islands and

reefs.

6.1 About 10 miles offshore, from Mombasa to the Kilifi River,

the current runs NE at rates from 2 to 4 knots during the Southwest Monsoon, and from 1 to 2 knots in the Northeast Monsoon, but with less strength inshore near the reef.

6.1 In the vicinity of Ras Chiambone, or between it and Lamu

the NE and SW currents generally meet during the Northeast

Monsoon, and produce a current setting to SE. The limits of the

place of meeting depend on the state of the monsoon and other

circumstances.

6.1 The alternate monsoons are strong in the neighborhood of

the Juba Islands and Kismaayo, and the currents run with them.

From November to April, NE winds prevail and there is then a

SW current of 2 knots, usually at its strongest in January and

February.

6.1 Observations in January, 1895 extending over a week

showed that at 22 miles E of Kismasay Island the current had

continuous velocities of 3.5 to 4 knots in a 250° direction.

6.1 From April to November the winds and current are reversed,

the latter running NE, or nearly parallel with the trend of the

coast, with a velocity of 2 to 3.5 knots.

6.1 Directions.—The E side of the channel is safer than the W

side, as the reefs extend but a short distance from Pemba Island, less current is experienced, and the land is nearer as a

guide to the navigator. On the other hand, Pemba Island is frequently enveloped in rain squalls and clouds when the W side

of the channel is clear.

6.1 A vessel approaching from the N and being able to make

Pemba Island by daylight is advised to steer for Ras Kigomasha, the NW extremity, and to keep along the Pemba shore

as far as Mesali Island about 23 miles S of Ras Kigomasha.

Then make good a course to pass 1 mile W of Mwana wa

Mwana Island, allowing leeway according to the monsoon.

6.1 With the aid of Ras Kigomasha Light there is nothing to prevent a vessel approaching from the N from passing through

Pemba Channel by night if the weather is tolerably clear. Even

should the light not be seen when expected, the island may be

approached from that direction at a moderate speed, sounding

continuously, though it may be more prudent under such circumstances to keep well outside for the night and run in at daylight.

6.1 A steamer proceeding N from Zanzibar through Pemba

Channel should shape a course direct for Ras Kigomasha from

abreast of Mwana wa Mwana Island, this allows for the strong

N current and leads clear through this channel.

Pemba

6.2 Pemba (5°10'S., 39°46'E.) lies 23 miles NNE of Zanzibar Island and 21 miles E of the African mainland. The numerous hills do not exceed 91m in height and are covered with

luxuriant vegetation.

6.2 Caution.—A good lookout should be kept when entering

any of the anchorages in Pemba Island, as it is possible that

small uncharted dangers may exist. The best time for entering

is when the sun is in a favorable position; but the water is

sometimes muddy, and the shoals under such conditions are

not always discernible. The bearings of mangrove points must

be used with caution, as the points themselves are liable to extend outward over time.

Pemba—East Coast

6.3 The E side of Pemba Island is rather low, and should

be approached with care at night, but there does not appear to

be any danger beyond the fringing coast reef, which is steep-to

and nowhere extends so much as 1 mile offshore. At 2 miles

from the shore no soundings have anywhere been obtained

with the hand lead.

6.3 Ras Upembe (5°28'S., 39°43'E.), the SE extremity of Pemba
80 Sector 6. Kenya and Somalia—Pangani Bay to Qooriga Kismaayo, including Pemba 

Pub. 171

Island, is a bold, cliffy point. It is clear of bushes near its extremity and rises from an elevation of 4.5 to 6.1m near the sea

to 22m at a distance of about 0.2 mile inland. A small sand

beach on its W side is conspicuous from the SW. Between Ras

Upembe and Mtangani, a narrow inlet 7 miles NE, the coast

consists of overhanging coral cliffs 5m high, thickly covered

with trees; the sea always breaks on the coastal reef.

6.3 Mchengangazi (5°06'S., 39°52'E.) is an inlet 17 miles N of

Mtangani. The coast consists of low overhanging coral cliffs

covered with trees and bushes to within a few meters of their

edges; numerous small creeks flow into the sea along this area.

6.3 Ras Kiuyu (4°53'S., 39°52'E.), the NE extremity of Pemba,

is a rocky promontory covered with bush about 6m high.

Rocky ground, with coral heads, extend about 1 mile offshore

1.2 miles SE of the point. These coral heads do not break and it

is advisable to give the area a berth of at least 1.5 miles.

Pemba—South and West Coasts

6.4 Between Ras Upembe and Mkoani (5°22'S.,

39°39'E.), a village situated near the coast 8 miles NW, the SW

coast of Pemba is fronted by an extensive detached reef, which

dries in places; the sea always breaks on the outer edge of this

steep-to reef.

6.4 Panza (5°28'S., 39°38'E.) is the largest and farthest SE of a

group of islands, located on the reef described above.

6.4 Ras Miugani, the S extremity of Panza, is a bold coral cliff

12m high, lying 0.1 mile within the edge of the reef; there is a

remarkable white sand beach on its W side.

6.4 Matumbe Makupa (5°24'S., 39°34'E.), marked by a light, is

situated 6.7 miles NW of Ras Miugani; it is the farthest W of

the group of islands on the above drying reef.

6.5 Port Mkoani (5°21'S., 39°39'E.) is situated abreast

the village of that name. The port contains a small natural harbor.

6.5 Tides—Currents.—A current of less than 1 knot sets N during the Southwest Monsoon, and S during the Northeast Monsoon. Tidal currents set S on the flood and N on the ebb,

attaining a maximum velocity of about 1 knot.

6.5 Depths—Limitations.—Vessels up to 6,000 dwt can be accommodated, but there is a limiting draft of 4.9m in the fairway. The main wharf is on the S side of the jetty with a

maintained depth of 8m along its whole length. The secondary

wharf is on the N side of the jetty with a maintained depth

alongside of 8m. It has been reported (1992) that a long causeway, with a dredged depth of 9.5m alongside its head, has been

constructed here.

6.5 Aspect.—The village of Mkoani is conspicuous from seaward. A red beacon, stands on a rock with a least depth of

1.8m, about 0.3 mile NW of the front range light.

6.5 Pilotage.—Pilots are available from, and boarded in, Unguja, Zanzibar. Vessels without local knowledge are advised to

use a pilot as the aids to navigation are unreliable.

6.5 Anchorage.—Vessels can anchor seaward of the jetty, in a

depth of 12m, sand. There is room for only one vessel. This anchorage obstructs the approach to the jetty and is exposed to N

and NW winds. 

6.5 Vessels can also anchor S of the outer limits of the channel,

in the vicinity of the fairway lighted buoy.

6.6 Kingoji Bay is entered between a point 2.2 miles

NNE of Mkoani, and Ras Kingoji (5°17'S., 39°40'E.) 2 miles

farther N. Numerous dangers encumber the bay and its approaches and restrict the space available for anchoring.

6.6 Mtipe (5°19'S., 39°38'E.), a coral reef which dries 0.3m, lies

2 miles SW of Ras Kingoji.

6.6 As there are no definite marks available, the best time to enter Kingoji Bay is in the afternoon with the sun astern.

6.6 Large vessels may anchor in the entrance to the bay, about

0.7 mile SSW of Ras Kingoji, in depths of 20 to 22m. Smaller

vessels may anchor farther SE, in depths of 11 to 13m; local

knowledge, or prior examination by boat, is essential for taking

up berth in this inner anchorage.

6.6 Between Ras Kingoji and Njao Gap (4°58'S., 39°40'E.), the

W coast of Pemba is fronted by an almost continuous chain of

islands on drying reefs, broken only by a few narrow, deep

gaps in the reefs. The W coast of these islands lie on the outer

edges of the reefs and as the reefs are steep-to they may be

closely approached in safety in clear weather.

6.6 The islands, in general, are low, flat, covered with trees and

bushes, and are without any conspicuous features. The larger

islands are partly under cultivation.

6.6 Within the chain of islands and reefs the coast is irregular

and is indented, with numerous islets, reefs, and shoals, but

there are several harbors which provide sheltered anchorages.

The harbors are connected between the inner islands and reefs,

but the anchorages farther N are better approached through the

gaps in the outer reefs.

6.6 The tidal currents run strongly in all the gaps between the islands except in the vicinity of Mesali Gap (5°14'S., 39°36'E.)

where the main tidal current flows S of Mesali Island.

6.7 Chake Chake (5°15'S., 39°46'E.) (World Port Index

No. 47020) is situated at the head of Chake Chake Bay. The

port consists of a town and a small natural harbor.

6.7 The approach may be made through Owen Channel or

through the passage between Mesali Island and Ras Kingoji.

There are general depths of 18 to 40m in the approach, however, there are patches of 4.5m and less.

6.7 Vessels of all sizes may enter Chake Chake Bay. A stone jetty which can be used by boats at high water, projects from

shore at the S side of town. Lighters are available for loading

and unloading cargo in the anchorage. The stone causeway has

collapsed at its seaward end.

6.7 Chake Chake Bay is encumbered by numerous reefs and

shoals, however, there are large clear areas which provide good

anchorage.

6.7 Landmarks in the approach are Ras Tundaua (5°15'S.,

39°41'E.) 3 miles N of Ras Kingoji which has a large white

house and flagstaff on its E side; a large bungalow stands 0.1

mile inland. A monument stands on a low point 2.5 miles E of

Ras Rundaua.

6.7 Mesali Island is covered with dense jungle; it shows out well

from the land in the background when seen from any direction.

6.7 The Mkumbuu Peninsula, forming the N side of Chake

Chake Bay, is of uniform height. On its S side is Dongo Kundu,

a conspicuous projection that is wedge shaped and formed of

bright red sandstone. A patch of red cliffs, 0.5 mile NW of

Dongo Kundu, is conspicuous in some lights.

6.7 In calm weather or during the Northeast Monsoon, tempo-
Sector 6. Kenya and Somalia—Pangani Bay to Qooriga Kismaayo, including Pemba 81

Pub. 171

rary anchorage may be taken on the bank about 1.2 miles S of

Mesali Island, in depths of 10 to 14m.

6.7 There is anchorage in Ngelema Bay with Ras Kingoji bearing 230° and the W summit of Ngelema, 30m high, bearing

125°, in a depth of 14.6m.

6.7 There is anchorage, in 29m, about 1.2 miles NW of Ras

Tundaua and, in depths of 12 to 18m, 1.5 miles N of the same

point.

6.7 Pilotage is not compulsory for Chake Chake Bay; entry is restricted to daylight only. Pilots can only be embarked at Zanzibar.

6.8 Port Cockburn (5°12'S., 39°43'E.), a spacious and

sheltered harbor considerably encumbered with reefs and

shoals, affords good anchorage in some of its indentations. It

may be entered from S by Owen Channel, running between the

W extremity of the Mkumbuu Peninsula and Uta wa Limani, a

reef extending about 5.2 miles N from Mesali Gap; from W by

Kokota Gap, lying between the N extremity of Uta wa Limani

and Kokota Island, about 0.5 mile NW; and from N by Funzi

Channel, lying between Kokota Island and Funzi Island, about

1 mile E.

6.8 Range beacons situated on the W side of Kokota Island, in

line bearing 091°, lead through the center of the gap in the outer reef. Another range is situated on the E side of Kokota Island

and when in range 341° leads through the S part of Funzi

Channel.

6.8 Port George (5°06'S., 39°40'E.), similar to Port Cockburn,

is a sheltered harbor considerably encumbered with reefs and

shoals. It affords good anchorage for vessels of moderate draft.

The white house of the Provincial Commissioner on a bluff is

conspicuous.

6.8 Port George may be entered from S by Funzi Channel; from

W by Uvinje Gap, running through the outer reef and N of

Kokota Island; and from N by a channel running S from Port

Kish Kash.

6.8 Port Kish Kash is entered from W through the outer reef by

Fundo Gap, situated about 8 miles N of Uvinje Gap. The passage running S to Port George is not recommended.

6.9 Wete (5°04'S., 39°43'E.) (World Port Index No.

47025), the small port area of Wete Harbor in the NE corner of

Port George, is contained NE of a line joining Ras Ukenjwi

(5°02'S., 39°40'E.) and Ras Bundani, about 2.7 miles SSE. The

town of Wete is situated about 0.5 mile within the N shore of

the harbor. A pier projects from the shore abreast the town. 

6.9 Depths—Limitations.—The maximum size vessel that can

be accommodated is 73m in length with a draft of 7.6m. Entrance and departure is restricted to daylight only. The approach channel via Uvinje Gap narrows to about 0.1 mile in

width.

6.9 Aspect.—A light is shown from a concrete column, black

and white bands, on the head of the pier.

6.9 A red conical buoy is moored about 1.5 miles W of Ras

Tungwe, and marks the SE side of the channel leading to Wete

Harbor.

6.9 Anchorage beacons are situated about 0.5 mile E of Ras

Tungwe. The front beacon, with a white cross topmark, is in

range 163° with the rear beacon, surmounted by a white triangular topmark. The range may be obscured by bushes.

6.9 Port Kish Kash (5°02'S., 39°40'E.), available only to small

vessels with local knowledge, is a small harbor greatly obstructed by reefs but affords anchorage in its SE part.

6.9 Port Kiuyu (4°58'S., 39°41'E.) has ample depths and is a

more convenient harbor than Port Kish Kash. Port Kiuyu is entered from W through the outer reef by Njao Gap, situated

about 2.7 miles N of Fundu Gap. Anchorage may be taken 0.7

mile SE of the NE extremity of Njao, in a depth of 22m.

Pemba—North Coast

6.10 The N coast of Pemba is low and wooded and presents a uniform outline. Ras Kigomasha (4°53'S., 39°41'E.) the

N extremity of the island, is the only point that can be recognized. The point is rocky and, in addition to the lighthouse, has

a clump of trees about 18.3m high on it.

6.10 Foul ground, with depths of 7.3m near its outer extremity,

extends 9 miles offshore in places and a bank with depths less

than 100m extends as much as 13 miles N of the coast; little

current is felt on this bank.

6.10 Pemba Knolls, consisting of numerous reefs, lies on the foul

ground fronting the N coast of Pemba; some of these reefs dry.

6.10 Funguni (4°51'S., 39°46'E.), about 4.5 miles ENE of Ras

Kigomasha, is a large sand bank which dries 2m; it is one of

the reefs on Pemba Knolls.

6.10 Kundeni, which dries 1m, and Punga-Punge, which dries, lie

1.5 miles NW and 1.5 miles NE, respectively, from Funguni.

6.10 Msuka Bay (4°54'S., 39°43'E.) is a deep indentation in the

coastal reef 2 miles E of Ras Kigomasha. The best time to enter

is at LW when the reefs and shoals are visible.

6.10 Good anchorage may be obtained in Msuka Bay, even during

the Northeast Monsoon, with Ras Kigomasha Light bearing

285° distant 2.2 miles, in a depth of 11m. If the anchorage is

approached from the SW, course should not be altered to round

Ras Kigomasha until Ras Kiuyu bears 112°.

6.10 Ras Kiuyu (4°53'S., 39°52'E.), the NE extremity of Pemba

Island, was previously described in paragraph 6.3.

Kenya—Pangani Bay to Tanga

6.11 Between Pangani Bay (5°26'S., 39°01'E.) and Ras

Nyamaku, the coast of the mainland is sandy, with occasional

small coral cliffs; the land inland is well wooded. The coastal

reef is fronted by a chain of large reefs which lie up to 4 miles

offshore.

6.11 Between Ras Nyamaku (5°07'S., 39°08'E.) and Ras Kazone,

4 miles NNW, the coast is fringed by mangroves.

6.11 Ras Kazone (5°04'S., 39°08'E.), the S entrance point to Tanga Bay, is cliffy and covered with vegetation.

6.11 Briton Shoal (5°23'S., 39°06'E.) lies 3.2 miles offshore and

has a least known depth of 7.3m.

6.11 South Head Reef, a narrow reef of sand and coral, which partially dries, lies with its S extremity about 1 mile N of Briton

Shoal. The reef extends 4 miles NNE and are parallel with the

shore.

6.11 Fungu Tongone (5°17'S., 39°08'E.) is a reef which dries in

its N part. A shoal spit, which dries in places, extends 1.7 miles

S from Tongone and connects it to South Head Reef. A sandy

islet, 6m high, is located on the W edge of the N part of Fungu

Tongone.
82 Sector 6. Kenya and Somalia—Pangani Bay to Qooriga Kismaayo, including Pemba 

Pub. 171

6.11 The Karange Islands are a chain of narrow islands lying on

an extensive drying reef which on its E side is steep-to; the S

extremity of this reef lies 1.5 miles NNE of the sandy islet on

Fungu Tongone.

6.11 Yambe Island (5°07'S., 39°10'E.) 2.5 miles N of the N island of the Karange Islands, lies about 0.7 mile offshore; it is

encircled by a reef.

Tanga (5°05'S., 39°07'E.)

World Port Index No. 47030

6.12 Tanga, situated on the S side of Tanga Bay, is the second principal port of Tanzania. It comprises a deep water jetty

for bulk carriers, an outer anchorage in Tanga Bay and an inner

anchorage abreast the town. The town of Tanga, the administrative center of the District of Tanga, is situated about 1 mile

SW of Ras Kazone.

6.12 Depths—Limitations.—Tanga Bay may be entered by

Southern Channel, which is formed between Yambe Island and

Niule Reef; it has a least depth of 7.9m, and is available for

vessels of moderate draft. Ship Channel, between Niule Reef

and Fungu Nyama, is the principal entrance to Tanga Bay; it

has depths of more 18.3m. A buoy is moored on the S extremity of the shoal water extending S from Funga Nyama.

6.12 An L-shaped deep-water jetty projects 0.3 mile ENE from

the shore, 0.3 mile SE of Ras Kazone. It will accommodate

vessels of 30,000 dwt, with lengths up to 200m and drafts of

10m. It has been reported (1994) that this jetty is in an extreme

state of disrepair and should not be used. Within the harbor are

two lighterage wharves, with depths alongside from 2.4 to 3m.

Ro-ro vessels, with a maximum draft of 4m, may berth at the

new lighterage quay in the E end of the harbor.

6.12 Aspect.—The coast in the vicinity of Tanga is low, but if the

weather is clear, the Bondei Mountains, about 23 miles inland,

will be conspicuous. Mlinga, the most conspicuous of them, is

a three peaked hill, the middle and highest peak of which is

1,068m above the sea.

6.12 Mhinduro, a double-peaked mountain 1,033m, in height is

also conspicuous in certain lights, and some of the distant

peaks of this range must be nearly 3,048m high. During the

Southwest Monsoon, the mountains are frequently obscured by

haze, or perhaps only the easternmost of them will be dimly

seen, but during the Northeast Monsoon they are generally

clear.

6.12 At 17 miles N of Tanga and about 6 miles inland are three

rounded hills, nearly always visible from seaward; Kilulu, the

northernmost, is 267m high. Farther to the N are two isolated

conical mountains 15 miles NW of Wasin. Jombo, the more

distant, is 470m high; Mrima is truncated and 321m high. Both

are visible from Pemba.

6.12 The land elsewhere is low and flat, with the exception of the

Amboni Hills, about 4 miles NW of Tanga, which serves well

to mark its position. These hills, 151m high and densely wooded, are rounded and present no defined summit, but there is a

well marked saddle between the two southernmost and highest

points, which serves as one of the range marks for entering.

6.12 The several low and densely wooded islands off this part of

the coast are sometimes difficult to distinguish from the mainland, but with any haze over the land, they stand out well and

distinct.

6.12 Ras Kazone is cliffy and covered with vegetation. About 0.5

mile to the S of the point a patch of red cliff shows very distinctly with the sun in the E. 

6.12 A conspicuous house stands on Ras Kazone. A conspicuous

hospital is situated about 0.8 mile SW of Ras Kazone. A Post

Office Tower, marked by an obstruction light, is situated 0.5

mile SW of the hospital. 

6.12 A fertilizer plant, with a conspicuous chimney, is situated

close SW of the foot of the jetty.

6.12 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory. Deep draft vessels are

met at the entrance to Ship Channel, other vessels are met 1

mile SE of Ulenge Beacon. A pilot ladder is required on the

port side during the Northeast Monsoon, and on the starboard

side during the Southwest Monsoon.

6.12 Ships should report their ETA through Mombasa Coast Radio Station. Entry into the inner harbor is permitted during daylight hours except at the discretion of the pilot.

6.12 Signals.—A signal station is situated immediately below

Ras Kazone Rear Range Light Structure. Signals are exhibited

to indicate if the inner channel to the harbor is clear. Ras Kazone Signal Station keeps a 24-hour VHF watch on VHF channel 16; the working channel is VHF channel 12.

6.12 The following is a schedule of traffic signals displayed at the

signal station on Ras Kazone:

1. A black flag by day or three red lights, vertically disposed, by night—entry prohibited.

2. A black ball by day or three lights, white, red, white,

vertically disposed, by night—departure prohibited.

6.12 Anchorage.—Vessels of all classes may anchor in Tanga

Bay, in depths of 11 to 18m. The inner harbor provides safe anchorage for vessels up to 180m in length and a draft of 8.2m.

6.12 Directions.—The port should if possible be made in the

morning as in the afternoon the sun causes inconvenience and

the range marks are not conspicuous. Bring Ulenge Light to

bear 319° and then follow this range until the Ras Kazone light

structures are in range 266°. Follow the latter range until clear

of Ulenge Reef, when anchorage may be taken as convenient.

If going into the harbor, from S of Ulenge Reef, steer about

285°, with Kwawa Reef Light ahead until clear of the shoals E

Tanga Harbor
Sector 6. Kenya and Somalia—Pangani Bay to Qooriga Kismaayo, including Pemba 83

Pub. 171

of Ras Kazxone, then steer W to pass about 0.2 mile S of Kwawa Reef Light and on to the ranges for the inner harbor.

6.12 Caution.—A prohibited area extends about 0.3 mile ENE

from the head of the inner harbor. No craft may enter the area

except with the written permission of the Harbor Authority.

Kenya—Tanga to Mombasa

6.13 Between Ras Kwawa (5°00'S., 39°10'E.), the N entrance point of Tanga Bay, and Ras Rashid, the coast is fronted

by reefs and islands which lie up to 11 miles offshore. The

coast is indented by several inlets and a number of streams

flow into the sea in this area.

6.13 Mwamba Wamba (4°58'S., 39°15'E.), which partially dries,

lies 6 miles NE of Ras Kwawa; its E side is steep-to.

6.13 Mwamba Shundo, a reef 0.5 mile NNE of Mwamba Wamba,

is moderately steep-to; its N part dries 0.3m. An area of foul

ground about 1 mile in extent, lies 0.5 mile N of Mwamba

Shundo.

6.13 Kwale Bay (5°00'S., 39°09'E.), formed close N of Ras Kwawa, provides well sheltered anchorage, in depths of 9 to 22m.

Kwale Island, consisting mostly of mangrove swamps, forms

the NE side of Kwale Bay. A rocky islet and some 2m high

rocks, lie on a reef extending 0.35 mile S of Kwale Island.

6.13 Manza Bay, entered between the NE extremity of Kwale Island and the S extremity of the Boma Peninsula, 1 mile N, has

depths from 9 to 20m. The depths in the entrance of the bay are

from 10.4 to 12.8m, over a width of 0.2 mile.

6.13 Kwale Bay and Manza Bay may be approached from Tanga

Bay, by passing inland of Fungu Nyama and Mwamba Wamba.

A N approach to these bays may be made by passing N of

Mwamba Kitugamue, and then W of this reef.

6.13 Ras Kilifi (4°47'S., 39°13'E.) is situated 13 miles NNE of

Ras Kwawa. Some prominent mountains are located W of Ras

Kilifi and are the first to be seen from seaward in clear weather.

6.13 Mount Jombo (4°26'S., 39°12'E.) and Mount Mrima

(4°28'S., 39°16'E.) are isolated conical mountains rising to

468m and 303m high, respectively. Mount Jombo is very sharp

when bearing N of 286°; S of this bearing it becomes flat and

not clearly defined. Mount Mrima is more truncated.

6.13 From Ras Kilifi to Ras Rashid, the coast is low and wellwooded, consisting of low rocky cliffs alternating with sandy

beaches bordered by mangroves and fringing reefs.

6.13 The coast in this area recedes to form a bay, which is encumbered with numerous islands, reefs, and shoal patches.

6.14 Wasin Island (4°40'S., 39°22'E.) is the largest of the

islands in the above mentioned bay. Pungutiayu, marked by a

light, is located 2 miles S from the SE extremity of Wasin; it

stands out prominently against the land when seen from S. Tide

rips and overfalls form off the reefs E of Pungutiayu, causing

large and confused seas during strong winds.

6.14 Ship Shoal (4°39'S., 39°27'E.), with a least known depth of

5.5m, consists of several shoals lying about 2.7 miles ENE of

the SE extremity of Wasin Island. A depth of 2.7m is charted

1.5 miles SW of Ship Shoal.

6.14 Wasin Channel is formed between Wasin Island and the

mainland between Ras Wasin (4°39'S., 39°24'E.) and Kisimani

3 miles W.

6.14 Shimoni is located midway between Ras Wasin and Kisimani; a flagstaff fronts the town. Pilotage is compulsory at Shimoni for vessels of 61m in length and over. Pilots should be

ordered in advance and are normally picked up at Mombasa.

6.14 The recommended anchorage, in a depth of 13m, lies about

0.4 mile offshore, with the town of Wasin, on Wasin Island,

bearing about 200°. To the E of this position, the swell is felt

during the Southwest Monsoon.

6.14 Ras Rashid (4°37'S., 39°24'E.), the S entrance point to Funzi Bay, is located about 1.5 miles NNE of Ras Wasin; the point

is fronted by a reef.

6.15 Funzi Bay (4°36'S., 39°25'E.) is entered between Ras

Rashid and Ras Kanda, about 3 miles NNE. Ras Kanda is

marked by a conspicuous clump of trees 38m high. The shores

of the bay are bordered with mangroves and a mangrove

swamp fills its head. The bay is in large part occupied by a

bank with less than 5.5m. M’dua, a detached reef which dries

0.6m, lies in the SW part of the bay, about 0.6 mile NNE of Ras

Rashid. M’Kame, a reef which dries from 0.6 to 0.9m, lies

about 1.7 miles SW of Ras Kanda. Sheltered anchorage may be

obtained, in about 8.2m, sand, between M’dua and M’kame.

Anchorage can also be obtained farther out, in 10 to 12m,

about 1 mile ENE of Ras Rashid.

6.15 At the time of flood, the current enters Funzi Bay with force.

6.15 Between Ras Kanda (4°35'S., 39°26'E.) and Chale Point, 10

miles NNE, the coast is rocky and fringed with reefs.

6.15 A white beacon stands on the coast 6.7 miles NNE of Ras

Kanda; a hospital comprised of a group of white buildings with

red roofs lies W of the beacon.

6.15 Wimbi Reefs (4°32'S., 39°30'E.) extend NNE for a distance

of 2.7 miles from a position 3.2 miles NNE of Ras Kanda. The

reefs comprise four detached patches with depths of less than

2m. These reefs lie parallel to the coast.

6.15 Chale Island (4°27'S., 39°32'E.), attached to Chale Point,

close N, by a reef, is remarkable because of its high trees. A

light marks the S end of the island.

6.15 Chale Reef, which dries 1.2m, extends 1.7 miles SSE of

Chale Island.

6.16 From Chale Point, the coast extends NNE 23 miles to

Ras Mwa Kisengo, the S entrance point to the port of Mombasa. The intervening coast is, in general, low and wooded with

overhanging cliffs, coral points and sandy beaches.

6.16 A detached drying reef fronts the coast and lies from 0.5 to

0.9 mile offshore; it extends NNE for a distance of 11.7 miles

from a position E of Chale Point. A boat passage lies within

this narrow reef.

6.16 A radio tower, 23m high and marked by obstruction lights,

stands near the coast 8.2 miles NNE of Chale Point. Seven conspicuous evenly-separated beach hotels stand along the coastline on each side of the radio tower, between 7.5 and 10 miles

distant from Chale Point.

6.16 Black Cliff Point (4°11'S., 39°38'E.), a slight projection, has

a prominent cliff face 8m high. The point lies at the foot of a

hill, which is 32m high to the top of the bushes; a beacon

stands on the summit of the hill.

6.16 Shimba Hills lie about 10 miles inland between Chale Point

and Ras Mwa Kisengo; they rise to a height of 449m.

6.16 Mombasa Gap (4°04'S., 39°41'E.) separates Shimba Hills

from a flat range to the N. The gap does not open until it bears
84 Sector 6. Kenya and Somalia—Pangani Bay to Qooriga Kismaayo, including Pemba 

Pub. 171

less than 265° when it becomes a conspicuous landmark.

6.16 Tanglia (4°09'S., 39°35'E.), 129m high, is the highest summit

of a range of hills lying about midway between Shimba Hills and

the coast. A beacon stands at an elevation of 106m on the NE side

of Tanglia and is visible when bearing less than 280°.

6.16 A detached rounded summit 104m high lies nearly 1.2 miles

N of Tanglia; this summit is a good mark when visibility makes

distant objects difficult to identify.

Mombasa (4°04'S., 39°41'E.)

World Port Index No. 47100

6.17 Mombasa, the principal port of Kenya, is also the

main sea outlet for Uganda. The port is entered between a

break in the reef between Ras Mwa Kisenge and Ras Mkuungombe, 2.5 miles NE. The port comprises Kilindini Harbor,

Port Reitz and Mombasa Harbor, Port Tudor, and all the tidal

waters around Mombasa Island. The port limit on the seaward

side is bounded by a circle with a radius of 3 miles from the

Ras Serani rear range light.

6.17 Plans are in the works for a new terminal W of Kipevu. This

terminal will supposedly double the port’s handling capability.

Phase I should be operational by 2013. There is also a plan to

construct an additional berth, to be designated as Berth No. 19,

at the main container terminal at Kipevu. 

6.17 Winds—Weather.—The Northeast Monsoon prevails during the months of December to March and the Southwest Monsoon during the months of May to September. During the

intervening months the wind gradually changes through E.

Weather conditions rarely interfere with port operations, however, during the monsoon seasons, with strong winds, boat traffic and lighter operations may be inconvenienced. It has been

reported (1994) that strong NE winds may make it difficult for

vessels to leave the mooring buoys.

6.17 Tides—Currents.—In Kilindini Harbor, the MHWN are

2.4m and in Mombasa Harbor MHWN are 2.3m.

6.17 The tidal currents set obliquely across the entrance channel,

but within the entrance, they follow the direction of the channel. In the inner part of the harbor, between Ras Kilindini and

Ras Kikaangoni, it is reported that various eddies exist at certain stages of the tide.

6.17 In the E arm, both incoming and outgoing tidal currents attain a velocity of from 2.5 to 3 knots at springs and have about

an equal duration.

6.17 The incoming current in Port Kilindini has a velocity of 3 to

4 knots at springs and 2.5 knots at neaps; the outgoing current

varies from 3 knots at springs to 1.5 knots at neaps.

6.17 In Port Reitz, both currents run about 1.5 knots at springs

and 1 knot at neaps.

6.17 During the Southwest Monsoon, a N current of up to 5 knots

may be experienced at the harbor entrance.

6.17 Depths—Limitations.—The approach channel through to,

and including the turning basin in Kilindini Harbor was

dredged to a depth of 15m in 1994. 

6.17 The old port area of Mombasa is located E of Mombasa Island. This area is now only used by dhows; coastal vessels up

to 53m long; and bulk cement vessels up to 145m long, with a

maximum draft of 7.9m. The Nyali Bridge, which connects the

E side of Mombasa Island with Ras Kisauni, has a vertical

clearance of 11m at its highest point. 

6.17 Berthing information for Kilindini Harbor and Port Reitz is

given in accompanying table titled Mombasa—Berthing Information.

Port Authority Kenya

www.kpa.co.ke

Mombasa—Berthing Information

Berth Length Depth Remarks

Kilindini Harbor

No. 1 167m 9.75m Cruise ships.

No. 2 167m 9.75m Cruise ships.

No. 3 167m 9.75m

No. 4 167m 9.75m

No. 5 167m 9.75m

No. 6 167m 9.75m

No. 7 167m 9.75m

No. 8 167m 9.75m

No. 9 167m 9.75m Bulk molassas and bulk soda ash.

No. 10 167m 10.36m

Mbaraki Quay 316m 10.1m

Bulk molassas, cement, and vegetable oil.

Vessels have a minimum draft of 10.25m

and a maximum draft of 10.97m.

Lighterage Wharf 411m —
Sector 6. Kenya and Somalia—Pangani Bay to Qooriga Kismaayo, including Pemba 85

Pub. 171

6.17 In 1986, less water than shown was reported to exist in the

approach channel; also 0.3 mile SSE of the light off Ras Kikaangoni and off Kipevu Oil Terminal. A depth of 10.5m liesclose S of the range line, 1.3 miles distant ESE from Ras Serani

Port Reitz

Kipevu No. 11 167m 9.45m Containers.

Kipevu No. 12 167m 9.45m Containers.

Kipevu No. 13 167m 9.45m Containers.

Kipevu No. 14 167m 9.45m Containers and ro-ro.

Kipevu No. 16 167m 10.36m Containers and ro-ro. See Note.

Kipevu No. 17 167m 10.36m Containers. See Note.

Kipevu No. 18 167m 10.36m Containers. See Note.

Cased Oil Wharf 68m —

Packaged petroleum products. Vessels have

a minimum draft of 6.1m, with a maximum

length of 68m.

Kipevu Oil Terminal Jetty 289m 13.41m Crude oil tankers up to 100,000 dwt, with a

maximum length of 259m and 13.4m draft.

Shimanzi Oil Terminal 182m 9.75m

Oil products and bulk vegetable oil. Vessels

up to 30,000 dwt, with a maximum length

of 198.1m.

Note.—It has been reported (1994) that the maximum draft allowed at these berths is 10.1m.

Mombasa

Mombasa—Berthing Information

Berth Length Depth Remarks
86 Sector 6. Kenya and Somalia—Pangani Bay to Qooriga Kismaayo, including Pemba 

Pub. 171

front range light.

6.17 An underkeel clearance of 2.4m is required during the

Southwest Monsoon and 1.8m during the Northeast Monsoon.

6.17 Tankers with drafts of 12.8m may enter harbor at HW; vessels drawing up to 13.4m can be accommodated during ideal

conditions.

6.17 Aspect.—The Shimba Hills which rise to over 305m in

height, are about 10 miles inland of the coast S of Mombasa.

On the S shoulder of the range is a conspicuous tree, not visible, however, when bearing less than 265°. Mombasa Gap separates the Shimba Hills from the flat range that rises to the N.

In the middle of the gap, or dip, is a cluster of trees. The gap

does not appear open until bearing S of 265°, when it becomes

a conspicuous mark for making Mombasa.

6.17 Between the Shimba Hills and the coast is a range of hills

about 122m high. Tangila (4°09'S., 39°35'E.), the highest summit of the latter range, is 129m high and rises nearly 3.5 miles

NW of Black Cliff Point; to the NE of this peak there is a triangular target beacon which stands at an elevation of 105m and is

visible when bearing less than 280°. Approximately 1.2 miles

NNW of Tangila there is a detached rounded summit, 104m

high, which is a good landmark when visibility makes objects

difficult to identify.

6.17 Coroa Mombasa (3°59'S., 39°41'E.), or the hummocks of

Mombasa, form one of the best landmarks for making Mombasa from the offing. They are three low hillocks about 5 miles

N of the port; the middle hillock, about 122m high and with a

clump of trees on its summit, is the highest. From the NE they

appear close together.

6.17 An orange-colored gas flare, which has been reported visible

up to 30 miles from seaward, is situated about 6 miles NW of

the harbor entrance.

6.17 Conspicuous objects in the approach to Mombasa are the

white factory situated about 1 mile NW of Ras Iwatine, which

shows prominently from the N and E and is usually brilliantlylighted at night; a hotel standing near the coast 1 mile SW of

the point; the hotel on high ground 0.8 mile WSW from Ras

Serani; Bima Tower, situated 1 mile NW of the same point; and

a school 0.8 mile NNE of Bima Tower.

6.17 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for all vessels, except

those exempt by the Port Authority, and is available 24 hours.

For tankers, vessels carrying other dangerous cargo or constrained in any way, and/or vessels over 200m in length, pilotage is available only during daylight hours. Pilots board in

position 4°06.9'S, 39°44.2'E. 

6.17 Vessels may not enter the harbor until a pilot has been embarked. In the event of bad weather or other circumstances

making boarding by a pilot impracticable, vessels concerned

must comply with instructions received through Ras Serani

Signal Station. Pilots may be contacted on VHF channels 16

and 12. The pilot boat has an orange hull with a white house;

the word “PILOTS” is written across the house.

6.17 Regulations.—“The East African Harbours Regulations

1970” are in force within the port of Mombasa. Copies of the

regulations may be obtained from the port authorities.

6.17 Vessels send their request for pilotage and their ETA, via

their agent, 48 hours in advance.

6.17 Vessels are required to maintain a listening watch, on VHF

channel 12, 3 hours prior to arrival and 3 hours prior to departure.

6.17 A restricted area surrounds the Kipevu Oil Terminal out to a

dsitance of 150m; vessels not engaged in business with the terminal shall not enter this area. A second restricted area, best

seen on chart, has the Kipevu Bridge as the N boundary and

surrounds the Shimanzi Oil Terminal to the S.

6.17 A circular prohibited area for all vessel traffic, with a radius

of 244m, is centered on Fort Jesus in Old Mombasa. 

6.17 Signals.—When entry to the port is prohibited, the following

signals are shown from the signal station on Ras Serani:

1. Day signal—Black flag.

2. Night signal—Three red lights, vertically disposed.

6.17 The following signals shown from the signal station on Ras

Mahanganwe indicate that a vessel is arriving in Port Kilindini

or Port Reitz and vessel departures are prohibited:

1. Day signal—Black ball.

2. Night signal—One red light between two white lights,

Mombasa—Mbaraki Quay

Mombasa—Kilindini Harbor
Sector 6. Kenya and Somalia—Pangani Bay to Qooriga Kismaayo, including Pemba 87

Pub. 171

vertically disposed.

6.17 Anchorage.—Anchorage is available within the harbor, as

assigned. Temporary anchorage may be taken, in 35m, with

Ras Serani rear light bearing 322°, distant 2.5 miles. 

6.17 Anchoring in the outer approaches is not recommended, particularly in the Southwest Monsoon. Anchoring and fishing are

prohibited in a large area of Mombasa; the limits may best be

seen on the chart. 

6.17 Caution.—The range lights on Ras Serani have been reported (1993) to be difficult to distinguish.

6.17 Mariners are cautioned that a strong N current may be experienced off the entrance to Mombasa and that at the height of

the Southwest Monsoon, a N set of up to 5 knots may be experienced.

Kenya—Mombasa to Kilifi Creek

6.18 From Mombasa, the coast trends in a NNE direction

to Ras Kitoka (3°38'S., 39°52'E.), the S entrance point to Kilifi

Creek, a distance of about 26 miles.

6.18 The Rabai Range, about 10 miles inland, runs nearly parallel

with the coast for 10 miles NNE of Mombasa. Jidana (3°50'S.,

39°40'E.), 313m high, is the farthest N and highest of five distinct summits within the Rabai Range. Kinagoni, a peak about

1.5 miles SW of Jidana, has a clearly defined dome-shaped

summit and is remarkable.

6.18 The Senawe Range, separated from Rabai Range by a low hill,

continues N. Simba (3°44'S., 39°41'E.), 352m, is the farthest S

of the Senawe Range. Kauma, 329m high, lies 3 miles N of Simba.

6.18 A coastal range commences 13 miles NNE of Mombasa and

extends about 11 miles NNE to the vicinity of Blowing Point

(3°42'S., 39°52'E.). The highest hill of the coastal range rises to

a height of 198m, 9.5 miles SW of Blowing Point. Mkomani,

139m high, is located 5 miles SSW of Blowing Point; each of

these hills have a clump of trees on their summit.

6.18 From a position on the coast 4 miles NNE of Mombasa to

Mtwapa Creek (3°58'S., 39°46'E.), 4 miles farther NNE, the

coast consists of sandy beaches with overhanging cliffs. From

the break in the coastline formed by Mtwapa Creek, the sandy

beaches and overhanging cliffs continue to Blowing Point. A

prominent patch of white sand is located on the cliffs 2 miles S

of Blowing Point.

6.18 A barrier reef fronts the coast to a position about 5 miles S of

Blowing Point. The outer edge of the reef is steep-to and there

are no known off-lying dangers between Mtwapa Creek and

Blowing Point.

6.18 Cannon Point (3°58'S., 39°46'E.), the S entrance point to

Mtwapa Creek, is marked by a light; there is a break in the barrier reef E of the point.

Kilifi Creek (3°38'S., 39°52'E.)

World Port Index No. 47105

6.19 Kilifi Creek is a small natural harbor which provides

shelter for small vessels in the inner harbor and berths for larger vessels in the outer anchorage.

6.19 The port comprises the area within 3 miles seaward of Ras

Kitoka and includes Takaungu Creek and Kilifi Creek.

6.19 Kenya Ports Authority Mombasa directs the port.

6.19 Tides—Currents.—The tidal current set directly across the

channels through the off-lying reefs; the flood current is to the

N and the ebb current sets S. In the creek the currents have a

velocity of 0.75 to 1.5 knots.

6.19 Depths—Limitations.—Takaungu Pass, formed between

South Reef and Middle Reef, has depths of over 18m over a

width of 0.1 mile.

6.19 North Pass, formed between Middle Reef and North Reef, is

the most direct approach to Kilifi Creek, but depths of 9m or

more exist over a width of only about 0.7 mile; a depth of 4.3m

lies close N of the entrance range line.

6.19 Kilifi Creek, entered between Ras Kitoka and a similar bluff

0.3 mile NNE, has a narrow entrance, with a least depth of 3m.

The depths within the harbor are over 22m but the channel is

winding and not suitable for large vessels to enter.

6.19 An overhead power cable, with a vertical clearance of

15.2m, spans the creek 0.7 mile W of Kilifi Creek range lights.

A bridge has been constructed across the creek. The span has a

vertical clearance in the center of 20m. 

6.19 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for vessels 61m long and

over. Pilots should be ordered in advance and picked up in Mombasa.

6.19 Anchorage.—Anchorage may be obtained off the entrance

to Kilifi Creek, in depths of 15 to 18m, sand, about 0.5 mile E

of North Pass front range light. There is anchorage, in a depth

of 12m, close within Takaungu Pass.

6.19 Vessels that can pass under the power cable may anchor in

mid-channel about 0.1 mile W of the cable, in depths of 28 to

37m.

Kenya—Kilifi Creek to Malindi

6.20 Between Kilifi Creek and Mida Creek (3°23'S.,

39°59'E.), the coast is similar to that S of Kilifi, consisting of

sandy beaches and low overhanging coral cliffs backed with

thick scrub and bushes. A flat range of hills from 180 to 240m

high lies about 6 miles inland.

6.20 Red sand cliffs are located on the coast about 9 miles NNE

of Kilifi; a short distance farther NNE is a white patch of sand,

9m high.

6.20 Caution.—A 2.5 mile long band of tide rips was reported

(1994) in the vicinity of position 3°33.0'S, 40°22.1'E.

6.21 Mount Mangea (3°15'S., 39°43'E.) has a fairly welldefined summit with gradually sloping sides. It stands alone 17

miles WNW of the entrance to Mida Creek and makes a good

landmark in clear weather.

6.21 Between Mida Creek and Malindi Point, 11 miles NE, the

coast is thickly wooded. On the N bank of Mida Creek are

patches of red sand cliffs.

6.21 Caution.—Malindi Marine National Park, whose limits include Barracouta Passage, North Reef, and Stork Passage, is

marked on its NE and SE extremities by can buoys. The buoys

are moored 1.5 miles NE and ESE of Casuarina Point (3°15'S.,

40°08'E.). Fishing is prohibited in these areas and no shells or

coral may be taken from the park.

6.21 Watamu Marine National Park covers an area which includes

the entrance to Mida Creek and extends to the NE for approximately 4 miles. Both of these parks are part of the Malindi Ma-
88 Sector 6. Kenya and Somalia—Pangani Bay to Qooriga Kismaayo, including Pemba 

Pub. 171

rine National Reserve. Contact the local authorities for more

information about restrictions and entrance into these areas. 

6.22 Malindi Point (3°15'S., 40°07'E.) is a rounded coral

cliff, 6m high. The point is rendered noticeable by Sail Rock,

which is undercut and resembles a dhow sail, lying close E.

6.22 Malindi Reef, which dries in patches and generally breaks,

extends about 1.5 miles offshore and fronts the coastal reef for

about 3 miles SW of Malindi Point. 

6.22 Malindi Bank extends about 7 miles SSE of Malindi Point.

Overfalls occur over the outer part of the bank where there are

depths from 15 to 30m.

6.22 Leopard Point (3°15'S., 40°08'E.), about 2.2 miles NNE of

Malindi Point, is 19.5m high, it is white and sandy.

6.22 Leopard Reef, lying 1.2 miles E of Leopard Point, dries from

0.3 to 1.2m and is surrounded by foul ground. 

6.22 A wreck lies on the E side of the reef ; a sand cay, which is

prominent at LW, dries 3.7m and lies on the NW part.

6.22 Vasco da Gama’s Pillar, near the extremity of the cliffy point

about 1.7 miles N of Leopard Point, is of white masonry, 5.5m

high, and has a cross on it.

6.22 Griffon Patches, formed of coral and with a least known

depth of 4.7m, extend 2.7 miles N from the foul ground lying

off the E side of Leopard Reef. Single-Tree Hill, in range with

the guardhouse on the N bank of the Galana River, bearing

323°, leads NE of all the patches.

Malindi (3°13'S., 40°08'E.)

World Port Index No. 47107

6.23 Malindi is situated at the head of Malindi Bay and is

the headquarters for the District of Malindi. The port consists

of the town and a small natural harbor.

6.23 Tides—Currents.—Off Malindi, within the 180m curve, a

nearly constant current of 0.75 knot to the S has been experienced in the months of November and December. Outside the

180m curve the current is constantly N at a rate of 1 knot during the Northeast Monsoon and at a rate of 3 knots during the

Southwest Monsoon.

6.23 Aspect.—Goji (3°12'S., 40°00'E.), a wooded hill, 116m

high, is a good mark for a vessel approaching the anchorage

from the E. Single-Tree Hill is a round-topped hill, 169m high,

with a single tree on its summit, rising about 9 miles NE of

Goji Hill. There is a conspicuous minaret about 0.6 mile NW

of Vasca da Gama’s Pillar. A tall building and a water tower 1

mile N of the minaret make good marks. 

6.23 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for vessels 61m in length

and over. Pilots should be ordered in advance and are normally

picked up in Mombasa.

6.23 Regulations.—“The East African Harbours Regulations

1970” are in force within Malinda.

6.23 Anchorage.—Anchorage may be taken about 0.7 mile from

the front range light, on the range, in a depth of 11m, mud; this

anchorage is protected from the Southwest Monsoon. Vessels

should not anchor farther in. Large vessels are recommended to

anchor outside the depths of 18.3m in a position 1 mile ENE of

the light on Pillar Reef.

6.23 Directions.—To enter by the North Pass, steer in with the

lighted beacons on the cliff 1 mile S of Ras Kitoka in range

bearing 274° until within 0.5 mile of the shore, when course

may be altered for the anchorage or for the river entrance.

6.23 The beacons on the N side of the river entrance, in range

bearing 330°, lead into the river, but vessels of considerable

draft should steer first to the W of the range and then to the E

of it in order to keep the axis of the channel. When Ras Nkoma

is in range with point E of it on the N bank, bearing 288°,

round into the river, keeping in mid-channel. The reef off the N

shore just within the entrance should be given a safe berth.

6.23 Vessels with a draft greater than 2.7m must not proceed

above the ferry crossing without permission from the Port Authority.

Kenya—Malindi to Lamu

6.24 Malindi Bay indents the coast between the town of

Malinda and the mouth of the Galana River 3 miles N. The

shore of the bay is bordered by a sandy beach with occasional

coral outcrops, which cover and uncover depending on the

monsoon prevailing.

6.24 A prominent white sand hill, 50m high, rises 0.7 mile N of

the mouth of the Galana River near the S end of a coastal range

which stretches to Mambrui Point.

6.24 Mambrui Point (3°06'S., 40°10'E.) lies 2.7 miles NE of the

Galana River. Mambrui is situated on the N side of the point

and is dominated by a prominent mosque.

6.24 Magarini rises to a height of 169m; a single tree stands on its

summit. Between this hill and the coast the country is flat.

6.24 Ras Ngomeni (2°59'S., 40°14'E.) is the extremity of a peninsula projecting 3 miles ENE from the coast. The point is bold

and steep-to with overhanging coral cliffs 5m high. An isolated

hill 28m high lies close within the point and a ridge extends W

from this hill to a more prominent hill 51m high, 2 miles W.

6.24 Ungama Bay (2°45'S., 40°20'E.), also known as Formosa

Bay, is entered between Ras Ngomeni and Ras Mwana.

6.24 Between Ras Ngomeni and Mto Kilifi, the shore of the bay

consists of a sandy beach with numerous creeks and swamps

Vasco da Gama’s Pillar
Sector 6. Kenya and Somalia—Pangani Bay to Qooriga Kismaayo, including Pemba 89

Pub. 171

within. A prominent sandhill, 18m high, rises 1 mile NNE of

the mouth of Mto Kilifi.

6.24 Between Mto Kilifi and Kipini, the coast consists of sand

hills which are mostly wooded.

6.24 Caution.—Within the head of Ungwana Bay, extensive

shoaling has been reported (1988). A submerged well head exists 11.5 miles NE of Ras Ngomeni.

6.25 Kipini (2°31'S., 40°32'E.) is a large village at the NE

end of Ungama Bay. Anchorage can be taken about 3 miles S

of Kipini, in a depth of 7m, sand. Deeper draft vessels may anchor farther out, W of Mwamba Ziwayu, in a depth of 8.5m.

6.25 Ras Mwana (2°34'S., 40°36'E.) is a low rocky point fringed

by a drying coral bank extending 0.5 mile S.

6.25 Mwamba Ziwayu is a group of jagged rocky islets lying 3

miles S of Ras Mwana. A shoal spit, marked near its S extremity by a lighted buoy, extends 4 miles SSW from Mwamba Ziwayu.

6.25 Mwamba wa Tawa Ndani (2°34'S., 40°40'E.) is a group of

shoal patches extending 4 or more miles E of Ras Mwana; the

shallowest of these patches dries 1m.

6.26 Between Ras Mwana and Ras Biongwe (2°23'S.,

40°49'E.), 17 miles NE, the coast consists of sand hills from 15

to 60m high. A prominent group of sand hills with a white

patch on their seaward slope are located 4.5 miles NE of Ras

Mwana. Another prominent sand hill, 55m high, rises 5 miles

farther NE; a sharp boulder stands on the N side of this sandhill.

6.26 Ras Tenewi (2°27'S., 40°46'E.), a low sandy projection, is

located 11.7 miles NE of Ras Mwana. Hills, which are good

marks, rise to a height of 70m, 4.2 miles NE of Ras Tenewi.

6.26 Ras Biongwe, 5 miles NE of Ras Tenewi, forms the SE extremity of a rounded peninsula.

6.26 Tenewi ya Juu (2°28'S., 40°48'E.) are a line of rocky islets,

with heights up to 12m, located on a reef 1.5 miles S of Ras Tenewi. The reef is steep-to on its E side but it is connected to

Ras Tenewi by reefs and shoals.

6.26 Kinyika (2°26'S., 40°50'E.), a rocky islet 9m high, lies on a

reef 4.5 miles ENE of Ras Tenewi. Foul ground extends SW

from the islet and no attempt should be made to pass close off

this side of the islet.

6.26 During the Northeast Monsoon, good anchorage may be obtained W of the reef surrounding Tenewi ya Juu, in depths of

13 to 15m. The anchorage should be approached with the

prominent sand hill 55m high, located 2.7 miles WSW of Ras

Tenewi, bearing 308°. As soon as Kinyika is open NW of Tenewiya Juu, course may be altered to anchor as convenient.

The above track leads about 0.5 mile SW of a reef.

6.26 Lamu Island (2°17'S., 40°52'E.) lies at the head of Lamu

Bay; its S extremity is located 3.7 miles N of Ras Biongwe.

The S coast of the island consists of a sandy beach backed by

prominent white sandhills from 9 to 81m high, partly covered

with scrub. 

6.26 These sand hills, and particularly the ones near the entrance

to Luma Harbor, are whiter than those in the vicinity of Ras

Biongwe. The SE extremity of the island is marked by a light;

it is the rear light of a range in line bearing 015°.

Lamu (2°16'S., 40°54'E.)

World Port Index No. 47110

6.27 Lamu is situated on the E side of Lamu Island; the

port consists of a town and a small natural harbor. It has been

reported (2010) that the Kenyan government wants to expand

the port and make it a cargo gateway serving southern Sudan

and Ethiopia. Plans include constructing three berths which

could handle vessels up to 100, 000 dwt. 

6.27 Winds—Weather.—The Northeast Monsoon and Southwest Monsoon blow regularly along this coast, but close inshore the wind draws in during the daytime, and a land wind

prevails at night. In January the wind varies from NE to SE and

is generally fresh, though at times light. It is usually somewhat

hazy.

6.27 Tides—Currents.—The N current off Lamu is stated to be

uncertain in strength, but this applies chiefly to the Northeast

Monsoon when the N and S currents meet somewhere between

Lamu and Castle Point. 

6.27 The general N set between Mombasa and Lamu is from 2 to

4 knots during the Southwest Monsoon and from 1 to 2 knots

during the Northeast Monsoon. There is a strong indraft with

the incoming current into Manda Bay and Pate Bay. The tidal

current runs about 2.5 knots at Shela and much stronger at Lamu, especially with a N wind.

6.27 Depths—Limitations.—The channel across the bar is about

0.5 mile wide. In 1963, there was a depth of 5.2m over the bar

on the range line, but mariners are cautioned that depths are

subject to change during the rainy season. The channel leading

to Lamu Harbor is dredged to 5.5m (1989). In 1985, less water

was reported over the bar near the range line. A draft of 5.2m

can be carried in the fairway to the anchorage off the town of

Lamu.

6.27 Aspect.—Dongo Kundu, the W shore of Lamu Bay, is a

rounded peninsula rising to a height of 70m; there are conspicuous white sand hills on the peninsula.

6.27 Ras Kitau, the SW extremity of Manda Island, is low, rocky,

and is backed by bush. Manda Island forms the E shore of Lamu Bay.

6.27 Pilotage.—Pilotage for vessels 200m or over in length is

compulsory at Lamu. Pilots should be ordered in advance and

are normally picked up at Mombasa.

6.27 Anchorage.—The harbor has three sheltered anchorages

deep enough for vessels up to 91.5m long with a draft of 5.2m.

Kenya—Lamu to Kiwaihu Bay

6.28 From Lamu to Kiwaihu Island (2°00'S., 41°17'E.),

the coastline is indented to a distant of about 12 miles and

forms several bays, which are encumbered by several islands

and numerous reefs. From the S the largest bays are Manda,

Pate and Kiwaihu.

6.28 From Kiwaihu Island to Raas Kaambooni, 27 miles farther

NE, the coast consists of a series of ranges of hills from 45 to

100m high. For the most part these hills are sandy, with sparse

scrub and low bushes, and have few recognizable features.
90 Sector 6. Kenya and Somalia—Pangani Bay to Qooriga Kismaayo, including Pemba 

Pub. 171

6.28 Manda Island (2°16'S., 40°57'E.) separates Lamu Harbor

from Manda Bay. A few low hills are seen along its seaward

face; the low parts are comprised of sand, but are of a much

more yellow hue than the hills of Lamu.

6.28 Presgrave Bank (2°19'S., 41°01'E.) lies in the S approach to

Manda Roads there is a least charted depth of 5.2m on the

bank. Mchangamneni, an extensive coral shoal, with a least

known depth of 1.8m, lies between Prestgrave and the coastal

reef. The sea does not always break on these shoals and they

may be difficult to see.

6.28 Vidal Bank (2°18'S., 41°04'E.) lies with its SW extremity

1.5 miles E of Prestgrave Bank and extends 3.7 miles NE. The

bank has a least charted depth of 3.6m. The sea seldom breaks

on this bank and it is inadvisable to cross this bank due to the

irregular depths.

6.28 Mlango Muhaji (2°18'S., 41°01'E.), the S entrance channel

to Manda Roads, is formed between Prestgrave Bank and Vidal

Bank; it has a least depth of 10.4m in its central part.

6.28 Clark Patch (2°16'S., 41°01'E.), with a depth of 8.2m, lies

in the N part of Manda Roads.

6.28 Mwamba Hanawi is a detached coral reef, awash in places,

that breaks at all states of the tide.

6.28 Barracouta Channel is formed between Vidal Bank and

Mwamba Hanawi.

6.29 Manda Roads (2°16'S., 41°01'E.) is an anchorage lying close E of Manda Island. It may be approached from the E

through Barracouta Channel by crossing the 40m curve, with

the highest hill on Ras Ukowe bearing 269°. When the beacons

E of Manda Toto Island (2°14'S., 40°59'E.) are in line 354°

course may be altered to anchorage about 2 miles SE of Ras

Ukowe.

6.29 Mlango Muhaji is the S approach to Manda Roads. The 40m

curve line may be crossed, with the islet Jiwe la Mpupu

(2°13'S., 41°01'E.), 6m high, in range with the SE extremity of

the Shongoni Peninsula bearing 357°. When the beacons are in

range 354° follow that track into Manda Roads and proceed to

anchorage as desired.

6.29 Good anchorage may be taken in Manda Roads, in depths of

16.5 to 22m, mud and sand. Presgrave and Vidal Banks afford

some shelter from the prevailing monsoons, but there is usually

some swell in the roads.

6.29 Manda Bay (2°07'S., 40°57'E.) is entered from Manda

Roads through a channel between the reef extending from

Manda Toto Island and the range beacons about 1 mile ENE;

there is a least depth of 11.3m in the fairway.

6.29 The tidal currents are strong in the entrance to the bay and

attain a velocity over 4 knots at springs; at neaps the velocity is

considerable. Off Ras Mtangawanda, the W extremity of Pate

Island, the maximum velocity is about 1.5 knots. Completely

sheltered anchorage may be obtained in the S part of Manda

Bay, in depths of 10 to 14m.

6.29 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for all vessels 200m and

over in length at Manda Bay. Pilots should be ordered in advance and are normally picked up at Mombasa.

6.29 Caution.—In Manda Bay, there is often a considerable amount

of weed and mangrove debris floating on and just below the surface which may be drawn into suction inlets.

6.30 Pate Bay (2°10'S., 41°05'E.) is formed between Ras

Shongoni, the S extremity of Pate Island, and Ras Mitu Mitu 7

miles NE.

6.30 Ras Mitu Mitu (2°09'S., 41°06'E.) is a point formed of distinctive sand dunes, about 9m high, which make the only break

in the wide belt of mangroves lining the S coast of Pate Island.

6.30 Kisingati Island lies on the edge of the fringing reef, in the

center of Pate Bay, 4 miles NE of Ras Shongoni, the S coast of

this island is free of mangroves and to a degree resembles Ras

Mitu Mitu.

6.30 Pazarli Ridge (2°12'S., 41°07'E.), a chain of coral rocks

which dry from 2 to 3m, lies across the central part of the entrance to Pate Bay. There is a pass at each end of the ridge leading into the bay.

6.30 The E side of the bay is flanked by an extensive group of

drying sand and coral reefs; among these reefs are Mercer

Rocks and Mwamba Hasani (2°08'S., 41°10'E.). Siwi Spit extends NE from Mwamba Hasani.

6.30 Caution.—A number of detached coral patches with charted

depths from 6.1 to 12.2m lie within 3.5 miles S and 2 miles E

of Pazarli Ridge, in the approach to Pate Bay. These patches

have not been fully examined and less water than charted may

be expected over them. The entrances to the bay have also not

been fully examined and great care should be exercised when

navigating in this vicinity.

6.31 Mlango Pazarli (2°12'S., 41°05'E.), the SW entrance

to Pate Bay, is formed between the shoals extending S from

Pazarli Ridge and a depth of 1.8m about 1 mile W. The pass is

about 0.4 mile wide and has a charted depth of 6.7m, but on the

bar less depths may be found.

6.31 A vessel approaching the pass from the S should cross the

40m line with the E extremity of Kisingati Island bearing 333°.

As soon as the S extremity of Manda Toto Island bears 243°

course may be altered to anchor as convenient in Pate Bay.

6.31 Mlango wa Sera (2°10'S., 41°07'E.), the NE pass into Pate

Bay, lies between the NE rock on Pazarli Ridge, which dries

2.4m, and the edge of the foul ground extending SW from Mercer Rock.

6.31 Mlango wa Sera is about 0.5 mile wide and has a least charted depth of 5.2m, but less water may be found in the fairway.

6.31 Vessels should cross the 40m curve line with the W extremity of the sand dunes forming Ras Mitu Mitu bearing 314°; this

course leads through Mlango wa Sera close to the NE rock of

Pazarli Ridge. This entry should only be made when the NE

rock of Pazarli Ridge is visible. When the vessel is within Pate

Bay alter course W when the S extremity bears 270°, which

leads to the anchorage in the NE part of the bay.

6.32 Kiwaihu Bay (2°04'S., 41°12'E.) is entered between

the E extremity of Pate Island and Boteler Ledge, 4.5 miles

NE. Within the entrance points the whole bay is shallow, with

numerous isolated patches of coral with depths from 0.3 to

1.8m. In calm weather, these patches can sometimes be seen in

the earlier part of the day because of the discolored water

around them. Later in the day, when a sea breeze develops,

they are impossible to identify and navigation in the bay is hazardous at LW, even for boats.

6.32 Owen Patches (2°05'S., 41°15'E.), 3 miles NE of Siwi Spit,

has a least charted depth of 3.9m; it is difficult to see. An entrance channel to Kiwaihu Bay lies between this patch and Si-
Sector 6. Kenya and Somalia—Pangani Bay to Qooriga Kismaayo, including Pemba 91

Pub. 171

wi Spit.

6.32 Boteler Bank, with a depth of 4.9m, lies in the N part of the

entrance to Kiwaihu Bay, in a position about 1 mile N of Owen

Patches. This bank is irregular and is not easily seen.

6.32 Kiwaihu Island (2°00'S., 41°17'E.) lies 6 miles NE of the E

extremity of Pate Island. A conspicuous conical hill, 47m high,

stands in the central part of the island; a smaller, but more symmetrical, hill lies close NE.

Kenya—Kiwaihu Bay to Raas Kambooni

6.33 Little Head (1°57'S., 41°19'E.) is situated on the

mainland, 0.7 mile NE of the N extremity of Kiwaihu Island.

From Little Head to Raas Kaambooni, 25 miles NE, the coast

consists of a series of ranges of hills from 45 to 100m high. For

the most part these hills are sandy, with sparse scrub and low

bushes; few have recognizable features.

6.33 Kiwaihu Knolls (2°00'S., 41°20'E.), a ridge of coral pinnacles with a least charted depth of 4.5m, lie 2.5 miles SE of Little Head; they are not easily seen and the ridge is steep-to.

Halliday Shoal with a depth of 11.6m lies 2.2 miles off the

mainland 1.5 miles NE of Kiwaihu Knolls.

6.33 Arletts Ledge (1°55'S., 41°24'E.), with coral pinnacles having a least known depth of 5.5m, lies 1.2 miles NE of Halliday

Shoal.

6.33 Simambaya Ledges has several pinnacles of coral and rock

with depth of 4.9 to 8.2m; they lay close NE of Arletts Ledge

and extend NE, parallel to Simambaya Island for its entire

length. These ledges are steep-to but can usually be seen due to

the light sandy bottom over the coral.

6.33 Simambaya Island (1°52'S., 41°25'E.) lies about 0.7 mile

offshore with its S extremity about 6 miles NE of Little Head.

It is the largest of the islands along this stretch of coast and has

a steep range of hills that rise to a height of 60m. The seaward

edge of the island is steep-to and is usually fronted by breakers.

6.33 Lama Shaaqa (1°39'S., 41°35'E.), a small group of islets, lie

on the coastal reef 1 mile SW of Raas Kaambooni.

6.33 Raas Kaambooni (1°39'S., 41°36'E.) is a low rocky promontory slightly raised in the center. On the S side of the rise

there is a red sandy patch. The rocky face of the headland,

when seen from the E, appears to have a narrow sandy cove in

the center.

Somalia—Raas Kaambooni to Qooriga Kismaayo 

6.34 Isole Giuba is the collective name for a chain of islands, islets, and rocks which front the coast between Raas

Kaambooni and Ras Ogaden (0°27'S., 42°29'E.), the SW entrance point to Qooriga Kismaayo, 90 miles NE. Few of these

islands lie more than 2.5 miles offshore and from a distance

they may be mistaken for the mainland which is generally flat.

Most of the islands, which show up well on radar, rise up

abruptly from a narrow connecting line of reefs marked by

breakers.

6.34 To safely pass Isole Giuba, vessels should keep seaward of

the 100m curve, which lies about 4 miles offshore. 

6.34 Within the 40m curve, about 1 mile closer inshore, the

depths are irregular with numerous ridges and patches of coral

having depths less than 5m; there is, however, usually a clear

channel, with depths more than 18m about 1.5 miles seaward

of the islands.

6.35 Ras Gome Lahecua (1°32'S., 41°39'E.) is a bold

round-topped rocky hill, located above a sandy beach; it is the

second most conspicuous object on this coast. 

6.35 Just S of Ras Gome Lahecua are some white sandy patches

which at times show well from seaward; just N of the point a

short range of hummocky rocks, 30m high, stand close to the

beach.

6.35 Raas Warafoole (1°24'S., 41°44'E.), a projection of land, is

located 9 miles NE of Ras Gome Lahecua. A hill, with a ridge

of cliffs below its summit, stands on the point; it is most noticeable when bearing about 310°.

6.35 Collinadelle Rose (1°22'S., 41°45'E.), 2.2 miles N of Raas

Warafoole, 1 mile inland, is flat-topped and slopes gradually to

the S and steeply to the N. 

6.35 It shows above the coastal range of hills and is a conspicuous

landmark for a considerable distance. Rozier Peak, 1.5 miles

NE of the hill, is insignificant, but the locality may be identified by a huge haycock-shaped black rock standing between it

and the beach.

6.35 Buur Buurdheere (1°15'S., 41°50'E.) is 43m high; it has a

slight dip in its summit when seen from the S.

6.36 Buur Gaabo (1°12'S., 41°50'E.) is entered between

Ras Gowlaani and Ras-Kaamba Kiyaamba; a beacon stands on

the extremity of Ras-Kaamba Kiyaamba.

6.36 Tides—Currents.—The incoming tidal current has a velocity of 1.5 knots; the outgoing tidal current has a velocity of 2

knots.

6.36 Depths—Limitations.—There is a bar across the entrance

channel with depths from 6.4 to 8.7m. The depths inside the

bar increase to 19m 2.5 miles N of Ras Gowlaani.

6.36 Aspects.—Buur Buurdheere rises 0.5 mile NW of Ras Gowlaani. Shimofoongo, marked by a beacon, rises to a height of

61m, about 2.3 miles NW Buur Buurdheere.

6.36 Anchorage.—Anchorage may be obtained in mid-channel,

about 0.4 mile NNW of Kifenni (1°13'S., 41°51'E.), in a depth

of 16m.

6.36 During Northeast Monsoon, small vessels may anchor in

Qooriga Kiyaambo, close W of Ras-Kaamba Kiyaambo. Temporary anchorage may be obtained outside the bar, but vessels

should be prepared to leave the anchorage on short notice.

6.36 Directions.—There are three sets of range beacons, shown

on the chart, that lead into Buur Gaabo. These range beacons

may be followed to a position about 500m SSW of Gees Yuunda (1°13'S., 41°51'E.), when a mid-channel course of 320.5°

will lead toward the inner anchorage. The pillar on Gees Yuunda should not be mistaken for any of the range beacons.

6.36 Caution.—Breaking reefs extend from Ras Gowlaani to a

position close N of Keti Keti. Keti Keti, a group of islets surrounded by a drying reef, lie about 0.6 mile SSW of RasKaamba Kiyaambo. 

6.36 An islet, 6m high, lies close SW of the beacon situated on

Ras-Kaamba Kiyaambo. A ledge, about 1 mile in extent, lies

off the NE side of the entrance; it breaks along its seaward side.

6.37 From Ras-Kaamba Kiyaambo, the coast trends in a

NE direction to Raas Ogaden, a distance of about 60 miles.
92 Sector 6. Kenya and Somalia—Pangani Bay to Qooriga Kismaayo, including Pemba 

Pub. 171

6.37 This entire coast is fronted by a series of islands, islets, and

rocks which lie up to 3.5 miles offshore. The 10m curve lies

close off some of these dangers, but in other places it lies up to

4.7 miles offshore.

6.37 Qooriga Juula (1°01'S., 42°00'E.) is a bay that is fronted by

islands; it may be entered by vessels with local knowledge.

There are depths from 9 to 18m in the entrance, but within the

entrance the depths decrease suddenly to 5m.

6.37 Between Qooriga Juula and Raas Ogaden there are two anchorages where small ships with local knowledge may anchor;

they are Qooriga Jofay, 12 miles NE of Qooriga Juula, and Qooriga Koyaama, 19 miles farther NE.

6.37 Raas Ogaden (0°27'S., 42°29'E.), the NE extremity of J-sha

Kuwaajuule, is the SW entrance point to Qooriga Kismaayo,

which is described in paragraph 7.2.
93

Pub. 171

7. 

Somalia—Qooriga Kismaayo to Raas Xaafuun

7.0Additional chart coverage may be found in NGA/DLIS Catalog of Maps, Charts, and Related Products (Unlimited Distribution).

SECTOR 7 — CHART INFORMATION
95

Pub. 171

SECTOR 7 

SOMALIA—QOORIGA KISMAAYO TO RAAS XAAFUUN

7.0 Plan.—This sector describes the E coast of Africa from Qooriga Kismaayo (Baia di Kismaayo) NE to Ras Xaafuun (Ras

Hafun), a distance of 859 miles.

General Remarks 

7.1 Between Kismaayo and Baraawe (Baraawa) (1°06'N.,

44°02'E.), the coast consists chiefly of reddish sand dunes,

backed by high sand hills; most of these hills are bare and are

visible from a distance of 25 miles.

7.1 A hill close inland in the vicinity of Ras Audalla (0°46'N.,

43°37'E.) is a saddle about 1 mile in extent between the conical

hills. A black rock stands on the seaward side of the central

part of the saddle and there are dark red patches on the coastal

hills 3 or 4 miles NE of the saddle.

7.1 Between Baraawe and Marka the coast consists of a series of

hills from 80 to 165m high; on a portion of this coast stunted

bushes appear on the sand hills. Between Marka and Muqdisho

the sand hills continue giving it an arid and desolate appearance.

7.1 From Muqdisho to Hobyo (5°21'N., 48°31'E.), the coast continues low and sandy, but a short distance inland the dunes have

a thin covering of grass which after the inter-monsoon rains resembles an undulating prairie. The monotonous aspect of this

coast is broken by numerous white shifting sandhills and by

occasional outcrops of limestone rocks which chiefly occur in

the vicinity of Hobyo.

7.1 From Hobyo to Raas Xaafun the coast has a different character, becoming rocky, bold and inaccessible and backed by tablelands in places, and in other areas having undulating

sandhills.

7.1 Caution.—Several incidents of piracy have been reported on

vessels approaching ports, and transiting the coast of Somalia.

Vessels as much as 40 miles off the coast have been boarded by

armed men.Any radio communications, including VHF, should

be avoided.Vessels should stay 50 to 100 miles from the Somali coast.

Kismaayo (Kismayo) (0°22'S., 42°33'E.)

World Port Index No. 47130

7.2 Kismaayo is situated at the NE end of Qooriga Kismaayo. The port consists of a town and a small artificial harbor

formed by an L-shaped breakwater extending SW from Jasiirad

Seerbeenti.

7.2 Winds—Weather.—During the Northeast Monsoon, the

nights are always cool and the air always dry.

7.2 Tides—Currents.—During both monsoons, the current

sweeps across the channels used in entering the bay, and the

greatest care must be taken to keep on the range lines, even

when going through Passo Interno. 

7.2 Strong currents and winds are common and vessels must

have full power available when berthing.

7.2 Depths—Limitations.—There are two passes, Passo Nord

and Passo di Levante, which lead through the barrier reef.

There is a least depth of 9.1m on the range line leading through

these passes. Passo Interno, with a least depth of 10.4m on the

range line, leads through the foul ground extending SW from

Jasiirad Fafaatu and then into the entrance channel, which

leads to the harbor basin; the entrance channel is 200m wide.

7.2 The port basin is L-shaped; the berthing lengths of the two

faces are 280m and 340m, with an alongside depth of 8.5m.

Four vessels can be accommodated.

7.2 Dredging is carried out within the limits of the entrance

channel and harbor basin to a minimum depth of 8.5m. A vessel with a maximum draft of 8.5m may enter.

7.2 Aspect.—The coast surrounding Qooriga Kismaayo has few

conspicuous features and is often obscured by haze.

7.2 In 1984 it was reported a conspicuous pink-walled building

was situated near the deep water jetty and a conspicuous tank

stood nearby. In 1985, a radio tower standing 0.5 mile NW of

the church was reported to be conspicuous; there is a mosque

in Kismaayo.

7.2 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for vessels over 200 nrt;

pilots may be embarked in position 0°23.5'N, 42°34.0'E. Entry

and departure are permitted during daylight hours only. 

7.2 Regulations.—Vessels should send their ETA 36 hours in

advance via their agent, who will relay this information to the

pilot.

7.2 Anchorage.—A long swell generally sets into Qooriga Kismaayo, causing vessels at anchor to roll.

7.2 Vessels of medium draft can obtain sheltered anchorage in

either its N or S end, according to the monsoon, in depths of 6

to 7m. Large vessels can anchor about 0.7 mile W of Jasiirad

Fafaatu, in depths of 10 to 13m.

7.2 Anchorage, with excellent holding ground, may be obtained

in the harbor basin, in depths of 8 to 9m.

7.2 Directions.—Passo Nord and Passo di Levante lead from

seaward to the entrance to Qooriga Kismaayo, then through

Passo Interno to the harbor.

7.2 Passo di Levante is only recommended for small vessels with

local knowledge during good weather. Beacons in range 269.5°

lead through this pass over a least depth of 6.7m; this track

leads about 0.5 miles S of Buur Badeed Doodaali Noo.

7.2 Passo Nord is wider and deeper than Passo di Levante and is

the one generally used. Beacons, in line bearing 246.5°, lead

through this until the S islet of Jasiira Toomba (0°21'S.,

42°35'E.) bears 340°°, when Jasiirad Bishikaani (0°26'S.,

42°31'E.) may be steered for on a heading of 226°°. Range beacons, in line bearing 325.15°, lead through Passo Interno. 

7.2 Caution.—During both monsoons, the coastal current sets

directly across the approach channels, flowing inshore of Buur

Badeed Oaani, and along the coasts of the off-lying islets. It is

advisable to approach the respective range lines some distance

seaward of the barrier reef before actually entering the pass, in

order to observe the set before actually entering the pass.

7.2 No attempt should be made to cross the barrier unless the
96 Sector 7. Somalia—Qooriga Kismaayo to Raas Xaafuun 

Pub. 171

range marks can be clearly seen as there is always a heavy

swell and only the range lines have been closely examined;

depths may be less than charted adjacent to these passes.

Kismaayo to Muqdisho

7.3 Jubba (0°15'S., 42°38'E.) enters the sea about 9 miles

NNE of Jasiirad Seerbeenti. Temporary anchorage can be taken

off the river entrance, in depths of 16 to 18m. In this area the

depths are irregular and are subject to change; the locality is

exposed to the full force on the monsoons.

7.3 Baraawe (1°06'N., 44°02'E.) (World Port Index No. 47140)

consists of a town and a small open roadstead. The current in

the roadstead follows the direction of their coast and is either

NE or SW, according to the monsoon. It is strongest at high

tide with a NE set when it sometimes runs at a rate from 3 to 4

knots.

7.3 Naraan, an islet 1.5 miles SW of the town, is marked by a

tower on its summit; the islet shows well against a white hill

behind it. A light is situated about 1 mile NNE of the town,

with a beacon WNW of the light; the beacon, along with the

light, forms a range with a bearing of 300.5°.

7.3 Anchorage.—Anchorage during the Northest Monsoon may

be taken, in 15 to 18m, with the beacon above in line with a radio tower, bearing 328°, 1 mile distant from the tower. Anchorage in the SW monsoon may be taken, in 9m, with the light and

beacon in line bearing 300°, distant 1.1 miles. The best sheltered anchorage is 0.5 mile SW of Naraan, good holding

ground. 

7.4 Between Baraawe and Marka, the coast consists of a

series of hills from 80 to 165m high, with a few rocks lying

close offshore in places. Inland of the coastal hills the land is

subject to inundation.

7.4 The current in this area normally follows the coast, running

NE or SW depending on the monsoon. However, an onshore

set has been observed and it is advisable to maintain a good

offing, especially at night.

7.4 Raas Daay (1°11'N., 44°08'E.) lies nearly 8 miles NE of

Baraawe. On the N side of the point there is a bay, about 0.5

mile in width, which affords good anchorage for small vessels

during the Southwest Monsoon.

7.4 A reef, awash, which breaks, lies 1 mile offshore about midway between Baraawe and Raas Daay.

7.5 Raas Filfile (1°16'N., 44°13'E.) is the extremity of an

extensive rocky headland backed by a sand patch covered by

brushwood.

7.5 Raas Siindhass (1°21'N., 44°18'E.) is rocky and may be

identified by a large white sand patch on a hill within the point.

7.5 There is a village situated on the coast close to a cliffy promontory, 4.2 miles NE of Raas Siindhass. Anchorage may be obtained 0.5 mile S of the promontory, in a depth of 15m.

7.5 A reddish-colored hill, sparsely covered with brush and having two conical summits, rises to a height of 147m close within

the above cliffy promontory; it is prominent.

7.5 Munghia (1°37'N., 44°37'E.), a small village of huts, is only

visible from close inshore. Temporary anchorage, in a depth of

20m may be taken 0.5 mile S of the village.

7.6 Merca (1°43'N., 44°47'E.) (World Port Index No.

47150) is situated on a small coral peninsula and consists of a

town and a small open roadstead. Merca is the capital of the

Uadi Scebeli (Uebi Scebeli) district and is one of the most important centers of Somalia.

7.6 Tides—Currents.—The current follows the general direction of the coast, running NE or SW depending on the monsoon, with rates from 3 to 4 knots at times.

7.6 Aspect.—Fort Trevis, situated on a red-topped dune, 115m

high, 1 mile N of town, is a good mark. Sheikh Osman

Mosque, standing alone near a cove W of town, and the cutomhouse a little W of town are good landmarks.

7.6 The ruins of a mosque on shore 1 mile S of Sheikh Osman

Mosque is not conspicuous, but is a good mark when anchoring.

7.6 Anchorage.—The anchorage is on the edge of the shore

bank and is entirely exposed; because of the steepness of the

bank, the space available for anchorage is narrow. The anchorage is considered to be one of the worst on this coast, but vessels lying to two anchors, with a good scope of chain, generally

ride out even a hard Southwest Monsoon, but anchors may foul

because of dragging and swinging.

7.7 Between Merca and Muqdisho, the coast is formed of

sand hills which give it an arid and desolate appearance. There

are numerous villages along this coast. Rocks and islets extend

up to 1.5 miles offshore, in places, in this area. Temporary anchorage may be obtained off some of the villages, but the anchorages are completely unsheltered.

7.7 Gilib (1°48'N., 44°54'E.), a large village, is situated on a

rocky promontory 23m high. The promontory is joined to the

mainland by a narrow isthmus; it resembles an islet.

7.7 Anchorage.—Anchorage may be obtained abreast of Gilib,

about 0.5 mile offshore, in depths of 20 to 29m.

7.8 Raas Kaaf (1°51'N., 45°01'E.) is a prominent rocky

promontory. Danane, a village, sits at the foot of a sand hill

near the S end of a bold, rocky point about 15m high. The village is marked by two white tombs on the sand hill behind it

and by a flagstaff, 10m in height, in the village. 

7.8 Anchorage.—Anchorage may be obtained 0.5 mile SSE of

Danane, in 22m, good holding ground. Small vessels may anchor 0.2 mile off the village, in 15m, good holding ground. 

Muqdisho (2°02'N., 45°21'E.)

World Port Index No. 47160

7.9 Muqdisho (Mogadishu) (Mogadiscio) is the principal

port of Somalia and comprises an artificial harbor and an outer

anchorage. Muqdisho is the capital and main commercial center of Somalia.

7.9 The port was reopened in 2006 after being closed for 11

years. 

7.9 Winds—Weather.—In winter, winds are generally from the

NNE in the early part of the day, increasing and shifting to the

ESE later in the day.

7.9 Tides—Currents.—In August, a current with a NE set has

been experienced running nearly parallel to the coast at a velocity of about 3 knots. The SW current usually reaches Mu-
Sector 7. Somalia—Qooriga Kismaayo to Raas Xaafuun 97

Pub. 171

qdisho about the month of December; it is said this current

invariably begins to run with bad weather from the NE. Seas

can build to as much as 2.5 to 3.1m; during the monsoon, seas

can build to up to 6.1m.

7.9 Depths—Limitations.—There is a deep water port with six

berths. The main quay is situated on the inshore side of the S

breakwater. There are three berths (Berth No. 1, Berth No. 2,

and Berth No. 3), with reported depths alongside of 7.6 to

9.8m, although a wreck renders Berth No. 2 unusable. During

the Southwest Monsoon, a heavy strain, caused by the scend in

the basin, is put on the mooring lines of ships using these

berths.

7.9 The Livestock Quay (Berth No. 4) is 160m long, with an

alongside depth of 9.4m. A wreck lies at the S end of the quay.

7.9 The Banana Quay (Berth No. 5 and Berth No. 6) is 340m

long, with alongside depths of 7.6 to 9.4m. Berth No. 5 handles

containers; Berth No. 6 is a ro-ro facility.

7.9 There is a sea berth for tankers 0.1 mile SW of Ras Sif

(2°01'N., 45°20'E.) that will accommodate a vessel of 12.2m

draft. This berth is open to the effects of the Southwest Monsoon, and when the monsoon is blowing strongly the weather

conditions, combined with the poor unmooring facilities, have

been reported to render the berth untenable.

7.9 Berthing and unberthing of vessels in the harbor are restricted to daylight hours only.

7.9 Aspect.—The terrain surrounding the port area consists of

low coastal hills. The entire port area is flat. It was reported

(1982) that the city is visible at 20 to 25 miles from any direction. Among the structures that are good landmarks are the

twin square towers of the cathedral, 1 mile NNE of Ras Sif; a

dark-colored tower 0.7 mile E of the cathedral; and a white

tower just over 1 mile ENE of the cathedral. 

7.9 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for vessels over 200 nrt

and is available during daylight hours only. Pilots board in position 2°01.2'N, 45°20.6'E. 

7.9 Pilots may be requested by International Code of Signals or

by radio on VHF channels 12, 14, 16, or 70. 

7.9 Regulations.—Vessels should send their ETA via their agent

72 hours, 48 hours, and 24 hours in advance.

7.9 Vessels should contact Muqdisho Port Control, on VHF

channels 16 and 70, giving the following information:

1. Vessel name, flag, and call sign.

2. Draft fore and aft.

3. GRT and nrt.

4. Discharge tonnage and type.

7.9 Muqdisho Port Control assigns anchorage or gives berthing

instructions on VHF channels 16 and 70.

7.9 Anchorage.—The roadstead is exposed to the monsoons,

but the holding ground is good. Vessels should anchor 0.5 mile

S of the head of the breakwater in a depth of not less than 13m;

because of the heavy swell, vessels of 9.4m draft or less should

anchor here. Anchoring is prohibited NE of a line drawn in a

130° direction from the light on the S breakwater. 

7.9 Caution.—Anchorage may be difficult to maintain during

the monsoon due to the heavy swells.

7.9 Navigation aids are reported (1996) to be unreliable and subject to change.

Muqdisho to Cadale

7.10 Between Muqdisho and Uarsciech, the coast consists

mainly of low sandy desert backed by reddish-colored hills

dotted with scanty vegetation; there are few projecting points.

7.10 El Maan (2°10'N., 45°36'E.), about 18 miles ENE of Muqdisho, is an anchorage/lighterage port serving as an alternative port for the port of Muqdisho. El Maan also serves as a

trans-shipment port for Ethiopia, Kenya, and other parts of the

Horn of Africa. 

7.10 Tides—Currents.—From December to February, the monsoon-influenced Somali Current flows SW at rates of up to 4

knots. From June to September, it flows NE at rates of up to 5

knots.

7.10 Between the monsoons, currents are variable, with sharp

changes occuring over short distances. Variations in the currents, and higher than expected rates, can be caused by tropical

cyclones.

7.10 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for vessels entering or

leaving the inner anchorage or anchoring in the outer roads and

is available 24 hours. Pilots can be requested on VHF channel

12 or by the Internationa Code flag signal; the pilot boards, as

follows:

1. Vessels from N—in position 2°11.8'N., 45°39.0'E.

2. Vessels from S—in position 2°06.0'N., 45°31.0'E.

7.10 Anchorage.—Vessels awating a pilot or a berth in the cargo

anchorage may anchor, in a depth of 20m, in the vicinity of position 2°19'N., 45°54'E.

7.10 The cargo anchorage is in the vicinity of position 2°09.9'N,

45°55.0'E. This anchorage is exposed.

7.10 Habay (Punta Arai) (2°12'N., 45°39'E.) is a dark rocky

point; from a distant the point resembles an islet. The sand hills

1 mile NW of Habay rise to a height of 70m. The point is fronted by black rocks.

7.10 Caution.—Within the 100m curve, which lies 2 miles off

Habay, depths decrease rapidly. A chain of rocky shoals, with

depths from 2 to 6.7m, lies within the 100m curve from a position 8 miles SW of Habay to a position 15 miles ENE of this

point. This stretch of coast should be given a wide berth.

7.11 Uarsciech (Warshiikh) (2°18'N., 45°48'E.) is a village

situated on steeply rising ground close within a rocky promontory; the village is visible for a considerable distance in clear

Mogadishu Harbor
98 Sector 7. Somalia—Qooriga Kismaayo to Raas Xaafuun 

Pub. 171

weather. Additional prominent landmarks are an official residence about 0.1 mile N of the promontory; a white sandy hill,

63m high; and a hill with twin summits, the highest one 57m,

which lie 1.7 miles WNW and 1.2 miles NNW, respectively, of

the promontory.

7.11 Vessels may cross the off-lying shoal with the beacons in line

350°, in a least depth of 7.6m, and anchor when about 0.7 mile

offshore, in a depth of 27m, sand and coral, good holding

ground. 

7.11 From Uarsciech to Warshiikh (Punta Uarsciech) (2°26'N.,

46°01'E.), 16 miles NE, and then to Cadale, 25 miles farther

NE, the coast is bare, desolate and hilly. Reefs and shoals

fringe the coast from Warshiikh to Cadale and extend over 1

mile offshore in places.

7.11 Collina Murot (2°36'N., 46°11'E.), a hill, rises about 12

miles NE of Warshiikh. Viewed from S, it appears as a small,

regularly-shaped crater, with a dark rim, and is visible between

sandhills which, in this vicinity, are very low. It is not so prominent when seen from N, but its dark rim may be distinguished

between the dunes at some distance. Several ranges of hills,

rising in terraces, parallel with coast, may be seen N of Collina

Murot.

7.12 Cadale (Itala) (2°45'N., 46°20'E.) is a village situated

0.4 mile W of Punta Itala. Moderately-sheltered anchorage

may be obtained in the roadstead during either monsoon.

7.12 Conspicuous features are the official residence, a large building, which was originally a castle, with a flagstaff, situated at

the E end of the village; a palm grove close N of the village,

which has the appearance of an oasis; and Burel Harion Beacon, which stands about 0.4 mile NNW of the official residence.

7.12 The anchorage for large vessels during the Northeast Monsoon is marked by the intersection of the alignments of two

pairs of range beacons. The front beacon of the N of the pair

stands near the coast, about 230m SW of the residence. The

rear beacon stands on Bur el Harion, about 0.4 mile N of the

front beacon. In range the two beacons bear 357.5°. The front

beacon of the S pair stands near the coast about 1.5 miles SW

of the residence, and the rear beacon about 0.5 mile NW of the

front beacon. These beacons, when in line, bear 308.5°. The

anchorage used during the Southwest Monsoon is also marked

by a pair of range beacons. The rear beacon of this pair stands

on Bur el Harion; the front beacon, stands near the coast about

0.4 mile ENE of the rear beacon. These beacons in range, bear

256.5°. The depths in this anchorage are from 7 to 7.9m, sand

and coral.

7.12 During the Northeast Monsoon, vessels drawing less than

6.1m may obtain anchorage W of Secca Volturno, in about 7m,

with the middle pair of range beacons in range and about 0.8

mile from the front beacon. Large vessels may obtain anchorage, in about 9m, close W of the intersection of the alignments

of the middle and S pairs of range beacons, nearly 2 miles

SSW of Punta Itala. 

Cadale to Hobyo

7.13 Between Cadale and Hobyo (Obbia), the coast is generally low and sandy, but a short distant inland the dunes have a

thin covering of grass which after the inter-monsoon rains resembles undulating prairie. The monotonous aspect of this

stretch of coast is broken by numerous white, shifting, sand

hills and by an occasional outcrop of rocks, which chiefly occur in the vicinity of Hobyo.

7.13 During the Southwest Monsoon, the visibility is often poor,

and at times it is severely reduced by sand storms which are especially prevalent off the coast for about 20 miles SW of Hobyo.

7.13 Caution.—There is the possibility of an onshore set of the

current during either monsoon, therefore care is necessary

when approaching the coast, especially in the vicinity of Secca

Dafne (3°58'N., 47°35'E.), a rocky patch with a least known

depth of 8.2m.

7.14 Between Cadale and Ceel Magaad, the coast is low

and fringed by reefs which extend up to 2 miles offshore in

places.

Ceel Magaad (El Meghet) (3°14'N., 46°50'E.) is a small village situated on the sand hills close within the shore. A beacon

consisting of a wall painted in black and white checks, with a

small topmark, is 4.9m high; it stands at an elevation of 12.8m

on the coast near Ceel Magaad.

7.14 Mareeg (Meregh) (3°46'N., 47°18'E.), a village on the coast,

may be readily identified by Massaua Beacon and by several

white-washed stone buildings; the building farthest N is an official residence, and it has a flagstaff. Massaua Beacon, 6.7m

high, stands on a dune 0.2 mile W of the official residence.

7.14 Off Mareeg, the depths decrease regularly from 15m, 3 miles

offshore, to about 8m, 0.7 mile offshore. There is flat rocky

bottom in places, but local pilots state there are no off-lying

dangers. The best anchorage, in 9m, sand, good holding

ground, is about 1 mile from shore.

7.15 From Mareeg to Garable (4°09'N., 47°39'E.), the

coast is, in general, low and sandy, but from Garable to Raas

Cusbad there are elevations from 30 to 90m. A number of villages are situated close inland on this stretch of coast.

7.15 A beacon with an elevation of 22m stands on a sand patch

about 5 miles NE of Mareeg.

7.15 At Madaxweyne (3°53'N., 47°26'E.), a village situated

about 10 miles NE of Mareeg, there are some conspicuous

bushes. Secca Dafne lies about 3.2 miles offshore, 11 miles NE

of Madaxweyne. An isolated shoal patch, with a charted depth

of 8.8m, lies 4 miles offshore in an approximate position 5

miles SE of Madaxweyne.

7.16 Hocti Darute Beacon (4°28'N., 47°57'E.) stands on a

prominent terrace, comprised of limestone and clay, that is

55m high and 3 miles long. The coast adjacent to the terrace is

low and from a distance seaward the terrace resembles an island.

7.16 Raas Cusbad (Ras Assuad) (4°34'N., 48°01'E.) does not

project from the adjoining coastline but consists of a sheer cliff

of black rock 20m high, at a position where there is a slight

bend in the coast. A small belt of sand hills, covered with grass,

is located on Raas Cusbad.

7.16 From Raas Cusbad, the coast trends in a NNE direction. The

intervening coast is low and sandy, with some raised rock terraces about 8 and 15 miles NNE of Raas Cusbad, and with

some sand hills NNE of Ceel Hur.
Sector 7. Somalia—Qooriga Kismaayo to Raas Xaafuun 99

Pub. 171

7.17 Ceel Hur (El Hur) (5°00'N., 48°16'E.) is a small village situated on a sandhill about 15.2m high; the land both N

and S of the village is high. From the S the village may be distinguished by the light red color of the sand dunes behind it and

by the nearly dry bed of the Didinta River. From the N the view

of the village is partly shut in by the coastal sand hills. A good

landmark is the guardhouse, situated about 1 mile inland; it is a

square white house with black and white battlements.

7.17 The offshore depths are regular and vary from 9m about 1

mile off to 20m about 2 miles off. Vessels may anchor, in 10m,

1 mile offshore, with the guardhouse bearing 326°. It should be

noted that a detached coral reef, awash, lies parallel with the

coast a short distance seaward of Ceel Huur.

7.17 Between Ceel Huur and Hobyo, the coast is low and sandy;

an occasional black rock, which shows well against the white

coast, will be found close offshore along this stretch.

7.17 Two ranges of hills run parallel in this area, one close to the

coast the other 1 mile inland. A group of low elongated shifting

white sand hills lie near the coast N of Ceel Hur.

7.17 Hen Daier Beacon (5°09'N., 48°22'E.), 3m high, stands on a

sandhill about 1 mile inland. There is a light-colored patch on

the S side of the sand hill which may help identify the beacon.

7.17 A prominent white, shifting, sand hill is located on the coast

about 4 miles NE of Hen Daier Beacon.

7.18 Hobyo (Obbia) (5°21'N., 48°32'E.) is a small town

situated on a large open undulating plain close inland of Raas

Diga (Punta Diga). During the Northeast Monsoon, the wind

sometimes reaches Force 7, and is characterized by periodic

cessations of up to 2 days at times. During this monsoon, the

current runs strongly to the S.

7.18 The town may be identified by a sandhill S of the town

which has three distinctive peaks. The official residence, a

prominent building with a flagstaff, stands on the summit of a

small sand hill, about 0.9 mile WNW of Raas Diga. Two radio

mast with an elevation of 40m stand close N of the official residence. An anchorage beacon stands 0.3 mile E of the official

residence and another beacon stands 0.6 mile NE of the residence. A fort is situated close WNW of Raas Diga.

7.18 The anchorage off Raas Diga, in 7 to 9m, is good but is entirely exposed; with a fresh wind there is a heavy surf.

7.18 Caution.—Raas Diga (5°21'N., 48°32'E.) is the NE extremity of the rocks which extend NNE from a projection of the

shoreline. Scoglio Sud, two rocks awash, and Scoglio Nord, an

above-water rock, lie on a coastal bank about 0.3 mile and 0.5

mile NNE, respectively, from Raas Diga; there are other rocks

located on the bank.

Hobyo to Raas Gabaac

7.19 Between Hobyo and Raas Cabaad, 65 miles NE, the

coast is bare and receives no rain for the greater part of the

year.

7.19 For 15 miles NNE of Hobyo, the coast consists of a broad

sandy beach fringed with small rocks, awash, extending 0.5

mile offshore, and is backed by the sandy undulating hills

which surround Hobyo.

7.19 Grab Cadde (5°29'N., 48°37'E.) is a village situated on the

coast; a beacon is situated near the village. Another beacon is

situated at the village of Buuq, 7 miles farther NNE; between

these two beacons the coast is fringed by below-water rocks. A

sandhill, 32m high, with dark rocks at its base, lies 2 miles

NNE of Grab Cadde beacon; this sand hill is prominent from

the N.

7.20 From the vicinity of Buuq, the coast gradually rises in

double ridge of terraces from 40 to 52m high, which parallel

the coast for a distant of about 40 miles, and then abruptly terminate. Then the coast is low and sandy to Buur Gool, about 6

miles farther NNE, where it again rises in an isolated rock terrace.

7.20 A minaret, 32m high, stands in a village 7.5 miles NNE of

the beacon in Buuq. Another beacon, 4m high, stands on the

shore at Kalad (Calat) (5°53'N., 48°53'E.),14 miles farther NE;

in clear weather, this beacon is visible from about 16 miles.

7.20 Buur Gool Beacon (Bur Gol Beacon) (6°14'N., 49°04'E.)

stands near the shore. It is conspicuous when seen against the

reddish-colored background, especially from the N. 

7.20 Raas Cabaad (Ras Auad) (6°18'N., 49°05'E.), 4 miles NNE

of Buur Gool, is a slight sandy projection that is backed by

gradually rising ground. Close S of the point, the coast forms a

low level terrace, white at its base and reddish above. Raas

Cabaad is not distinctive.

7.21 From Raas Cabaad to Ras Ilig, the coast is low, sandy,

is fringed by reefs in places, and backed by numerous sand

dunes.

7.21 Garacad (Garad) (6°57'N., 49°19'E.) is the ruins of a fort,

which are visible between the bearings of 335° and 005°. A

beacon and a light are situated in the vicinity of the ruins.

7.21 Il Foocshe is situated on the coast 17 miles NNE of Garacad.

The coast in this area is backed by a prominent line of sand

dunes and inland of the dunes there is a broad flat plain.

7.21 To the N of Il Foocshe, the appearance of the coast changes

and becomes bold and rugged. Between Il Foocshe (7°10'N.,

49°28'E.) and Dhanaane, two well-defined rocky ranges parallel to the coast, are connected by a rocky terrace, which has

randomly spaced patches of greenery.

7.21 This coast has not been well-surveyed and should not be approached closer than 5 miles.

7.21 Ras el Cheil (7°44'N., 49°52'E.) is the farthest S and highest

of three cliffs which jut out from the coast at intervals of 2

miles. A pillar, 2.1m high, stands on the summit of Ras el

Cheil. Punta di Mezzo is lower than Ras el Cheil and Ras Ilig,

the farthest N of the three, is sharp, perpendicular, and has a

height of 35m.

7.21 Qooriga Neegro is formed between Ras Ilig (7°48'N.,

49°50'E.) and Raas Gabbac; there are no known off-lying dangers in the bay.

7.21 Ilig Anchorage (Illig Anchorage) is entered between Ras Ilig

and Xolob (Uadi Gululle), about 4 miles NE. There is indifferent anchorage during the Southwest Monsoon, in 9.1 to 10.9m,

with Ras Ilig bearing 172°, about 1.2 miles distant. The village

of Ilig is situated close within a point W of the anchorage.

7.22 Eyl Marina (7°58'N., 49°51'E.), situated on the N

bank of Nugaal, can readily be distinguished from the S by the

customs house, a mosque, and a white barracks with a verandah with columns. At the entrance of the Nugaal River there is

a red cliff, with two yellow spots under it and a dark round-
100 Sector 7. Somalia—Qooriga Kismaayo to Raas Xaafuun 

Pub. 171

topped hill in back.

7.22 There is good anchorage, in 10m, with the residence bearing

310° distant 0.9 mile, or closer in on the same bearing, in 10m. 

7.22 Raas Gabbac (Ras Gabah) (8°08'N., 50°04'E.), the NE entrance point of Qooriga Neegro, is 106m high. During the

Northeast Monsoon, anchorage may be taken in a small bay on

the S side of Raas Gabbac, in a depth of 15m.

Raas Gabbac to Raas Xaafun

7.23 From Raas Gabbac to Qureexane (8°12'N.,

50°08'E,.), the coast consists of a high wall of cliffs from 75 to

90m high.

7.23 The coast between Qureexane and Raas Macbar is rocky,

bold and inaccessible. It is from 75 to 120m high and backed

by a tableland that is furrowed by the beds of numerous water

courses, which for the most part are dry for the most part of the

year. The sea constantly breaks against the base of the cliffs

which are precipitous in places.

7.23 Between Qureexane and Raas Garmaal, the cliffs are indented and broken by clefts formed by the water courses. From

Raas Garmaal to Raas Durdura, these clefts in the cliffs are

more noticeable.

7.23 Raas Garmaal (8°32'N., 50°19'E.) is a large headland with

precipitous cliffs. A beacon, 4m high, stands at an elevation of

99m at the edge of the cliffs on the point.

7.23 A beacon stands at an elevation of 134m at Bur Load, 5.2

miles N of Raas Garmaal, and an obelisk of rock stands on the

coast 3 miles N of Raas Suud.

7.23 Buurraska (8°39'N., 50°23'E.), an isolated patch with a

least charted depth of 6.8m, lies 2 miles offshore E of the beacon on Bur Load.

7.23 A beacon stands at an elevation of 147m at Marbixis

(8°57'N., 50°30'E.).

7.23 Raas Durdura (9°05'N., 50°39'E.), 108m high is marked by

a beacon.

7.23 Raas Macbar (Ras Mabber) (9°28'N., 50°51'E.) is a rugged

bare rocky point which rise precipitously from the sea to a

height of 40m which then slopes in a series of steep terraces to

an elevation of 138m; it is easily recognized. A beacon stands

about 0.3 mile from the shore near Raas Macbar.

7.23 There are conspicuous sand hills toward Ras Gonded. 

7.24 Bandarbeyla (Bender Beila) (9°30'N., 50°49'E.) is a

small town situated on the coast about 2.8 miles NW of Raas

Macbar. The town stands on a sandy beach at the foot of precipitous cliffs and contains numerous stone buildings, which

are mostly in ruins. A ruin and a low mosque, without a minaret, are found, respectively, on the summit and at the foot of a

hill 70m high located at the center of the village. To the S of

the above hill, and higher than the village, an isolated building,

the former residence, can be seen quite well. Two beacons

stand, respectively, 0.3 mile WSW and 0.9 mile SSE of the hill;

a light stands 0.4 mile S of the village.

7.24 During the Southwest Monsoon, anchorage may be obtained

abreast the town, about 0.8 mile offshore, in a depth of 8m,

with the extremity of Raas Macbar bearing 145° and the light

bearing about 224°. Anchorage may be taken further S, in a

depth of 6m. These anchorages are moderately-sheltered in the

Southwest Monsoon but there is a long swell at the anchorage.

7.24 An isolated patch, with a charted depth of 7.6m, lies 3.2

miles N of Raas Macbar.

7.24 From Bandarbeyla to Raas Gumbax (10°00'N., 50°54'E.), a

slight projection 31 miles N, and then to the vicinity of Foocaat, 20 miles farther N, the coast is bold, rocky, and precipitous.

7.24 From Foocaat, a low narrow isthmus of white sand, shells,

and mud extends, to Xaafun, which is located on the SW part

of J-Sha Xaafun.

7.25 J-Sha Xaafuun (10°26'N., 51°20'E.), a limestone and

sandstone peninsula, rises from the sea in steep cliffs and attains a height of 210m on its S side. As the adjacent coast is

low, the peninsula has the appearance of a large island, especially from the N or S.

7.25 The SW part of J-Sha Xaafuun, within Dentiino, is high and

flat; from a distance it appears separated from the rest of the

peninsula as the intervening land is low.

Raas Xaafuun (Ras Hafun) (10°26'N., 51°25'E.), the E extremity of J-Sha Xaafuun, is flat; a light is exhibited from its

summit.

7.25 Gacanka Xaafuun Koof (Xaafun South Anchorage) lies W of

Dentiino (10°23'N., 51°16'E.), the SW extremity of J-Sha

Xaafuun. During the Northeast Monsoon, the wind blows

across the peninsula and a cross swell rolls into the greater part

of the anchorage.

7.25 A beacon stands on Dentiino; the village of Xaafuun (Dante)

is situated near the beach 2 miles N of the point. There is a

dark-colored tower at the W end of the village and a mosque at

the E end. Monte Conico, 0.5 mile N of Xaafuun, is a bare conical hill 83m high; it only becomes prominent on close approach. A prominent two-story loading station, with a flagstaff on

its seaward side, is situated about 1 mile SW of Xaafuun; it is connected to the land by an aerial ropeway supported by pylons.

7.25 There is a wharf, with a depth of 10m at the loading station,

but vessels should not load to a draft of more than 7.9m, as

there is danger of bumping on the stony bottom should a particularly heavy swell set in.

7.25 Anchorage.—Anchorage may be obtained off Xaafuun during

the Northeast Monsoon, in depths of 10 to 12m, rock covered with

sand and loose stones, poor holding ground. The anchorage, about

0.3 mile S of the loading station, should be approached with

Mount Conico or the loading station bearing 030°.

7.25 For the coast of Africa N of Raas Xaafuun, see Pub. 172,

Sailing Directions (Enroute) Red Sea and the Persian Gulf.
Pub. 171

8. West Indian Ocean—The Seychelles Islands to the Chagos Archipelago

8.0Additional chart coverage may be found in NGA/DLIS Catalog of Maps, Charts, and Related Products (Unlimited Distribution).

SECTOR 8 — CHART INFORMATION
103

Pub. 171

SECTOR 8 

WEST INDIAN OCEAN—THE SEYCHELLES ISLANDS TO THE CHAGOS ARCHIPELAGO

8.0 Plan.—This sector sets forth a description of several groups

of islands lying in the W portion of the Indian Ocean between

India and Madagascar. These several groups are the Seychelles

Islands, the Amirante Islands, Ile Alphonse, the Agalega Islands, and the Chagos Archipelago.

General Remarks 

8.1 The Seychelles Islands rise from Seychelles Bank, an

extensive coral reef contained within an area between 3°40'S

and 6°35'S, and 53°56'E and 57°10'E. A vessel must pass over

some portion of the bank to reach the islands.

8.1 A vessel found that a nearly continuous rim of relatively

shallow water extends from Cows Island to the W extremity of

Seychelles Bank, and then for a considerable distance around

its S side. It is possible many dangerous shoals may exist on

this rim besides those known, and vessels are advised not to

cross Seychelles Bank N of latitude of 5°S, except by described

routes.

8.1 Caution and vigilance of more than ordinary intensity are demanded of the navigator traversing Seychelles Bank; soundings should be taken continuously. 

8.1 Areas to be Avoided.—Two IMO-adopted Areas to be

Avoided have been established within the Seychelles group, E

and W of Mahe Island, and may best be seen on the chart. Vessels greater than 200 grt should avoid entering the Seychelles

Bank area, which includes the waters between the Areas to be

Avoided and the approach routes to Port Victoria, as the area

has not been surveyed to modern standards, and uncharted dangers may exist. Vessels should navigate with caution.

8.1 Vessels should note that the charted boundaries of the Port

Victoria approach routes are not affected by the Areas to be

Avoided, although they overlap in several locations.

8.1 Note.—Vessels proceeding to Port Victoria are required, as

far as practicable, to stay within the N and S approach limits as

indicated on the chart.

8.1 The N approach is made from a position about 16 miles E of

Ile aux Vaches (Cows Island) at the N end of Seychelles Bank.

8.1 The S approach is made from a position 26 miles SSW of

Police Pointe (4°48'S., 55°31'E.), the SW extremity of Mahe

Island, at the S end of Seychelles Bank.

8.1 The Amirante Islands rise from a bank of coral and sand

whose N extremity lies between 4°51'S and 6°17'S, and

52°50'E and 53°24'E.

8.1 The Amirante Islands are flat and are formed of coral; none

attain a height greater the 6.1m, but they are usually visible up

to 10 to 14 miles, depending on the height of the palms on each

islet.

8.1 There are several islets and a number of coral reefs on the

bank which dry. Depths over the bank are generally deeper S of

D’Arros Island (5°25'S., 53°18'E.) than N of it. There is a lip

along both the E and W edges of the bank with depths which

vary from 10.1 to 35m and are usually about 19.8m.

8.1 All of the islets are flat, sandy, and fringed with coral reefs.

South Island of the African Islands; Sand Cay, 6 miles NW of

Poivre Island; and Etoile Cay and Boudeuse Cay on the SW

side of the bank are bare. Coconut trees up to 24m tall grow on

the other islands; they are visible at a distance up to 14 miles.

8.1 Vessels are advised not to navigate over Amirante Bank as

soundings give little are no warning of the approach to the islands. The currents on the bank are strong and uncertain in direction. The anchorages, when obtainable, are usually insecure.

8.1 Saya de Malha Bank is an extensive bank which has a distinct division between its N and S part; the S part is much larger. The two parts, which are steep-to, lie between 8°16'S and

11°46'S, and 59°37'E and 62°30'E.

8.1 The bottom appears to be coral when in depths of less than

60m and fine sand in greater depths.

8.1 Poydenot Rock is covered with 8m; a depth of 7m is charted

in a position 90 miles NW of Poydenot Rock. Charting is incomplete and lesser depths than those shown on the chart could

exist; extreme care should be taken when in transit in the vicinity of this bank.

8.1 Routes.—The shipping routes between Cape Town and ports

on the W coast of India, Sri Lanka, and the Bay of Bengal pass

NW of Seychelles Bank and NW of the N end of the bank

where the Amirante Islands are situated. 

8.1 The routes between ports of central E Africa and Australia or

to the Far East taken via Sunda Strait usually pass N of Seychelles Bank.

8.1 The routes taken between Port Louis (Mauritius) and the

Gulf of Aden or to other Red Sea ports pass E of Seychelles

Bank. 

8.1 Caution.—Vessels conducting seismic surveys on Seychelles Bank are to be given a wide berth.

8.1 Fishing activity in these waters occurs year round; all fishing

activity and equipment should be given a wide berth. See Pub.

160, Sailing Directions (Planning Guide) South Atlantic Ocean

and Indian Ocean for more information. 

The Seychelles Islands

8.2 Ile aux Vaches (Cows Island) (3°43'S., 55°12'E.), the

farthest N of the Seychelles Islands, is a flat island of coral and

sand which hardly exceeds 2m in height. Clusters of casuarina

trees and coconut palms rise in the interior while its shore is

generally bordered by thick brush, except at the N end, from

which a sand spit extends for about 0.2 mile. There is an airstrip on the SE side of the island which provides daily communications with Mahe.

8.2 Bar Silhouette, a shoal with a depth of 7.3m, is located 4

miles S of Cows Island.

8.2 Denis Island (3°48'S., 55°40'E.) is a low flat island marked

by a light. It has been reported (1991) that the light may be obscured by trees. 

8.2 A shallow bank, with depths less than 10m, extends 2.5

miles N of the island; depths from 4.5 to 5.5m lie up to 1.8

miles from the NW through N to NE of the island. More coral
104 Sector 8. West Indian Ocean—The Seychelles Islands to the Chagos Archipelago 

Pub. 171

heads than charted are likely to exist on the bank and a ship

should exercise extreme caution when navigating within 3

miles N of Denis Island.

8.2 Anchorage may be taken W of Denis Island in depths of 35

to 40m, sand and coral. 

8.2 Surf breaks heavily on the E and S shores of the island during the Southeast Trade Winds.

8.2 Bar de l’Est (3°47'S., 55°50'E.) is a shoal with general

depths of 13 to 18m; a coral head, with a depth of 8.5m, is located on the E side of the bar.

Mahe Island

8.3 Mahe Island (4°40'S., 55°28'E.), the largest of the

Seychelles Islands, is mountainous and generally wooded; on

clear days its summit can be seen about 50 miles. Mahe Island

is traversed by a range of hills and mountains that are separated

by many deep ravines with sheer cliffs; the summits of the

range are conspicuous.

8.3 Morne Seychellois (4°39'S., 55°26'E.) rises to a height of

913m; it is comprised of four peaks. During the Southeast

Monsoon, the summit of this mountain is nearly always obscured by clouds.

8.3 Trois Freres (4°38'S., 55°26'E.), 767m high, rises 0.5 mile

N of Morne Seychellois; it dominates the city of Victoria.

8.3 Mount Simpson is the most prominent of several peaks in the

range extending WNW from Morne Seychellois; it may be

identified by a distinctive thumb-shaped rock on its summit.

8.3 Morne Blanc, 0.7 mile SSW of Morne Seychellois, is steep

with remarkable cliffs about its upper part and a rounded summit; it rises to a height of 666m.

8.3 Mount Harrison (4°41'S., 55°29'E.) rises to a height of

688m 3.2 miles SE of Morne Seychellois. A radio tower,

marked by obstruction lights, can be seen at a great distance by

a vessel coming from the SW.

8.3 Mount Sebert (4°41'S., 55°30'E.), 550m high, is located

about 1.8 miles E of Mount Harrison; Cascade Valley is

formed between these peaks.

8.3 Castle Peak, 2.5 miles SE of Mount Harrison, is conspicuous; it has three summits. The middle peak of Castle Peak is

bare rock, broad, and flat with a distinctive thumb-shaped rock

on its S side.

8.4 Southwest side.—The SW side of Mahe Island is indented by several small bays fronted by steep-to reefs; anchorage can generally be taken outside the reefs by vessels with

local knowledge.

8.4 Pointe Lazare (4°46'S., 55°28'E.) is the S extremity of Lazare Headland. Two conspicuous conical hills are located on the

headland; the outer hill is 148m high while the inner hill is

210m high.

8.4 Boileau Bay is entered between Lazare Headland and

Therese Island. Chauve Souris, a rocky islet, lies 0.2 mile NW

of the N extremity of Lazare Headland; it shows conspicuously

white against the mainland. Isle Vache, 54m high, is located

0.3 mile offshore, 3.5 miles NNW of Isle Vache; it shows white

from seaward.

8.4 Trois Dames, a rock with a depth less than 1.8m, lies nearly

1 mile NW of Isle Vache; the sea breaks heavily over it.

8.4 Vessels with local knowledge can anchor in several places in

Boileau Bay, but the preferred anchorages are in Anse la

Mouche, on the N side of Lazare Headland, and in Anse Boileau, 1.7 miles NNE of the headland; the former anchorage is

well protected from the swell.

8.4 A prohibited area about 0.6 mile long extends about 0.6 mile

offshore, close NW of Anse Boileau; its seaward corners are

marked by special buoys.

8.4 Ternay Pass leads between Conception Island (4°40'S.,

55°22'E.) and the Ternay Peninsula, 0.7 mile NE. A strong current sets through the pass; its direction is invariably N during

the Southeast Monsoon.

8.4 Pilot Patches (4°42'S., 55°20'E.) are three coral patches

with a least charted depth of 18m; in good weather, the bottom

can be distinctly seen. A fishery raft is anchored 3 miles W of

the patches.

8.4 Stork Patch (4°43'S., 55°25'E.), comprised of coral, has a

least depth of 5.5m; it lies in the approach to Boileau Bay, 2.7

miles SW of Isle Vache. The sea does not always break over

this patch, but the swell increases near it. An isolated patch,

Denis Island Light
Sector 8. West Indian Ocean—The Seychelles Islands to the Chagos Archipelago 105

Pub. 171

with a depth of 18.3m, lies 0.7 mile WNW of Stork Patch.

8.5 Northwest side.—Cape Ternay (4°38'S., 55°22'E.)

is the NW extremity of Mahe Island; it is marked by a light.

The cape is steep-to, and a cross stands near its extremity.

8.5 Baie Ternay, formed on the E side of Cape Ternay, is well

sheltered, but its head is filled by a steep-to reef which does not

show in any way.

8.5 North Islet, 0.5 mile W of North Point, is 15.5m high; it is

easily seen when clear of the land. Patches of 5.5m lie 0.2 mile

W and 2.5 miles WSW, respectively, of North Islet.

8.5 Requin Bank (4°34'S., 55°22'E.), formed of coral, with a

depth of 19.6m, lies 4 miles W of North Islet. A fishery raft

marked by a red flag is moored on the bank; similar rafts are

moored 4 miles W and 7.2 miles SW of the bank.

8.5 From April to November, the Southeast Trade Winds often

blow with considerable force from the hills that encircle North

West Bay.

8.6 East side.—Police Pointe (4°48'S., 55°31'E.), the S

extremity of Mahe Island, has a rounded summit, 65m high, covered with coconut palms; it is steep-to, except off its W side,

where there is a rock with a depth less than 1.8m. A light exhibited from a height of 62m marks the point.

8.6 Capucin Rock (4°49'S., 55°31'E.), awash, lies 0.5 mile

SSW of the light on Police Point; the sea breaks heavily over it.

8.6 Pointe du Sud (4°48'S., 55°32'E.), 1 mile E of Police Point,

is high and nearly steep-to; a rock, 0.9m high, lies close S of

the point.

8.6 Pointe Capucins (4°47'S., 55°32'E.) is located 1 mile N of

Pointe du Sud; Anse Marie-Louise indents the coast between

Pointe Capucins and Cap Lascars.

8.6 Anse Royale indents the shore between Cap Lascars and Sel

Point, about 2.5 miles N. A conspicuous white church stands

on the shore of the bay at its head.

8.6 South East Island (4°41'S., 55°32'E.), 63m high, is joined

to the mainland at its SW extremity. An international airport

has been built fronting the coast W of South East Island.

8.7 Northeast side.—From South East Island, the coast

trends in a general NW direction to North Point. It is fronted by

numerous islands and rocks, and is the location of Port Victoria.

8.7 Recif Island (4°35'S., 55°46'E.) is 48m high and has a distinctive white rock shaped like a building on its summit. Submerged rocks extend 0.5 mile SE and SW from the S extremity

of the island, and a rock, 4.6m high, is located 0.5 mile SE of

that point. Depths of less than 5.5m extend 0.2 mile N and W

of the island. An 18.3m patch and a 16.5m patch lie 1.2 miles

NW and 1 mile W, respectively, of Recif Island.

8.7 Caution.— Between Recif Island and Saint Anne Island, the

bottom is very uneven; eddies and ripples are frequently encountered.

8.8 Rat Island (4°40'S., 55°32'E.) lies close offshore, 0.3

mile NNE of South East Island. Tortue Rock lies about 0.3

mile E of Rat Island; the sea usually breaks on the rock, but in

calm weather it is sometimes scarcely visible at HW.

8.8 Cerf Island (Ile au Cerf) (4°38'S., 55°30'E.), 3.7 miles NW

of South East Island, is the farthest S of the principal islands

fronting Port Victoria; it rises to a height of 107m. Long Island,

Round Island, and Moyenne Island lie 0.3 mile NE, 0.4 mile N,

and 0.6 mile NNE, respectively, of Cerf Island. All four of

these islands lie on a large coral reef, covered with sand, which

dries in patches and on which there are numerous coral heads.

8.8 Saint Anne Island (4°36'S., 55°30'E.), the farthest N and

largest of the islands fronting Port Victoria, lies 0.4 mile NNW

of Moyenne Island. It is separated from the coral reef surrounding Moyenne Island by Saint Anne Channel.

8.8 It was reported (1990) that the light structure on Sainte Anne

Island was obscured by foliage and not visible in daylight.

8.8 A pipeline extends N from the W side of Cerf Island to the

SW extremity of Saint Anne Island, and SSW from Cerf Island

to Brillant Point on Mahe Island. Anchorage is prohibited in

the vicinity of the pipelines.

8.8 Caution.—Sainte Anne Channel, as well as Sainte Anne Island, Ile au Cerf, Ile Longue, and Ile Moyenne, are now part of

Sainte Anne Marine National Park. The boundary of the national park is marked by buoys and is best seen on the chart.

These islands and their surrounding reefs are governed by local

regulations. 

8.9 Harrison Rock (Ile Seche) (4°38'S., 55°32'E.), 8m

high, lies a little over 1 mile E of Long Island; it is the highest

and largest of several rocks enclosed by a 10m curve.

8.9 There is an established Nature Reserve on Ile Seche which is

governed by local regulations. A dumping ground lies with its

center about 0.8 mile SE of Harrison Rock. 

8.9 Beacon Island (4°37'S., 55°31'E.), 31m high, lies 1 mile

NNW of Harrison Rock, in the approach to Saint Anne Channel. It is fringed by a shallow bank, except on its SW side. An

isolated patch, with a depth of 4.4m, lies about 0.3 mile SW of

Harrison Rock. 

Port Victoria (4°37'S., 55°27'E.)

World Port Index No. 47220

8.10 Port Victoria is located on the NE side of Mahe Island. The port consists of an outer harbor, an inner harbor, and

a town which is the capital and the seat of government.

8.10 The port authority is the Seychelles Department of Transport

and Marine Services Division, which is represented by a port director and a harbormaster. The Port Office and Customs Office are

situated at the NW end of the quay at the New Port Area.

8.10 Depths—Limitations.—The N entrance is the most important channel to Victoria Harbor; it is marked by lights, beacons,

and buoys. Saint Anne Channel is not considered safe for vessels drawing more than 2.5m, due to an extensive reef at its W

end. Cerf Passage is navigable by vessels drawing up to 4.5m.

The depths over the shoal heads and patches in Cerf Passage

are 3.6 to 5.4m; none of these dangers are marked. A vessel

should not attempt passage unless the light is favorable.

8.10 Extensive dredging and landfill operations are being conducted in Victoria Harbor. The area immediately N of Long

Port Victoria Home Page 

http://www.spa.sc
106 Sector 8. West Indian Ocean—The Seychelles Islands to the Chagos Archipelago 

Pub. 171

Pier has been filled and the area NE of the filled area has been

dredged to 7.5m. The area 0.3 mile SW of Victoria Light, on

the NW side of the channel, was dredged to a depth of 12.5m.

The reef area 0.3 mile SSW of Victoria Light and the same distance NE of the wharf, has been dredged to a depth of 13m.

8.10 The inner harbor has been dredged to a depth of 10.7m within an area 0.2 mile in diameter.

8.10 In the New Port Area, Berth No. 1, at the NW end of Mahe

Quay, is normally used by tankers and vessels discharging bulk cement; it will accommodate tankers up to 174m in length. Berth

No. 2 will accommodate vessels up to 244m in length; quarter

ramp ro-ro vessels can berth at the quay. The maximum draft permitted at the berths is 10.2m.

8.10 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for any vessel of or exceeding 150 grt to either the outer or inner harbor and is available 24 hours. The pilot will embark in position 4°35.9'S,

55°29.6'E. The vessel’s ETA should be sent 72 hours, 48 hours,

and 24 hours in advance.. Movement in the inner harbor is permitted in daylight only. Pilots can be contacted on VHF channel 17.

Regulations.—Victoria Port Control has established a reporting system on VHF channel 12. Inbound and outbound

vessels are to radio Victoria Port Control when passing the following Reporting Points: 

1. North Reporting Point—position 4°23'S, 55°29'E.

2. South Reporting Point—position 4°40'S, 55°37'E.

8.10 Vessels must give 12 hours notice at the Port Office prior to

departure. No vessel may call at any of the Seychelles Islands

unless Government permission has been obtained at Victoria.

8.10 Signals.—The signal tower is situated in the New Port Area;

the berth to be taken by incoming vessels will normally be indicated by signal.

8.10 Anchorage.—The master should always contact the harbormaster for anchorage instructions. Anchorage No. 3 and Anchorage No. 4, best seen on chart, are situated to the NW of the

entrance channel, in depths of 24 to 26m, sand, silt, and coral.

It has been reported that a pilot is not required if directed to

these anchorages. 

8.10 These anchorages are open N and a swell is sometimes felt.

The Southeast Trade Winds seldom blow hard, but during the

Northwest Monsoon, heavy gusts come off the high land.

8.10 The most convenient anchorage is in the inner harbor, in

depths of 16 to 18m, opposite the large warehouse on the head

of Long Pier.

Port Victoria—Inner Harbor

Port Victoria—New Port Area

Port Victoria Harbor
Sector 8. West Indian Ocean—The Seychelles Islands to the Chagos Archipelago 107

Pub. 171

8.10 Directions.—From a position at the S end of the outer harbor 1.1 miles NE of Victoria Light, follow a 249° range line

which leads to the seaward end of the inner harbor entrance

channel. An alternate approach to reach the inner harbor from

the anchorages is to follow a 264° range line.

The Seychelles Islands (continued)

8.11 Anse Etoile (4°35'S., 55°27'E.) is formed between

Pointe Conan, 0.7 mile N of Port Victoria, and North East

Point (4°35'S., 55°28'E.), 1.5 miles NNE. An aero light is exhibited from a metal framework tower, 3m high, on the summit

of North East Point. Seven orange and white radio masts, 46 to

91m high, stand on the coastal reef within 0.2 mile of a building situated 0.4 mile SSE of the N entrance point of Anse

Etoile. Each of the radio masts is marked by obstruction lights.

An overhead structure, supported by gantries 9m high, extends

W from the building to the shore. The structure and building

are marked by lights.

8.11 Boats should keep clear of the area under the masts. There is

a boat passage under the structure, with a vertical clearance of

9m, 0.2 mile W of the building.

8.11 Caution.—Brisans Rocks (4°32'S., 55°29'E.) is comprised

of above and below-water rocks; the rock farthest NW is 6m

high. There are several patches, with depths of 14m, in the vicinity of the rocks.

8.11 In the area between Brisans Rocks and Mamelle Island, 4

miles NE, there is a bank of sand with rock pinnacles; more

pinnacles than charted may exist and soundings give no warning of the proximity of the dangers.

8.12 Silhouette Island (4°30'S., 55°14'E.) lies about 11.8

miles WNW of Mahe Island; it is mountainous and is primarily

covered with coconut palms. Mon Plaisir rises to a height of

752m on the W side of the island. The S side of the island presents long shelving faces of rock, descending from a considerable elevation to the water’s edge; the entire coast is

moderately steep-to.

8.12 There is anchorage, for vessels with local knowledge, N of

Haddon Point (4°29'S., 55°15'E.), the E extremity of the island, off a steep-to reef, which dries, about 1.8m. Anchorage

may also be taken off Grande Barbe, on the SW side of the island.

8.12 Hope Knoll, a 29m patch, lies 5.7 miles WSW of Silhouette

Island.

8.12 North Island (4°23'S., 55°15'E.), when seen from the N, has

a bare and desolate appearance, with only a few trees showing

near its summit.

8.13 Praslin Island (4°20'S., 55°44'E.) has a range of hills

extending along its whole length that rises to a height of 384m

near its center. The lower parts of this range of hills are covered

with trees. The SW, S, and NE sides of the island are fringed by

reefs, which extend up to 1.3 miles offshore.

8.13 Millers Point (4°17'S., 55°41'E.) is the NW extremity of

Praslin Island; vessels should proceed with extreme caution in

the vicinity of this point. Les Parisiennes, three small abovewater rocks, lies 1 mile S of Millers Point.

8.13 Chevalier Bay is formed between Millers Point and Chevalier Point, about 1 mile E. Depths of 14.6m in the entrance of

the bay shoal gradually to a sandy beach at its head.

8.13 Adriens Shoal (4°16'S., 55°40'E.), whose position is doubtful, has a depth of 6.5m; it lies about 1.3 miles N of Millers

Point. Anchorage may be taken in the bay during the Southeast

Monsoon; it can be approached from the N.

8.14 Round Island (4°21'S., 55°47'E.), 76m high, lies off

the fringing reef, 0.5 mile off the SE extremity of Praslin Island. There is no safe anchorage S of Praslin Island during the

months of May to November, when the SE trades are at their

strongest, but at other times anchorage may be taken, in 23m,

with the summit of Round Island bearing 025°, distant 0.5

mile.

8.14 Curieuse Bay (4°18'S., 55°43'E.) is formed between the NE

shore of Praslin Island and the S shore of Curieuse Island.

There is a safe navigable channel 0.4 mile wide that may be approached from the E. In the passage between the islands depths

are uneven and depths of less than 7m extend up to 0.2 mile

from the shore on both sides of the passage.

8.14 Zanguilles Point projects from the coast of Praslin Island opposite the S extremity of Curieuse Island; Saint Pierre Islet lies

0.8 mile ENE of Zanguilles Point. Foul ground extends 0.1

mile NW of Saint Pierre islet.

8.14 Vessels of moderate draft may anchor in Curieuse Bay, in a

charted depth of 27m, with Saint Pierre Islet bearing 088°, distant 2.3 miles. Vessels should approach the anchorage from the

E on a course of 265°, taking care to clear the foul ground extending NW from Saint Pierre Islet.

The Seychelles Islands—Off-lyings Islets and

Dangers

8.15 Mamelles Island (4°29'S., 55°32'E.), marked by a

light, lies in the N approach route to Port Victoria in a position

13 miles SW of Praslin Island; a dangerous rock lies 0.2 mile

Port Victoria Entrance Light
108 Sector 8. West Indian Ocean—The Seychelles Islands to the Chagos Archipelago 

Pub. 171

W of the light. A wreck, with a depth of 1.2m, lies 1.2 miles

SW of Mamelle Island. There are other shoal patches in the vicinity of the wreck which may best be seen on the chart.

8.15 Madge Rocks, which cover at HW, lie 5.2 miles NNE of Mamelle Island. The summit of Saint Anne Island (4°36'S.,

55°30'E.), bearing less than 195° and open W of Mamelle Island, leads W of Madge Rocks.

8.15 Trompeuse Rocks (4°23'S., 55°36'E.), 2.7 miles ENE of

Madge Rocks, are 1.8m high. There is a rock, awash, 0.3 mile

NW of the main group. An isolated patch, with a depth of

20.1m, lies 5.5 miles W of Trompeuse Rocks.

8.15 Cousine Island, 77m high, lies 3 miles NE of Trompeuse

Rocks; the intervening channel is reported to be foul and unsafe to transit.

8.15 North Cousin, an island 66m high, lies about 1.5 miles NE of

Cousine Island and about the same distance SW of Les Parisiennes. The area between North Cousin and Whale Rocks, 2

miles N, is fouled by numerous shoal patches; these patches

may best be seen on the chart.

8.15 Whale Rocks, 1.5 miles W of Millers Point, are two rocky

heads that uncover at half tide.

8.15 Booby Island, 28m high, lies 2 miles N of Millers Point.

Aride Island, 135m high, lies 2.7 miles NNW of Booby Island;

it is surrounded by foul ground.

8.16 La Digue (4°21'S., 55°50'E.), located with its N extremity 2.5 miles E of Pointe La Farine, the E extremity of

Praslin Island, is flat along its W coast, with a ridge on its E

side rising to a height of 326m. Its W side is fringed by a reef

extending 0.2 mile offshore. 

8.16 Caution.—A submarine power cable extends W to the E

shore of Praslin Island.

8.16 Les Roches Canales lie nearly in the middle of the channel

between Praslin Island and La Digue; they uncover 1.2m.

8.16 An isolated patch, with a depth of 5.8m, lies 0.3 mile WNW

of the NW extremity of La Digue and Ave Maria Rock

(4°19'S., 55°49'E.), 17.4m high, lies 1.5 miles NNW of the

same point. There are other dangers in this area which may be

seen on the chart.

8.17 Caiman Rock (4°24'S., 55°46'E.) lies in a position 4

miles WSW of the W extremity of La Digue. Shark Rock,

above water, lies 0.5 mile S of Caiman Rock. There are several

charted depths of 9.1m or less within a 1 mile radius of Caiman

Rock.

8.17 The S extremity of La Digue, bearing 068° and in line with

the S extremity of Marianne Island, leads about 0.4 mile S of

Shark Rock.

8.17 Marianne Island (4°21'S., 55°55'E.), lying 4 miles E of La

Digue, is 130m high; it is steep-to except on its W side. An isolated bank, with a depth of 37m, lies 8 miles E of Marianne Island.

8.17 Felicite Island is 228m high, its S extremity lies 2 miles W of

the N extremity of Marianne Island. Albatross Rocks, above

and below-water, lie on a foul area about 0.4 mile NNW of Felicite Island.

8.17 Grand Soeur (4°17'S., 55°52'E.), 113m high, lies 1.2 miles

N of Felicite Island. Petite Soeur lies close W of Grand Soeur.

A spit, with a least charted depth of 2.1m, extends 0.7 mile

NNW from Petite Soeur.

8.17 Renommee Rock (4°27'S., 55°51'E.), 4.5 miles S of La

Digue, is 0.3m high; it covers at half tide. Chimney Rocks,

6.1m high, lie 1.5 miles ESE of Renommee Rock. There is a

charted depth of 4m located 0.5 mile SSW of Chimney Rocks.

8.18 Frigate Island (4°35'S., 55°57'E.) 122m high, lying

7.5 miles SSE of Chimney Rocks, is the farthest E of the Seychelles group. The E and NE sides of the island are fringed by

reefs which break. 

8.18 Caution.—Pyramid Rock lies close off the E extremity of

Frigate Island; a dangerous rock lies 0.4 mile SSE of Pyramid

Rock. Noddy Rock, awash at HW, breaks heavily; it lies about

0.6 mile NNW of Frigate Island.

8.19 L’Ilot (4°36'S., 55°54'E.), 24m high, lies 2 miles

WSW of Frigate Island; a submerged reef extends 0.3 mile W

from the islet. An isolated depth of 10.1m lies 2 miles NNW of

L’Ilot, and a depth of 12m lies about 0.2 mile farther NNW.

Barracouta Rock, which breaks, has a depth of less than 1.8m.

8.19 There is good anchorage for vessels, with local knowledge,

off NE and SE sides of Frigate Island; the SE side is preferred

during the Northwest Monsoon.

8.19 Topaze Bank (4°41'S., 56°20'E.), on the SE side of Seychelles Bank, is reported to lie between 8 and 28 miles E of

Frigate Island; it has a least depth of 12.8m. 

8.19 Zoroaster Shoal (5°00'S., 56°40'E.) has a depth of 12.8m.

In the vicinity of this shoal are several patches with depths of

16.5m; their positions may best be seen on the chart. La Junon,

a bank with a depth of 18.3m, lies 27 miles SE of Zoroaster

Shoal; a depth of 16.5m lies 8 miles SW of the charted 18.3m

depth.

8.19 Gilberte Bank (5°07'S., 55°40'E.), with a depth of 11m, lies

22 miles SSE of Mahe Island.

8.19 Plate Island (5°52'S., 55°24'E.) is separated from the S side

of Seychelles Bank. The low and wooded island is visible at a

distance from 10 to 12 miles. Barrier reefs, over which the sea

breaks heavily, extend 3 miles N, about 0.5 mile E, and 1.5

miles S of the island. Within the barrier reefs, the lagoon is

quite smooth, and landing is safe and easy. Numerous 2.7m

coral heads lie within 2 miles W of the island. There are two

intricate passages through the reef on the NW side, available

for small vessels with local knowledge only.

8.19 La Perle Reef lies about 10 miles SW of Platte Island.

Depths of less than 4m can exist on this reef where breakers

have been observed.

8.20 Le Constant Bank (6°17'S., 56°18'E.) has a least

charted depth of 20.1m; it is an extension of Seychelles Bank.

8.20 Coetivy Island (7°06'S., 56°16'E.) forms part of the Republic of Seychelles. Vessels passing S of the island should not approach closer than 6 miles.

8.20 Vessels can anchor anywhere off the W side of Coetiyy Island. Excellent shelter from the Southeast Trade Winds is

available in the large bay indenting that shore of the island. The

most convenient position is off the settlement. 

8.20 Fortune Bank (7°12'S., 56°59'E.) extends about 30 miles E

and 25 miles SSE, with general depths of less than 31m.

8.20 Andromache Shoal (3°51'S., 54°50'E.) has a least charted

depth of 9.1m. Vigilant Shoal, 8 miles WSW of Andromache

Shoal, has a least depth of 11m; the two shoals apparently lie
Sector 8. West Indian Ocean—The Seychelles Islands to the Chagos Archipelago 109

Pub. 171

on the same ridge.

8.20 Swan Shoal (3°59'S., 54°34'E.) has a least known depth of

5.5m, although lesser depths have been reported over this

shoal. 

8.20 Dupont Shoal, with a depth of 6.4m, lies 17 miles SSW of

Swan Shoal.

8.20 Roberts Bank (4°22'S., 54°12'E.) has a least charted depth

of 15.5m. The W side of the bank is steep-to; the 200m line lies

1.5 miles NW of the bank and a charted depth of 443m lies adjacent to its N end.

8.20 Hermes Bank, with a depth of 12.8m, lies 10 miles SSW of

Roberts Bank and Owen Bank (4°40'S., 54°00'E.), with a

charted depth of 14.6m, lies 10 miles farther SSW. Owen Bank

is the farthest SW of Seychelles Bank.

8.20 From Owen Bank, Seychelles Bank trends in a general ESE

for about 95 miles to a position about 28 miles SSW of Mahe

Island, the entrance to the S approach to that island. Seychelles

Bank is steep-to in this sector, with many depths less than

18.3m. In the entrance to the S approach there are reported

depths of 33m and a 22m depth is reported to lie close E of the

entrance. These shoal patches may be seen on the chart.

8.20The Amirante Islands Group

8.21 The Amirante Islands Gtoup, centered in position

5°35'S, 53°15'E, consists of a chain of small islands lying

mostly on the E side of the extensive bank located S of Seychelles Bank. It is very dangerous to make a passage between

them when heading on a course more than 180°. In the daytime, they may be seen at distances of 8 miles, but at night they

may be invisible even to a vessel on the E portion of the reef

from which the islands rise.

8.21 The Amirante Islands Group consists of Desroches, Desnceufs, Boudeuse, Poivre, Sand Cay, Saint Joseph, and Remire,

as well as North Island and South Island on Bancs Africains. 

8.21 Bancs Africains, comprised of North Island (4°53'S.,

53°24'E.) and South Island, lies 1.75 miles SSW. North Island

is marked by a light. 

8.21 In the Southeast Trade Winds, the swell breaks violently on

the SE side of the bank surrounding the islands and the sea is

often rough at its N extremity because of currents.

8.21 Anchorage may be taken, in 14m, 0.8 mile W of North Island Light; the anchorage is sheltered from the SE swell. There

is also anchorage 1 mile NW of South Island, in a depth of

10m; this anchorage is preferred.

8.21 Lady Denison Pender Shoal (4°49'S., 53°20'E.) has a charted depth of 14.6m.

8.21 Remire Reef (5°05'S., 53°21'E.) dries in patches at LW and

extends about 3.5 miles SSW.

8.21 Remire Island (5°07'S., 53°19'E.), marked by a light, lies

1.5 miles W of the S extremity of Remire Reef. The trees on

Remire Island are 15.2m high to their tops and are usually visible up to 12 miles distant. Anchorage has been taken, in 14m,

about 0.2 mile N of the island with its E extremity bearing 137°

and its W extremity bearing 186°.

8.21 Caution.—Navigation in the area between North Island and

Remire Island should be avoided except during daylight and in

good weather; the bottom is foul in places throughout the entire

area. In favorable conditions the bottom may be plainly seen in

depths of 22m.

8.21 The area between Remire Island and D’Arros Island, 28

miles S, is similarly encumbered. 

8.22 D’Arros Island (5°25'S., 53°18'E.) is of the usual

coral type, flat, and nowhere more than 3m high; the tops of the

trees are about 27m high. The island lies on a detached reef and

a shallow spit extends 0.5 mile NE from it. The most convenient anchorage is 0.3 mile N of D’Arros Island, in a depth of

about 45m, sand and coral, sheltered from the SE trades winds.

Vessels in this area should always anchor for the night weather

and sea permitting, otherwise, an offing from the bank should

be made.

8.22 The tidal currents set with considerable strength through the

channel between the reef and the spit extending NE from

D’Arros Island. Unless the sun is in a favorable position, the

edges of the reef are difficult to make out, and vessels proceeding through the channel must exercise more than ordinary caution.

8.22 Saint Joseph Island (5°26'S., 53°21'E.) is the largest and

farthest E of a group of eight islets located on a coral atoll; the

tops of the trees on the island are about 24m high. Bertaut

Reef, about 14 miles SSW of Saint Joseph Island, has a small

sand cay on its S part; the reef is steep-to and the sea breaks

heavily over its edge.

8.23 The Poivre Islands (5°46'S., 53°19'E.) are near the E

edge of Amirante Bank. A settlement stands on the NE side of

the N island amid a clump of trees.

8.23 At the anchorage W of the N island, the tidal currents set

NNE, N, and NNW from 3 hours before HW to 3 hours after

HW, at a velocity of 0.25 to 1 knot; the set is between S and W

at other times, at a maximum velocity of 0.5 knot. There is a

short period of SW between tides.

8.23 The best anchorage lies off the W end of the Poivre Islands,

in about 22m, well sheltered from the wind and swell. Anchorage can also be taken about 0.2 mile off the reef facing the settlement, in 22 to 37m, but the sea in this area may get rough

when the wind is opposed to the tide. 

8.23 Marie Louise Island (6°11'S., 53°09'E.), low and sandy, is

covered with palm and casuarina trees. There is a coral reef on

the E side of the island which breaks.

8.23 Boudeuse Cay (6°06'S., 52°50'E.) is the farthest SW danger

on Amirante Bank. The cay is 4.6m high and sandy; there is a

depth of 8.2m, 1.5 miles E of it. 

8.23 Etoile Cay, 4.6m high, lies 18 miles NE of Boudeuse Cay; it

lies on a coral knoll about 1 mile in extent.

8.24 Desroches (5°41'S., 53°41'E.), which lies on the S

edge of a reef of the atoll character; a light is situated on the

NE end of the island. The island is fringed by a drying reef

which extends 1 mile offshore from the NE extremity and 0.5

mile from the SW extremity. The island is low and is covered

with coconut palms and tall hardwood trees. On the N side of

the island, a white cross stands about 2 miles WSW of the

lighthouse. A deep channel, about 1 mile wide, leads into the

lagoon from seaward. The least depth in the channel is 18.3m,

and it crosses the atoll in a position about 7 miles NW of Ile

Desroches. A vessel of moderate size can proceed through the

channel; the drying reef shows on radar.

8.24 Anchorage may be obtained, in 22 to 24m, about 0.7 mile
110 Sector 8. West Indian Ocean—The Seychelles Islands to the Chagos Archipelago 

Pub. 171

NW of the settlement. During the Southeast Trade Winds, this

is an excellent anchorage; a slight swell may be experienced.

Ile Alphonse

8.25 Ile Alphonse (7°01'S., 52°43'E.) is separated from Bijoutier Island and Saint Francois Island by a deep channel. The

reef surrounding the latter two islands is about 8 miles long. Ile

Alphonse is inhabited and forms part of the Republic of Seychelles.

8.25 The tidal current in the channel S of Ile Alphonse sets between W and SW on the falling tide and between E and NE on

the rising tide; at neaps the current attains rates from 0.5 to 2.5

knots. There is no SW current and a vessel swings to the new

tidal current in about 5 minutes. Small tide rips pass through

the channel once every hour; a heavy tide rip marks the change

of the current.

8.25 Bijoutier Island is located 3.2 miles S of Ile Alphonse, on the

W side of the S reef; it is covered with coconut palms. Saint

Francois Island is located on the reef, 5.2 miles S of Bijoutier

Island; it is a mere ridge, covered with coconut palms. Both islands are visible at a distance of about 12 miles. 

The Agalega Islands

8.26 The Agalega Islands (10°24'S., 56°38'E.), two in

number, appear as one small island when approaced from the

SE or NW. North Island is about 7.6m high and South Island is

about 4.5m high. They are covered with coconut palm and casuarina trees, which are visible at distances up to 15 miles. The

Agalega Islands are fringed by a reef which is steep-to; there

are boat passages through the reefs.

8.26 The main settlement of the dependency is at Port Sainte Rita,

on the NE side of South Island. The islands are a dependency

of Mauritius.

The Chagos Archipelago 

8.27 The Chagos Archipelago consists of a number of islands, banks, and reefs lying between 4°44'S and 7°39'S, and

70°50'E and 72°47'E.

8.27 Caution.—It is said that the deeper parts of the banks within

the Chagos Archipelago may be crossed when there is not

much swell. However, the uncertainty regarding the depths

over areas that have been only partially examined, the changeable character of coral reefs, and the unexpected manner in

which the sea sometimes breaks all emphasize the advisability

of avoiding the banks. Moreover, it is possible to proceed from

island to island without crossing over any of the banks.

8.28 Speakers Bank (4°55'S., 72°20'E.), the farthest N of

banks in the archipelago, extends 24 miles SSW from its N extremity; it is steep-to. The bottom of the bank consists of coral,

sand, and some rock.

8.28 The depths at the edge of the bank are from 5.5 to 14.5m;

they increase to a depth of 42m near the center of the bank.

Near its SW edge, where the depths are least, the sea breaks

heavily over it during the Southeast Trade Winds; the area

should be avoided.

8.28 Colvocoresses Reef (4°54'S., 72°37'E.), with a least charted

depth of 9m, lies 8 miles E of the E extremity of Speakers

Reef; it has not been closely examined. A SE current of 1.5

knots has been observed on the reef in January.

8.28 Blenheim Reef (5°12'S., 72°28'E.) is steep-to; it covers

nearly everywhere at HW except at its S extremity. The lagoon

of the reef is encumbered with rock.

8.29 The Salomon Islands (5°22'S., 72°13'E.) lie on an

atoll reef, which encloses a lagoon. The entrance to the lagoon

is through a passage on the NW side of the atoll. A least depth

of 5.8m may be carried through it, but the bar is impassable

during the Northwest Monsoon.

8.29 Tides—Currents.—The tidal currents at the anchorage outside the lagoon entrance set between NNE and E at a velocity

of about 0.5 knot when the tide is rising, and between NW and

W while it is falling, at a velocity of 0.5 to 1.25 knots. There is

no period of SW current; each current was at its greatest

strength at the beginning of its course, gradually slackening.

The current on the bar sets with considerable strength, sometimes attaining a velocity of 2.5 knots on the rising tide shortly

after springs. The tidal currents are not felt at the anchorage off

Ile Takamaka.

8.29 Anchorage.—During the Southeast Trade Winds, anchorage

may be found outside the entrance of the lagoon, in 18m.

8.29 Small vessels with local knowledge visiting the atoll find anchorage off the settlement on the E side of Ile Boddam.

8.30 Peros Banhos (5°20'S., 71°51'E.), which comprises a

group of islets, is the largest of the Chagos Archipelago and are

atoll-shaped. These islets are all low, the highest is only 3.7m

high, but the coconut palms rise to about 30m and have been

seen at distances up to 15 miles.

8.30 Tides—Currents.—At the anchorage off Ile du Coin, the

tidal current sets NW, while the tide is rising, attaining a maximum velocity of about 0.5 knot; it is scarcely felt during the

falling tide. At the anchorage off Ile Fouquet, the currents are

barely appreciable during either tides. At the entrances to the

lagoon, the tidal current sets between NNW and W, while the

tide is falling, at a velocity of from 0.75 to 1 knot, or more at

springs; the other current is less strong, and sets toward the SE

quadrant at a velocity of about 0.5 knot, while the tide is rising.

These observations were made during the Southeast Trade

Winds, and the result may be very different in other seasons.

8.30 Depths—Limitations.—The existence of a shoal, with a

depth of 2.7m, lies about 1.5 miles E of Ile Anglaise.

8.30 Anchorage.—Peros Banhos Atoll, being so open and having

wide entrances to the lagoon, possesses no completely sheltered anchorage. The quietest anchorage is off Ile Fouquet, 1.7

miles E of Ile du Coin.

8.30 The usual anchorage during the Southeast Trade Winds is off

the E side of the N end of Ile due Coin, in 22m, with the N extremity of the islet bearing 274° and the E extremity bearing

128°; this position is moderately well sheltered from this wind,

and is reported to be also sheltered from the Northwest Monsoon.

8.30 During the Northwest Monsoon, the anchorage off Ile Diamant is preferred; the best berth, in depths from 26 to 31m, is

with the center of the islet bearing 310°, distant 0.5 mile.

8.30 Caution.—These islets undergo considerable alteration; one

monsoon washes away portions of them and the next monsoon
Sector 8. West Indian Ocean—The Seychelles Islands to the Chagos Archipelago 111

Pub. 171

piles up new land masses.

8.30 Several clear deep channels between the various islands lead

into the lagoon. Moresby Channel, between the Moresby Island on the E and Ile Diamant on the W, is convenient for vessels approaching from the NW, particularly during the season

of NW winds. The depths are 10.9m or more over a width of

nearly 0.8 mile. Passe de l’Ile Poule, between Ile Poule on the

S and Petite Soeur on the N, leads into the lagoon from the W

and has depths of 14.6m or more over a width of 0.7 mile. 

8.30 A channel between Ile Fouquet and Ile Vache Marine, about

2.3 miles NNE, leads WNW into the lagoon toward Ile du

Coin. It is noteworthy that tide rips may be experienced in any

of the entrances of the lagoon; a slight disturbance sometimes

experienced on the bar between Ile Fouquet and Ile Vache Marine is due to the outgoing tidal current setting against the wind

and swell.

8.30 Benares Shoals (5°15'S., 71°40'E.), an isolated patch with a

least charted depth of 4.5m, lies 5.5 miles W of Ile Diamant,

off the NW extremity of Peros Banhos.

8.30 Victory Bank (5°32'S., 72°14'E.) lies about 18 miles SE of

Peros Banhos and rises steeply from great depths; there are

depths of 5.5m around the edge of the reef and depths up to

33m in the interior.

8.31 Great Chagos Bank (6°13'S., 72°05'E.), which occupies the central part of the Chagos Archipelago, consists of a submerged atoll supporting several islands on the N and W sides. The

bank extends about 60 miles in a N and S direction, and about 90

miles from E to W. A narrow coral ridge around the edges of the

bank has a least depth of 5.5m; within the ridge the depths increase to 88m. A shoal of 1m depth was reported in position

6°17'S, 72°15'E; its position is doubtful. There are known to be a

number of uncharted shoals on the bank.

8.31 Vessels should not cross Great Chagos Bank when there is

much swell, and then only in case of necessity; if necessary to

cross it, the passage should be made in daytime. 

8.31 Caution.—The profiles of the islands beaches change considerable at each monsoon.

8.32 Nelsons Island (5°41'S., 72°02'E.), an uninhabited island, lies on the N edge of Great Chagos Bank. A deep channel

close E of Nelsons Island leads to an anchorage, in depths of

29 to 31m, inside the outer ridge of Great Chagos Bank.

8.32 Three Brothers (6°09'S., 71°31'E.), comprised of three islands, lie on the W side of Great Chagos Bank. Reefs fringe

these islands and a bank, with a least depth of 7.5m, extends 11

miles ESE from the farthest E of these islands. A rocky islet

lies between the middle and E island.

8.32 Close SW of Three Brothers, a break in the coral ridge forms

a deep channel, with a least width of 1.5 miles; some shoals,

with a least depth of 5.5m, lie on the S side of the channel.

8.32 The Eagle Islands (6°12'S., 71°19'E.) are located on the

edge of the bank 10 miles WSW of Three Brothers. The N island is covered with tall coconut palms; a reef extends 0.5 mile

SW from this island. 

8.32 The S island, nearly 2 miles SSW from the N island, is low

and covered with trees. Anchorage may be obtained between

the two islands, in depths of 7 to 16m, sand and coral, but care

must taken to keep on the bank of soundings, which is only

about 1 mile broad.

8.32 Danger Island (6°23'S., 71°16'E.) lies on the W extremity

of Great Chagos Bank in a position 8.7 miles SSW of S Eagle

Island. The sea breaks heavily round its coast, and a reef which

extends 3 miles SSE from the island breaks in places. Good anchorage, in a depth of 31m, can be taken E of the island.

8.33 The Egmont Islands (6°39'S., 71°23'E.), a group of

six islands, lie on the SW edge of an elliptical atoll, 16 miles

SSW of Danger Island. 

8.33 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken just outside the entrance channel. The tidal currents at the anchorage are felt only

slightly; they set NNW with a maximum velocity of 0.5 knot

during the falling tide. The current during the rising tide is inappreciable. It should be noted that the above anchorage position plots inside the encircling reef.

8.33 Caution.—It was reported (1986) that all the islets except

Ile des Rats, the farthest NW, were connected by sand banks

which dry at LW, breakers were observed along the SW side of

the bank. The lagoon can be entered by way of a shallow channel through the N portion of the encircling reef.

8.34 Pitt Bank lies SSE to SW of the Egmont Islands, centered in approximate position 7°04'S, 71°20'E. Vessels are advised not to cross over Pitt Bank, especially at night. Pitt Bank

extends 35 miles SE and is steep-to on all sides. A buoy,

marked by a radar reflector, is moored on the NW side of the

bank.

8.34 Wight Bank (7°25'S, 72°31'E) has a least charted depth of

8.5m. It is possible that lesser depths than those charted exist

on Wight Bank; mariners should navigate in this vicinity with

caution.

8.34 Ganges Bank (7°23'S., 70°58'E.) is small, about 3.8 miles in

distant from SE to NW, and steep-to. A least depth of 12m is

charted in its SW side, but there may be less water. A buoy, fitted with a radar reflector, is moored on Ganges Bank.

8.34 Centurion Bank (7°39'S., 70°50'E.), with a least charted

depth of 11m, is the farthest SW of the Chagos Archipelago.

This bank is steep-to on all sides, but heavy rollers have been

observed to break over its NE end. A buoy is moored on the W

side of the bank.

Diego Garcia (7°21'S., 72°28'E.)

World Port Index No. 47800

8.35 Diego Garcia is the farthest S of the islands of the

Chagos Archipelago. It lies on an atoll, which is steep-to on its

seaward side, and forms a natural harbor in an extensive lagoon

which is entered from the NW side.

8.35 Diego Garcia is part of the British Indian Ocean Territory

and is the site of a U.S. Communications Relay Station for military traffic that is run jointly with the United Kingdom. 

8.35 Winds—Weather.—Because of the strength of the Southeast Trade Winds, a fresh to strong (force 5 to 6) breeze may be

experienced at the anchorage.

8.35 Rain falls on most days, but is often limited to a short shower; droughts, however, sometimes last for a month. Frequent

rain squalls occur at night.

8.35 Earthquake shocks are felt at times.

8.35 Additional information concerning winds and weather can
112 Sector 8. West Indian Ocean—The Seychelles Islands to the Chagos Archipelago 

Pub. 171

be obtained from the Naval Meterorological and Oceanographic Command (NMOC) website.

8.35 Tides—Currents.—The tidal range at springs is 0.2m at

MLW to 1.9m at MHW.

8.35 In the approaches to the Main Pass, there is an E flow of

about 1.5 knots about 2 hours before HW, and on the falling

tide a W flow of about 1 knot. Rates of up to 4 and 2 knots, respectively, have been reported; the effect of this flow may be

felt up to 8 miles seaward.

8.35 In the Entrance Channel, the tidal current sets SE on a rising

tide and NW on the falling tide, with spring rates of 1.5 and

1.25 knots, respectively. In 1985, an outbound vessel experienced a sudden heavy E set about 0.3 mile before the sea

buoys. The effect of the tidal current is barely perceptible 2

miles within the entrance.

8.35 When arriving, it is recommended that a long approach to

the Entrance Channel be planned, in order to assess the effect

of the set before entering the channel. The tidal current is reported to be unpredictable.

8.35 Depths—Limitations.—The Entrance Channel, formed between Spur Reef and West Island, is the recommended passage

for entering the lagoon. A fairway, marked by buoys, and

which has been dredged and swept to a depth of 13.7m over a

width of 210m, leads to the turning basin SE of Eclipse Point.

8.35 There is a deep draft wharf about 2 miles SSE of Eclipse

Point that has a minimum depth alongside of 13m. The Lshaped Supply and POL Pier, about 0.8 mile SE of the deepwater wharf, has a minimum depth alongside of 13m. A channel leading to the wharf off Point Marianne has been swept to a

depth of 11m. The limits of the fairway and the turning basin

may best be seen on the chart.

8.35 Aspect.—From a short distance Diego Garcia appears to be

covered with a bright green vegetation, fringed by a white

sandy beach. The principal trees are coconut palms, which are

34m high in places; there are several clumps of casuarina trees

on both islands. The general height of the land is from 0.9 to

1.5m. The land is subject to alteration, being carried away at

one part and raised at another by the seasonal monsoons.

Eclipse Point is sparsely covered with trees, interspersed with

buildings, and is easily identified. West Islet, Middle Islet, and

East Islet, lying on the reefs in the entrance to the lagoon, may

be clearly distinguished at a distance of 5 miles. A radio tower

stands 0.2 mile SSW of Eclipse Point, and a conspicuous tank

is situated 0.5 mile SSW of the point; a radio tower, situated

0.3 mile NNE was not easily seen until within 8 miles from the

island. There is a control tower situated at the root of the causeway, about 3 miles SSE of Eclipse Point, but it was reported to

be surrounded by taller buildings and was not seen.

8.35 Pilotage.—Diego Garcia is a daylight port, although vessels

may be taken in at night through prior arrangement with Diego

Garcia Port Control. Pilots are compulsory on the vessel’s initial visit for both entry and departure. The boarding ground is

located 2 miles NW of the channel entrance.

8.35 Regulations.—Vessels wishing to call at Diego Garcia

should notify their intention at least 24 hours in advance to the

Island Commander if on charter to the U.S. Government, otherwise vessels should contact the British Representative.

8.35 Permits to land at Diego Garcia should be obtained from the

Commissioner, British Indian Ocean Territory, Mahe, Seychelles. Crews of vessels on charter to the U.S. Government

are granted local permits on arrival.

8.35 Signals.—The port control tower is manned 24 hours and

Naval Meterorological and Oceanographic 

Command (NMOC) Home Page

http://www.cnmoc.navy.mil/nmosw/thh_nc/diegogar/

text/frame.htm

Diego Garcia

Diego Garcia Harbor
Sector 8. West Indian Ocean—The Seychelles Islands to the Chagos Archipelago 113

Pub. 171

may be contacted on VHF channel 16.

8.35 Anchorage.—During the Northwest Monsoon, from the beginning or middle of December until the beginning or end of

April, vessels should anchor on the W side of the lagoon under

the lee of the land. Eclipse Bay, S of Eclipse Point, affords the

smoothest water during the monsoon, being protected by the

point and the reef connecting it with West Islet.

8.35 A vessel can anchor about 1 mile E of Point Marianne, in 16

to 18m, broken coral, good holding ground.

8.35 Caution.—A depth of 29m is located 0.7 mile off the SE extremity Diego Garcia. A depth of 18m is charted 1 mile SSW

of the S extremity of the island; its position is approximate.
Pub. 171

9. Islands and Banks North and East of Madagascar

9.0Additional chart coverage may be found in NGA/DLIS Catalog of Maps, Charts, and Related Products (Unlimited Distribution).

SECTOR 9 — CHART INFORMATION
Pub. 171

9.0Additional chart coverage may be found in NGA/DLIS Catalog of Maps, Charts, and Related Products (Unlimited Distribution).

SECTOR 

9 — CHART INFORMATION
117

Pub. 171

SECTOR 9 

ISLANDS AND BANKS NORTH AND EAST OF MADAGASCAR

9.0 Plan.—This sector describes the Mascarene Ridge, Ile

Tromelin, Ile de la Reunion, Mauritius, Cargados Carajos

Shoals, and Rodrigues (Rodriguez Island). It then describes the

Aldabra Islands, Assumption Island, Providence Island, the

Farquhar Group, the Comores Islands, and Iles Glorieuses.

The Mascarene Ridge 

9.1 The Mascarene Abyssal Plain lies off the E coast of

Madagascar where the continental slope drops to a depth of

5,914m. The Mascarene Basin rises NE and E of Madagascar

between the Mascarene Abyssal Plain and the Mascarene

Ridge. The depths in the Mascarene Basin range from 4,000 to

4,363m.

The Mascarene Ridge encumbers the Mascarene Basin on its

the NE and E side and contains a chain of detached plateaus.

This formation of the Mascarene Ridge curves around the Mascarene Basin from Seychelles Bank, leads SSE to Agalega Island, continues SSW towards the Cargados Carajos Islands,

continues on to Mauritius, and then extends to the detached

rise where Reunion Island forms, a total distance of about 850

miles. 

9.1 The banks and shoals on Mascarene Ridge, from N to S, are

Fortune Bank, Poydenot Shoal, Soudan Bank, Nazareth Bank,

Saya de Malha Bank, Souden Bank, and Cargados Carajos

Shoals. 

9.1 Caution.—Fising vessels, with lengths of 10 to 35m, are active year-round on the Mascarene Ridge.

9.1 Vessels engaged in seisamic surveys may also be encountered on Seychelles Bank and around the Madagascar coast;

they should be given a wide berth. 

Ile Tromelin 

9.2 Ile Tromelin (15°53'S., 54°31'E.), a small low and

sandy islet with bushes scattered about, is fringed by a narrow

reef. The islet is part of the French Republic and is administratively attached to Reunion Island.

9.2 Two shoals, with a depth of 10m, lie 0.75 mile NW of the

NW extremity of the islet. A light is situated at the weather station which stands on this NW point.

9.2 During the Southeast Monsoon, anchorage can be taken in

the lee of Ile Tromelin with the weather station bearing 113°,

about 0.7 mile distant, in a depth of 13m, sand and coral; the

holding ground is indifferent.

9.2 Strong overfalls may be seen off the NW side of Ile Tromelin, where the general current flowing W encounters the ebb

current; the resulting breakers can be dangerous for small boats

as far as 0.25 mile offshore.

Ile de la Reunion

9.3 Ile de la Reunion (21°06'S., 55°34'E.) is composed

of a very narrow coastal plain, which is succeeded by hilly

ground, which in turn rises inland to mountain masses and tableland. It is of volcanic formation, with many extinct craters.

The mountain peaks are often visible at a distance of 100 miles

or more. The island is a French possession.

9.3 La Perause Seamount, with a depth of 54m, lies 100 miles

NW of Ile de la Reunion.

9.3 Volcan (Piton de la Fournaise) is an active volcano, 2,626m

high, in the SE part of Ile de la Reunion; it frequently emits

ashes. Slight earthquakes are frequent, however, the general

volcanic nature of the island is clearly shown by the many extinct craters on the island.

9.3 Les Salazes, a mountain mass, rises near the middle of the island and during portions of nearly every winter, Piton des

Neiges, 3,070m high, is snow-capped. Petites Salazes form

three needle-pointed peaks, each about 2,286m high.

9.3 A mark for the SE end of the island is a black wavelike formation, formed by lava flow that solidified, that flowed toward

the sea; it is nearly devoid of vegetation.

9.3 The roadsteads off the N side of the island are safer than

those off the other sides. With gales from the N, a very violent

sea beats upon the N coast of Ile de la Reunion from Saint-Paul

to Sante-Rose.

9.3 Merchant vessels from abroad must first call at Sainte-Pierre,

Saint-Paul, Le Port (Port des Galets), or Saint-Denis; permits

are granted at these places to visit other places on the island. It

is necessary to clear through one of these ports before leaving

the island. 

9.3 Regulations.—Vessels over 25m in length can only anchor

in special areas. All vessels must request authorization from

Reunion Rescue Operational Center on VHF channel 16.

Ile de la Reunion
118 Sector 9. Islands and Banks North and East of Madagascar 

Pub. 171

9.3 Caution.—Fish aggregating devices, marked by orange, red,

or yellow buoys equipped with rader reflectors, may be found

up to 15 miles off the coast. A good lookout should be kept for

these buoys; vessels should keep at least 1 mile clear of them. 

9.4 Pointe des Jardins (20°52'S., 55°28'E.) is the N extremity of Ile de la Reunion. The Riviere Saint Denis flows into

the sea through a deep ravine close W of Pointe des Jardins; a

bridge spans the river near its mouth.

Saint-Denis (20°52'S., 55°28'E.) (World Port Index No.

47680), situated at Pointe des Jardins, is the capital and the

most important town on the island. 

9.4 The town, surrounded by vegetation, can be seen from a considerable distance; the high tower of the church is prominent.

9.4 Anchorage.—Anchorage off Saint-Denis is practically no

longer used. From November to April, the stormy season, anchorage is possible, in depths of 18 to 31m, NW of Saint-Denis. Vessels should be prepared to get underway at the first sign

of stormy weather.

9.4 Between April and November, the fair season, vessels may

approach land and anchor, in 24m, sand and broken shell, with

the church steeple bearing 174°, 0.4 mile from the shore. A

better anchorage is found a little farther SW, in 13m; this site is

better sheltered from the swell.

9.4 Le Cousin, a dangerous sunken rock, lies about 0.2 mile offshore in a position about 1 mile E of Pointe de Sainte Marie.

Cap Bernard, bearing 274°, and seen open N of the cathedral at

Saint-Denis, leads N of Le Cousin.

9.4 Sainte-Suzanne is a village situated about 0.5 mile SE of

Pointe de Bel-Air (20°53'S., 55°37'E.); the point is marked by a

light.

9.4 Anchorage can be taken, in about 24m, 1 mile E of the light

on Pointe de Bel-Air, but it is not recommended because of the

bad holding ground and the difficulty of communicating with

the shore.

9.4 There are storehouses on Pointe du Bourbier (21°01'S.,

55°43'E.) that are visible from seaward. Anchorage can be taken off the point in a position about 1.3 miles ESE of the point,

but is not recommended because of the bad holding ground and

the difficulty of communicating with the shore. A church may

be seen in the town of Saint-Benoit, which is situated about 1

mile SE of Pointe du Bourbier.

9.4 Sainte-Rose is a town with a small harbor protected by a

breakwater situated about 6 miles SE Saint-Benoit. Anchorage

is not recommended due to bad holding ground, unsurveyed areas, and the difficulty of communicating with the shore.

9.5 Pointe de la Table (21°19'S., 55°49'E.), the SE extremity of Ile de la Reunion, lies about 9 miles S of Pointe du

Bambou. Within the coast is a hilly, arid region, Grand Brule,

which has been deforested and crevassed by solidified flows of

lava from the volcano Volcan. 

9.5 Vessels should give the coast between Pointe du Bambou

and Pointe de la Table a wide berth. A light is shown at Pointe

de la Table.

From Pointe de la Table, the coast of Ile de la Reunion trends

SW to Pointe de la Mare d’Arzule, 3 miles distant. The coast

then trends in a general W direction to Pointe de Langevin

(21°23'S., 55°39'E.), a distance of 7.3 miles, the S extremity of

the island.

9.5 Pointe de Saint-Joseph is located 2 miles W of Pointe de

Langevin and Pointe Riviere d’Abord is located 7.3 miles farPointe de Bel-Air Light
Sector 9. Islands and Banks North and East of Madagascar 119

Pub. 171

ther WNW; the 200m curve lies up to 1.3 miles offshore along

this part of the coast.

9.6 Saint-Pierre (21°20'S., 55°29'E.) (World Port Index

No. 47700) is situated on the S coast of Ile de le Reunion at the

foot of the mountains on the W bank of Rivierre d’Abord; the

port is very small and consists of a town, an artificial basin protected by breakwaters with lights, and an outer roadstead.

Saint-Pierre can be identified from a considerable distance by

its white buildings and church belfry. Lights, in line bearing

018°, lead into the inner harbor, which is no longer used because of silting

9.6 Vessels may anchor with the church steeple bearing 018° and

Pointe Riviere d’Abord bearing about 063°, in depths of 37 to

42m, sand. A heavy swell sometimes occurs from May to September; a vessel must be ready to weigh anchor at any time of

the year.

Pointe des Avirons (21°14'S., 55°20'E.) lies NW of SaintPierre; a light stands on the coast 1 mile SE of the point, and an

aero beacon is situated 1.3 miles farther SE. Anchorage can be

taken, in about 37m, about 0.8 mile SW of the point, but it is

not recommended.

9.6 The villages of Saint-Leu and Saint-Gilles les Bain are situated near the coast, 5.3and 13 miles NNW, respectively, of

Pointe des Avirons; a light is situated on the coast near each

village.

9.6 Baie de Saint-Paul is entered between Cap la Houssaye

(21°00'S., 55°14'E.) and Pointe de la Riviere des Galets. Baie

de Saint-Paul is the best roadstead of Ile de la Reunion. Vessels

at anchor here are usually sheltered when rollers are setting in

at Saint-Denis.

9.6 The roadstead at Saint-Paul is utilized as a waiting anchorage by vessels prior to entering Port de la Pointe de Galets

(Port Ouest). Vessels are informed when they can enter port by

the harbormaster’s office on VHF channel 16.

9.6 During the good season, anchorage can be taken with the

signal mast bearing either 114° or 124°, in 26m, muddy sand.

9.6 A wreck, with a reported depth of 32m, lies about 0.5 mile

NNW of Saint-Paul Light. A spar buoy is moored close N of

the wreck.

9.6 Good anchorage can be taken with the signal mast bearing

240°; where the depths are 20m and the bottom is black sand.

A mooring buoy is anchored about 0.7 mile W of the lighthouse.

9.6 During the good season, from about the middle of April to

the middle of November, the wind is usually SW as a result of

an eddy around this mountainous island. During the winter the

winds are usually NE and vessels should anchor farther offshore than mentioned above; depths of 37m are recommended

in position NNW of the signal mast.

Sainte-Rose Breakwater

Saint-Pierre—South Jetty Light

Saint-Pierre—North Jetty Light
120 Sector 9. Islands and Banks North and East of Madagascar 

Pub. 171

Port de la Pointe des Galets (Port Reunion) 

(20°55'S., 55°18'E.)

World Port Index No. 47690

9.7 Port de la Pointe des Galets (Port Reunion) is comprised of Port Ouest (West Port or the “Old Port”), which is

about 0.8 mile S of Pointe de Galets, and Port Est (East Port or

the “New Port”), which is in Baie de la Possession.

9.7 Port Ouest is further subdivided into a N basin and a S basin.

9.7 Winds—Weather.—The port is subject to “rollers,” which

are ocean waves which occur between April and October; their

frequency is about 2 days per month. They occur in any weather and during perfect calm, unaccompanied by any change in

atmosphere or other indication. The first appearance is a long

swell not assuming the shape of a wave until it reaches the

shore where it will break, with great violence, often causing

damage to installations; they sometimes assume greater proportions than during a cyclone. This phenomenon usually last

24 hours, but can sometimes continue for 4 or 5 consecutive

days. Masters would be advised to discontinue cargo operations and vacate the berth before the swell reaches severe proportions. From June to September, the S swell can cause a

heavy undertow in Port Ouest.

9.7 Tides—Currents.—Generally, on the approaches to Ile de

la Reunion, the current flows W when N of the island. West of

the island the current is extremely variable. Offshore, about 3

miles from Pointe des Galets, the current sometimes reaches 3

knots. Nearer the coast it flows most often to the N at a speed

not in excess of 0.8 knot.

9.7 There is a cross current in the entrance passes; in front of

Port Ouest, it flows most often N, but does sometimes flow S.

Its average speed is 1 knot, but can be as fast as 2 knots. In

front of Port Est it flows W, and its speed does not exceed 1

knot. 

9.7 A vessel should keep to the axis of the channel at a speed of

3 or 4 knots. When a vessel of great length passes between the

mole heads, the bow will be held in still water while the stern is

deflected by a current, which may have a rate up to 2 knots.

9.7 Depths—Limitations.—Port Ouest can accommodate vessels up to 14,000 gross tons, with a maximum length of 175m,

and drafts of less than 9m. Ship movements take place during

daylight hours only.

9.7 The channel to Port Est is dredged to a depth of 13.1m over a

width of 130m. The W arm of the basin is dredged to 12.8m.

9.7 Port Est can accommodate vessels up to 45,000 gross tons,

with a maximum length of 215m, and drafts of less than 12m.

Ships movements take place from 0430 until 2200.

9.7 Vessels greater than 120m long are required to use a tug.

9.7 Aspect.—The entrance to Port Ouest is protected by two jetties, the ends of which are each equipped with a light. Range

lights, in line bearing 162°, lead through the channel.

9.7 The main lighthouse is situated on top of a cement silo; the

large towers of which constitute a good landmark. A tower,

with its red and white bands, 2 miles S of the harbor, serves as

a good landmark. It displays aerial obstruction lights which are

occasionally visible from a distance of 28 miles.

9.7 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for all vessels over 50m

in length and is available from 0430 to 2200 for Port Est and

from sunrise to sunset for Port Ouest. Vessels send their ETA

24 hours in advance, stating vessel draft, whether vessel is carrying hazardous materials, and whether vessel is equipped with

a bow thruster. The pilot boards 1 to 2 miles from the entrance,

Port Reunion

Port Reunion Home Page

http://www.reunion.port.fr
Sector 9. Islands and Banks North and East of Madagascar 121

Pub. 171

on the range line for the respective port.

9.7 Signals.—The following signals are displayed for the regulation of traffic into Port Ouest:

1. Red flag—Entry prohibited.

2. Green flag—Departure prohibited.

3. Red flag over green flag—Entry and departure prohibited.

9.7 Anchorage.—There is restricted anchorage 0.4 mile SW of

the entrance of Le Port, in a depth of 40m, black sand bottom.

Anchorage may not be taken without prior authorization by the

Port Authority. 

9.7 Directions.—The best maneuvering conditions are met at

dawn or in the evening, because of the calm usually prevalent

at these hours. When entering, large vessels must take into account the crosscurrent, the direction and speed of which are

difficult to predict. At times vessels may find their bow in calm

water while the stern is still subject to strong current.

9.8 Pointe des Galets (20°54'S., 55°16'E.) is located 1

mile N of the entrance to Port de Galets. This low point forms

the NW extremity of an arid plain; Port des Galets is situated

on the edge of this plain. Between Pointe de Galets and Cap de

la Possession, 3.3 miles E, the coast is low.

9.8 From Cap de la Possession (20°55'S., 55°21'E.) to Pointe du

Gouffre, the coast is high, steep, and broken by ravines; there

are several cascades which fall to the sea from an elevation of

91m or more. Pointe de la Ravine a Malheur, 0.75 mile NE of

Cap de la Possession, is a prominent headland.

9.8 From Pointe du Gouffre ,the coast trends nearly 2 miles ENE

to Pointe des Chiendents, then 1.4 miles farther ENE to Pointe

des Jardins, the N extremity of Ile de la Reunion. The 20m

curve lies up to 0.4 mile off this part of the coast.

Mauritius

9.9 Mauritius (20°15'S., 57°35'E.) is mostly fringed with

coral reefs and is steep-to except on the NE side; depths of

more than 180m are found from 1 to 1.5 miles offshore.

Winds—Weather.—The Southeast Trade Wind prevails

throughout the year, with brief interruptions as described below; it is strongest and most regular in winter, from June to

September, when it gives pleasant weather with sunshine predominating.

9.9 The trade wind is less dominant in summer when the weather may temporarily become unsettled. This occurs when the

high pressure area over the South Indian Ocean becomes weaker; small depressions appear S of these islands and equatorial

air reaches them. The air becomes hot and humid, with light

winds, mainly from the N; blue sky at dawn soon gives way to

heavy cumulonimbus clouds, with outbreaks of rain, especially

in the afternoon. The sky clears at dusk. A warning sign of the

onset of this type of weather is the deep blue appearance of

mountain ridges and of distant vegetation.

9.9 As pressure rises and the trade wind returns, there may be a

period of disturbed weather, with rain or drizzle and very low

clouds on exposed coasts; the SE wind increases to Force 5 or

6 over the land and may reach Force 7 over the sea. This

weather is very unpleasant if it occurs in April or May.

9.9 At Rodriguez, the trade wind may back to NE for a few days

during disturbed weather in summer.

9.9 The W and N coasts of the islands are more sheltered and are

dryer than the E and S coasts. At Ile de la Reunion, the NW

coast from Pointe des Aigrettes to Cap Bernard is particularly

sheltered, and light variable winds prevail here.

9.9 Rainfall in these islands varies greatly, not only from coast to

coast, but from year to year; it is at maximum in summer. At Ile

de la Reunion it reaches an annual average of 4,300mm at

Saint-Benoit, on the E coast, and 990mm at Saint-Pierre, on the

SW coast.

9.9 Rainfall tends to reach a maximum in the afternoon, except

when the trade wind is well-established when it is more common at night.

9.9 There are many streams and rivers, generally flowing

through deep ravines, but none is navigable beyond a short distance from the sea; in dry season they are little more than

brooks, but become raging torrents during heavy rains.

Tides—Currents.—The tidal currents around the islets on

the bank extending NE from the NE side of Mauritius attain

rates of 4 to 5 knots during springs, and form dangerous races.

The rate at neaps seldom exceeds 2 knots. The currents at night

are stronger than those during the day; the strongest occur 2

days after full and change of the moon.

9.9 The flood, or E current, begins 5 hours before the moon’s

meridian passage and continues for 6 hours; the ebb, or W current, then sets in immediately and continues for 6 hours; there

is no interval of SW. The E current sets with great strength over

The Carpenters and The Blacksmiths, and causes dangerous

races as far as 3 miles off Gunner’s Quoin. Vessels should not

pass this islet at distances of less than 1 mile.

9.9 The E current sets strongly onto Cannoniers Point, then

sweeps through Quoin Channel and around the N end of Mauritius at a high rate. West winds cause an increase in the velocity; strong S winds deflect the current to the NE.

9.9 The tidal currents separate at LW off Piment Point, the N

point of the entrance to Arsenal Bay, on the NW shore of Mauritius; the line of separation works toward Rocky Point, which

lies about 2.3 miles NNE of Piment Point, and reaches Rocky

Point by the time of HW. When the E current is setting around

the N part of Mauritius, a weaker current sets S along the W

shore of the island.

9.9 The so-called W current actually sets generally about WNW

past the N end of the island, but is felt very little off the W

shore of the island between Cannoniers Point and Caves Point.

The inshore current turns 2 hours before the current in the offing, and during the last half of the flood sets E at a rate near

Gunner’s Quoin of 4 knots. At the 20m curve skirting Mauritius, the W current has a rate of 3 knots.

Aspect.—The central and W parts of the island are mountainous. Piton de la Petite Riviere Noire (Piton Riviere Noire)

rises in a position about 6.8 miles NE of the SW extremity of

the island; it is pointed, and appears dark in clear weather,

when it is visible for 50 miles. Pieter Both, a remarkable mountain, rises about 15.5 miles NNE of Piton de la Petite Riviere

Noire; it has a huge knob on its summit. Piton du Milieu, near

the middle of Mauritius, is a steep-sided cone. Mount Rempart,

about 6.5 miles N of Piton de la Petite Riviere Noire, shows

three needle-pointed peaks. All these mountains are useful

marks for the island, but the summits are often enveloped in

mist; among the summits are many extinct craters and extensive caves.
122 Sector 9. Islands and Banks North and East of Madagascar 

Pub. 171

Caution.—A bank extends about 16 miles NE from the N

extremity of Mauritius; several islands and lesser banks are located in this area.

9.10 Serpent Islet (19°49'S., 57°48'E.), the farthest NE of

the dangers off Mauritius, lies near the NE extremity of the

bank; it is 162m high. The SE and NW sides of the island are

foul to a distance of 0.2 mile.

9.10 Nab Reef, about 0.8 mile WSW of Serpent Islet, has depths

of less than 1.8m; the sea breaks over it.

9.10 Round Islet (19°51'S., 57°47'E.), 1.5 miles SSW of Serpent

Islet, is 322m high; it is the highest islet in this group.

9.10 In the channel between Serpent Islet, and Round Islet, the

tidal current attains a rate from 3 to 4 knots.

9.10 The Blinder is a submerged reef, which breaks occasionally,

lying 0.25 mile W of the NW extremity of Round Islet. Both

the E and W tidal currents run with great strength over both

The Blinder and Nab Reef.

9.10 La Caille Bank lies 2.8 miles SSW of Round Islet; Abbe

Bank lies 1 mile farther SSW. The sea occasionally breaks over

these two banks in bad weather and Abbe Bank will occasionally break in good weather. 

9.10 Serpent Islet, bearing 009° and open its own breadth E of

Round Islet, leads about 0.5 mile E of La Caille Bank and

about 0.8 mile E of Abbe Bank.

9.10 Flat Islet (19°53'S., 57°39'E.) is the farthest NW of the islets

N of Mauritius; it is generally flat, but the SW extremity rises

to a hill, 91m high. Pigeon House Rock lies close N of Flat Islet; it is 52m high. The N side of Pigeon House Rock is steepto and may be safely passed as close as 0.3 mile; the current N

of the rock flows E and W at rates of 2 to 4 knots; there may be

tide rips encountered in this area.

9.10 Gabriel Islet lies on the reef, about 0.4 mile SE of Flat Islet,

and Sandringham Reef extends 0.5 mile farther SE; the tidal

currents set with great force over the reef, and it should be given a wide berth.

9.10 Vessels can anchor off the S end of Flat Islet, with the light

situated on the SW end of the islet bearing 315°, about 1 mile

distant, and the summit of Serpent Islet bearing 060°, in a

depth of 16m. The holding ground of sand and coral is not

good; moreover, the sea rises quickly with S winds so that vessels should proceed to sea at the first indication of bad weather.

If a pilot is required, one will be sent from Port Louis.

9.10 Rip Bank, about 0.9 mile SE of Gabriel Islet, has a least

charted depth of 12.8m.

9.10 The NE extremities of Flat Islet and Gabriel Islet, in line

bearing 316°, lead NE of Sandringham Reef and NE of Rip

Bank; the disused light tower on Cannoniers Point, the NW extremity of Mauritius, bearing not less than 235°, and well open

S of the S extremity of Gunner’s Quoin, leads S of Rip Bank.

9.10 Low-powered vessels arriving off Round Islet during the E

current should pass N of Serpent Islet and should give Pigeonhouse Rock a berth of at least 1 mile.

9.10 Gunner’s Quoin (19°56'S., 57°37'E.) is an islet 3.5 miles

SSW of Flat Islet; it is separated from Mauritius by Quoin

Channel, which is 0.8 mile wide between the 15m curve line.

9.10 The Blacksmiths are a group of rocks which extend 0.3 mile

NE of Gunner’s Quoin and The Carpenters are three rocks,

awash, which extend 0.2 mile SE from the islet; the sea breaks

heavily over them.

9.10 The tidal current runs with great force N and S of Gunner’s

Quoin, causing dangerous races up to 3 miles off the islet. Vessels should not pass within 1 mile of this islet.

9.10 Mapu Patch (19°59'S., 57°40'E.), with a depth of 12.8m,

lies 3 miles SE of Gunner’s Quoin and 1.5 miles off Mauritius.

9.11 Cannoniers Point (20°00'S., 57°33'E.), the NW extremity of Mauritius, has a tower, formerly a lighthouse, situated on its

NW extremity; there is a dangerous set toward the point, which

should be kept in mind.

9.11 There is a quarantine station situated on Cannoniers Point,

which includes the sea area to a distant of 0.1 mile. When the

station is in use, two yellow flags are displayed.

9.11 Whale Rock (19°59'S., 57°33'E.), on the edge of the coastal

reef, 0.5 mile NNW of Cannoniers Point, has a depth of 1.2m.

The summit of Serpent Islet, in line with the W extremity of

Gunner’s Quoin bearing 056°, leads N of Whale Rock.

9.11 Rocky Point (20°03'S., 57°32'E.) lies about 3.3 miles SSW

of Cannoniers Point; the fringing reef lies up to 0.8 miles off

this part of the coast. From this vicinity, a gap in the trees on

Cannoniers Point is conspicuous.

9.11 Pointe Piments (20°05'S., 57°31'E.) is the N entrance point

to Arsenal Bay.

9.11 Arsenal Bay is too confined to offer good anchorage at any

time, and for those vessel which anchor here, it should be left

at once on the least appearance of a W wind, as a swell quickly

sets in and breaks heavily over the reefs around.

9.11 Tombeau Bay, immediately S of Arsenal Bay, affords good

anchorage, except in W winds, in a depth of 9m.

Port Louis (20°10'S., 57°30'E.)

World Port Index No. 47720

9.12 Port Louis is of medium size and consists of a city, an

outer roadstead, and an inner and outer harbor; it is the principal harbor of Mauritius. There are facilities for general cargo

vessels and tankers and is the site of a bulk sugar terminal.

9.12 The port authority is Mauritius Marine Authority, represented by the harbormaster.

9.12 Winds—Weather.—The harbor is sheltered from all winds

except NW, which seldom blow with any strength, except in

the cyclone season from December 1 to April 30.

9.12 When a cyclone is expected to pass within 300 miles of the

island, a weather forecast is delivered daily to each vessel in

port; more frequent forecasts are delivered or signaled during

cyclone emergencies. Ships can expect at least 24 hours notice

of a cyclone; about 3 day’s warning is normally given.

9.12 The most critical time during a cyclone is when the wind is

on the beam. Provided the vessel is not too high out of water,

there is a good chance of riding out the storm if the following

procedure is complied with:

1. No attempt should be made to keep the ship broadside

to the wind by holding on to windward cable and heaving the

headlines taut; the headlines should be slacked down and the

windward cable payed out, to allow the ship’s head to fall off

the wind, even if this is towards and the side of the channel.

Since the sides of the channel are steep-to, the bow will

come to rest against the side of the channel with any surging

to cease, and the stern moorings will not be disturbed.
Sector 9. Islands and Banks North and East of Madagascar 123

Pub. 171

2. Should the wind shift from one side of the ship to the

other, as the cyclone passes over the island, the slack in the

cable should be taken in and the other cable payed out, to allow the ship to fall off the wind as before.

3. No outside assistance can be given until the weather

moderates; pilots are placed on the more vulnerable vessels.

4. Any vessel remaining in Port Louis more than 48

hours in the cyclone season should obtain special moorings

from the port authorities.

9.12 Tides—Currents.—At the entrance, the ebb current flows

SW and the flood current flows NE. Tidal range is 0.5m.

9.12 Depths—Limitations.—Port Louis is a very simple harbor

to navigate. The harbor entrance is well marked by navigation

aids. The channel is only about 1 mile in length. There is a

least charted depth of 12.8m on the entrance range line; the

harbor is dredged to a depth of 12.5m as far as Quay D.

9.12 The NE side of the harbor is quayed. The quays are lettered

and numbered as indicated on the chart. Quay No. 1 can accommodate vessels up to 123m long, with a draft of 12m. Quay

No. 2 and Quay No. 3 can accommodate vessels up to 366m

long, with drafts of 12.2m. Quay No. 4, the container terminal,

can accommodate a vessels up to 183m long, with a draft of

12.2m. 

9.12 Quay D has a dredged depth of 12.5m alongside. Quay E,

situated NE of Quay D, has a depth of 9m alongside. Quay C,

situated on the W side of Trou Farfaron, has a depth alongside

of 5.5m. 

9.12 A bulk sugar terminal is situated on the SW side of the harbor near Fort William. Sugar is now loaded in bulk. Vessels up

to 198m overall length can be accommodated at the terminal.

The terminal has also been dredged to a depth of 12.2m. The

Bulk Sugar Terminal is operated by the Mauritius Sugar Corporation. 

9.12 A bulk cement discharge facility is situated between Berth 1

and Berth 2 for cement carriers of up to 135m long. Vessels up

to 183m long can be accommodated, subject to the adjacent

berths being unoccupied. 

9.12 The permitted length of ships berthed at the mooring buoys

varies between 137m to 183m.

9.12 Quay No. 1 is primarily designed for the discharging of petroleum products, ammonia, and bulk fertilizer.

9.12 A berth between mooring buoys is situated at the SE end of

the dredged section of the harbor, abreast Berths A and D.

There are two mooring buoys situated between Berth No. 4 and

Berth 5 and Quay E, 0.1 mile S; in 1990, a depth of 0.7m was

reported between these buoys.

9.12 Aspect.—The cement silos, 43m high, situated near Berth

No. 2 are conspicuous; a water tower, marked by a light, situated 1 mile NE of the cement silos, makes a good mark, as does

the tank 230m NW of the silos.

9.12 The Citadel, situated near the range line 1.2 miles SE of the

cement silos, has a mast, with an elevation of 106m, situated at

its SE corner and Signal Mountain are conspicuous.

9.12 Other good marks from the offing are The Pouce (20°12'S.,

57°31'E.), which resembles a thumb held upright, and Pieter

Both (20°11'S., 57°35'E.), which is surmounted by a knob-like

formation.

9.12 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for all merchant vessels

over 100 nrt and is available 0700 to 1700. The pilot boards

about 0.5 mile NW of the entrance buoys.

9.12 Vessels should send their ETA to the harbormaster via the

agent 24 hours in advance, stating length, draft, and tonnange

(grt or nrt), confirming these details 2 hours in advance on

VHF channel 12 or 16. The pilots and harbormaster can be

contacted on VHF channels 12 and 16.

9.12 Arriving vessels should have both anchors ready for letting

go, and two hawsers and two wires ready aft, before the pilot

embarks.

9.12 Signals.—The conspicuous signal tower at the signal station

at Fort William, on the S side of the entrance, is 21.3m high

and painted in black and yellow checkers; there is a white iron

flagstaff on a tripod.

9.12 Anchorage.—There is anchorage in the outer roadstead,

about 1.3 miles NW of Fort George, in depths of 27 to 33m,

sand and coral.

9.12 The quarantine anchorage, whose position may be seen on

the chart, is situated on the SW side of the entrance range, NW

of the signal station.

9.12 Anchorage is prohibited in an area W of the signal station, in

an area of submarine cables.

9.12 For vessels anchoring in the outer roadstead, the following is

Port Louis Harbor

Port Louis—Bulk Sugar Terminal
124 Sector 9. Islands and Banks North and East of Madagascar 

Pub. 171

the advice of a former experienced harbormaster:

9.12 When anchoring in the outer roadstead, from the moment of

anchoring, vessels should be ready to weigh anchor and put to

sea if necessary. Use chain for a buoy rope. If the signal is

made to put to sea, do so at once, and never attempt to ride out

the storm. When leaving the anchorage from stress of weather,

note the direction in which the wind shifts, and run the vessel

in the opposite direction until clear of the land, when an E

course will take its into good weather. Never heave-to with the

vessels head toward the shore; in bad weather, local currents

are often very strong and uncertain in direction; many vessels,

in the belief that they had made a sufficient offing, have been

hazarded, and some lost, through neglecting this precaution.

9.12 Directions.—Vessels approaching Port Louis at night from

the SW should pass from 1 to 1.5 miles off Pointe Aux Caves

Light on a course of 040°, until the entrance range lights are in

range bearing 127°. The aft range light is conspicuous on the

mountain behind the city, but the forward range is a white

square on top of a building that is more difficult to see. Then

alter course to 127° and take up anchorage in the outer anchorage.

9.12 Vessels approaching Port Louis from the NE should pass

about 5 miles W of Flat Island Light (19°53'S., 57°39'E.);

when that light bears 090°, a course of 205° should be steered.

Pointe Aux Caves Light should be picked up on that course.

When the entrance range lights are in line bearing 127°, alter

course to that bearing and take up anchorage in the outer anchorage area.

9.12 By day, local knowledge is recommended, as the entrance

range marks are difficult to identify. 

9.13 Grand River Bay (20°10'S., 57°28'E.) on the W side

is formed at the mouth of the Grand River, where it enters the

sea through a gap in the reef; the reef extends 0.7 miles offshore in this area. Martello Tower, which is conspicuous,

stands on the SW shore of the bay.

9.13 Pointe aux Caves (20°11'S., 57°24'E.) is marked by a light;

the 20m curve lies 0.2 mile off the point.

9.13 Pointe Petite Riviere, 0.7 mile SW of Pointe au Caves Light,

is the N entrance point of Petite Riviere Bay, which is almost

filled by a reef.

9.13 Baie du Tamarin (20°19'S., 57°22'E.) has depths convenient

for anchoring, but the holding ground is bad.

9.13 Grande Riviere Noire Bay is entered about 2.3 miles SSW of

Baie du Tamarin. The bay is easily identified by a tower situated on the N entrance point, and by Mount Tamarin (20°21'S.,

57°22'E.), which rises from the NE shore to a height of 548m.

9.13 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken in Grand Riviere

Noire Bay. After obtaining pratique at Port Louis, a mid-channel course between the reefs flanking the entrance should be

steered; the reefs are easily seen. 

9.13 Anchorage can be taken as convenient, in 10m to 28m. The

anchorage is good, but with W winds a heavy swell sets in; the

swell is felt less in positions toward the N side of the bay. Vessels should be prepared to leave the anchorage on short notice.

9.13 Pointe Sud Ouest (20°28'S., 57°18'E.) is the SW extremity

of Mauritius. Pointe Sud Ouest is low and rises to a height of

556m at Le Morne Brabant, an isolated flat-topped hill 1.2

miles NE; the hill is an excellent landmark.

9.13 Tides—Currents.—During springs, the currents run over

the bank W of Pointe Sud Ouest at rates from 3 to 5 knots causing considerable rips. The flood current runs ESE and the ebb

current WNW along the S coast, but immediately N of the

point the currents follow the coastline, the flood running NNE

and the ebb running SSW at a rate of 2 to 3 knots.

9.13 Flinders Bank (20°35'S., 57°09'E.), about 1 mile in diameter, has a least charted depth of 101m.

9.14 South side.—From Pointe Sud Ouest, the S coast of

the island trends ESE to the mouth of the River Savanne, which

enters the sea close W of the S extremity of Mauritius. An islet,

49m high, lies on the coastal reef, 1.7 miles ESE of Pointe Sud

Ouest.

9.14 Bel Ombre (20°31'S., 57°24'E.) is a narrow opening in the

barrier reef about 5.5 miles E of Pointe Sud Ouest; a beacon

stands on the reef on the E side of the entrance.

9.14 Bay Jacotet is an indentation abreast an opening in the reef, 3

miles E of Bel Ombre. The S extremity of Mauritius lies 5

miles ESE of Bay Jacotet, and Souffleur Point (20°29'S.,

57°40'E.) lies 9 miles ENE of the S extremity.

9.14 Grand Port (20°24'S., 57°42'E.) is entered E of Pointe

D’Esny (20°25'S., 57°44'E.); it is an extensive harbor and extends about 8.3 miles NNE. The three entrances to the bay are

exposed to the full force of the Southeast Trade Wind and to

the ocean swell. Reefs and banks border the shoreline and it is

unapproachable.

9.14 Pointe Laverdure (20°25'S., 57°46'E.), which dries, lies at

the edge of a reef, extending just over 2 miles E of Pointe

D’Esny. Heavy rollers form nearly all the time over Laverdure

Spit, 0.5 mile ESE of the point. Ile de la Passe, 11.6m high, lies

1 mile N of Point Laverdure; the ruins of a fort are situated on

the islet.

9.14 The S entrance to Grand Port is formed S of Ile de la Passa

and Danish Entrance, which is not recommended, and is

formed at the N extremity of a reef, which dries in places, extending about 4.5 miles NNE from Ile de la Passe.

9.14 Ile aux Fouquets (20°24'S., 57°47'E.) lies on the edge of the

reef 0.6 mile ENE of Ile de la Passe; a prominent disused light

stands on the islet.

9.14 Ile aux Oiseaux (20°20'S., 57°49'E.) stands on the SW part

of the reef, on the N side of Danish Entrance. The reef extends

1.2 miles NNE from the islet. Great South Point is the spit extending NNE from the reef; it breaks heavily at all times.

9.14 Ilot de Roches, on the N side of the North Entrance, lies just

over 1 mile NNW of Great South Point; a beacon stands on the

islet. Ilot de Roches marks the E edge of the reef, which extends 2 miles from the N entrance point of Grand Port.

9.14 Tides—Currents.—The tides are much influenced by the

winds. During strong SE winds, the HW stand sometimes last

for several hours at and near Mahebourg, in the SW corner of

the port.

9.14 In the South Entrance, the flow of water is nearly always out;

the ebb may attain a velocity of 0.5 knot during a strong wind.

The water may stand still during a flood tide.

9.14 In the North Entrance, both flood and ebb currents are regular and, though never strong, vary a good deal in velocity.

9.14 Aspect.—The Bambou Mountains rise over the NE part of

Grand Port; the most conspicuous peaks on the range include:

1. Grand Port Mountain, near the SW extremity of the

range, 4 miles N of Pointe D’Esny (20°25'S., 57°44'E.).
Sector 9. Islands and Banks North and East of Madagascar 125

Pub. 171

2. The outline including Lions Head, 0.4 mile SE, resembling the Sphinx facing inland.

3. Mount Bambou, 2.7 miles NNE of Lions Head.

9.14 The Thumb is a conspicuous upright column of stone, 0.1

mile E of Mount Bambou.

9.14 Point Bambou lies about 1 mile SSW of Pointe du Diable

(20°20'S., 57°47'E.). Piton Rouge, just within Pointe Bambou,

is a useful mark for vessels entering Grand Port by way of

North Entrance. Mount Chat, 0.2 mile NNE of The Thumb, is

distinctive from N and E of Pointe du Diable. A conspicuous

white bungalow, with a black roof, stands just over 1 mile SW

of Piton Rouge.

9.14 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken in Horseshoe Bight,

close within Southern Entrance, with the SW extremity of Ile

de la Passe bearing 161°, 0.3 mile distant, and Ile aux Fouquets

disused lighthouse bearing 102°. This anchorage is on Annanas

Bank and has depths of 10 to 14m.

9.14 The next most frequented anchorage is N of Petit Pate

(20°23'S., 57°44'E.), 2 miles farther WNW of Annanas Bank, in a

clear space 0.3 mile wide, with depths of 12 to 16m, mud.

9.14 Anse d’Hercule, 1.5 miles NNE of Petit Pate, affords anchorage, in a depth of 20m, mud.

9.14 Directions.—Three entrance channels, South Entrance,

Danish Entrance, and North Entrance, lead through the reefs

lying off the bay. Danish Entrance is not considered a safe

channel.

9.14 All of these entrances are exposed to the Southeast Trade

Wind, and swells from this source are often of considerable

size.

9.14 Other problems met with by deep-draft vessels proceeding to

and from Grand Port are the narrow fairways, rocks, and shoals

in the inner anchorage areas. 

9.15 Northeast side.—From Ilot de Roches (20°18'S.,

57°49'E.) to Cape Malheureaux, the N extremity of Mauritius,

a reef extends up to 2.5 miles from the coast. The reef has some

openings, suitable only for boats, and encloses a number of

bays, where several small rivers enter the sea.

9.15 There are no anchorages of any significance along this coast;

the boats which enter the breaks in the barrier reef should have

local knowledge.

Cargados Carajos Shoals

9.16 Cargados Carajos Shoals (16°38'S., 59°36'E.) is an

extensive group of reefs, islets, and shoals. They have been reported to lie about 3 miles further SW than charted. The E side

of the reef has not been closely examined, because it is almost

impossible to approach it from the E; in addition to the tremendous sea always breaking over it, is reported to be steep-to,

and, therefore, most dangerous to approach under any circumstanceSeveral small islets and rocks rise from the long central

reef of Cargados Carajos Shoals, and others lie off its N end

and its W side. All of them are low; many are subject to being

submerged in heavy weather.

9.16 Albatross Island (16°15'S., 59°35'E.) is about 3m high and

is marked by a light. When viewed from the N, the light may

be obscured by trees.

9.16 North Island, surrounded by coral reefs, lies 2.5 miles NNE

from the main reef; depths off its W side are about 12.8m, but

the E side is unsurveyed. Breakers are charted 1.8 miles NNE

of North Island and isolated depths of 2.1m lie 1 and 1.3 miles

SSE, respectively, of the island.

9.16 Ile Raphael (16°27'S., 59°37'E.) is a group of three islets

visible at a distnce of about 10 miles. There are fishermen’s

huts and a meteorological station on the islets; they are situated

in the N part of the extensive shoal.

9.16 Siren Island lies 1.8 miles SW of Ile Raphael. Pearl Breaker

lies 3.8 miles SSW of Siren Island.

9.16 Pearl Island (16°33'S., 59°31'E.) lies 2.3 miles SSW of

Pearl Breaker; it is bare of vegetation, except for a conspicuous

clump of trees on its NE end. 

9.16 Frigate Island lies about 5.3 miles W of the extensive shoal

area in a position 3 miles S of Pearl Island.

9.16 Mapare Island and Avocare Island lie about 10 miles SSE

and 9.5 miles S, respectively, of Ile Raphael. Trees grow on

both islands and are visible from a distance. Avocare Island can

be approached from the W by small vessels with local knowledge, although such approach is difficult because of numerous

coral heads and other dangers.

9.17 Baleine Rocks (16°41'S., 59°31'E.), an isolated group

of rocks. The swell usually breaks over these rocks, but in good

weather, with a calm sea, the position of the rocks, which is approximate, can be seen by discoloration of the water.

9.17 Coco Island (16°49'S., 59°31'E.) is located close within the

S extremity of the primary reef, 8 miles SSW of Baliene

Rocks. It has no trees but is marked by a light.

9.17 Tides—Currents.—At the anchorage of Ile Raphael, the tidal

currents are felt strongly in both directions; the N current is the

stronger. Off Frigate Island they are very slight; the S current

only is distinguishable. At the anchorage off Coco Island, the

tidal current sets N when the tide is rising, at a velocity of about

0.5 knot. Here, the S current is barely perceptible.

9.17 In the month of August, a strong current setting W was experienced off the S side of Cargados Carajos Shoals.

9.17 Cargados Carajos Shoals should not be approached at night.

A vessel approaching during the daytime from the S should

steer for the long central reef. The SW extremity of this reef

may be rounded at a distance of 1 mile. Vessels approaching

from the N during the daytime should make Albatross Island.

9.17 Anchorage.—There are several anchorages in Cargados

Carajos Shoals; all them should be approached from the W.

There is an anchorage about 0.4 mile WNW of Ile Raphael, in

a depth of 18m, one about 1.5 miles SSW of that islet, and 0.75

miles E of Siren Island in a depth of 20m. There is an anchorage, in 22 to 26m, 0.3 mile N of Frigate Island.

9.17 There is anchorage in the bight NE of Coco Island, at a distance of 2, 3, and 4.3 miles NNE of the light; vessels should

not anchor in less than 20m in these berths.

Rodrigues

9.18 Rodrigues (Rodrigues Island) (19°42'S., 63°25'E.) is

of volcanic formation and a dependency of Mauritius. A mountain range extending E and W across the island reaches a height

of 396m in Mount Limon. Rows of peaks, separated by deep

ravines, connect the central range to the N and S coasts of the

island. The island is composed principally of basalt, but at either end is some upraised coral. It is hilly throughout; a central
126 Sector 9. Islands and Banks North and East of Madagascar 

Pub. 171

ridge trends ENE and WSW through the middle of the island

along nearly its entire length. Spurs from the central ridge extend to the N and S coasts of the island; between the spurs are

deep ravines. The W portion of the island is more or less broken into isolated hills and is generally lower than the E portion. 

9.18 Rodriguez is connected with the general submarine cable

system and has periodic communication by sea with Mauritius

and Madagascar.

9.18 Tides—Currents.—During the Southeast Trade Winds,

there is a constant W current at a velocity of 0.2 to 0.6 knots.

An extensive coral bank, with a least known depth of 42m,

lies 90 miles W of Rodrigues. The limit of the bank, as defined

by the 180m curve, appears to be about 10 miles in extent. The

general depths over the bank are from 70 to 73m; the E limit of

the bank has not been determined. The bottom for about 15

miles around the bank is most irregular; depths from 366 to

549m are found in close proximity to those from 1,829 to

3,658m. 

Rodrigues is surrounded by a coral reef which projects about

0.1 mile off the NE side, 4.5 miles off the NW side.

9.18 The reef, which is flat, partially uncovers and bares numerous islets; during LWS, some parts may have 0.3 or 0.6m over

them. The reef is steep-to, but with the swell that rolls in, the

sea often breaks in depths of 18.3m more than 0.1 mile outside

the actual reef. The heaviest breakers may be found on the SW

extremity of the encircling reef. In light winds a vessel can anchor almost anywhere outside the reef, in depths of 18 to 37m.

9.18 There are many islets on the reef, which may be seen on the

chart; Crab Islet, 46m high, lying 0.6 mile W off the S extremity of the island, is the highest of these islands.

9.18 Pilotage.—Pilotage for the island is not compulsory; a local

boatman is always available for vessels that need advice as to

the channels.

9.19 Port Mathurin (19°41'S., 63°25'E.) (World Port Index No. 47750) is situated on the N coast of Rodrigues; it consists of a large village situated on a mud bank, and is the

principal settlement and administrative center of the island.

9.19 Depths—Limitations.—Mathurin Bay is the only harbor of

Rodrigues available to deep-draft vessels.

9.19 It was reported (1978) that a depth of 18.3m was indicated

by depth meter in position 19°37'28'S, 63°24'30'E. A depth of

35m is charted in this position.

9.19 The channel leading to Port Mathurin was reported to have

been dredged to 8.7m in 1990.

9.19 Aspect.—Mont Piton shows as a rounded cone and is quite

unmistakable from the vicinity of Mathurin Bay, but when seen

from E or W, it loses its conical shape.

9.19 Pointe Venus (19°40'S., 63°26'E.) is a cliffy headland; a telegraph station stands on the point. The station consists of five

large concrete and corrugated iron buildings that face the harbor; they are conspicuous.

9.19 The most conspicuous and blackest cliff on the N coast of

Rodrigues in the vicinity of Port Mathurin is near the telegraph

station. A whitewash mark is toward the E end of the cliff; if

the mark does not show up well, the cliff itself is a useful mark.

9.19 A conspicuous flagstaff stands 0.3 mile WSW of the front

range light; a group of radio masts stands S of Pointe Venus.

9.19 Anchorage.—Abandoned submarine telegraph cables exist

in the N and E parts of Mathurin Bay; to avoid these a vessel

should anchor, in 16 to 22m, W of a line drawn 010° from

Point Venus and S of an E-W line, 0.8 mile N of the point.

9.19 Vessels at anchor in Mathurin Bay are sheltered from the SE

wind that prevails the greater part of the year. The anchorage is

further protected from the N by Middle Ground. Even so, rollers set in occasionally and cause a swell in the bay. They may

come from any quarter, but usually last only a few hours.

9.19 Small boating is extremely hazardous.

9.19 In 1978, a vessel with a draft of 7.9m anchored, in 28m, in

Mathurin Bay, just outside Western Pass, near the entrance

range line, good holding ground, mud and sand.

9.19 Directions.—Vessels approaching Mathurin Bay from the

W should keep Pointe au Sel, near the NE extremity of the island, open N of Pointe aux Cornes, the N extremity, until the

lighted beacons are in line bearing 165.5°. A course of 165.5°

should then be held until Booby Island bears 252°; from this

position a SE course will lead to the anchorage.

9.19 Vessels entering by way of Eastern Pass should steer with

Port Mathurin

Quay at Port Mathurin
Sector 9. Islands and Banks North and East of Madagascar 127

Pub. 171

Diamond Island in line bearing 231°, with a notch in the hills at

the W end of Rodrigues. This course should be held closely until Mont Piton, the 354m summit, bears 181° and is in line with

the whitewash mark on the black prominent cliff. A vessel in

this position will be inside the reefs and shoals, and may alter

course as necessary for the anchorage.

9.20 Port South East (19°45'S., 63°27'E.) is on the SE

side of Rodrigues; it is approached through Grande Passe. No

marks can be given for the entrance.

9.20 Port South East is suitable for vessels drawing up to 6.1m; it

is well-sheltered, being protected by the reef, and has a clear

space E of Hermitage Islet with depths from 5.8 to 18.3m, mud

and sand, good holding ground. It would be a useful anchorage

were it not for the difficulty of entry and exit.

9.20 Grande Pass, which has moderate depths, is free from dangers. Because of the strong tidal currents, the tortuous nature of

the channel, and the usual strength of the wind, entry should

not be attempted without local knowledge, except in a case of

emergency.

The Aldabra Islands

9.21 The Aldabra Islands (9°25'S., 46°22'E.) lie on an

atoll in the NE approach to Mozambique Channel and are comprised of four islands, namely West Island, Middle Island,

Polymnie Island, and South Island. South Island is the largest

of the group and forms the E and S, and the greater part of the

W sides of the lagoon. The islands are reef-fringed, with the

reef extending up to 0.2 mile off shore in places; they are steepto. The islands are generally visible up to 15 miles.

9.21 The Aldabra Islands are a part of the Republic of Seychelles.

9.21 Tides—Currents.—The flood current runs through the

passes for about 1 hour 5 minutes after HW, and the ebb current an equal time after LW. Throughout Main Channel and its

branches, the current runs with great velocity, at springs attaining a velocity of 6.5 knots, with scarcely any SW; at neaps the

velocity is 2.5 knots.

9.21 With any wind from a N direction; when ebb tides are running, dangerously confused seas suddenly occur in the entrance of Main Channel and for a distance seaward of up to 1

mile.

9.21 Anchorage.—During the Southeast Monsoon, the best anchorage for vessels up to 91m in length, with a 4.3m draft, lies

about 0.3 mile W of the flagstaff at the settlement on West Island, in 37m; this is only about 0.1 mile from the edge of the

reef, therefore, should the wind change and blow with any

strength from the NW, vessels should be prepared to move.

9.21 During the Northwest Monsoon, anchorage may be taken E

of Hodoul Point, on the bank extending from the E end of

South Island. This bank is uneven, therefore, vessels should anchor outside the 15m curve, about 0.2 mile from the extreme E

end of the atoll. Should the wind change to the SE, a sharp sea

soon builds up over this part of the bank.

Caution.—An IMO-adopted Area to be Avoided has been

established around the Aldabra Islands, which may best be

seen on the appropriate chart. Vessels greater than 500 grt, carrying oil or hazardous materials, should avoid the area.

Assumption Island

9.22 Assumption Island (9°43'S., 46°30'E.), which is a

part of the Republic of Seychelles and is considered to be part

of the Cosmoledo Group, lies 15 miles S of the E end of the Aldabra Islands. The island is surrounded by a narrow fringing,

except at the N end of the bay on the N end; shoal water extends 0.9 mile SE from the SE end of the island. Except on the

W side of the island, where there is a sandy beach, the seaward

sides of Assumption Island are steep or overhanging cliffs. At

the SE end of the island, there is a series of sand dunes, which

are conspicuous and reach a height of 30m.

9.22 Tides—Currents.—At St. Thomas Anchorage, the flood

current sets WSW at a velocity of 3 knots at springs while the

ebb current ENE at a velocity of 1 knot at neaps.

9.22 Anchorage.—In the bay off the W coast, anchorage during

the Southeast Monsoon may be taken anywhere about 0.1 mile

from the high water line, in about 9m, but the stern would then

be in about 55m and a vessel would need to weigh anchor

should the tide cause the vessel to swing against the wind. 

9.22 Small vessels loading from the island normally drop their anchors on the reef edge, about 0.1 mile NE of a ruined pier, and

lie back on their chain during the Southeast Monsoon.

9.22 During the Northwest Monsoon, vessels could anchor, in

29m, 1.3 miles E of the highest sand dune at the SE end of the

island.

Caution.—An IMO-adopted Area to be Avoided has been

established around Assumption Island, which may best be seen

on the appropriate chart. Vessels greater than 500 grt carrying

oil or hazardous materials should avoid the area.

9.23 The Cosmoledo Group (9°43'S., 43°36'E.) lies on an

atoll and is a part of the Republic of Seychelles.

9.23 The group consists of many islands of raised coral lying on

the perimeter of an almost circular reef. The largest islands are

Menai, on the W extremity, and Wizard Island (9°44'S.,

47°39'E.), on the SE extremity. The seaward edge of the reef,

which dries from 0.6 to 0.9m, is steep-to.

9.23 The maximum elevation is normally 4.5m, but sand hills of

considerably greater heights have been raised. All of the islands of the Cosmoledo Group show signs of great erosion,

both on the seaward and lagoon sides.

9.23 Menai Island (9°42'S., 47°31'E.) is the site of the only settlement in the group; the only other houses are at a fishing station on Wizard Island. The seaward coast is sandy. Johannes

Point, the NW extremity of the island, is conspicuous. The settlement is situated close NE of Johannes Point; another conspicuous point is located close N of the settlement. A clump of

trees, about 15m high, is located on the S end of Menai Island.

9.24 West North Island (9°39'S., 47°34'E.), the farthest N

of Cosmoledo Group, lies NE of Menai Island; it has a height

of 8m. South Island, 6m high, is the farthest S of the group; it

lies SE of Menai.

9.24 Tides—Currents.—At the anchorage off Menai Island, the

tidal currents are strong. The ebb sets NE, augmenting the ordinary set of the equatorial current around the island. The flood,

during neaps, barely neutralizes the set; at other times it sets

SW. The velocity of the outgoing current in South West Passage is 4 to 6 knots; the velocity of the outgoing current in
128 Sector 9. Islands and Banks North and East of Madagascar 

Pub. 171

South East Passage is 4 knots.

9.24 Anchorage.—Anchorage may be found during the Southeast Monsoon, in about 28m, about 0.2 mile from the reef off

the settlement of Menai Island. The bank is steep-to, but the

sea is smooth and little swell passes around the island.

During the Northwest Monsoon, anchorage can be taken, in

9 to 18m, it is reported, in positions E of the N part of Wizard

Island or, in 18 to 37m, about 1 mile SE of this island. Neither

anchorage has been surveyed, therefore, they should be used

with caution.

9.25 Astove Island (10°04'S., 47°45'E.), which is a part of

the Republic of Seychelles, lies on an atoll SSE of the Cosmoledo Group. The reef fringing the island is steep-to, except on

its SE side and off the N point. The settlement is on the W side

of the island, about 0.8 mile SSW of the N extremity. A wooden cross, painted white, is easily visible among the trees at the

N end of the settlement.

Providence Island

9.26 Providence Island (9°14'S., 51°02'E.) lies at the N

end of a reef; Cerf Island lies at the S end of this reef. Providence Island is well-wooded, with coconut palms and an avenue of casuarina trees, 15.2m high, traversing the middle of the

island from E to W. Near the W extremity of the island is a

long low red-roofed building. The islands are a part of the Republic of Seychelles.

9.26 The E side of the reef has not been examined from seaward;

the prevailing SE winds and heavy seas render it unapproachable. It was reported (1972) that the reef lies 2 miles farther to

the E than charted. A light is exhibited from a metal framework

tower on the NE end of Providence Island. The light is obscured over the island, and the S and W parts of the reef, between the bearings of 359° and 020°.

9.26 Wizard Reef, which breaks heavily, lies N of Providence Island.

9.26 Cerf Island has been planted with coconut palms; the tops of

some of these are 10.7m high, and it is said that the island is

visible up to 10 miles. A flagstaff marks Cerf Island.

9.26 A depth of 16.8m lies 9.5 miles S of the N extremity of Cerf

Island; depths of 17.6m and 18.1m lie 1.5 miles NNW and 4

miles NE, respectively, of this depth.

9.26 Tides—Currents.—At the anchorage off Cerf Island, the

tidal current sets N at a velocity of 0.25 to 0.5 knot (at springs,

possibly more), while the tide is rising by the shore, and SW at

about the same velocity, but irregularly, while the tide is falling. The currents are slack for about 1 hour at the turn of the

tide.

9.26 At the anchorage off Providence Island, there is a marked

difference in the currents; they are stronger and set N for 9

hours, from 3 hours before HW until the succeeding LW, at a

nearly constant velocity of 1.5 knots (at 5 days after the change

of the moon); then they slacken and set SSW for about 3 hours

at nearly 1.5 knots, then turn rapidly again to the N.

9.26 Anchorage.—The most convenient anchorage from which to

communicate with Providence Island is in 35m, sand and coral,

with the village boathouse bearing about 119° and the N extremity of the island bearing about 046°; caution is necessary, as the

depths decrease very rapidly. This anchorage is free from much

swell during the Southeast Trade Wind, but is exposed to the

wind. A vessel of 900 grt anchored in this position, but was informed by the manager of the island that a better anchorage

could be found, in 22m, 0.1 to 0.2 mile farther S.

9.26 Southeast winds blow about 9 months of the year, but in January and February, when NW winds are strong at times, it is reported that vessels can anchor E of Providence Island.

9.26 The most sheltered anchorage is in 18m with the N end of Cerf

Island bearing about 142°, distant 2 miles; the bottom here is more

even, and anchorage depths extend farther from the reef.

9.27 St. Pierre Island (9°19'S., 50°43'E.) is a part of the

Republic of Seychelles. The island is barren except for a clump

of casuarina trees, 12.2m high, on its N part. 

9.27 The seaward faces of St. Pierre Island are abrupt coral cliffs,

2.4 to 3m high. The ceaseless sea swell has undercut these faces; jets of water are thrown up in many places by each wave as

it strikes “blow holes” worn out of the coral. 

9.27 At the SE shore of the island, the wearing away has caused

the formation of flat shelves.

9.27 Anchorage can be obtained off St. Pierre Island, in 37m, coral, with the pier bearing 180°. The holding ground is bad and a

vessel should always be ready to put to sea should the wind

freshen from the N.

The Farquhar Group

9.28 The Farquhar Group (10°10'S., 51°07'E.), part of

the Republic of Seychelles, lies on an atoll 35 miles S of Cerf

Island. The islands are visible from a considerable distance.

9.28 The barrier reef is steep-to, except on its NW side where

there is a sand bank, with a least depth of 11m; the bottom is

plainly visible.

9.28 North Island (10°07'S., 51°11'E.) is the farthest N of the

Farquhar Group; North Point is the N extremity of the island.

Race Point is situated 1.2 miles SW of North Point and is the

principal entrance to the lagoon. 

9.28 North Island has a height of 12.2m near the settlement manager’s house; a height of 6.1m is located 0.7 mile SE of North

Point.

9.28 Goelette Island (10°13'S., 51°08'E.) is the farthest S of the

islands in the group and is difficult to identify at more than 4

miles. The fringing reef extends nearly 5 miles WSW from Goelette Island and then extends the same distance WNW to its W

extremity.

9.28 Ile des Deposes lies on the edge of the reef 3.5 miles NNE of

its W extremity; Race Point is located 5.5 miles ENE of Ile des

Deposes.

9.28 Winds—Weather.—Southeast winds prevail from April to

October. During the remainder of the year the winds are variable. 

9.28 Tides—Currents.—At the anchorage, the tidal current sets

NE during the rising tide until 3 hours after HW by the shore.

The velocity at springs is 0.25 to 1.25 knots. The tidal current

sets W at a velocity of about 0.5 knot, or is slack for the remaining 3 hours before LW.

9.28 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken on the bank off the

entrance of the channel at Race Point, except during the cyclone season from December to April, inclusive.

9.28 In the recommended position for anchoring ,the depth is
Sector 9. Islands and Banks North and East of Madagascar 129

Pub. 171

12m, with Race Point bearing 173° and North Point, on North

Island, bearing about 079°. The bottom in this position is sand.

Considerable swell is felt here.

9.28 Directions.—Vessels approaching the anchorage from the E

should round North Point at a distance of at least 1 mile.

9.28 Vessels drawing more than 3m should not, except in cases of

emergency, attempt to proceed through the channel to Inner

Harbor; the channel is narrow and winding and the tidal currents attain velocities of 3 to 4 knots.

9.28 Bulldog Bank (10°00'S., 50°48'E.), with a least charted

depth of 18.3m, lies WNW of the N extremity of the Farquhar

Group; McLeod Bank, with a similar depth, lies farther in a

WNW direction.

The Comores Islands

9.29 The Comores Islands (12°12'S., 44°16'E.) lie in

about the middle of Mozambique Channel; all four islands of

the group (Njazidja, Mwali (Moheli), Nzwani, and Mayotte)

are of volcanic origin

Njazidja

9.30 Njazidja (11°37'S., 43°22'E.) is covered with vegetation, except where lava has solidified. Mount Karthala is a crater, but from a distance the mountain appears smooth and

dome-shaped. The S slope rises so evenly from sea level as to

give a deceptive impression of the height. In clear weather,

Mount Karthala can be seen from distances up to 100 miles. 

Ras Habu (11°21'S., 43°25'E.), the NE extremity of the island, is connected with the shore by a low neck of land, and

from a distance appears as an island.

9.30 Between Ras Habu and the NW extremity of Njazidja, 6

miles W, the N coast is generally low, but the land rises steeply

to a plateau about 762m high, which is the site of some volcanic cones. The extent of the reef fringing this coast is little

known.

9.31 West side.—The coast is steep-to, but has no distinctive features.

9.31 Mitsamiouli (11°23'S., 43°17'E.) is a village situated close S

of the NW extremity of the island. A large white conspicuous

hospital, surmounted by a flagstaff, stands in the middle of the

village. Temporary anchorage, in case of necessity, may be obtained, in 55m, with the flagstaff on the hospital bearing 099°,

distant 1.2 miles, or in 20m, with the flagstaff bearing 114°,

distant 0.7 mile. It was reported (1996) that the hospital is obscured by trees.

Moroni (11°42'S., 43°15'E.) (World Port Index No. 47300)

is situated on the W side of Njazidja, at the head of Moroni

Bay, about 2.5 miles SSW of N’Tsoudjini. The port consists of

a town, a very small harbor, and an open roadstead.

9.31 The bay is encumbered by a shallow flat of sand and coral.

Ilot Souazou lies on the flat and is marked by a light. The anchorage off Moroni is poor and the holding ground is not good;

it is open to SW winds and vessels are often forced to put to sea

during the dry season. The depths in the anchorage are from 22

to 35m, sand and coral. The anchorage should be approached

before sunrise, but a night approach is dangerous as the lights

are only visible from a short distance and are often extinguished. 

9.31 A jetty, 280m long and 30m wide, is situated 0.1 mile WSW

of Ilot Souadzou. Local knowledge is required to use the berths

for varying limitations of depths. Vessels with an loa of 70m

and a draft of 3m have used the jetty.

9.31 Tankers berth at an offshre mooring buoy where the maximum depth is 4.5m. A submarine pipeline connected to the

shore the buoy. 

9.32 Southwest side.—Pointe N’Gouni (11°44'S.,

43°13'E.), the W extremity of Njazida, lies SSW of Moroni.

Pointe Moindzaza is located 3 miles S of Pointe N’Gouni; the

intervening coast is fronted by a reef which extends 0.3 mile

offshore.

9.32 Cratere Moindzaza, on the coast N of Pointe Moindzaza, is

distinguished by its small ravines forming regular, parallel furrows from its base to summit. A lookout station on the summit

forms a remarkable landmark.

9.32 Caution.—Recif Vailheu (11°49'S., 43°02'E.) lies 12 miles

W of Pointe Moindzaza. The reef is reported to lie 2 miles SE

of its charted position; it is always covered with a minimum of

4.9m of water. It can be identified by the discoloration of the

water, and, in good visibility, it can be seen. 

9.32 Between Pointe Moindzaza and the S extremity of Njazidja,

the coast is low, rocky, and appears to be steep-to; it is backed

by many villages.

9.33 East side.—Between the S extremity of Njazidja and

Pointe M’Vouni (11°53'S., 43°30'E.) the coast continues low

and rocky and a reef extends 0.5 mile from it in places. Pointe

M’Vouni is low, but a hill rises to a crater close within it. Baie

des Essarts is formed about midway along this coast.

9.33 Chindini (Shendini) (11°54'S., 43°31'E.) is a village situated

about midway between West Point and North Point. A white

house in the village is a useful mark. A steep-to patch, over

which the least depth is 5.7m, lies in the outer anchorage off

Chindini in a position about 0.6 mile ESE of the village. A reef

fronts the village.

9.33 The anchorage off Chindini, in 33m, is SW of the shoal

patch, with North Point bearing 023°, West Point bearing 258°,

and the white house in the village bearing 307°. Local knowledge is required before anchoring.

Moroni Harbor
130 Sector 9. Islands and Banks North and East of Madagascar 

Pub. 171

9.33 From Pointe M’Vouni, the E coast of Njazidja trends in a

NNW direction to Ras Habu;this coast is nearly uniform in aspect and has no coastal plain.

9.33 A table topped hill rises to a height of 500m, 12 miles NNW

of Pointe M’Vouni and about 4.5 miles farther NNW are lava

cliffs. A mosque in the village of Mahale, 1 mile NW of Pointe

M’Vouni, is conspicuous.

Mwali (Moheli)

9.34 Mwali (12°19'S., 43°45'E.), the smallest island of the

group, rises to a height of 790m. It lies SSE of Grande Comore;

this fertile island is well-wooded and coconut palms are abundant.

9.35 Northeast side.—From Pointe Hoani (12°15'S.,

43°40'E.), the coast of Mwali trends SE 15 miles to Pointe Tsinayouhi, the SE extremity of the island. This coast is little

known except in the vicinity of Fomboni, which is about 5

miles SE of Pointe Haoni.

9.35 The most conspicuous feature on this coast is Square Top,

situated near the coast 4.5 miles NW of Pointe Tsinayouhi.

9.35 Fomboni (12°16'S., 43°45'E.) (World Port Index No. 47310)

is situated in a slight indentation in the coast at the head of

Anse Doueny; the port is very small and consists of a town and

an open roadstead in Baie Fomboni (Fomboni Road).

9.35 Depths—Limitations.—The port is visited by small coastal

vessels only.

9.35 Signals.—There is a signal station at Fomboni; storm signals

are shown.

9.35 Anchorage.—The anchorage off Fomboni is good during

the SE trade wind, although a troublesome swell is sometimes

experienced; during the Northwest Monsoon, from about November to February, the swell is very heavy and the anchorage

is not safe. Small vessels can obtain better shelter in Anse Tsoa

(12°17'S., 43°46'E.) during SE winds.

9.35 Large vessels should not anchor in depths of less than 16.5m.

9.35 A vessel of moderate size can anchor on the alignment of

Beacon A and Beacon B, in line bearing 195°, and with the

daymark on the reef close off the W entrance point of Anse

Doueny in range with the beacon 1.5 miles WNW of Fomboni,

bearing 267°, in about 15m; in 1970, a vessel was recommended to anchor N of the latter alignment.

9.36 South side.—From Pointe Tsinayouhi (12°23'S.,

43°52'E.), the S coast of Mwali trends WNW to Pointe Miremani, a distant of 12.7 miles. Pointe Tsinayouhi is steep-to, but

the intervening coast to Pointe Domode, 5.5 miles WNW, is

fringed by a coastal reef which extends up to 1.5 miles offshore. Between Pointe Domode and Pointe Miremani, the coast

and fringing reef are indented by numerous coves.

9.36 A depth of 1.4m is charted in a position 1.5 miles SSE of

Pointe Domode, and breakers have been observed in a position

about 3 miles SSW of the same point.

9.36 Ile Dzaha (12°24'S., 43°39'E.), located 2.5 miles S of Pointe

Miremani, is the farthest SW of the islets off this coast; a charted depth of 9m lies 1.2 miles SSW of this islet.

9.36 Sail Rocks (12°21'S., 43°40'E.), located on the coastal reef 0.5

mile SE of Pointe Miremani, are a good mark; they have perpendicular sides, about 15.2m high, and are visible up to 10 miles.

The other islets off this coast are best seen on the chart.

9.36 Anchorage.—Vessels with local knowledge can anchor, in

18m, muddy sand, with Nioumachoua Point bearing 288°, 0.7

mile distant.

9.36 Miremani Cove is an indentation close E of Sail Rocks. Vessels with local knowledge can take secure anchorage in the

cove, in 18 to 37m, with a bottom of sand and mud. In the recommended position, Sail Rocks bear 270° and the NE extremity of Ile Canzoni bears 169°.

Pointe Miringoni—W extremity
Sector 9. Islands and Banks North and East of Madagascar 131

Pub. 171

9.37 West side.—From Pointe Miremani (12°21'S.,

43°39'E.), the coast trends NNW to Pointe Damou, then

continues NNW to Pointe Miringoni, the W extremity of the

island. Vessels can anchor off the villages along the stretch of

coast, keeping from 1 to 1.5 miles offshore. From Pointe

Miringoni, the coast trends 2 miles NNE to Point Tsandzani,

then continues 2 miles ENE to Pointe Hoani, the N extremity

of the island. Ile Bouelachamba, located on a reef, lies 0.5 mile

SW of Pointe Miringoni. Midway between Pointe Tsandzani

and Pointe Hoani is the village of Domoni. Anchorage can be

obtained off Domoni; the depths decrease regularly from 24 to

14.6m, 0.5 mile offshore.

Nzwani

9.38 Nzwani (Anjouan) (12°13'S., 44°22'E.), lying E of

Mwali, is of volcanic origin and is fertile. From the W it appears as a succession of peaks, wooded to their summits, rising

one behind the other. From a distance of 50 miles from the E, it

appears as two peaks, of which the N is the higher. Pic Mtingui, in about the middle of the island, is conspicuous; it attains

a height of 1,595m, but its highest point is rarely visible, except

in the early morning during good weather, because of enveloping clouds. The peak is cone-shaped.

9.39 North side.—Between the N and W extremities of the

island, the coast forms a bay and is fringed in places by coral

reefs. The reefs show up green at HW and the sea breaks over

them at half-tide unless it is calm; there are usually tide rips off

each extremity.

Patsy Road (Patsi Road) (12°08'S., 44°27'E.) (World Port

Index No. 47330) is an indentation between Pointe Patsi and

Pointe Mirontsi. 

9.40 Mutsamudu (12°10'S., 44°24'E.) (World Port Index

No. 47320) is SSW of the N extremity of Nzwani and lies 0.5

mile SSW of Pointe Mirontsi. The port of Mutsamudu is an artificial dredged harbor situated close W of the town and is the

principal port of the Comores Islands.

9.40 Depths—Limitations.—The harbor is formed between

Quai Principal, on the N side, and Quai de Transit, on the S

side. Quai Principal, which projects from reclaimed land W of

the Mutsamudu minaret, has three berths on its S face.

9.40 Berth 1A, at the outer end, has a dredged depth of 9m alongside; this berth is used for foreign trade and can accommodate

ro-ro vessels. Berth 1B, E of Berth 1A, has a depth of 4.5m

alongside and used by coasters. Berth 1C, between Berth 1B

and the root of the quay, is for vessels that can be grounded.

9.40 Berth 2, on the N side of Quai de Transit, has a depth of

3.7m alongside; this berth is used by inter-island traffic.

9.40 Aspect.—The most prominent objects are a large white minaret near the center of town and a white church, which stands

alone on a hill, ESE of the minaret.

9.40 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory. Pilots and tugs should be

requested through the harbormaster’s office; a radiotelephone

watch is kept. The pilot embarks 2 miles N of the harbor.

9.40 Anchorage.—Anchorage for ocean-going vessels off Mutsamudu is approached with the lookout station light tower

bearing 102°. Vessels anchor with the range beacons in line

bearing 184°, in a depth of 60m. There is also anchorage in

Mouillage de la Fontaine, in a depth of 55m, about 0.8 mile

offshore, with the N and SE anchoring beacons in line bearing

134°.

9.40 Ilot de la Selle (12°09'S., 44°13'E.) lies close NW of the W

extremity of Nzwani; it is a small saddle-shaped bluff. There is

said to be good anchorage off the N side of Ilot de la Selle, in

22m. Vessels rounding the W extremity of Nzwani should stay

at least 1.5 miles off Ilot de la Selle.

9.41 Southwest side.—Between the W extremity of

Nzwani and Pomoni, a reef extends up to 1 mile from the

coast; there are some gaps in the SE part of this area in the vicinity of the villages. From Pomoni to the S extremity of the island, 9 miles SE, the coast is mostly steep-to.

9.41 An isolated coral shoal, with a charted depth of 5m, lies

close offshore NW of Pomoni.

9.41 In May, rollers are heavy at times along this coast; rain is

said to be incessant.

Pomoni (12°16'S., 44°24'E.) (World Port Index No. 47315)

inner anchorage consists of a natural basin in the coastal reef,

which dries. During the Northeast Moonsoon, the anchorage is

calm. With strong winds from the S to SW, and during spring

high tides, the anchorage may be dangerous. The depths in the

fairway are from 16.5 to 35m, but a reef with a least depth of

1.2m lies in middle of the outer part of the entrance; it is difficult to distinguish. The harbor of Pomoni can be used by vessels with a length not exceeding 61m.

9.41 Pomoni may be identified by its high saddle-shaped land and

two contiguous peaks dominating the coast. The white square

chimney of a sugar refinery, 0.7 mile SE of the basin entrance,

and a white beacon situated 0.2 mile NE of the chimney, are

good landmarks. There is anchorage about 0.4 mile SW of the

sugar refinery, in 26m.

9.41 Directions.—Pomoni can be approached with the sugar refinery chimney in line with the beacon NE, bearing 046°. The

harbor is then entered with two distinctive walls in line bearing

009°, which passes close E of the 1.2m coral shoal; care should

be taken not to have too much way on so as to be able to turn

short round the NW extremity of the S reef.

9.42 East side.—Between Mourne de la Pointe (12°23'S.,

44°32'E.), the SE extremity of Nzwani, and the N extremity,

the coast is high, rocky, and generally steep-to. The most important places on this coast are M’Ramani, Domoni, and Bamboa, situated 2, 7, and 10.5 miles N, respectively, of Mourne de

Nzwani Coast
132 Sector 9. Islands and Banks North and East of Madagascar 

Pub. 171

la Pointe. At M’Rami, there is a white minaret which is prominent.

9.42 Domoni (Deumoni) (12°15'S., 44°32'E.) is a village N of

Mourne de la Pointe. There is a good anchorage off the sugar

refinery, in depths of 14 to 27m, 0.4 mile offshore, except at the

height of the Sourtheast Monsoon in August and September.

9.42 Bamboa (12°12'S., 44°31'E.) is a village N of Domoni. A

white factory chimney on the W side of Bambao and a house,

with a flagstaff NW of the village, are easily identified.

9.42 Two range beacons stand on the S side of the village; M’Sangani Beacon, the front beacon, stands on the shore near a break

in the fringing reef; Achombo Beacon, the rear beacon, stands

0.3 mile W of the front beacon. Gege Beacon stands on the

beach, off the mouth of the Riviere Gege, 1.2 miles SSE of

M’Sangani beacon tower.

9.42 The N of two anchorages off Bambao is on the alignment of

the range beacons, bearing 274°, with Gege Beacon bearing

184°, in depths of 29 to 35m; this is the more convenient berth

for working lighters, but there is deep water close seaward.

9.42 Caution.—Reported (2006) existence of a reef about 16

miles E of Bamboa in position 12°12.8'S, 44°46.1E; however,

its existence may be doubtful. 

Mayotte

9.43 Mayotte (12°49'S., 45°10'E.) is remarkable from all

directions due to its uneven profile. The coasts are low and

swampy and are inundated by the sea in many places; they are

covered by mangroves. The administrative and commercial

capital of Mayotte is on Ilot Dzaoudzi, off the E coast of the island.

9.43 Choungui rises from comparatively low land about 3 miles N

of the S extremity of the island; the peak has the shape of a

sugarloaf. An observer approaching the island from the E can

easily identify Morne Carre, a square-topped hill about 1.7

miles E of Choungui. Combani Hill has a fairly conspicuous

conical summit; the hill rises in about the middle of the island

and is not distinguishable from the SE or S.

9.43 Tides—Currents.—The current in the vicinity of Mayotte is

variable, but close inshore they usually follow the direction of

the coast and reefs; at times they attain a rate of 3.5 knots in the

passages. Between Nzwani and Mayotte the current usually

sets SW, but sometimes it sets SE at a considerable rate.

9.43 Depths—Limitations.—Mayotte is surrounded by a barrier

reef which is generally steep-to and should be approached with

caution due to uncertain currents in the vicinity and to the considerable distance parts of it lie off the island. The reef is broken by many passages except off the S and NE coasts; the

principal passage is Passe M’Zamboro, N of the island.

9.43 The best time for a vessel to proceed through the passage,

draft permitting, is at or near LW, when the reefs are generally

visible in a good light. The passage is marked by lights, beacons,

and buoys, but the buoys are often swept away by seas.

9.43 The barrier reef is usually marked by breakers, but discoloration of water is the only warning in a calm sea at HW.

9.44 Northeast side.—Between Rassi Douamougno (Cap

Douamougno) (12°39'S., 45°06'E.), the N extremity of Mayotte, and Pointe Makoen, about 10 miles SE, the coast is high,

rocky, and indented; the barrier reef lies up to 4.5 miles off

parts of this coast, and many islets and reefs lie in the area between the coast and the barrier reef.

9.44 Reefs extend 1 mile NE and 1 mile E of Rassi Douamougno;

a light marks the SE extension of the reef. A depth of 8.8m lies

0.2 mile ESE of the light.

9.44 Pointe Bandaboa (12°42'S., 45°08'E.) is high and steep; a

beacon stands on this salient point.

9.44 Baie de Longoni is entered between Pointe Bandaboa and

Pointe de Longoni. Ile Verte, surmounted by a beacon, lies

close off the head of the bay, 1 mile WSW of Pointe de Longoni.

9.44 Baie de Longoni affords good sheltered anchorage, in depths

of 18 to 37m. The beacon on Ile Verte, bearing 175°, leads into

the bay clear of all dangers.

9.44 Longoni Cove, at the E end of Baie de Longoni, affords restricted anchorage in depths from 7 to 15m.

9.44 From Pointe de Longoni the coast trends ESE about 3 miles

to Pointe Kongo (12°44'S., 45°13'E.), then SE 1.7 miles to

Pointe Makoen. The first part of this coast is almost steep-to,

but between the latter two points the reef extends 0.7 mile offshore, and reefs and foul ground extends 1.5 miles SE of Pointe

Makeon.

9.44 Passe M’Zamboro (12°36'S., 45°07'E.), the principal approach to Mayotte through the barrier reef, is approached from

the N and leads between the E extremity of Recif du Nord and

the W extremity of Grand Recif du Nord-Est; it has a least

depth of 10.5m in the fairway, although caution is necessary, as

depths of as little as 9.1m lie close to the charted recommended

tracks. 

9.44 Pilotage in Passe M’Zamboro is compulsory for all vessels

over 30m in length; the maximum draft that can be taken in is

11.5m. Pilotage is available from 0600 until 2200. Vessels send

a request for pilotage 48 hours and 24 hours in advance. Vessels confirm their ETA with the harbormaster 18 hours in advance and contact the pilot on VHF channel 14 or 16 about 2.5

hours in advance. The pilot normally embarks 1.5 miles off the

pass. Passe M’Zamboro and passage to Dzaoudzi should not be

attempted at night.

9.45 East side.—From Pointe Makoen, the coast trends in

a general SSE direction to Pointe Saziley (12°58'S., 45°12'E.).

Pointe Saziley is steep-to, rocky, and has a white patch on the

cliff; it rises to Morne Saziley, close W, and is a good mark.

9.45 Anse Choa is formed N of Pointe Choa, about 1.5 miles SSE.

Mayotte
Sector 9. Islands and Banks North and East of Madagascar 133

Pub. 171

Pointe Makoen; a coral reef, which dries 0.9m, lies in the middle

of the entrance of the bay. An underwater cable has been laid

from the jetty in Anse Choa in an ESE direction to Ilot Dzaoudzi, a distant of 1.2 miles; anchoring is prohibited within 45m

of the cable. There is a mooring buoy in Anse Choa.

9.45 A minaret is situated in a village 1 mile SW of Pointe Choa.

9.45 Pointe Hamouro (12°52'S., 45°13'E.) is located SSW of

Pointe Choa; Benara rises to a height of 660m WSW of the

point.

9.45 Two lights, which form a range bearing 293°, are situated 0.5

mile SW of Pointe Hamouro; they should not be relied upon.

9.45 Pointe Saziley, the SE extremity of Mayotte, lies 6 miles

SSW of Pointe Hamouro; a reef extends about 0.8 miles SE of

the coast midway between these two points.

9.45 Ile Pamanzi (12°47'S., 45°18'E.) lies E of Pointe Choa;

from a distance the island appears as a saddle. The E side of the

island terminates in a high, almost perpendicular cliff; the cliff

is a useful mark for vessels approaching from the S. There is an

airfield at the S end of Ile Pamanzi.

9.45 Ile Combe Doume lies 1 mile NW of the N extremity of Ile

Pamanzi, E of the N approach to Ilot Dzaoudzi.

9.45 There are several islets in the fairway between Mayotte and

Ile Pamanzi; their positions may best be seen on the chart.

9.45 Sisoa Bouzi (12°49'S., 45°14'E.), 163m high, lies about 1.8

miles SW of Ilot Dzaoudzi. Four isolated rocks, the highest one

2.3m, lie within the 20m curve, 0.2 mile NE of Sisoa Bouzi.

9.45 The barrier reef off the E coast of Mayotte, between Ile Pamanzi and Recif du Sud, is broken by several passages; the principal one is Passe Bandele, and is the usual route for vessels

from the E bound for Ilot Dzaoudzi. The passage is entered E

of Ilot Bandele, which can be identified from seaward by a scar

on its E slopes resembling a quarry. A maximum draft of 5m is

allowed in the passage.

9.45 The passage is not suitable for large ships and should not be

attempted at night; it is difficult to navigate due to its narrowness and the strength of the tidal currents.

9.46 Ilot Dzaoudzi (12°47'S., 45°15'E.) (World Port Index

No. 47340) is an islet lying off the NE side of Mayotte and

close W off the W extremity of Ile Pamanzi. A drying reef extends 0.4 mile W from the NW side of Ilot Dzaoudzi and

Roche Orests, which covers 1m, lies 0.2 mile W of the W extremity of the islet. Vessels anchor, according to the season, in

Baie de Pamanzi, NE of Ilot Dzaoudzi, or SW of the island.

During the dry season, May to October, vessels use the NE anchorage and anchor, in a depth of 20m. From November to

April, the preferred anchorage is about 0.2 mile SSW of the

head of the W jetty. Cargo is handled in steel barges of 100

tons capacity each. Oil products are handled at a mooring buoy

berth off the NW side of Ile Pamanzi; a submarine pipeline is

laid between the berth and the shore.

9.47 South and W sides.—Pointe Dapani (12°59'S.,

45°11'E.) can be distinguished from the E by a high hill in the

vicinity. Chissioi M’Bouini, 2.2 miles WSW of Pointe Dapani,

the S extremity of Mayotte, is joined to the island by a sand

bank.

9.47 Between Chissioi M’Bouini and Pointe Boueni (12°54'S.,

45°04'E.), 7 miles NNW, the only outstanding features are

Pointe Kana, 4.2 miles NW of Chissioi M’Bouini, and a peak 1

mile E of Pointe Kana backed by Choungui, 2.2 miles farther

E.

9.47 Baie de Boueni (12°53'S., 45°06'E.) is entered between

Pointe Boueni and Pointe Doujani. The bay is encumbered

with dangers; entrance requires local knowledge.

9.47 Passe du Morne Rouge (12°52'S., 44°57'E.), through the W

side of the barrier reef, near its W extremity, is far from the

coast for the range marks to be identified. The N slope of Red

Mount, in line bearing 066° with the S slope of M’Sapere, 5

miles ENE, may be of use for proceeding through the passage.

9.47 Red Mount (Ochoungui) (12°48'S., 45°06'E.) is 223m high

and conspicuous. A dangerous bank lies 2 miles WSW of Red

Mount. Vessels can pass W of the bank by keeping the E summit of Chissipi M’Zamboro (12°39'S., 45°02'E.) in range with

the hill on Pointe Acua (12°45'S., 45°03'E.).

9.47 Passe des Iles Choazil (12°41'S., 44°58'E.) leads through

the barrier reef in a position about 3.5 miles SW of Chissipi

M’Zamboro; the area over the reef has been dredged to a depth

of 5.3m. Banc de la Pudente lies 1.7 miles N of the fairway.

Banc du Geyser (12°21'S., 46°26'E.) is a dangerous reef

with numerous rocks. Most of these rocks dry and many are

visible at half ebb; the largest rocks appear to be about the size

of boats under sail.

9.47 Banc de la Zelee (12°27'S., 46°14'E.) has a least charted

depth of 10m; it lies with its center about 10 miles WSW from

the extremity of Banc du Geyser and is about 14 miles in extent

in an E and W direction.

9.47 Caution.—The area in the vicinity of Banc du Geyser is the

most dangerous part of Mozambiqe Channel. In fine weather,

at high tide and with smooth water when the sea does not

break, there is, even by day, little warning of nearness to the

reef. Reliance must be placed on a sharp lookout and on careful

sounding. On the N side of the reef, it has not been shown that

sounding will give any warning of proximity to the reef.

9.47 The bank should be given a wide berth. Even though the

trend of the general current is to the W in the area of Cape

d’Ambre (11°57'S., 49°17'E.), E to NE countercurrents, at an

average velocity of 1 knot, have been experienced in the vicinity of the bank.

9.47 Depths shallower than charted may be encountered on Banc

de la Zelee and Banc du Geyser. These two banks are reported

(1994) to lie 3 miles E of their charted positions.

Iles Glorieuses

9.48 Iles Glorieuses (11°31'S., 47°20'E.) are French possessions administered from Ile de la Reunion. The group lies

on a reef 9 miles long and is comprised of Ile Glorieuse, Ile du

Lys,and some scattered low rocks.

9.48 Ile Glorieuse (11°33'S., 47°18'E.), 12m high, located at the

SW extremity of the reef, is the largest; it is flat, sandy, and

covered with trees, up to 12.2m high. The trees may be seen at

a distant of 15 miles. A meteorological station, with a flagstaff,

is located on the S side of the island and there is an airstrip.

9.48 Discolored water, having the appearance of a reef, has been

observed extending 2 miles W from Ile Glorieuse; caution is

necessary when approaching the island.

9.48 Rocher Sud, 0.9m high, lies near the edge of the reef, about

0.1 mile S of Ile Glorieuse. A radar conspicuous piling stands

on this rock. Roches Vertes, 1.4 miles ENE of Ile Glorieuse,
134 Sector 9. Islands and Banks North and East of Madagascar 

Pub. 171

consists of three rocks, about 4m high.

9.48 Ile du Lys (11°30'S., 47°23'E.) lies NE of Ile Glorieuse. The

outline of Ile Glorieuse and Ile du Lys changes with the time of

year, especially at the height of the monsoons. An observer in a

position 10 miles N of Ile du Lys sees three hummocks, with

trees between them which are 10.7m high.

9.48 No channel or break traverses the reef between the islets. In a

position about 1.5 miles E of Ile Glorieuse, in the vicinity of

Roches Vertes, the reef is only about 0.5 mile wide. The sea

does not always break on this narrow part, even when it is

breaking heavily elsewhere. There is danger of mistaking this

narrow part for a passage.

9.48 A bank, with depths of less than 20m, extends 4.7 miles NW

and 3 miles NE from Ile du Lys; depths increase rapidly outside the seaward edge of the bank. On the bank there are depths

of 10m or greater at a distance over 1 mile from the reef. A

shoal, with a depth of 5.3m and a 3.2m patch, lie 2 miles and

0.7 miles WNW, respectively, of Ile du Lys.

9.48 A spit of the reef, with a 3m depth charted near its extremity,

extends 2.5 miles NNE from Ile Glorieuse.

9.48 Tides—Currents.—The tidal currents are weak; the flood

sets W and the ebb sets E at the anchorages off Ile du Lys. At

the anchorage off the NW side of Ile Glorieuse, the ebb was

found running WSW at a rate of about 1.5 knots.

9.48 Anchorage.—A vessel of 751 grt found good anchorage, in

14m, sand and level bottom, with Ile du Lys bearing 151°, distant 1.5 miles.

9.48 A vessel of shallow draft can find anchorage, in a depth of

7m, with the island bearing 082°, distant about 0.5 mile, but

care must be taken to avoid the 3.2m patch about 0.5 mile

WNW of the island.

9.48 Anchorage can be obtained, in 26m, with the N extremity of

Ile Glorieuse bearing 092° and the summit of Ile du Lys bearing 061°. There is a small channel through the coral reef opposite this anchorage.

9.48 Ile Glorieuse is uninhabited except when the meteorological

stationed is manned during the cyclone period from November

to May

9.48 Caution.—A local magnetic anomaly of small extent was

reported in the vicinity of the islands.
135

Pub. 171

10. 

Madagascar—East Coast—Tanjon’i Bobaomby to Tanjon’i Vohimena

10.0Additional chart coverage may be found in NGA/DLIS Catalog of Maps, Charts, and Related Products (Unlimited Distribution).

SECTOR 10 — CHART INFORMATION
137

Pub. 171

SECTOR 10 

MADAGASCAR—EAST COAST—TANJON’I BOBAOMBY TO TANJON’I VOHIMENA

10.0 Plan.—This sector describes the E coast of Madagascar

from Tanjon’i Bobaomby (Cap d’Ambre) to Tanjon’i Vohimena (Cap Sainte Marie)(25°35'S., 45°08'E.), a distance of 939

miles. The sector is described from N to S. 

General Remarks 

10.1 The E coast of Madagascar consists principally of

dunes, lagoons, and plains from 10 to 50 miles wide. The

ground rises from the plains by successive ranges of hills to a

high interior plateau. This elevated region, the edge of which is

formed on all sides by cliffs as high as 152m, is broken in all

directions by mountains that, from some directions, show varied and picturesque outlines. The well-watered E slope of the

island is marked by many waterfalls. 

10.1 The E coast of Madagascar is, with good reason, noted for its

inhospitable shore. During the SE trade wind, from April to October, it is subject to almost increasing strong winds and a heavy

swell breaking on the coast. In summer, rain squalls obscure the

land, making it hard to identify the landmarks; moreover, this is

the season for cyclones, to which this coast is exposed. 

10.1 There is not a single good harbor to be found on this coast.

Canal de Sainte-Marie, between Ile Sainte-Marie and the coast,

is the best harbor for large vessels, and Baie de Sainte-Luce,

nearly 500 miles SSW of Ile Sainte-Marie, is the best for small

vessels. Tamatave, 70 miles SSW of Ile Saint-Marie, is the

most important commercial harbor. 

10.1 Tides—Currents.—Currents can be strong and variable in

direction. A vessel making a landfall on the E coast of Madagascar is advised to do so with the sun astern. 

10.1 The lights on this coast are unreliable and a night approach is

not recommended.

10.1 Observations made of the tidal currents in a position a little

W of Tanjon’i Bobaomby during a period of 6 days during

March show that the tidal currents set generally NE and have

maximum rate 1 hour after HW. The maximum current that has

been observed is 2.25 knots. The current sets S for an hour at

the time of LW, its strength was observed to be about 0.5 knot

of the NE current. The turn of the current is almost instantaneous; no period of SW was observed.

10.1 A N current was reported off Tanjon’I Bobaomby, on one occasion running at 3 knots, but was reported to ease to 2 knots

off Helodranon Antongila.

10.1 The current off Baie de Rigny sets NW with great strength

during the greater part of the year, but during the Northwest

Monsoon, a current of 0.5 knot has been observed, at times,

setting SSE.

10.1 The general N current during the Southeast Monsoon season

is deflected by the Iles Leven to the NE; an eddy or countercurrent sets S or SW past the W side of this deflected current. This

S or SW countercurrent is potentially dangerous to southbound

vessels, particularly at night. The demarcation between these

currents is uncertain and caution of more than ordinary intensity must be observed in approaching and passing Barracouta Island.

10.1 The current is strong off Tanjon Antsirakosy, especially during the Southeast Monsoon. After approaching the coast from

the S or SE it veers, near the projecting land, to the N or NE; a

countercurrent setting generally S develops along the coast to

the N and NNW of the cape. The line of demarcation between

the N or NE current and the countercurrent is not known with

certainty. This interplay of currents is similar to that in the vicinity of Iles Leven. 

10.1 The strong indraft of the current into Helodranon Antongila

must be allowed for in approaching or passing the bay. It is not

uncommon for vessels intending to make Canal de SainteMarie to find themselves off Tanjona Belao. The current sets

rapid Nor de Iley around Tanjona Belao and Cap Antsirikira in

Helodranon’ Antongila during the Southeast Monsoon; during

this season, the capes should be given a wide berth, especially

when leaving Helodranon’ Antongila at night. A surface current, generally of some strength, enters Helodranon’ Antongila

continuously during the Southeast Monsoon. The ebb current

during spring tides has been observed to attain a rate of over 1

knot.

10.1 In Canal de Saint-Marie, the currents are generally variable,

but off Lohatanjon’ Antsiraka, they are very strong. As a rule

the currents take the direction of the wind and the N current is

usually the strongest current.

10.1 The current sets SSW along the coast between Tamatave and

Mahanoro at an average rate of 1.25 knots.

10.1 A vessel found a N current, with a rate in excess of 1 knot,

between Baie de Faradofay and Tanjon’i Vohimena.

10.1 Vessels near the land in the vicinity of Tanjon’i Vohimena

have found a decided set toward the coast sometimes with a

rate of 1 knot.

Tanjon’i Bobaomby to Helodranon’ Antsiranana 

(Baie de Diego-Suarez)

10.2 Tanjon’i Bobaomby (Cap d’Ambre) (11°57'S.,

49°16'E.) consists of three, low, rocky points; the middle point,

which is visible up to 20 miles, is the termination of a large,

regular plain of moderate height and has a barren, parched appearance. To an observer approaching from the NE, the most

conspicuous of the hills S of the cape is Boboala at 2.7 miles.

All the hills in the vicinity have barren slopes, but the summits

are grass-covered. An obstruction, a partially sunken drilling

rig, is situated about 18 miles N of Tanjon’i Bobaomby. 

10.2 Caution.—To round Tanjon’i Bobaomby from the W to E

requires care from April to November. The ocean current, in

conjunction with the tidal current, attains a rate of 3 to 4 knots;

at half flood it has reached 6 knots in one place. The Southeast

Monsoon often blows with great strength, raising a short, choppy, and very rough sea; both current and sea are much reduced

the nearer the cape is approached. A vessel frequently made

the passage, without difficulty during the worst season, by

passing 0.2 to 0.3 mile off the rocky islets. 
138 Sector 10. Madagascar—East Coast—Tanjon’i Bobaomby to Tanjon’i Vohimena 

Pub. 171

10.2 To round the cape a vessel should be in its vicinity at daybreak, hug the shore of the islets as described, and avoid being

set into the strength of the current and sea, where she would

lose ground. 

10.2 Low-powered streamers, if attempting to round the cape with

the wind and current against them, should do so during the first

2 hours after HW, close to the land, and at night. 

10.2 When passing from E to W, the breeze falls as soon as the

vessel has passed the cape; although squalls and swell may follow for a few miles, they are soon succeeded by calms or baffling winds. Tanjon’i Bobaomby is marked by a light, but it

should be noted that it is not on the farthest point N.

10.2 Ambohibiri (12°05'S., 49°18'E.) rises about 2.5 miles inland, 7.5 miles SSE of the light on Tanjon’i Bobaomby; it is

possibly the only distinguishable feature along this section of

the coast. 

10.2 Andramahimba (Andramaimbo) (12°13'S., 49°10'E.),

392m high, rises on a level ridge on the neck of land separating

Helodranon’ Antsiranana from Helodranon’ Amponkarana

(Baie Amponkarana). This conspicuous conical hill has a flagstaff on its summit; the hill is visible at a distance of several

miles from either side of the island.

10.2 Ankaramisampana (12°12'S., 49°12'E.), a conspicuous

hill, rises on the same ridge as Andramahimba, in a position

about 2 miles E of the latter hill; it is sometimes known as Dover Castle. 

10.2 Ambohitra (Montagne d’Ambre) (12°36'S., 49°09'E.), rising to a height of 1,475m, is the highest and most conspicuous

landmark near the N extremity of Madagascar and is visible

from positions off both the E and W coasts of the island. The

peak rises regularly from near the S end of a range about 10

miles long; its sides are covered with thick forests. In weather,

even moderately clear, it can be seen long before the intervening land. 

10.2 Morne Noir (13°26'S., 49°58'E.), a conical hill, is conspicuous even when seen against higher land in the background. The

hill is bare and rocky, and its blackness contrasts markedly

with its surroundings of yellow or green according to season. 

10.2 Mont de la Table (14°41'S., 50°09'E.) is massive, perfectly

circular, and may be seen for a distance seaward of 40 miles; it

appears to be on the coast, though really it is 3 miles inland, the

intervening land being low. Sommet de la Fausse Table, 18

miles N of Mont de la Table, is a hill of less regular shape and

may be mistaken for Mont de la Table; in clear weather, both

will be seen at the same time, but the mistake is easy to make in

poor visibility. A bare conical hill rises 2 miles SSE of Mont de

la Table. 

10.2 Pitons d’Angontsy (15°16'S., 50°18'E.), rising 10 miles inland W of Tanjon’ Antsirakosy, consists of three summits like

the teeth of a saw, and a fourth summit separated from the others by a U-shaped gap; from the NE, the mountain appears to

have only two summits.

Helodranon’ Antsiranana (Baie de Diego-Suarez)

10.3 Helodranon’ Antsiranana (12°16'S., 49°18E.) is

entered through Passe d’Orangea between Cap Tanifosty

(12°13'S., 49°22'E.) and Cap Mine (Cap Andranomody), 1

mile SSW, about 17.5 miles SSE of Tanjon’I Bobaomby. This

bay is indented by Baie du Tonnerre and Baie des Cailloux

Bancs (Baie des Andovobatofotsy) on the N side, and by Baie

des Francais (Baie Andovobazaha) and Port de la Nievre on the

S side. 

10.3 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for vessels of more than

50m in length.

10.3 Nosy Diego (Ile Diego) (12°11'S., 49°24'E.) lies on the E

side of the shore reef, it is the farthest E of the dangers in the N

approach to Passe d’Orangea. The 10m curve lies 0.2 mile E of

the S extremity of Nosy Diego. 

10.3 Le Grand Banc (12°18'S., 49°27'E.), with depths less than

10m, extends NNE for a distance of about 5 miles from a position on the coast 7 miles SSE of Cap Mine. 

10.3 Banc de l’Yvonne, a coral head with a depth of 15m, lies

close S of the approach to Passe d’Orangea, 2 miles ESE of

Cap Mine. Banc du Nord-Est, with a least depth of 11m, lies

1.7 miles SE of Banc de l’Yvonne. 

10.3 There are several islets lying on the coastal reef within the

above banks; their positions may best be seen on the chart. 

10.3 Nosy Volana (12°13'S., 49°22'E.), in the entrance of Passe

d’Orangea, is wedge-shaped and slopes from a height of 28m

near its N end; a chimney in ruins is situated near the summit.

A coral reef, partly uncovered, connects the island with Cap

Tanifotsy, about 0.2 mile N. A bank, with depths less than

2.9m, extends 0.2 mile S from Nosy Volana, reducing the navigable width of the fairway to about 0.4 mile. 

10.4 Nosy Langoro (12°13'S., 49°19'E.), marked by a

light, is fringed by a coral reef. A rocky shoal, with a depth of

4.6m, lies 0.2 mile SSE of the island.

10.4 Tides—Currents.—The tidal currents in Passe d’Orangea

attain velocities of 1 to 2.5 knots. Inside the entrance the flood

current makes for 30 minutes before LW, until about 30 minutes after HW at Port de la Nievre.

10.4 Depths—Limitations.—The least charted depth on the entrance range through Passe d’Orangea is 19m, located about

0.8 mile WNW of the light situated on Cap Mine. Depths of 14

and 17m are charted in positions 0.2 mile NNW and NW, respectively, from the above light. The general depths in Helodranon’ Antsiranana are from 20 to 53m. 

10.4 Aspect.—Ambohitra (Montagne d’Ambre) (12°36'S.,

49°09'E.) rises to a height of 1,475m SSW of Cap Mine; this

excellent landmark is frequently obscured by clouds. 

10.4 Mont Andramahimba, 392m high, lies W of Cap Mine; it is

sometimes known as Windsor Castle. 

10.4 Ankaramisampana, 293m high, and Bobaomby, 267m high,

rise 2 and 3 miles ENE, respectively, from Mont Andramahimba. A boulder on the side of a hill in a position about 1.2 miles

N of Bobaomby is conspicuous. The three named hills are useful marks in the approach to Helodranon’ Antsiranana. 

10.4 Pointe du Corail is SW of Cap Mine; a hospital, a large yellow building with a red roof, stands on the point. The Residency, a large gray house with a flat roof, stands about 0.3 mile W

of the hospital. 

10.4 A bare promontory, with overhanging cliffs, is located 1 mile

NW of Pointe du Corail. The promontory has three summits;

the one farthest W is 68m high. A hospital and a military establishment are situated on its SE part. 

10.4 The NW side of Port de la Nievre is formed by steep hills,

but on the SE side the hills slope more gently to the shore. Baie

des Amis, on the SE side 1 mile within the entrance, lies at the
Sector 10. Madagascar—East Coast—Tanjon’i Bobaomby to Tanjon’i Vohimena 139

Pub. 171

foot of this slope. A group of oil tanks stand on the hills 0.5

mile S of Baie des Amis, and a number of towers, some

marked by lights, stand W of the tanks. 

10.4 Pilotage.—The pilot station covers the whole of Helodranon’ Antsiranana, except Port Militaire, and the approach to

the bay within a radius of 2 miles of Cap Mine; it is divided into an optional pilotage area seaward of a line joining Pointe de

l’Aigle, 0.4 mile SW of Cap Mine, and Cap Vatomainty, 3

miles WNW, and a compulsory area for vessels of more than

150 nrt, within the line. Although not part of the pilot station,

pilotage is also compulsory in Port Militaire. Berthing and sailing are permitted throughout 24 hours. 

10.4 If optional pilotage is required, the pilot embarks at the entrance to Passe d’Orangea; otherwise at the seaward limit of

the compulsory area. If the pilot is unable to board, a frequent

occurrence from April to November during the SE trade winds,

he will lead a vessel through the optional area into the harbor

and embark on the entrance range line in sheltered water. 

10.4 Requests for pilots should reach the Port Office at Antsiranana on VHF channel 16 before 1630 if required on the following morning; a pilot required in the afternoon should be

requested on the previous morning. 

10.4 In 1980, the pilot vessel was out of action and the pilot embarked in the bay from a small launch which was not equipped

with radio; messages were passed via Durban radio. In 1985,

the harbormaster’s office was not equipped with radiotelephone.

Port de la Nievre (12°16'S., 49°16'E.)

World Port Index No. 47630

10.5 Port de la Nievre is situated on the SW side of Helodranon Antsiranana and is entered between Pointe du Corail

and Cap Ampanolohamiraty, 1 mile WNW. The port comprises

Port de Commerce in the N part and Port Militaire farther SW.

The city of Antsiranana is situated on a peninsula E of this

commodius harbor. 

10.5 Winds—Weather.—The harbor is subject to very strong

winds from May to October.

10.5 Tides—Currents.—The tidal currents in Port de la Nievre

attain a velocity of 1 knot. 

10.5 Off the N end of Quai du Commerce, 0.6 mile SE of Cap

Ampanolohamiraty, the current sets W during the rising tide

and E during the falling tide; in the rainy season this current

can attain a rate of 3 knots and its meeting with the eddy running along the quay, N during the rising tide and S during the

falling tide, combine to make it difficult for vessels to berth

alongside. After a heavy rain, the outgoing current can persist

during the whole of the rising tide. 

10.5 Depths—Limitations.—The channel leading to the dry

dock in Baie des Amis, about 1 mile S of Cap Ampanolohamiraty, has a least depth of 7.4m and is marked on its E side by a

buoy reported missing in 1993. A depth of 4m is charted 0.2

mile NW of the drydock. 

10.5 Quai du Commerce, at the NE extremity of the harbor, is a

concrete quay and can accommodate vessels drawing less than

8.5m; its S end is shoal. Tankers discharge at this quay which

can also accommodate container and ro-ro vessels. The ebb

current can run strongly round the N end of the quay and then it

is better to berth after the flood current makes. During the SE

trade wind, large vessels are recommended to proceed alongside the quay in the calm periods at daybreak or nightfall. 

10.5 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for vessels of more than

150 nrt; refer to Passe d’Orangea.

10.5 Signals.—Storm signals are shown from a tall flagstaff close

W of the light tower at Cap Mine, and from the signal station at

the N end Quai du Commerce. 

10.5 Anchorage.—There are good anchorages throughout Helodranon’ Antsiranana; vessels entering the roadstead without

the aid of a pilot can anchor, in 20 to 23m, about 0.8 mile N of

the parallel of Cap Ampanolohamiraty. There is a very good

anchorage in Anse Farafakabe, a cove in the NE part of Baie

des Cailloux Blancs, in depths of 9 to 18m, mud. 

10.5 The pilot should be consulted for other anchorages. 

10.5 Anchorage is prohibited in parts of Baie des Francais and

Port de la Nievre; their limits may be seen on the chart. 

10.5 Directions.—The approaches to Helodranon’ Antsiranana

are not difficult in clear weather, which is generally the case in

the SE trade wind from April to October, but there is a heavy

SE swell at this season. From November to April, when rain

squalls obscure the land, it is important to identify the landmarks before standing W. It must be remembered that there is a

N current which may exceed a rate of 3 knots. As the entrance

is neared, Cap Mine is more easily identified than the light

tower situated about 0.5 mile ESE. The best mark for the transit of Passe d’Orangea is Nosy Langoro, bearing 275° and seen

between Monts Ankaramisampana and Andramahimba, which

leads nearly midway through the fairway. This approach must

be strictly adhered to, but in bad weather it is best to keep Nosy

Langoro in line with Mont Andramahimba, bearing 274°. 

10.5 When through the pass, a vessel will be in smooth water and

should keep on the same range line until within 1 mile of Nosy

Langoro, when a course of 230° should be steered for Port de

la Nievre, with the beacons situated 0.7 mile NW of Cap Tanifosty, in line, astern, bearing 050°.

Cap Mine to Iles Leven

10.6 From Cap Mine, the coast of Madagascar trends in a

SSE direction to Iles Leven. Le Grand Banc lies up to 3.7 miles

offshore; it is the farthest offshore danger charted along this

coast until in the vicinity of Iles Leven. 

10.6 Baie d’Ambodivahibe is entered W of Pointe Cornard

(12°22'S., 49°27'E.). Baie d’Ambodivahibe is very deep; it is

difficult for ocean-going vessels to find a suitable anchorage.

Baie d’Ambodivahibe is frequented by coastal vessels, which

run up on the beach at the head of the bay. Antsapahano, a

small pointed hill, 187m high, which lies about 3 miles SSW of

the head of the bay, bearing 204°, and seen midway between

Andraombe and Ankarakatova, two summits farther in, leads

through the entrance and into the bay. 

10.6 Pointe Ambodivahibe (12°21'S., 49°31'E.) lies about 3

miles E of Pointe Cornard; Banc d’ Antala fronts this part of

the coast. Banc du Necessaire is a SE continuation of Banc

d’Antala; the 9m curve line lies up to 1.7 miles offshore off the

NE extremity of Nosy Tendro.

10.6 Baie de Rigny (12°26'S., 49°31'E.) is entered between the S

end of Nosy Tendro (Nosy Antendro) and Pointe Sanson, about

0.4 mile S. A mark for the entrance of Baie de Rigny is La
140 Sector 10. Madagascar—East Coast—Tanjon’i Bobaomby to Tanjon’i Vohimena 

Pub. 171

Bosse, a large white sandhill rising about 1.8 miles S of Pointe

Sanson. Nosy Laliara, about 0.5 mile SE of Pointe Sanson, is

also of use. Ile aux Huitres lies in a position about 0.8 mile

WNW of Pointe Sanson; a white wooden beacon stands on the

S extremity. 

10.6 Anchorage can be taken in mid-channel just NW of Pointe

Mancel, about 1.5 miles WSW of Pointe Sanson, in 11 to 14m. 

10.6 The white wooden beacon at the S extremity of Ile aux Huitres, in line bearing 268° with Mont Corre (Ankarakatova),

leads into Baie de Rigny. It is better to keep to the N side of

this entrance range as shoal water extends about 0.2 mile N

from Pointe Sanson. 

10.6 When a position in the bay is reached from which Nosy Ambatomkena bears 210° and the beacon is about 0.5 mile W, a

mid-channel course should be shaped and round Pointe Mancel

at a distance of 0.1 mile, and then proceed to the anchorage.

10.6 The coast between Baie de Rigny and Helodranon’I Lokia

(12°44'S., 49°41'E.) is little known; its indentations are shallow

and unsuitable for navigation. Nosy Lowry, about midway between these two inlets, is 26m high; it lies about 0.8 mile offshore. Helodranon’I Lokia (Baie de Loky) is entered between

the S extremity of Nosy Ankomba (12°42'S., 49°40'E.) and

Pointe Ambodilamoty. 

10.6 The depths in the navigable channel, which is about 0.3 mile

wide, vary from 10.9m irregularly to about 73m, but over several shoal heads, the depths are only 3.3 to 8.2m. 

10.6 Anchorage can be taken, in 9 to 14m, over a bottom of sand

and mud, in positions about 2.5 miles within the bay. Such positions are well-sheltered from all winds. Farther in the bay

there is a broad inner expanse of shallow water, and a relatively

small area, with depths of 7.3 to 10.9m, where protection is had

from the N swell. This small deeper area is partly separated

from the outer anchorage by a sandbank projecting from Pointe

de Sable, which lies on the E shore of the bay in a position

about 3.5 miles within the entrance; the narrow opening off the

W end of the sand bank leading into the small deep area has

depths of 12.8 to 20.1m. Baie de Mangerivy or Port Leven lies

between Nosy Manambiby (12°46'S., 49°46'E.), an island on

the coastal reef about 3.5 miles SE of Pointe Ambodilamoty,

and Cap du Diable, 8.7 miles SSE. It is protected from the NE

and E by a reef located from 1 to 8 miles N of Cap du Diable,

but is exposed to N winds. The Iles Leven lie on the above reef;

Nosy Barracouta (12°48'S., 49°52'E.), the farthest E of the islets, is not easily recognized. 

10.6 Port de Mangerivy is essentially a channel about 8 miles

long trending S and SE between Nosy Manambidy, Pointe de

l’Artemise, Ilot Moury, Ilot Guy, Ilot aux Oiseaux, Ilots du

Sud, and Pointe Owen on the W side, and, on the E side, Ilot du

Nord, Nosy Akao, Ilot du Milieu, Nosy Satrana, and Nosy Vahala. The entrance to the port from the N is about 0.6 mile wide

between the 10m curves, but there are several patches, the shallowest of which has a depth of 8.2m in mid-channel. The entrance from the SE is restricted by shoals. A vessel should not

be taken into the port by way of this entrance except in case of

necessity, and then only after the fairway has been marked by

buoys. 

10.6 Anchorage.—Anchorage should be taken W of Pointe de

l’Observatoire, in depths of 11 to 14m, sand. A vessel 65m in

length, drawing 4.9m, has anchored 0.5 mile NW of Pointe du

Sable, the W extremity of Nosy Ankao, and with the W extremity of Nosy Satrana bearing 150°. 

10.6 Caution.—Caution is required on entering as the islands are

sometimes difficult to identify, the currents are strong, and the

shoals extend well to the N. Vessels generally approach from

the N and steer in toward the anchorage when Ilot Guy bears

204°, local knowledge is necessary.

10.7 Iles Leven (12°48'S., 49°51'E.) lie up to 5 miles offshore and are low, and brush covered; they all have beaches of

white sand. Nosy Manambiby (12°46'S., 49°46'E.), the farthest

N of the group, is over 1 mile long N and S and is nearly as

wide. Pointe Leven, the N extremity of the island, lies about

1.6 miles NE of Pointe Antseranambe. 

10.7 The island is low, dark, and partly wooded; it is the most easily distinguished of Iles Leven. Shoal banks, which have depths

of 5.5m or less, extend 1 mile E and SE from the E side of

Nosy Manambiby. 

10.7 Nosy Ankao, 29m high, is the largest island in the group. A

bank, with depths less than 5.5m, extends 0.5 mile W from the

W extremity of the island and forms the E side of the anchorage area in Port de Mangerivy. The island is marked by a light.

10.7 Ilot du Nord lies about 1.3 miles NNE of Pointe de l’ Observatoire, the N extremity of Nosy Ankao. This tiny white islet

lies near the N edge of a bank of coral fronting the N, NE, and

E shores of Nosy Ankao; the islet is prominent. 

10.7 Nosy Barracouta is the largest of several islets lying E of

Nosy Ankao. A shoal, with a depth of 5m, lies about 1.5 miles

E of the islet. 

10.7 Ilot Rata lies about midway between the S ends of Nosy

Akao and Nosy Barracouta. 

10.7 Ilot du Milieu, Nosy Satrana, and Ilot Manampahana are

reef-fringed islands lying S and SSE of the S extremity of Nosy

Akao on the E side of Port de Mangerivy. They are possibly on

the same bank as Nosy Akao and Nosy Barracouta.

10.7 Ilot du Milieu lies about 0.9 mile SSW of the S extremity of

Nosy Akao. 

10.7 Nosy Satrana, an island 22m high in a summit near its center,

lies with its N extremity about 0.9 mile S of the extremity of

Nosy Akao. 

10.7 Nosy Vahala (12°52'S., 49°51'E.), the farthest S of Iles Leven, lies NNW of Cap du Diable, near the edge of the shore

bank.

Iles Leven to Sambava

10.8 From Cap du Diable, the coast trends in a SSE direction to Iharana. There are no dangers charted offshore along

this part of the coast.

10.8 Helodranon’ Andravina (Baie d’Andravina) is entered between Cap du Diable and Lohatanjon’ Andronona (12°56'S.,

49°52'E.). Lohatanjon’ Andronona (Cap Berry) is the N termination of level reddish ground of moderate elevation. 

10.8 The depths in Helodranon’ Andravina range from 5.5 to

20.1m, however, reefs extend as far as 0.5 mile off the N and W

shores and in one place off the S shore the reef extends 0.4

mile. An islet lies near the center of the bay and reefs extend

about 0.2 mile SE and 0.4 mile SW from the islet. 

10.8 Helodranon’ Andravina is open to the N and NE, but shelter

from E winds is possible in its SE part, with Lahatanjon’ Andronona bearing 053°, distant 0.5 mile, in a depth of 7.3m.
Sector 10. Madagascar—East Coast—Tanjon’i Bobaomby to Tanjon’i Vohimena 141

Pub. 171

10.8 Between Lohatanjon’ Andronona and Helodranon’Iharana

there is little known about the coast and it does not possess any

sheltered anchorage. 

10.8 Close off Tanjona (Cap Tanjona) (13°03'S., 49°55'E.) foul

ground extends up to 1.3 miles offshore. Some islets lie close

off the point and Nosy Trois Freres (Iles des Trois Freres) lie

1.7 miles S of the point. All of these islets are so close inshore

that none of them can be distinguished from a distance.

10.8 Tanjona Manambato (Cap Manambato) (13°13'S.,

49°56'E.) is a massive, dark, triangular rock that stands out

clearly against the high land in the background. Its triangularity and contrast with the background are particularly marked

when seen from E; it is an excellent mark for vessels approaching Helodranon’ Iharana from the N. 

10.8 The Manambato River flows into the sea N of Tanjona Manambato; the muddy waters of the river discolor the sea to an appreciable distance from the outlet, and create an appearance of

a reef; the extremity of Tanjona Manambato is steep-to. Antsivaregna, a hill, rises close NW of the outlet of the Manambato

River; it is a useful mark to vessels approaching from the N or

NE, but when seen from the S the hill is obscured by the mass

of Tanjona Manambato. 

10.8 Nosy Be (Ile Verte) (13°17'S., 50°00'E.) lies on the edge of

the shoal bank in the N approach to Helodranon’ Iharana; it is

30m high. Ilots Noir lie close within the coastal reef, 1.5 miles

S of Nosy Be; these islets and Nosy Be are useful for marking

the coastal reef for a vessel approaching Iharana from the N.

10.9 Iharana (Vohemar) (13°21'S., 50°00'E.) (World Port

Index No. 47620) is a small port situated in Helodranon’ Iharana (Baie de Vohemar), an inlet in the coastal reef; it is shallow,

but affords good shelter to small vessels with local knowledge.

Southeast winds prevail from April to November. From January to the end of March the winds vary from N and W; this is

the season of great storms and heat. 

10.9 Currents in the channel attain a velocity 1.5 knots at springs.

The entrance channel is about 0.1 mile wide and during strong

SE winds it is difficult to distinguish as the sea breaks across it. 

10.9 There is room in the port for one vessel up to 100m in length;

verify before entering. There are depths of 9.1 to 33m in the

channel and a depth of 15m in the anchorage.

10.9 Directions.—A vessel approaching from the NE should,

when 5 to 6 miles from the Ilots Noir, see Vohemar Point between two high tablelands. The S tableland is the smaller.

10.9 Morne Noir (13°29'S., 50°01'E.) is a useful mark to vessels

approaching from the S.

10.9 The best time to enter Baie de Vohemar is at LW, when more

of the dangers are visible; moreover, no current then sets across

the reef mass on the NW side of the entrance channel. 

10.9 It is advisable to maintain a speed sufficient to work against

any N cross entrance current, if met with, until past the wrecks

on the outer NW side of the entrance channel.

10.9 A course with Beacon No. 3 in line bearing 260° with Beacon No. 5 should be followed from seaward to the entrance

channel, and then to a position with Beacon No. 4 abeam and

about 50m distant. Course should then be altered to the SW

and the vessel kept in mid-channel.

10.10 Between Lohatanjona Iharana (Pointe de Vohemar)

(13°21'S., 50°00'E.) and Sambava the coast has some slight indentations. 

10.10 The general aspect of the coast between Lohatanjona Iharana

and the parallel of 14°S is the same as farther N. In the background are mountain ranges gradually diminishing in elevation

the closer the coast is approached; these mountains and hills

are mostly bare and of reddish aspect. The open plains are yellow and dried up during the SE trade wind, but are green during the rainy season and have a scanty growth of shrubs and

trees in the ravines and sheltered places where it is not rocky. 

10.10 From S of the parallel 14°S, to Tanjon Antsirakosy there is

an unbroken sandy beach which fronts a thickly-wooded country. 

10.10 Anse de Bonne Tenue lies on the N side of Tanjon’ Anorontany (Cap Anorontany) (13°38'S., 50°07'E.). A small sugarloafshaped hill on its W side is a mark for the cove. It is reported that

the cove is a good anchorage. 

10.10 Morne de Mahanara (13°55'S., 50°07'E.), a low isolated

hill, is conspicuous because of its shape and dark color. From

the NE it has the appearance of a truncated cone, while from

the SE it appears wedge-shaped. This hill is a good mark for a

vessel approaching Sambava from the N. A little S and behind

Morne de Mahanara there is a distinctive gap which must not

be confused with that just W of Piton de Sambirano (14°05'S.,

50°02'E.).

10.11 Sambava (14°15'S., 50°12'E.) (World Port Index No.

47610) is an open roadstead off the entrance of a river. A lagoon forms at the mouth of the river and the village, Sambava,

is situated on a promontory on the E side of the lagoon. A

shoal, with a least depth of 4.9m, lies in the middle of the roadstead, 0.7 mile NE of the mouth of the river. A depth of 4.6m

lies just over 1 mile ESE of the rivers mouth. A bank, with a

depth of 7.9m, extends SE from this shoal to another, with a

depth of 4.9m, 0.5 mile S. 

10.11 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken, in a depth of 14m,

muddy sand; the holding ground is poor. An approach at night

is not recommended.

10.11 Directions.—Vessel approaching from the S should stay

well off the coast until Sambirano Peak (14°02'S., 50°01'E.)

bears 275°°. Vessels approaching from the N should proceed to

the recommended anchorage position by steering for Beacon

D, bearing 196°.

Sambava to Helodranon’ Antongila (Baie d’Antongil)

10.12 From Sambava the coast trends S to Antataha, little is

known of this coast. From Antataha the coast trends SSE to

Tanjona Tsihananina (Cap Tsihananina). From Tanjona Tsihananina the coast continues in a SSE direction to Tanjon Antsirakosy (Cap Est).

10.12 A reef extends 1.5 miles from the coast for a distance of 5

miles SSE of Sambava. A coral shoal, with a depth of 10m, lies

13 miles S of Sambava and extends 3.5 miles seaward. 

10.12 Mont de la Table is massive, perfectly circular, and may be

seen from a distance seaward of 40 miles; it appears to be on

the coast, though it really sets 3 miles inland. Sommet de la

Faussea, a hill of less regular shape, may be mistaken for Mont

de la Table; in clear weather, both will be seen at the same

time, but the mistake is easy to make in poor visibility.
142 Sector 10. Madagascar—East Coast—Tanjon’i Bobaomby to Tanjon’i Vohimena 

Pub. 171

10.13 Antataha (Antalaha) (14°54'S., 50°17'E.) (World

Port Index No. 47600) is an open roadstead suitable only for

anchorage during fair weather.

10.13 The best anchorage, in about 18m, sand, is 0.8 mile off the

town, at the intersection of the alignments of the range lights

and the beacons bearing 276° and 207°, respectively. This anchorage is only practicable from October to April, but this is

the season for cyclones, to which it is particularly exposed.

10.14 Tanjona Tsihananina (Cap Tsihananina) (14°57'S.,

50°19'E.) lies 4 miles SSE of Antataha. A group of above-water rocks fringe this cape, but there is no passage inside them;

shoal depths extend not less than 1 mile seaward from these

rocks. This cape should be given a wide berth.

10.14 Tanjon Antsirakosy (Cap Est) is the S entrance point to Rade

d’Angonsty and is also the E extremity of Madagascar; this

part of the coast is fringed by a reef in places. 

10.14 Rade d’Angontsy (Angontsy Road) (15°15'S., 50°29'E.)

lies close NW of Tanjon’ Antsirakosy. The village of Angontsy

stands on a sandy spit, 0.7 mile NW of Tanjon’ Antsirakosy. 

10.14 Winds—Weather.—Vessels can anchor in the roadstead,

with protection from all but winds from the N to ENE. 

10.14 Depths—Limitations.—The depths are 10.9 to 14.6m in the

entrance, and from 7.3 to 10.9m in the roadstead itself. 

10.14 Aspect.—Nosy Angontsy, lying on the coastal reef 0.2 mile

ENE of Tanjon’ Antsirakosy, is low-lying, flat, and covered

with vegetation of a lighter color than that on the mainland;

this circumstance helps to identify the locality, though the islet

cannot be seen until after the hummocks on the mainland, and

never appears detached from the coast until the vessel is entering Rade d’Angontsy.

10.14 Anchorage.—Vessels should approach the anchorage in

Rade d’Angontsy, with Tanjon’ Antsirakosy Light in line with

the beacon at the village, bearing about 193°, and anchor a little W of this alignment, in 10m, with Nosy Angontsy

(15°16'S., 50°30'E.) bearing about 146°; the two beacons in

line bearing 240°, also lead through the entrance to the bay.

During the SE trade wind, the SE part of the bay is the safest.

10.14 Caution.—The entrance of Rade d’Angontsy is about 0.7

mile wide and trends SW between reefs lying off the coast. The

reef on the NW side extends about 1 mile offshore; the reef on

the SE side of the entrance channel extends about 1.5 miles N

from Tanjon’ Antsirakosy. These reefs are steep-to and plainly

visible, so that entering the roadstead is not particularly difficult. Here and there are narrow, dangerous openings in the reef

where the sea breaks heavily; in other openings there are high

overfalls, but none of the openings can be mistaken for the

wide entrance of Rade d’Angontsy.

10.15 Tanjon’ Antsirakosy (Cap Est) (15°16'S., 50°29'E.)

is a low, wooded point; the land in the vicinity first appears as a

succession of hummocks. The point is bordered by reefs extending up to 1 mile offshore, beyond the reefs it is reported to

be free of dangers. 

10.15 The current is very strong off Tanjon’ Antsirakosy, especially during the SE trade wind. Currents approaching the coast

from the S or SE, set N or NE near the projecting land, and a

countercurrent, whose limit is uncertain, is formed close inshore off the receding coastline N. During hazy weather, or at

night, a vessel should keep a good offing in order to avoid this

countercurrent. 

10.15 An explosive dumping area is situated with its center about

20 miles ENE of Tanjon’ Antsirakosy.

10.16 The coast in this area is backed by wooded hills which

slope steeply to the sea, and are interspersed by sandy beaches.

The coast is bordered by a reef extending up to 2 miles offshore; a few gaps in the reef give access to anchorages for

small vessels. There are some islets and rocks on the coastal

reef, and in good visibility a vessel may navigate close outside

it. The reef is steep-to on its seaward side and the sea usually

breaks on it.

10.16 Nosy Fanala (15°26'S., 50°28'E.), a long low islet, lies on

the coastal reef 10.5 miles S of Tanjon’ Antsirakosy. Two isolated rocks, which dry between 0.9 and 1.8m, lie close off the

coastal reef, 13.5 miles SSW of Nosy Fanala. 

10.16 Ampanavoana (15°41'S., 50°21'E.), the capital of the district, stands on the bank of a river 3 miles S of the above rocks.

Anchorage may be obtained 0.5 mile off the village, but it is

not sheltered. 

10.16 Nosy Ambatoharana (15°56'S., 50°15'E.) lies close off the

coast, the islet is low and wooded. A wooded hill rises on the

second ridge from the coast; when it is viewed from the NE it

resembles a turtle shell, from the SE it appears as a long ridge

trending inland. 

10.16 There is anchorage off the village of Vinanivao, 2 miles

NNE of Nosy Ambatoharana in Mouillage de Vinanivao, for a

vessel up to 100m in length. The entrance to the anchorage is

encumbered by reefs.

10.16 Tanjon’i Masoala (15°59'S., 50°14'E.) is high, wooded, and

can be easily recognized. Nosy Nepato is a small islet, low and

wooded, lying close E of the cape. Nosy Nepato is easily identified when open of the land; when not so open, the darker color of the vegetation on it when seen against the vegetation on

the coast is of use as a mark.

Helodranon’ Antongila (Baie d’Antongil) 

10.17 General.—Helodranon’ Antongila is entered between

Cap Antsirikira (Cap Baldrisy) (16°00'S., 50°10'E.) and Tanjona Belao (Cap Bellone). 

10.17 Shoals of 19m lie 2.7 miles SSE and 4 miles SE, respectively, of Cap Antsirikira. 

10.17 Aspect.—On all sides, Helodranon’ Antongila is enclosed

by high mountains covered with forests. Those on the E side

are uneven, and are detached branches of a central chain,

which decline to the shore in very remarkable long slopes,

leaving deep valleys between them; those on the W side are

uniform in elevation and shape, and form a wall running parallel with the coast. The land at the head of the bay is low; the

two mountain ranges forming the sides continue to run N converging toward each other, and ultimately join, leaving a thickly-wooded plain about 12 miles wide between them and the

coast. 

10.17 Cap Antsirikira is very low and cannot readily be distinguished; it is formed by a tongue of land that is prolonged S by

Nosy Behentona, a low, sandy, and light-colored islet partly

covered with trees that shows up well against the coast. The islet is marked by a light. One of a number of rocks that lie

around the islet is conspicuously black and lies S of the islet. 
Sector 10. Madagascar—East Coast—Tanjon’i Bobaomby to Tanjon’i Vohimena 143

Pub. 171

10.17 Directions.—In clear weather, there is no difficulty in entering Helodranon’ Antongila, especially from the S, as the marks

are easily identified. 

10.17 When approaching from the N and rounding Tanjon’i Masoala, care is necessary to give the cape a wide berth because of

the N current, the velocity of which is uncertain. The E shore

of the bay can generally be seen at night.

10.18 East side.—Ankazofotsy (15°50'S., 50°01'E.) is a

village NW of Cap Antsirikira. The Riviere Ankazofotsy flows

into a bay at the village. A white rock, 10m high, its flat summit covered with trees, lies close S of the river mouth. Vessels

with local knowledge can anchor 0.4 mile W of the mouth of

the Riviere Ankazofotsy, in about 30m; the depths decrease

rapidly toward the shore. 

10.18 Antalavia is a village situated on the N side of the mouth of

the Riviere Antalavia, 3.2 miles N of Ankazototsy. A small

beach of yellow sand marks the river mouth. 

10.18 A vessel approaching Antalavia from the S should bring a

conspicuous whitewashed tree, standing beside a conspicuous

house in the village, to bear 047°; steer for it on that bearing

and anchor, in 18m, fine yellow sand, with the mouth of the

Riviere Sahaleona, 0.5 mile S of the village, bearing 135°. A

vessel approaching from the N should give the coast a berth of

at least 1.5 miles. This anchorage is encumbered by rocks. 

10.18 Lohatanjon’i Tampolo (Pointe Tampolo) (15°44'S.,

49°57'E.) can be identified as being low-lying while the other

points in the vicinity are high. A vessel can anchor about 0.3

mile N of the point, in 15m, mud bottom. 

10.18 The Riviere Ambanizana flows into the bay 6.7 miles N of

Lohatanjon’i Tampolo. Anchorage, in about 7m, may be obtained 0.5 mile NW of the mouth of the Riviere Ambanizana.

Care is necessary to avoid a sand bank, which extends from the

river mouth. The anchorage can be approached on a bearing of

047° on the village of Ambatambe. The village is not visible

from offshore, therefore, bearings of the mouth of the Riviere

Ambanizana and Pointe Nandrahana, about 2.3 miles NW, are

helpful.

10.19 West side.—Mananara (16°10'S., 49°46'E.) is a

town WNW of Tanjona Belao (16°14'S., 49°51'E.); anchorage

is available in the roadstead off the town. 

10.19 Aspect.—Baie Mananara, into which the Riviere Mananara

flows from the SW, can be identified by Pointe d’Ambitsika,

the extremity of a wedge-shaped tongue of land extending in

an ENE direction from the coast; the W and higher part of the

tongue of land is darker than the rest of the coast. 

10.19 Good landmarks are the Residency at Mananara, standing on

a hill, 37m high, 1.7 miles WSW of Pointe d’Ambitsika, and

Colline Mahambolona, a bare conical hill, 42m high, with a

beacon on it, 0.5 mile SE of the Residency. 

10.19 Pic Ankirihiry, an isolated conical hill, rising 18 miles W of

Pointe d’Ambitsika and 819m high, is not visible when bearing

more than 283°. A conspicuous tree, painted white with a black

vertical stripe, stands on the shore 0.2 mile S of Ile aux Mouettes.

10.19 The front mark of the first range is the light on the NW extremity of Ilot Rocheux; the rear mark is the wooded summit of

Antevialabe, a hill, 439m high, rising about 5 miles SSW of

Ilot Rocheux. These marks are in line bearing 210°. 

10.19 The front mark of the second range is the large isolated tree,

described above, standing on the shore S of Ile aux Mouettes.

The rear mark of this range is a small beacon on a bare, 43m

summit, Mahambolona, rising SE of the town. These marks are

in line bearing 154°. 

10.19 Between the Riviere Mananara and Cap Tanjona the coast is

fringed by numerous black rocks, always easily seen.

10.19 Directions.—A vessel approaching Baie Mananara from the

ENE, having rounded Cap Masoala and Cap Antsirikiri, should

steer for Pic Ankirihiry until the light on Ilot Rocheux bears

about 210°; this bearing should be maintained until the conspicuous black and white painted tree on the coasts of Ile aux

Mouettes is in line with the white beacon on Colline Mahambolona, bearing about 154°. The intersection of these two bearings indicates the anchorage, which is in depths from 12 to

14m, hard sand. 

10.19 Anchorage can also be obtained, in a depth of 10m, on the

same range, bearing about 154°, and with the light on Ilot

Rocheux, bearing 225°.

10.19 A vessel coming from the SE should pass about 5 miles off

Cap Bellone, and steer a NNW course until Pic Ankirihiry is

on a W bearing, when she should proceed as directed above.

10.19 A vessel coming from the head of Baie d’Antongil should,

after passing Cap Tanjona, steer for Cap Bellone until the light

on Ilot Rocheux bears about 210°, when she should proceed as

previously directed.

10.19 Caution.—Ile aux Mouettes, 8.5m high, 1 mile E of the light

on Ilot Rocheux, lies on the coastal reef, which extends 0.5

mile seaward, with depths of less than 5.5m, and which dries in

places. A 1.5m patch lies on the seaward edge of the reef, 0.3

mile NW of Ile aux Mouettes. 

10.19 Banc des Cormorans, with depths from 1.5 to 11m, lies from

1.2 to 1.7 miles NE of the light on Ilot Rocheux. A rock, with a

depth of 3.7m, lies 0.1 mile SW of its SW end; the rock scarcely shows in calm weather, but the sea breaks heavily on it during SE winds.

10.20 North side.—Pointe Ansirake (15°27'S., 49°45'E.)

lies on the E side of the Riviere Antanambalana, at the head of

the bay, 27 miles N of Cap Tanjona. Pointe Veringotra, 3 miles

W of Pointe Antsiraka, can be distinguished by its two hillocks. 

10.20 A bank, with depths of less than 3m, fronts the mouth of the

Riviere Antanambalana, and extends 0.7 mile S from the mangrove fringed Pointe Antsiraka; it tends to advance SW. 

10.20 Nosy Milomboka (15°35'S., 49°45'E.) lies on an isolated

shoal patch 7.7 miles S of Pointe Antsiraka, in the approach to

Maroantsetra; it is the farthest S of several island extending N.

Nosy Mitomby lies on the same shoal patch, 0.5 mile NNW of

Nosy Milomboka. Nosy Haramy and Nosy Ravina lie 2.2 and 3

miles N, respectively, of Nosy Milomboka. Nosy Mangabe

(15°30'S., 49°45'E.), 333m high, is the largest of the above

chain of islands; it lies 2 miles SSE of Pointe Antsiraka. 

10.20 There are several shoals on the W side of the approach to

Maroantsetra. The one nearest the fairway has a depth of 6.4m;

it lies 3.7 miles WNW of the light on Nosy Mangabe.

10.20 Maroantsetra (15°27'S., 49°49'E.) (World Port Index No.

47590) is situated at the head of Helodranon’ Antongila, 1 mile

NW of Pointe Antsiraka, where the Riviere Anjahanambo

flows from W along the head of the bay into the mouth of the

Riviere Antanambalana; the port is very small and consists of a
144 Sector 10. Madagascar—East Coast—Tanjon’i Bobaomby to Tanjon’i Vohimena 

Pub. 171

town and an open roadstead. 

10.20 Signals.—There is a signal station at Maroantsetra with

which vessels can communicate by day. Signals indicating the

locality threatened by a cyclone are shown. 

10.20 Anchorage.—There is anchorage off Maroantsetra in 11m,

mud, with the range lights at the head of the bay in line bearing

about 045°, and the SW extremity of Nosy Mangabe in line

with the NW extremity of Nosy Haramy, bearing about 155°;

this anchorage affords no shelter from the SE trade wind, when

vessels seek shelter at Port Memoria, on the W side of Nosy

Mangabe. Vessels may anchor anywhere around Nosy Mangabe, in depths of 14 to 18m, 0.2 or 0.3 mile offshore, avoiding

the reef, partly above-water, that lies about 0.2 mile off the SE

extremity of the island. The best anchorage off Nosy Mangabe

is in Port Memoria; there is a berth with a rock on the E side of

the cove in line with the trunk of a large tree, bearing 078°, and

the W fall of the land N of the cove bearing 355°, where excellent shelter has been found from S and E winds.

Helodranon’ Antongila (Baie d’Antongil) to Lohatanjon’ Antsiraka

10.21 Tanjona Belao (16°14'S., 49°51'E.), the SW entrance

point to Helodranon’ Antongila, a high rounded mass of rock

which is visible from a distance of 40 miles, is the termination

of a mountain range that extends along the coast in a SSW. A

beacon stands on the summit of the rock mass. 

10.21 From Tanjona Belao the coast trends S to Tanjona Lohatrozona (Cap Lohatrozana), the S entrance point to Baie de

Antanambe. 

10.21 Nosy Atafana (16°19'S., 49°50'E.) lies on a reef which has a

depth of 1.9m off its NE side; it is the largest of three islets that

lie on this reef. From a distance of 2 or 3 miles, Nosy Atafana

appears as two islets, the S and smaller part is wedge-shaped.

The dark vegetation on the islet stands out clearly against the

lighter vegetation on the mainland. 

10.21 Antanambe is a town situated on the SE shore of Baie de

Ananambe, 0.7 mile SW of Tanjona Lohatrozona. A hotel

stands at the NE end of Antanambe. 

10.21 For the assistance of vessels anchoring, two beacons, each

4.9m high, stand on the shores of the bay. The W beacon stands

0.1 mile SSE of the S entrance point of the Riviere Vahibe,

nearly 2 miles WNW of Tanjona Lohatrozona. The E beacon

stands on the E side of the bay, 0.2 mile NNE of the hotel. 

10.21 Reefs extend 1 mile NE and 2 miles SE of Tanjona Lohatrozona; a depth of 4.2m is charted just over 2 miles SE of this

point. In the approach to Baie de Antanambe, Tanjona Lohatrozona should be given a wide berth.

10.22 Lohatanjona Titingo (Pointe Tintingue) (16°42'S.,

49°46'E.) is a hill, rising to a height of 194m, 2 miles NNW of

the point.

10.22 Baie de Tintingue is entered between Pointe Mahela

(16°42'S., 49°45'E.) and the mouth of the Riviere Fandrarazana. 

10.22 A current has been reported, usually setting ESE, in the entrance channels of Baie de Tintingue. 

10.22 The bay is encumbered with rocks and shoals and is difficult

to access; it is only suitable for vessels of shallow draft. 

10.22 There is anchorage, in 7m, mud, with Pointe Mahela bearing

195°, and the white patch on Nosy Vorona, in the W part of the

bay, bearing 252°. Anchorage can be obtained outside Baie de

Tintingue, in 35m, with Pointe Mahela bearing 319°, distant 3

miles. 

10.22 A vessel should approach Baie de Tintingue, to a position 1

mile distant bearing 160° from Pointe Mahela, and then steer

through Passe du Golo with the two beacons 1.5 miles SW of

Pointe Mahela in line bearing 279°. This line leads through a

buoyed channel to the anchorage. There are no pilots available

and only those vessels with local knowledge should attempt

entry. 

10.22 Lohatanjon’ Antsiraka (Pointe a Larree) (16°50'S.,

49°50'E.) is a long, low, and sandy projection that is partly

wooded; it is visible about 10 miles in clear weather. 

10.22 Anchorage can be taken off the N side of this point; the holding ground is good. Anchorage can also be taken about 8 miles

NW of Lohatanjon’ Antsiraka, about 0.5 mile offshore, in 26m,

good holding ground. This anchorage is sheltered from SE

winds, but is exposed to the ENE swell. 

10.22 The currents are strong off Lohatanjon’ Antsiraka, but elsewhere in the vicinity they are generally variable and of moderate strength. As a rule they follow the direction of the wind, so

that the N current set predominates.

Nosy Sainte Marie

10.23 General.—Nosy Sainte Marie (16°53'S., 49°55'E.)

lies with its N extremity, Lohatanjon’ Antsirakakambana

(Pointe Albrand) (16°42'S., 50°00'E.) separated from Madagascar by Canal de Sainte-Marie. From Lohatanjon’ Antsirakakambana, Nosy Sainte Marie extends 28 miles SSW; the

surface of the island is undulating and the hills attain heights

up to 122m. The island is thickly wooded, but throughout the

valleys are either beds of rivelets of fresh water or salt water

marshes which cover at spring tides.

10.24 East side.—Lohatanjon’ Antsirakakambana, the N

extremity of the island, is backed by a forest; a light exhibited

at a height of 80m is situated 2.5 miles SSW of the point. The

point is fringed by rocks and depths of less than 11m extend 1

mile NE from it. The E coast of Nosy Sainte Marie is bordered

by a coral reef; the 30m curve line lies up to 10 miles off this

coast, and there are several off-lying dangers. 

10.24 A drying reef, which nearly always breaks, lies 12.5 miles S

of Lohatanjon’ Antsirakakambana. The several banks in this

area lie within the 30m curve; their positions are best seen on

the chart. 

10.24 Lohatanjona Vohibato (Pointe Blevec) (17°08'S.,

49°48'E.), marked by a light, usually considered the S extremity of Nosy Sainte Marie, is actually the S extremity of Nosy

Nato (Ile de Nattes), which is low and separated from the larger

island by a narrow boat channel. 

10.24 A drying reef extends 1.5 miles S from Nosy Nato. Toraka

Vohibato (Banc de Blevee), with a depth of 11m, lies 4.5 miles

SSE of Nosy Nato, and reefs, which dry, lie from 3 to 5 miles

ENE of Lohatanjona Vohibato, and about 2.5 miles offshore. 

10.24 The E coast of Nosy Sainte Marie is exposed to the SE trade

wind and a heavy swell sets in. There is no sheltered anchorage, but Anse d’Ampanhy midway along this coast may provide refuge for boats. The entrance to this cove, through a
Sector 10. Madagascar—East Coast—Tanjon’i Bobaomby to Tanjon’i Vohimena 145

Pub. 171

narrow gap in the coastal reef, can be identified by a white cliff

at its head. The entrance has not been examined and breakers

have been seen there.

10.25 West side.—Lohatanjon’ Antsitakaraiky (Pointe

d’Antsirakaraiky) (16°45'S., 49°58'E.) can be identified by its

sandy beach; the N part of this low salient point is covered with

casuarina and coconut palms, but the S part by coconut palms

only. 

10.25 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be obtained in the bay on the

N side of Lohatanjon’ Antsirakaraiky, in 16.5m, sand, with the

light bearing 117°, distant 1.5 miles. This anchorage, which is

sheltered from E and S winds, lies 0.5 mile offshore; there are

no known dangers between this position and the 10m curve

which lies about 0.4 mile offshore. There is anchorage 1.7

miles S of the point off the village of Ambatoroa, in 7m, sand,

0.4 mile offshore. This anchorage is open SW, but is sheltered

from winds from the S through E to NE. 

10.25 Directions.—Vessels approaching Port Sainte-Marie from

the N or S should not approach closer than 1 mile to the shore

of Ile Sainte-Marie, until a position is reached from Ilot Madame Light bears 134° and is in line with the cathedral in the E

part of the harbor. This range should then be followed to the

anchorage position.

10.26 Pointe Tafondro (16°53'S., 49°53'E.) lies 12 miles

SSW of the N extremity of the island. A reef extends nearly 0.2

mile N of the point. This point should be given a wide berth.

10.26 Port Sainte Marie (Ambodifotatra) (17°00'S., 49°51'E.)

(World Port Index No. 47570) is situated on the W side of

Nosy Saint Marie is an open roadstead for large vessels. 

10.26 Depths—Limitations.—Ocean-going vessels can anchor in

the roadstead off Port Sainte-Marie. 

10.26 Aspect.—Pointe des Sorciers, the N entrance point, is a

small hill marked by white-washed rocks. Rocher des Baleiniers, the S entrance point, is high and black with a clump of

trees on it. The following are good landmarks; the buildings of

Ilot Madame; the barracks, situated on a hill, 45m high, 0.2

mile E of Ilot Madame; a storehouse, 0.2 mile N of the barracks; and a yellow church, 0.1 mile SW of the barracks; this

church stands out well when approached from the N. 

10.26 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be obtained on the range line,

in about 20m, muddy sand, with Ponte des Sorciers Light bearing 051°. There is also anchorage, in 12m, with swinging room

of 0.1 mile, with the light on the head of the jetty at Port

Sainte-Marie in line with the white bank on the S end of the

roof of the storehouse nearest to the basin at Port Saint-Marie,

bearing 098°, and Ilot Madame Light bearing 166°. 

10.26 Vessels surprised in the roadstead by bad weather from the S or

SW should take shelter under Lohatanjon’ Antsiraka, 9 miles N.

10.26 Caution.—Shoals, with depths of 4m and 7.6m, lie on the N

side of the fairway, 800m and 0.5 mile WSW, respectively, of

Pointe des Sorciers, the N entrance point; there are two 5.5m

patches 0.1 mile N and S of the 4m shoal. A buoy marks the

SW side of a shoal, with a depth of 4.3m, 0.3 mile NNW of Ilot

Madame Light. On the S side of the fairway there are depths of

7.6m and 11.9m, 0.2 mile and 0.3 mile WNW and NW, respectively, of Ilot Madame Light; these dangers are covered by the

red sector of Pointe des Sorciers Light, bearing less than 050°.

A buoy marks the N side of a 3.7m shoal, 0.2 mile NW of Ilot

Madame Light; a buoy, moored 137m N of the light, marks the

edge of a bank extending from the islet. A reef extends nearly

0.1 mile from the NW side of Ilot Madame.

10.27 Canal de Sainte-Marie.—The narrowest part of the

canal is SE of Lohatanjon’ Antsiraka (16°50'S., 49°50'E.),

where the width is about 3.5 miles between the point and Nosy

Sainte Marie. 

10.27 Toraka Fry (Banc Fry) (17°12'S., 49°35'E.), with a depth of

7.3m, lies in the S part of Canal de Sainte-Marie. Depths of

11m lie 9.5 and 12 miles WSW of Lohatanjon’ Antsiraka. 

10.27 Anchorage.—Where the depths are suitable, any part of Canal de Sainte-Marie may be considered as a fairly secure roadstead. The holding ground N of Lohatanjon’ Antsiraka is good,

but S and SW of the point the bottom is loose and sandy and

heavy seas come tumbling in; the E side of the canal, where the

reefs are steep-to and may be approached closely, is the best

anchorage. Anchorage may be taken off the village Soanierana-Ivongo, 15 miles WSW of Lohatanjon’ Antsiraka, in about

10m, sand, with the fort at Port Sainte Marie bearing 110°. An

11m depth lies in the approach to this anchorage.

Canal de Sainte-Marie to Toamasina

10.28 Between the mouth of the Riviere Maningory

(17°12'S., 49°28'E.) and the town of Fenerive, 11 miles SSW,

the coast is low and sparsely wooded. Pointe Takoandra

(17°25'S., 49°27'E.), wooded and moderately high, is located 3

miles SE of Fenerive; the point is marked by a beacon. 

10.28 Pointe du Nouvel Hopital (17°23'S., 49°25'E.), 2.7 miles N

of Pointe Takoandra, can be identified by an isolated, barren,

flat-topped hill about 49m high, rising 1.2 miles SW of the

point. An old fort and a disused light stand on the hill. 

10.28 There are three hills near the coast, from 0.6 mile to 1 mile

SE of Pointe du Nouvel Hopital. The Residency, with a flagstaff nearby, stands on the NW hill; it is visible from some distance. Colline Lakaria, the SE hill, is marked by a light. 

10.28 Nosy Ilansambo, lying 0.6 mile ESE of Pointe du Nouvel

Hopital, is low and covered by trees; it is fringed by a sandy

beach and a continuous reef, which breaks heavily. A reef extends 0.2 mile NE from the island. The reefs cause the islet to

stand out well when approached from the SE, but from the NE,

it is not distinguishable until within 3 or 4 miles. 

10.28 The coast between Nosy Ilansambo and Pointe Takoandra is

fringed by a reef, which extends up to 0.4 mile offshore; the sea

breaks on this reef. Several shoals, having a least depth of

2.7m, lie within 2.2 miles NE and E of Pointe du Nouvel Hopital. Vessels should not attempt to pass between these shoals

and the reef extending NE from Nosy Ilansambo.

10.28 Fenerive (17°23'S., 49°25'E.) (World Port Index No. 47560)

consists of a town, a very small harbor, and an open roadstead. 

10.28 Anchorage.—Anchorage off Fenerive, which is exposed

and dangerous in winter, should only be considered temporary.

Large vessels can anchor, in about 11m, on the 224° range line,

with the flagstaff bearing about 190°. Small vessels can anchor,

in 7.3m, on the 224° range, with the light bearing 164°, or with

the light bearing 181° and Pointe du Nouvel Hopital bearing

about 271°; the latter is better protected from the swell and

wind by Nosy Ilansambo.

10.28 Directions.—Vessels approaching from the N should stay at
146 Sector 10. Madagascar—East Coast—Tanjon’i Bobaomby to Tanjon’i Vohimena 

Pub. 171

least 5 miles off the coast to avoid the foul ground N of Fenerive, until the range beacons situated W of Pointe du Nouvel

Hopital and on Vohimassoa Fort, which establishes a course of

224°, are in range. One authority recommends that the land in

the vicinity of Pointe Takoandra be made, or even the land in a

position farther S, and that then the directions given for a vessel approaching from the SE be followed.

10.28 Vessels approaching from the SE should steer so as to pass at

least 1 mile E of Pointe Takoandra, and then to make good a

course of 350° for about 4 miles to a position where the 224°

range can be followed to the anchorage.

10.28 Between Pointe Takoandra and Foulpointe the coast is irregular, consisting of a series of beaches and rocky points; it is

fringed by rocks, especially off the points. Reefs extend up to

0.6 mile offshore and are marked by breakers. 

10.28 There are several banks off this coast whose positions may

be seen on the chart; their depths vary from 11 to 13m. Toraka

Laperouse (Banc du Laperouse) (17°23'S., 49°40'E.), with a

depth of 13m, lies 11 miles offshore, ENE of Pointe Takoandra. The other banks in this area extend about 8 miles SSW.

10.29 Mahambo (17°29'S., 49°28'E.) is situated 4 miles S

of Pointe Takoandra; the ground in the vicinity is a reddish color. A wooded point lies E of the village and the outlet of Rivierre Tsirita, about 1.5 miles NW, lies between two rockbordered points. A conspicuous rock, La Bitte, so called by its

resemblance to a vessels bitt, rises from the reef extending off

the middle point. 

10.29 The best anchorage, but practicable only for small vessels

with local knowledge, is in about 9m, N of Mahambo and NW

of a reef, which extends NE from the village. Large vessels

must anchor outside the reefs where they are exposed to the

swell; La Bitte is a mark for the anchorage area.

10.29 Grand Recif (17°40'S., 49°32'E.), a projection of the coastal

reef which fringes the point at Foulpointe, extends 1 mile NE

from the village. The reef is not steep-to and is separated from

the coast by a narrow boat channel. 

10.29 Toraka Mahavelona (Bancs de Foulpointe) lies close E and

NE of Grand Recif. A depth of 10m lies in the approach to

Foulpointe, 1.7 miles NNE of Grand Recif.

10.29 The coast in the vicinity of Foulpointe may be identified by

some high white sand hills with trees on their summits.

10.30 Foulpointe (17°40'S., 49°31'E.) (World Port Index

No. 47550) is a large village standing on low ground close W

of Grand Recif. The port is small and consists of the village

and an open roadstead. The ruins of Fort Hova, about 15.2

high, are situated about 0.5 mile W of the village. 

10.30 There is safe anchorage during the good season, from April

to October, when the prevailing winds are from between the S

and SE; it is open to N and NE winds, but these seldom last

long, and do not raise a high sea. 

10.30 Anchorage can be obtained, in 13m, speckled sand, good

holding ground, with the ruined Fort Hova bearing about 220°

and the N extremity of Grand Recif bearing 090°; this anchorage, which affords reasonable shelter from N winds, is only

about 0.1 mile from the 10m curve. 

10.30 There is anchorage, in depths of 9 to 10m, with the N extremity of Grand Recif bearing 058° and the tangent of the

coast S of the village bearing 183°; this anchorage is only 0.1

mile from the reef and is close to the 5m curve. This anchorage

is convenient for small vessels during S winds, but if blowing

strongly from that direction, a slight W swell is felt in the roadstead causing vessels to roll.

10.30 Between Foulpointe and Toamasina (Tamatave), the coast is

fringed for about 8 miles with reefs which have not been well

defined, and should not be closed within 0.5 mile. 

10.30 Toraka Antetezana (Banc d’Antetezana) (17°49'S.,

49°33'E.) lies 3 miles offshore has a least charted depth of

11m. 

10.30 Mamelles de Natte (17°50'S., 49°25'E.) are two conspicuous hills. Fausses Mamelles rise near the coast, about 1.3 miles

E of Mamelles de Natte, and resemble the latter. Although they

are not nearly as high, in hazy weather there is a possibility of

mistaking them. Southward of these hills, the coast is thickly

wooded and decreases in elevation towards Toamasina. 

10.30 As the white sandy coast S of Collines Mamelles de Natte is

free from dangers outside a distance of 0.5 mile, vessels proceeding along the coast should keep about 1 mile offshore and

thus pass within all the out-lying dangers off this part of the

coast. This practice is particularly recommended by day, and

also for those with local knowledge on a clear night, for the

land is easily followed by the white line of breakers. 

10.30 The Riviere Ifontsy flows into the sea about 13 miles S of

Foulpointe. Anchorage can be taken off the outlet, in 24 to

29m, or in a position as far as 3 miles N of the outlet. 

10.30 Ile aux Prunes (18°03'S., 48°28'E.), a small coral island, is

low and level and its shores are perpendicular. The tops of trees

covering the island have heights up to 27m; their uniform dark

green foliage makes the island stand out clearly from the mainland. It is visible from distances up to 15 miles, and is a very

useful mark for vessels proceeding to Toamasina. Vessels approaching from the S will first sight the flare of the oil refinery

at Manangareza.

Toamasina (18°10'S., 49°25'E.)

World Port Index No. 47540

10.31 Toamasina (Tamatave), the principal port of Madagascar, is connected by rail with Tananarive, the capital. The harbor lies between Lohatanjona Hastie (Pointe Hastie) and Pointe

Tanio, 1.5 miles NNW. The port consists of the town and a

small natural harbor protected from the NE by reefs and a

breakwater. 

10.31 Winds—Weather.—Toamasina is sheltered from the winds

and seas by Ilay Harandriaka Lehibe (Le Grand Recif) and the

breakwater. The heavy storms occurring from November to

February may effect berthing at the wharves because of the

swell; at this time vessels may have to put to sea or anchor in

the harbor. 

10.31 Tides—Currents.—The tidal range is from 0.4m at MLWS

to 1m at MHWS. Caution is necessary because of the uncertainty of the current, for at the same season and apparently under similar conditions, a vessel may be set 10 or 12 miles N or

Port Toamasina Home Page

http://www.port-toamasina.com
Sector 10. Madagascar—East Coast—Tanjon’i Bobaomby to Tanjon’i Vohimena 147

Pub. 171

S. During SE winds, no reliance can be placed on a N current,

but during winds from between the N and NE, which are comparatively rare, a fairly strong S current will generally be

found. On the whole it is best to be prepared for the latter, and

if approaching from the E, to make the land between Mamelles

de Natte and Ile aux Prunes. 

10.31 The currents near the coast and in the channels leading to

Tamatave are affected by the wind, and usually set in the same

direction as the wind. However, in Passe du Sud, a current is

reported to set frequently ESE at a velocity of 1.5 to 2 knots. 

10.31 From October to December, it often happens that the current

continues to set S, even when a S wind has been blowing for

some time; from March to September, the current sometimes

sets strongly N, even when the S winds, which predominate

during this season, are not blowing, but it is also possible to experience a S set when a S wind is blowing. 

10.31 The maximum velocity of the S current, from observations

made during 1931 to 1933, is about 1.3 knots; the N current attained a slightly lesser velocity. It is probable that these velocities are exceeded during strong winds. The currents appear to

be stronger S than N of Toamasina. 

10.31 Depths—Limitations.—There are berths in the harbor that

will accommodate cargo vessels with a draft from 6 to 10m.

The ore berth will accommodate a vessel of 9.5m draft; the

tanker berth will accommodate a draft of 12.2m. 

10.31 Passenger vessels are limited to a maximum length of 200m

in the roadstead. Cargo vessels are limited to a length of 180m

and a draft of 9.5m. Tankers are limited to a length of 230m

and a draft of 12.2m. 

10.31 The following was reported in 1994:

1. Li Grand Recif was easily distinguished by sand bars

and numerous breakers.

2. Le Petit Recif was only slightly discernible in daylight; there were no breakers, but there was a slight discoloration of water.

3. Toraka Six-Meters was not discernible in any way.

10.31 Aspect.—The land around Toamasina is low and consists of

small hills which are difficult to identify from seaward, but the

high land behind, in clear weather, may be seen at a distance of

35 miles. 

10.31 A vessel approaching from the S, in 1987, reported the first

visible landmark was the large white grain silo on the wharves

of the inner harbor. The light on Nosy Alanana (Ile aux Prunes)

was identified at 17.5 miles. 

10.31 When Toamasina is approached from the NE, Mamelles de

Natte and Fausses Mamelles will be seen, also Pic Vohitravoha,

10 miles SSW of Mamelles de Natte. Nosy Alanana, 5.5 miles

Port Toamasina

Port Toamasina
148 Sector 10. Madagascar—East Coast—Tanjon’i Bobaomby to Tanjon’i Vohimena 

Pub. 171

NNE of Pointe Tanio, shows up well because of its tall trees

and its light. 

10.31 Other marks are Grande Passe de l’Est Front Range Light

and the white houses of Ampanalana Village on the coast 2.7

and 1.7 miles NNW, respectively, of Pointe Tanio. The radio

mast 0.7 mile WNW of the point, the group of cranes on the

harbor moles and towers, and water tanks close SE of the

moles are conspicuous. 

10.31 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory and is available 24 hours.

Vessels send their ETA to the Port Authority 4 hours before arrival. The message should also contain information on cargo to

be worked. Pilots monitor VHF channels 12 and 16. The pilot

boards in position 18°06.4'S, 49°26.0'E.

10.31 For tankers of over 30,000 dwt, the pilot boards in Grand

Passe de L’Est, approximately 3.3 miles SSE of Ile aux Prunes.

For other vessels, the pilot boards 2 miles NNE of Cap Tanio.

10.31 Signals.—There is a signal station at the Port Office; signals

indicate the locality threatened by a cyclone. 

10.31 Anchorage.—There are no special anchorages. If upon arrival there are no berths, the pilot will anchor the vessel between the reefs and the shore according to length and draft. 

10.31 The best anchorage is with the light on Pointe Tanio bearing

275°, about 0.5 mile distant, in a depth of 22m. Vessels in quarantine anchor in a position 0.6 mile NNE of Pointe Tanio, in a

depth of about 20m. 

10.31 Directions.—Toraka Ifontsy (Banc d’ Ifontsy) (17°53'S.,

49°32'E.), with a least charted depth of 7.6m, lies 4 miles offshore, 16.5 miles NNE of Pointe Tanio. Torako Marie-Eugenie,

with a depth of 6.6m, lies 2.2 miles SSW of Toraka Ifontsy. 

10.31 Passe du Nord-Est, which passes between the reefs, is not

recommended as the landmarks can not be made out very well. 

10.31 Grande Passe de l’Est, formed between Toraka Six-Metres

(Banc des Six-Metres), is the principal entrance. The lights in

line bearing 277° lead from seaward. It has been reported

(1993) that the range lights are not lit at night.

10.31 It should be noted that frequent heavy rains squalls, experienced in approaching, may obscure all visible aids to navigation.

Toamasina to Mahanoro

10.32 From Toamasina, the coast trends in a general SSW to

Vatomandry; there are few indentations in this coast. There are

no dangers charted seaward of the 50m curve. 

10.32 Nosy Faho (18°18'S., 49°24'E.) is located at the S extremity

of a coral reef, 8.5 miles S of Lohatanjona Hastie, and about

2.8 miles offshore. The 10m curve line lies 1.5 miles N and 1

mile S of the island. 

10.32 Nosy Dombala (18°26'S., 49°24'E.) is a sandbank on a coral

reef, 7.5 miles S of Nosy Faho; these reefs are clearly marked

by breakers. Toraka Malagasy (Bank Malagasy), a 6.3m depth,

lies 2 miles NNE of Nosy Dombala. Vessels should not attempt

to proceed through the passage between Nosy Faho and Nosy

Dombala; if the vessel is obliged to do so it is better to keep

close to Nosy Faho. There is a good anchorage W of Nosy

Dombala, protected from SE storms, in a depth of 18m. 

10.32 Toraka Tourmaline (Banc de la Tourmaline) (18°39'S.,

49°19'E.) lies 4.5 miles offshore, has a charted depth of 11m

and breaks in bad weather. Banc d’Anteyorando, with a depth

of 9.7m, lies 7.2 miles offshore 12 miles SSW of Toraka Tourmaline. The Riviere Iaroka enters the sea in the position

18°58'S, 49°06'E. The spray of breakers extending some distance off the outlet of the river is said to be visible from a distance of 10 miles seaward. Andevoranto is a large village on

the N side of the Riviere Iaroka near the entrance. There is anchorage, with a bottom of sand, off the village. The sea was reported to break during heavy weather in several places about 6

miles offshore, 10 miles SSE of Andevoranto. 

10.32 Rocher Noir is a conspicuous black islet, lying a short distance offshore, in the position 19°12'S, 49°01'E. 

10.32 La Selle rises at the N end of the nearest ridge of hills in the

position 19°14'S, 48°48'E. The formation appears as a tableland when seen from the N, but as a saddle when seen from the

E or S.

10.32 Vatomandry (19°20'S., 49°00'E.) is situated at the mouth of

the Riviere Marolo. This small port, which consists of a village

and open roadstead, was closed to maritime traffic in 1950. 

10.32 There are many dangers in the vicinity of Vatomandry; the

farthest SE is a rock charted 5.2 miles offshore.

10.33 Between Vatomandry and Mahanoro the low coast is

bordered by trees broken by the mouths of several rivers. 

10.33 Colline Ronde (19°39'S., 48°44'E.) is located on the second

ridge and has a dark conical summit and is one of a number of

conspicuous hills in this vicinity. Saddle rises S of Colline

Ronde in a position 15 miles W of Mahanoro; its summit is

slightly hollowed at the center. When seen from the N, the outline of the hill appears against the sky; from the S it shows a

dark outline against a background of distant mountains. 

10.33 Caution.—A rock, with a depth of 7m, lies 4.7 miles SE of

Vatomandry; its charted position is doubtful.

10.33 Toraka Vaudreil (Banc du Vaudreuil) (19°30'S., 48°56'E.)

has a rock, awash, located in about its center; the bank extends

about 2 miles N and 2 miles S from the rock. This bank lies

about 1.5 miles offshore, 11 miles SSW of Vatomandry. A

shoal, with a depth of 8m, is located 7 miles NNE of Mahanoro, and another with a depth of 4m, lies 3 miles in the same direction.

10.34 Mahanoro (19°55'S., 48°49'E.) (World Port Index

No. 47520) is situated on a wooded peninsula forming the E

side of a river, which flows into the sea from a large lagoon.

The port is small and consists of an open roadstead. The Residency, conspicuous from the NE, stands on a hill on the E side

of the village. A chain of reefs extends 2.5 miles NE from the

peninsula; all approaches should be from N of these reefs, and

only in daylight. 

10.34 There is anchorage, in 5.5m, with the Residency bearing

198°. A heavy sea from the SE sets into the anchorage in June

and July and communication with shore may be interrupted for

several consecutive days. Signals indicating the locality threatened by cyclones are shown at the signal station.

Mahanoro to Manakara

10.35 The Riviere Mangoro (Riviere Nosivolo) flows into

the sea about 6 miles S of Mahanoro. The muddy waters of the

river discolor the sea to a distance of several miles off its outlet.

Navigators unaware of this fact frequently suspect shoals, but
Sector 10. Madagascar—East Coast—Tanjon’i Bobaomby to Tanjon’i Vohimena 149

Pub. 171

such is not the case as the depths off the outlet are very great

and there are no known dangers. 

10.35 Pain de Sucre (20°35'S., 48°16'E.), a conspicuous hill of

sugarloaf shape, inclines slightly to the S. The hills then diminish in elevation to the S; the last of any prominence has a summit of moderate height resembling three teeth of a saw from

the NE and SE, and appearing as an undefined mass from the

E. 

10.35 The Riviere Sakaleona enters the sea in position 20°33'S,

48°34'E. Anchorage can be taken, in 31m, off the outlet of the

river. In the recommended position, Pain de Sucre bears 253°;

the bottom of fine red sand is of indifferent holding quality.

The depths decrease very slowly and regularly from the anchorage toward the outlet of the river. The depths in a position

about 0.2 mile from a bar across the outlet is reported to be

10m. In depths of less than 20m in this area the bottom is of

coral; in depths of more than 20m the bottom is of fine red

sand. Communication with the shore is usually difficult. 

10.35 Mahela (20°58'S., 48°27'E.), on the N side of the mouth of

the Riviere Fanantara, can be identified by a row of casuarina

trees, which border the coast N of the village and extends SW

from it. Vessels can anchor in the open roadstead off the village. The best berth is with a conspicuous house bearing between 270° and 281°, in 22 or 24m, sand and coral. Except for

between these bearings, the bottom is foul. This anchorage is

impracticable during the Southeast Trade Winds. 

10.35 Communication with the shore at Mahela is by means of

decked surf boats and should not be attempted in ship’s boats

or by strangers. The landing place is inside the bar. 

10.35 A vessel approaching the open roadstead at Mahela from the

N or E should make the land about Sommet Pain du Sucre,

then coast along, in depths of 14 to 15m, to the anchorage.

10.36 Mananjary (21°15'S., 48°20'E.) (World Port Index

No. 47510) is situated on the N side of the mouth of the Riviere

Mananjary; the port is very small and consists of the town and

an open roadstead. The current about 6 miles E of Mananjary

was observed, in 1944, to set S at 1.5 knots, but a strong N set

was encountered when the anchorage was approached. 

10.36 A hospital, in green and red colors, surrounded by casuarina

trees, is situated 2 miles N of the river mouth; the gray water

tower, 0.5 mile SW of the hospital, and the Residency at the S

end of town are good marks from the offing. Mont Vatovary

(21°24'S., 47°57'E.) is higher than the neighboring summits

and of darkish color. 

10.36 Signals.—Signals indicating the locality threatened by a cyclone are displayed in Mananjary. 

10.36 Directions.—The anchorage position should be approached

by steering in with the S pair of lights in line bearing 269° to

the intersection of the alignments of the two pairs of range

lighted beacons bearing 269° and 331°.

10.36 The Riviere Faraony (21°48'S., 48°10'E.) enters the sea

about 33 miles SSW of Mananjary; outside the reef which

fronts the mouth of the river there is anchorage with a bottom

of sand and coral. Breakers have been reported in a position

about 4 miles SSE of the rivers mouth. 

10.36 Ambataloborona (21°57'S., 48°07'E.), a rock, lies close offshore 10 miles SSW of the Riviere Faraony. 

10.36 The Riviere Mananano enters the sea about SSW of Ambataloborona; the tall casaurina trees at the mouth of the river are

conspicuous.

10.37 Manakara (22°09'S., 48°03'E.) (World Port Index

No. 47500) is comprised of two small towns lying on the N and

S banks of the Riviere Manakara. The port consists of the two

towns and an open roadstead; it is very small. 

10.37 A chain of shoals lies about 0.7 mile offshore off the towns.

Anchorage may be taken outside these shoals, just over 1 mile

ENE of the Residency, in a depth of 15m, and, in a depth of

12m, about 0.2 mile farther in the same direction. An isolated

shoal, with a least charted depth of 8.5m, lies in a position

bearing 072°, 1.2 miles distant from the Residency. A shoal of

10.1m, whose existence is doubtful, lies 0.4 mile E of the

above 8.5m depth.

Manakara to Baie de Sainte-Luce

10.38 Between Manakara and Farafangana the coast is low

and wooded and has no outstanding features; close within is a

continuation of a chain of lagoons and rivers. The mountains of

the interior are visible only in exceptionally clear weather. A

wooded plateau, 10 miles N of Farafangana, is a good mark for

identifying that place when approaching from the N. 

10.38 Matatana (Riviere Matitanana) enters the sea in position

22°26'S, 47°55'E, 18 miles SSW of Manakara. The mouth of

Matatana forms a large estuary, which is completely obstructed

by breakers extending about 0.5 mile offshore. 

10.38 From 4 to 5 miles S of the mouth of Matatan,a a barrier reef

extends 8 to 9 miles SSW and lies about 0.5 mile offshore.

There is a passage near the N end of the reef which has been

used by coasters. Small vessels, with local knowledge, can use

this passage and anchor off Andranamby.

10.38 Anosikely (Nosikely) (22°42'S., 47°51'E.) is a village situated on a gray hill 10 miles S of Andranamby; anchorage can be

taken E of the village and N of a large black rock, in a depth of

15m. Passengers can be embarked here when weather is too

bad at Farafangana.

10.39 Farafangana (22°49'S., 47°50'E.) (World Port Index

No. 47490) stands between the Riviere Manambotra and the

Riviere Manambato, close within the common mouth. The port

consists of the town and an open roadstead. It was reported

(1972) to be closed to maritime traffic. 

10.39 The current off Farafangana usually sets SSW at a velocity

from 1 to 2.75 knots. During heavy rains, the water from the

rivers discolor the sea; this water has been reported up to 12

miles E of town. 

10.39 Anchorage, with poor holding ground, may be taken 0.2 mile

off the outer reefs, in a depth of 14.9m; the outer reefs lie up to

0.7 mile offshore and do not always break. If landmarks are not

visible, vessels should anchor when the water shoals to 26m.

Between Farafangana and the mouth of the Riviere Mananivo (23°13'S., 47°44'E.), 25 miles SSW, the coast is backed by

well-wooded country. The few known dangers lie close offshore and vessels proceeding along the coast by day can see

them at sufficient distance to enable them to be avoided. 

10.39 The Riviere Mananivo can be identified by the contrast between the thickly-wooded country N, with the flatter coast,

with few trees, S. 

10.39 There is anchorage, in 33m, sand, 3 miles off the Riviere
150 Sector 10. Madagascar—East Coast—Tanjon’i Bobaomby to Tanjon’i Vohimena 

Pub. 171

Mananivo, with the S fall of Colline Ankarana (23°05'S.,

47°38'E.), a large flat-topped hill, bearing 313°; vessels wishing to work cargo must proceed closer to shore.

10.39 Mouillage de Vangaindrano (23°20'S., 47°43'E.) is the

roadstead off the entrance of the Riviere Mananara. 

10.39 Aspect.—A village, Benanorema, is situated on the N side

of the entrance of the river; the village consists of two distinct

groups of houses. 

10.39 Two isolated buildings, clearly visible, stand slightly N of a

tongue of sand at the entrance of the river. The town of Vangaindrano is situated about 5 miles up the Riviere Mananara. 

10.39 Anchorage.—Mouillage de Vangaindrano, with depths 14 to

15m, lies 0.7 mile off the mouth of the Riviere Mananara.

10.39 Between the mouth of the Riviere Mananara and the Riviere

Isandra, the high mountains of the interior gradually approach

the coast. 

10.40 Grande Mamelle (23°28'S., 47°11'E.) and La Dent, 9

miles S, are good marks in good weather. 

10.40 The Riviere Masianaka (23°34'S., 47°37'E.) flows into the

sea 15 miles SSW of the Riviere Mananara. Anchorage can be

taken in a position about 2 miles S of the outlet and about 2.5

miles offshore. A coral reef fronts the mouth of this river. 

10.40 Mahabo (23°48'S., 47°33'E.), is a village SSW of the

Riviere Masianaka. Anchorage can be taken offshore in 33m,

in a position with a saddle-shaped summit, within the coast,

bearing 255°. 

10.40 The Riviere Isandra enters the sea in position 24°03'S,

47°28'E. South of the mouth of the river, the inland range of

mountains is closer to the coast; one mountain has a conspicuous knob on its summit. 

10.40 Mont Sakarivo and Mont Torotoro rise 17 miles SW of the

mouth of Riviere Isandra; the foot of these mountains appears

to form a “V,’’ which closes as a vessel proceeds S. 

10.40 Mont Fenoarivo, 3 miles NW of Mont Sakarivo, is conspicuous. Tete Mi-Pelee is a conspicuous hill 3 or 4 miles inland, E

of Mont Sakarivo; its S slopes are wooded, but its N slopes are

bare.

10.40 Caution.—A rock, with a depth of 1.8m, was reported to lie

in position 24°33'S, 47°24'E; this position is doubtful. A shoal,

with a depth of 19m, was reported to lie 13.5 miles E of the

above rock.

10.41 Baie de Sainte-Luce (24°46'S., 47°12'E.) (World Port

Index No. 47480) is bounded on its E side by a chain of islets

and shoals, over which the sea breaks, and affords moderate

shelter to small vessels. The town of Manafiafy (Sainte-Luce)

stands on the shore near the S end of the bay. 

10.41 Winds—Weather.—The bay is open to NE winds, but

though sometimes strong, they do not raise a heavy sea; SE

winds, on the contrary, in spite of the shelter afforded by the islets, cause a choppy sea. 

10.41 Aspect.—An observer approaching Baie de Sainte-Luce

from the NNE will, before reaching that area, note that several

small peaks on the Itaperina Peninsula appear like an island.

Two small arid hills on the S side of Baie de Sainte-Luce will

also appear as an island. 

10.41 Anchorage.—Vessels drawing less than 6.1m can anchor

with the summit of Ilot de Chartres bearing 100°, but should

not proceed farther S because of a rock, with a depth of less

than 1.8m, which lies 0.3 mile NNW of the summit of Ilot Babet. The holding ground is good.

10.41 Caution.—The principal islets, named in order from the N,

are Ilot Souillac, Ilot aux Oiseaux, Ilot de Chartres, Ilot Babet,

and Ilot aux Chevres, which has foul ground between it and the

S entrance point of the bay. These islets are low, flat, rocky, and

scarcely distinguishable from the coast; the sea often washes

completely over them. 

10.41 Garland Rock lies 0.5 mile ENE of the N extremity of Ilot

Souillac, but its position is doubtful. Two shoals, each with a

depth of 4.6m, lie 0.3 mile NE and NW of the N extremity of

Ilot Souillac. 

10.41 West of the above-mentioned islets are several shoals. 

10.41 The inner part of the harbor, near the town, is shallow and

encumbered by rocks. 

10.41 Directions.—Because of the existence of several dangers in

the approach, the exact positions of which are not known, vessels without local knowledge should approach the bay with the

utmost caution. 

10.41 A vessel approaching Baie de Sainte-Luce should steer for

Morne Manombo (24°42'S., 47°11'E.), 221m high, which appears above the trees at the mouth of the Riviere ManoumboArivo or Manery, 4.5 miles N of Saint-Luce, bearing 270°,

keeping a lookout for Garland Rock. 

10.41 When the summit of Ilot Basbet, near which an isolated coconut palm tree stands, is in line with Ilot Souillac, a vessel

should alter course SSW so as to pass about 0.2 mile W of Ilot

Souillac, taking care to avoid the shoals NW and W of it, and

steer for the middle of the gap between Ilot aux Chevres and

the S entrance point of Baie de Saint-Luce, bearing 190°. 

10.41 Vessels drawing less than 6.1m can anchor with the summit

of Ilot de Chartres bearing 100°, but should not proceed farther

S because a rock, 0.3 mile NNW of the summit of Ilot Babet.

Mont Ambarabe is a conspicuous summit rising in position

24°48'S, 47°05'E.

Baie de Sainte-Luce to Faradofay

10.42 From Baie de Sainte-Luce to Lohatanjona Evatra

(Pointe Evatra) (25°00'S., 47°05'E.), 14 miles SSW, the coast is

foul for more than 2 miles offshore; breakers have been observed

0.7 mile SE of Ilot aux Chevres. 

10.42 Helodrano Mananivo (Baie de Mananivo) is formed between

a point 1 mile S of Manafiafy and Lohatanjona Tapera (Pointe

Itapera), 8.7 miles SSW. Foul ground extends 1 mile SSW

from the N entrance point and Roche Tsioumaro (24°51'S.,

47°10'E.) lies 1.5 miles offshore, about 3.5 miles SSW of the

same point. Between Lohatanjona Tapera and Lohatanjona

Evatra (Pointe Evatra), 4.5 miles SSW, the coast recedes to

form Anse d’Itaperina (Baie d’Itaperina); the N part of the bay

is encumbered by islets and rocks. Lohatanjona Evatra is

marked by several small, avid, reddish peaks, which are more

pointed but not as high as those in the vicinity of Baie de

Sainte-Luce. 

10.42 Sommet Evatra (24°58'S., 47°06'E.), 173m high, Sommet

Evatra Milieu, and Sommet Evatra Sud are located 1.8, 1.3,

and 0.7 mile N, respectively, of Lohatanjona Evatra; a light is

situated on the peninsula close S of the summit of Sommet

Evatra Sud. 

10.42 Roche Itaperina (25°00'S., 47°06'E.) lies about 0.5 mile
Sector 10. Madagascar—East Coast—Tanjon’i Bobaomby to Tanjon’i Vohimena 151

Pub. 171

SSE of Lohatanjona Evatra. The sea always breaks heavily

over this rock and the resulting spray has been seen at a distance of 6 miles. 

10.42 Anchorage.—Anchorage, protected from NE and E winds,

may be taken on the W side of the peninsula formed N of Lohatanjona Evatra, in 21m, sand, with the N slope of Sommet

Evatra bearing 044° and the light bearing 085°. A vessel may

anchor closer in with the light bearing 090° and Lohatanjona

Evatra bearing about 135°, in depths of 14 to 15m, sand. This

anchorage lies close off Anse d’Itaperina (Anse Itapere). 

10.42 It has been found that during strong NE winds, a heavy

swell, up to 3m high, has set into the anchorage.

10.42 Caution.—Besides the necessity of keeping N of the point

of destination anywhere on this coast because of the SSW current, it is essential when approaching the coast to keep a constant lookout for sunken dangers, which can then generally be

seen from a distance by the color of the water. The transparency of the sea is such that in ordinary conditions the bottom is

clearly visible in depths from 10.1 to 11.9m.

10.43 Baie de Faradofay (Baie de Fort Dauphin)(Tolagnaro)

(Tolanaro) is entered between Lohatanjona Evatra and Cap Antsirabe (25°03'S., 47°00'E.), 6.5 miles SW; the W shore of the

bay is fringed by a sandy beach, fronted by some rocks. The

shores of the bay are low, and there is a chain of lagoons connected with each other just within the coastline. The land rises

quickly behind the lagoons and reaches a height of 529m in Pic

Saint Louis. Cap Antsirabe is located at the S end of a rocky peninsula, 35m high; the E side of the peninsula is bordered by

cliffs.

Faradofay (Fort Dauphin) (Tolagnaro) (Tolanaro) (25°02'S.,

47°00'E.) (World Port Index No. 47470) is situated in the SW

corner of Baie de Faradofay; the port consists of the town and

an open roadstead. Anse Dauphine, which fronts to town, is the

farthest S of the anchorages on the E coast of Madagascar. The

current off Faradofay usually sets SSW at a velocity of 2 knots.

Two shoals, with least depths of 8.2m and 7.9m, lie 0.6 and 0.4

mile NE, respectively, of Flacourt Light; an obstruction lies 0.4

mile N of the light. A dangerous wreck lies near the end of the

pipeline extending N from Faradofay. 

10.43 There are no berths alongside; cargo is worked from the anchorage. There is anchorage, in depths of 11 to 12m, sand, at

the intersection of the range lines. Vessels are advised not to

proceed SE of the 239.5° range line. This anchorage is at all

times of the year precarious because of the swell and the

squalls.

10.43 Caution.—A stranded wreck lies about 0.1 mile NNE of the

anchorage point.

10.43 Vessels approaching Faradofay from the S must take care not

to mistake Tanjona Ranavalona (Cap Ranavalona), a wooded

bluff 84m high, lying 2.2 miles SSW of Cap Antsirabe, for the

peninsula on which Faradofay stands, as in thick weather, a

vessel might run into Fausse Baie de Galions. 

Faradofay to Tanjon’i Vohimena

10.44 Between Cap Antsirabe and Tanjon Andavaka (Cap

Andavaka) (25°12'S., 46°39'E.) the coast is rocky and broken.

The transparency of the sea near the coast is such that, under

ordinary conditions, the bottom is clearly seen in depths of

12.2m. 

10.44 Fausse Baie des Galions lies between Cap Antsirabe and

Tanjona Ranavalona, it is encumbered with coral, rocks, and

shoals, which break, and is bordered by a sandy beach. A chapel stands on a hill which backs the head of the bay. 

10.44 Pointe Ambero (25°07'S., 46°50'E.) is fronted by foul

ground 0.3 mile offshore. The black tower and white building

of a factory stand near the coast, 1.7 miles W of the point. 

10.44 Helodranon’I Ranofotsy (Baie de Ranofotsy) (25°09'S.,

46°45'E.) is entered 4.5 miles WSW of Pointe Ambero. In the

middle of the entrance, which is 0.6 mile wide, there is a rocky

shoal with a depth of 6.1m; vessels should pass E of this danger as there is foul ground between it and the W entrance point.

In the NW part of the bay, there is a black rock resembling the

hull of a vessel. 

10.44 Helodranon’i Ranofotsy affords anchorage to small vessels

with local knowledge, on either side of the bay, in depths 7 to

11m, mud, interspersed with patches of rock; vessels making a

long stay may find it better to anchor off the W side, as a depth

of 7m will be found closer inshore than on the E side, but a

cove, entered between two rocky points on the E side, is better

during strong E winds. A vessel 65m in length, drawing 4.9m,

has anchored with the N entrance point of the cove on the E

side of the bay bearing 022°, distant 0.1 mile. Although swell

and surf occur in the bay in bad weather, there is sheltered anchorage during winds from between the SE and SW. 

10.44 Tanjon Andavaka, 6 miles WSW of Helodranon’i Ranofotsy,

is a promontory which appears as an island as soon as a vessel

is clear of Cap Antsirabe. Monte Andrahomanana rises to a

height of 463m, about 1.7 miles of Tanjon Andavaka; this isolated peak is surmounted by three knolls of unequal elevation

and is one of the best landmarks on this part of the coast. A

shoal, with a depth of 9m, was reported to lie in a position 26.5

miles SSE of Tanjon Andavaka.

10.45 From Tanjon Andavaka to the Riviere Manambovo,

52 miles WSW, the high land decreases in elevation,; the coast

is backed by a large wooded plain, which becomes more wooded the farther W a vessel transits. The only heights along this

coast are some large white sandhills. The location of the

Riviere Manambovo is indicated by a wide depression with

gentle slopes in the featureless and slightly elevated coast. The

10m curve extends 1.5 miles offshore N of the mouth of the

river. 

10.45 Betanty (Faux Cap) (25°34'S., 45°32'E.) is a rocky outcrop

which is backed by some white sand dunes. The coastal reef

extends 1 mile from the cape; an isolated depth of 3.6m lies 2.5

miles offshore, about 5 miles SW of the reef. 

10.46 Tanjon’i Vohimena (Cap Sainte-Marie) (25°35'S.,

45°08'E.) is the S extremity of Madagascar; it is a high rocky

promontory rising vertically from the sea. The land in the vicinity of the cape is high and can be seen from a great distance.

The extremity of the cape consists of some blackish rocks projecting 1 mile from the cliffs, and terminates in an isolated

pointed rock only visible from the E. The land NW of the cape,

from within 1 mile offshore, appears as a high sandy cliff with

a flat summit, and is devoid of vegetation. A light is shown

from the cape. 

Caution.—A depth of 37m was reported (1979) to lie 29
152 Sector 10. Madagascar—East Coast—Tanjon’i Bobaomby to Tanjon’i Vohimena 

Pub. 171

miles ESE of Tanjon’i Vohimena. 

A depth of 15m lies 42 miles SSE of Tanjon’i Vohimena; a

depth of 30m was reported (1974) to lie 37 miles W of the 15m

depth. 

A bank, with a depth of 501m, has been reported to lie 92

miles SSE of Tanjon’i Vohimena. 

10.46 Walters Shoals (33°12'S., 43°55'E.) has a least depth of

15m; these shoals have been seen to break. 
153

Pub. 171

11. 

Madagascar—Northwest Coast—Tanjon’i Bobaomby to Cap Sainte-Andre

11.0Additional chart coverage may be found in NGA/DLIS Catalog of Maps, Charts, and Related Products (Unlimited Distribution).

SECTOR 11 — CHART INFORMATION
155

Pub. 171

SECTOR 11 

MADAGASCAR—NORTHWEST COAST—TANJON’I BOBAOMBY TO CAP SAINTE-ANDRE

11.0 Plan.—This sector describes the NW coast of Madagascar

from Tanjon’i Bobaomby (Cap d’Ambre) SW to Cap SainteAndre (Tanjona Vilanandro). The distance is about 380 miles.

A landfall at dawn on the NW coast of Madagascar is recommended, owing to the intense thunderstorms, which occur in

the afternoon, often lasting well into the night and severely restrict visibility. 

Tanjon’i Bobomby (Cap d’Ambre) to Tanjon’

Voailava (Cap Voailava)

11.1 Tanjon’i Bobaomby Cap d’Ambre) (11°57'S.,

49°16'E.) was previously described in paragraph 10.2.

11.1 Cap d’Ambre is visible from the NW at distances up to 15,

and at times, 20 miles. The country W and SW of the cape has,

from the W, a broken, irregular outline; the numerous hills and

hummocks have bare sides and grass-covered summits. Ambinantsandra, rising about 8 miles SW of Cap d’Ambre, is treecovered, and broader and higher than those about it; a round

hill nearby is conspicuously dark. Le Coq (Ambohitra Koholahi) rises about 2 miles ESE of Ambinantsandra; it is not seen

from the NW, because it is shut in by the latter, but is a useful

mark for vessels in the vicinity of Baie Andramaimba.

11.1 Caution.—Between Cap d’Ambre and Pointe d’Angadoka,

the coast is bordered by a bank, with depths of less than 91.4m,

extending from 5 to 20 miles offshore; its outer edge is steep-to

and descends into great depths. Vessels drawing more than 4m

should be navigated with great care when approaching this

bank, as in some places, there are depths of 4.9m over the flats

and heads of coral, which flats are often of great extent and lie

most frequently on the outer edge of the bank. 

11.1 It may be considered certain that, from the nature of this

bank and the adjacent coast, there may be dangers other than

those shown on the chart. Constant sounding and notice of any

change of color of the water, are essential when navigating off

this coast.

11.2 Baie Lotsoina (12°00'S., 49°13'E.) is entered 4.5

miles WSW of Cap d’Ambre; it affords good shelter for vessels, particularly those of low power, awaiting an opportunity

to round Cap d’Ambre from the W.

11.2 Winds—Weather.—Although the anchorages within Baie

Lotsoina are landlocked, they are, however, swept by violent

offshore squalls.

11.2 Tides—Currents.—The flood current sets very strongly

WSW across the entrance of Baie Lotsoina, and care is necessary in entering the channel, but when fairly entered, the current follows the channel.

11.2 Aspect.—The entrance is not easy to identify from a distance, but shows up best from the NNW or NW.

11.2 The shores of Baie Lotsoina are of uniform appearance, low,

flat, and of coral formation, rising vertically to an elevation

from 3 to 4.5m, and thickly covered with bushes. The hills in

the background are wooded.

11.2 Anchorage.—Vessels can obtain anchorage off the entrance

of Baie Lotsoina, in 20 to 21m, mud, but the proximity of the

coastal reef renders it necessary to be ready to weigh anchor, if

the wind blows onshore. 

11.2 Ile Basse lies about 1.3 miles SE of the entrance; vessels can

obtain anchorage with the islet bearing 220°, in 14m, good

holding ground, mud. Vessels can also anchor in the basin NW

of the islet.

11.2 Directions.—It is better to leave Baie Lotsoina in the early

hours of the morning, before the breeze increases, and it is advisable to mark the projecting points of the coastal reef as the

light is then bad.

11.2 Caution.—The best time for seeing these dangers is in the

afternoon.

11.3 Baie Ampanasina (12°01'S., 49°12'E.), entered 1.2

miles SW of the entrance of Baie Lotsoina, closely resembles

the latter inlet. Buoys should be placed to mark a fairway

through the reef-fringed entrance channel before entering. The

anchorage, for small vessels, in 7 to 9m, is restricted.

11.3 Directions.—Local knowledge is essential. The best time of

day to enter the bay is during the hours of early morning when

the winds are normally light and the reefs can be seen; it is

even better, for the purpose of seeing the reefs, to proceed into

the bay before the sun has risen above the hills to the E to shine

directly into the eyes. The entrance should be approached by

steering 112° for Ambinantsandra.

11.3 Vessels should proceed through the outer part of the channel

by keeping a little N of the 128° range established by Le Ballon

and L’Ablette; an entering vessel should not approach Rocher

Sentinelle closer than 0.6 mile. When this rock bears about

230°, and is open N of Pointe Vedette, the course should be

changed more to the S to avoid the projecting reef on the N

side of the entrance channel. When Rocher Aiguille bears

about 262°, and is open N of Pointe Vedette, course should be

changed to ESE to avoid the projecting reef on the S side of the

channel. After clearing the entrance channel, course should be

changed to 147° for Colline Tiraailleuse, which leads to the anchorage, but passes very close SW of a 1.8m shoal.

11.4 Helodrand Ambavanibe (Baie Ambavanibe)

(12°03'S., 49°10'E.) is entered between Pointe Andranovondrony, which lies 2.2 miles SW of the SW entrance point of

Baie Ampanasina, and Pointe Vedette, 1.2 miles farther SW.

11.4 Winds—Weather.—The winds of the Southeast Monsoon and

the current give rise to a turbulent sea in the entrance channel that

makes it difficult to discern the outer edges of the bordering reef.

11.4 Tides—Currents.—The tidal currents attain velocities from

2 to 3 knots at springs, and care must be taken when entering or

leaving.

11.4 Aspect.—Baie Ambavanibe can be identified by the wooded

hills surrounding it, one of which, Colline Ambinantsandra

(12°04'S., 49°12'E.), is typical.

11.4 Anchorage.—The best anchorage during the Southeast
156 Sector 11. Madagascar—Northwest Coast—Tanjon’i Bobaomby to Cap Sainte-Andre 

Pub. 171

Trade Winds is in 14m, mud, under the lee of Sommet Tirailleuse (12°06'S., 49°13'E.). The wind at the anchorage is

strong at this season, and squalls blow down the sides of the

hills, raising a choppy sea and causing vessels to drag their anchors.

11.4 Directions.—During the monsoon season, the best time to

pass through the entrance is at daybreak.

11.4 Caution.—The reefs which fringe the shores of Baie Ambavanibe dry in places, but are difficult to distinguish when

they are covered or when the light is unfavorable. 

11.4 The reefs fringing the entrance points of the inlet can be easily seen at half tide.

Tanjon’ Voailava (Cap Voailava) to Maruteza

Point

11.5 Tanjon’ Voailava (Cap Voailava) (12°07'S.,

49°06'E.), the NE entrance point of Baie Andramaimba, is a

long cape of yellow sand.

Baie Andramaimba is entered between Tanjon’ Voailava

(Cap Voailava) and Saint-Sebastian, about 29 miles SW. This

large area consists of an outer roadstead, an inner roadstead,

and a number of bays.

11.5 The outer roadstead is the area lying generally W and N of

the islands Nosy Lakandava (12°15'S., 48°58'E.) and Nosy Hara (12°15'S., 49°01'E.); the chain of reefs that extends N from

Nosy Hara marks the approximate E limit of the outer roadstead.

11.5 Vessels can anchor almost anywhere in Baie Andramaimba.

11.5 Winds—Weather.—When the breeze is fresh at Cap SaintSebastian, the sea becomes covered with foam as though there

were breakers in the channels.

11.5 Tides—Currents.—The tidal currents in the neighborhood

are irregular. The flood current generally sets SW and the ebb

current sets NE; they are sometimes very strong and cause eddies in the channels about Nosy Hao (12°07'S., 49°04'E.).

11.5 The resultant currents and tidal currents near Nosy Anambo

(12°16'S., 48°39'E.) sometimes attain a velocity from 2 to 5

knots.

11.5 Aspect.—Potopoto Hill (12°21'S., 48°59'E.) may be considered as a location separating Baie Andramaimba into two distinct zones. 

11.5 Northward of the hill a vessel is sheltered from the ocean

swell by islands and banks, but there is very little shelter from

the Southeast Monsoon except close under the land. 

11.5 Southward of the hill, particularly in Baie de Befotaka and

near Cap Saint-Sebastian, the SW swell is strongly felt, especially during January, February, and March; the vessel itself is

sheltered from the Southeast Monsoon by Montagne d’Ambre

(12°38'S., 49°05'E.) and its numerous spurs.

11.5 Anftsmsimno Hill rises about 4.3 miles ESE of Cap Voailana; this conspicuous hill has a rounded summit partly covered

with trees. Other summits conspicuous from positions off the

bay are Andramaimbo Hill and Ankaramisampana, which rise

on the isthmus separating Baie Andramaimba on the NW coast

from Baie de Diego-Suarez on the NE coast; these summits are

useful marks from either side of Madagascar.

11.5 Nosy Foty (Nosi Foti) (12°12'S., 48°59'E.) has a beach that

is conspicuous in bright weather.

11.5 Nosy Faty (Nosi Fati) (12°12'S., 48°48'E.) is a bank; the

whiteness of the bank, except at HW, is another useful mark.

Nosy Andantsara (12°16'S., 48°59'E.) has two peaks that

are separated by a deep gully that is very conspicuous from the

S.

11.5 Nosy Mely(12°17'S, 48°59'E.) has a conspicuous detached

granite rock, 20m high, lying close S of it.

11.5 Baie Amponkarana indents the NE shore of Baie Andramaimba. Sommet Coupure, a summit 131m high, rises close to

the head of the bay. A summit, 208m high, rises about 0.5 mile

N of Sommet Coupure.

11.5 Lomotro (12°12'S, 49°10'E.) is a village; a conspicuous

wooded bluff, 64m high, rises W of the village.

11.5 Helodrano Courrier(Baie du Courrier) indents the E shore of

Baie Andramaimba. Les Deux Mamelle (2°14'S., 49°11'E.) are

two bare, rounded summits, 246m high, rising close together..

Sommet Nu, 351m high, rises nearly 1.3 miles S of Les Deux

Mamelles. Petite Selle is a hill, 149m high, rising about 3 miles

SSW of Les Deux Mamelles. An islet, with a fairly conspicuous wooded hill, 70m high, rises from the marsh at the head of

Baie du Courrier.

11.5 Helodrano Ambararata (Baie d’Ambararata) lies SW of Baie

du Courrier. Ankitikona, a densely wooded, conspicuous peak,

267m high, rises about 1 mile inland from the head of the bay.

11.5 Helodrano Ampasimena (Baie Ampasimena) indents the SE

shore of Baie Andramaimba. Potopoto Hill, a useful mark, rises about 1.5 miles SW of the SW entrance point of the bay; this

isolated hill is 59m high, conical in shape, bare, and yellow in

color.

11.5 Helodranon’i Befotaka (Baie de Befotaka) indents the S

shore of Baie Andramaimba. The various summits on the

Orontani Peninsula are useful marks for the bay; these summits

are dominated by Ambohiposa Summit, which is about 514m

high, and rises 3 miles SW of the SW entrance point. Sommet

Depouille is 138m high and rises about 2.5 miles SE of Pointe

Baron (12°22'S., 48°58'E.). Mont Roti, a hill, rises about 5

miles E of Sommet Depouille. Grand Pele, a conspicuous bare

flat hill, rises about 1 mile S of the head of Baie de Befotaka,

and between this hill and the coast to the NNE is a range of

conical wooded summits. 

11.5 Ambatobe, a peak conspicuous because of its steep sides and

dark color, rises among the bare yellow hills, which back the

coast; the peak rises about 4.5 miles NW of Grand Pele. A conspicuous waterfall is visible about 3 or 4 miles inland, in a position S of the SE portion of Baie de Befotaka.

11.5 The various passes to and within the various parts of Baie

Andramaimba are not marked by buoys or beacons.

11.5 Anchorage—Outer Roadstead.—Vessels can find good anchorage, in 9 to 18m, sand and coral, within the triangle

formed by Nosy Vaha, Nosy Fasy, and Nosy Hara; in depths of

more than 20m, the bottom is sand and mud or only mud. 

11.5 When anchoring in the W part of this anchorage, vessels

must be careful to avoid the deep gully, which lies E and SE of

Nosy Fasy (12°10'S., 48°53'E.), where the tidal currents are

sometimes very strong, the holding ground poor, and the sea

rough during the SE trade wind.

11.5 There is good anchorage, in 20m, under the shelter of the W

coast of Nosy Hara, with Nosy Belomotro lying 1.5 miles W of

the S end of Nosy Hara, in line with Nosy Lakandava, 1 mile

WSW of Nosy Belomotro, bearing 250°, and Rocher Le Lion,

a small islet 1.5 miles SSW of Nosy Hara, bearing 188°.
Sector 11. Madagascar—Northwest Coast—Tanjon’i Bobaomby to Cap Sainte-Andre 157

Pub. 171

11.5 A vessel has anchored, in 11m, 0.5 mile S of Nosy Anambo

Light.

11.5 Anchorage—Baie Miroana.—Small vessels with local

knowledge can obtain anchorage N of Mont Ambatoarara, in 9

to 11m, good holding ground.

11.5 Baie Amponkarana is the best anchorage in the S part of the

bay, in 10m, mud, with Cap Voailava bearing 297°, a little open

of the SW extremity of the peninsula on the N side of the entrance of the bay, and Les Cristaux, bearing 240°, just open

NW of the S entrance point. There is a heavy swell in the bay

during the SE trade wind.

11.5 Baie du Courrier has anchorage, in 9 to 13m, but care must

be taken to choose good holding ground of mud or of sand and

mud.

11.5 The most sheltered berth is in 7 to 7.6m, mud, with the E extremity of Ilot du Courrier (12°14'S., 49°09'E.) bearing 199°

and Les Mamelles bearing 125°.

11.5 During the Southeast Trade Winds, there are sometimes

heavy offshore squalls, rendering it necessary to anchor close

off the SE shore of the bay, but this is only possible for light

draft vessels.

11.5 In Baie d’Ambararata, vessels of light draft can anchor in the

SW part of the bay, in 5.5m, with the middle of the reef extending ENE from the W entrance point in line with the large rock

at the NE extremity of Nosy Hara, bearing 325°, and Les Cristaux bearing 028°, and just open NW of Pointe Mangoaka. The

bottom in the bay is mud, good holding ground. The offshore

squalls are sometimes very strong.

11.5 Baie d’Ampasimena offers useful shelter to small vessels

with local knowledge, especially from the NE squalls at the

changes of the seasons.

11.5 Helodrano Befotaka (Baie de Befotaka) is open to N winds,

and a SW swell is strongly felt, especially from January to

March; it is well-sheltered from the Southeast Trade Winds,

when there is scarcely any wind felt in the bay. There is good

holding ground of mud and sand.

11.5 Baie d’Ironono, close S of Ponte Baron, is open to a swell

from seaward, and is unsafe during strong W winds. Small vessels can anchor in the S part of the bay, opposite the white

cliffs, taking care to avoid the reefs which fringe the shore of

this bay and are not visible at HW; anchorage in the bay is not

recommended.

11.5 The landing place in Baie d’ Ironono, accessible only at HW,

is at the mouth of the stream S of the village.

11.5 Caution.—Most of the more extensive banks uncover at

LWS; they appear of a dirty yellow color. The smaller detached

patches are particularly dangerous in that they do not uncover

nor otherwise reveal their presence.

11.5 The reefs and banks in the outer part of the bay are covered

with green water which contrasts markedly with the blue of

deep water. Elsewhere the reefs and banks are invisible when

covered with 1.8m or more of water. 

11.5 The strong SE winds raise a short choppy sea in Baie Andramaimba that appears to affect only the surface; at HW this sea

causes neither breakers nor ripples over the dangers below-water. Although a lookout should be stationed aloft at all times,

his ability to detect dangers below-water in the inner part of the

bay will be limited by the conditions of visibility.

11.5 The water on this part of the W coast of Madagascar and toward Nosy Lava (12°44'S., 48°41'E.) is turbid, and the coral

reefs can be seen only from a short distance; these reefs are

steep-to, so that sounding gives little warning. 

11.5 Patches of spawn often appear like coral patches; the water is

sometimes yellow in depths over 7.3m. The yellow water often

covers considerable areas and gives the impression of dangerous shoals without the lead revealing any change in depth. This

discoloration may be due either to spawn or to mud being

stirred up from the bottom by tidal currents or other influences.

Maruteza Point to Port Saint-Louis

11.6 Maruteza Point (12°24'S., 48°46'E.) is the N extremity of the Orontani Peninsula. Anchorage, perfectly sheltered

during the Southeast Monsoon, can be taken E or NE of

Maruteza Point. A vessel has anchored, in 31 to 33m, in a position with Ambohiposa Summit, bearing 160° and Nosy Valiha,

bearing 265°. D’Andovo Honkou Bay indents the Orontani

Peninsula on the NW side of Cap Saint-Sebastian. Vessels

waiting for daylight by which to enter Baie Andramaimba can

anchor in D’Andovo Honkou Bay, off the village of Andovo

Honkou, which is situated about 1.5 miles NE of Tanjon’ Anorontany (Cap Saint-Sebastian). 

11.6 In general, the best anchorage is in the S part of the bay

where the coastal reef narrows considerably. The bottom, of

compact sand, is good holding ground. The depths decrease

rapidly from 18.3 to 14.6m, and then gradually to the shore.

11.6 Nosy Mavoni (12°26'S., 48°39'E.) provides anchorage, in

28m, in a position with Nosy Mavoni bearing 290°, distant 0.2

mile; the bottom in this position is sand and coral.

11.6 Nosy Meli, bearing 027° and just open W of the NW extremity of Nosy Hara, leads between the mainland and the dangers

S of Grand Recif.

11.6 The S extremity of Nosy Anjombavola, bearing 250° and open

S of the S extremity of Nosy Hara, leads between Recifs de

Nosy Hara and Little Pass Banks. Nosy Foty, bearing 310° and

seen over the sandy isthmus, also leads between these dangers.

11.6 Les Cristaux, bearing 124° and in line with Andramaimbo

Hill, leads between Fosse Reef and Recif Est over the outer

part of the bank, extending NE from Fosse Reef.

11.6 The S extremity of Ilot du Courrier, bearing 098° and in line

with the NW of Les Deux Mamelles, leads between Banc de

I’Entre (Entrance Shoal) and the dangers extending from Basse

Pointe.

11.6 Ambamonetsimani Islet (12°27'S., 48°43'E.), a rugged rock

shaped like a haystack, lies about 1 mile W of Cap Saint-Sebastian.

11.6 Baie Andranoaomby (Andranoaombi Bay) (12°28'S.,

48°47'E.) is entered 2.5 miles ESE of Cap Saint-Sebastian. All

the islets near the entrance of the bay have seaward sides of

perpendicular basaltic cliffs, which are useful marks for the entrance. Baie Andranoaomby affords shelter from all winds except those from between the S and W, which rarely blow with

any force, except during the rainy season. In the dry season, the

strong SE breeze raises a heavy swell, which runs around the E

entrance point and enters the bay, but apart from this inconvenience the anchorage is safe.

11.6 A vessel of moderate draft can anchor near the middle of

Baie Andranoaomby, in 9 to 10m, with the W side of Nosy Antolo in line with the W entrance point, bearing 200°; a small

vessel can anchor on the same alignment, nearer the head of
158 Sector 11. Madagascar—Northwest Coast—Tanjon’i Bobaomby to Cap Sainte-Andre 

Pub. 171

the bay and off the village of Ambaro, in 4m, mud.

11.6 In order to enter the bay, after having passed Nosy Antolo, it

is advantageous to stay close to the W shore, where the coastal

reef is very narrow, whereas that of the E shore is wide and less

steep-to. Antasahabe is a village situated in position (12°32'S,

48°50'E.). A large and conspicuous palm tree is a mark for the

village. Anchorage has been taken off the villages, in 7m, with

the SW extremity of Nosy Mandazona (12°28'S., 48°43'E.) in

line with the middle of Nosy Mananono (12°27'S., 48°41'E.),

and the conspicuous palm tree in the village in line with a

mountain in the background.

Baie Ampamonty is entered between Pointe Oravaka

(12°34'S., 48°49'E.) and Bekotoko Point.

11.6 Depths—Limitations.—The depths in the entrance of Baie

Ampamonty are 10.9 to 14.6m. Within Rochers Jio-Jio, the

depths are less than 9.1m while within Nosy Antaly the depths

are less than 5.5m. The head of the bay is encumbered by mud

banks.

11.6 Caution.—Rocher Oravaka, 14.6m high, lies 0.5 mile SW of

Pointe Oravaka.

11.7 Nosy Vory, an islet 701m high, lies 0.7 mile offshore

and W of the village of Ampasimanahy; it is connected with

the shore by a bank, with a least depth of 5.5m.

11.7 Banc Ampamonty, lying 3.5 miles S of Rocher Oravaka and

1.5 miles offshore, dries, but in calm weather, when covered by

a meter depth, there is no appearance or warning of danger,

even from a short distance. A conical wooded hill at the head

of Baie Ampamonty, bearing 030°, open NW of Nosy Vory,

leads about 0.4 mile NW of Banc Ampamonty; if the conical

wooded hill cannot be seen, a vessel should not bring the summit of Nosy Vory to bear less than 040°.The conical wooded

hill, in line with a conical 50m hill which rises 1.2 miles SSW,

bearing 021°, leads through the fairway between the coast and

Banc Ampamonty and through the channel E of Nosy Vory.

11.7 Rochers Jio-Jio, two rocks about 8.5m high, lying in midchannel 1 mile N of Nosy Vory, lie on the NW edge of a reef,

which dries and extends 0.5 mile E from the W rock; the reef

lies near the middle of a bank, with depths of less than 5.5m,

which extends 0.9 mile ENE and WSW.

11.7 Nosy Antaly, 145.7m high, lying 1.2 miles NNE of Rochers

Jio-Jio, is conical and covered with trees; it is fringed by a reef

and a shallow bank. A shoal, with a least depth of 4m, lies 0.4

mile SSE of the SE end of Nosy Antaly.

Aspect.—A good landmark is a conical hill (12°32'S.,

48°53'E.), with a wooded summit, 219m high, rising 1 mile N

of the head of the bay and on the isthmus between it and Baie

de Befotaka.

11.7 Anchorage.—A vessel drawing 4.9m can anchor at the entrance of Baie Ampamonty, sheltered from SE winds by Nosy

Vory and the coast S of the islet.

11.7 A vessel bound for the anchorage from the N should pass W

of Rocher Oravaka, and then between Rochers Jio-Jio and Nosy

Vory, anchoring in 9 to 11m, 0.5 mile NE of Nosy Vory.

11.7 A vessel proceeding to the head of the bay can pass between

Rochers Jio-Jio and Nosy Antaly, but care must be taken not to

pass more than 0.2 mile from the SE side of Nosy Antaly in order to avoid the shoal, with a least depth of 4m, 0.4 mile SSE of

the islet.

11.7 Alternatively, a vessel can pass between Rochers Jio-Jio and

Nosy Vory, and then bring the 50m hill at the head of the bay in

line with the conical wooded hill, 1.2 miles NNE, bearing

021°, which leads E of the 4m shoal, mentioned above.

11.7 Small vessels can obtain good anchorage off Antafiabe, a

village on the coast N of Nosy Antaly, in 4 to 5m. This anchorage is reached by passing E of Nosy Antaly, but care must be

taken to avoid some projecting sandspits. 

11.7 Vessels with local knowledge can leave this anchorage by the

narrow channel NW of Nosy Antaly.

11.7 Baie Ampasindava is entered between Pointe Bekotoko, the

SE entrance point of Baie Ampamonty, and Nosy Tsiringidringitra, 1 mile SSW.

11.7 A coral reef, which dries, extends up to 0.6 mile from the SE

shore of the bay; Nosy Tsiringidringitra lies at its NW edge,

0.4 mile NW of Pointe Bemoka, with which it is joined by a

ridge of stones.

11.7 Baie Ampasindava affords good temporary anchorage, in 6 to

11m, sufficiently sheltered from SE winds by Nosy Tsiringidringitra, Pointe Bemoka, and the reefs connecting them.

11.7 Large vessels can anchor, in 12 to 14m, W of Nosy Mamoko,

near the W shore of the bay. Nosy Mamoko can be rounded to

the N or S.

11.7 Baie Ankazomalemy is entered between Nosy Satza, 1.5

miles S of Pointe Bemoka and Pointe Andamoty, 2.5 miles SE. 

11.7 Anchorage can be obtained in the entrance of the bay, midway

between Nosy Satza and Pointe Andamoty, in about 7m.

11.7 Pointe Andiako (12°46'S, 48°54'E.) provides anchorge to

small vessels with local knowledge S of the point, in about

4.9m; the anchorage is sheltered from the Southeast Trade

Winds, which, in this vicinity, usually dies down at sunset.

11.7 A vessel approaching the anchorage off Pointe Andiako

should steer with the summit of Nosy Ankarea, astern, bearing

265° and well open S of Mont Ankarana; these two bluff hills

show up well against the horizon, which is ordinarily clear W

after sunset, and remain visible long after the other land has

disappeared from view. 

11.7 In case of thick weather coming on before reaching the anchorage, a vessel should not approach within depths of 11m.

11.7 Between Pointe Andiako and Port Saint-Louis, there is a

shallow bay, the shores of which are mostly lined with mangroves.

Port Saint-Louis to Hellville (Andoany)

11.8 Port Saint-Loius (Antsohimbondrona) (Seranana)

(13°05'S., 48°50'E.) is situated close within the mouth of the

Riviere Mahebo, 40 miles S of Cap Saint-Sebastian.

11.8 The usual anchorage for freighters at Port Saint-Louis is on

the alignment of the lighted beacons, in line bearing 110°, from

3 to 4 miles offshore, in a depth of 9m, with Nosy Mangiho in

line with E side of Nosy Lava, bearing 345°. The holding

ground is good here. An uncharted wreck lies about 4 miles W

of Port Saint-Louis.

11.8 Baie d’Ambaro is entered between Port Saint-Louis and

Pointe de Namahory, the NE extremity of Nosy Faly, 23 miles

SW. The bay is exposed to N and NW winds, but is sheltered

from W winds by Nosy Faly. There is good anchorage anywhere in Baie d’Ambaro, which has a bottom of mud, but it is

open N.
Sector 11. Madagascar—Northwest Coast—Tanjon’i Bobaomby to Cap Sainte-Andre 159

Pub. 171

11.9 Iles Mitsio lie about midway between the Orontani

Peninsula and Presquile d’Ambato (Presquille d’Ambato)

(13°22'S., 48°30'E.). Nosy Mitsio (12°53'S., 48°37'E.), the

largest island of the group, is 217m high at a sugarloaf hill,

Mount Ankarana, near its N extremity. 

11.9 Tides—Currents.—Observations of the tidal currents off

the E coast of Nosy Mitsio were made in January and February,

during the Northwest Monsoon. It was found that the flood

current generally set between the SE and SW, altering clockwise; it attained its maximum velocity about 3 hours before

HW, and at HW set E and was very weak. The ebb current set

between the NE and W, altering counterclockwise, and attained

its maximum velocity about 3 hours after HW. The maximum

velocity observed was 1.25 knots. The current in the neighborhood of Iles Mitsio usually sets W at a rate of 1 to 2 knots.

11.9 Baie de Maribe, on the NE side of the promontory extending

NW from the S part of Nosy Mitsio, is entered between Pointe

Ampanomilay, the NE extremity of the promontory, and Pointe

Alankirimy, 2 miles E; it is open to winds from between the

NW and NE. A coral reef fringes the shores of the bay.

11.9 Roche Prevoyante, which dries, lies 0.3 mile NW of Pointe

Alankirimy; southeast of Pointe Ampanomilay, a spit, with a

depth of 7.6m, extending 0.8 mile NNE from the shore, reduces the width of the entrance of Baie de Maribe to 0.8 mile. A

2.7m coral patch lies on the E side of Baie de Maribe, 0.8 mile

SSW of Pointe Alankirimy.

11.9 Good and well-sheltered anchorage can be obtained in Baie

de Maribe, in 20m, mud, with Pointe Alankirimy bearing 040°,

distant 1 mile, and Mont Leja, 4.5 miles SSW of Mont Ankarana, bearing 113° and in line with a village on the E shore.

Small vessels with local knowledge can anchor nearer the head

of the bay, in 6 to 7m.

11.9 A vessel with a draft of 4.9m can anchor, in 10m, with Mont Leja bearing 107° and a point NW of Mont Bekaikay bearing 175°.

11.9 The best approach to Baie de Maribe is through Grande Passe, SW of Nosy Ankarea; this wide passage has moderate

depths and is free of dangers. 

11.9 Passe du Nord, between Nosy Fisaka and Nosy Ankarea, and

the narrow channel E of Nosy Fisaka, should only be used by

small vessels with local knowledge.

11.9 Baie d’Ampasimena lies on the E side of Nosy Mitsio on the

S side of Pointe d’Ampangala (12°53'S., 48°37'E.). A rock,

which dries 0.3m, lies 0.3 mile E of Pointe d’Ampangala.

11.9 Nosy Vazoana, 23.5m high, an islet fringed by a coral reef,

lies in the approach to Baie d’Ampasimena, 1 mile ESE of

Pointe d’Ampangala. Rocher Bevaoko, midway between Nosy

Vazoana and the coast, is 4m high; a bank, with depths of less

than 9.1m, extends 0.4 mile SSE from it.

11.9 The anchorages on the E side of Nosy Mitsio afford shelter

during the Northwest Monsoon, but the wind often veers E at

night causing a swell. Off Baie d’Ampasimena, vessels can anchor SW of Nosy Vazoana, in 13 to 16m, sheltered from N

winds.

11.9 Baie Alandrota is a cove between Pointe Ampasimenakely, 2

miles S of Pointe d’Ampangala, and Pointe Betamenaka, 72m

high, 0.8 mile SW. A coral shoal, with a depth of 8.8m, lies 0.7

mile SSE of Pointe Betamenaka.

11.9 Baie Alandrota affords anchorage, sheltered from N winds,

in 14 to 17m.

11.10 Nosy Be (Nossi Be) lies off a large indentation in the

NW coast of Madagascar, between Nosy Faly and Pointe

d’Angadoka, 30 miles WSW; it is volcanic, much indented,

and can be identified from the NW by the high land in the

background.

11.10 Nosy Ambario Vato (Nosy Komba), which can be seen from

a distance of 35 to 40 miles, lies 1.5 miles S of Nosy Be.

11.10 Mont Lokobe, at the SE end of Nosy Be, is the highest part

of the island; it is a granite peak, with deep ravines.

11.10 Pic du Tanylatsaka (13°19'S., 48°14'E.) is the highest peak

in the center of Nosy Be.

11.10 Tides—Currents.—The flood current sets E and the ebb

sets W at velocities of 0.5 to 1.5 knots; in the channel between

Nosy Be and Nosy Komba, the currents attain velocities of 2 to

2.5 knots at springs. The turn of the tidal current occurs from 1

to 2 hours after HW and LW at Hellville (Andoany).

11.10 Caution.—Vessels should not proceed between any of the

banks in the approaches to Nosy Be, nor between them and the

island itself; it is well not to approach closer than 12 miles to

the N or W shores of the island.

11.11 Helodranon’i Befotaka (Baie de Befotaka) is entered

between Pointe d’Amboday (13°13'S., 48°15'E.) and a promontory, of which Pointe d’Andilah is the W extremity, 4 miles

SW; its entrance is partially obstructed by rocks and shoals.

The shores of the bay are fringed in places by a reef, which

dries.

11.11 Roche Soa, with a depth of 0.9m, lies 1.5 miles SW of Pointe

d’Amboday and 1 mile offshore; a shoal, with a depth of 8.8m,

lies 0.4 mile NNW of this rock, and a bank, with a least depth

of 7.6m, extends 0.5 mile S from Roche Soa.

11.11 In the middle of Baie de Befotaka, there is an area which affords anchorage, in 14 to 20m, free from dangers; the sea

breeze is usually strong here and, blowing from the NW into

the open bay, causes a troublesome swell.

11.12 Ile Sakatia (13°18'S., 48°10'E.) lies from 2.3 to 4

miles SSW of Pointe Andilah, and from the offing, appears to

be part of the main island; its white and reddish dunes are conspicuous. The island is fringed by a reef, and separated from

the coast E by a shallow channel, 0.4 mile wide. A spit, with a

least depth of 8.8m near its outer edge, extends 1 mile N from

the NW end of the island.

11.12 There is good anchorage, in 16 to 20m, muddy clay, close off

the SE side of Ile Sakatia; this anchorage is sheltered from all

but W and SW winds, which rarely blow here.

11.12 Baie de Fascene is entered between a point 1 mile SSE of

Pointe d’Andranizany and Pointe de Berambo, 2 miles farther

SSE. Rocher Noir, 4.9m high, lies 0.3 mile offshore, about 1

mile NW of Pointe de Berambo. There is anchorage in Baie de

Fascene, E of Rocher Noir, in 12.8m, mud or muddy sand; the

depths decrease suddenly and there is usually a swell.

11.12 Baie d’Ambatozavavy is entered between Pointe Andranogoaka, which lies 2.2 miles S of Pointe de Berambo, and Pointe

d’Ampassipohe, 2 miles S. A reef, which dries, lies 0.4 mile

NE of Pointe d’Ampassipohe. 

11.12 Anchorage can be obtained, in 10 to 12m, soft mud, midway

between the entrance points of Baie d’Ambatozavavy. The sea

breeze is not felt here, but E winds are dangerous.
160 Sector 11. Madagascar—Northwest Coast—Tanjon’i Bobaomby to Cap Sainte-Andre 

Pub. 171

11.12 Pointe Tafondro (13°24'S., 48°22'E.) is the SE extremity of

Nosy Be. A spit, which dries out 0.2 mile, extends 0.9 mile

ESE from Pointe Tafondro.

11.12 The existence, positions, and coloring of the buoys off the S

shore of Nosy Be cannot be relied upon.

11.12 Anse du Cratere is entered between Pointe du Cratere

(13°24'S., 48°14'E.) and Pointe Mahatsinjo.

11.12 A spit extends 0.1 mile NE from the NE extremity of Pointe

du Cratere; near its extremity there is a rock, which dries 0.6m.

The W shore of Anse du Cratere is fringed by a reef. From the

E side of the bay, an extensive reef, which consists of rocks,

shingles, and sand, and dries in part, extends 1 mile offshore

and 0.2 mile S from Pointe Mahatsinjo.

11.12 Four oil tanks stand on the E side of Pointe du Cratere.

Pointe Mahatsinjo is 52.1m high; the hills in its vicinity are

wooded.

11.12 At the oil terminal, vessels moor heading about 120°, with

two anchors forward and stern lines secured to two buoys close

inshore; there is reported to be a depth of 9.1m at the buoys.

The berth is understood to be suitable for vessels up to 6,000

dwt.

11.12 Tankers with cargo for the oil terminal, but which are too

large to moor off the terminal, anchor S of Pointe a la Fievre, in

depths of 14m, to transfer cargo to smaller vessels. 

11.12 Anchorage is suitable for vessels of maximum length of

200m and maximum draft of 12m; larger vessels anchor in any

convenient sheltered area. 

11.12 There is no local pilot, but one can be made available from

another port if at least 4 days notice is given. Pilotage is advisable as the marks for the approach and for anchoring are not

easily identified; vessels should pass between Pointe du Cratere and Banc Souzy on a course of about 055°.

11.12 The Port Captain should be advised of the expected time of

arrival, draft, length, tonnage and nationality.

11.12 The tidal current in the vicinity of the berth is reported seldom to exceed 1 knot. Two small tugs are stationed at

Hellville.

11.12 Anse du Cratere affords anchorage 0.2 mile E of Pointe du

Cratere, in 16.5m, sheltered from W winds. A beacon, standing

0.4 mile N of the NE extremity of Pointe du Cratere, leads to

the anchorage when bearing 329°.

Approaches to Hellville (Andoany)

11.13 Nosy Tanihely (Tany Kely), 4.2 miles SSW of Pointe

Mahatsinjo, is distinctive and fringed by a coral reef; it may be

safely approached within a distance of 1 mile from any direction. A conspicuous rock lies close off the N extremity of the

islet. A light is shown from the islet.

11.13 Nosy Komba lies with Pointe Ambarionaomby (13°26'S.,

48°21'E.), its N extremity, 1.7 miles SSW of Lohatanjon’i Tafondro (Pointe Tafondro). A sanitarium is situated on the island

at an elevation of 595m.

11.13 Ilot Ambariobe lies 1.2 miles ENE of Pointe Ambarionaomby. Ilot Ambariobe and Ilots Ambariotelo, a group of rocky islets, 0.2 mile NW, lie on a reef which extends 0.4 mile WNW

from Ilots Ambariotelo and 0.3 mile S from Ilot Ambariobe.

The channels SW and close N of the reef should not be used.

11.13 Nosy Vorona, fringed by a reef, lies 0.3 mile N of Ilots Ambariotelo and 0.8 mile SSE of Pointe Tafondro; there is a 6.4m

patch at the W end of a shallow bank, which extends 0.8 mile

W from the islet, and between them are several coral heads,

with a least depth of 4m. On the shallow bank extending 0.4

mile E from Nosy Vorona there are four rocks, which dry, nearly 0.1 mile from the islet.

11.13 Ararano Du/Nosy Vorona (Passe Lokobe), between Nosy

Komba and Nosy Be, is the normal daytime route for ships

coming from the N and heading to Hellville. The least depth in

the passage is 8.4m; the buoyage allows large vessels to take it

at the beginning of HW. The buoyage has been reported as unreliable.

Hellville (Andoany) (13°24'S., 48°17'E.)

World Port Index No. 47360

11.14 Hellville is situated on the S coast of Nosy Be; the

port consists of a town and a very small natural harbor. Rade

d’Hellville indents the coast between Lohatanjon’i Mahatsinjo

and Lohatanjon’i Lokobe (Pointe Lokobe), 3 miles E; its N

shore is indented by three coves, of which Anse du Plateau is

the middle one and the only one frequented by shipping.

11.14 Aspect.—Anse du Plateau is entered between a promontory,

on which the town of Hellville stands, and Pointe a la Fievre,

0.3 mile E. The promontory slopes steeply seaward, and there

are numerous buildings on the sea front. 

11.14 Range lights are exhibited at the head of Anse du Plateau; in

line bearing 017°, these lights lead to the anchorage position

for large vessels and to the anchorage position E of the mole.

11.14 Range lights are exhibited about 0.3 mile W of the mole

light; in the SE approach, these lights, in line bearing 305°,

lead clear of Pointe Lokobe and then to the anchorage position

for large vessels. In 1980, it was reported that the front light

was partially obscured by trees, except on the leading line.

11.14 Signals.—A signal station stands on the summit above

Pointe Mahatsinjo. Signals indicating the locality threatened by

a cyclone are shown.

11.14 Anchorage.—Vessels can anchor off the S coast of Nosy Be,

W of Nosy Komba, in 14 to 23m, good holding ground of sand

or muddy sand; it is well-sheltered here from all but W

winds.In Rade d’Hellville, the anchorage for large vessels at

the intersection of the alignments of the range lights at the head

of Anse du Plateau, bearing 017°, and the range lights about

0.3 mile W of the male light, bearing 305°, in 15.8m; a vessel

can also anchor here with the mole light in line with Antorotoro, a peak 151m high, 1.7 miles NNW, bearing 335°, and

Pointe Lokobe, in line with a rocky islet close N of Pointe Ambarionaomby, bearing 114°. The anchorage is well-sheltered,

but winds from between the WSW and W cause a swell.

11.14 Small vessels can anchor closer inshore, 0.1 mile E of the

mole, with the range lights at the head of Anse du Olateau

range bearing 017°, in 9m.

11.14 The anchorage in the cove W of Anse du Plateau is a little

more sheltered from a W swell, but communication with the

shore is more difficult, as boats have to round the S extremity

of the reef, which extends S from the town to reach the mole.

11.14 Coastal vessels with local knowledge can anchor as convenient off the village of Ambanoro at the head of Baie d’Ambanoro, the easternmost of the three coves indenting the N shore

of Rade d’Hellville.
Sector 11. Madagascar—Northwest Coast—Tanjon’i Bobaomby to Cap Sainte-Andre 161

Pub. 171

11.14 Directions.—The route recommended to vessels approaching Rade d’Hellville from the W passes S of Grand Banc de

I’Entree, Banc de Cinq Metres, and the banks adjacent to them;

it passes N of Ankozoberavina Island and the adjacent coast of

Madagascar. The chart shows a least depth of 20.1m in this approach.

11.14 The route recommended to vessels approaching from the E

passes between Nosy Be and Nosy Faly and then either S of

Nosy Koba or N of the later island through Passe Lokobe. Only

the N of the two channels through Passe Lokobe is recommended; the least depth is 8.2m. It passes S of the shoals extending SE and SW from Pointe Tafondro, and the shoal flat W

of the point; it passes N of Nosy Vorona and the reefs off the

latter islet.

11.14 The channel S of Nosy Koba has on its S side the patches lying N and W of Ambato Rano; this channel is available to vessels of moderate draft. The chart shows a least depth of 10.9m

in the approach.

11.14 Large vessels approaching from the W should make good a

course of 022°, passing about 2 miles W of Nosy Iranja to a position from which Ankazoberavina Islet bears more than 090°,

a course of 067° should then be made good, passing 1 mile N

of Ankazobervina Islet.

11.14 Vessels approaching Rade de’Hellville from the E should

proceed S off the E shore of Nosy Be to a position about 2

miles E of Pointe Tafondro from which the beacons near Pointe

Lokobe are in line bearing 264°; course should be maintained

until the beacons on Pointe Tafondro bear 040° astern; the 220°

course should be maintained to a position abreast Pointe

Lokobe. This channel appears to be used only by light-draft

coasting vessels. In the passage between the S side of Nosy

Komba and the coast, the tidal currents are strong, attaining a

velocity of 2.5 knots at springs. After SW, the currents quickly

reach their maximum velocity, and if the wind is fresh at this

time, the seas rise quickly.

Hellville (Andoany) to Port Radama

11.15 Pointe d’Ankify (13°32'S., 48°22'E.) can be identified by a large isolated rock which lies immediately N of the

point; there is a ruined factory on the E side of the point. There

is anchorage off Point d’Ankify, in 10 to 12m, sand, gravel, and

coral, with the E peak of Massif d’Ankify, 1.2 miles S of

Pointe d’Ankify, bearing 177°, and the isolated rock close N of

Pointe d’Ankify, bearing 240°. The best landing place is a little

E of the point.

11.15 Helodranon Ampasindava (Baie d’Ampasindava) is entered

between Pointe d’Ankify and Pointe d’Anjanozano, about 12.5

miles WSW. The bay is too open to afford shelter, but large

vessels can anchor off the W shore.

11.15 There is good anchorage for vessels of moderate size in the

channel W of Nosy Mamoko (13°43'S., 48°12'E.), in 11.9 to

14m, mud; it can be reached from either N or S of the islet.

11.15 Cap Makamby (13°35'S, 48°07'E.) has a drying reef extending 2 miles NNW from it; Nosy Kisimani, 90m high, lies

close within its NNW extremity.

11.15 Baie d’Ambararata, on the W side of the reef extending from

Cap Makamby, is a well-sheltered natural harbor. Baie d’Ambararata affords anchorage to vessels of moderate size, 0.4 mile

S of Nosy Kisimani, in from 13 to 15m, the edge of the reef

fringing Pointe du Rocher should be marked before entering. 

11.15 Small vessels can anchor nearer the head of the bay, taking

care to avoid the vicinity of Roche du Confluent.

11.15 Baie d’Ambavatoby is entered between Pointe Makamby

and Pointe Antsiraka, 0.6 mile W. Within the entrance, Baie

d’Ambavatoby forms a wide basin, which divided into Baie

d’Amboahangy on the E side, Baie d’Andassy Be on the W

side, and Baie d’Androfiabe at the head of the bay; these inlets

are encumbered with reefs and mudbanks.

11.15 Aspect.—The entrance may be identified by two hills of

grayish color which overlook the entrance points. From the offing, the peninsula on the W side of the entrance resembles a

group of islets. Conspicuous hills are l’Arbre Mort, 138.1m

high, 2.5 miles ESE of Pointe Makamby, and Sommet de la

Compagnie, 146.3m high, 1.2 miles W of Pointe Antsiraka.

11.15 Anchorage.—Baie d’Andassy Be is recommended as a secure anchorage, but Baie d’Amboahangy has the advantage of

a fresh sea breeze, which keeps off mosquitoes and other insects; both these inlets offer spacious anchorage, in 11 to 16m,

mud, or sand and mud.

11.15 Baie d’Androfiabe has less swinging room than the other inlets, and its entrance is narrowed by the dangers mentioned

above.

11.15 A vessel of moderate draft can anchor in Baie d’Andassy Be,

in 12.8m, with Sommet de la Compagnie bearing 287° and

Ponte Antsiraka bearing 040°.

11.15 Directions.—The entrance channel between the 10m curve

is 0.2 mile wide.

11.15 The depression between the peaks of Montagnes Les Deux

Soeurs, bearing about 162°, just open E of Pointe Marolay,

leads through the entrance in a least depth of 21.9m. Pic Denude, situated 4 miles SSW of L’Arbre Mort, is also on this

alignment.

11.15 Caution.—Pointe Makamby is fringed by a reef which dries

and extends 0.4 mile NNW and 0.1 mile W from it; Pointe Antsiraka is more steep-to and vessels can pass about 0.1 mile E

of it. A shallow bank extends 0.2 mile S from the latter point.

11.15 Pointe Amboaboaka, the S entrance point of Baie d’Andassy

Be, is fringed by a reef, which dries, and a spit, with depths of

less than 9.1m, extends 0.3 mile NW from the point;

11.15 Rocher Dalrymple, awash, with a patch with a depth of 3m,

lying 0.1 mile W, lies just within the NW extremity of this spit.

The head of Baie d’Andassy Be is divided into two parts by

reefs and shoals, many of which dry.

11.15 Ile Verte, 27.1m high, lies 0.5 mile ENE of Pointe Marolay,

Hellville
162 Sector 11. Madagascar—Northwest Coast—Tanjon’i Bobaomby to Cap Sainte-Andre 

Pub. 171

the S entrance point of Baie d’Amboahangy; a coral reef,

which dries, extends 0.5 mile NNW from it. A rocky shoal,

with a depth of 4.9m, lies 0.2 mile NNE of the N extremity of

Ile Verte, and a rock, which dries 0.6m, lies 0.3 mile ENE of

the S extremity of the islet.

11.15 Pointe des Maques, which lies 1.7 miles SE of Pointe Makamby, is a narrow rocky point, terminating in a rock, which dries

0.9m. A shoal, with a depth of 4.9m, lies 0.1 mile S of the

point.

11.15 In the entrance of Baie d’Androfiabe, there is a rock with a

depth of 0.6m, 0.2 mile SE of Pointe Amboaboaka; a 7.3m

shoal lies near mid-channel, 0.5 mile SE of the point.

11.16 Pointe Angadoka (13°30'S., 47°59'E.) is the N extremity of Ambavatobi Promontory. Nosy Ankazoberavina is a

brush-covered islet, 62m high, lying with its S extremity in a

position about 1 mile N of Pointe Angadoka. From the SW

Nosy Ankazoberavina appears as two islets. It may be approached to within a distance of 0.2 mile despite a reef bordering it. In 1988, a depth of 10m was reported in position

13°28.3'S, 48°00.2'E.

11.16 Andrano Miserano (13°40'S., 47°59'E.) and Anketsabe

(13°55'S., 48°05'E.) are useful marks between Pointe Angadoka and Pointe Sangajira.

11.16 Le Cone (15°03'S., 47°15'E.), Fausse Table (15°08'S.,

47°16'E.), and Mount Matable (15°12'S., 47°08'E.) are conspicuous summits in the vicinity of and N of Baie de Mahajamba.

11.16 Nearly midway between Pointe Ambararata (15°11'S.,

46°57'E.) and Pointe Anorombato is a series of vertical marks

on a red ground, which appear to an observer at sea as fortifications; they are useful marks.

11.16 The coast immediately WSW of Cap Amparafaka (15°56'S.,

45°16'E.) is marked by red sand hills. Dunes Mamelles are two

white sand hills, the first of a series, lying about 11 miles

WSW of the cape and are 47m high.

11.16 Between Pointe Angadoka and Cap Saint-Andre the coast recedes slightly to form a shallow bight. A coral reef, with patches of sand and weed, lies parallel with and from 5 to 15 miles

off this coast; it consists of a chain of shoals and forms a barrier with some deep passages through it, and except for some

shoal heads W of Iles Radama, 28 miles SSW of Pointe Angadoka, vessels drawing less than 3.7m can pass over it in good

weather. Over the whole of this barrier, the water is so clear

that the bottom can be seen in depths of 29.3m, and the outer

edge, where the depths increase very rapidly seaward, is distinctly indicated by the change in color of the water.

11.16 Caution.—Because of the irregular nature of the bottom and

the comparative scantiness of the soundings on the banks,

shoals may exist which are not shown on the chart.

11.17 Nosy Kivinjy, a steeply conical islet lying about 2.1

miles W of Pointe Angadoka, is conspicuous from the W.

11.17 Nosy Antsoha lies about 0.7 mile SW of Pointe Angadoka;

anchorage has been taken in a position about 0.2 mile SSE of

Nosy Antsoha, in 14.6m.

11.17 Pointe Andrahibo, about 4.8 miles SSW of Pointe Angadoka, is marked by three tree-covered hills.

11.17 Baie Kakambana is entered between Pointe Andrahibo and

Pointe Antangena, about 2.8 miles WSW. The S shore of the

bay is fringed by a reef, and the S and E portions of the bay are

shallow. Kibibao Rock is a danger lying nearly 1 mile SSW of

Pointe Andrahibo.

11.17 Anchorage can be taken, in 6.5m, with Pointe Andrahibo

bearing 343°, distant 0.5 mile. The bottom of muddy sand is

good holding ground, but swinging room within the deeper

central area of the bay is restricted.

11.17 The Riviere Baramahamay enters the sea about 7 miles S of

Pointe Antangena. There are depths of about 5.8m in the entrance, but shoal water exists off the S bank, about 0.4 mile E

of the S entrance point. A village, with a flagstaff, stands on

the S shore of the river, about 0.6 mile from the sea.

11.17 Anchorage.—The entrance to the Riviere Baramahamay affords well-sheltered anchorage, except from W winds. To

small vessels with local knowledge, there is room for one vessel N of the village in a depth of 11m. Small craft can anchor in

the basin 0.5 mile farther up the river. The coastal bank in this

vicinity dries. A vessel making the anchorages must keep near

the center of the narrow entrance channel.

11.17 Ambatomilai, a detached rock 10.3m high, lies about 0.5

mile S of the W extremity of Nosy Iranja (13°36'S., 47°49'E.).

From a distance, Ambatomilai appears like a boat under sail

between Nosy Iranja and a small islet SSE.

11.17 Directions.—Vessels proceeding S from Hellville may pass

on either side of Ankazoberavina Islet and Nosy Kivinji; the

existence of the 8.2m shoal between Ankazoberavina Islet and

Pointe d’Angadoka should be kept in mind.

11.17 Pointe Antangena should be passed at a distance of about 1

mile, and the vessel should then be kept from 0.8 to 1 mile off

the coast S of that point until a position about 3 miles S of the

Rivierre Basramahamay has been reached; in this position the

vessel will have passed Banc Vestal. A course should then be

shaped to pass about 2 miles W of Pointe Sangajira, and with

the W and lower hill of Pointe Sangajira and with the W and

lower hill of Pointe Lavalohalika (14°00'S., 47°56'E.), bearing

145°, so as to pass about midway between Banc du Vaudreuil

and the coastal reef. When the summit of Nosy Kalakajora

bears 275°, course should be altered E to maintain this bearing,

astern; then the summit of the 127m hill, located 2 miles E of

Pointe Sangajira, bearing 015°, and in line with the reddish

road between it and Anorontsangana, leads to the anchorage

off the village. 

11.17 The color of the water in Baie de Rafaralahy does not give

any indication of the nearness of reefs. Vessels arriving in the

morning, when the sun is more or less directly ahead, find it

difficult to estimate the distance from the shore; the position of

native boats off the town, seen over the reefs, is very deceptive

to a stranger.

11.18 Nosy Radama (Iles Radama), 28 miles SSW of Pointe

Angadoka, consist of four islands, named from N to S, Nosy

Kalakajoro, Nosy Ovy, Nosy Antanimora (Antany Mora), and

Nosy Valiha; they provide a noteworthy amount of shelter from

winds from the W to the bays E of them. 

11.18 Anchorage, with shelter from winds from the sea to the W,

can be taken off the E shore of Nosy Ovy. Depths of 7.3 to

16.4m, with good holding ground, are available.

11.18 The bottom in the neighborhood of Iles Radama is very irregular, and even a small error in position is enough to give

markedly different depths than those shown on the chart. The
Sector 11. Madagascar—Northwest Coast—Tanjon’i Bobaomby to Cap Sainte-Andre 163

Pub. 171

banks have not been thoroughly examined, and dangers other

than those shown on the chart may be assumed to exist. These

islands and the adjacent mainland are frequently hidden by fog

or during rain spells, and caution is necessary in approaching

them or navigating in their vicinity. The water over the outer

reef chain is very clear, but it is uncertain whether or not the

water over patches of the inner reef can be seen, especially so

far as the discolored river outflow of the rainy season reaches.

It is therefore recommended that vessels keep to seaward of the

outer reef chain in this vicinity except where directions are

available. Local knowledge is recommended.

11.19 Baie de Rafaralahy is entered between Lohatanjon’i

Sangajra (Pointe Sangajira) and Pointe Lavalohalika, about 6.5

miles SSE.

11.19 High water and LW succeed one another at fairly regular intervals, but the height of consecutive tides varies greatly; differences as large as 2m have been noted.

11.19 A hill, 55m high, rises near the extremity of Lohatanjon’i

Lavalohalika (Pointe Lavalohalika). Another hill, 84m high,

rises about 1.5 miles ESE of the 55m hill. 

11.19 The customhouse in the town of Andranto, situated on the N

shore of the bay about 2.2 miles ESE of Pointe Sangajira, has a

flagstaff near it. Fort de Sada stands on a hill rising 127m about

0.7 mile N of the town. The village of Tanandava is built on the

crest of a hill extending W from the fort.

11.19 Anchorage can been taken in a position from which Pointe

Lavalohalika bears 170° and the S extremity of Nosy Kalakajoro bears 264°. The depth in this position was 16.4m; the anchorage was considered good even though it appeared to be

very close to the edge of a reef.

Port Radama to Ananalava

11.20 Port Radama (14°05'S., 47°57'E.) is entered between

Pointe Lavalohalika and Pointe Berangomaina, nearly 6 miles

SSW. The E side of Port Radama, especially its S part, is low

and fringed with a dense screen of mangroves. The W side is

generally steep and rocky, with some mangroves on its S part.

Large vessels with local knowledge can secure good anchorage

in this bay, but its usefulness is limited in that it has been only

partially examined.

11.20 Winds—Weather.—A NW sea breeze, characteristic of this

area and known locally as the “talio,” blows from 1000 to

1700; it sometimes blows fresh, but loses itself in the narrow

part of the bay. 

11.20 The “varatrazo,’’ a SE land breeze, blows lightly during the

night. The wind does not raise a troublesome sea in the bay.

11.20 Tides—Currents.—The tidal currents in the entrance rarely

exceed a velocity of 2 knots at springs. The currents are stronger in the S part of the bay; the water is fresh during the ebb

current.

11.20 Aspect.—Anketsabe (13°55'S., 48°05'E.) is a useful mark

in this vicinity. Mount Angoroni (14°13'S., 48°10'E.) is isolated, and has a flat top and dark, nearly horizontal stripes on its

slopes. Mount Ampombiabo (14°19'S., 47°55'E.) has a conspicuous clump of trees on the it called La Canine.

11.20 Lahatanjon’i Berangoma (Pointe Berangomaina) rises to an

elevation of 61m, about 0.5 mile within its extremity. Ile Verte,

5 miles SE of Pointe Lavalohalika, is flat and wooded, with a

distinctive group of trees at its center.

11.20 Anchorage.—Vessels can obtain anchorage, according to

their size and draft, in Port Radama, but caution is necessary as

there may be dangers other than those charted.

11.20 Vessels can anchor on the SW side of the bay, a little within

its entrance, in 14 to 16m, with the 61m summit of Pointe Berangomaina bearing 259°, distant 2 miles.

11.20 A vessel can obtain anchorage near the head of the bay, in

18m, with Mont Ankaramy (13°59'S., 48°12'E.) bearing 063°°

and the conical summit of Pointe Amboliboso (14°10'S.,

48°00'E.) bearing 185°.

11.20 Landlocked anchorage can be obtained 0.9 mile NE of

Pointe Amboliboso, in 18m, but care must be taken to avoid a

0.9m shoal lying 1.5 miles N of the point.

11.20 Ramanetaka Bay lies immediately SW of Port Radama; the

bay is large, but encumbered to a considerable extent by reefs

and shoals, and can be recommended only to vessels with local

knowledge. Such vessels proceed into the bay on either side of

Nosy Valiha.

11.20 Directions.—Vessels with local knowledge approaching

from the W can proceed across the outer reef chain in the vicinity of the Iles Radama by making good a course of 096° for the

S summit of Nosy Kalakajoru.

11.20 It should be noted that there are numerous shoal patches and

dangerous reefs on either side of this channel. Vessels approaching from the N should pass about 0.7 mile off the NE shores of

Nosy Kalakajoro and Nosy Ovy, to a position about 2.5 miles N of

the S extremity of the latter island. From this position a course of

137° should be steered for the 61m summit within Pointe Berangomaina, to a position where Ile Verte bears 095° and is in line

with the S fall of Mount Ankaramy. A course of 095° should then

be followed on this range to a position from which the 61m high

previously-mentioned summit bears 180°, and from which the

55m summit on Pointe Lavalohalika bears 031° and is in range

with Les Deux Soeurs. Vessels proceeding farther into the bay

should first place buoys to mark a fairway.

11.21 Nosy Saba (Nosy Beroja) (14°21'S., 47°38'E.) lies 4

miles W of Pointe Antsatsiaka; its SW and higher end, 42.1m

high, is covered with trees. From the W, Nosy Saba is difficult

to distinguish against the coast.

11.21 Nosy Lava (14°32'S., 47°35'E.) lies in the approach to the

roadstead off Analalava from the NW. White cliffs within the

W shore of the island show very clearly when the afternoon

sun shines upon them. Nosy Soy lies about 3 miles S of the S

extremity of Nosy Lava; from the NW it appears like a saddle,

the pommel of which is towards the NE.

11.21 Anchorage.—In the best anchorage position, Nosy Lava

Light bears 210° and is seen just NW of a corrugated iron

house, and the E extremity of the island bears 121°. The depths

are 11.9m in this position; the depths are 10m or less to within

a distance of 0.1 mile from all directions except seaward. In

this position there is adequate shelter from choppy seas; Nosy

Lava itself provides shelter from W winds, and the reefs fringing Nosy Lango provide shelter from seas from the SE. The entire area between the E shore of Nosy Lava and the mainland

may be regarded as a large roadstead affording anchorage; the

bottom, generally of sand and mud, is good holding ground.

An anchorage is available to ocean-going vessels off Salara, a

village on the shore of a bay indenting the N part of the E shore
164 Sector 11. Madagascar—Northwest Coast—Tanjon’i Bobaomby to Cap Sainte-Andre 

Pub. 171

of Nosy Lava. The bay is entered between the E extremity of

the island and a point, 15.2m high, nearly 2 miles NW. Pilier

Point is the extremity of a projection from the shore of the bay

in a position about 1 mile WNW of the E extremity of the island.

11.21 Directions.—Vessels approaching from the W should proceed through the outer reef chain and SW of Southwest Rocks

by steering 123° for the Nosy Soi, keeping the latter islet in

line with Tombee de Marotaolana. When the N extremity of

Nosy Lango bears 077°, course should be changed for that extremity to a position from which Nosy Soi bears 213°. A

course of 033° should then be made good, keeping Nosy Soi

bearing 213° astern until the SE end of Nosy Lava has been

rounded. Course should then be altered to the N, keeping Nosy

Soi open its own breadth E of the S extremity of Nosy Lava,

which leads through Nosy Lava Channel and midway between

the 7.9m shoal and the SE edge of the shoal bank extending SE

from the E extremity of Nosy Lava; Nosy Soi kept open of the

SE end of Nosy Lava leads clear of the latter bank. When the

NE extremity of Nosy Lava bears 310°, it should be steered

for; this 310° course leads about 0.4 mile outside the reef fringing the shore of the island. When Nosy Lava Light bears 210°,

it should be steered for, which leads to the recommended anchorage position in Nosy Lava Anchorage.

11.21 Caution.—Dangers in the approach to the bay, excepting

Nosy Lango and the rocks and shoals or islets near it, include a

shoal, with depths of 5.2m over its outer edge, that extends

about 0.7 mile SE from the E extremity of Nosy Lava. Its

steep-to outer edge is marked by heavy swirls. A coral shoal,

over which the least depth is 7.9m, lies about 1 mile SE of the

same point. The channel between these shoals is about 0.3 mile

wide, and has depths of 10 to 26m. A patch of 8.2m lies about

0.5 mile NE of the E extremity of Nosy Lava. A coral head,

over which the depth is 1.8m, lies about 0.6 mile NNW of Pilier Point, and at distances of 0.3 mile NNE and also ESE of this

projection are patches of 8.2 to 8.8m, respectively.

Ananalava to Majunga (Mahajanga)

11.22 Analalava (14°38'S., 47°46'E.) (World Port Index

No. 47380) is situated on the NW coast of Madagascar, on the

SE side of the entrance of the Riviere Loza SSW of Pointe Angadoka; the port is very small and consists of a small town, off

which anchorage is available.

11.22 Winds—Weather.—The temperature during the dry season

varies from 33° to 31°C; the temperature attains its maximum

value at about 41°C. Night temperatures are usually 2° lower

than day temperatures. In the rainy season the temperature varies from 29° to 31°C, but the heat is bearable. The rainy season

begins toward the end of November; maximum rainfall occurs

in January. The winds during the rainy season are variable, but

usually NW of SW.

11.22 Tides—Currents.—The currents attain considerable

strength. The outgoing ebb current of the Riviere Loza becomes stronger, and draws closer to the shore on which the

town stands, as the level of low tide is approached; a countercurrent then develops between the main outgoing current and

the shore, that sets back toward the entrance of the river and is

strong in comparison to the main outgoing current.

11.22 The flood current sets into the river uniformly along each

shore.

11.22 Depths—Limitations.—Passe du Nord (North Pass) lies between the mainland to the E and Nosy Lava, Nosy Lango, and

East Lango Bank to the W. The least depth in the fairway

through this channel is 9.4m.

11.22 Directions.—Vessels approaching from the N can, after

passing Nosi Shaba, proceed through Passe du Nord by steering 165°, keeping the 42m summit at the SW end of that island

bearing 345° astern, to a position from which Nosy Faohina

bears 188° and is just open E of Nosy Lango. A course of 188°

from this position leads between a 7.3m patch and a 8.2m coral

patch to a position from which the S extremity of Nosy Lava

bears 259°. When this position has been reached, the beacon

on the plateau SW of the town of Analalava should be steered

for, bearing 155°, to a position from which Analalava Light

bears 095° and is in line with Ballon Loza. A course of 095°

then leads to the anchorage.

11.23 Passe du Milieu (Middle Pass), leading ENE, is the

only marked channel of the three, and is considered the principal channel partly for that reason. The fairway is about 0.5 mile

wide between the 9.1m curves. Nosy Lango Reef and East

Lango Bank lie on the N side of the channel, and Nosy Faohina

Reef and Channel Bank lie on the S side. Nosy Soy, in the outer part of the channel, can be passed on either side; the directions available indicate that vessels can pass over the N end of

Channel Bank. The least depth in the channel is 7.2m.

11.23 Passe du Sud (South Pass), trending NE toward the town, has

Table Bank on its SE side and Nosy Faohina Reef on its NW

side. The fairway has a least width of about 0.5 mile and has a

least depth of 5.8m. The tidal currents in the channel are not as

strong as those in Passe du Milieu.

11.23 A shoal flat bordering the N point of the entrance of the

Riviere Loza was reported to be extending seaward. This point

should not be approached closer than 0.7 mile.

11.23 Aspect.—Pic Loza (Ballon Loza) (14°38'S., 47°49'E.), a

summit 221m high, rises E of the entrance of the river.

11.23 Faux Loza (14°40'S., 47°47'E.), a peak 140m high, rises

SSW of Pic Loza; the latter has a rounded S extremity as does a

plateau behind the town; both terminate S in a large rift.

11.23 Tombee de Marotaolana (14°43'S., 47°44'E.), a summit

259m high, rises SSW of False Loza and nearly 6.5 miles S of

the town. A plateau, 49m high, rises close to the coast in a position about 2.5 miles SSW of the town.

11.23 Sommet Antsatramahavecon (14°29'S., 47°48'E.), another

useful mark in this vicinity, rises in a gentle, wooded slope to

an elevation of 332m.

11.23 The Residence is a large building of brick and stone overlooking the town. A white house with a red roof, in a position

0.4 mile NNW of Analalava Light, is of use in establishing a

course through a portion of Passe du Lilieu.

11.23 The S extremity of Nosy Lango Reef is marked by a beacon.

11.23 The N edge of Nosy Faohina Reef is marked by a beacon.

11.23 D’Andronjana Range is established by two beacons. The

front beacon stands on the N shore of the estuary of the Riviere

Loza in a position about 2.3 miles NNW of Analalava Light.

The rear beacon stands about 1.8 miles ENE of the beacon.

These beacons, in line bearing 068.75°, lead through a portion

of Middle Pass.

11.23 Table Range is established by two beacons. The front beacon
Sector 11. Madagascar—Northwest Coast—Tanjon’i Bobaomby to Cap Sainte-Andre 165

Pub. 171

stands on the 49m plateau SSW of the town. The rear beacon

stands about 5 miles ESE of the front beacon. These beacons,

in line and bearing 120°, lead through a channel that bypasses

the least depth of 7.2m in that channel.

11.23 A range useful in taking up the recommended anchorage position is established by two beacons, each supporting a board

pointed in black and white checkers. The front beacon is on the

S side of the estuary in a position about 0.9 mile N of Analalava Light. The rear beacon, nearly 2 miles NE of the front beacon, is on the N side of the river. These beacons are in line

bearing 047°. The beacons are difficult to identify, especially

in the early morning, the rear one only being discernible when

a vessel arrives at the anchorage.

11.23 Signals.—There is a signal station, with which vessels can

communicate by day, at Analalava. Signals indicating the locality threatened by a cyclone are displayed.

11.23 Directions.—Vessels should pass about 0.3 mile S of Nosy

Soi. When the highest cluster of trees on Nosy Eaohina bears

088°, and is in line with Ballon Loza, course should be

changed to 088° to a position from which Mount Antsatramahavelona bears 047° and is open E of Nosy Lango. The beacons forming E’Andronjana Range should then be steered for

bearing 068.75°. This course leads between the beacon on the

S end of Nosy Lango Reef and the beacon on the N end of

Nosy Faohina Reef. When Analalava Light bears 095° and is in

line with Ballon Loza, the course should be changed to 095°

for the anchorage. This course leads over shoals off the S end

of Channel Bank in depths of 7 to 7.9m. 

Anchorage.—The anchorages off Analalava lie between the

deep gully in the entrance of the Riviere Loza, and the steep-to

bank which forms the LW mark off the town. In the vicinity of

the deep gully, the bottom is sand, and the eddies cause vessels

anchored there to swing continually. There is a countercurrent

in the gully, which becomes more pronounced the farther S a

vessel lies in it.

11.23 Anchorage can be obtained with the anchorage beacons in

line bearing 047°, and Analalava Light in line with Pic Loza,

bearing 095°. This berth is inconvenient, because of the distance offshore, and the strong currents; a better one is farther

NE, with the same beacons in line and 0.2 mile WSW of the

head of the pier, in 25.6m, 0.1 mile from the 10m curve.

11.23 Smaller vessels can anchor 0.1 mile off the head of the pier,

in 18m, sand, with the anchorage beacons in line bearing 047°,

and Analalava Light bearing 129°; if a vessels draft permits,

she should anchor closer to the pier, although the eddies, as

stated above, will cause a continuous swing. 

11.23 Ocean-going vessels can approach this estuary by way of

channels trending generally S, ENE, and NE, respectively, between off-lying islets and dangers, and take anchorage off the

town of Analalava, which stands on the S bank of the estuary.

Anchorage can also be taken at places farther in.

11.23 Vessels can proceed through Passe de Milieu at night by observing the white and red sectors of Analalava Light; by so doing they will remain in depths of 7m or more. 

11.23 The entrance of the Riviere Loza presents no difficulties, and

a vessel should proceed in mid-channel. The steep-to coastal

bank on the SE side of the entrance is easily distinguished.

11.23 There is anchorage 2 miles within the entrance of the Riviere

Loza in Baie de Bois Sacre, on the S side, in 19m, mud and

sand, 0.1 mile off the mangroves; it is indicated by the intersection of the alignments of two pairs of beacons, bearing 060°

and 125°. This anchorage is better sheltered than that off

Analalava and is used by vessels loading logs, which are floated down river.

11.23 Directions.—When approaching Pointe Loza, the projecting

point, covered with dense jungle, at the sharp bend 4 miles

within the entrance, the east bank of the river should be kept

aboard and the point rounded closely to avoid the sand bank

which fills the bay N of the point. Then a mid-channel course

leads to Lagune Panantsopa, about 9 miles above the entrance

of the river; this lagoon has been only cursorily examined, and

there are some dangerous shoals. A vessel may anchor, in 10m

about 0.1 mile from the village of Panantsopa, after having

passed over depths of 5m.

11.24 Helodranon’i Nirinda (Baie Narinda), on the S side of

the approaches to Analalava, is entered between Pointe Maromony (14°39'S., 47°27'E.), 8 miles SW of the SW extremity

of Nosy Lava, and Pointe Antsamanara, 13 miles E.

11.24 In 1956, a S current into Baie Narinda was observed at a velocity of about 1 knot.

11.24 White cliffs on the coast in a position about 9 miles SW of

Pointe Maromony are a mark for the approach to Baie Narinda

from the SW. Pointe Maromony is marked on its E side by

some red cliffs. Pointe Komatsana, 3.5 miles SE of Pointe Maromony, can be identified by some white cliffs at its extremity.

Tombee de Marotaolana rises about 3.5 miles ESE of Lohatanjon’i Maroangolo (Pointe Antsamanana). Ankalafa, a village

3.2 miles SSW of Pointe Komatsana, is hidden by trees, but

can be identified by the boats lying on the beach. There are

some white cliffs 9 miles SW of Pointe Vatonomby, a promontary, which lies 3.7 miles SE of Ankalafa. The Riviere Atsinjo

flows into the SE side of the bay, 18 miles SSW of Pointe Antsamanara.

11.24 A lighted buoy is moored 2.2 miles E of Pointe Komatsana;

it marks a swell guage.

11.24 The only anchorage used in Baie Narinda is off the mouth of

the Riviere Atsinjo, with the S entrance point of the river bearing between 085° and 095°, distant 4 miles.

11.25 Lohatanjon’i Marolahy (Pointe Marolahy), about 16

miles SW of Lohatanjon’i Maromony (Pointe Maromony),

slopes down to a circular red cliff, which is conspicuous from

the S. A conspicuous parasol tree stands on the summit of a

rounded plateau, 65m high, in a position near the coast about 2

miles NE of Pointe Marolahy.

11.25 Baie de Moramba is entered between Pointe Marolahy and

Pointe Majambo, about 5.5 miles S. Two bare islets, one close

off it and the other about 0.3 mile SSW of it, are useful marks

for Pointe Majambo.

11.25 At Baie de Moramba, spring tides rise 3.2m and neap tides

rise 2.6m.

11.25 A bar extends S across the entire bay from a position on the

N shore about 2 miles SE of Pointe Marolahy. The least depth

on the bar is 2.7m. The channel leading into the inner part of

the bay narrows to a width of about 0.8 miles at a distance of 2

miles within the bar. Rocky tree-covered islets lie off the N

shore at this narrow place. Ile du Goulet is the largest and

southeasternmost of these islets.

11.25 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken in the bay outside the
166 Sector 11. Madagascar—Northwest Coast—Tanjon’i Bobaomby to Cap Sainte-Andre 

Pub. 171

bar, in 11 to 14m, over a bottom of mud. In the recommended

position the S extremity of Ile du Goulet bears 072°. Anchorage can be taken closer in, with better holding ground, in a

depth of 8m.

11.25 In the inner part of the bay there is good shelter for small

vessels. Vessels drawing 4.6m may enter at or near HW, and

anchor in a position about 0.2 mile SE of Ile du Goulet in 9.1m.

The S extremity of Ilot du Goulet, bearing 072°, leads across

the bar in a least depth of 4.9m.

11.25 Directions.—Vessels approaching from the N should steer

207° for Pointe de Marolahy to a position from which Nosy

Soi bears 075° and is in line with Pointe Maromony. A vessel

in this position is S of Diamond Bank. Then a course of 248°,

keeping Pointe Maromony bearing 068° astern, should be

made good to a position from which Pointe de Marolahy bears

186°. It is necessary to round the latter point at a distance of at

least 1 mile, safely outside the reef fringing that point.

11.25 The S extremity of Ile du Goulet, kept bearing 072°, leads

across the bar in a least depth of 4m. Buoys should be placed to

mark the fairway before proceeding into the inner part of the bay.

11.26 Helodranon’i Mahajamba (Baie de Mahajamba) is entered between Lohatanjon’ Ambozomena (Pointe Manakara)

(15°12'S., 47°02'E.) and Pointe Ambararata.

11.26 Depths—Limitations.—The extensive inner area within the

narrows has not been completely surveyed.

11.26 Ocean-going vessels can anchor almost anywhere in the outer part of the bay between the entrance and the narrows.

11.26 Aspect.—Ambararata Plateau, which rises near Pointe Ambararata, is on the W side of the entrance of Baie de Mahajamba; two circular red cliffs of the plateau are conspicuous. When

the sun shines on the cliffs, two large red patches are visible;

the NE patch is larger and darker than the other. When the sun

is behind the land, a red watercourse formed by the torrent in

the W circle of cliffs is visible when bearing more than 165°.

11.26 Mount Masiaposa, on the E side of the entrance, appears as a

wooded plateau; Fausse Table, NE of Mount Masiaposa, has a

similar appearance. Pointe Ambararata is easily distinguished

by the contrast between its regular form and the rugged outlines of Ambohitsambo and Antranonaombi, summits 8 and 10

miles SSW, respectively, of the point.

11.26 Pain du Sucre, a tree-covered hill, 114m high and named according to its shape, rises about 2.5 miles WSW of Pointe Ambararata.

11.26 Pointe Manakara has close S of it a white patch that is conspicuous when the afternoon sun shines on it. This is a useful

mark for vessels passing between Toraka Anelanelana (Banc

Intermediare) and Toraka Thetys (Banc de la Thetis).

11.26 Directions.—Vessels approaching from the NE can proceed

along the coast in depths of 9.1 to 10m, but must head seaward

before reaching a position near Pointe Ambatomifoko so as to

clear the shoals off that point, the depths are 9m or more at distances of 4.5 miles from the point. After having cleared these

shoals, the coast may again be approached; depths of 14.6 to

20.1m will be found at distances of 1 mile offshore.

11.26 Vessels approaching from the NW can proceed through

Grand Pass by making good a course of 135° for Pointe Ambararata. When a position has been reached from which Sommet Masiaposa bears 113°, course should be changed to 113°

so as to pass NE of Banc de la Lyra. Course can be altered to

the S to enter the bay when a position has been reached from

which Pointe Ambasilava bears 180°.

11.26 Vessels approaching the bay from the SW should pass W and N

of Banc de la Lyra; Sommet Masiaposa should then be brought to

bear 113° and the directions given in the preceding paragraph followed into the bay. The shortest route from the SW is by way of

West Channel, between Banc Intermediaire and Banc de la Thetis.

A vessel can pass safely through this channel by steering 096° for

Sommet Masiaposa, keeping that summit in range with the white

mark close S of Pointe Ambozomena to a position from which

Pain de Sucre bears 229°, when course can be altered to the S as

before to enter the bay.

11.26 It should be noted that the channel between Banc de la Lyra

and Banc Intermediare should be avoided. 

11.26 Local knowledge is essential for entering Baie de Mahajamba.

Anchorage.—Anchorage, with good shelter from SE winds,

can be taken NW of Pointe Ambararata; in the recommended

position the point bears 125° and Pain du Sucre bears 219°; the

depths here are 12 to 14m, and the bottom is mud.

11.26 Anchorage can also be taken SE of Pointe Ambararata, with

shelter from NW winds; in the recommended position in this

direction the point bears 311° and the summit of the highest

sand dune between that point and Pointe Ampasilava, about 1.5

miles SSE of Pointe Ambararata, bears 256°; the depths in and

near this position are 14m, and the bottom is mud.

11.26 During the winter months, a desirable anchorage, with shelter from NW winds and swell, can be taken off the village of

Ambenja, nearly 4.5 miles S of Pointe Ambararata; in the recommended position, Pointe Ampasilava bears 343°, and a large

sand dune at the entrance of the Riviere Ambenja bears 240°. 

11.26 This position is about 0.3 mile from the outer edge of the

shoal fringing this side of the bay; the depths are 12 to 14m.

11.26 Anchorage can also be taken off the village of Mangoaka, on

the E shore of the bay, about 3 miles SSE of Pointe Manakara.

The depths are 10 to 11m, and the bottom is mud, in a position

with Pointe Ambolibozo, about 2 miles S of Pointe Manakara,

bearing 343° and in range with Pointe Amboaniho, about 0.8

mile SSE of Pointe Ambolibozo; in this position Mount Masiaposa bears 064°.

11.26 There is well-sheltered anchorage for small vessels just inside the basin, in a depth of 8.5m, good holding ground, off a

cove on the W side of Tombee Manja, a point, 77.1m high, 1.5

miles E of Nosy Longany. 

11.26 The anchorage is with Tombee Manja bearing 065° and a

daymark on the trunk of a baobab tree bearing 330°. The 10m

line extends farther S than is shown on the chart. The tidal currents are strong, the incoming current running SSE and the outgoing current running NNW.

11.27 Helodrano Baly (Baie de Baly) is WSW of Baie de

Mahajamba. Before describing this coast and its ports, it may

be convenient to consider the shoals of the outer reef chain

abreast this section, and the various passes through which the

coast may be approached. 

11.27 Mariners are advised to use caution when in the vicinity of

the outer banks and shoals.

11.27 Directions.—A vessel entering Baie de Baly during the

flood tidal current must guard against being set towards the

shoals off Pointe Sada. She should steer for the 66.5m hill, 7
Sector 11. Madagascar—Northwest Coast—Tanjon’i Bobaomby to Cap Sainte-Andre 167

Pub. 171

miles S of Cap Amparafaka, bearing 209°, until Pointe Sada

Bears 090°, when course should be altered SSE to put the conspicuous tree, on the E side of the head of the bay; ahead, bearing 161°, which bearing leads up the fairway; when Marotia

(16°02'S., 45°23'E.) bears less than 100°, the depths decrease

quickly towards the head of the bay.

11.27 The Riviere Tsimanenoakoho flows into the sea SW of

Pointe Ambararata. A bar, over which the depth is 2.5m, extends across the entrance of the river, but within the bar is a

good channel with depths of 4.9 to 10.1m. 

11.27 The village of Marasokoa stands on the S side of the entrance of the river. Spring tides rise 4.2m and neap tides rise

3.2m at Marasokoa. 

11.27 Coastal vessels enter the river at HW and find good shelter

from W winds off the village. 

Majunga (Mahajanga) (15°42'S., 46°19'E.)

World Port Index No. 47400

11.28 Majunga (Mahajanga) is situated just within the entrance of Helodrano Bombetoka (Baie de Bombetoka) on its E

side, the port is very small and consists of a town and a roadstead off the town where ocean-going vessels can anchor.

11.28 Winds—Weather.—During the dry season, the mornings at

the anchorage off Majunga are usually calm. In the afternoon a

sea breeze often raises a choppy sea.

11.28 Tides—Currents.—In the entrance of Baie de Bombetoka,

the tidal currents are always strong. During the rainy season,

the outgoing current can attain a velocity of 4 knots, and the incoming current, at neaps, sometimes becomes imperceptible.

Within the 5m curve, the tidal currents decrease rapidly in

strength. At the anchorage for large vessels off Majunga the

flood current attains a velocity of 2 knots, and the ebb current a

velocity of 3 knots.

11.28 The ebb current from the Riviere d’Amparihingidro, the outlet of which lies about 1.3 miles E of Majunga, at times combines with the ebb current from the inner bay to produce a

cross-current that may swing a vessel at anchor to a position at

right angles to nearby vessels. The closer a vessel can approach

the shore the less the currents will be felt.

11.28 It is better to sail after the incoming current, as there is little

room for turning a vessel.

11.28 During the outgoing current, it is not unusual to see numerous red or discolored patches of water in the approach channels, while the water over the shoals and banks in the

neighborhood appears much clearer; this is caused by the muddy water flowing into the sea from the river. Deposits of mud

have been noticed in certain parts of the channels.

11.28 Between Baie de Bombetoka and Cap Amparafaka the current

sets generally W to the SSW in calm weather; with a light WNW

to NW breeze it has a rate from 0.25 to 0.5 knot. With a WSW

breeze the current turns toward S but is very weak.

11.28 Depths—Limitations.—Vessels can enter day or night. The

maximum draft allowed is 10m.

11.28 It was reported (1994) that the harbor is subject to severe

shoaling.

11.28 Aspect.—Observers approaching from the N will probably

first make out Massif Katsepe, the highest land in the vicinity

of the entrance of Baie de Bombetoka.

11.28 Point Katsepe is about 52m high; a conspicuous white patch,

resembling a sail, on the point faces seaward, and is detached

form the red cliffs of Katsepe to the W. Point Katsepe Light is

occasionally extinguished for up to 2 hours.

11.28 Nosy Makamby, an islet lying about 18 miles W of Massif

Katsepe and about 3 miles offshore, is a useful mark to vessels

approaching Baie de Bombetoka from the W.

Pointe Anorombato (15°43'S., 46°18'E.), the E entrance

point of the bay, is marked by a conspicuous radio tower. The

radio tower can be seen at 20 nautical miles during the daylight, but it is not lighted. A meteorology pylon stand near Anorombato Light.

11.28 Massif de Kandrany, a mark useful to vessels approaching

from the NE, rises about 3.5 miles S of Massif Katsepe; the

former has a well-defined summit.

Range beacons stand near Pointe Besistka (15°50'S.,

46°22'E.), on the S side of the peninsula projecting W from the

E shore of the bay to form the narrows. The front beacon is

known locally as Jovany Beacon, and is 6.1m high, standing on

Pointe Besistka. This point is nearly 3 miles E of Poinet

Antanandava (15°50'S., 46°19'E.). The rear beacon, 11.9m

high, stands on the summit of the peninsula in a position about

0.9 mile E of the front beacon. This rear beacon is visible from

the anchorage off Majunga and also from seaward, according

to a report; it should not be confused with either Nosy Beza

Beacon (15°46'S., 46°20'E.) or with Ambatomalama Beacon

(15°48'S., 46°22'E.). The above beacons in line lead toward an

anchorage area off the S side of the peninsula forming the narrows; one such area is Boanamary. 

11.28 Pilotage.—If requested at least 12 hours in advance by radio, the harbormaster will board a vessel 3.5 miles NW of Katsepe Light and pilot the vessel to the anchorage. Otherwise, the

harbormaster indicates anchor berths by radio.

11.28 There is said to be a set seaward during a falling tide.

Port Majunga from E
168 Sector 11. Madagascar—Northwest Coast—Tanjon’i Bobaomby to Cap Sainte-Andre 

Pub. 171

11.28 Signals.—There is a signal station on Pointe de Sable

(15°44'S., 46°18'E.); storm signals are shown.

11.28 Anchorage.—Vessels proceeding to the anchorage off Majunga should anchor from 0.3 to 0.4 mile S or SW of Pointe de

Sable, according to bearings indicated on the chart, in about

9m. Small vessels with local knowledge can anchor farther E,

in 5m.

11.28 A vessel of deep draft anchored in position 15°43'34"S,

46°17'42"E, with Point Katsepe Light bearing 279°, the radio

mast bearing 033°, and Ambatomalaba Beacon bearing 134°.

The hard mud provided good holding ground. The depth was

reported to be about 13m. This anchorage was reported to be

the best one for deep draft vessels.

11.28 Vessels of moderate draft wishing to anchor farther up the

bay, off Pointe Boanamary, should approach the anchorage area with the range beacons in line and anchor when the factory

chimney on Pointe Boanamary bears 037°, in about 8m; the

holding ground is poor in the rainy season, from December to

April. 

11.28 Only small vessels with local knowledge can anchor farther

in the bay. The bottom of hard mud is good for holding; during

the rainy season, the very violent ebb current necessitates a

careful watch of the hold of the anchor.

11.28 Caution.—The harbor is subject to severe shoaling.

11.28 It is reported that Nosy Beza Beacon and Ambatomalama

Beacon, particularly the latter, are difficult to make out from

November to January during the hours of morning when the

sun is behind them. The Nosy Beza range beacon is difficult to

see as it blends in with the background vegetation.

11.28 Banc du Narcissus fronts the entrance to Baie de Bombetoka. It extends about 10.5 miles N of Pointe Anorombato. Four

shoals, with depths of 5.5m and less, lie on this bank. Narcissus

Bank has a tendency to grow bigger. It extends towards the SW

and W, spilling over into the NW channel. In these waters, the

depths would appear to be less than charted.

11.28 Baie Boina affords anchorage to small vessels with local

knowledge, but the approach is encumbered with reefs and

shoals, and the channel is difficult to follow because of a lack

of marks. 

11.28 The only recognizable objects are Nosy Makamby and a

conspiuous clump of trees at the N end of Nosy Antseranandava, on the W side of the entrance. 

The approach channel, which has a least depth of 4.9m, leads

SE, then SW close to the E shore. The dangers are difficult to

see because of the muddy water.

Majunga (Mahajanga) to Helodrano Bay (Baie

de Baly)

11.29 Nosy Makamby (15°43'S., 45°54'E.) lies 5.5 miles

NW of the W entrance point of Helodrano Boina (Baie Boina)

from a distance, it appears to be of a reddish color and the only

good landmark. The islet consists of a long narrow plateau, terminating N in a gentle slope and falling steeply on its E and W

sides.

11.29 Good anchorage is obtainable, in 10m, mud, with the N extremity of Nosy Makamby bearing 309°, distant 1.5 miles; this

anchorage affords good shelter from SW winds.

11.29 Tanjona Tanjo (Cap Tanjona), one of the few landmarks on

this coast, is fringed with white rocks and scored horizontally

with white streaks; it has a flat summit covered with trees. The

land within the cape is a plateau with a cleft in it, which makes

it appear from a distance as two islands close together. From

the summit of Cap Tanjo, at its extremity, the cape slopes gently S at first and then declines suddenly. A chain of small hills

prolongs the S end.

11.29 Vessels can anchor, according to draft, about midway between Nosy Makamby and Cap Tanjo; the depths decrease uniformly.

11.29 Helodrano Marambitsy (Baie de Marambitsy) is entered between a point about 5.8 miles SW of Cap Tanjo and a point

about 8.5 miles farther SSW. The entrance is almost blocked by

a shallow coral reef extending 5.5 miles offshore; the reef is

steep-to at its W edge, and is not marked by any change in color of the water. A narrow and tortuous channel leads into the

bay, which is well-sheltered, but it should only be entered by

small vessels with local knowledge.

11.29 Caution.—Off this part of the coast, at certain seasons and

in calm weather, the sea is often found covered for miles with a

yellowish oily substance which, under the action of a breeze,

breaks up into large patches; from the change thus caused in

color of the water, this might be thought to indicate the presence of shoals. The cause, however, is the diffusion of the seed

of the mangrove washed out of the various rivers; this substance is found to have a strong scent resembling linseed. 

11.30 Helodrano Baly (Baie de Baly) (16°00'S., 45°17'E.)

(World Port Index No. 47410) is entered between Pointe Sada

(15°59'S., 45°20'E.) and Cap Amparafaka, 5.5 miles NW, and

affords good shelter.

11.30 Tides—Currents.—The tidal currents in Baie de Baly attain

a velocity of 2 knots at springs.

11.30 Depths—Limitations.—The depths in the fairway leading

through the entrance of Baie de Baly are 10.9 to 16.4m; the

depths are 9.1m or more as far as a position within the bay

from which Tanjona Marotia (Pointe Marotia), about 4 miles

SE of Tanjona Sada (Pointe Sada), bears 100° or less. The bay

within this bearing is comparatively shallow.

11.30 Aspect.—Pointe Sada is 43m high and rises to two hills,

which terminate in white cliffs on their W side.

11.30 Cap Amparafaka, 28.3m high, consists of red cliffs which

are conspicuous from the W.

11.30 On the E side of the head of Baie de Baly are some red cliffs,

crowned by trees, which break the uniform screen of mangroves bordering the head of the bay; one of these trees is conspicuous and stands at an elevation of 31.4m.

11.30 Anchorage.—Vessels can anchor, in 12 to 14m, stiff mud,

near the middle of the fairway, with the village of Marotia on

Pointe Marotia, bearing 105°, or, in about 8.8m, 4 miles W of

the village. 

11.30 These anchorages are well-sheltered from W or NW winds,

which blow during the day in the dry season.

11.30 Small vessels may anchor, in 6m, off the village of Baly in

the channel that extends S from a position abreast Pointe Tranofotaka, which lies about 7.3 miles S of Pointe Amparafaka.

11.30 The Riviere de Vilamatsa flows into the sea E of Cap

SaintAndre and may be identified by two low white sand dunes

surmounted by clumps of casuarina trees. 

11.30 A bank of sand and coral, over which the sea almost always

breaks and which is steep-to at its northern edge, extends 2.5
Sector 11. Madagascar—Northwest Coast—Tanjon’i Bobaomby to Cap Sainte-Andre 169

Pub. 171

miles from the river's mouth.

11.30 Caution.—A shoal, with a least depth of 4.3m, lies on the E

side of the fairway, 2 miles W of Pointe Sada; there is an 8.8m

shoal patch 2.5 miles WSW of the point.

11.30 The head of the bay is encumbered with banks and shoals

which dry.
171

Pub. 171

12. 

Madagascar—West Coast—Cap Saint-Andre to Tanjon’i Vohimena

12.0Additional chart coverage may be found in NGA/DLIS Catalog of Maps, Charts, and Related Products (Unlimited Distribution).

SECTOR 12 — CHART INFORMATION
173

Pub. 171

SECTOR 12 

MADAGASCAR—WEST COAST—CAP SAINT-ANDRE TO TANJON’I VOHIMENA

12.0 Plan.—This sector describes the W coast of Madagascar

from Cap Saint-Andre S to Tanjon’i Vohimena (Cap Sainte

Marie) (25°35'S., 45°08'E.), a distance of nearly 600 miles; also described are the off-lying islands of Nosy Juan de Nova

and Ile Europa.

Nosy Juan de Nova

12.1 Nosy Juan de Nova (Ile Juan de Nova) (17°03'S.,

42°42'E.) is low, sandy, and covered with trees, mainly casuarina and coconut. An abandoned meteorological station with a

white roof stands on the SW side of the island. 

12.1 A light is shown from the W side of the island. An aero radiobeacon stands near the N coast of the island midway between Pointe Quest and Pointe Est. There is a ruined wharf,

marked by a white mast, 0.2 mile NW of the beacon.

12.1 Tides—Currents.—The currents in the vicinity of Nosy

Juan de Nova are strong and irregular, and extreme caution

must be exercised.

12.1 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be obtained 2 miles NE of the

wharf, in about 15m, sand and coral patches, with the flagstaff

bearing 215°, distant 2.2 miles. The anchorage has depths over

10m within a radius of 0.2 mile from the anchorage. There is

also anchorage 2 miles N of the wharf, in a depth of about

8.5m. A small vessel can obtain good anchorage, in 10m, with

the flagstaff bearing 194°, distant 1.2 miles.

12.1 Before letting go the anchor, it is advisable to look carefully

to make sure the anchor will not come to rest on a coral head;

these heads can usually be seen.

12.1 Directions.—The E and W ends of Nosy Juan de Nova

should not be approached closer than 4 miles.

12.1 Vessels should approach the anchorages from the N, and

only during the hours of daylight.

12.1 Caution.—It has been reported that Nosy Juan de Nova lies

3.7 miles of its charted position. The surrounding reef extends

farther E than shown.

Ile Europa

12.2 Ile Europa (22°20'S., 40°21'E.), which is very difficult to distinguish at night, is composed chiefly of sand, with

low hummocks in places. It is partly covered with bushes, and

there are some trees, attaining an elevation of 24.4m. The W

side of the island is rocky, the E side consists of low steep

cliffs, the S side is low, and the limits of its fringing reef are little known; as it is usually a lee shore, it should be given a wide

berth. An aero radiobeacon stands near the W side of the island. A stranded wreck lies on the SE point of the island.

Pointe Nord-Est, the NE extremity of Ile Europa, lies on the E

side of the entrance of a lagoon; there is a conspicuous hummock on the point. A meteorological station, with various

structures close to it, is located 0.5 mile ENE of Point NordOuest. 

12.2 Tides—Currents.—In the vicinity of Ile Europa, the current

is variable in direction and rate; frequent observations are necessary to check the vessel’s position.

12.2 Anchorage.—There is no secure anchorage off Ile Europa.

It is possible to anchor near the edge of the reef fringing the N

coast of the island, sheltered from a S swell, in 20m, but there

is no room to swing in the event of a shift of wind, and the

holding ground is very poor. This anchorage is approached

with the flagstaff bearing 180°. A vessel has anchored, in 15m,

with Pointe Nord-Est bearing 122°, distant 0.5 mile. These anchorages are precarious, and a vessel using them should be prepared to weigh anchor at any time.

Cap Saint-Andre to Mainterano

12.3 Cap Saint-Andre (Tanjona Vilanandro) (16°12'S.,

44°28'E.), the NW extremity of Madagascar, consists of level

sandy ground, covered with palm trees and other vegetation,

and terminating in a low sandy point. The cape is very difficult

to identify. Care must be taken not to mistake the isolated casuarina tree S of the cape for the clump of casuarina trees S of

the village of Bevilana.

12.3 The W coast of Madagascar between Cap Saint-Andre and

Cap Sainte-Marie, the S extremity of the island, has few harbors and is sparsely populated; the only ports are Maintirano,

Morondava, Morombe, and Toliara.

12.3 Tides—Currents.—The current most frequently sets NE off

Banc de Parcel. In the neighborhood of Nosy Vao, the currents

are variable; eddies are produced by the configuration of the

shoals.

12.3 Between Ile Chesterfield and Cap Saint Andre, the flood tidal current sets S and the ebb tidal current sets N. Occasionally,

an ocean current will overcome the tidal current, and the resultant flow will be steady in one direction for some time.

12.3 Observations of the currents made in July, August, and September between Ile Chesterfield and Beravina showed a maximum rate of 1.25 knots; the ebb currents set in a direction with

a W component and the flood currents set in a direction with an

E component. The currents attained a maximum rate 4 hours

after HW and 3 hours before HW.

12.3 Tidal currents between and around the Iles Barren are strong

and must be guarded against. North of Pointe Barrow, there

does not appear to be much current. A British naval vessel experienced a current, with a rate of 1 knot, setting towards the

land in positions E of Pointe Barrow and off the outlet of the

Riviere Menarandra, which flows into the sea over Banc

del’Etoile. The outlet of this river is NW of Cap Sainte Marie.

12.3 Cap Saint-Andre is the point of separation of the winds; the

prevailing wind N of the cape is NW, and that S of the cape is

SW. When these directions are reversed, it is found that stormy

weather follows. In the vicinity of Nosy Hao, the flood current

sets NNW at a rate of 0.5 knot.

12.3 In a position N of Baie De Fanemotra, a S current is often

produced by N winds. As a rule, the current follows the direction of the wind, and at times even precedes its changes.
174 Sector 12. Madagascar—West Coast—Cap Saint-Andre to Tanjon’i Vohimena 

Pub. 171

12.3 The tidal currents are fairly strong in the vicinity of Nosi Ve.

The flood current sets NNW and the ebb current sets SSE.

They attain a maximum rate of 1 knot, about 3 hours before

and 3 hours after HW.

12.3 Caution.—Vessels should not remain in the vicinity of Cap

Saint-Andre during the season of squalls, from November to

April, as they will be exposed to great danger of a bank studded

with shoal heads. The sea is heavy and the holding ground of

coral is poor.

12.3 Vessels rounding Cap Saint-Andre should not approach it

closer than 15 miles. Those approaching from the S should not

alter course to round the cape until the village of Bevilana

bears more than 113°. A sunken landing craft containing explosives lies 9 miles WNW of Cap Saint-Andre.

12.3 Banc de Goraka Pracel, the continuation of the coastal bank,

extends S from Cap Saint-Andre to approximately 19°S. Farther S, where the coastal bank is narrower, the depths are too irregular for soundings to indicate proximity to the coast;

caution is necessary when approaching the bank, as many

small reefs lie on it up to 30 miles offshore.

12.4 Mozambique Channel, which separates the W coast

of Madagascar from the E coast of Africa is about 225 miles

wide at its narrowest part W of Cap Saint-Andre. Depths in the

canal are usually great outside the coastal banks.

12.4 Caution.—The partially submerged dangerous wreck of the

drill rig Gatto Selvatico lies in position 15°53'S, 44°31'E. The

wreck is reported (1977) to be unmarked by navigational aids.

12.4 Bassas da India (Basse de Judie) (21°27'S., 39°41'E.) is a

coral atol,l about 6 miles in diameter, enclosing a shallow lagoon. It rises steeply from ocean depths and mostly dries. The

sea breaks heavily over the reef and can be seen in clear weather. 

12.4 In 1974, two wrecks, ships of 2,500 grt, lay stranded on the

SW side of the reef.

12.4 Small rocks, 2.1m to 3m high, lie on the N and E sides of the

atoll; the W and S sides dry 1.2m. The reef is completely covered from 3 hours before to 3 hours after HW. There is a narrow boat passage at LW on the N side of the reef.

12.4 Currents in the vicinity of the atoll appear to be strong; ships

should not approach Bassas da India without a good fix.

12.4 Caution.—It has been reported (1993) that the W and SW

extremities of the reef and the two stranded wrecks lie about

2.5 miles SW of their charted positions.

12.4 Banc de Pracel (Banc de Toraka) extends from a position

abreast Cap Saint-Andre to 19°00'S. The width of the area has

not been determined, but dangers as far as 30 miles offshore

have been reported.

12.4 A vessel that spent 5 months in the vicinity of Banc de Pracel

reported that dangers were seldom met, with where the color of

the water suggested their presence; sounding constantly revealed dangers that the lookout had not seen.

12.4 Unless vessels proceeding through Mozambique Channel are

bound to some part of the coast within the bank, they should

keep outside it altogether. If soundings show that they are over

its W or outer edge, they should at once haul to the W into

deeper water.

12.4 A wreck, dangerous to navigation, was reported to lie 4.2

miles W of Vulture Rock (16°13'S., 44°20'E.).

12.5 Ile Chesterfield (16°19'S., 43°58'E.) is a reddish

bank of sand, with a chain of dark rocks on its W part and a

large black rock, 0.3m high, in its middle. It should be given a

wide berth, particularly at night.

12.5 Vessels can anchor in a position about 1 mile NW of Ile

Chesterfield. The depths are 15 to 18m, and the bottom of sand

and shells is moderately good holding ground.

12.5 Nosy Vao (17°29'S., 43°45'E.), a low and dark-colored islet,

has a beach of white sand, and has been seen in clear weather

at a distance of 10 miles. Anchorage can be taken in a position

N of Nosy Vao, in 14m; a vessel anchored there is well-sheltered from winds from the S and W.

12.5 The Riviere Marotondro (16°47'S, 44°20'E) has cliffs located 5 miles N of its mouth; the upper part of the cliffs is red

while the lower part is white.

12.5 Anchorage, with good holding ground, is available all along

the coast, between Cap Saint-Andre and Tambohorano

(17°30'S., 43°57'E.), but the presence of off-lying dangers

makes approach difficult.

12.5 Iles Barren lie on the S part of Banc de Pracel. All the islands

appear as a strip of white sand, surmounted by a dark knoll,

and can be seen at a distance of 10 to 12 miles. 

12.5 The part of Banc de Pracel, on which Iles Barren lie, is considered very dangerous; many of the shoals on it do not show in

good weather.

12.5 Anchorage can be taken off Nosy Maroantaly (18°25'S,

43°55'E), with the NW extremity of Nosy Maroantaly bearing

219° and the SW extremity of Recif Croissant (Hrrandriaka

Croissant) (18°22'S., 43°55'E.) bearing 335°. The depth in this

position is 13m, and the bottom, of mud, is good holding

ground. This anchorage is always to be preferred in bad weather to the open roadstead off Maintirano.

12.6 Nosy Androta (18°29'S., 43°48'E.) has at its highest

part a clump of casuarina trees, with their tops at an elevation

of 35m, that have often been mistaken for a vessel under sail.

12.6 Nosy Lava (18°35'S., 43°45'E.) is the southernmost and

largest of the Iles Barren. Anchorage can be taken off Nosy Lava. In the recommended position, the E extremity of the island

bears 180° and the N extremity of Nosy Andrano (18°33'S.,

43°51'E.) bears 294°. The depth here is 13m, sand.

12.6 The Riviere Sambao flows into the sea on either side of Nosy

Voalavo. Vessels can obtain anchorage about 5 miles W of the

mouth of the Riviere Sambao, in 11m.

12.6 Helodrano Ankoritiky (Baie de Koraraika) is entered between a point at the mouth of Riviere Manabbo Maty

(17°36'S., 43°56'E.) and Cap Bepoaka (Tanjona Mandatsakoro). 

12.6 Anchorage can be obtained in Baie de Koraraika NW of Cap

Bepoaka.

12.6 Directions.—There are two principal channels by which a

vessel may pass through Iles Barren.

12.6 The N channel lies SE of Boursaint Shoal and NW of Harandriaka Lockwood (18°32'S., 43°46'E.) and Nosy Androta; the

breakers over Harandriaka Lockwood assist in identifying the

entrance to this channel. If a vessel is bound for Maintirano, a

lookout must be kept for Surprise Shoal.

12.6 The S channel, access to which is more difficult, lies E of

Purdy Sand, then between Nosy Lava and Banc Simpson,

when course must be altered NNW to pass W of Nosy Maroan-
Sector 12. Madagascar—West Coast—Cap Saint-Andre to Tanjon’i Vohimena 175

Pub. 171

taly and into the S approaches to Maintirano.

12.6 Cap Bepoaka (Tanjona Mandatsakora) is a steep cliff, with

uniformly flat ground in the vicinity, though a short distance S

the land rises slightly to two flat hills; when seen from the N, it

appears dark against the background. The reddish-white color

of the cape makes it conspicuous in the sunlight.

12.6 A conical sand dune, 19.2m high, rises about 3 miles S of

Cap Bepoaka and about 0.5 mile inland. A large white dune,

21m high, rises about 3 miles farther S, and a large gray dune,

24m high, rises about 4.5 miles farther in the same direction.

This gray sand dune is a mark useful to vessels proceeding to

the roadstead off Maintirano; it rises about 4 miles N of the

town.

Maintirano (18°04'S., 44°01'E.)

World Port Index No. 47420

12.7 Maintirano is very small port and consists of a town

and an open roadstead.

12.7 Winds—Weather.—The roadstead is recommended only in

good weather. It is generally calm in the morning, but winds

from the S rise in the afternoon and make communications difficult.

12.7 Tides—Currents.—The tidal currents in the vicinity off the

roadstead off Maintirano set generally N at velocities of 1.5 to

2 knots at springs. A current, often strong, sets E toward Banc

du Nord.

12.7 Off Maintirandmaty (18°10'S., 44°02'E.), the outgoing current attains a velocity of about 0.5 knot at half tide, and then

sets SW; the incoming current attains about the same velocity a

little before half tide, and then sets E.

12.7 Depths—Limitations.—The least depth in Passe du Nord is

4.5m; the least depth in Passe du Sud is 8.2m. It was reported

(1970) that a shoal, with a depth of 1.6m, lies about 3.7 miles

NNW of the lighthouse at Maintirano.

12.7 Aspect.—The most conspicuous objects in Maintirano are

the customhouse, a white building with a red roof; the lighthouse; the Residency; and the flagmast. A wreck, which covers

and uncovers, lies almost 1 mile WSW of the flagmast. From

Passe Du Nord, only the lantern of the light tower can be seen

above the trees. Sarodrano Beacon stands on the coast about

6.8 miles S of Maintirano. The beacon is conspicuous, particularly in the afternoon.

12.7 Signals.—There is a signal station situated at Maintirano.

12.7 Anchorage.—Large vessels anchor approximately 3.5 miles

SW of the town, in 9 to 11m, mud bottom. In bad weather, the

anchorages in Iles Barren and in the vicinity of Banc du Nord

are preferable.

12.7 Good anchorage, in 18m, can be obtained 0.5 mile NE of

Banc du Nord; it is well-sheltered from the heavy SW swell.

12.7 Directions.—It is better to arrive off Maintirano in the afternoon, as objects on the coast are then easier to make out; it is

not advisable to arrive at or leave the roadstead off Maintirano

at night.

12.7 Vessels bound from the N and W for the roadstead off Maintirano should pass S of Banc de l’Quest and N of Banc de

l’Emile-Heloise, Bancs du Vaudreuil, and Banc Bayfield.

12.7 Vessels capable of safely passing over a least depth of 4.5m

can proceed through Passe du Nord by steering 156° for the

signal mast near Maintirano. When a position has been reached

from which the large gray sand dune about 4 miles N of the

town bears 047°, course should be altered to 194°, which leads

to the anchorage area.

12.7 Vessels can proceed through Passe du Sud from a position

SE of Banc du Nord by steering 117° for Sarodrano Beacon to

a position from which the signal mast bears 042°. A course of

042° from this position should be followed to a position from

which the beacon bears 146°, course should then be changed to

000° for the anchorage area.

Maintirano to Morondava

12.8 Maintiranomaty (18°10'S., 44°02'E.) is a small town

situated about 6 miles S of Maintirano. Anchorage can be taken in good weather off Maintiranomaty, in 10m; small vessels

can anchor, in 6m. When the high seas of other than good

weather are met with, it is better to take shelter in the anchorage off Nosy Maroantaly or in that off Nosy Lava.

12.8 Cap Kimby (Tonjona Kimby) (18°53'S., 44°15'E.) shows a

dark mass marked with several white patches.

12.8 The Riviere Manambolo (19°03'S., 44°15'E.) is often called

the Behanjavilo Mouth. A military station stands about midway between the N and S outlets of the Riviere Manambolo.

Anchorage has been taken off the N outlet of the Riviere Manambolo in a position from which the military station bore 114°,

the middle of Behanjavilo Mouth bore 055°, and a clump of

coconut trees bore 140°. The depth was 7.9m and the vessel

was 2 miles outside the breakers.

12.8 Soahazo (19°20'S., 44°24'E.) is a town marked by a building

with a zinc roof and a lookout station that shows above the

trees. Anchorage has been taken off Soahazo, in 9m, in a position with the lookout station bearing 075°. Ilot Indien lies on

the S side of the mouth of the Riviere Tsirbihina. Huts on Ilot

Indien are a mark for the delta.

12.8 Anchorage can be taken off the delta. Small vessels can anchor W of Tsimanandrafozana, 2 miles offshore or 1 mile from

the breakers, in depths of 5 to 7m. For larger vessels, there is

good holding ground farther seaward, in depths of 13 to 22m,

with the clump of coconut palms 0.5 mile S of Tsimanandrafozana, bearing between 060° and 065°.

12.8 A vessel anchored in a position with the clump of coconut

trees bearing 108°, and subsequently in a position from which

the trees bore 122°, in 10m. In the latter position, the vessel

was only 0.2 mile from the edge of the bank.

12.8 The Riviere Kerindy flows into the sea through an outlet lying

about 10 miles SSE of Ilot Indien. 

12.8 The village of Bosy stands on the S side of the river just within

the outlet. Anchorage has been taken in a position about 1 mile

WNW of the village, in 7m.

12.8 Numerous banks, reefs, and shoals lie off the coast between

Soahazo and the outlet of the Riviere Morondava (20°20'S.,

44°15'E.). Shoals and dangers other than those discovered

probably exist, and the area should be navigated with caution.

12.8 It is said that schools of fish frequenting the shoal areas create observable eddies in the water, and that flights of birds pursuing the fish are indications of such shoal areas. 
176 Sector 12. Madagascar—West Coast—Cap Saint-Andre to Tanjon’i Vohimena 

Pub. 171

Morondava (20°17'S., 44°18'E.)

World Port Index No. 47430

12.9 Morondava is situated on the W coast of Madagascar,

on Nosy Miandroka. The port consists of a town and an open

roadstead where ocean-going vessels can anchor.

12.9 Tides—Currents.—At the anchorage off Morondava, the

tidal current is slack about 1 hour after HW and LW. The flood

current sets N, attaining a velocity of about 0.8 knot at springs

1 hour before HW; the ebb current sets SW, attaining a velocity

of about 0.5 knot 1 hour before LW. At neaps, the currents are

weak and variable and set sometimes N, sometimes S, at a velocity of 0.25 knot.

12.9 Southwest winds cause a NE surface current, which attains a

velocity of 1 knot, and continues for several days after these

winds have ceased to blow.

12.9 The tidal currents increase in strength toward the delta of the

Riviere Tsiribihina (19°48'S., 44°24'E.).

12.9 Aspect.—The principal landmarks in Morondava and its vicinity are a water tower, 29m high, from which a light is exhibited; two aluminum-colored tanks, near the middle of the town,

standing about 0.5 mile W of the water tower; Betaolampia

Light, standing 8 miles SSW of the water tower; and the anchorage beacons, described below. 

12.9 Two range beacons stand 0.2 mile apart, with the rear beacon

standing about the same distance N of the water tower; in line

bearing about 129.5°, the beacons lead to the N anchorage. A

beacon, 6.1m high, stands near the coast 0.7 mile W of the water tower and in line with it bearing 080°, provides an anchorage mark. 

12.9 Two range beacons stand near the coast, 1.7 miles SW of the

water tower. The front beacon is 4m high and the rear is 13.1m

high; in line bearing 132°, these beacons lead to the S anchorage.

12.9 Pilotage.—Pilotage is not available at Morondava.

12.9 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken, in 6.7 to 9.7m, mud

and sand, about 1 mile from shore, on the 129.5° range. Mariners are cautioned that a heavy swell often occurs in the roadstead.

12.9 Anchorage can be taken, in 10 to 10.9m, at the intersection

of the 132° range and the 080° range.

12.9 Anchorage can also be taken in a position abreast of Lovobe.

The holding ground is good; the sea is usually not as high as in

the position N of the light, and boats can land without difficulty. The position is inconvenient for communicating with Morondava.

12.9 Directions.—Vessels proceeding to the roadstead should

give the coast a good berth until some of the marks for the area

have been identified.A good approach to the roadstead is with

Monondava Light bearing 102°.

Morondava to Morombe

12.10 Cap Ankarana (Tanjon Ankarana) (20°29'S.,

44°09'E.) is a white sandy formation. Pointe Andriambe, a

short distance S of the cape, is black and rocky, and appears

from some directions as an islet. Pointe Ambatomisiotaka

(Lohtanjon Ambatomisiotaka), about 9 miles S of Cap Ankarana, is a conspicuous projection.

Belo-Sur-Mer (20°45'S., 44°01'E.) (World Port Index No.

47440) is situated 7 miles SW of Lohtanjon Ambatomisiotaka,

on the outer N side of the estuary of the Riviere de Belo. The

port is very small and consists of a village and an open roadstead.

12.10 Tides—Currents.—Off the estuary of the Riviere de Belo,

the tidal current is slack at LW. The flood current, which sets

ENE, attains a maximum velocity of about 0.8 knot, 1 hour before HW; the ebb current attains a maximum velocity of 0.25

knot at half tide, when it sets NNW.

12.10 Aspect.—Belo-sur-Mer can be identified at a distance by a

conspicuous clump of tall trees and by a white chapel.

12.10 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be obtained in convenient

depths off Belo-sur-Mer, with the white chapel bearing 165°.

12.10 Caution.—Numerous sand banks, some of them drying and

all of them subject to shifting, lie off the entrance of the estuary. Vessels anchor off the entrance seaward of the banks.

12.11 Anchorage can be obtained E of Nosy Andriangory

(20°50'S., 43°45'E.). In the recommended anchorage position,

the N extremity of the island bears 270° and the S extremity

bears 232°. The depths in this position are 18.3m and the bottom, of sand and shells, is moderately good holding ground.

The island affords only moderate shelter from heavy seas from

the W and SW, and the anchorage should be regarded as desirable only in good weather. This anchorage should be approached by way of the channel S of the islands. Note that

Banc du Vaudreuil lies in the W part of this channel.

12.11 In the vicinity of Nosy Andriamitaroka (21°04'S.,

43°41'E.), the flood current sets SE at a velocity of 0.5 knot;

the ebb current sets W at the same velocity.

12.11 Anchorage can be taken in a position from which the N extremity of Nosy Andriamitaroka bears 280° and the S extremity bears 254°. The depth in this position, which is about 0.8

mile E of the island, is 16.4m; there is shelter from W and SW

winds. This anchorage should be approached by way of the

channel N of the island.

12.11 Ankoba (21°07'S., 43°52'E.) is a small village. A conspicuous white sand dune rises on the coast 5 miles SSW of Ankoba.

Anchorage can be taken off Ankoba, in 6 to 7m, in positions 1

mile and 1.5 miles offshore. A vessel anchored here is not sheltered from seaward, but the sea is rarely very heavy.

12.11 Mouillage d’Ampasilva is 15 miles wide between Ankoba

and Pointe Marohata (21°17'S., 43°36'E.). The village of Andranopasy stands on the shore at the head of the bay. Vessels

can proceed to an anchorage position among the sand banks lying off the village after passing over a shoal with a depth of

7.9m.

12.11 In Mouillage d’Ampasilava, the incoming current sets E

from 3 hours before to about 3 hours after HW, attaining its

maximum velocity of 0.75 knot about 1 hour 30 minutes before

HW. The outgoing current, which runs from the other half of

the tidal cycle, attains its maximum velocity of 0.5 knot at LW.

12.11 Anchorage can be taken, in 8m, good holding ground, with

the flagpole in the village of Andranopasy bearing 158° and

distant 3 miles. 

12.11 During strong W winds, anchorage should be taken E of

Nosy Andrianmitaroka rather than in the above position or at

least in a position farther seaward, but on the same bearing, in

greater depths where the seas are less steep.
Sector 12. Madagascar—West Coast—Cap Saint-Andre to Tanjon’i Vohimena 177

Pub. 171

12.11 Small vessels can proceed closer to the shore on the 158°

bearing and anchor, in 6m. The approach to Mouillage d’Ampasilava can be made from the N by way of the inshore route or

from the W by passing N of Nosy Andriamitaroka.

12.11 Caution.—Between Morondava and Mouillage d’Ampasilava (21°15'S., 43°43'E.), the inshore route is very difficult,

and care should be taken as there are many dangers. The discharge from rivers often causes discolored patches of water,

and whereas banks and shoals in this vicinity rarely cause discoloration of the water, all such discolorations should be regarded as dangerous. All vessels, unless small and with local

knowledge, should keep W of the off-lying dangers.

12.11 Ambohibe (21°21'S., 43°31'E.) is a village with a mission, a

chapel with red roofs, and several buildings that are useful

landmarks.

Morombe (21°45'S., 43°22'E.)

World Port Index No. 47450

12.12 Morombe is situated close NE of Cap Morombe, midway between Pointe Andefitra and Cap Tsingilofilo (Helodrano Tsingilofilo) SSW. The port is very small and consists of a

town and an open roadstead.

12.12 Tides—Currents.—The MHW interval at Morombe is 6

hours. Spring tides rise 3.8m; neap tides rise 2.5m.

12.12 The N current begins 3 hours before HW by the shore and

continues until 3 hours after HW, when the S current begins.

The tidal currents are strong in Passe du Sud; their direction

may vary on either side of the range line. In the channels the

current is slack at the times of HW and LW.

12.12 At the anchorage off Cap Morombe, at springs, the flood

current has been observed to set SSW, attaining a maximum

velocity of 1.75 knots about 1 hour before HW, and the ebb

current to set ENE, attaining a maximum velocity of 1.25 knots

about 2 hours before LW.

12.12 Depths—Limitations.—Vessels drawing 7.9m may proceed

through Passe du Sud toward Cap Morombe. The least depth in

the route through Passe du Nord to Town Anchorage is 6.1m.

Aspect.—A ridge of hills, from 1 to 3 miles S of Pointe Andefitra, attains an elevation of 45m and can be identified by its

whitish jagged cliffs with black patches.

12.12 Cap Morombe rises to a sand dune, backed by a ridge of low

hills.

12.12 The courthouse, with a conspicuous red front, stands on the

coast 0.4 mile NE of Cap Morombe.

12.12 Vessels approaching from the N usually first sight the high

sand hills of Pointe Andefitra, and to the S of these hills, the

range beacon on Cap Morombe. A beacon stands 0.5 mile S of

the courthouse.

12.12 Range lights are occasionally exhibited on Cap Morombe;

the lights are in line bearing 133°.

12.12 A beacon stands on the SW end of Nosy Be, and is the front

mark of a range line for an anchorage; the rear range mark is on

the edge of the reef, 0.2 mile NNW.

12.12 A beacon stands nearly 1.5 miles ENE of Nosy Lava Light

and on the reef which extends from the islet.

12.12 Passe du Sud is marked by Buoy MB1, on the W side, and by

Buoy MB2, on the E side; both are moored 0.6 mile SE of the

beacons on Nosy Be. Buoy MB4, moored 0.8 mile farther SE,

marks a depth of 4m on the E side of the fairway leading to the

principal anchorage.

12.12 A pipeline extends 0.2 mile NW from tanks on the coast,

close NE of the front range light; there are two mooring buoys

near the end of the pipeline.

12.12 Signals.—There is a signal station at Morombe.

12.12 Anchorage.—The anchorage area, known locally as Cape

Anchorage, lies WNW of Cap Morombe. In the recommended

position the beacons on Nosy Be are in line bearing 345°, and

the front range beacon on Cap Marombe is in line bearing 097°

with the beacon E of it. This is the only anchorage position in

the harbor available at any stage of the tide to vessels drawing

more than 7.9m. Care must be taken not to anchor in positions

S of the parallel of the cape.

12.12 Town Anchorage is accessible only with a flood tide. In the

recommended anchorage position the depth is about 6.4m,with

the Residence bearing 133° and Pointe Andefitra bearing 044°.

12.12 Both anchorages afford secure shelter and good holding

ground. Strong SW winds in the afternoon raise a choppy sea.

12.12 Between Cap Tsingilofio (Helodrano Tsingilofilo) and

Pointe Lamboharana (Lohatanjona Bevory) a range of mountains in the interior is divided by a large opening with perpendicular sides; the formation is a useful mark.

12.12 Directions.—Vessels proceeding toward Morombe and places in the vicinity should not depend upon marks on the coast in

making a landfall. The islands are difficult to distinguish from

seaward, but the lighthouse on the summit of Nosy Lava is a

useful mark. 

12.12 Vessels approaching from the S should pass W of Recif Morrisson (21°48'S., 43°12'E.) and W of the reef N of it. Note that

these reefs are not always marked by breakers and special care

is necessary in their vicinity. In using Passe Sud, a vessel must

keep W of the off-lying dangers until the lighted beacons on

Cape Morombe are in line 133°.

12.12 A course of 133°, with the lighted beacons in line, should

then be steered through the fairway of Passe Sud. When the

range beacons on Nosy Be are in line bearing 345°, course

should be changed so as to keep this range astern. This course

leads to the anchorage.

12.12 Vessels may proceed through Passe Nord by making good a

course of 129° so as to pass about 1 mile NE of Nosindolo and

about 1.6 miles SW of Nosy Andramona. When a position has

been reached from which the front beacon of the range beacons

on Cap Morombe bears 186°, a course of 186° can be steered

for the beacon to a position about 1.8 miles from the cape. The

least depth passed over on this portion is 6.1m. 

12.12 Cape Anchorage can then be reached by way of Passe Sud

by following the directions already given to a position from

which Nosy Trozona bears 275° and is in line with the S extremity of Nosy Lava. A course of 095° should then be steered,

keeping this range astern, toward the red-roofed building of the

Norwegian Mission. When Pointe Andefitra (21°39'S.,

43°25'E.) bears 044°, it should be steered for on that bearing,

and anchorage taken when the Residence bears 133°.

12.12 Caution.—The approach toward Cap Morombe is difficult

because of the off-lying dangers and lack of useful marks.

Many of the islands in the vicinity are difficult to distinguish

from seaward.

12.12 Tetes de Nosindolo, a coral shoal with a least depth of 6.7m,
178 Sector 12. Madagascar—West Coast—Cap Saint-Andre to Tanjon’i Vohimena 

Pub. 171

lies 3 miles WSW of Nosy Andramona.

12.12 L’Arete, a coral shoal with a least depth of 2.1m, lies 4 miles

NW of Morombe.

12.12 Nosy Tsipoy, an islet 1.5 miles S of Nosy Trozona, has several trees on it. A large rock, 1.2 miles SSE of Nosy Tsipoy,

serves to mark the E edge of the reef extending N from Cap

Tsingilofilo.

12.12 Nosy Ratafanika, 18m high, lying 2.7 miles S of Nosy Tsipoy, is rocky and wooded; there are several islets and rocks between it and Cap Tsingilofilo.

Morombe to Toliara

12.13 Cap Saint Vincent (Tanjona Andefitra) (21°57'S.,

43°16'E.) is marked by two conspicuous dunes separated from

one another by a distance of about 1 mile; the N dune is pointed and 11.9m high.

12.13 Nosy Andrahombava (Nosy Andranombala), rising to a conspicuous sandhill, 10.7m high, and covered by bushes, makes a

good landmark.

12.13 There is anchorage E of Nosy Andranombava, 0.3 mile offshore, in 16m, sand and shells, good holding ground, with the

N extremity of the islet bearing 294° and the S extremity bearing 243°; it is well-sheltered from the W swell. A vessel approaching this anchorage should pass between Recif Rogier

and Nosy Andranombala, or pass S of Harandrika Parson (Recif Parson).

12.13 Pointe Andavadoaka is marked by a large black perforated

rock. A cairn on the summit of a hill, about 1.5 miles N of the

point, is conspicuous.

12.14 Nosy Hao (22°05'S., 43°11'E.) does not stand out

clearly when viewed against the coast. A reef extends 1.7 miles

S from the islet. 

12.14 Anchorage can be obtained 0.6 mile E of Nosy Hao, in 11 to

15m, fine sand and shells, good holding ground, with the N extremity of the islet bearing 325° and the S extremity bearing

245°. 

12.14 The anchorage is sheltered from the W swell, but is exposed

S and the sea from that direction is often heavy; in such circumstances, the anchorage off Nosy Andrahombava (Nosy Andranombala) is preferable.

12.14 The anchorage off Nosy Hao can be approached, by a vessel

coming from the N, between Recif Rogier and Nosy Andranombala, and then on a S course.

12.14 Baie de Fanemotra is entered between Pointe Lamboharana (22°12'S., 43°14'E.) and Pointe Antsamotra, 1 mile SSE,

and opens out into a basin which mostly dries; the entrance is

shallow and narrowed by reefs. 

12.14 Pointe Lamboharana is moderately high, with a conspicuous

little peak at its S extremity. Pointe Antsamotra consists of a

white cliff, S of which rise some bare hills.

12.14 Baie de Fanemotra affords sheltered anchorage to small vessels with local knowledge, in 5m, 0.9 mile NE of Pointe Antsamotra, but the swinging room is limited.

12.15 The Riviere Manombo (22°58'S., 43°28'E.) flows into the sea. The village of Manombo stands on the NW side of

the river mouth and is visible from some distance seaward; N

of it is a temple, with a red roof, and a church. 

12.15 On Colline Ambohibe, NE of the mouth of the Riviere Manombo, overlooking the village, is an old lookout station which

serves as a landmark.

12.15 There is good weather anchorage off the mouth of the

Riviere Manombo, in 7 to 8m, sand, with good holding ground.

A vessel of moderate size has anchored 1.7 miles offshore and

0.6 mile from the coastal reef, in 29m, with the temple near

Manombo bearing 044°.

12.15 Pointe Tony (23°00'S., 43°28'E.) has a conspicuous hill,

with sharply-defined steps, that shows above the trees; the hill

rises about 1 mile N of the point. This hill is sometimes called

Butte de Tony.

12.16 Baie de Ranobe (Helodrano Ranobe) lies within the

barrier reef between Pointe Tony (Butte de Tony) and a point

10 miles SE. It is the best anchorage along this coast for a considerable distance. At HW, a considerable sea is raised at the

anchorage during SW winds.

12.16 Tides—Currents.—The tidal currents are strong in Passe

Fanandomotra, with strong eddies, but are weak within Baie de

Ranobe, where the velocity does not exceed about 0.8 knot.

The flood current sets N, and attains its maximum velocity at

half tide, when it starts to decrease, but runs until 1 hour after

HW. 

12.16 The ebb current also attains its maximum velocity at half tide

and sets S, ceasing at LW.

12.16 Depths—Limitations.—Passe Fanandomotra has a navigable width of 0.2 mile and a least depth of 7m.

12.16 Aspect.—A hill of remarkable shape rises from the SE entrance point of the bay. A conspicuous casuarina tree stands on

a sand hill, on the shore of the bay, in a position about 5.5 miles

SE of Pointe Tony.

12.16 A beacon stands on the shore of the bay. This beacon, bearing 040° and in line with the fall of Manombo Hill, leads

through Passe Fanandomotra.

12.16 Anchorage.—In the position in Baie de Ranobe recommended for ocean-going vessels for anchoring, Pointe Tont

(Butte de Tony) bears 339° and the conspicuous casuarina tree

on the sand hill bears 057°. The depth in this position is 10m;

the bottom is mud.

12.16 Directions.—The beacon and the hill mentioned above are

at some distance from the outer part of Passe Fanandomotra, so

that considerable reliance must be placed on navigation by eye

and by use of soundings.

12.16 The best time for entering, having regard to the position of

the sun for seeing the reefs, is about 1 hour before LW, and for

leaving, at about HW.

12.16 Caution.—Baie de Ranobe is encumbered by coral reefs,

which even at HW, are easily seen by the discoloration of the

water.

Toliara (Tulear) (23°22'S., 43°40'E.)

World Port Index No. 47460

12.17 Toliara is situated on the SW coast of Madagascar.

The port is very small and consists of a town and a secure natural harbor sheltered by Le Grand Recif.

12.17 Winds—Weather.—Southwest winds prevail all year round.

When the winds freshen in the afternoon from 1200 to 1900,
Sector 12. Madagascar—West Coast—Cap Saint-Andre to Tanjon’i Vohimena 179

Pub. 171

landing in boats becomes difficult, as elsewhere along this

coast. The rainy season in this region is from November to

March.

12.17 Tides—Currents.—The incoming tidal current sets SE.

During the dry season, at springs, the flood current sets SE

through Passe du Nord, and NE through Passe du Sud, with the

currents meeting off Pointe Kilibe (23°26'S., 43°44'E.). 

12.17 The reverse occurs during the ebb current and an eddy may

be experienced in Passe du Nord, setting SE close inshore between Banc de Nosy Vato (23°22'S., 43°39'E.). Off Mahavatsy

Pierhead, the tidal currents are weak. The currents conform

generally to the direction of the main fairway, except when the

reef is covered; cross sets may then be experienced.

12.17 The tidal currents are strongest off the N end of Le Grand

Recif, where at springs they attain a velocity of 2 knots.

12.17 The tidal currents at the anchorages are not felt as much as

those described above; they attain a velocity of 1.25 knots at

springs.

12.17 Depths—Limitations.—The fairway leading through Passe

du Nord has a least depth of 12.8m, mud. It is difficult to distinguish in bad weather, and care must be taken not to confuse

it with the mouth of the Riviere Fiherenana, 1.5 miles N of the

fairway. Passe du Sud has a least depth of 12.8m in the fairway.

This channel passes close NW of a shoal, with a depth of 8.7m,

lying 0.6 mile W of Nosy Tofara (23°31'S., 43°43'E.).

12.17 Five anchor berths, in depths of 6 to 12m, lie W and SW of

Pointe Mahavatsy.

12.17 Banc Mareana which dries, extends 1.5 miles offshore between Pointe Befotaka (23°24'S., 43°42'E.) and Pointe Kilibe,

about 2.5 miles SE. Roche Microbe, on the E side of the fairway 2.2 miles NW of Pointe Sarodrano (23°30'S., 43°44'E.),

dries 0.6m. Nosy Tafara, a reef which dries 0.6m, lies midway

between the S end of Ilay Harandriaka Lehibe (Le Grand Recif) and Pointe Sarodrano, 2.5 miles E.

12.17 Aspect.—The gap between the hills, indicating the valley of

the Riviere Fiherenana, can be identified by a vessel coming

from the N. The most conspicuous object first sighted when

Toliara is approached from the SW is Mont Maina (La Table),

with a flat summit 163.7m high, 8 miles ESE of Pointe Anosy.

As Toliara is neared, the water tower in the middle of the town

is first seen, then the radio masts on the E side of the town, and

then the Norwegian Church, easily identified by its two square

towers and red roof. There is another water tower near the airfield 4 miles SE of the town. Pointe Barn Hill (23°33'S.,

43°45'E.) is 61m high and consists of white limestone cliffs,

which are conspicuous when in sunlight. 

12.17 Mahavatsy Beacon, 14m high, stands on the coast 1.5 miles

ESE of Pointe Anosy. The beacon is difficult to see in the

morning, but a tank farm nearby helps to identify it. 

12.17 Beacon E stands on the coastal reef 0.4 mile W of the root of

Mahavatsy Pier. Buoy TU2 and Buoy TU4, which mark the

coastal bank on the NE side of the fairway, are moored 1.2

miles NW and 0.1 mile SW, respectively, of Pointe Anosy.

12.17 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory. It has been reported

(1996) that the port captain and the pilot can be contacted on

VHF channel 16.

12.17 Directions.—It is advisable to approach Passe du Nord during the morning; in the afternoon the SW wind blows up the

sand, and one of the most useful marks, Mont Mahinia, is often

not visible.

12.17 Vessels with drafts up to 10m may safely anchor in the harbor; the jetty has a maximum safe draft of 9.3m alongside.

12.17 During bad weather, the entrance to Passe du Nord is difficult to distinguish, and care must be taken to avoid confusing it

with an indentation N of Pointe Ansoy. To avoid this confusion, it is advisable to identify Ilay Harandriaka Lehibe S of the

entrance on the parallel of Mont Mahinia, and then to proceed

N until the entrance to the pass can be made out.

12.17 Passe du Nord should be entered by keeping the leading

lights near Pointe Anosy in line bearing 114°. Maintain this

course until Beacon C and Beacon D are in line bearing 148°.

This range should be followed to a position from which Mahavatsy Beacon bears 088° and is in line with Beacon E. This

range leads to an anchorage position.

12.17 Vessels proceeding to the inner anchorage position follow

the directions just given to the position from which Mahavatsy

Beacon bears 088° and is in line with Beacon E. From this position a course of 112° should be steered to round the SE extremity of Banc de Mahavatsy, on which course the vessel will

pass between the bank and the 4.9m patch about 0.1 mile SE.

After rounding the bank, a course of 043°, with Beacon E in

line with the E radio mast, should be steered to the inner anchorage position.

12.17 Passe du Sud should be approached by steering 039° for

Mont Mahinia to a position from which Pointe Sarodrano bears

100°. Course should then be changed to 357°, which leads between Ilay Harandriaka Lehibe and Roche Microbe. Note that

Passe du Sud should be attempted only by vessels with local

knowledge because of the numerous shoal heads and patches.

Passe du Sud is recommended only to vessels with local

knowledge.

Anchorage.—The anchorages in Rade de Toliara are safe in

all seasons, but a choppy sea is often experienced in the afternoon. Five anchor berths, in 6 to 12m, mud or sand, lie W and

SW of Pointe Mahavatsy.

12.17 A vessel awaiting instructions from the harbormaster can anchor temporarily, with Mahavatsy Beacon in line with Beacon

E, bearing about 088°, and the Norwegian Church bearing

053°, in 12.8m, good holding ground; vessels are prohibited

from anchoring N of the alignment.

12.17 Small vessels with local knowledge, with a draft not exceeding 4.9m, can obtain anchorage nearer the town, with ample

swinging room, E of the S end of Banc de Mahavatsy, in 6 to

7m. A vessel making this anchorage should pass between Buoy

No. 3 and Buoy TU6 or between Buoy No. 5 and Buoy TU8,

and anchor with Beacon E in line with the E radio mast, bearing 043°; and Pointe Anosy Rear Range Light bearing 318°;

this berth is 0.2 mile W of Mahavatsy Pier Head. Approximately 1.8 miles from the above position, with Pointe Anosy Beacon still bearing 318°, is a stranded wreck, with the hull and

masts clearly visible. Vessels should stay clear and not mistake

the wreck for a vessel at anchor.

12.17 Caution.—Le Grand Recif (Ilay Harandriaka Lehibe), the N

extremity of which lies 1.5 miles WNW of Pointe Anosy, extends parallel with the coast for 10 miles and dries.

12.17 Many shoal patches, with a least depth of 1.8m, lie in the

channel between Le Grand Recif and the coastal reef.

12.17 Banc de Mahavatsy is a shallow spit extending 1.2 miles SE

from Pointe Anosy.
180 Sector 12. Madagascar—West Coast—Cap Saint-Andre to Tanjon’i Vohimena 

Pub. 171

Toliara to Tanjon-i Vohimena (Cap SainteMarie)

12.18 Helodrano Inantosony (Baie de Saint-Augustin) is entered between Pointe Sarodrano (23°30'S., 43°44'E.) and a

point 6 miles SSW.

12.18 Tides—Currents.—Along the S side of Baie de Saint-Augustin, the flood current sets E at a velocity of 0.25 knot; the

ebb current sets W at a velocity of 0.5 knot.

12.18 Depths—Limitations.—The depths in the bay are great, except within 1 mile of the shore.

12.18 Aspect.—The village of Solara (Saolary), standing on the S

shore of the bay 2.5 miles WSW of Pointe Ampasimanoro, the

S entrance point of the Riviere Onilahy, can be identified by a

church at its W end. Rocher Tente, 4m high, lying close offshore 0.5 mile E of Soalary, is a white rectangular rock and is

not easily seen. From Pointe Ampasimanoro, white cliffs

which are conspicuous when in sunlight extend 1 mile WSW to

a gap formed by the entrance of Lovokampy Valley. Two stone

beacons stand 0.5 mile S of Rocher Tente; the beacons in line

bear 171°.

12.18 Anchorage.—During the trade winds, from April to October, vessels should anchor with Pointe Ampasimanoro bearing

068° and on the alignment of the two stone beacons, bearing

171°, in 9.4m; or closer inshore, in 5.5m, with the church at the

W end of Sadlary bearing 229°. At other seasons, vessels

should anchor in 20m, with Pointe Ampasimanoro bearing

081° and Rocher Tente bearing 158°. There are often heavy

rollers at this anchorage.

12.18 Small vessels with local knowledge can obtain more secure

anchorage between November and March, within Passe du Sud

at Toliara, between the reefs off Pointe Sarodrano.

12.18 Directions.—A vessel coming from the N and bound for

Baie de Saint-Augustin, identify Mont Mahinia and the delta of

the Riviere Fiherenana; then the white cliffs at the head of the

bay can be seen.

12.18 From the S, the valley of the Riviere Onilahy, with the surrounding high land, is distinctive, as it is the first valley N of

Cap Andriamamao (25°00'S., 44°05'E.).

12.18 Caution.—A narrow spit, with depths of less than 4.8m, extends 0.8 mile SW from Pointe Barn Hill (23°33'S., 43°45'E.).

A shoal, with a least depth of 12m, lies 3.5 miles W of Saolary

and 1.2 miles offshore; the sea breaks on it in bad weather.

12.19 Nosy Ve (23°39'S., 43°36'E.), lying 2 miles NW of

Lahatanjon’ Anakao (Pointe Anakao), is a low-lying white

sandy islet, covered with brushwood, with a clump of trees

near its N end; there are the ruins of an old settlement on the islet.

12.19 The channel between Nosy Ve and the coast affords anchorage sheltered from winds between the S and W. The best berth

is in 10.1m, sand and coral, moderate holding ground, with the

N extremity of Nosy Ve bearing 253° and the SE extremity

bearing 195°; a good scope of chain should be veered. Vessels

at anchor are liable to swing continually because of changes in

the wind and tidal currents, which sometimes cause the anchor

to drag.

12.19 Nosy Ve lies on the E side of a reef, which is about 2.5 miles

in extent, N and S. A coral bank, over which the sea breaks

heavily in bad weather, extends 1.2 miles NNE from the N extremity of the reef. Mariners must beware of this reef at HW.

12.19 Anse Itampolo lies about 2 miles NE of Pointe Angorotany

(Itampolo) (24°43'S., 43°55'E.), the S entrance point of Helodranon’i Salapaly (Baie de Salapaly). The cove can be identified by Colline Hatokaliotso, a rounded hill with gradual slopes

in the second range of hills, which should not be confused with

another rounded hill, with steep slopes, also in the second

range, N of Anse Itampolo. This second range of hills disappears behind the first when the coast is approached.

12.19 Immediately N of a point on the S side of Anse Itampolo, an

old military outpost, consisting of a two-story building and a

red house, stands on a sand hill. Several hundred meters N of

the outpost, the sand hills decrease in elevation, and some

clumps of trees, which in the morning look like boat’s sails,

border the coast. Several villages can be seen in the neighborhood.

12.19 A small vessel with local knowledge making the anchorage

in Anse Itampolo should approach with the old outpost bearing

093°; after passing close to the coastal reef forming the S side

of the cove, steer 140°, keeping within the shelter of the reef,

and anchor with the outpost bearing 059°, distant 0.9 mile, in

more than 9m. This anchorage is sheltered from wind and

swell, except from between WSW and N, when it is dangerous

to anchor here. Port d’Androka affords shelter and is situated

close S of Cap Adriamanao (25°00'S., 44°06'E.). The directions for entering and the anchorage are indicated on the chart.

12.19 Port Cruizer, at the NW end of Baie de Minirodo, is approached between the SE end of the coastal reef, which extends from Port d’Androka, and an isolated reef marked by

breakers. Small vessels with local knowledge can steer for a

white sandhill on the W point of the bay and anchor, in 7.9m,

with the conspicuous fall of the sandhill bearing 315°, the S extremity of the coastal reef bearing 175°, and the isolated breakers bearing 107°. This anchorage is not sheltered from wind

and swell between the SSE and SSW.

12.19 Toraka Toxer (Banc Toxer) (25°12'S., 44°13'E.) has a least

depth of 2.5m. In good weather, the sea only breaks over this

patch occasionally. Vessels coming from seaward should not

approach the coast until Nosy Manitsa, 3.5 miles E of Banc

Toxer, bears 135°.

12.19 Banc de l’Etoile fronts the coast from Lohatanjona Fenambosy (Pointe Fenambosy) (25°15'S., 44°21'E.) to Tanjon’i Vohimena (Cap Sainte-Marie). Vessels with local knowledge can

pass over Banc de I’Etoile and anchor, if necessary, during offshore winds, in 26 to 29m, 2 or 3 miles offshore.

12.19 Recifs de l’Etoile (25°21'S., 44°18'E.) lie on the NW side of

the bank; the sea only breaks over the N reef in bad water, but it

always breaks over the S reef. It is advisable to give the reefs a

wide berth. In 1979, there was a conspicuous stranded wreck

on the S end of Recifs de l’Etoile.

12.19 Caution.—Toraky Ny Kintana (Banc de l’Etoile) is imperfectly surveyed; mariners are advised to navigate with caution.

12.19 Anse Lavanono (25°24'S., 44°54'E.) lies NW of Tanjon’i

Vohimena (Cap Sainte-Marie). Anchorage is available with local knowledge. A vessel has obtained anchorage, sheltered

from E winds and swell, in 12m, good holding ground of sand,

with Cap Sainte-Marie bearing 135°, distant 2 miles.

12.19 Tanjon’i Vohimena (Cap Sainte-Marie) (25°35'S., 45°08'E.)

is described in paragraph 10.46.
Pub. 171

13. South Indian Ocean—The Prince Edward Islands, Iles Crozet, Iles Kerguelen, Ile Saint-Paul, and Ile Amsterdam

13.0Additional chart coverage may be found in NGA/DLIS Catalog of Maps, Charts, and Related Products (Unlimited Distribution).

SECTOR 13 — CHART INFORMATION
183

Pub. 171

SECTOR 13 

SOUTH INDIAN OCEAN—THE PRINCE EDWARD ISLANDS, ILES CROZET, ILES KERGUELEN, ILE SAINT-PAUL, AND ILE AMSTERDAM

13.0 Plan.—This sector describes the islands in the S part of the

Indian Ocean, including the Prince Edward Islands, Iles

Crozet, Iles Kerguelen, Ile Saint-Paul, and Ile Amsterdam.

The Prince Edward Islands

13.1 The Prince Edward Islands are a pair of islands which

are the twin peaks of a sunken volcano. The two islands are

Marion Island, the northernmost, and Prince Edward Island.

Marion Island (46°53'S., 37°43'E.), the larger of the two

Prince Edward Islands, appears from the N as a cluster of

ragged nipples, with one table-topped peak slightly higher than

the boot. The slopes of the island are broken by numerous volcanic cones, some with the red volcanic ash still showing near

the summits. The sides of the hills are thickly studded with lava

boulders, rising above the vegetation of rank, boggy moss.

13.1 Cape Crozier (46°57'S., 37°35'E.), the W extremity of Marion Island, lies about 2.3 miles NW of Vrystaat Point; when

seen from the W it appears as a low dark-colored point against

the lighter background.

13.2 Cape Hooker (46°59'S., 37°50'E.), the SE extremity

of Marion Island, lies about 10 miles E of Cape Crozier. It is a

flattish ledge about 61m high. A very conspicuous hummock

rises about 2 miles N of Cape Hooker. Marion Island rises to an

elevation of 1,230m near its W central part, with another similar elevation about 0.8 mile ENE.

13.2 Ships Cove (46°51'S., 37°50'E.) indents the N shore of Marion Island, about 5 miles ESE of Boot Rock. Anchorage can be

obtained about 0.3 mile offshore, in a depth of 29m.

13.2 There is a passage 11 miles wide between Marion Island and

Prince Edward Island, which are under the sovereignty of the

Republic of South Africa. 

13.2 A vessel found temporary anchorage, in 38m, 1 mile W of

Aldebert Reef (Solglimt Blinders) (40°51'S., 37°52'E.), and 0.5

mile offshore, with Boot Rock bearing 289°, about 5.1 miles

distant, rocky bottom. Strong currents were observed at this anchorage. 

13.2 Transvaal Cove (46°52'S., 37°51'E.) is about 0.7 mile S of

Duiker’s Point. At the N end of the cove is the meteorological

station, consisting of 14 white and silver buildings, one of

which has a conspicuous roof painted in black and white

checks. The station is well-lit at night.

13.2 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be found, in depths of 46 to

55m, good holding ground, but a vessel should put to sea

should pressure fall with a veering wind.

13.2 Directions.—If approaching Marion Island from the NW,

steer SE to pass between the islands and to pass at least 2 miles

N of Solglimt Blinders; this reef may not break in very calm

conditions. When East Cape bears 180°, alter course to 180°;

Solglimt Blinders will be cleared by 1.5 miles. Then approach

the anchorage on a course of 249°, with McMurray’s Kop, a

prominent volcanic cone which may be snow-covered in winter, ahead and in line with the Ballon Tower. The anchorage, in

a depth of 32m, about 0.3 mile offshore and clear of kelp, is

reached when about 1.8 miles ENE of McMurray’s Kop summit.

13.3 Prince Edward Island (46°38'S., 37°56'E.) lies 11

miles NNE of Marion Island. When sighted from the W, this island presents a rounded summit, 672m high, with the land

sloping gradually to South Cape, but more abruptly N. On the

N extremity is a wedge-shaped peak, which appears from a distance to be detached from the island. This peak is slightly higher than Ross Rocks, a number of rocky islets which lie within

0.5 mile N of this extremity and show up very dark against the

land. 

13.3 Ship Rock, 197m high, stands close off the N extremity of

the island. 

13.3 The W and SW coasts of the island are precipitous. Within

the SW point is a precipitous cliff, rising to an elevation of

457m within 0.3 mile of the sea. On the E side of the island is

Cave Bay, which was formerly used by sealers as a temporary

anchorage, in a depth of 18m.

13.3 Landing can usually be made in Cave Bay when the wind is

between the S and NNE through W; the best landing place is in

the center of the beach with anchorage available, in a depth of

27m, about 0.3 mile offshore. There is a 14m shoal lying 1.5

miles E of East Cape, close S of Cave Bay.

Iles Crozet

13.4 Iles Crozet lie between the parallels of 45°57'S and

46°30'S, and between the meridians of 50°10'E and 52°20'E. 

13.4 The archipelago is composed of two groups of volcanic islands about 50 miles apart. The W group consists of one main

island, Ile aux Cochons, and two small islets, Iles des Apotres

and Iles des Pingouins. The E group consists of Ile de la Possession and Ile de l’Est. Ile aux Cochons first appears to observers approaching from the N as a number of peaks. 

13.4 The islands have been under French sovereignty since 1924.

13.4 Tides—Currents.—In passing through the channel between

Ile aux Cochons and Iles des Apotres, a current setting toward

the rocks and breakers off the W side of the latter islands must

be guarded against.

13.4 Caution.—Many sunken dangers, not always charted, exist

in the vicinity of these islands.

13.5 Cap Verdoyant (46°05'S., 50°16'E.), a useful mark,

projects from the middle part of the E shore of Ile aux Cochons

and is the E extremity of the island. A conspicuous rock S of

the cape appears as a truncated cone. 

13.5 Anchorage.—The anchorages are off the E shore of Ile aux

Cochons and are consequently exposed to E winds. Such

winds, said to be an infallible sign of bad weather, are infrequent, but when they do blow, they acquire such force as to
184 Sector 13. Prince Edward Islands, Iles Crozet, Iles Kerguelen, Ile Saint-Paul, Ile Amsterdam 

Pub. 171

jeopardize vessels at anchor; vessels must hasten seaward at

the first sign of these E winds. 

13.5 The anchorages can be approached by rounding either the N

or S end of Ile aux Cochons. 

13.5 Anchorage can be taken in Mouillage de la Meurthe off the

entrance of Tournyol du Clos, close S of Cap Verdoyant, in a

position with the right fall of the cape bearing 284°, distant

about 0.4 mile. The depth is 30m and the bottom is rock, with a

thin layer of black sand. 

13.5 Anchorage can also be taken off the entrance of Crique Loniewsky, in a depth of 24m, black mud, with Les Cinq Geants

bearing 315°, distance about 0.6 mile.

13.6 Iles des Apotres (45°36'S., 50°25'E.) consists of

Grand Ile, Petite Ile, Ile Donjon, and nine pinnacle rocks. The

nine pinnacle rocks are from 15 to 122m high; the southernmost is perforated. 

Iles des Pingouins (46°28'S., 50°20'E.) lie 18 miles SSE of

Ile aux Cochons. The principal island is composed of barren,

volcanic rock; it is 360m high and quite inaccessible. The cliffs

on the N and W sides of the island resemble the vertical walls

of a fortress.

13.6 Rocher de l’Arche, 76m high and connected to the NW extremity of Iles des Pingouins by a low isthmus, appears to be

separate from that island.

13.6 Submerged rocks, on which the sea breaks heavily, extend

1.5 miles SE from Iles des Pingouins. A submerged rock, the

position of which is doubtful, has been reported to lie 3.5 miles

ESE of Iles des Pingouins.

13.6 Caution.—Iles des Pingouins has been reported (1988) to lie

2 miles N of its charted position.

13.7 Cap Vertical (46°21'S., 51°41'E.), the N extremity of

Ile de la Possession, is conspicuous. Cap de la Heroine is the W

extremity of the island and breakers exist 2 miles offshore SW

of Cap de la Heroine. 

13.7 A conspicuous high perforated rock lies off the NW shore of

the island, about 1 mile N of Pointe des Moines, the W extremity of Ile de la Possession. Vessels approaching the island from

the W during fog can identify the high perforated rock before

the island itself can be made out. 

13.7 Baie du Marin is a wide bight in the SE shore of Ile de la

Possession; it is open to the SE, but offers shelter from winds

between the SSW and NNW. Baie du Navire is a recess at the

head of Baie du Marin. 

13.7 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken in Baie du Marin

and, by smaller vessels, in Baie du Navire. The outer anchorage, in 40m, is marked by the intersection of two lighted ranges. Baie Americaine is a semicircular indentation in the NE

shore of Ile de la Possession. Anchorage can be taken in the

bay without difficulty. The bay is entered, and an anchorage

site selected, by keeping midway between the kelp on either

side. A vessel will be in depths of 9m or more as close as 0.3

mile from the head of the bay. The recommended position is in

22m, sand and shell, good holding ground, with Rechecker la

Armadillo bearing 017°, distant 0.2 mile. 

13.7 Caution.—East winds are rare, but they are a sure sign of

bad weather. Vessels should put to sea at the first indication of

such winds. 

13.8 Ile de l’Est (46°25'S., 52°08'E.) is a mass of precipitous volcanic mountains, with jagged summits, rising in a succession of cliffs to an elevation of 1,090m at Mont MarionDufresne, a snow-covered peak.

13.8 The SW extremity of Ile de l’Est terminates in a high rock in

the form of a triangular pyramid. Depths of 20 to 24m are

found 1.4 and 2.4 miles SE, respectively, of this point.

13.8 On the S side of the island are high red cliffs and broad

streams of lava. Three rocks, 2 to 3 miles apart, lie from 0.1 to

0.3 mile off the S coast. The sea breaks furiously on every part

of the W and S sides.

13.8 Temporary anchorage can be taken, in 24 to 27m, off the N

and NE shores of Ile de l’Est, which, from the appearance of

the vegetation growing close to the water’s edge, can seldom

be washed by heavy seas. The temporary anchorage must be

approached with caution because of the off-lying irregular unexplored depths.

13.8 On the N side of the island, temporary anchorage is also possible, in 35m, 0.5 mile from the coast, at the opening of Baie

du Naufrage (Baie de l’Aventure) (46°23'S., 52°12'E.).

Iles Kerguelen

13.9 Iles Kerguelen, including all off-lying dangers, lie between the parallels of 48°27'S and 50°00'S, and the meridians

of 68°25'E and 70°35'E. There are more than 300 islands and

islets in the whole archipelago, which is under the administration of the French Government. When viewed from the sea at a

distance, the islands present a remarkable jagged outline of

sharp peaks, which is most striking when observed from the S. 

13.9 Tides—Currents.—The ocean current immediately around

Iles Kerguelen is generally affected by the wind or the aftereffect of the wind. The tidal currents are appreciably felt, in some

places setting strongly against the wind.

13.9 Caution.—Icebergs, some of them large and dangerous,

have been seen in the vicinity of Iles Kerguelen. 

13.10 Mont Campbell (49°04'S., 70°19'E.) is a useful mark

by reason of its truncated conical appearance; it rises from a

low, marshy plain, and is unmistakable. Mont Peeper

(49°12'S., 70°25'E.) and Mont Bungay (49°19'S., 70°26'E.)

rise from the same plain; they, like Mont Campbell, are conspicuous from the E. These comparatively low hills are often

visible when the high masses inland of them are enveloped in

fog.

Ilot du Rendez-Vous (48°27'S., 68°48'E.) lies in the approach to Iles Kerguelen from the NW in position; it is a useful

landfall mark. 

13.10 Ile Roland lies nearly 6 miles S of Ilot du Rendez-Vous.

Crique Esnault is an indentation on the E side of Ile Roland. Indifferent anchorage may be obtained, in 18m, over a bottom of

sand, in Crique Esnault. 

13.10 Ile de Croy lies about 5 miles WSW of Ile Roland. A cove

where small vessels might anchor indents the SE shore of Ile

de Croy.

13.10 Baie de l’Oiseau is entered between Cap Francais (48°40'S.,

69°04'E.) and Pointe de l’Arche, about 1 mile SSE. The flood

tidal current sets NW off the entrance. Table Mount, the highest hill on the N side of Baie de I’Oiseau, is 411m high, and a

useful mark. 
Sector 13. Prince Edward Islands, Iles Crozet, Iles Kerguelen, Ile Saint-Paul, Ile Amsterdam 185

Pub. 171

13.10 Mont Havergal rises to a height of 551m on the S side of the

bay; it is conspicuous from the NE. Mont Havergal is a huge,

imposing mass of blackish rock, resembling a human head

from some directions, and towering conspicuously above the

other summits nearby. 

13.10 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken in Baie de l’Oiseau.

The area available for anchoring is about 1 mile long and has

depths of 10.9 to 28m. The bottom is fine black sand except toward the shore, off which in places are kelp-covered rocks. A

good berth is in 16m, about 0.3 mile from the head of the bay,

which is marked by a level beach of fine black sand. 

13.10 The recommended position is near a rivulet and a cascade.

Good ground tackle is required as squalls from the W rush

down the valley at the head of the bay with tremendous force.

Changes of weather are sudden. 

13.10 Baie de la Dauphine is entered between Pointe de l’Arche

and Cap Ligneville, about 1.5 miles S. Anchorage, considered

safe and good, in 33m, can be taken at the head of the bay. The

mud bottom is good holding ground. The kelp must be avoided

and NE wind raise a considerable swell. 

13.11 Baie Clemenceau (48°44'S., 69°03'E.), extending

about 5.5 miles SW, is entered between Cap Ligneville and

Pointe d’Anieres, about 2.3 miles ESE. Good anchorage, in

20m, can be taken at the head of Baie Clemenceau. As in the

case of Baie de la Dauphine, NE winds raise a considerable

sea.

13.11 Baie de Recques is entered between Pointe d’Anieres and

Pointe Pringle (Pointe des Roches), about 2.8 miles SE.

13.11 Ile Guerite lies about 0.5 mile E of Pointe d’Anieres. A rock

resembling a sentry box stands on its summit.

13.11 A rocky patch, marked by kelp, lies in the middle of the entrance of Baie de Recques. The recommended channel leading

into the bay passes S of the rocky patch. 

13.11 Anse du Jardill is entered on the SE side of Baie de Recques,

between Pointe Cristal, 6 miles SW of Pointe d’Anieres, and a

point 0.5 mile farther SW; then it extends in a S direction for 2

miles. An islet, fringed by foul ground, lies close offshore, 0.5

mile SW of the SW entrance point. 

13.11 Pointe du Museum lies about 4.3 miles SW of Pointe Cristal,

where Baie de Recques divides into two arms; Port Edmond

Perrier is the W arm and Anse de l’Excursion is the E arm. 

13.11 The anchorages in Baie de Recques are much better than that

in Baie de l’Oiseau and are not exposed to such violent winds.

They are, however, not so easy of access. 

13.11 Safe anchorage can be obtained in Anse du Jardin, in 25m,

good holding ground, with the entrance points almost in line

bearing 000°, a waterfall on the W side bearing 252°, and a

point on the E side, resembling an islet, bearing 037°. 

13.11 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be obtained, in 20m, mud, 0.3

mile N of Pointe du Museum. Port Edmond Perrier affords

good anchorage to small vessels, in 20m, 0.8 mile SW of

Pointe du Museum. 

13.11 Baie du Brise-Lames is entered between Cap Ferron, about

1.5 miles SSE of Pointe Pringle, and Pointe Lucky, about 2.3

miles SSW. Ilot Cezembre lies close off the SE shore in a position about 2 miles from Pointe Lucky. Good anchorage can be

taken in Baie du Brise-Lames, in 30m, somewhat less than 1

mile W of Ilot Cezembre.

13.12 Baie Blanche (48°49'S., 69°11'E.), which contains

several good harbors, is entered between Pointe Lucky and

Pointe Cox. Baie Caille is a recess in the NW shore of Baie

Blanche lying about 4.8 miles from Pointe Lucky. It is preferable to anchor, in 18m, on the S side of the bay rather than on

the N side, where the depths decrease rapidly. Baie du Phoque

is a recess in the NW shore of Baie Blanche lying close SW of

Baie Caille. 

13.12 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be obtained, in 18m, in Port

Matha at the head of Baie Blanche, 0.3 mile W of Pointe

Maunoir, the N entrance point. 

13.12 Baie du Repos, SSW of Baie Blanche, is reported by sealers

to afford good anchorage. 

13.12 Roches Glass is a chain of black islets which stand out clearly, even in misty weather. 

13.13 Ile Howe (48°50'S., 69°25'E.) lies with its N extremity about 8 miles WSW of Roches Glass. The shores of Ile

Howe appear to vessels approaching from the N as light-colored, pale yellow or brown cliffs. Iles Dayman lies about 2

miles ENE of the NE extremity of Ile Howe. Port Fuller, an area along the E shore of Ile Howe, affords secure anchorage

from the prevailing W winds. Depths of 27m are available.

Port Fallieres is a small harbor formed between the SW

shore of Ile Howe and the NE shore of Ile McMurdo; it can be

entered without difficulty from the W, but not from the E. Wellsheltered anchorage can be taken, in 20m. 

13.13 Baie Rhodes is entered between Pointe Oakeley (48°51'S.,

69°30'E.) and Cap Neumayer. Roche Bird is difficult to distinguish; it should not be approached within 0.2 mile of its E side.

The safest approach to Baie Rhodes from the NE is between

Roches Glass and Roche Bird. The approach S of Roche Bird

is obstructed by kelp which may cover shoal patches. 

13.14 Port Mary (49°00'S., 69°19'E.) lies on the W side of

Baie Rhodes, about 7.5 miles within the entrance. The harbor

is backed by hills from which, during gales, heavy squalls blow

first from one direction and then from another. The best anchorage is in 11m, soft mud bottom, in the middle of the harbor. A vessel of deep draft entering the harbor should keep

close to the N entrance point and to the N side in order to avoid

a patch, with a depth of 7.3m, amongst the kelp. 

Port Credner (49°02'S., 69°17'E.), entered 1.5 miles S of

Port Mary, is suitable for small vessels. The entrance lies N of

an island which fronts the anchorage, at which there are depths

of 18m. 

Port Helene (49°04'S., 69°16'E.) is entered 2.5 miles S of

the entrance of Port Credner. The harbor is easy to access and

affords good anchorage, in 25m. The harbor is subject to

squalls during W winds.

13.14 Baie d’Orvilliers is entered between Pointe St. Vincent de

Paul and Pointe Bassuet, 0.5 mile to the NE, and affords anchorage to small vessels, in 17m. Large vessels can anchor, in

35m, in the entrance of Port Jules Girard, with Pointe Rogheneuf bearing 007°, the E extremity of Ile Bethel bearing 012°,

Pointe St. Vincent de Paul bearing 217°, and Pointe Bossuet

bearing 162°. 

13.14 Mont Palliser rises near Cap Neumayer (48°57'S., 69°34'E.);

from some directions its summit appears table-shaped. 

13.14 Port Sunday (Port Dimanche) is entered 2.5 miles S of Cap
186 Sector 13. Prince Edward Islands, Iles Crozet, Iles Kerguelen, Ile Saint-Paul, Ile Amsterdam 

Pub. 171

Neumayer. The best anchorage is about 0.5 mile from the head

of the harbor, in 20m. The anchorage at Port Sunday is subject

to heavy W squalls, and it has never been used much. Port

Cook, on the N side of Port Sunday near the entrance, is reported to be easy to access, in spite of the rocks off its entrance. It

affords much better anchorage than that in Port Sunday, in 9 to

13m. 

13.15 Anse Pingouin (48°59'S., 69°38'E.) affords shelter

from the prevailing W winds, in 14m, but the bank suitable for

anchorage is rather steeply shelving. Should E winds set in, a

vessel can easily run to Port Palliser, SW. The cove can be approached by way of the channel between Pointe de Langle

(48°58'S., 69°39'E.) and Rochers Frossard, but the best approach is from the E, passing between Ilots Bobzien and Ile

Francis. 

13.15 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be obtained, in 25m, with the

N extremity of Ilots Bobzien bearing 067°, and the S extremity

of the islets bearing 117° and just obscuring the small Ile Francis. Port Palliser, the head of Anse Pingouin, affords excellent

anchorage W of an islet off the S side of the harbor. The bottom is sand, except under the kelp. 

13.15 Port du Milieu and Baie des Astronomes are entered within a

distance of 2 miles S of Anse Pingouin. Both Port du Milieu

and Baie des Astronomes afford good anchorage, but a reef of

rocks extends completely across Port du Milieu 0.5 mile within

its entrance, and there are numerous islets and some foul

ground at the head of Baie des Astronomes. They should both

be approached by way of the channel between Ilots Bobzien

and Ile Francis.

13.16 Port Roland Bonaparte (49°02'S., 69°39'E.) consists

of the narrow channel lying between Ile Maroon and the mainland S. The fairway N of the foul ground, extending from the S

side of the E entrance, has depths of 15m. A shoal, with a least

depth of 1.8m, lies 0.2 mile off the S side of the harbor 0.9 mile

within its E entrance.

13.16 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be obtained by small vessels,

in 8 to 10m, near the middle of the harbor, 0.5 mile within the

E entrance.

Baie du Hopeful (49°05'S., 69°34'E.) is entered about 3

miles SSW of Port Roland Bonaparte; it is one of the best shelters in Iles Kerguelen. 

13.16 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken, in 18m, in Mouillage Bon Abri, at the head of Baie du Hopeful. Anchorage can

also be taken, in 20m, close off Cascade de la Lozere, by laying

out hawsers to iron moorings secured in the rock. This posiion

is well-sheltered from the N and W winds, but is exposed S. 

13.17 Baie le Verrier (49°07'S., 69°34'E.), entered between

Pointe Araud and Ile Violette, 0.5 mile S, is similar to Baie du

Hopeful in shape and direction, but anchorage can only be obtained near its head, where there is a narrow steep-to bank,

with a depth of 8.8m, the remainder being too deep. Both Baie

du Hopeful and Baie le Verrier are fronted by banks of kelp,

through which a vessel should pick the way where it is thinnest.

13.17 Golfe des Baleiniers is the extensive area between Presqu’ile

Joffre and Presqu’ile Courbet.

13.17 It is advisable when proceeding into the inner part of Golfe

des Baleiniers, either to keep close to Presqu’ile Joffre or else

to pass S of Roche du Chenal (49°08'S., 69°45'E.). A midchannel course can then be followed through Chenal Clery in

deep water to avoid the foul ground off some of the projections

on the S shore of Presqu’ile Joffre.

13.18 Ile Henry (49°06'S., 69°42'E.), flat-topped and precipitous on all sides, is easily identified and a useful mark for

the inner part of Baie des Baleiniers.

13.18 Baie du Yacht Club is a narrow inlet leading off the S part of

Baie de la Baleine. The entrance to the bay is very constricted

by the rocks projecting from the SE point of the entrance. In

the approach channel, which is about 200m wide, depths vary

from 13 to 31m.

13.18 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken in a bight W of foul

ground extending about 0.2 mile SW from Ile aux Prions, the

largest islet, in the outer part of the inlet. The depths are 18m

and the bottom is mud.

13.18 Port Fleuriais is a cove entered on the NW side of Baie de la

Baleine and on the SE side of the isthmus, which connects Presqu’ile Joffre with the mainland. Foul ground extends a short

distance from Pointe Marcq, the E entrance point. 

13.18 The cove provides the best anchorage in Baie de la Baleine,

in 12 to 15m, being protected by high hills from the prevailing

winds.

13.18 Baie de la Marne, the SW head of Baie de la Baleine, affords

good anchorage, in 11 to 22m, in its NW part; elsewhere the

depths are too great.

Port Rosa (49°08'S., 69°23'E.), entered on the NW side of Presqu’ile Hoche, is a small cove affording anchorage, in 6 to 12m,

with perfect shelter from all winds. The cove is open N, but is

sheltered from that direction by the heights of Presqu’ile Joffre.

13.18 Port Louison lies on the E side of Presqu’ile Hoche. It provides good, safe anchorage, but is open to any swell that may

fetch into Baie du Sondeur during E winds, and during W or

SW winds the squalls are sometimes extremely violent.

13.18 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be obtained, in 25m, very

sticky mud and good holding ground, 0.2 mile SSE of the E of

three islets off the N side of Port Louison.

13.19 Baie Keller (49°11'S., 69°23'E.), which is deep, lies

1.3 miles SW of the SE extremity of Presqu’ile Hoche. Anse

Suffren and Baie Chanzy lie on the N and S sides of the inlet,

respectively.

13.19 Good and well-protected anchorage can be obtained close E

of the islet lying in mid-channel off the entrance of Anse Suffren and Baie Chanzy; a large vessel should moor, as this anchorage is restricted. A vessel proceeding to Baie Chanzy can

pass on either side of this islet.

13.19 Anse Suffren provides excellent, but restricted anchorage, in

9 to 13m, good holding ground.

13.19 Baie Chanzy is deep, except on its W side, where good anchorage can be obtained. To reach the Anse Suffren anchorage

and that of Baie Chanzy coming from Baie du Sondeur, a vessel may either pass between Presqu’ile Hoche and Iles du Passage, or pass between Ile du Port and Iles du Passage, then into

Baie Keller, which is deep. In the second case, hug the W point

of Ile du Port to avoid the dangers projecting SE from the E extremity of the easternmost of Iles du Passage.

13.19 Ile du Port, located at the WSW extremity of Golfe des Bale-
Sector 13. Prince Edward Islands, Iles Crozet, Iles Kerguelen, Ile Saint-Paul, Ile Amsterdam 187

Pub. 171

niers, is marked by two summits, the highest of which is 293m

in the W part of the island.

13.20 Baie Cachee (49°13'S., 69°26'E.) lies 1.8 miles S of

Baie Keller and W of Iles Borda, which lie S of Iles du Passage; it affords good anchorage, in 10m, in its middle.

13.20 Bassin de Boulogne lies on the N side of the narrow isthmus,

Halage du Doris, which connects Presqu’ile Fanny with the

mainland. The entrance of the basin is only 90m wide and encumbered with kelp, but has a least depth of 5m. Within the basin there are depths of 8 to 20m, but a rock, awash, lies close

off its S side.

13.20 Port d’Hiver lies between Presqu’ile Carnot and Presqu’ile

Fanny. Pointe Laure lies on the N side of the harbor, 0.5 mile

within the entrance. Ilot Py lies close off the N side of the harbor, 1.5 miles W of Pointe Laure. Ilot Guibon lies close off the

S side of the harbor near its head.

13.20 Anchorage.—Good anchorage can be obtained, in 14.6m,

mud, 0.7 mile WSW of the W extremity of Ilot Py, and E of the

narrow entrance of a lagoon; this anchorage is known as Port

de l’Eure.

13.20 There is another anchorage, in 18m, 0.4 mile S of the three

islets off Pointe Laure.

13.20 Anchorage can also be obtained in the bight on the S side of

the harbor, S of Ilot Py and E of Ilot Guibon.

13.20 Directions.—The best approach to Port d’Hiver is by way of

Baie du Hillsborough and Chenal du Chasseur. Petit Mont Ballon (49°14'S., 69°23'E.), bearing about 265°, leads up Chenal

du Chasseur. If proceeding to the E anchorage, pass S of the

three islets off Pointe Laure, but if proceeding to the inner anchorage, pass N of them. A vessel can proceed from Port

d’Hiver to Baie Irlandaise by way of Passe Husker, but care is

necessary to avoid the sunken rocks off its S entrance.

13.21 Baie Doumergue is the area between the E side of Ile

du Port and Iles Challenger to the E. There are four anchorages

in Baie Doumergue, but they are all more or less exposed to E

winds. These anchorages each lie off a long stretch of sandy

beach. One of them, Anse Risler, is entered 1.5 miles S of Cap

Chabrillat, between Pointe Raoux and Pointe Bats. The S of

these anchorages lies close SW of Pointe Marmite, the SE extremity of Ile du Port, and is protected on its S side by Ile Bellouard and Ile Colomban. This harbor was formerly used by

seal hunters, and is the only one of the four anchorages which

can be recommended. 

13.21 Foul ground extends a short distance from the N and NW

sides of Ile Bellouard, restricting the NE entrance to the anchorage to a width of 0.2 mile.

13.21 Baie du Hillsborough lies on the S side of Golfe des Baleiniers and is entered between Iles Challenger and Pointe du

Chien (49°15'S., 69°51'E.), 7 miles E. There is no difficulty in

approaching Baie du Hillsborough. Mont Campbell (49°04'S.,

70°19'E.) and Sommet Cheminee (49°12'S., 70°00'E.) are good

landmarks. Iles Challenger, Roche du Chenal, Ile Henry, and

the entrance to Chanal Clery are also easily distinguished.

13.21 Baie Irlandaise is entered between Cap Kersaint (49°15'S.,

69°44'E.) and the E extremity of Ile du Canard, 3.5 miles

WNW. It extends 12 miles W, separating Presqu’ile Carnot

from Presqu’ile Bouquet de la Grye. Two groups of reefs are

found in the middle of the E entrance to the bay. Passage can

be effected either N or S of these dangers. Ile du Corbeau lies

between Ile du Canard and the E extremity of Presqu’ile Carnot.

13.21 During N winds, anchorage can be obtained, in 18m, off the

SE side of Ile du Corbeau. Anchorage can also be obtained at

the extreme head of the bay, but here the depths shoal very

abruptly to the loose rocks brought down by the glacier W. 

13.21 These anchorages, although they afford some protection, are

not good, because of the violent squalls experienced and the

bad holding ground.

13.21 Bras de la Fonderie is entered between Cap Allaire

(49°16'S., 69°48'E.) and Cap Kersaint (49°15'S., 69°44'E.),

about 1.5 miles W. On the NW side of the outer part are Port

Pigeon and Port Couvreux, both of which afford protection

from all winds. 

13.21 Port Couvreux is entered between Pointe Poste, 0.3 miles S of

Cap Kersaint, and Pointe des Trois Bergers, 0.5 mile farther S.

13.21 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be obtained, in 22m, 0.2 mile

E of Ile aux Canards, which lies close off the extremity of a

small projection extending E from the head of the harbor.

13.21 A vessel anchored, in 31m, 0.4 mile ESE of Pointe des Trois

Bergers. It reported that this is the most sheltered anchorage in

Iles Kerguelen and is capable of accommodating several vessels.

13.21 Large vessels may anchor, in about 30m, ESE of Pointe des

Trois Bergers, with Ile des Trois Bergers bearing 305°° and the

E side of Ilot Mierry (49°17'S., 69°43'E.) bearing 205°.

13.22 Bassin de la Gazelle (49°18'S., 69°41'E.), probably

the best harbor in Iles Kerguelen, is entered by a narrow channel S of Pointe Alnet. The entrance, which is scarcely visible

until close to it, has depths of from 16.5 to 25.6m. A cairn on

the N side, 3.4m high and painted black, is visible against a

background of gray rocks from Bassin de la Gazelle.

13.22 Anchorage in Bassin de la Gazelle is presently prohibited

(1974) because of the presence of mines.

13.22 Directions.—When entering Bras de la Fonderie, steer for

Mont de la Valdivia, bearing 215°, which lies 1.3 miles S of

Bassin de la Gazelle. 

13.22 In clear weather, Pyramide Noire, 820m high, 12.5 miles SW

of Mont de la Valdivia, will be seen just W of that mountain,

when passing E of Roche du Chenal and Recif Bas. When 1

mile E of Recif Bas alter course so as to pass in mid-channel

up Bras de la Fonderie. If proceeding to Bassin de la Gazelle,

continue in mid-channel until abreast an islet lying N of the entrance, then steer gradually W and pass in mid-channel through

the narrow entrance.

13.22 Baie du Beau Temps leads off generally W from the W part

of Bassin de la Gazelle. Islets lie in about the middle of the

connecting channels; depths of 12.8 to 16.4m can be followed

through the channel, S of the islets. There is anchorage for two

small vessels in Baie du Beau Temps, but N and NW winds

raise sufficient sea to be dangerous for boats. Rocks, awash,

exist in several places.

13.22 Port Kirk and Anse de Vulcan are entered on the SE side of

Baie du Hillsborough, between Cap Allaire and Pointe du

Chien, 4.5 miles NE; both of these inlets are open to N winds.

13.22 Port Kirk is full of kelp, but contains no known dangers.

There are depths of 18.3m, 1.5 miles within the entrance, and

of 5.5m near its head.
188 Sector 13. Prince Edward Islands, Iles Crozet, Iles Kerguelen, Ile Saint-Paul, Ile Amsterdam 

Pub. 171

13.22 In the middle of the entrance of Anse de Vulcan, there is a

reef covered with kelp; the position of the reef is approximate.

There are depths of 13m on each side of the reef. There is good

anchorage, in 9 to 15m, within the reef, but it would be very

unsafe when a N swell is running.

13.23 Port Elisabeth is entered on the E side of the entrance

of Baie du Hillsborough, between Pointe du Chien and a point

0.7 mile ENE; it provides moderately safe anchorage. The harbor is narrow and accessible only to small vessels. The harbor

is full of kelp, but anchorage can be obtained, in 5.8m, in the

inner part of the harbor, 0.1 mile offshore, S of Mont Bayley.

13.23 Baie Bayley is entered on the NW side of Peninsule Courbet

between Pointe de la Breche (49°10'S., 69°56'E.) and Pointe

Mowbray, 1 mile farther NE. Pointe de la Breche has a conspicuous fissure visible from the W. This bay has not been

thoroughly examined, but anchorage can be obtained, in 15m,

with the W entrance point bearing 300°, and the E entrance

point bearing 015°. 

13.23 Baie Charrier is entered between a point 1.5 miles ENE of

Cap Daniel (49°08'S., 69°58'E.) and Cap Listenois, 1.3 miles

farther NE. 

13.23 A small vessel might anchor, with favorable winds, in Baie

Charrier. Baie Charrier may be approached from the NE, either

by proceeding midway between Iles Kent and Roches du Desespoir, or by a route sufficiently S of the latter to avoid a rocky

shelf extending from them. A course of 143°, passing SW of a

conspicuous rock, leads into the bay. 

13.23 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken, in 6m, with Ilot

Cagne bearing 288°, the conspicuous rock bearing 338°, and

Ilot Abbot bearing 000°.

13.23 Baie Accessible is entered between Pointe Scott (49°06'S.,

70°06'E.) and Cap de Chartres, 6 miles farther ENE. This bay contains two moderately secure anchorages, one in Baie des Cascades, in its SW part, and the other in Anse Betsy, in its SE part.

13.23 Baie des Cascades affords anchorage, in 11 to 37m, but is

open to NE winds, which send in a heavy swell. Anse Betsy

lies on the W side of the SE part of Baie Accessible.

13.24 Between Cap Digby (49°05'S., 70°32'E.) and Cap

Sandwich, 5.8 miles S, there is a bay on the E side of Peninsule

Courbet. This bay is full of kelp, but during W winds, anchorage is available, in 25 to 30m, 2 miles S of Cap Digby and 4

miles ESE of Mont Bungay.

13.24 Baie Norvegienne is entered between Pointe Morne

(49°22'S., 70°27'E.) and Pointe Suzanne, 3.5 miles S. This bay

is full of kelp, however; the best anchorage is 0.3 mile SSW of

Pointe Morne, but care should be taken to avoid a sunken reef

lying close inshore, 0.8 mile W of the point. 

13.24 During W winds, a vessel may anchor on the alignments of

the summits of Mont Peeper and Mont Bungay, good holding

ground, about 1.4 miles from Pointe Morne.

13.24 Baie du Morbihan lies mainly between Peninsule Courbet

and Presquile Ronarc’h to the S. The SW part of this area is

taken up by an archipelago of flat-topped islands of various sizes. Passages between the islands are usually deep.

13.24 Baie de l’Aurore-Australe is entered on the N side of Golfe

du Morbihan, between Pointe Guite (49°25'S., 70°17'E.), 6.5

miles W of Pointe Suzanne, and Pointe Molloy, 8 miles farther

WNW.

13.24 Range lights are exhibited from a pair of white beacons 1

mile N of Pointe Molloy. These lights, in line bearing 314.5°,

lead to an anchorage, in 18m, located 0.6 mile SE of the front

range light.

13.25 Port-aux-Francais (49°21'S., 70°13'E.) is a small inlet in the middle of the coast between Pointe Guite and Pointe

Malloy. A conspicuous church stands 0.6 mile W of the head of

the inlet.

13.25 Directions.—The E side of Baie de l’Aurore-Australe is encumbered by kelp which extends 1.5 miles SW from Ilot Channer, but the anchorages can be approached, in depths of 27 to

37m and clear of all known dangers, by steering for Pointe de

l’Epave, 2.3 miles ENE of Pointe Molloy, bearing 000° until

the range beacons come into sight, having regard to a rock,

awash, which lies 0.7 mile S of that point.

13.25 Two lighted beacons are located on the SE shore near the

head of the inlet. The lighted beacons, in line bearing 058°,

mark the approach to the anchorage. The lighted beacons on

the NW shore, in line bearing 329°, indicate the most favorable

position for anchoring.

13.25 Anchorage.—Anchorage may be obtained, in 27m, black

basaltic sand bottom, good holding ground, on the alignment of

two pairs of lighted range beacons, bearing 058° and 329°.

Two radio masts, each 72m high, conspicuous and marked by a

quick flashing white light, stand 0.7 mile NE and 1 mile NNE

of the front beacon of the E pair of the range beacons. 

13.25 Ile Murray, marked by a light, is the largest of several islands

lying off the NE shore of Presquile Ronarch. A large vessel can

anchor with sufficient maneuvering room about 1 mile E or NE

of the island. A vessel is sheltered here from the W swell.

13.26 Port Navalo (49°30'S., 70°13'E.) is located within a

number of islands lying off the N side of Presquile Ronarch

and is one of the best anchorages in Iles Kerguelen. It is convenient for a vessel arriving off the entrance of Passe Royale in

the evening and not wishing to proceed farther in before daylight.

13.26 Anchorage.— A vessel anchored midway between two

fields of kelp, in 22 to 26m, bottom of black mud good holding

ground, with the lighthouse on Ile Murray bearing 085°°, distant about 1 mile, and Pain de Sucre (49°33'S., 70°15'E.) bearing 174°. A strong W gale was experienced here without

dragging. Anchorage, in a depth of about 26m, may be obtained on the W side of the harbor 0.3 mile E and 0.5 mile NE

of Ilot Sharbau.

13.26 Directions.—The best approach to Port Navolo appears to

be from the N between Ile de l’Antares and Ilot Boyle, about 1

mile W. Approaching the harbor from Passe Royale, a vessel

passed, in a least depth of 20m, 0.2 mile W of Ile de l’Antares.

The vessel then steered for Pain de Sucre until clear of the kelp

extending from Ile de l’Antares, when it altered course towards

Ile Murray, passing between the fields of kelp extending from

Ile de l’Antares and from Presqu’ile Ronarch. These two fields

of kelp are separated by a clear space more than 0.5 mile wide

from N to S.

13.26 Caution.—A depth of 8m lies about 5 miles E of Cap de la

Geologie, the NE extremity of Presqu’ile Ronarch.

13.27 Port des Iles (49°28'S., 70°04'E.) lies in the central
Sector 13. Prince Edward Islands, Iles Crozet, Iles Kerguelen, Ile Saint-Paul, Ile Amsterdam 189

Pub. 171

part of Baie du Morbihan, 11 miles within the entrance. It is a

well-protected anchorage formed between a group of four islands. Except for the channel from the SW, between Ile du Cochon and Ile du Cimetiere, which is shallow and blocked with

kelp, the channels leading into the harbor are safe and deep, the

dangers being marked by kelp.

13.27 Baie de l’Observatoire (49°25'S., 69°54'E.) lies 7 miles

WNW of Port des Iles. It is a narrow inlet 1 mile long, with

depths from 7 to 16m, black sticky mud and excellent holding

ground. Two vessels rode out numerous gales in this anchorage, and also in Baie Supply, similar to Baie de l’Observatoire,

and lying WSW of the W end of Ile Longue.

13.27 Port Jeanne d’Arc (49°32'S., 69°49'E.) lies on the S side of

Chenal de Port Jeanne d’Arc, 7.5 miles WNW of the SE extremity of Ile Longue. On a plateau 2.3 miles W of the port is

Le Dome Rouge, a conspicuous reddish-colored mountain,

350m high.

13.27 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be obtained in any part of the

harbor, but the holding ground is not good, and a vessel should

keep main engines ready in bad weather. The holding ground

appears to be better near the S side than near Ile Longue.

Squalls, with wind speeds reaching as much as 78 knots, have

been reported at Port Jeanne d’Arc.

13.27 Directions.—The safest route into Golfe du Morbihan from

seaward, for vessels with a draft of less than 20m, passes about

1 mile S of Roche Harston. From a position between that rock

and Roche Balfour, make good a course of 270° for the N end

of Ile Suhm. When the entrance range bears 314.5°, change

course to that bearing.

13.27 If proceeding to Port des Iles, pass N of Ile Haynes, which

lies about 1 mile NW of the N extremity of Ile Suhm. From the

entrance of Golfe du Morbihan to Port des Iles, the depths vary

from 28 to 56m; within Port des Iles, the depths are irregular.

13.27 If proceeding to Baie de l’Observatoire or Port Jeanne d’Arc,

pass midway between Ile Haynes and Ile Suhm. If proceeding

to Baie de l’Observatoire, pass S of Ile du Cimetiere, then N of

Ile Greak, Ile Penn, and Ile Mayes. If proceeding to Port

Jeanne d’Arc, steer through Passe de l’Hydrographie, then

round the E end of Ile Longue, taking care to avoid Roches du

Dr-Green, as well as the shoals lying off the E end of Ile

Longue.

13.28 Port du Ketch (49°29'S., 69°54'E.) lies between the

SE extremity of Ile Australia and Ile du Chateau; it affords anchorage, in 16.4m. Bras Bolinder is the W bay formed between

Presquile Ronarch’h and Presqui’ile Jeanne d’Arc.

13.28 Baie Greenland is entered between Mac Lear (Cap Maclear)

(49°38'S., 70°17'E.) and the NE side of Presqu’ile Jeanne

d’Arc, 2.5 miles SW. Cap Mac Lear is a useful mark when approaching Iles Kerguelen from the S. 

13.28 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be obtained in the middle of

the bay, but kelp should be avoided. The bay is subject to sudden violent squalls.The S side of Iles Kergulen is as well-sheltered as the E side from the prevailing W winds, at least during

the S hemisphere summer.

13.29 Cap du Challenger (49°44'S., 70°05'E.) is a ragged

point, with two pinnacle rocks of considerable height close to

its extremity.

13.29 Baie des Swains is entered between Cap Alphonse Rio

(49°39'S., 69°38'E.) and the SW extremity of Presquile Jeanne

d’Arc, 6.8 miles E.

13.29 Anse du Volage, the E arm at the head of Baie des Swains,

affords good and secure anchorage, in 18m or less, soft mud.

13.29 Baie d’Audierne is entered between Pointe de Penmarch

(49°37'S., 69°25'E.) and Cap Dauphin, 15 miles WSW. Because of Roche Andre (49°40'S., 69°14'E.) and the other dangers in the bay, it should be approached with great caution. The

dangers are in such an exposed position that the existence of

kelp over them cannot be relied upon.

13.29 Fjord Larose is the E recess at the head of Baie d’Audierne.

13.29 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be obtained, in 9m, near the

head of Fjord Larose, 3 miles NW of Doigt de Ste. Anne

(49°34'S., 69°23'E.), but it is restricted and difficult to access.

13.29 Directions.—If proceeding to Anse du Volage, pass between

the SW entrance point of Anse aux Ecueils and Ile Leon Lefevre, which lies close SE of it, and then between the NE entrance point of the same bay and the islands lying NE of Ile

Leon Lefevre. The least depth found was in the narrows between Ile Leon Lefevre and the peninsula, 75m high, NW, was

a depth of 22m in mid-channel and 16.5m close to the kelp.

13.30 Baie de la Table is entered between Pointe de

l’Oceanographie (49°36'S., 69°14'E.) and the S of Ilots Joubin,

2.5 miles E. There are several good anchorages in Baie de la

Table, but great caution is necessary because of the islets and

sunken rocks on both sides of the entrance and the fairway between, which is about 1.3 miles wide.

13.30 A vessel may anchor, in 35m, at the head of Baie de la Table

off the entrance of a fjord named Portes Noires.

13.30 Baie de la Mouche is entered 3.8 miles N of Cap Dauphin.

Anchorage can be obtained, in 9 to 25m, at the entrance or farther in at Port du Sprightly, a cove on the E side of Baie de la

Mouche, 1.8 miles within the entrance, but it is not recommended. Fierce N squalls are experienced here at times.

13.30 Cap Dauphin (49°41'S., 69°03'E.) rises steeply to Mont de

Volz. Anse du Gros Ventre lies about 5.5 miles WSW of Cap

Dauphin. A vessel has anchored in this cove.

13.30 Cap Bourbon (49°43'S., 68°47'E.), the SW extremity of Iles

Kerguelen, is low but rises to Pic St. Allouarn. 

13.31 Port de l’Enfer (49°31'S., 68°51'E.) consists of a

cave in the face of a cliff, the entrance of which is 30m high

and shows up like a gateway. To the S of Port de l’Enfer, at elevations varying from sea level to over 213m, many jets of

steam, issuing from hot springs, have been observed. The shore

should not be approached closer than 5 miles between Cap

Bourbon and Port de l’Enfer.

13.31 Baie Bretonne is entered between Port de l’Enfer and Cap

Louis (49°21'S., 68°39'E.), 10.8 miles NW. Baie du Loon, 3.5

miles E of Cap Louis, affords excellent anchorage, free from

kelp, in 18m, in its NE corner. There is a sunken rock 0.3 mile

W of the W entrance, which is the only navigable entrance.

13.31 Anse Mallet is entered midway along the W side of Ile de

l’Ouest. There are depths of 37m in the entrance and 7.3m near

its head. Good anchorage can be obtained, in 22m, halfway up

the inlet.

13.31 Anse du Monument lies on the N side of Ile de l’Ouest, 2.8

miles E of Cap Rosnevet and is very small, but has a depth of

14.6m. Foul ground extends a short distance from the W en-
190 Sector 13. Prince Edward Islands, Iles Crozet, Iles Kerguelen, Ile Saint-Paul, Ile Amsterdam 

Pub. 171

trance point. The monolith formation, from which the cove derives its name, is very impressive.

13.32 Anse du Duncan is entered 0.8 mile SE of Cap de

l’Abri (49°20'S., 68°47'E.), the NE extremity of Ile de l’Ouest

and on the W side of the N approach to Detroit de la Marianne.

Good anchorage can be obtained, in 12 to 13m, sand, good

holding ground, 0.4 mile from the head of Anse du Duncan.

Attention should be paid to the rocks in the entrance approaches. 

13.32 Detroit de la Marianne, the central part of which is known as

Port Curieuse (49°22'S., 68°49'E.), lies between Ile de l’Ouest

and the mainland E.

13.32 Detroit de la Marianne is sheltered from all winds and is the

warmest place on the W side of Iles Kerguelen. Outside the

strait the cold is usually intense, especially when the wind

blows off Glacier Cook. 

13.32 Small vessels can obtain anchorage in Port Curieuse, but the

channel is often encumbered with ice which has calved from

the numerous glaciers which descend to the coast in this vicinity.

13.32 The tidal currents in the N entrance are very strong, setting S

during the rising tide and N during the falling tide.

13.32 About 0.5 mile S of the N entrance, the strait contracts to a

width of only 15m. Within a depth of 22m and when approaching the entrance from the N, it is difficult to make out. The broken water over Roche Loranchet can be seen as the strait is approached.

13.32 The fairway through the S entrance is 0.2 mile wide and safe,

with depths of 26 to 35m. The sea breaks heavily over the dangers on both sides.

13.32 Secure anchorage, with good holding ground, can be obtained, in 31m, sand, in the middle of the strait, 0.4 mile S of

the narrows. The anchorage is well-sheltered from all winds.

13.32 Baie Francaise is the extensive bight between Cap Rosnevet

(49°20'S., 68°43'E.) and Cap Bon Espoir, 6.5 miles NE. At its

head are Baie du Tonnerre and Anse de Quiberon.

13.32 Baie du Tonnerre (49°20'S., 68°53'E.) is entered between

Pointe Richard, 2.3 miles E of Cap l’Abri, and Pointe Berger,

0.8 mile N of Pointe Richard. A reef, the outer part of which is

sunken, extends 0.5 mile N from Pointe Richard, leaving a narrow passage, with a least depth of 8m, leading into the harbor.

13.32 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be obtained, in 18 to 42m, 0.5

mile within the entrance and close off the N side of the harbor.

This anchorage is partly protected by the reef extending N

from Pointe Richard, but the prevailing W winds and ice calving from the glaciers render it insecure.

13.33 Anse de Quiberon (49°16'S., 68°54'E.) is entered between a point which rises to Les Deux Cones, 2 miles SE of

Cap Bon Espoir, and a point 2 miles farther SSE. This bay is

open to the prevailing W winds and can therefore hardly be

considered a safe anchorage. Foul ground extends 0.5 mile off

the N entrance point and an islet and a submerged rock lie

close off its S entrance point. Submerged rocks lie close off the

N side of the bay in places; an above-water rock lies close off

its head.

Crique du Sac a Plomb (49°15'S., 68°54'E.), an almost circular basin, is entered on the N side of Anse de Quiberon by

way of a very narrow channel. In the middle of the entrance of

this channel is a rock, on which the sea breaks, and which

should be left on the starboard hand when entering. Anchorage

can be obtained, in 18 to 27m, mud, off the head of Crique du

Sac a Plomb.

13.33 Baie Invisible is entered 1 mile S of Pointe Pages (49°10'S.,

68°48'E.). The entrance of this bay consists of a very narrow

break in the cliffs, quite indistinguishable by a stranger, but

within, the bay opens out into a considerable basin. Good anchorage can be obtained, in 47m, a short distance S of a stream.

The swell in the entrance is frequently very heavy.

13.33 Baie de l’African, which has not been closely examined, is

entered between Pointe Pages and Pointe de Tromelin, 1.2

miles NNE. Anse du Cirque, on the S side of the bay, affords

excellent anchorage, in 20 to 26m. The SE arm of Baie de l’African is open W and, though the holding ground is good, it is

not recommended as an anchorage. The Riviere Penfeld, the

NE arm, though well-sheltered, affords only restricted anchorage, in 47 to 55m, mud, at its extreme head. Anse du Cirque is

the best anchorage in Baie de l’African.

13.33 Baie de Benodet is entered 2.5 miles SE of Cap Marigny

(49°06'S., 68°46'E.). This bay affords anchorage, with excellent shelter, in 30m. Vessels entering the bay should pass E of a

chain of reefs lying about 1 mile SW of the entrance.

13.33 Caution.—A danger area, 1.7 miles wide and 2 miles long,

is centered 2.5 miles SW of Cap Marigny.

13.34 Baie Inconnue is entered N of Pointe Farman

(49°02'S., 68°48'E.). The entrance is about 0.2 mile wide, but

is encumbered with rocks; within, the bay opens out and provides anchorage, in 20m, mud. The best anchorage, in 13m,

mud, is in a cove on the E side. The coast between this bay and

Pointe du Cuir Sale (48°58'S., 68°51'E.) should be given a

berth of at least 2 miles.

13.34 Baie Rocheuse, entered E of Pointe Bleriot (48°58'S.,

68°52'E.), trends S for 3 miles and terminates at a sandy beach.

Anchorage off the beach is poor, but elsewhere in the bay it is

good, if kelp be avoided. The best berth, in 20m, is halfway up

the bay and nearer its W side; there is a rock, awash, a short

distance E of this anchorage.

Ile Saint-Paul and Ile Amsterdam

13.35 Ile Saint-Paul (38°43'S., 77°33'E.) and Ile Amsterdam (37°50'S., 77°30'E.), two isolated islands of volcanic origin, are French possessions. From April to October, they

should be approached with great caution as strong W winds are

then prevalent. As the islands are steep-to, soundings give little

warning when approaching in thick weather. Midway between

the islands lies a seamount, with a least depth of 9m. 

13.35 These islands have been declared sanctuaries for the preservation of all forms of wildlife.

13.35 Access to these islands is prohibited except in special case.

The Chief Administrator may authorize access with a written

request received at least 3 months in advance, except in special

circumstances.

13.36 Ile Saint-Paul (38°43'S., 77°33'E.) attains an elevation of 271m and a considerable part of its area is occupied by

a circular basin, formed by the crater of an extinct volcano. The

NE side of the crater has broken down. In clear weather, Ile
Sector 13. Prince Edward Islands, Iles Crozet, Iles Kerguelen, Ile Saint-Paul, Ile Amsterdam 191

Pub. 171

Saint-Paul is visible from a distance of 60 miles.

13.36 There are no trees on the island, but it is covered with grass

and bushes, the latter sometimes being 2.1m high. Rocher

Quille (Ninepin Rock), a formation of lava in horizontal layers,

lies on the NW side of the entrance of the basin. The island is

visible in clear weather from 30 miles.

13.36 From April to October, the island should be approached with

great caution as strong W winds are then prevalent. As the island is steep-to, soundings give little warning when approaching in thick weather. There are no known dangers more than

0.1 mile offshore.

13.36 Winds—Weather.—Winds from directions between the NE

through N to NW raise a heavy sea in the vicinity of Ile SaintPaul. Winds from directions between the NNW and NW blow

parallel with the NE shore of the island, and vessels can lie in

safety at the anchorage NNE of the entrance to the basin.

13.36 With SW winds, terrific squalls blowing down the sides of

the crater appear to alternate with sudden calms, these often

abrupt alternations are very dangerous.

13.36 Squalls from the SE are rare, but if one comes a vessel

should put to sea immediately. Ile Saint-Paul is too small to

provide much shelter from W squalls to vessels moored off its

NE shore.

13.36 Tides—Currents.—Nearly 1 mile off the NE side of Ile

Saint-Paul, the flood current sets NW from LW to 2 hours after

HW, or for 8 hours, and the ebb current sets SE from 2 hours

after HW to LW.

13.36 About 0.4 mile off the NE side of the island, the flood current sets SSE from LW to HW and the ebb current sets NNW

from HW to LW; the currents attain a velocity of 1 knot at

springs.

13.36 Anchorage.—There is anchorage off the basin entrance with

Rocher Quille bearing 282°, distant almost 0.3 mile, in depths

of 23 to 32m. Anchorage is also available with Rocher Quille

bearing 322°°, distant 0.4 mile, in depths of 12 to 17m. A better berth, most frequently used except during E winds, is 0.3 to

0.4 mile E of Rocher Quille, in depths of 23 to 30m, black

sand, good holding ground. A vessel anchored, without dragging, during 45 knot winds from the SSE, with Pointe Smith

(Schmith Point), the NW extremity, bearing 065°, distant 0.4

mile. Anchorage should not be taken in any position in which

Rocher du Milieu or Ilot Nord is shut in or open W of Rocher

Quille. 

13.37 Ile Amsterdam (37°50'S., 77°33'E) has a verdant aspect. It is said to be visible up to 60 miles.

13.37 From April to October, the island should be approached with

great caution, as strong W winds are then prevalent. As the island is steep-to, soundings give little warning when approaching in thick weather. There are no known dangers more than

0.1 mile offshore.

13.37 Pointe d’ Entrecasteaux, on the W side, 2.5 miles NW of

Pointe Vlaming, the S extremity, is conspicuous because of its

pointed summit and jagged edges. Pointe Vlaming, when bearing 112°, appears as a precipitous bluff. The coasts of the island are generally free of dangers, except near the points,

which are bordered by breakers; a rock lies about 0.2 mile offshore about 1 mile S of the NW extremity of the island. Abovewater rocks lie 1.7 miles SSE of the NE extremity of the island;

the existence of these rocks is doubtful.

13.37 A meteorological station, with a flagstaff, is permanently established close SW of Pointe Hosken (37°49'S., 77°35'E.), the

NE extremity of the island. Between the station and Pointe

Goodenough to the W, is Chaussee des Otaries, the only beach

on the island.

13.37 Winds—Weather.—The prevailing wind is from the W. 

13.37 Tides—Currents.—The tidal currents are strong off the

coast; vessels seldom lie head to the wind.

13.37 Anchorage.—The anchorages off Ile Amsterdam are temporary only.

13.37 The safest anchorage, known as Mouillage du Ribault

(Mouillage du Pingouin), is 0.7 mile SE of Pointe Hosken, in

depths of 25 to 40m, good holding ground of black sand. 

13.37 A vessel should anchor 0.3 mile offshore on the alignment of

two beacons with white daymarks, from which lights are occasionally exhibited, bearing 244°, and with a pointed above-water rock in line with the extremity of a conspicuous landslide,

bearing 171°.

13.37 North of the meteorological station, Mouillage du Gonio has

depths of 35m, fair holding ground. A vessel anchors on the

alignment of two beacons with white daymarks, from which

lights are occasionally exhibited, bearing 224.5° and with the

flagstaff bearing 165°.

13.37 There is good temporary anchorage, sheltered from N winds,

0.3 mile off the SE coast of the island, in 25 to 31m, good holding ground, with Pointe Vlaming bearing 255°, distant 1.2

miles. 

13.37 Anchorage is available by day off Pointe Eboulement

(37°50'S., 77°36'E.), about 1.3 miles SSE of Pointe Hosken,

with Pointe Eboulement Cliff and a pointed black rock, in line

bearing 170°. This anchorage is available to vessels with a

maximum length of 130m. The current sets generally parallel

with the coast, either NNW or SSE.

13.37 During N swells, a vessel may anchor in calm water, in 25 to

30m, good holding ground, about 1 mile S of the crater Le

Fourneau, which rises nearly 0.8 mile WSW of Cap Novara

(37°52'S., 77°36'E.).
Pub. 171

Glossaries 193

Glossaries

AFRIKAANS

AFRIKAANS English

A

agter, op die agterskip ................................................. astern

ankerplek, ankergeld ............................................ anchorage

B

baai.........................................................................bay, inlet

baken......................................................................... beacon

berg ................................................................ hill, mountain

blou ................................................................................blue

boot ................................................................................boat

bult ................................................................. hill, mountain

D

donker ..........................................................................black

drift................................................................. hill, mountain

dryftou...........................................................................buoy

duin ........................................................................mountain

dyk ................................................................................mole

E

ebgety..................................................................ebb current

eiland........................................................................... island

eilandjie..........................................................................islet

end..........................................................................mountain

G

gebergte..................................................................mountain

geel.............................................................................yellow

gety, eb en vloed .............................................................tide

gevaar.........................................................................danger

glans.............................................................................. light

H

hawe ...................................................................port, harbor

hawehoof..................................................... pier, quay, mole

heuwel............................................................ hill, mountain

hinderpaal.........................................................................bar

hoek....................................................point, hook, headland

hoogte.....................................................................mountain

hoogwater...................................... high water, flood current

I

ingang................................................entrance, port (harbor)

inham .............................................................................inlet

K

kaai.....................................................................quay, wharf

kaap............................................................................... cape

kanaal.............................................................canal, channel

klip ................................................................. hill, mountain

kloof............................................................................ravine

kolk ................................................................................lake

kop ................................................................. hill, mountain

kopjes.....................................................................mountain

koppe .....................................................................mountain

koppie ............................................................ hill, mountain

krans .............................................................. hill, mountain

krantz .....................................................................mountain

kus.................................................................................coast

L

laagwater........................................... low water, ebb current

lig...................................................................................light

loods vir mariniers.........................................................pilot

loop ............................................................................ stream

M

meer ............................................................................... lake

mis ...................................................................................fog

mont.......................................................................mountain

N

nek ........................................................................... isthmus

newel................................................................................fog

noorde .......................................................................... north

O

oewer ............................................................................ bank

onraad ........................................................................danger

ooste................................................................................east

opening .......................................................... entrance, inlet

opsy, in die dwarste ................................................... abeam

oseaan ..............................................................................sea

P

pas..................................................................................pass

piek ................................................................ hill, mountain

pier..................................................................................pier

plato .......................................................................... plateau

poort........................................................ port (harbor), pass

poortjie...........................................................................pass

punt ...................................................... point, hill, mountain

R

rand ...................................................... hill, mountain, ridge

randjies ............................................................................hill

rante .......................................................................mountain

reeks.......................................................................mountain

rif ....................................................................................reef

rivier........................................................................... stream

riviermond .....................................................mouth of river

rooi...................................................................................red

rots bank .........................................................................reef

rots ................................................................rock, mountain

rotse .................................................................................hill

rug.................................................................. hill, mountain

S

sandbank ..........................................................................bar

see ....................................................................................sea

AFRIKAANS English
Pub. 171 

194 Glossaries

seeboei ..........................................................................buoy

seehoof........................................................................... pier

seestraat.................................................................... channel

skarp................................................................... escarpment

skip.................................................................................boat

skool............................................................................. shoal

skuit................................................................................boat

somber..........................................................................black

spits ........................................................................mountain

spruit ..........................................................................stream

strand................................................................. coast, beach

stroom ...........................................................current, stream

suide.............................................................................south

swart.............................................................................black

AFRIKAANS English

T

tand ........................................................................mountain

tepel .......................................................................mountain

trop............................................................................... shoal

V

veld ...............................................................................plain

vlakte ............................................................................plain

vloedgety ......................................................... flood current

vooruit..........................................................................ahead

W

wal ................................................................................ bank

weste ..............................................................................west

wit ................................................................................white

AFRIKAANS English
Pub. 171

Glossaries 195

ARABIC

ARABIC English

A

ab, abu............................................................... father, chief

abar, abyar, abiar .......................................................... wells

abiadh, abyadh, abiad...................................................white

abraq....................................................................... hill, rock

adel, aleb ............................................................ sloping hill

aeg.........................................................................sand dune

aezraq, azraq ..................................................................blue

aghbar.............................................................................gray

aghbas ................................................................dark (color)

ahal...............................................................................black

ahmar, ahmer....................................................................red

aich, aik.................................................................hard bank

ain, oyun ........................................................ well, fountain

air ..............................................................................fortress

ajaj....................................................................... sand storm

ajfar ................................................................................well

akaba, acol ...........................................................wilderness

akbar......................................bigger, biggest, older (of two)

akhal.............................................................................black

akhdhar, akhdar, akdar .................................................green

al.......................................................................................the

ala................................................................... height, higher

ala wara ....................................................................... astern

alam....................................................................... hill, cairn

alama......................................................................... beacon

alama bi shaki jaras................................................bell buoy

alama noor............................................................ light buoy

alama sabaya.................................................................buoy

alawi...........................................................................islands

alou..............................................................................height

amam........................................................................... ahead

amara....................................................................... building

ameeq, amik, amiq........................................................ deep

amin ...........................................................................village

amir .............................................................................prince

amshi deladel ................................................................ slow

amwaj...................................................................... breakers

amwaj kubra............................................................ breakers

anak................................................................................ cliff

aqabar...................................................................wilderness

aqabat.............................................................................. hill

ar ......................................................................................the

ara al bahr..............................................................low water

arab............................................................................... arabs

araja.......................................................................sand dune

arbi .................................................................................arab

ard .......................................................... land, earth, ground

areg........................................................................sand dune

ari ...................................................................shoal, shallow

arich .......................................................................boundary

arq .................................................................sand dune hills

asar.............................................................ruins, mountains

asfal..............................................................................lower

asfar............................................................................yellow

asfel.................................................................................low

ash....................................................................................the

asharet-dabab........................................................fog signal

ashtum...................................................................... channel

asif ................................................................................ river

asifa, asifah ......................................................... gale, storm

asraq...............................................................................blue

assaka................................................................... settlement

aswad ........................................................................... black

atama..........................................................................beacon

atha ............................................................ruins, monument

atiq ...................................................................................old

atlal ...............................................................................ruins

atta ................................................................................ bank

atta metawel.....................................................................bar

auwil .............................................................first, beginning

awama zat nur.......................................................light buoy

awama zat sofara.............................................. whistle buoy

awamet-garas ......................................................... bell buoy

awari ............................................................................ shoal

awawa ...........................................................................buoy

ayn .................................................................................well

azraq, azreq....................................................................blue

B

bab ................................................................ strait, entrance

baboor, babur ....................................................steam vessel

badiyat ........................................................................ desert

bahat ..............................................................................well

bahr ali .................................................................high water

bahr ..........................................channel, river, lake, sea, bay

bahr shaban......................................................... deep water

bahr wati ............................................................... low water

bahrat .......................................................wadi, watercourse

bahraya ....................................................... pool, lake, pond

bahri............................................................................. south

bahri-bahri-gharbi.......................................south-southwest

bahri-gahri-sharqi ........................................south-southeast

bahri-gharbi ..........................................................southwest

bahri-sharqi............................................................southeast

baida ........................................................................... desert

baidha ..........................................................................white

bakhira ..............................................................steam vessel

balad ...................................................country, region, town

balam .............................................................................boat

band ............................................................................... dike

bandar ............bay, port, harbor, open roadstead, chief town

bandera ...........................................................................flag

barq ..................................................................................hill

barr.............................headland, earth, sandbar, bank, shore

barr ramleh.............................................................sandbank

barusi, barrosi ............................................................anchor

basta.............................................................................tower

batbit ..................................................................... whirlpool

bati ................................................................................ slow

ARABIC English
Pub. 171 

196 Glossaries

baura...........................................................................anchor

bawara.....................................heavy anchor used in kuwait

bayda............................................................................white

behr neksan ............................................................. half tide

behr seneh ............................................................high water

behr yari ..........................................................................ebb

beida.............................................................................white

beit, bait ...................................................................... house

beiyat............................................................ shoal that dries

bejir ............................................................................. desert

beros...........................................................................anchor

berriyah ....................................................................... desert

bheira .............................................................................lake

bid ..................................................................................well

bidat ............................................................................. canal

bilad ............................................................... town, country

bir, biar...........................................................................well

birba, baraby ................................................. ancient temple

birka, birkah...................................... pool, pond, small lake

bofa abu nur ......................................................... light buoy

boghaz..............................................strait, entrance channel

boja abu jeras .........................................................bell buoy

boja................................................................................buoy

boja musaffira .................................................. whistle buoy

borg, bordj, burj ........................................fort, tower, castle

boya abu nakus.......................................................bell buoy

boya...............................................................................buoy

boya en nur........................................................... light buoy

boya es siti ....................................................... whistle buoy

bu ..................................................................................chief

bughaz.................................................................. gulf, strait

buhaira ...........................................................................lake

bukah et tin.............................................................mudbank

bum .....................................................................large dhow

bura, buroosi ..............................................................anchor

burayq ............................................................................hills

burg, burj, burt .............................................................tower

busla, bussala ..........................................................compass

but ..................................................................................boat

butaira ................................................................ small dhow

buy .......................................................................fort, tower

buz................................................................................. cape

C

casbah...........................................................citadel, fortress

chegag ............................................................................ ruin

chemal..........................................................................south

cherk............................................................................... east

D

dabab............................................................................... fog

dahal raml ..............................................................sandbank

dahar.............................................................................. peak

dahl................................................................................bank

dahl tin ..................................................................mud bank

dahra............................................................................. north

daig, daiq, daiyaq...................................................... narrow

dakka.................................................wharf, pier, quay, jetty

dala-dala........................................................................ slow

dar .............................................................house, settlement

ARABIC English

darba ........................................................................... squall

dau .................................................................................light

dawamir dakhil el behr ...................................rock (sunken)

dawamir kherej el behr ...........................rock (above water)

dawhat........................................................... bay, cove, port

debab................................................................................fog

dekeh el amwal ............................................................. quay

dekhil, dekhul, dekhla...............................entrance, passage

dekka hak el mal..........................................................wharf

dekka hak en nazul .........................................................pier

dekka saghir...................................................................jetty

derbeh ghefleh ............................................................ squall

deym ..........................................................................village

dhabab..............................................................................fog

dhayyeg......................................................................narrow

dihr................................................................................coast

dira.......................................................................... compass

disha.................................................................................hill

diyik...........................................................................narrow

djal .........................................................................small hill

djebel ............................................................. hill, mountain

djenub .......................................................................... south

djezira ......................................................................... island

djouf.................................................................................dry

dohat, doha, duhat, dawhat ........................... bay, cove, port

duar .................................................................. encampment

dulay ................................................................................hill

E

egeidet..................................................................... sand hill

el nedd ............................................................................tide

el ......................................................................................the

erg .........................................................................sand dune

ezba............................................................................village

F

faluka, feluka, filuka......................................................boat

fanar........................................................lighthouse, beacon

fanus nur ........................................................................light

faregh ....................................................... broad, level, wide

farsh .................................................................. plain (noun)

fasht .............................................................reef, shoal, islet

fisa .................................................................................. fast

fosma ......................................... channel, passage, entrance

fulk....................................................................... small boat

G

gaan baded ..................................................... arm of the sea

gala ........................................................... castle, tower, fort

galawa.......................................................................... basin

gamb yamin ....................................................starboard side

gamb yasar..............................................................port side

gami ......................................................................... mosque

ganub ........................................................................... south

ganub-ganub-gharb.....................................south-southwest

ganub-ganub-sharq ......................................south-southeast

ganub-gharb..........................................................southwest

ganub-sharq ...........................................................southeast

gar ....................................................................small flat hill

gara, garrat..................................................................... lake

garar al bahr...............................................................bottom

ARABIC English
Pub. 171

Glossaries 197 

garf................................................................................. cliff

garib ...............................................................................boat

gazr..................................................................................ebb

gedid............................................................................... new

gezfret ......................................................................... island

ghalah............................................................................ deep

ghamiq .......................................................................... deep

gharb el jinub el gharbi ................................west-southwest

gharb, gharba, gharbi .................................................... west

gharb-ganub-gharb.......................................west-southwest

gharb-shamal-gharb ..................................... west-northwest

gharbi-bahri-gharbi ......................................west-southwest

gharbi-janoob-gharbi ...................................west-southwest

gharbi-qibli-gharbi....................................... west-northwest

gharig ............................................................................ deep

ghauba.................................................................. sandstorm

ghazir ............................................................................ deep

ghobar ............................................................................. fog

ghubbat................................................................... gulf, bay

ghubra .................................................................. sandstorm

ghurmac ........................................................................ peak

gidan.............................................................bank, sandbank

giddam ........................................................................ ahead

gisr, gusur .....................................................................bank

gizan..............................................................................dune

gour ................................................................. small flat hill

goz, gowaz .....................................................high sand hill

gubba............................................................................dome

guddam........................................................................ ahead

guebli ...........................................................................south

guennar.......................................................................... peak

gumruk.............................................................customhouse

gunn ................................................................................bay

H

habba........................................................................... squall

habia.............................................................................. peak

habub................................................................... sand storm

hadd.......................................boundary, limit, sandspit, reef

hadjara, hagar, hajar.........................................stone, rubble

haggag................................................. long projecting ridge

hagiz.......................................................................bar, mole

hair .......................................................................pearl bank

hait .................................................................................wall

hajar balyin .............................................rock (above water)

hajar mugatta...................................................rock (sunken)

hajari ............................................................................stony

hajirah ...........................................................................town

hajiz...............................................................................mole

hajr .........................................rock (above water or sunken)

halat, hala......................................................sandbank, islet

hamra ...............................................................................red

hanouck...........................................................................low

haram, ahram ......................................................... pyramid

hasa, hasba ..................................................................gravel

hassar, hissar ..................................................................rock

haswa ..........................................................................gravel

haudh............................................................................ basin

ARABIC English

hawa..............................................................................wind

heb ................................................................................coast

helkat ........................................................................circular

hesah hesah................................................................. gravel

hilla ............................................................................village

hiqab .............................................................................. cliff

hirab........................................................................... abeam

hisar .....................................................................fort, castle

hisn ................................................................................. fort

hiza ............................................................................ abeam

hod .................................................... basin, pool, small lake

hor....................................................... creek, shallow marsh

houd ............................................................................. basin

hubub .................................................................. sand storm

humra...............................................................................red

husen, husun .....................................................tower, castle

I

ibn ................................................................son, descendent

ilwat, ilwet ..................................................................region

imarah ......................................................... seat of governor

imi....................................................................................hill

irq.................................................................................. dune

iswid ............................................................................ black

izbit, izbet ..................................................................village

J

jabal, jebel, jibal, gebel.................................. mountain, hill

jadwal...............................................................canal, stream

jam, jamia ................................................................ mosque

janoob, janub ............................................................... south

janoob-janoob-gharbi .................................south-southwest

janoob-janoob-sharqi...................................south-southeast

janoob-sharqi .........................................................southeast

jazair ..........................................................................islands

jazirat ..................................................................island, islet

jazr .................................................................................. ebb

jebel el hejer .................................................................. cliff

jebel kayem................................................................... peak

jejirah saghir .................................................................. islet

jenub-gharbi..........................................................southwest

jenub-sherqi ...........................................................southeast

jezr .................................................................................. ebb

jilf .................................................................................. cliff

jinub el gharbi.......................................................southwest

jinub el jinub el gharbi................................south-southwest

jinub el jinub esh shargi...............................south-southeast

jinub esh shargi......................................................southeast

jinub............................................................................. south

jisr, jusur ....................................................................bridge

jorf ................................................................................. cliff

jubayl .....................................................................mountain

junub ............................................................................ south

jurf ................................................................................. cliff

K

kabat ......................................... rocky shoal, group of rocks

kabir..............................................................................large

ARABIC English
Pub. 171 

198 Glossaries

kad........................................................................ shoal, spit

kafab............................................................................... cliff

kafr, kufur, kefr ..........................................................village

kalah................................................................................fort

kalat..............................................................................castle

kalig ............................................................................canals

kanisa, kenisa, keniseh, kineesa.................................church

karm ............................................................artificial mound

karn .............................................summit, peaked hill, point

kasar............................................................................. shoal

kasba .................................................. citadel, fortified town

kasim...........................................territory, political division

kasr bahr.................................................................. breakers

kassar ....................rock (above or below water), rocky islet

kassara..................................................................... breakers

katah, katat.......... rocky shoal, group of rocks, sunken rock

kateh el behr.............................................................. bottom

kathib ............................................................................dune

katib ..............................................................................paint

kaud...............................................................................dune

kebar, kebir....................................................................large

kef, kaf .................................... mountain, rocky point, coast

keruky ................................................................sketch, plan

keryah.........................................................................village

keshem .............................................................. watercourse

khadra...........................................................................green

khala......................................................................... country

khaleej............................................................................ gulf

khalfa ................................................................... sandstorm

khalij ...................................................................... gulf, bay

khaltj ...............................................gulf, bay, estuary, canal

khan........................................................... inn, hotel, bazaar

kharium ....................................................................sandspit

khashm...........................................................mouth of river

khatar .........................................................................danger

khawr .............................................................. inlet, channel

khelij .............................................................................. gulf

kheter .........................................................................danger

khijem ...................................................encampment (tents)

khirs ....................................................................barren land

khod .................................................................shallow, ford

khor ...............river channel, cove, bay, estuary, inlet, ravine

khuba......................................................................mudbank

khudra ..........................................................................green

khul kebir .............................................................. flood tide

khul ........................................................... spring tide, flood

kibli ..............................................................................south

kidan.............................................................bank, sandbank

kidif nes.........................................................................dune

kidwa................................................................small mound

kimmat .......................................................................... peak

kinar .................................................boundary, border, limit

kinisa, kinis ................................................................church

kinisat, kinizat........................................................sandbank

kita ............................................rocky shoal, group of rocks

kitif en nes..............................................................sandbank

kola.................................................................................. hill

kom en nes ....................................................................dune

ARABIC English

kom ............................................................................mound

kothon ..........................................................port, anchorage

kubbah .........................................................................dome

kubbat ............................................................deep bay, inlet

kubbeh .......................................................................beacon

kubry, kabary .............................................................bridge

kuddam ........................................................................ahead

kudiat .....................................................................small hill

kuh ................................................................. hill, mountain

kusbat, kut.......................................... citadel, fortified town

L

liman ............................................................port, anchorage

lisan...............................................................head, headland

M

ma hali ................................................................ fresh water

ma mutawasid ..........................................................half tide

madd ............................................................... current, flood

madd galeel..............................................................half tide

madd kabir ...........................................................spring tide

madd kamel .........................................................high water

madd qawi............................................................spring tide

madina ..........................................................................town

madiq ............................................................................strait

madkhal ......................................................... inlet, entrance

mael behr .............................................................. salt water

maftul...........................................................................tower

maghreb .........................................................................west

mahal nuzul .................................................... landing place

mahatta .......................................................station (railway)

mahgar ..............................................................stone quarry

majaz................................................... pass, marine channel

majra ..............................................................canal, channel

makalla .................................................................... channel

makan ara..................................................................... shoal

makan en naze ................................................ landing place

makhila ......................................................fog signal, storm

makhraj ........................................................................ canal

mal, malih ........................................................salt, brackish

malka .......................................................stream confluence

mamarr..................................................................... passage

manara ................................................................. lighthouse

manfad, manafid ............................................... pass (defile)

mantakat ....................................................................... zone

manzal...........................................settlement, landing place

maqam ..........................................................................tomb

marabut .................................................. monument or tomb

marakat ..................................................... soft bottom shoal

marfaa ........................................................................ harbor

marjan ...........................................................................coral

markab shera...........................................sailing vessel, ship

markeb, markib shiraa ............................sailing vessel, ship

marsa, marza...................................... anchorage, roadstead, 

marso ......................................................................... harbor

marso keshef.......................................................... roatstead

marso saghir................................................................. basin

masab.............................................................mouth of river

ARABIC English
Pub. 171

Glossaries 199 

masafa, masafah...........................................................range

mashriq........................................................................... east

masjid, maskid, masgid............................................ mosque

maskan ........................................................................ house

masura............................................................................pipe

maten......................................................................... plateau

matla............................................................................... east

matmor............................................................................silo

mauj, mauja.................................................................. wave

maya hilwa..........................................................fresh water

mayeh........................................................................ current

medauwar................................................................. circular

medina...................................................................city, town

medkhal, medkhel.....................................passage, entrance

meena............................................................... port (harbor)

megjrib .......................................................................... west

menarah................................................................lighthouse

mengar .......................................................nose, head, point

mensla ...................................................................... channel

mersa...................................................roadstead, anchorage

mesjid....................................................................... mosque

mina kharga........................................................... roadstead

mina .........................................................port, harbor, mole

minar, manar ................................................. minaret, tower

minara ..................................................................lighthouse

minqar ....................................... nose, head, point, headland

miqra ........................................................................ channel

mirjan............................................................................coral

mirsa............................................................................... port

miyah ...........................................................................water

moga............................................................................. wave

moghreb ........................................................................ west

moiya aria .............................................................low water

moiya hilwa.........................................................fresh water

moiya kebir ..........................................................high water

moiya .............................................................shoal, shallow

moj ............................................................................... wave

morgan ..........................................................................coral

mosque............................................... mohammedan church

mowyah hali........................................................fresh water

mowyahel behr...................................................... salt water

moya azb .............................................................fresh water

muaskar.......................................................... military camp

mudawwar................................................................ circular

muhassan..................................................................fortified

mukhaijan......................................................... encampment

mukhtqa .....................................................................anchor

murjan, murgan.............................................................coral

murshid ......................................................................... pilot

mustanqa .....................................................................marsh

muzik ............................................................................strait

N

nadd wafi..............................................................spring tide

nahiyah.......................................................................district

nahr, anhar .................................................................... river

najwa.................................................................... shoal, spit

nakhl, nakhil, nikhl .............................palm tree, date grove

ARABIC English

naliya ...................................................................... compass

natur.............................................................................tower

nebi ...............................................................................tomb

neis.................................................................................sand

nes hesah..................................................................... gravel

niwat ..............................................steep-to shoal, coral reef

noor................................................................................light

noww .......................................................................... squall

nuksan el behr....................................................... low water

nuqta .............................................................................point

nur..................................................................................light

nusf madd ................................................................half tide

O

ouarour..........................................................steep mountain

oued .............................................................................. river

Q

qa al bahar..................................................................bottom

qa ...............................................................................bottom

qabr ...............................................................................tomb

qad ..................................................................................reef

qadim, qadima .................................................................old

qafa ............................................................................. astern

qala, qalaa .................................fort, prominent peak, castle

qaleel al ghur ............................................................shallow

qanaya.........................................................................rivulet

qantara ........................................................................bridge

qara ................................................................small dark hill

qaranasla ....................................................................... peak

qarn ...............................................................................point

qarya ..........................................................................village

qasar....................................... above-water rock, rocky islet

qasr, qusur ................................................. port, large house

qibli.............................................................................. north

qibli-gharbi ........................................................... northwest

qibli-qibli-gharbi......................................... north-northwest

qibli-qibli-sharqi .......................................... north-northeast

qibli-sharqi............................................................. northeast

qubba ...........................................................................dome

quddam ........................................................................ahead

qur..................................................................................hills

quwayrat ........................................................ hill, mountain

R

rabban ............................................................................pilot

rais el marsa.............................................captain of the port

rais, reis................................................... captain of a vessel

rakat ............................................................shoal, hard bank

raml, ramla.....................................................................sand

ras .............................................cape, point, head, hill, peak

ras el jebel..................................................................... peak

ras fel ............................................................................mole

raseef al mina..................................................................pier

raseef.........................................................jetty, wharf, quay

rasif, rasyf ..................................................pier, quay, wharf

reeh ...............................................................................wind

rif ..................................................................................coast

ARABIC English
Pub. 171 

200 Glossaries

rig...........................................shallow bank, reef, shoal, flat

rih..................................................................................wind

rod ............................................................small watercourse

rooma ...............................................................................bar

rubban ........................................................................... pilot

rud ................................................................................. river

rujm....................................................................... cairn, hill

ruqq ......................................................................reef, shoal

S

saaina bakhur ya................................................steam vessel

sadd ........................................ bar, obstruction, barrier, dam

sadd min at tin........................................................mudbank

safina shara iya................................................ sailing vessel

safra............................................................................yellow

sagal ............................................................................gravel

sagala ................................................................... port (side)

sahah, sahra, sahary .......................................... desert, plain

sahel, sahil.............................................. beach, coast, shore

sakh, sakhr .....................................................................rock

sakhra fog alma.......................................rock (above water)

sakhra......................................................rock (above water)

sakhra taht al ma .............................................rock (sunken)

sambuk ............................................................ sailing vessel

sanjak ............................................................. starboard side

sanjaq ............................................................................. flag

saqya, saqiye, saqyat.................................................... canal

sar, sareea, sari ................................................................fast

satah ......................................................................... shallow

sawa sawa................................................................... abeam

sawahil ............................................................... coast guard

sawiyah ........................................................................ point

sedd ...............................................................................mole

sedjaa .........................................................................muddy

seghir............................................................................. little

seil..................................................................... watercourse

serih..............................................................................speed

sfer .............................................................................yellow

shaab .............................................................................coral

shab ............................................................rocky shoal, reef

shabura ............................................................................ fog

shakhis .................................................................stake, pole

shamal .......................................................................... north

shamal-gharb.........................................................northwest

shamal-shamal-gharb.................................. north-northwest

shamal-shamal-sharq ................................... north-northeast

shamal-sharq ..........................................................northeast

shamandura bi fanus ............................................ light buoy

shamandura bi suffara...................................... whistle buoy

shamandura ...................................................................buoy

sharg el jinub esh shargi................................. east-southeast

sharg esh shamal esh shargi ........................... east-northeast

shargi, sharqi.................................................................. east

sharm..............................................................................inlet

sharq-bahri-sharqi .......................................... east-southeast

sharq-ganub-sharq.......................................... east-southeast

sharq-janoob-sharqi ....................................... east-southeast

sharq-qibli-sharqi........................................... east-northeast

ARABIC English

sharq-shimal-sharq .........................................east-northeast

shatt ramli ..............................................................sandbank

shatt................................................... river, river bank, coast

sheb, shib ........................................................................reef

sheikh, shaikh, shaykh.........................................chief elder

sherm ..................................................................cove, creek

shimal el garbi ...................................................... northwest

shimal esh shargi ................................................... northeast

shimal esh shimal el garbi .......................... north-northwest

shimal esh shimal esh shargi ....................... north-northeast

shimal .......................................................................... north

shur ...................................................................low clay hill

sidi, sedi........................................................................tomb

sif, sifa ....................................................coast, sandy beach

sifi ...................................................................................low

sigala...............port (side), wharf, mole, jetty, landing place

sikha...............................................................................road

soda.............................................................................. black

suffara ad dabab....................................................fog signal

suffara sabayya ................................................ whistle buoy

sura ..............................................................................speed

surkh, sorkh .....................................................................red

T

tabb ............................................................................... dune

tabia, tabya................................................ fort, tower, castle

tabr............................................................................... canal

taht ..................................................... under, below, beneath

tall, tell, tulul ...................................................................hill

taraf...............................................................................point

tarf..................................................................................cape

tarsana........................................................................arsenal

taufan ...........................................................................storm

tawil ...............................................................................long

tayyar .........................................................................current

thaghr............................................................... port (harbor)

tiligraf .................................................................... telegraph

tin...................................................................................mud

tira............................................................................ channel

tiyar............................................................................current

touffik ........................................................................hamlet

tufan en nes.......................................................... sandstorm

tufan.............................................................................storm

turab...............................................................................mud

turah...............................................................canal, channel

turiq................................................................................road

U

uad ....................................................................river, stream

udd ...............................................................bank, sandbank

ust ..................................................................middle, center

W

wad, wadi................... mouth of river, channel, watercourse

wahl ...............................................................................mud

war ..................................................................rock (sunken)

wara ............................................................................ astern

ARABIC English
Pub. 171

Glossaries 201 

wast ................................................................middle, center

wed................................................................................ river

werayi.......................................................................... astern

wust el madd ........................................................... half tide

Y

yameen al markib........................................... starboard side

yamin ............................................................. starboard side

yasar al karkib.........................................................port side

yemin el merkeb............................................. starboard side

ARABIC English

yesar el merkeb.......................................................port side

yisar ........................................................................port side

Z

zab.................................................................................oasis

zaimah............................................................................boat

zarqa ..............................................................................blue

zawia, zawiya............................................house, monastery

zerga...............................................................................blue

zoba ah ghefleh........................................................... squall

zoubaa..........................................................................storm

ARABIC English
Pub. 171

202 Glossaries

FRENCH

FRENCH English

A

abri, abrite ..................................................shelter, sheltered

aiguille ....................................................................... needle

aimante...................................................................magnetic

amer ......................................................... landmark, beacon

anse ...................................................................... bay, creek

appontement.............................................. wharf, pier, quay

argile ..............................................................................clay

arriere port.............................................................outer port

atterrissage ..........................................making land, landfall

aval..................................................... downstream, seaward

avant port ..............................................................outer port

azur.................................................................................blue

B

babord ............................................................................ port

baie..........................................................................bay, gulf

balisage ................................................................beaconage

balise ......................................................................... beacon

banc..............................................................bank, sandbank

barre .................................................................................bar

basse mer...............................................................low water

basse............................................................................. shoal

bassin a flot .............................................. wet basin or dock

bassin ................................................................. basin, dock

bassin d'echouage..............tidal basin where vessels ground

bateau de sauvetag ................................................... lifeboat

blanc, he.......................................................................white

bleu, bleue......................................................................blue

bois...............................................................................wood

bouche.........................................................mouth of a river

bouee a cloche........................................................bell buoy

bouee a sifflet................................................... whistle buoy

bouee.............................................................................buoy

bouee lumineuse .................................................. light buoy

boussole ..................................................................compass

brisant, brisants ........................................... shoals, breakers

brise-lames..........................................................breakwater

brouillard................................................................ fog, mist

brume .............................................................................. fog

C

caboteur..................................................................... coaster

cale de radoub ...............................................marine railway

canal...............................................................channel, canal

cap.................................................................cape, headland

champ-de-tir.......................................................firing range

chapelle ...................................................................... chapel

charbon...........................................................................coal

chasse................................. a rapid discharge of water from

 reservior to clear out a channel

chateau .........................................................................castle

chaussee ...................................................... bank, causeway

chemin de fer ........................................................... railroad

cheminee .................................................................chimney

chenal....................................................................... channel

clocher .......................................................................steeple

coffre.............................................................. mooring buoy

colline ..............................................................................hill

compas.................................................................... compass

coquilles.......................................................................shells

cote ...............................................................................coast

courant ..........................................................current, stream

courant de flot...........................................flood tidal stream

courant de jusant......................................... ebb tidal stream

crique ........................................................................... creek

crue .............................................................. freshet or flood

D

darse............................................................................. basin

detroit...............................................................strait, narrow

digue ......................................................... breakwater, mole

douane..............................................................customhouse

droit..................................................................... right (side)

due d'albe..................................................................dolphin

E

echelle...........................................................................scale

echelle de maree .................................................. tide gauge

ecluse ...............................................lock of a canal or basin

ecueil................................................................rock, breaker

eglise..........................................................................church

encablure......................................................... cable's length

entree ...........................................entrance, mouth of a river

epave........................................................................... wreck

epi ..............................................................small jetty, groin

escarpe .......................................................................... bluff

est....................................................................................east

etale.................................... (of tide) slack, (of wind) settled

etang .............................................................................. lake

etiage............................................ low-water mark of a river

etier .......................a creek which can receive small vessels;

 conduit by which water enters a saline.

F

falaise............................................................................. cliff

fanal ..........................................................harbor lighthouse

feu ..................................................................................light

feu permanent .....a light constantly burning and unwatched

fine..................................................................................fine

fleche ............................................................................ spire

fleuve ................................................................river, stream

flot................................................................................ flood

foc ........................................................................... jib (sail)

fond............................................................................bottom

forme de radoub.......................................................drydock

fosse..................................................................ditch, a deep

G

galets......................................................................... shingle

gare ............................................................................ station

FRENCH English
Pub. 171

Glossaries 203 

gauche ................................................................... left (side)

golfe ............................................................................... gulf

goulet ..........................................................narrow entrance

grande............................................................................great

gravier .........................................................................gravel

greve..................................................................sandy beach

gril de carenage........................................................gridiron

gris .................................................................................gray

gros............................................................................. coarse

guet................................................................... watch-house

H

haut-fond................................................................... a shoal

haute mer..............................................................high water

havre........................................................................... harbor

houle............................................................................. swell

I

ile .........................................................................island, isle

ilot ..................................................................................islet

J

jaune...........................................................................yellow

jetee................................................................................jetty

jusant...............................................................................ebb

L

lac...................................................................................lake

large ...................................................................broad, wide

M

madrague................................................................tunny net

marais.............................................................swamp, marsh

maree descendante .............................................. falling tide

maree montante.....................................................rising tide

maree...............................................................................tide

massif........................................... main group of mountains

mat ................................................................................ mast

mer ...................................................................................sea

meridional ...............................................................southern

mole ..................................................................... mole, pier

molle ...............................................................................soft

mont, montagne .....................................................mountain

morne .............................................................................. hill

mortes eaux...........................................................neap tides

mouillage ............................................................. anchorage

moulin ............................................................................ mill

musoir .....................................................................pierhead

N

niveau............................................................................ level

noeud..............................................................................knot

noir, noire.....................................................................black

nord .............................................................................. north

nouveau, nouvel ............................................................. new

O

occidental................................................................. western

FRENCH English

onde ..............................................................................wave

oriental.......................................................................eastern

ouest...............................................................................west

P

passe ..................................................pass, fairway, channel

patente de sante................................................ bill of health

pertuis .........................................................opening or strait

petit .............................................................................. small

phare .................................................................... lighthouse

pic ................................................................................. peak

pierre............................................................................ stone

pignon .......................................................................... gable

pilote ..............................................................................pilot

pin ..................................................................pine or fir tree

piton.............................................................................. peak

plage .................................................................shore, beach

plateau.................................... tableland, or flat below water

pleine mer ......................................................... height water

pointe ............................................................................point

pont ................................................................... bridge, deck

port.....................................................................port, harbor

presq'ile..................................................................peninsula

Q

quai .................................................................... quay, wharf

R

rade .............................................................. road, roadstead

rafale ........................................................................... squall

raz (bas breton) .....a name given to a violent tidal stream in 

 a narrow passage

recif.................................................................................reef

redoute ............................................................................ fort

riviere............................................................................ river

roche ..............................................................................rock

rocher.............................................................................rock

rond..............................................................................round

rouge ................................................................................red

ruisseau .......................................................................rivulet

S

sable...............................................................................sand

salines ................................... salt-water lagoons, salt works

seche ............................................................... dry shelf, flat

septentrional ........................................................... northern

seuil............................................................... sill (of a dock)

sommet .....................................................................summit

sud................................................................................ south

T

temps............................................................... time, weather

terre-plein ..................................... leveled ground, platform

tete ................................................................................ head

tour...............................................................................tower

tourelle.....................................................small tower, turret

tribord ....................................................................starboard

FRENCH English
Pub. 171 

204 Glossaries

U

usine.......................................................................... factory

V

vase ................................................................................mud

FRENCH English

vent ...............................................................................wind

vert...............................................................................green

vieux, vieil, vieille ............................................. old, ancient

ville ...............................................................................town

vive-eau................................................................spring tide

FRENCH English
Pub. 171

Glossaries 205

MALAGASY

MALAGASY English

A

abo..................................................................................high

afiafy ................................................................... mangroves

alao................................................................................ sand

ambato............................................................................rock

ambo...............................................................................high

ampanalana .............................................................. isthmus

ampasimena ............................................................ red sand

andilana.................................................................... isthmus

andrefana....................................................................... west

ankora...........................................................................shells

antitra ...............................................................................old

aombi ...........................................................................cattle

atsimo...........................................................................south

atsinanana....................................................................... east

avaratra......................................................................... north

B

bajina............................................................................. sand

be.........................................................................large, great

bongo .......................................................mountain, plateau

F

fariky..............................................................................lake

fasika, fasina ................................................................. sand

filao ...........................................raffia palm, casuarinas, fish

fotaka .............................................................................mud

foti, fotsi, fotsy.............................................................white

H

harama.......................................................... coral reef, rock

honko .................................................................. mangroves

hory .................................................................................bay

J

jia .................................................................................. sand

K

keli, kely..............................................................small, little

kiborintany ...................................................................... hill

L

lalandriaka..................................................................stream

lava................................................................ long, high, tall

lehibe...................................................................large, great

loha................................................................................ head

lohasaha ......................................................................valley

lovoka..............................................................................bay

lovokeli, lovokely.......................................................... cove

M

mainti ...........................................................................black

maitso...........................................................................green

malandy........................................................................white

mandry ..........................................................................quiet

manga ............................................................................blue

masay..................................................................small, little

mati ............................................................................... dead

mavo ..............................................................................grey

mena ................................................................................red

morotsangan .................................................................. cliff

mpanamory ....................................................................pilot

mpanjaka.......................................................................chief

N

nosi, nosy.................................................................... island

O

oni, ony ......................................................................... river

orompasika ..............................................................sandspit

oronjia......................................................................sandspit

orontani, orontany........................................ cape, peninsula

R

rati, ratsi.......................................................................... bad

riana .............................................................torrent, cascade

rofia...................................................................... palm trees

rova ................................................................................. fort

S

saha ............................................................................... river

seranana ......................................................................... port

soa.................................................................................good

T

tafiana ...................................................... harbor, anchorage

tambohondrano ......................................................sandbank

tampolo ......................................................................lagoon

tanambe.........................................................................town

tanana.........................................................................village

tanga ................................................................... mangroves

tani ................................................................... country, land

tani kely, tanikeli...................................................... isthmus

tanjona ...........................................................................cape

tany mandrevo .......................................................mudbank

tendrona ........................................................................point

todiana, toliana ............................................port, anchorage

tondro.......................................................................... finger

tsiraka ...........................................................................point

V

valavo, voalavo .................................................................rat

vao ................................................................................. new

vato ................................................................................rock

vatobe....................................... rock, generally above-water

vava, vavo ......................................................mouth of river

vohitra....................................................................mountain

vori..............................................................................pound

Z

zanabongo........................................................................hill

MALAGASY English
Pub. 171

206 Glossaries

PORTUGUESE

PORTUGUESE English

A

a, as ............................................................... definite article

alto.......................................................................... high, hill

alto-fundo..................................................................... shoal

altos, alturas ..............................................................heights

amarelo.......................................................................yellow

ancoradoura.......................................................... anchorage

angra.......................................................................inlet, bay

areia....................................................................sand, beach

arquipelago............................................archipelago, islands

arrebentacoes...........................................................breakers

arroio..........................................................................stream

atalaia ............................................................lookout station

atol................................................................................. atoll

azul.................................................................................blue

B

bacia .............................................................................basin

bahia................................................................................bay

baia..................................................................................bay

baixa.............................................................................shoal

baixinha.............................................................. small shoal

baixio, baixo................................................................. shoal

baixo................................................................................low

balisa, baliza.............................................................. beacon

banco.............................................................................bank

barra ......................................... bar, entrance of river or bay

barranca............................................................ ravine, gully

barranco..........................................................................cliff

barreira ...........................................cliff of red or white clay

barreta .................................................small opening in reef

boca................................................... mouth, entrance, cove

boia................................................................................buoy

bombordo ....................................................................... port

boqueirao.................... short narrow channel between banks

braco-de-mar..................................................arm of the sea

branco...........................................................................white

bravo.................................................. exposed to heavy seas

C

cabeca.................................................................. shoal head

cabeco ......................................................summit, peak, hill

cabo .......................................................... cape, also a cable

cachoeira ................................................................ waterfall

cais .....................................................................quay, wharf

cala ........................................................................... channel

calhao .........................................detached above-water rock

canal ............................................................channel or strait

capella ........................................................................ chapel

casa.............................................................................. house

castello ........................................................................ castle

chamine ...................................................................chimney

cidade ...........................................................city, large town

cimo.................................................................summit, crest

cinco................................................................................five

cinzento..........................................................................gray

colina............................................................................... hill

coqueiral ........................................................ coconut grove

cordao ..................................................... ridge, line of reefs

coroa ........................................ drying bank of sand or mud

costa ..............................................................................coast

cruz ...............................................................................cross

D

dentro ....................................................... inner or landward

doca...............................................................................dock

doca secca ................................................................drydock

dois..................................................................................two

dunas................................................................... sand dunes

E

encarnado.........................................................................red

enseada............................................................................bay

entrada..............................................entrance, fairway, cove

espigao .......................................sharp point of land treeless

esporao.......................................................................groyne

estado ............................................................................ state

estaleiro...................................................................shipyard

este ..................................................................................east

estreito................................. narrows, narrow channel, strait

estuario...................................................................... estuary

F

faleja .............................................................................. cliff

farol...................................................................... lighthouse

farolete .......................................................... lighted beacon

fora............................................................. outer or seaward

fortaleza ....................................................................fortress

forte.................................................................................fort

fox..................................................................mouth of river

fundeadouro ......................................................... anchorage

furo.......................................natural channel between rivers

G

golfo............................................................................... gulf

grande .................................................................large, great

I

igarape..................................................narrow or shoal inlet

igregja ........................................................................church

ilha .............................................................................. island

ilheu, ilhota .................................................................... islet

ilhote ...............................................large rock, stack, skerry

istmo ........................................................................ isthmus

L

lago ................................................................................ lake

lagoa..................................................................shallow lake

laje.......................................... submerged rock, rocky ledge

PORTUGUESE English
Pub. 171

Glossaries 207 

leste ................................................................................ east

luz.................................................................................. light

M

malha............................................................................patch

mar .................................................................................. sea

mato........................................................... scrub land, wood

medano..................... extensive shifting bank at river mouth

meio........................................................................... middle

meridional ...............................................................southern

moinho ........................................................................... mill

moita ....................................... thick isolated clump of trees

molhe.........................................................mole, breakwater

montanha............................................................... mountain

monte......................................................... mountain, mount

morro...................................................................... hill, rock

N

negro ............................................................................black

nordeste ..................................................................northeast

noroeste .................................................................northwest

norte .............................................................................north

novo................................................................................new

O

o, os..................................................................................the

outeiro ............................................................................. hill

P

parana........................................................... reach of a river

parcel.............................................................. shallow patch

passagem ......................................................... pass, passage

pedra.............................................................................. rock

penha...................................................................rocky peak

pequenho ......................................................................small

pharo ....................................................................lighthouse

pico................................................................................peak

planalto................................................................... headland

plano inclinado............................................. marine railway

ponta.................................................................point of land

pontal........................................ point of land or promontary

ponte........................................................................... bridge

pororoca ........................................................................ bore

porto ...............................................................................port

PORTUGUESE English

praia ............................................................................ beach

preto ............................................................................. black

Q

quatro ............................................................................. four

quebra-mar.......................................................... breakwater

quebrada.......................................................cut, steepvalley

R

recife ...............................................................................reef

restinga..................................................................ridge, spit

riacho ......................................................................... stream

rio.................................................................................. river

risca................................................................... shoal awash

roca (or rocha)................................................................rock

rochedo .............................................................. rocky place

rocher ........................................................ rock, rocky place

S

saco ............................................................................... cove

san................................................................................. saint

seco ................................................................................. dry

septentrional............................................................ northern

serra..............................................................mountain range

sudoeste, sudueste.................................................southwest

sueste......................................................................southeast

sul................................................................................. south

T

terra................................................................................land

torre..............................................................................tower

trapiche ............................................................wharf or pier

tres.................................................................................three

U

um, ..................................................................................one

urca .........................................................a bank which dries

V

varadouro ........................................................ landing place

velho ................................................................................old

verde ............................................................................green

vermelho ..........................................................................red

vigia ..........................................................................lookout

vila, villa ....................................................................village

PORTUGUESE English
Pub. 171

208 Glossaries

SOMALI

SOMALI English

A

aradi .............................................................................. peak

aro ................................................................................. peak

B

biyogal ...........................................................................lake

bur yar ............................................................................. hill

but ..........................................................................mountain

byo galen........................................................................lake

D

deked...............................................................wharf, harbor

doh ........................................................................... channel

dud ...........................................forest, mound, embankment

G

gashirad....................................................................... island

gumbur .......................................................................hillock

H

har ................................................................mountain range

I

illin.......................................................................... entrance

J

jar................................................................................... cliff

jori................................................................................... bay

K

kur....................................................................................hill

kurum...............................................................................hill

M

masajid..................................................................... mosque

R

rasi .................................................................................cape

rubad ........................................................................... marsh

SOMALI English
Pub. 171

Glossaries 209

SWAHILI

SWAHILI English

B

bandar, bender....................................................port, harbor

F

fungu .................................................................. bank, shoal

G

geneza ..........................................................................castle

J

jiwe mwamba.................................................................rock

K

kazika..............................................................half-tide rock

khor ..............................................................................creek

kilima .............................................................................. hill

kisiwa.......................................................................... island

M

mlango ......................................................channel, entrance

mlima .....................................................................mountain

mnara ...........................................................................tower

mto................................................................................ river

mwamba....................................................................... shoal

N

ngome ..........................................................................castle

P

pwani ............................................................................coast

R

ras ....................................................................... cape, point

S

shaka .............................................................................. islet

U

uadi ............................................................................... river

upulu ........................................................................ channel

W

wadi .............................................................................. river

SWAHILI English
211

Pub. 171

How to use the Index—Gazetteer

Geographic names of navigational features are generally those used by the nation having sovereignty and are listed

alphabetically. Diacritical marks, such as accents, cedillas, and circumflexes, which are related to specific letters in certain foreign

languages, are not used in the interest of typographical simplicity.

Geographic names or their spellings do not necessarily reflect recognition of the political status of an area by the United States

Government. Positions are approximate and are intended merely as locators to facilitate reference to the charts.

To use as a Gazetteer note the position and Sector number of the feature and refer to the Chart Information diagram for the

Sector. Plot the approximate position of the feature on this diagram and note the approximate chart number.

To use as an Index of features described in the text note the paragraph number at the right. To locate this feature on the best

scale chart use the Gazetteer procedure above. 

Index—Gazetteer

Position

° ' ° '

Position

° ' ° '

Sec.

Para

Sec.

Para

A

ADRIENS SHOAL 4 16 S 55 40 E 8.13

AGALEGA ISLANDS 10 24 S 56 38 E 8.26

ALBATROSS ISLAND 16 15 S 59 35 E 9.16

ALDABRA ISLANDS 9 25 S 46 22 E 9.21

ALDEBERT REEF 40 51 S 37 52 E 13.2

ALIWAL SHOAL 30 15 S 30 50 E 2.19

ALLIGATOR ROCK 4 24 S 55 46 E 8.17

ALPHARD BANKS 35 02 S 20 51 E 1.14

AMBATALOBORONA 21 57 S 48 07 E 10.36

AMBATOMALAMA BEACON 15 48 S 46 22 E 11.28

AMBODIFOTATRA 17 00 S 49 51 E 10.26

AMBOHIBE 21 21 S 43 31 E 12.11

AMBOHIBIRI 12 05 S 49 18 E 10.2

AMBOHITRA 12 36 S 49 09 E 10.2

AMPANAVOANA 15 41 S 50 21 E 10.16

ANALALAVA 14 38 S 47 46 E 11.22

ANDOANY 13 24 S 48 17 E 11.14

ANDRAMAHIMBA 12 13 S 49 10 E 10.2

ANDRAMAIMBO 12 13 S 49 10 E 10.2

ANDRANO MISERANO 13 40 S 47 59 E 11.16

ANDRANOAOMBI BAY 12 28 S 48 47 E 11.6

ANDROMACHE SHOAL 3 51 S 54 50 E 8.20

ANGONTSY ROAD 15 15 S 50 29 E 10.14

ANKARAMISAMPANA 12 12 S 49 12 E 10.2

ANKAZOFOTSY 15 50 S 50 01 E 10.18

ANKETSABE 13 55 S 48 05 E 11.20

ANOSIKELY 22 42 S 47 51 E 10.38

ANSE DE QUIBERON 49 16 S 68 54 E 13.33

ANSE ETOILE 4 35 S 55 27 E 8.11

ANSE PINGOUIN 48 59 S 69 38 E 13.15

ANSE TSOA 12 17 S 43 46 E 9.35

ANTALAHA 14 54 S 50 17 E 10.13

ANTATAHA 14 54 S 50 17 E 10.13

ARIADNE BANK 6 20 S 39 10 E 5.13

ARLETTS LEDGE 1 55 S 41 24 E 6.33

ASSUMPTION ISLAND 9 43 S 46 30 E 9.22

ASTOVE ISLAND 10 04 S 47 45 E 9.25

ATLAS REEF 34 37 S 20 21 E 1.16

AVE MARIA ROCK 4 19 S 55 49 E 8.16

B

BAGAMOYO ROADSTEAD 6 25 S 38 55 E 5.22

BAIA DE INHAMBANE 23 44 S 35 30 E 3.2

BAIA DE MAIAPA 10 57 S 40 34 E 3.52

BAIA DE SOFALA 20 11 S 34 43 E 3.9

BAIA DO BAZARUTO 21 44 S 35 21 E 3.7

BAIE AMPANASINA 12 01 S 49 12 E 11.3

BAIE ANDRANOAOMBY 12 28 S 48 47 E 11.6

BAIE BLANCHE 48 49 S 69 11 E 13.12

BAIE CACHEE 49 13 S 69 26 E 13.20

BAIE CLEMENCEAU 48 44 S 69 03 E 13.11

BAIE DE BOUENI 12 53 S 45 06 E 9.47

BAIE DE DIEGO-SUAREZ 12 16 S 49 18 E 10.3

BAIE DE L'AVENTURE 46 23 S 52 12 E 13.8

BAIE DE L'OBSERVATOIRE 49 25 S 69 54 E 13.27

BAIE DE RANOFOTSY 25 09 S 46 45 E 10.44

BAIE DE RIGNY 12 26 S 49 31 E 10.6

BAIE DE SAINTE-LUCE 24 46 S 47 12 E 10.41

BAIE DU HOPEFUL 49 05 S 69 34 E 13.16

BAIE DU NAUFRAGE 46 23 S 52 12 E 13.8

BAIE DU TONNERRE 49 20 S 68 53 E 13.32

BAIE KELLER 49 11 S 69 23 E 13.19

BAIE LE VERRIER 49 07 S 69 34 E 13.17

BAIE LOTSOINA 12 00 S 49 13 E 11.2

BAIXO DA LAGOA 25 25 S 33 12 E 2.37

BAIXO DANAE 25 54 S 33 03 E 2.35

BAIXO DE SANTO ANTONIO 16 12 S 40 08 E 3.28

BAIXO DE SAO JOAO 26 21 S 32 58 E 2.34

BAIXO DO PINDA 14 13 S 40 47 E 3.38

BAIXO INFUSSE 15 32 S 40 37 E 3.31

BAIXO MECADE 15 50 S 40 23 E 3.30

BAIXO MEPANGA-PANGA 10 59 S 40 37 E 3.52

BAIXO MIGUEL 16 31 S 39 53 E 3.25

BAIXO MUCALANGA 15 35 S 40 32 E 3.31

BAIXO MUSSIBARINDE 15 56 S 40 18 E 3.30

BAIXO NAMEZACO 15 22 S 40 39 E 3.31

BAIXO NANTAPA 16 04 S 40 12 E 3.28

BAIXO PINGUIM 11 05 S 40 39 E 3.51

BAIXO SILVA 23 06 S 35 34 E 3.4

BAIXO ZALA 12 06 S 40 35 E 3.47

BAIXO ZAMBIA 22 46 S 35 35 E 3.5

BAIXOS DA BOA PAZ 24 57 S 34 27 E 2.39

BALEINE ROCKS 16 41 S 59 31 E 9.17

BALLON LOZA 14 38 S 47 49 E 11.23

BAMBOA 12 12 S 44 31 E 9.42

BANC D' IFONTSY 17 53 S 49 32 E 10.31

BANC D'ANTETEZANA 17 49 S 49 33 E 10.30

BANC DE LA TOURMALINE 18 39 S 49 19 E 10.32

BANC DE LA ZELEE 12 27 S 46 14 E 9.47

BANC DE NOSY VATO 23 22 S 43 39 E 12.17

BANC DU GEYSER 12 21 S 46 26 E 9.47

BANC DU LAPEROUSE 17 23 S 49 40 E 10.28

BANC DU VAUDREUIL 19 30 S 48 56 E 10.33

BANC FRY 17 12 S 49 35 E 10.27

BANCO DE SOFALA 20 25 S 35 27 E 3.10

BANDARBEYLA 9 30 N 50 49 E 7.24

BAR DE L'EST 3 47 S 55 50 E 8.2

BARAAWE 1 06 N 44 02 E 7.3

BARRA INHAMISSENGO 18 54 S 36 08 E 3.12

BASSAS DA INDIA 21 27 S 39 41 E 12.4

BASSE DE JUDIE 21 27 S 39 41 E 12.4

BASSIN DE LA GAZELLE 49 18 S 69 41 E 13.22

BATASA ROCK 34 17 S 18 29 E 1.4

BEACON ISLAND 4 37 S 55 31 E 8.9

BEDFORD BREAK 6 31 S 39 25 E 5.10

BEIRA 19 50 S 34 50 E 3.11

BEL OMBRE 20 31 S 57 24 E 9.14

BELAMI 7 57 S 39 33 E 4.28

BELO-SUR-MER 20 45 S 44 01 E 12.10

BENARES SHOALS 5 15 S 71 40 E 8.30

BENDER BEILA 9 30 N 50 49 E 7.24

BET EL RAS 6 07 S 39 07 E 5.17

BETANTY 25 34 S 45 32 E 10.45

BIRD ISLAND 3 43 S 55 12 E 8.2
212 Index—Gazetteer

Pub. 171

Position

° ' ° '

Position

° ' ° '

Sec.

Para

Sec.

Para

BIRD ISLANDS 33 51 S 25 17 E 2.2

BIRKENHEAD ROCK 34 39 S 19 17 E 1.12

BLACK CLIFF POINT 4 11 S 39 38 E 6.16

BLACK ROCK POINT 27 08 S 32 50 E 2.33

BLENHEIM REEF 5 12 S 72 28 E 8.28

BLOWING POINT 3 42 S 39 52 E 6.18

BOA PAZ 24 58 S 34 10 E 2.38

BOKNESKOP 33 42 S 26 34 E 2.7

BONGOYO ISLAND 6 42 S 39 29 E 5.20

BORIBU 6 20 S 39 05 E 5.13

BOTHA KOP 34 00 S 25 31 E 1.28

BOUDEUSE CAY 6 06 S 52 50 E 8.23

BRAZEN HEAD 31 43 S 29 23 E 2.14

BRISANS ROCKS 4 32 S 55 29 E 8.11

BRITON SHOAL 5 23 S 39 06 E 6.11

BULLDOG BANK 10 00 S 50 48 E 9.28

BUR GOL BEACON 6 14 N 49 04 E 7.20

BUUR BUURDHEERE 1 15 S 41 50 E 6.35

BUUR GAABO 1 12 S 41 50 E 6.36

BUUR GOOL BEACON 6 14 N 49 04 E 7.20

BUURRASKA 8 39 N 50 23 E 7.23

C

CABO AFUNGI 10 49 S 40 37 E 3.53

CABO DA CABACEIRA 15 00 S 40 46 E 3.34

CABO DA INHACA 25 58 S 33 00 E 2.35

CABO DAS CORRENTES 24 06 S 35 30 E 2.40

CABO DE SANTA MARIA 26 05 S 32 58 E 2.35

CABO DELGADO 10 41 S 40 38 E 4.2

CABO INHAMBANE 23 52 S 35 33 E 2.40

CABO MELAMO 14 25 S 40 48 E 3.35

CABO MESSANGI 11 12 S 40 31 E 3.51

CABO NASUNGA 10 36 S 40 36 E 4.2

CABO NONDO 11 02 S 40 34 E 3.51

CABO PEQUENE 11 51 S 40 31 E 3.44

CABO SAO SEBASTIAO 22 05 S 35 28 E 3.5

CABO SUAFO 10 29 S 40 32 E 4.2

CADALE 2 45 N 46 20 E 7.12

CALAT 5 53 N 48 53 E 7.20

CANNON POINT 3 58 S 39 46 E 6.18

CANNONIERS POINT 20 00 S 57 33 E 9.11

CAP ADRIAMANAO 25 00 S 44 06 E 12.19

CAP ALLAIRE 49 16 S 69 48 E 13.21

CAP ALPHONSE RIO 49 39 S 69 38 E 13.29

CAP AMPARAFAKA 15 56 S 45 16 E 11.16

CAP ANDAVAKA 25 12 S 46 39 E 10.44

CAP ANDRIAMAMAO 25 00 S 44 05 E 12.18

CAP ANKARANA 20 29 S 44 09 E 12.10

CAP ANTSIRIKIRA 16 00 S 50 10 E 10.17

CAP BALDRISY 16 00 S 50 10 E 10.17

CAP BOURBON 49 43 S 68 47 E 13.30

CAP D'AMBRE 11 57 S 49 17 E 10.2

CAP DANIEL 49 08 S 69 58 E 13.23

CAP DAUPHIN 49 41 S 69 03 E 13.30

CAP DE L'ABRI 49 20 S 68 47 E 13.32

CAP DE LA POSSESSION 20 55 S 55 21 E 9.8

CAP DIGBY 49 05 S 70 32 E 13.24

CAP DOUAMOUGNO 12 39 S 45 06 E 9.44

CAP DU CHALLENGER 49 44 S 70 05 E 13.29

CAP EST 15 16 S 50 29 E 10.15

CAP FRANCAIS 48 40 S 69 04 E 13.10

CAP KERSAINT 49 15 S 69 44 E 13.21

CAP KIMBY 18 53 S 44 15 E 12.8

CAP LA HOUSSAYE 21 00 S 55 14 E 9.6

CAP LOUIS 49 21 S 68 39 E 13.31

CAP MACLEAR 49 38 S 70 17 E 13.28

CAP MANAMBATO 13 13 S 49 56 E 10.8

CAP MARIGNY 49 06 S 68 46 E 13.33

CAP MASOALA 15 59 S 50 14 E 10.16

CAP NEUMAYER 48 57 S 69 34 E 13.14

CAP NOVARA 37 52 S 77 36 E 13.37

CAP ROSNEVET 49 20 S 68 43 E 13.32

CAP SAINT VINCENT 21 57 S 43 16 E 12.13

CAP SAINT-ANDRE 16 12 S 44 28 E 12.3

CAP SAINTE MARIE 25 35 S 45 08 E 10.46

CAP SAINTE-MARIE 25 35 S 45 08 E 12.0

CAP TANIFOSTY 12 13 S 49 22 E 10.3

CAP TANJONA 13 03 S 49 55 E 10.8

CAP TSIHANANINA 14 57 S 50 19 E 10.14

CAP VERDOYANT 46 05 S 50 16 E 13.5

CAP VERTICAL 46 21 S 51 41 E 13.7

CAPE AGULHAS 34 50 S 20 01 E 1.13

CAPE BARRACOUTA 34 26 S 21 18 E 1.16

CAPE CROZIRE 46 57 S 37 35 E 13.1

CAPE D'AMBRE 11 57 S 49 17 E 9.47

CAPE HERMES 31 38 S 29 33 E 2.14

CAPE HOOKER 46 59 S 37 50 E 13.2

CAPE INFANTA 34 28 S 20 52 E 1.16

CAPE MORGAN 32 42 S 28 22 E 2.12

CAPE NATAL 29 52 S 31 04 E 2.21

CAPE OF GOOD HOPE 34 21 S 18 29 E 1.2

CAPE PADRONE 33 46 S 26 28 E 2.6

CAPE PAMAN 10 11 S 40 08 E 4.5

CAPE RECIFE 34 02 S 25 42 E 1.29

CAPE SEAL 34 06 S 23 25 E 1.23

CAPE ST. BLAIZE 34 11 S 22 10 E 1.18

CAPE ST. FRANCIS 34 12 S 24 52 E 1.26

CAPE ST. LUCIA 28 31 S 32 24 E 2.29

CAPE TERNAY 4 38 S 55 22 E 8.5

CAPE VIDAL 28 08 S 32 24 E 2.30

CAPUCIN ROCK 4 49 S 55 31 E 8.6

CARGADOS CARAJOS SHOALS 16 38 S 59 36 E 9.16

CASUARINA POINT 3 15 S 40 08 E 6.21

CEEL HUR 5 00 N 48 16 E 7.17

CEEL MAGAAD 3 14 N 46 50 E 7.14

CENTURION BANK 7 39 S 70 50 E 8.34

CERF ISLAND 4 38 S 55 30 E 8.8

CHAKE CHAKE 5 15 S 39 46 E 6.7

CHALE ISLAND 4 27 S 39 32 E 6.15

CHAPANI 6 08 S 39 11 E 5.15

CHELSEA POINT 34 03 S 25 38 E 1.27

CHISSIPI M'ZAMBORO 12 39 S 45 02 E 9.47

CHOCHA 8 24 S 39 23 E 4.19

CHOLE BAY 7 56 S 39 47 E 4.23

CHUMBE ISLAND 6 17 S 39 10 E 5.12

CLARK PATCH 2 16 S 41 01 E 6.28

CLASSEN POINT 34 02 S 25 26 E 1.28

COCO ISLAND 16 49 S 59 31 E 9.17

COETIYY ISLAND 7 06 S 56 16 E 8.20

COLLINA MUROT 2 36 N 46 11 E 7.11

COLLINADELLE ROSE 1 22 S 41 45 E 6.35

COLLINE AMBINANTSANDRA 12 04 S 49 12 E 11.4

COLLINE ANKARANA 23 05 S 47 38 E 10.39

COLLINE RONDE 19 39 S 48 44 E 10.33

COLVOCORESSES REEF 4 54 S 72 37 E 8.28

COMOROS ISLANDS 12 12 S 44 16 E 9.29

CONCEPTION ISLAND 4 40 S 55 22 E 8.4

CONE POINT 28 38 S 32 18 E 2.28

COROA MOMBASA 3 59 S 39 41 E 6.17

COSMOLEDO GROUP 9 42 S 43 35 E 9.23

COVE ROCK 33 05 S 27 50 E 2.10

CRIQUE DU SAC A PLOMB 49 15 S 68 54 E 13.33

CUNGE 28 40 S 32 15 E 2.23

CURIEUSE BAY 4 18 S 55 43 E 8.14

D

D'ARROS ISLAND 5 25 S 53 18 E 8.22

DALGLEISH BANK 34 11 S 22 58 E 1.21

DALRYMPLE SHOAL 5 47 S 39 06 E 5.18

DANGER ISLAND 6 23 S 71 16 E 8.32

DANGER POINT 34 38 S 19 18 E 1.12

DAR ES SALAAM 6 49 S 39 18 E 5.6

DAVID SHOALS 17 30 S 38 27 E 3.17

DENIS ISLAND 3 48 S 55 40 E 8.2

DENTIINO 10 23 N 51 16 E 7.25

DEUMONI 12 15 S 44 32 E 9.42

DIEGO GARCIA 7 21 S 72 28 E 8.35

DIRA 7 34 S 39 35 E 4.29

DOIGT DE STE. ANNE 49 34 S 69 23 E 13.29

DOMONI 12 15 S 44 32 E 9.42

DURBAN 29 52 S 31 02 E 2.22

E

EAGLE ISLANDS 6 12 S 71 19 E 8.32

EAST LONDON 33 02 S 27 55 E 2.11

EL HUR 5 00 N 48 16 E 7.17

EL MEGHET 3 14 N 46 50 E 7.14

ENGLISH PASS 6 08 S 39 12 E 5.15
Index—Gazetteer 213

Pub. 171

Position

° ' ° '

Position

° ' ° '

Sec.

Para

Sec.

Para

EYL MARINA 7 58 N 49 51 E 7.22

F

FALSE BLUFF 30 01 S 30 56 E 2.21

FANJOVE ISLAND 8 34 S 39 34 E 4.16

FARADOFAY 25 02 S 47 00 E 10.43

FARAFANGANA 22 49 S 47 50 E 10.39

FARQUHAR GROUP 10 10 S 51 07 E 9.28

FAUSSE TABLE 15 08 S 47 16 E 11.16

FAUX CAP 25 34 S 45 32 E 10.45

FAUX LOZA 14 40 S 47 47 E 11.23

FAWN BANK 7 30 S 39 41 E 4.29

FENERIVE 17 23 S 49 25 E 10.28

FIELD PATCH 7 21 S 39 38 E 4.30

FILI 7 40 S 39 37 E 4.29

FLAT ISLAND LIGHT 19 53 S 57 39 E 9.12

FLAT ISLET 19 53 S 57 39 E 9.10

FLESH BAY 34 19 S 21 56 E 1.18

FLINDERS BANK 20 35 S 57 09 E 9.13

FOMBONI 12 16 S 43 45 E 9.35

FORT DAUPHIN 25 02 S 47 00 E 10.43

FORTUNE BANK 7 12 S 56 59 E 8.20

FOULPOINTE 17 40 S 49 31 E 10.30

FRIGATE ISLAND 4 35 S 55 57 E 8.18

FUNGA MIZA 6 55 S 39 32 E 5.1

FUNGU CHAWAMBA 6 10 S 39 09 E 5.14

FUNGU DATCHA 5 33 S 39 04 E 5.24

FUNGU KAURI 8 00 S 39 33 E 4.27

FUNGU KIZIMKAZI 6 54 S 39 56 E 5.2

FUNGU MIKO 6 15 S 38 58 E 5.23

FUNGU TONGONE 5 17 S 39 08 E 6.11

FUNGU YASIN 6 36 S 39 14 E 5.20

FUNGUNI 4 51 S 39 46 E 6.10

FUNZI BAY 4 36 S 39 25 E 6.15

G

GANGES BANK 7 23 S 70 58 E 8.34

GARABLE 4 09 N 47 39 E 7.15

GARACAD 6 57 N 49 19 E 7.21

GARAD 6 57 N 49 19 E 7.21

GEES YUUNDA 1 13 S 41 51 E 6.36

GENDA GENDA 5 34 S 38 39 E 5.24

GERICKEPUNT 34 02 S 22 46 E 1.20

GILBERTE BANK 55 07 S 55 40 E 8.19

GILIB 1 48 N 44 54 E 7.7

GIPSY HILL 27 48 S 32 36 E 2.31

GLENDAY PATCHES 5 55 S 39 10 E 5.18

GLENDOWER PEAK 33 37 S 26 49 E 2.7

GLENTON REEF 29 00 S 31 44 E 2.25

GOELETTE ISLAND 10 13 S 51 08 E 9.28

GOJI 3 12 S 40 00 E 6.23

GORDON REEF 7 34 S 39 42 E 4.29

GRAB CADDE 5 29 N 48 37 E 7.19

GRAND PORT 20 24 S 57 42 E 9.14

GRAND RECIF 17 40 S 49 32 E 10.29

GRAND RIVER BAY 20 10 S 57 28 E 9.13

GRAND SOEUR 4 17 S 55 52 E 8.17

GRANDE MAMELLE 23 28 S 47 11 E 10.40

GREAT CHAGOS BANK 6 13 S 72 05 E 8.31

GREAT FISH POINT 33 31 S 27 07 E 2.9

GREEN PEAKS 31 41 S 29 28 E 2.14

GREEN POINT 30 15 S 30 47 E 2.19

GRENADIERSKOP 33 55 S 23 43 E 1.25

GROOT-BRAKRIVIER 34 03 S 22 15 E 1.20

GUNNER’S QUOIN 19 56 S 57 37 E 9.10

H

HABAY 2 12 N 45 39 E 7.10

HADDON POINT 4 29 S 55 15 E 8.12

HARANDRIAKA LOCKWOOD 18 32 S 43 46 E 12.6

HARRISON ROCK 4 38 S 55 32 E 8.9

HELLVILLE 13 24 S 48 17 E 11.13

HELODRANON'I LOKIA 12 44 S 49 41 E 10.6

HELODRANON'I RANOFOTSY 25 09 S 46 45 E 10.44

HELODRANON’ ANTSIRANANA 12 16 S 49 18 E 10.2

HEN DAIER BEACON 5 09 N 48 22 E 7.17

HERMANUS 34 25 S 19 14 E 1.11

HEROLD'S BAY 34 03 S 22 28 E 1.20

HOBYO 5 21 N 48 31 E 7.1

HOBYO 5 21 N 48 32 E 7.18

HOCTI DARUTE BEACON 4 28 N 47 57 E 7.16

HOLBAAIPUNT 34 23 S 18 51 E 1.10

HOLE IN THE WALL 32 02 S 29 07 E 2.13

HOOD POINT 33 03 S 27 54 E 2.10

HOOPPUNT 34 37 S 20 19 E 1.16

HRRANDRIAKA CROISSANT 18 22 S 43 55 E 12.5

I

IHARANA 13 21 S 50 00 E 10.9

IL FOOCSHE 7 10 N 49 28 E 7.21

ILE ALPHONSE 7 01 S 52 43 E 8.25

ILE AMSTERDAM 37 50 S 77 30 E 13.35

ILE AMSTERDAM 37 50 S 77 33 E 13.37

ILE AUX FOUQUETS 20 24 S 57 47 E 9.14

ILE AUX OISEAUX 20 20 S 57 49 E 9.14

ILE AUX PRUNES 18 03 S 48 28 E 10.30

ILE CHESTERFIELD 16 19 S 43 58 E 12.5

ILE DE L'EST 46 25 S 52 08 E 13.8

ILE DE LA REUNION 21 06 S 55 34 E 9.3

ILE DESROCHES 5 41 S 53 41 E 8.24

ILE DIEGO 12 11 S 49 24 E 10.3

ILE DU LYS 11 30 S 47 23 E 9.48

ILE DZAHA 12 24 S 43 39 E 9.36

ILE EUROPA 22 20 S 40 21 E 12.2

ILE GLORIEUSE 11 33 S 47 18 E 9.48

ILE HENRY 49 06 S 69 42 E 13.18

ILE HOWE 48 50 S 69 25 E 13.13

ILE JUAN DE NOVA 17 03 S 42 42 E 12.1

ILE PAMANZI 12 47 S 45 18 E 9.45

ILE RAPHAEL 16 27 S 59 37 E 9.16

ILE SAINT-PAUL 38 43 S 77 33 E 13.35

ILE SAKATIA 13 18 S 48 10 E 11.12

ILE TROMELIN 15 53 S 54 31 E 9.2

ILE VERTE 13 17 S 50 00 E 10.8

ILES DES PINGOUINS 46 28 S 50 20 E 13.6

ILES GLORIEUSES 11 31 S 47 20 E 9.48

ILES KERGUELEN 13.8

ILES LEVEN 12 48 S 49 51 E 10.7

ILHA ANGOCHE 16 20 S 39 51 E 3.28

ILHA CALDEIRA 16 39 S 39 43 E 3.25

ILHA DA INHACA 26 00 S 32 58 E 2.35

ILHA DAS ROLAS 12 09 S 40 34 E 3.47

ILHA DO BUZIO 16 16 S 39 56 E 3.27

ILHA DO FOGO 17 14 S 38 53 E 3.22

ILHA FOGO 17 14 S 38 53 E 3.22

ILHA GOMEN 14 19 S 40 44 E 3.38

ILHA MACALOE 11 59 S 40 35 E 3.47

ILHA MAGARUQUE 21 58 S 35 26 E 3.6

ILHA MEDJUMBE 11 47 S 40 38 E 3.47

ILHA MEFUNVO 12 33 S 40 36 E 3.45

ILHA METUNDO 11 10 S 40 41 E 3.49

ILHA MIONGE 11 25 S 40 31 E 3.48

ILHA MOMA 16 49 S 39 31 E 3.25

ILHA MUTIRRANE 16 47 S 39 15 E 3.24

ILHA QUIPACO 12 41 S 40 37 E 3.45

ILHA QUISIVA 12 36 S 40 37 E 3.45

ILHA QUISSANGA 11 49 S 40 34 E 3.48

ILHA QUITANGONHA 14 52 S 40 49 E 3.34

ILHA RONGUI 10 52 S 40 40 E 3.52

ILHA SANTA CAROLINA 21 37 S 35 20 E 3.7

ILHA TIMBUE LIGHT 18 49 S 36 21 E 3.12

ILHADE MAFAMEBE 16 21 S 40 02 E 3.25

ILLES KERGUELLEN 49 15 S 69 27 E 13.9

ILLOVO SPIT 30 09 S 30 52 E 2.20

ILOT DE LA SELLE 12 09 S 44 13 E 9.40

ILOT DE ROCHES 20 18 S 57 49 E 9.15

ILOT DU COURRIER 12 14 S 49 09 E 11.5

ILOT DZAOUDZI 12 47 S 45 15 E 9.46

ILOT MIERRY 49 17 S 69 43 E 13.21

INHAMBANE 23 52 S 35 23 E 3.3

INKULU 30 59 S 30 11 E 2.18

ISLAND ROCK 27 17 S 32 47 E 2.33

ITALA 2 45 N 46 20 E 7.12

ITAMPOLO 24 43 S 43 55 E 12.19
214 Index—Gazetteer

Pub. 171

Position

° ' ° '

Position

° ' ° '

Sec.

Para

Sec.

Para

J

JANSEN'S ROCK 33 36 S 26 56 E 2.8

JASIIRA TOOMBA 0 21 S 42 35 E 7.2

JASIIRAD BISHIKAANI 0 26 S 42 31 E 7.2

JESSER POINT 27 33 S 32 41 E 2.32

JIDANA 3 50 S 39 40 E 6.18

JIDDAWI SHOAL 6 04 S 39 11 E 5.15

JIWE LA MPUPU 2 13 S 41 01 E 6.29

J-SHA XAAFUUN 10 26 N 51 20 E 7.25

JUBBA 0 15 S 42 38 E 7.3

K

KAAP HANGKLIP 34 23 S 18 50 E 1.8

KALAD 5 53 N 48 53 E 7.20

KALK BAY 34 08 S 18 27 E 1.7

KANKADYA PATCH 6 44 S 39 19 E 5.5

KANOGE 7 42 S 39 10 E 4.30

KEISKAMA POINT 33 18 S 27 29 E 2.10

KEISKAMA RIVER 33 17 S 27 29 E 2.10

KENTON-ON-SEA 33 41 S 26 40 E 2.7

KIFENNI 1 13 S 41 51 E 6.36

KIKUNYA MOUTH 7 42 S 39 20 E 4.20

KILIFI CREEK 3 38 S 39 52 E 6.19

KILWA KIVINJE 8 44 S 39 23 E 4.17

KILWA MAIN PASS 8 40 S 39 32 E 4.16

KINYIKA 2 26 S 40 50 E 6.26

KIPINI 2 31 S 40 32 E 6.25

KIRK POINT 18 58 S 35 57 E 3.12

KISIJU 7 25 S 39 20 E 4.30

KISIMANI CHANNEL 8 02 S 39 34 E 4.27

KISMAAYO 0 22 S 42 33 E 7.2

KISWERE HAVEN 9 25 S 39 38 E 4.13

KIWAIHU BAY 2 04 S 41 12 E 6.32

KIWAIHU ISLAND 2 00 S 41 17 E 6.32

KIWAIHU KNOLLS 2 00 S 41 20 E 6.33

KIZIMKAZI PATCH 6 28 S 39 33 E 5.9

KNYSNA HARBOR 34 05 S 23 03 E 1.22

KOMA ISLAND 7 32 S 39 24 E 4.30

KROMBAAI 34 10 S 24 52 E 1.28

KROMME BAY 34 10 S 24 52 E 1.28

KRUISFONTEIN 33 57 S 24 41 E 1.25

KUNDUCHI HARBOR 6 40 S 39 14 E 5.21

KWAAI HOEK 33 43 S 26 38 E 2.7

KWALE 6 23 S 39 17 E 5.11

KWALE BAY 5 00 S 39 09 E 6.13

L

L'ILOT 4 36 S 55 54 E 8.19

LA DIGUE 4 21 S 55 50 E 8.16

LADY DENISON PENDER SHOAL 4 49 S 53 20 E 8.21

LAMA SHAAQA 1 39 S 41 35 E 6.33

LAMBASI BAY 31 23 S 29 54 E 2.17

LAMU 2 16 S 40 54 E 6.27

LAMU ISLAND 2 17 S 40 52 E 6.26

LANGDON ROCKS 5 53 S 39 07 E 5.18

LATHAM ISLAND 6 54 S 39 56 E 5.2

LE CONE 15 03 S 47 15 E 11.16

LE CONSTANT BANK 6 17 S 56 18 E 8.20

LE GRAND BANC 12 18 S 49 27 E 10.3

LEOPARD POINT 3 15 S 40 08 E 6.22

LEVEN BANK 5 38 S 39 18 E 5.18

LEVEN POINT 27 55 S 32 36 E 2.30

LINDI 10 00 S 39 43 E 4.10

LITTLE HEAD 1 57 S 41 19 E 6.33

LOHATANJON' AMBOZOMENA 15 12 S 47 02 E 11.26

LOHATANJON' ANDRONONA 12 56 S 49 52 E 10.8

LOHATANJON' ANTSIRAKA 16 50 S 49 50 E 10.22

LOHATANJON' ANTSIRAKAKAMBANA 16 42 S 50 00 E 10.23

LOHATANJON' ANTSITAKARAIKY 16 45 S 49 58 E 10.25

LOHATANJON'I TAMPOLO 15 44 S 49 57 E 10.18

LOHATANJONA EVATRA 25 00 S 47 05 E 10.42

LOHATANJONA FENAMBOSY 25 15 S 44 21 E 12.19

LOHATANJONA IHARANA 13 21 S 50 00 E 10.10

LOHATANJONA TITINGO 16 42 S 49 46 E 10.22

LOHATANJONA VOHIBATO 17 08 S 49 48 E 10.24

LOURENCO MARQUES 25 58 S 32 35 E 2.36

LUALA REEF 8 37 S 39 31 E 4.16

M

MAC LEAR 49 38 S 70 17 E 13.28

MACHANGI 8 25 S 39 27 E 4.19

MACOMA LIGHT 25 41 S 32 46 E 2.36

MADAGASCAR PAST ILE EUROPA 22 20 S 40 26 E 1.1

MADAGASCAR REEF 33 23 S 27 21 E 2.10

MADAXWEYNE 3 53 N 47 26 E 7.15

MADUVI 7 55 S 39 33 E 4.28

MAFIA ISLAND 7 50 S 39 48 E 4.21

MAHABO 23 48 S 47 33 E 10.40

MAHAJANGA 15 42 S 46 19 E 11.28

MAHAMBO 17 29 S 49 28 E 10.29

MAHANORO 19 55 S 48 49 E 10.34

MAHE ISLAND 4 40 S 55 28 E 8.3

MAHELA 20 58 S 48 27 E 10.35

MAINTIRANO 18 04 S 44 01 E 12.7

MAINTIRANOMATY 18 10 S 44 02 E 12.8

MAITLAND HILL 33 26 S 27 09 E 2.9

MAJUNGA 15 42 S 46 19 E 11.28

MALINDI 3 13 S 40 08 E 6.23

MALINDI POINT 3 15 S 40 07 E 6.22

MAMBRUI POINT 3 06 S 40 10 E 6.24

MAMELLE ISLAND 4 29 S 55 32 E 8.15

MAMELLES DE NATTE 17 50 S 49 25 E 10.30

MANA HAWANJA ISLAND 10 17 S 40 22 E 4.4

MANAKARA 22 09 S 48 03 E 10.37

MANANARA 16 10 S 49 46 E 10.19

MANANJARY 21 15 S 48 20 E 10.36

MANDA BAY 2 07 S 40 57 E 6.29

MANDA ISLAND 2 16 S 40 57 E 6.28

MANDA ROADS 2 16 S 41 01 E 6.29

MANDA TOTO ISLAND 2 14 S 40 59 E 6.29

MANGE 8 03 S 39 36 E 4.27

MANTHLONETCHWA HILL 31 31 S 29 40 E 2.16

MAPU PATCH 19 59 S 57 40 E 9.10

MAPUTO 25 58 S 32 35 E 2.35

MARBIXIS 8 57 N 50 30 E 7.23

MARCUS BAY 34 40 S 20 15 E 1.16

MAREEG 3 46 N 47 18 E 7.14

MARGATE 30 52 S 30 22 E 2.18

MARIANNE ISLAND 4 21 S 55 55 E 8.17

MARIE LOUISE ISLAND 6 11 S 53 09 E 8.23

MARION ISLAND 46 52 S 37 45 E 1.1

MARION ISLAND 46 53 S 37 43 E 13.1

MARKA 1 43 N 44 47 E 7.6

MAROANTSETRA 15 27 S 49 49 E 10.20

MAROTIA 16 02 S 45 23 E 11.27

MARUTEZA POINT 12 24 S 48 46 E 11.6

MASSUNDJI-MACULA 12 27 S 40 39 E 3.45

MATUMBE MAKUPA 5 24 S 39 34 E 6.4

MAURITIUS 20 15 S 57 35 E 9.9

MAXECANE 22 31 S 35 31 E 3.4

MAYOTTE 12 49 S 45 10 E 9.43

MAZIWI ISLAND 5 30 S 39 04 E 5.24

MBASHE POINT 32 15 S 28 55 E 2.12

MBWAKUNI 6 22 S 38 59 E 5.23

MBWAMAJI HARBOR 6 51 S 39 22 E 5.4

MBWENI VILLAGE 6 35 S 39 08 E 5.22

MCHENGANGAZI 5 06 S 39 52 E 6.3

MCHINGA BAY 9 43 S 39 46 E 4.11

MENAI ISLAND 9 42 S 47 31 E 9.23

MEREGH 3 46 N 47 18 E 7.14

MESALI GAP 5 14 S 39 36 E 6.6

MGENI RIVER 29 49 S 31 02 E 2.24

MIDA CREEK 3 23 S 39 59 E 6.20

MIKINDANI 10 16 S 40 08 E 4.7

MIKINDANI BAY 10 13 S 40 09 E 4.5

MILLARD BANK 6 48 S 39 24 E 5.3

MILLERS POINT 34 14 S 18 29 E 1.4

MILLERS POINT 4 17 S 55 41 E 8.13

MISETE CREEK 10 16 S 40 09 E 4.5

MITSAMIOULI 11 23 S 43 17 E 9.31

MKOANI 5 22 S 39 39 E 6.4

MKOKOTONI HARBOR 5 50 S 39 16 E 5.19

MKWAJA PATCHES 5 49 S 38 55 E 5.24

MLANGO MUHAJI 2 18 S 41 01 E 6.28

MLANGO PAZARLI 2 12 S 41 05 E 6.31

MLANGO WA SERA 2 10 S 41 07 E 6.31

MNAZI BAY 10 20 S 40 21 E 4.4

MNEMBA ISLAND 5 49 S 39 23 E 5.9

MOGADISHU 02 02 N 45 21 E 7.9
Index—Gazetteer 215

Pub. 171

Position

° ' ° '

Position

° ' ° '

Sec.

Para

Sec.

Para

MOHELI 12 19 S 43 45 E 9.34

MOMBASA 4 04 S 39 41 E 6.17

MOMBASA GAP 4 04 S 39 41 E 6.16

MONT ANKARAMY 13 59 S 48 12 E 11.20

MONT BUNGAY 49 19 S 70 26 E 13.10

MONT CAMPBELL 49 04 S 70 19 E 13.10

MONT DE LA TABLE 14 41 S 50 09 E 10.2

MONT PEEPER 49 12 S 70 25 E 13.10

MONT VATOVARY 21 24 S 47 57 E 10.36

MONTAGNE D'AMBRE 12 36 S 49 09 E 10.2

MONTAGNE D'AMBRE 12 38 S 49 05 E 11.5

MONTE CUTFIELD 25 34 S 32 51 E 2.37

MONTE DEDO 14 21 S 40 33 E 3.38

MONTE MESA 14 45 S 40 39 E 3.33

MONTE PAO 14 50 S 40 25 E 3.33

MONTE PILAR 13 44 S 40 19 E 3.39

MONTE ROGES 14 14 S 40 26 E 3.38

MORNE DE MAHANARA 13 55 S 50 07 E 10.10

MORNE MANOMBO 24 42 S 47 11 E 10.41

MORNE NOIR 13 26 S 49 58 E 10.2

MORNE NOIR 13 29 S 50 01 E 10.9

MORNE SEYCHELLOIS 4 39 S 55 26 E 8.3

MOROMBE 21 45 S 43 22 E 12.12

MORONDAVA 20 17 S 44 18 E 12.9

MORONI 11 42 S 43 15 E 9.31

MOSSELBAAI 34 11 S 22 09 E 1.19

MOUILLAGE D'AMPASILAVA 21 15 S 43 43 E 12.11

MOUILLAGE DE VANGAINDRANO 23 20 S 47 43 E 10.39

MOUNT ANGORONI 14 13 S 48 10 E 11.20

MOUNT HARRISON 4 41 S 55 29 E 8.3

MOUNT M'TUPE 16 34 S 39 10 E 3.23

MOUNT MANGEA 3 15 S 39 43 E 6.21

MOUNT MATABLE 15 12 S 47 08 E 11.16

MOUNT SEBERT 4 41 S 55 30 E 8.3

MOUNT TABOR 28 15 S 32 30 E 2.30

MOUNT TAMARIN 20 21 S 57 22 E 9.13

MOUNT VALE 33 10 S 27 26 E 2.10

MOURNE DE LA POINTE 12 23 S 44 32 E 9.42

MPARA HILL 8 51 S 39 26 E 4.15

MSALA CHANNEL 7 50 S 39 32 E 4.28

MSHINGWI 6 27 S 39 01 E 5.22

MSUKA BAY 4 54 S 39 43 E 6.10

MSUNGU BAY 9 29 S 39 40 E 4.12

MTAMVUNA RIVER 31 05 S 30 11 E 2.17

MTIPE 5 19 S 39 38 E 6.6

MTWALUME RIVER 30 29 S 30 38 E 2.19

MTWANA 6 14 S 39 11 E 5.14

MTWAPA CREEK 3 58 S 39 46 E 6.18

MTWARA 10 16 S 40 12 E 4.6

MUDGE POINT 34 25 S 19 08 E 1.10

MUNGHIA 1 37 N 44 37 E 7.5

MUQDISHO 2 02 N 45 21 E 7.9

MUTSAMUDU 12 10 S 44 24 E 9.40

MWALI 12 19 S 43 45 E 9.33

MWAMBA BUIUNI 5 53 S 38 52 E 5.24

MWAMBA HASANI 2 08 S 41 10 E 6.30

MWAMBA MAWE 5 26 S 39 05 E 5.25

MWAMBA UKOMBE 6 19 S 39 14 E 5.12

MWAMBA WA TAWA NDANI 2 34 S 40 40 E 6.25

MWAMBA WAMBA 4 58 S 39 15 E 6.13

MWANA WA MWANA 5 46 S 39 13 E 5.18

MWANANKAYA 8 43 S 39 31 E 4.16

N

NANKIVELL ROCK 5 43 S 39 14 E 5.18

NELSONS ISLAND 5 41 S 72 02 E 8.32

NHLABANE ROCK 28 41 S 32 16 E 2.28

NIORORO ISLAND 7 37 S 39 41 E 4.29

NJAO GAP 4 58 S 39 40 E 6.6

NJAZIDJA 11 37 S 43 22 E 9.30

NKONYANE 27 38 S 32 39 E 2.31

NOAH’S ARK 34 12 S 18 27 E 1.5

NORTH EAST POINT 4 35 S 55 28 E 8.11

NORTH ISLAND 10 07 S 51 11 E 9.28

NORTH ISLAND 4 23 S 55 15 E 8.12

NORTH SAND BLUFF 31 03 S 30 14 E 2.17

NORTHUMBERLAND POINT 34 48 S 20 04 E 1.14

NOSIKELY 22 42 S 47 51 E 10.38

NOSY AMBATOHARANA 15 56 S 50 15 E 10.16

NOSY ANAMBO 12 16 S 48 39 E 11.5

NOSY ANDRANO 18 33 S 43 51 E 12.6

NOSY ANDROTA 18 29 S 43 48 E 12.6

NOSY ANGONTSY 15 16 S 50 30 E 10.14

NOSY ANKOMBA 12 42 S 49 40 E 10.6

NOSY ATAFANA 16 19 S 49 50 E 10.21

NOSY BARRACOUTA 12 48 S 49 52 E 10.6

NOSY BE 13 17 S 50 00 E 10.8

NOSY BEZA BEACON 15 46 S 46 20 E 11.28

NOSY DIEGO 12 11 S 49 24 E 10.3

NOSY DOMBALA 18 26 S 49 24 E 10.32

NOSY FAHO 18 18 S 49 24 E 10.32

NOSY FANALA 15 26 S 50 28 E 10.16

NOSY FASY 12 10 S 48 53 E 11.5

NOSY HAO 12 07 S 49 04 E 11.5

NOSY HAO 22 05 S 43 11 E 12.14

NOSY HARA 12 15 S 49 01 E 11.5

NOSY IRANJA 13 36 S 47 49 E 11.17

NOSY JUAN DE NOVA 17 03 S 42 42 E 12.1

NOSY LAKANDAVA 12 15 S 48 58 E 11.5

NOSY LANGORO 12 13 S 49 19 E 10.4

NOSY LAVA 14 32 S 47 35 E 11.21

NOSY LAVA 18 35 S 43 45 E 12.6

NOSY MAKAMBY 15 43 S 45 54 E 11.29

NOSY MAMOKO 13 43 S 48 12 E 11.15

NOSY MANAMBIBY 12 46 S 49 46 E 10.6

NOSY MANANONO 12 27 S 48 41 E 11.6

NOSY MANDAZONA 12 28 S 48 43 E 11.6

NOSY MANGABE 15 30 S 49 45 E 10.20

NOSY MILOMBOKA 15 35 S 49 45 E 10.20

NOSY MITSIO 12 53 S 48 37 E 11.9

NOSY SABA 14 21 S 47 38 E 11.21

NOSY SAINTE MARIE 16 53 S 49 55 E 10.23

NOSY TOFARA 23 31 S 43 43 E 12.17

NOSY VAHALA 12 52 S 49 51 E 10.7

NOSY VAO 17 29 S 43 45 E 12.5

NOSY VE 23 39 S 43 36 E 12.19

NOSY VOLANA 12 13 S 49 22 E 10.3

NTOGANDE HILL 28 43 S 32 11 E 2.27

NZWANI 12 13 S 44 22 E 9.38

O

OBBIA 5 21 N 48 32 E 7.18

OCHOUNGUI 12 48 S 45 06 E 9.47

OKUZA ISLAND 8 16 S 39 36 E 4.19

OUTER MAKATUMBE 6 47 S 39 20 E 5.3

OUTER SINDA 6 49 S 39 24 E 5.3

OWEN BANK 4 40 S 54 00 E 8.20

OWEN PATCHES 2 05 S 41 15 E 6.32

P

PAIN DE SUCRE 49 33 S 70 15 E 13.26

PALE HILL 5 54 S 39 15 E 5.17

PANGANI 5 26 S 38 59 E 5.25

PANGANI BAY 5 26 S 39 01 E 6.11

PANGAVINI ISLAND 6 40 S 39 14 E 5.20

PANGE 6 11 S 30 09 E 5.14

PANTALOON SHOALS 17 43 S 38 02 E 3.17

PANZA 5 28 S 39 38 E 6.4

PASSAGEM DE MIONGE 11 23 S 40 31 E 3.49

PASSAGEM DE NAMEGUO 11 33 S 40 37 E 3.48

PASSAGEM DE TAMBUZE 11 26 S 40 39 E 3.48

PASSE DES ILES CHOAZIL 12 41 S 44 58 E 9.47

PASSE DU MORNE ROUGE 12 52 S 44 57 E 9.47

PASSE M'ZAMBORO 12 36 S 45 07 E 9.44

PATE BAY 2 10 S 41 05 E 6.30

PATSI ROAD 12 08 S 44 27 E 9.39

PATSY ROAD 12 08 S 44 27 E 9.39

PAZARLI RIDGE 2 12 S 41 07 E 6.30

PEARL ISLAND 16 33 S 59 31 E 9.16

PEMA 12 58 S 40 30 E 3.42

PEMBA 5 10 S 39 46 E 6.2

PEMBA CHANNEL 5 06 S 39 21 E 6.1

PEMBA POINT 10 15 S 40 08 E 4.7

PEROS BANHOS 5 20 S 71 51 E 8.30

PETIT MONT BALLON 49 14 S 69 23 E 13.20

PETIT PATE 20 23 S 57 44 E 9.14

PIC DU TANYLATSAKA 13 19 S 48 14 E 11.10

PIC LOZA 14 38 S 47 49 E 11.23
216 Index—Gazetteer

Pub. 171

Position

° ' ° '

Position

° ' ° '

Sec.

Para

Sec.

Para

PICO FLORENCO 26 45 S 32 54 E 2.34

PIETER BOTH 20 11 S 57 35 E 9.12

PILOT PATCHES 4 42 S 55 20 E 8.4

PITON DE SAMBIRANO 14 05 S 50 02 E 10.10

PITONS D'ANGONTSY 15 16 S 50 18 E 10.2

PLATTE ISLAND 5 52 S 55 24 E 8.19

PLETTENBERGBAAI 34 05 S 23 25 E 1.24

POINET ANTANANDAVA 15 50 S 46 19 E 11.28

POINTE A LARREE 16 50 S 49 50 E 10.22

POINTE ACUA 12 45 S 45 03 E 9.47

POINTE ALBRAND 16 42 S 50 00 E 10.23

POINTE AMBARARATA 15 11 S 46 57 E 11.16

POINTE AMBARIONAOMBY 13 26 S 48 21 E 11.13

POINTE AMBERO 25 07 S 46 50 E 10.44

POINTE AMBODIVAHIBE 12 21 S 49 31 E 10.6

POINTE AMBOLIBOSO 14 10 S 48 00 E 11.20

POINTE ANDEFITRA 21 39 S 43 25 E 12.12

POINTE ANGADOKA 13 30 S 47 59 E 11.16

POINTE ANGOROTANY 24 43 S 43 55 E 12.19

POINTE ANOROMBATO 15 43 S 46 18 E 11.28

POINTE ANSIRAKE 15 27 S 49 45 E 10.20

POINTE AUX CAVES 20 11 S 57 24 E 9.13

POINTE BANDABOA 12 42 S 45 08 E 9.44

POINTE BARN HILL 23 33 S 43 45 E 12.17

POINTE BARON 12 22 S 48 58 E 11.5

POINTE BEFOTAKA 23 24 S 43 42 E 12.17

POINTE BESISTKA 15 50 S 46 22 E 11.28

POINTE BLERIOT 48 58 S 68 52 E 13.34

POINTE BLEVEC 17 08 S 49 48 E 10.24

POINTE BOUENI 12 54 S 45 04 E 9.47

POINTE CAPUCINS 4 47 S 55 32 E 8.6

POINTE CORNARD 12 22 S 49 27 E 10.6

POINTE D'AMBODAY 13 13 S 48 15 E 11.11

POINTE D'AMPANGALA 12 53 S 48 37 E 11.9

POINTE D'ANKIFY 13 32 S 48 22 E 11.15

POINTE D'ANTSIRAKARAIKY 16 45 S 49 58 E 10.25

POINTE D'ESNY 20 25 S 57 44 E 9.14

POINTE DAPANI 12 59 S 45 11 E 9.47

POINTE DE BEL AIR 20 53 S 55 37 E 9.4

POINTE DE L'OCEANOGRAPHIE 49 36 S 69 14 E 13.30

POINTE DE LA BRECHE 49 10 S 69 56 E 13.23

POINTE DE LA TABLE 21 19 S 55 49 E 9.5

POINTE DE LANGEVIN 21 23 S 55 39 E 9.5

POINTE DE LANGLE 48 58 S 69 39 E 13.15

POINTE DE PENMARCH 49 37 S 69 25 E 13.29

POINTE DE SABLE 15 44 S 46 18 E 11.28

POINTE DE VOHEMAR 13 21 S 50 00 E 10.10

POINTE DES AVIRONS 21 14 S 55 20 E 9.6

POINTE DES GALETS 20 54 S 55 16 E 9.8

POINTE DES JARDINS 20 52 S 55 28 E 9.4

POINTE DU BOURBIER 21 01 S 55 43 E 9.4

POINTE DU CHIEN 49 15 S 69 51 E 13.21

POINTE DU CRATERE 13 24 S 48 14 E 11.12

POINTE DU CUIR SALE 48 58 S 68 51 E 13.34

POINTE DU DIABLE 20 20 S 57 47 E 9.14

POINTE DU NOUVEL HOPITAL 17 23 S 49 25 E 10.28

POINTE DU SUD 4 48 S 55 32 E 8.6

POINTE EBOULEMENT 37 50 S 77 36 E 13.37

POINTE EVATRA 25 00 S 47 05 E 10.42

POINTE FARMAN 49 02 S 68 48 E 13.34

POINTE FENAMBOSY 25 15 S 44 21 E 12.19

POINTE GUITE 49 25 S 70 17 E 13.24

POINTE HAMOURO 12 52 S 45 13 E 9.45

POINTE HOANI 12 15 S 43 40 E 9.35

POINTE HOSKEN 37 49 S 77 35 E 13.37

POINTE KILIBE 23 26 S 43 44 E 12.17

POINTE KONGO 12 44 S 45 13 E 9.44

POINTE LAMBOHARANA 22 12 S 43 14 E 12.14

POINTE LAVALOHALIKA 14 00 S 47 56 E 11.17

POINTE LAVERDURE 20 25 S 57 46 E 9.14

POINTE LAZARE 4 46 S 55 28 E 8.4

POINTE M'VOUNI 11 53 S 43 30 E 9.33

POINTE MAHELA 16 42 S 49 45 E 10.22

POINTE MANAKARA 15 12 S 47 02 E 11.26

POINTE MAROHATA 21 17 S 43 36 E 12.11

POINTE MAROMONY 14 39 S 47 27 E 11.24

POINTE MIREMANI 12 21 S 43 39 E 9.37

POINTE MORNE 49 22 S 70 27 E 13.24

POINTE N'GOUNI 11 44 S 43 13 E 9.32

POINTE OAKELEY 48 51 S 69 30 E 13.13

POINTE ORAVAKA 12 34 S 48 49 E 11.6

POINTE PAGES 49 10 S 68 48 E 13.33

POINTE PIMENTS 20 05 S 57 31 E 9.11

POINTE SADA 15 59 S 45 20 E 11.30

POINTE SARODRANO 23 30 S 43 44 E 12.18

POINTE SAZILEY 12 58 S 45 12 E 9.45

POINTE SCOTT 49 06 S 70 06 E 13.23

POINTE SUD OUEST 20 28 S 57 18 E 9.13

POINTE TAFONDRO 13 24 S 48 22 E 11.12

POINTE TAFONDRO 16 53 S 49 53 E 10.26

POINTE TAKOANDRA 17 25 S 49 27 E 10.28

POINTE TAMPOLO 15 44 S 49 57 E 10.18

POINTE TINTINGUE 16 42 S 49 46 E 10.22

POINTE TONY 23 00 S 43 28 E 12.15

POINTE TSINAYOUHI 12 23 S 43 52 E 9.36

POINTE VENUS 19 40 S 63 26 E 9.19

POIVRE ISLANDS 5 46 S 53 19 E 8.23

POLICE POINT 4 48 S 55 31 E 8.6

POMONI 12 16 S 44 24 E 9.41

PONTA ALGOA 23 39 S 35 26 E 3.4

PONTA ALMANDIA 17 05 S 38 42 E 3.23

PONTA BAJONE 15 15 S 40 41 E 3.31

PONTA CALDERIA 16 39 S 39 30 E 3.24

PONTA CHICUQUE 23 47 S 35 21 E 3.3

PONTA CHILUELA 25 17 S 33 19 E 2.38

PONTA CHINGUNE 20 37 S 34 53 E 3.10

PONTA CONGOLONE 16 05 S 40 06 E 3.28

PONTA CUMPADJI 14 31 S 40 50 E 3.35

PONTA DA BARRA 23 47 S 35 32 E 2.40

PONTA DA BARRA FALSA 22 55 S 35 37 E 3.4

PONTA DA MACANETA 25 52 S 32 45 E 2.36

PONTA DO DIABO 12 45 S 40 38 E 3.45

PONTA DO OURO 26 51 S 32 54 E 2.34

PONTA DUNDO 21 48 S 35 27 E 3.6

PONTA INGOMAIMO 20 42 S 35 00 E 3.8

PONTA INHASSORO 21 35 S 35 15 E 3.7

PONTA LESTE 18 53 S 36 17 E 3.12

PONTA LIBERAL 18 34 S 36 28 E 3.14

PONTA LULO 14 09 S 40 36 E 3.39

PONTA MACALONGA 17 01 S 39 04 E 3.23

PONTA MACHANGA 20 56 S 35 07 E 3.8

PONTA MACOVANE 21 10 S 35 07 E 3.8

PONTA MACUTI 19 51 S 34 54 E 3.1

PONTA MANCOME 14 07 S 40 37 E 3.39

PONTA MARIA LUIZA 13 43 S 40 34 E 3.40

PONTA MASIUANE 16 24 S 39 54 E 3.26

PONTA MATIRRE 17 17 S 38 11 E 3.21

PONTA MAUNHANE 12 58 S 40 35 E 3.42

PONTA METACAUA 13 33 S 40 36 E 3.41

PONTA MIASI 14 00 S 40 37 E 3.40

PONTA NAMALUNGO 15 38 S 40 25 E 3.30

PONTA NANGAMBA 12 38 S 40 36 E 3.45

PONTA NANGATA 14 11 S 40 41 E 3.38

PONTA NAPENJA 14 50 S 40 50 E 3.35

PONTA OLINDA 18 03 S 36 58 E 3.15

PONTA ONLUGUNE 14 41 S 40 50 E 3.35

PONTA PADJINI 25 20 S 33 14 E 2.37

PONTA QUIRIMISI 12 12 S 40 31 E 3.47

PONTA ROMERO 12 57 S 40 30 E 3.43

PONTA SANCUL 15 05 S 40 43 E 3.33

PONTA TANGALANE 18 01 S 36 59 E 3.17

PONTA UCAIA 12 12 S 40 34 E 3.46

PONTA UIFUNDO 13 23 S 40 36 E 3.42

PONTA ULU 11 24 S 40 28 E 3.49

PONTA UTUCO 14 23 S 40 41 E 3.37

PONTA VERMELHA 25 59 S 32 36 E 2.36

PONTA ZAVORA 24 31 S 35 12 E 2.39

PORT ALFRED 33 36 S 26 54 E 2.8

PORT COCKBURN 5 12 S 39 43 E 6.8

PORT CREDNER 49 02 S 69 17 E 13.14

PORT CURIEUSE 49 22 S 68 49 E 13.32

PORT DE L'ENFER 49 31 S 68 51 E 13.31

PORT DE LA NIEVRE 12 16 S 49 16 E 10.5

PORT DE LA POINTE DES GALETS 20 55 S 55 18 E 9.7

PORT DES ILES 49 28 S 70 04 E 13.27

PORT DU KETCH 49 29 S 69 54 E 13.28

PORT DURNFORD 28 55 S 31 49 E 2.26

PORT ELIZABETH 33 58 S 25 37 E 2.3

PORT GEORGE 5 06 S 39 40 E 6.8

PORT HELENE 49 04 S 69 16 E 13.14

PORT JEANNE D'ARC 49 32 S 69 49 E 13.27

PORT KISH KASH 5 02 S 39 40 E 6.9

PORT KIUYU 4 58 S 39 41 E 6.9

PORT LOUIS 20 10 S 57 30 E 9.12
Index—Gazetteer 217

Pub. 171

Position

° ' ° '

Position

° ' ° '

Sec.

Para

Sec.

Para

PORT MARY 49 00 S 69 19 E 13.14

PORT MATHURIN 19 41 S 63 25 E 9.19

PORT MKOANI 5 21 S 39 39 E 6.5

PORT NAVALO 49 30 S 70 13 E 13.26

PORT NGQURA 33 48 S 25 42 E 2.5

PORT RADAMA 14 05 S 47 57 E 11.20

PORT REUNION 20 55 S 55 18 E 9.7

PORT ROLAND BONAPARTE 49 02 S 69 39 E 13.16

PORT ROSA 49 08 S 69 23 E 13.18

PORT SAINTE MARIE 17 00 S 49 51 E 10.26

PORT SAINT-LOUIS 13 05 S 48 50 E 11.8

PORT SHEPSTONE 30 44 S 30 28 E 2.18

PORT SOUTH EAST 19 45 S 63 27 E 9.20

PORT ST. JOHNS 31 38 S 29 33 E 2.15

PORT VICTORIA 4 37 S 55 27 E 8.10

PORT-AUX-FRANCAIS 49 21 S 70 13 E 13.25

PORTO BELO 17 42 S 37 11 E 3.18

PORTO DE ANGOCHE 16 14 S 39 54 E 3.27

PORTO DE BARTOLOMEU DIAS 21 10 S 35 07 E 3.8

PORTO DE CHILOANE 20 37 S 34 53 E 3.9

PORTO DE DUARTE PEDROSO 14 13 S 40 33 E 3.39

PORTO DE MOCAMBIQUE 15 02 S 40 44 E 3.33

PORTO DE MOCAMBO 15 08 S 40 33 E 3.32

PORTO DE MOCIMBOA DA PRAIA 11 20 S 40 20 E 3.50

PORTO DE MOMA 16 46 S 39 14 E 3.24

PORTO DE NACALA 14 32 S 40 40 E 3.36

PORTO DE PEBANE 17 16 S 38 09 E 3.20

PORTO DE QUELIMANE 17 53 S 36 53 E 3.16

PORTO DO IBO 12 20 S 40 37 E 3.46

POTOPOTO HILL 12 21 S 48 59 E 11.5

PRASLIN ISLAND 4 20 S 55 44 E 8.13

PRESQUILE D'AMBATO 13 22 S 48 30 E 11.9

PRESQUILLE D'AMBATO 13 22 S 48 30 E 11.9

PRESTGRAVE BANK 2 19 S 41 01 E 6.28

PRINCE EDWARD ISLAND 46 38 S 37 56 E 13.3

PRINGLE BAY 34 20 S 18 50 E 1.8

PROTEA BANKS 30 50 S 30 29 E 2.18

PROVIDENCE ISLAND 9 14 S 51 02 E 9.26

PUDDING HILL 28 53 S 32 00 E 2.26

PUMBAVU ISLET 8 30 S 39 29 E 4.19

PUNGUME 6 26 S 39 20 E 5.10

PUNTA DIGA 5 21 N 48 32 E 7.18

PUNTA UARSCIECH 2 26 N 46 01 E 7.11

Q

QOORIGA JUULA 1 01 S 42 00 E 6.37

QUISSICO LIGHT 24 45 S 34 48 E 2.39

QUOIN HILL 31 15 S 30 02 E 2.17

QUOIN POINT 34 47 S 19 38 E 1.13

QUREEXANE 8 12 N 50 08 E 7.23

R

RAAS CABAAD 6 18 N 49 05 E 7.20

RAAS CUSBAD 4 34 N 48 01 E 7.16

RAAS DAAY 1 11 N 44 08 E 7.4

RAAS DIGA 5 21 N 48 32 E 7.18

RAAS DURDURA 9 05 N 50 39 E 7.23

RAAS FILFILE 1 16 N 44 13 E 7.5

RAAS GABBAC 8 08 N 50 04 E 7.22

RAAS GARMAAL 8 32 N 50 19 E 7.23

RAAS GUMBAX 10 00 N 50 54 E 7.24

RAAS KAAF 1 51 N 45 01 E 7.8

RAAS KAAMBOONI 1 39 S 41 36 E 6.33

RAAS MACBAR 9 28 N 50 51 E 7.23

RAAS OGADEN 0 27 S 42 29 E 6.37

RAAS SIINDHASS 1 21 N 44 18 E 7.5

RAAS WARAFOOLE 1 24 S 41 44 E 6.35

RAAS XAAFUUN 10 26 N 51 25 E 7.25

RADE D'ANGONTSY 15 15 S 50 29 E 10.14

RAME HEAD 31 48 S 29 21 E 2.13

RAS ASIR 11 50 N 51 17 E 1.1

RAS ASSUAD 4 34 N 48 01 E 7.16

RAS AUAD 6 18 N 49 05 E 7.20

RAS AUDALLA 0 46 N 43 37 E 7.1

RAS BIONGWE 2 23 S 40 49 E 6.26

RAS BUYUNI 7 08 S 39 33 E 4.30

RAS BWECHANO 5 51 S 39 13 E 5.18

RAS CHOKIR 6 49 S 39 10 E 5.6

RAS DEGE 6 52 S 39 28 E 5.3

RAS DEGE 6 52 S 39 29 E 5.7

RAS DIMA 8 00 S 39 26 E 4.28

RAS EL CHEIL 7 44 N 49 52 E 7.21

RAS FUMBA 6 19 S 39 17 E 5.12

RAS GABAH 8 08 N 50 04 E 7.22

RAS GOME LAHECUA 1 32 S 41 39 E 6.35

RAS HABU 11 21 S 43 25 E 9.30

RAS ILIG 7 48 N 49 50 E 7.21

RAS KANDA 4 35 S 39 26 E 6.15

RAS KANKADYA 6 44 S 39 16 E 5.20

RAS KANKADYA 6 44 S 39 17 E 5.5

RAS KANZI 7 01 S 39 33 E 5.1

RAS KAZONE 5 04 S 39 08 E 6.11

RAS KIBUNGWE 9 52 S 39 48 E 4.11

RAS KIGOMASHA 4 53 S 39 41 E 6.10

RAS KILIFI 4 47 S 39 13 E 6.13

RAS KIMBIJI 6 59 S 39 33 E 5.1

RAS KINGOJI 5 17 S 39 40 E 6.6

RAS KIPANOKI 8 57 S 39 32 E 4.15

RAS KISIMANI 7 57 S 39 35 E 4.22

RAS KITOKA 3 38 S 39 52 E 6.18

RAS KIUYU 4 53 S 39 52 E 6.3

RAS KIZIMKAZI 6 28 S 39 30 E 5.9

RAS KORONJO 6 51 S 39 23 E 5.4

RAS KWAWA 5 00 S 39 10 E 6.13

RAS LWALE 6 27 S 38 59 E 5.22

RAS MABBER 9 28 N 50 51 E 7.23

RAS MACHUISI 5 57 S 38 59 E 5.24

RAS MASANGAMKUU 10 12 S 40 14 E 4.5

RAS MASONI 6 25 S 39 25 E 5.11

RAS MATUNDA 10 21 S 40 27 E 4.3

RAS MATUSO 8 55 S 39 33 E 4.14

RAS MBANURA 9 55 S 39 47 E 4.9

RAS MBEMKURU 9 27 S 39 39 E 4.13

RAS MBISI 7 49 S 39 43 E 4.25

RAS MBWENI 6 12 S 39 12 E 5.12

RAS MICHAMVI 6 07 S 39 30 E 5.9

RAS MITU MITU 2 09 S 41 06 E 6.30

RAS MKITA 6 19 S 39 18 E 5.12

RAS MKUMBI 7 38 S 39 54 E 4.24

RAS MKYA 10 07 S 39 59 E 4.8

RAS MOMBI 9 16 S 39 39 E 4.13

RAS MWANA 2 34 S 40 36 E 6.25

RAS MWANDA 5 53 S 39 13 E 5.19

RAS NGOMENI 2 59 S 40 14 E 6.24

RAS NGUMBE SUKANI 9 10 S 39 38 E 4.13

RAS NUNGE 6 24 S 38 54 E 5.23

RAS NUNGWI 5 43 S 39 18 E 5.18

RAS NYAMAKU 5 07 S 39 08 E 6.11

RAS OGADEN 0 27 S 42 29 E 6.34

RAS PEMBAMNASI 7 09 S 39 32 E 4.31

RAS POMBWE 8 17 S 39 19 E 4.18

RAS RASHID 4 37 S 39 24 E 6.14

RAS ROCUMBI 9 42 S 39 45 E 4.12

RAS RUVURA 10 18 S 40 24 E 4.4

RAS SAMANGA FUNGU 8 25 S 39 19 E 4.18

RAS SHANGANI 6 10 S 39 11 E 5.16

RAS SHUKA 9 59 S 39 49 E 4.9

RAS SIF 2 01 N 45 20 E 7.9

RAS SIMBA URANGA 7 38 S 39 20 E 4.30

RAS TENEWI 2 27 S 40 46 E 6.26

RAS TIKWIRI 8 49 S 39 29 E 4.16

RAS TUNDAUA 5 15 S 39 41 E 6.7

RAS TWANA 7 48 S 39 27 E 4.20

RAS UKENJWI 5 02 S 39 40 E 6.9

RAS UPEMBE 5 28 S 39 43 E 6.3

RAS USO WA MEMBE 5 54 S 39 12 E 5.17

RAS WASIN 4 39 S 39 24 E 6.14

RASSI DOUAMOUGNO 12 39 S 45 06 E 9.44

RAT ISLAND 4 40 S 55 32 E 8.8

RECIF CROISSANT 18 22 S 43 55 E 12.5

RECIF ISLAND 4 35 S 55 46 E 8.7

RECIF MORRISSON 21 48 S 43 12 E 12.12

RECIF VAILHEU 11 49 S 43 02 E 9.32

RECIFS DE L'ETOILE 25 21 S 44 18 E 12.19

RED MOUNT 12 48 S 45 06 E 9.47

RED SAND CLIFF 27 43 S 32 37 E 2.31

REEF POINT 32 51 S 28 07 E 2.12

REMIRE ISLAND 5 07 S 53 19 E 8.21

REMIRE REEF 5 05 S 53 21 E 8.21

RENOMMEE ROCK 4 27 S 55 51 E 8.17
218 Index—Gazetteer

Pub. 171

Position

° ' ° '

Position

° ' ° '

Sec.

Para

Sec.

Para

REQUIN BANK 4 34 S 55 22 E 8.5

RICHARDS BAY 28 48 S 32 05 E 2.27

RIETPUNT 33 34 S 27 01 E 2.9

RIO BAZAR 18 25 S 36 38 E 3.1

RIO BUZI 19 53 S 34 46 E 3.11

RIO CHINDE 18 34 S 36 29 E 3.12

RIO DOS BONS SINAIS 18 03 S 36 59 E 1.1

RIO LIMPOPO 25 13 S 33 31 E 2.38

RIO LINDE 18 12 S 36 50 E 3.14

RIO MAZEMBA 17 19 S 38 03 E 3.19

RIO MILAMBE 18 55 S 36 04 E 3.12

RIO MOEBAZE 17 05 S 38 41 E 3.22

RIO MURRIOZE 15 51 S 40 14 E 3.30

RIO NAMANE 17 08 S 38 31 E 3.21

RIO SANGAGE 15 58 S 40 08 E 3.29

RIVIERE FARAONY 21 48 S 48 10 E 10.36

RIVIERE MANABBO MATY 17 36 S 43 56 E 12.6

RIVIERE MANAMBOLO 19 03 S 44 15 E 12.8

RIVIERE MANANIVO 23 13 S 47 44 E 10.39

RIVIERE MANINGORY 17 12 S 49 28 E 10.28

RIVIERE MANOMBO 22 58 S 43 28 E 12.15

RIVIERE MASIANAKA 23 34 S 47 37 E 10.40

RIVIERE MORONDAVA 20 20 S 44 15 E 12.8

RIVIERE TSIRIBIHINA 19 48 S 44 24 E 12.9

RIY BANK 34 00 S 25 53 E 2.2

ROBERTS BANK 4 22 S 54 12 E 8.20

ROCHA ULUE 26 16 S 32 57 E 2.34

ROCHE ANDRE 49 40 S 69 14 E 13.29

ROCHE DU CHENAL 49 08 S 69 45 E 13.17

ROCHE ITAPERINA 25 00 S 47 06 E 10.42

ROCHE TSIOUMARO 24 51 S 47 10 E 10.42

ROCKY BANK 34 25 S 18 36 E 1.2

ROCKY POINT 20 03 S 57 32 E 9.11

RODRIGUES 19 42 S 63 25 E 9.18

ROMAN ROCKS 34 11 S 18 27 E 1.5

ROUND ISLAND 4 21 S 55 47 E 8.14

ROUND ISLET 19 51 S 57 47 E 9.10

RUVUMA BAY 10 25 S 40 27 E 4.3

S

SABLE OIL FIELD 35 12 S 21 19 E 1.14

SAIL ROCKS 12 21 S 43 40 E 9.36

SAINT 9.6

SAINT ANNE ISLAND 4 36 S 55 30 E 8.8

SAINT JOSEPH ISLAND 5 26 S 53 21 E 8.22

SAINT SEBASTIAN POINT 34 26 S 20 52 E 1.16

SAINT-DENIS 20 52 S 55 28 E 9.4

SAINT-LAZARUS BANK 12 08 S 41 22 E 3.47

SAINT-PIERRE 21 20 S 55 29 E 9.6

SALIM BANK 7 52 S 39 38 E 4.25

SALOMON ISLANDS 5 22 S 72 13 E 8.29

SAMBAVA 14 15 S 50 12 E 10.11

SAMBIRANO PEAK 14 02 S 50 01 E 10.11

SANDBERG 34 48 S 19 58 E 1.13

SANDY POINT 34 39 S 19 27 E 1.12

SANGARUNGU HAVEN 9 01 S 39 34 E 4.14

SAVANE 19 39 S 35 08 E 3.12

SEAGULL SHOAL 6 05 S 39 11 E 5.15

SEAL ISLAND 34 08 S 18 35 E 1.7

SEAL POINT 34 13 S 24 50 E 1.25

SECCA DAFNE 3 58 N 47 35 E 7.13

SEEKOEIPUNT 34 05 S 24 55 E 1.28

SEFO 7 50 S 39 34 E 4.28

SERANANA 13 05 S 48 50 E 11.8

SERPENT ISLET 19 49 S 57 48 E 9.10

SEYCHELLES ISLANDS 4 29 S 55 32 E 8.2

SEZELA 30 24 S 30 41 E 2.19

SHANGANI, MWAMBA 10 13 S 40 12 E 4.5

SHIP SHOAL 4 39 S 39 27 E 6.14

SHIPS COVE 46 51 S 37 50 E 13.2

SHIVALA CLIFFS 22 45 S 35 30 E 3.4

SHUNGUMBILI ISLAND 7 42 S 39 41 E 4.29

SILHOUETTE ISLAND 4 30 S 55 14 E 8.12

SIMAMBAYA ISLAND 1 52 S 41 25 E 6.33

SIMAYA ISLAND 8 18 S 39 26 E 4.18

SIMBA 3 44 S 39 41 E 6.18

SIMBA URANGA MOUTH 7 46 S 39 22 E 4.20

SIMONS BAY 34 11 S 18 26 E 1.5

SIMONSBAAI 34 11 S 18 26 E 1.6

SINGINO HILL 8 48 S 39 23 E 4.16

SISOA BOUZI 12 49 S 45 14 E 9.45

SIX MILE BANK 34 55 S 19 54 E 1.13

SLANGKOPPUNT 34 09 S 18 19 E 1.2

SOAHAZO 19 20 S 44 24 E 12.8

SOFALA RIVER 20 10 S 34 45 E 3.1

SOLGLIMT BLINDERS 40 51 S 37 52 E 13.2

SOMMET ANTSATRAMAHAVECON 14 29 S 47 48 E 11.23

SOMMET CHEMINEE 49 12 S 70 00 E 13.21

SOMMET EVATRA 24 58 S 47 06 E 10.42

SOMMET TIRAILLEUSE 12 06 S 49 13 E 11.4

SONGA MNARA ISLAND 9 04 S 39 35 E 4.14

SONGO SONGO ISLAND 8 31 S 39 30 E 4.19

SORDWANA POINT 27 26 S 32 43 E 2.33

SORDWANA ROAD 27 33 S 32 43 E 2.32

SOUTH EAST ISLAND 4 41 S 55 32 E 8.6

SOUTH MAFIA CHANNEL 8 11 S 39 39 E 4.27

SOUTH SAND BLUFF 31 19 S 29 29 E 2.17

SPEAKERS BANK 4 55 S 72 20 E 8.28

SPHINX PEAK 33 48 S 25 05 E 1.27

ST. LUCIA BAY 28 23 S 32 26 E 2.29

ST. PIERRE ISLAND 9 19 S 50 43 E 9.27

STILLBAAI 34 23 S 21 26 E 1.17

STORK PATCH 4 43 S 55 25 E 8.4

STRAND 34 07 S 18 49 E 1.7

STRUIS POINT 34 41 S 20 14 E 1.15

STRUISPUNT 34 41 S 20 14 E 1.15

STRUYSPUNT 34 41 S 20 14 E 1.15

SUKUTI REEF 7 15 S 39 29 E 4.31

SWAN SHOAL 3 59 S 54 34 E 8.20

SWARTKLIP 34 04 S 18 41 E 1.7

T

TAMBARE 6 17 S 39 04 E 5.13

TAMBOHORANO 17 30 S 43 57 E 12.5

TANGA 5 05 S 39 07 E 6.12

TANGILA 4 09 S 39 35 E 6.17

TANGLIA 4 09 S 39 35 E 6.16

TANJON ANDAVAKA 25 12 S 46 39 E 10.44

TANJON ANKARANA 20 29 S 44 09 E 12.10

TANJON' ANTSIRAKOSY 15 16 S 50 29 E 10.15

TANJON'I BOBAOMBY 11 57 S 49 16 E 10.2

TANJON'I MASOALA 15 59 S 50 14 E 10.16

TANJON'I VOHIMENA 25 35 S 45 08 E 10.46

TANJONA 13 03 S 49 55 E 10.8

TANJONA ANDEFITRA 21 57 S 43 16 E 12.13

TANJONA BELAO 16 14 S 49 51 E 10.21

TANJONA MANAMBATO 13 13 S 49 56 E 10.8

TANJONA TSIHANANINA 14 57 S 50 19 E 10.14

TENEWI YA JUU 2 28 S 40 48 E 6.26

THE POUCE 20 12 S 57 31 E 9.12

THREE BROTHERS 6 09 S 71 31 E 8.32

THUMB PEAK 33 51 S 23 37 E 1.25

TOAMASINA 18 10 S 49 25 E 10.31

TOLIARA 23 22 S 43 40 E 12.16

TOMBEE DE MAROTAOLANA 14 43 S 47 44 E 11.23

TONJONA KIMBY 18 53 S 44 15 E 12.8

TOPAZE BANK 4 41 S 56 20 E 8.19

TORAKA ANTETEZANA 17 49 S 49 33 E 10.30

TORAKA FRY 17 12 S 49 35 E 10.27

TORAKA IFONTSY 17 53 S 49 32 E 10.31

TORAKA LAPEROUSE 17 23 S 49 40 E 10.28

TORAKA TOURMALINE 18 39 S 49 19 E 10.32

TORAKA VAUDREIL 19 30 S 48 56 E 10.33

TRANSVAAL COVE 46 52 S 37 51 E 13.2

TROIS FRERES 4 38 S 55 26 E 8.3

TROMPEUSE ROCKS 4 23 S 55 36 E 8.15

TSITSIKAMA POINT 34 10 S 24 30 E 1.25

TUGELA BLUFF 29 14 S 31 30 E 2.25

TULEAR 23 22 S 43 40 E 12.17

TUMBATU ISLAND 5 49 S 39 13 E 5.17

TUTIA 8 07 S 39 39 E 4.22

U

UARSCIECH 2 18 N 45 48 E 7.11

UDOE HILL 6 10 S 38 35 E 5.23

UKATANI REEF 6 35 S 39 11 E 5.22

UMGENI RIVER 29 49 S 31 02 E 2.24

UMHLANGA ROCKS LIGHT 29 44 S 31 05 E 2.24
Index—Gazetteer 219

Pub. 171

Position

° ' ° '

Position

° ' ° '

Sec.

Para

Sec.

Para

UMKOMAAS RIVER 30 12 S 30 48 E 2.20

UMZUMBE RIVER 30 37 S 30 33 E 2.19

UNGAMA BAY 2 45 S 40 20 E 6.24

V

VATOMANDRY 19 20 S 49 00 E 10.32

VEDETTE HILL 28 57 S 31 44 E 2.25

VICTORIA BAY 34 00 S 22 33 E 1.20

VICTORY BANK 5 32 S 72 14 E 8.30

VIDAL BANK 2 18 S 41 04 E 6.28

VILA DO CHINDE 18 32 S 36 30 E 3.13

VILHENA LIGHT 18 06 S 36 55 E 3.14

VISHOEKBAAI 34 08 S 18 26 E 1.7

VOHEMAR 13 21 S 50 00 E 10.9

VULTURE ROCK 16 13 S 44 20 E 12.4

W

WALKER BAY 34 30 S 19 17 E 1.10

WALKER POINT 34 06 S 22 59 E 1.21

WALTERS SHOALS 33 12 S 43 55 E 10.46

WAMI PATCHES 6 06 S 38 56 E 5.23

WARSHIIKH 2 26 N 46 01 E 7.11

WASIN ISLAND 4 40 S 39 22 E 6.14

WATERFALL BLUFF 31 26 S 29 48 E 2.16

WEST NORTH ISLAND 9 39 S 47 34 E 9.24

WETE 5 04 S 39 43 E 6.9

WHALE ROCK 19 59 S 57 33 E 9.11

WHALE ROCK POINT 31 56 S 29 13 E 2.13

WHITTLE ROCK 34 15 S 18 34 E 1.4

WIMBI REEFS 4 32 S 39 30 E 6.15

WITELSBOS 33 58 S 24 06 E 1.25

WIZARD ISLAND 9 44 S 47 39 E 9.23

WOODY CAPE 33 46 S 26 20 E 2.2

WUMI 7 45 S 39 36 E 4.29

Y

YAMBE ISLAND 5 07 S 39 10 E 6.11

YAMBWA NGOME 6 00 S 39 07 E 5.15

YORK SHOAL 34 09 S 18 36 E 1.7

YSTERVARKPUNT 34 24 S 21 44 E 1.17

Z

ZANZIBAR HARBOR 6 10 S 39 11 E 5.16

ZANZIBAR ISLAND 6 07 S 39 21 E 5.8

ZOROASTER SHOAL 5 00 S 56 40 E 8.19